D0200008 MX2700_SERVICE MANUAL MX2700 SERVICE
User Manual: MX2700_SERVICE MANUAL
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .Page Count: 428
SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMX2700/S1E
DIGITAL FULL COLOR
MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
MODEL
MX-2300/2700 G
MX-2300/2700 N
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
● DETAILS OF EACH SECTION
[2]
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
[B] OPERATION PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
[3]
CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
[C] SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
[4]
UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION
[D] MANUAL PAPER FEED
SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
* For how to unpacking and installation,
refer to the installation manual
(00ZMX2700/I1E).
[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
[E] TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION . . . .E-1
[F]
PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION . . .F-1
[5]
EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL
STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
[6]
ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[H] LSU SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
[7]
SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[i]
PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION. . . i-1
[8]
SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE
CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
[J]
TONER SUPPLY SECTION . . . . . . . J-1
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[L]
[9]
[10] ROM VERSION-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . 11-1
[12] OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
[G] DUPLEX SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
[K] DEVELOPING SECTION . . . . . . . . .K-1
TRANSFER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . L-1
[M] PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR,
REGISTRATION SENSOR
SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-1
[N] FUSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1
[O] PAPER EXIT SECTION . . . . . . . . . O-1
[P] DRIVE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P-1
[Q] PWB SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-1
[R] FAN AND FILTER SECTION . . . . . R-1
[S] SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION . . . . .S-1
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
SHARP CORPORATION
This document has been published to be used
for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING
[E]
TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . E-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-3
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-8
[F]
PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . .
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1. Precautions for servicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
3. Note for installing site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
[1]
PRODUCT OUTLINE
1. Product features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
2. Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
[2]
SPECIFICATIONS
1. Basic specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
2. Functional specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
3. Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
F-1
F-2
F-2
F-4
[G]
DUPLEX SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . G-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-6
[H]
LSU SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . H-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-2
[i]
PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . . i-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-3
[3]
CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Supply system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
3. Production number identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
[4]
UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION
* For how to unpacking and installation,
refer to the installation manual (00ZMX2700/I1E).
[5]
EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
1. Identification of each section and functions . . . . . . . .5-1
[6]
ADJUSTMENTS
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
2. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
3. Details of adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
[J]
SIMULATION
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
2. List of simulation codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
3. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9
TONER SUPPLY SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . J-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-2
3. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-3
[K]
DEVELOPING SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . K-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-5
[L]
TRANSFER SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . .
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[7]
[8]
[9]
SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE
1. Self diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
2. Trouble code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4
3. Details of trouble code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-8
MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-1
2. Details of maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3
3. Other related items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
[10] ROM VERSION-UP
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1
2. Version-up procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1
[11]
ELECTRICAL SECTION
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
2. Actual wiring chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
3. Signal list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30
[M]
PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR, REGISTRATION
SENSOR SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . M-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-1
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-3
[N]
FUSING SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . N-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-3
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-7
[O]
PAPER EXIT SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . O-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-5
[P]
DRIVE SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1
2. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-6
[12] OTHERS
1. System settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
2. Paper JAM code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-6
● DETAILS OF EACH SECTION
[A]
EXTERNAL OUTFIT
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
[B]
OPERATION PANEL
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . B-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
[C]
[D]
L-1
L-2
L-3
L-9
SCANNER SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . .
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1
C-2
C-3
C-7
[Q]
PWB SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-1
[R]
MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . .
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FAN AND FILTER SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-1
2. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-3
D-1
D-2
D-2
D-7
[S]
SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1
NOTE FOR SERVICING
MX2700N
• Gas tube
Service
Manual
• Lightning conductor
This Service Manual uses some symbols to assure safe operation.
• A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
grounding object by the authorities.
This Service Manual uses some symbols to assure safe operation.
Please understand the meanings of photographs before servicing.
• Grounding wire for telephone line
5)
WARNING: If this WARNING should be ignored, a serious
danger to life or a serious injury could result.
CAUTION: If this CAUTION should be ignored, an injury or
a damage to properties could result.
Do not damage, break, or work the power cord.
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not bend it
forcibly or do not pull it extremely.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
6)
Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
1. Precautions for servicing
1)
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable,
the network cable, and the telephone line from the machine,
except when performing the communication test, etc.
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
2)
7)
Do not put a receptacle with water in it or a metal piece which
may drop inside the machine.
8)
With wet or oily hands, do not touch the power plug, do not
insert the telephone line jack, do not operate the machine, or
do not perform servicing.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use an
extreme care when servicing.
It may cause an electric shock.
It may cause a burn.
3)
There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may
cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing.
3. Note for installing site
4)
Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective
material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path.
Do not install the machine at the following sites.
1)
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams.
5)
When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to
squeeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other
driving sections.
6)
Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled.
Paper may get damp and form dews inside the machine, causing paper jam or copy dirt.
For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
described later.
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch
inside the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or
an injury.
7)
Place of high temperature, high humidity, low temperature, low humidity, place under an extreme change in temperature and humidity.
When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink
excessively. Do not get them in the eyes.
If toner, developer, or ink enters you eyes, wash it away with
water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary.
8)
The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to
damage fingers when servicing.
9)
Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise,
toner may pop and burn you.
2)
Place of much vibrations
It may cause a breakdown.
10) When replacing the lithium battery of the PWB, use a specified
one only.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may be broken,
causing breakdown or malfunction of the machine.
11) When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to
it, be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may cause a breakdown or malfunctions.
2. Warning for servicing
1)
Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that
meets the specified voltage and current requirements.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric
shock.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
2)
If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal
smell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
3)
Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage
occurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may
result.
3)
Poorly ventilated place
An electro-static type copier will produce ozone inside it.
The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so
as not to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of
such a machine may produce a smell of ozone. Install the
machine in a well ventilated place, and ventilate occasionally.
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening,
grounding must be made.
4)
When connecting the grounding wire, never connect it to the
following points.
It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.
MX-2300/2700 N/G NOTE FOR SERVICING - i
4)
Place of direct sunlight.
Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may
undergo qualitative change.
It may cause a breakdown or copy dirt.
5)
Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium
The organic photoconductor (OPC) drum used in the machine
may undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as
ammonium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier may result
in dirt copy.
6)
Place of much dust
When dusts enter the machine, it may cause a breakdown or
copy dirt.
7)
Place near a wall
Some machine require intake and exhaust of air.
If intake and exhaust of air are not properly performed, copy
dirt or a breakdown may be resulted.
30 cm
30 cm
8)
45 cm
Unstable or slant surface
If the machine drops or fall down, it may cause an injury or a
breakdown.
If there are optional paper desk and the copier desk specified,
it is recommendable to use them.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and
lock the casters.
MX-2300/2700 N/G NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
MX2700N
• The user
authentication
Service
Manual
system by a login name, a password, and an e-mail address is employed to prevent against
unauthorized use of a third party and to limit the use quantity
and usable functions for each user group. In addition, the
user authentication by the optional IC card read/writer may
be used.
1. Product features
A. Features
(1)
1)
2)
Features
The employment of newly developed toner reduces the toner
consumption remarkably, realizing high fidelity pictures of
human skin, half tone, and hair. In addition, the employment of
"Auto Color" function, Sharp's unique auto recognition function, reproduces documents of difficult reproduction.
The power consumption for FAX standby with the power OFF
is 1W or less, reducing energy expenses of nighttime and load
to the environment.
5)
The open systems architecture (Sharp OSA) is supported
which provides application development environment according to user's needs.
6)
Compact area for installation even to a space for a monochrome machine
The machine can be installed to a space for a monochrome
machine, the smallest space in the class of 620mm (W) x
670mm (D), helping backup of color documentations in an
office. The installation of the optional finisher (MX-FNX1)
which is stored in the center paper exit section of the machine
allows stapling and finishing such as punch holes automatically, improving the work efficiency.
3)
Extension of the lifetime of the OPC drums together with the
frequency of maintenance realizes resource saving.
4)
The unique security system inhibits unauthorized use of the
machine, preventing against leak of information.
• The electronic data are encrypted and saved in the hard
disk. When copying or printing or when sending FAX or
scanning, data are automatically erased to protect against
leak of important information.
(2)
Environmental features
• Energy saving design by pre-heat mode/auto power shut-off
mode.
• Conforms to the International EnergyStar program.
• Conforms to the standards of Law on Promoting Green Purchasing.
• Conforms to the Europe RoHS regulations.
(The contents of lead, mercury, hexavalent chromium, cadmium,
PBB [polybrominated biphenyl], PBDE [polybrominated diphenyl
ether] are limited to the regulated level or less.)
MX-2300/2700 N/G PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 1
1 : Dec. 15 2005
2. Configuration
A. Lineup (Main unit and option)
30. Device Tray with
USB Hub (MX-RKX1) 1. Reversing single pass feeder
(MX-RPX1)
12. Staple cartridge
(Approx. 5000 x 3) 9. Finisher
(MX-FNX1)
(MX-SCX1)
SPLC-c
driver
PCL5c/PCL6 Network
scanner
driver
(Sharpdesk 1 license)
10. Punch module
● 2-hole (MX-PNX1A)
● 3-hole (MX-PNX1B)
● 4-hole (MX-PNX1C)
● 4-hole (broad space)
(MX-PNX1D)
7. Paper pass unit
(MX-RBX1)
8. Saddle stitch finisher
(MX-FNX2)
14. Barcode font kit
CD
HDD
HDD
13. Staple cartridge
(Approx. 5000 x 3)
(AR-SC2)
11. Punch module
● 2-hole (AR-PN1A)
● 3-hole (AR-PN1B)
● 4-hole (AR-PN1C)
● 4-hole (broad space)
(AR-PN1D)
2. Document cover
(MX-VRX1)
RSPF
6. Exit tray unit
(MX-TRX1)
Copier/Printer (PCL)
/Scanner model
Copier/Printer (SPLC-c)
model
(MX-2300N)
(MX-2700N)
(MX-2300G)
(MX-2700G)
3. Stand/1x500 sheet
paper drawer
(MX-DEX1)
17. Printer
expansion kit
(PCL)
4. Stand/2x500 sheet
paper drawer
(MX-DEX2)
18. Network
scanner
expansion kit
1
19. PS3
expansion
kit
CD
(MX-PBX1)
CD
(MX-PKX1)
(For MX-2300G/2700G)
Data security kit
CD
(MX-NSX1)
(Including document control)
Security
ROM
29. Facsimile expansion kit
(MX-FXX1)
ROM
(AR-PF1)
16. CC authentication
version
5. Large capacity tray
(MX-LCX1)
20. Internet Fax
expansion kit
15. Commercial
version
21. Sharpdesk
1 license kit
22. Sharpdesk
5 license kit
FAX memory (8MB)
(packed together)
23. Sharpdesk
10 license kit
24. Sharpdesk
50 license kit
Security
ROM
CD
(MX-FWX1)
For document
control PWB
For document
control PWB
(MX-FRX1)
(MX-FRX1U)
CD
CD
(MX-USX1/
USX5)
(MX-US10/
US50)
25. Sharpdesk
100 license kit
27. Application
communication
module
28. External
account module
CD
CD
CD
CD
(MX-AMX1)
(MX-USA0)
(MX-AMX2)
26. Application
integration
module
31. 256MB expansion memory board
(MX-SMX1)
(For MX-2300G/2700G)
MX-2300/2700 N/G PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 2
(MX-AMX3)
B. Machine configuration
MX-2300G
Copier memory (Local memory) (MB)
Printer memory (System memory) (MB)
Copier
GDI printer
PCL printer
PS printer
EFI printer
Main body LCD
FAX
Scanner
Filing
HDD
RSPF
OC
Automatic duplex
Security
Internet Fax
MX-2300N
MX-2700G
MX-2700N
768
384
640
384
640
STD
STD
OP*3
OP *3
OP
OP
STD
–
STD
STD
OP*3
–
STD
OP*1
–
MONOCHROME HVGA 8.1"
OP*4
–
OP *3
STD
STD
STD
OP
–
OP
STD
OP*2
OP*3
STD
STD
–
STD: Standard provision, OP: Option
OP*1: Product key target. When PS is used, PCL function must be available. OP*2: Product key target.
OP*3: Product key target. To use this function, the printer memory (system memory) must be expanded to 640MB.
STD*4: No support for some areas.
C. Combination of options list
Section
Automatic document feeder
OC
Paper feed system
Paper exit system
Name
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Electrical system (Software)
Electrical system (FAX)
Electrical system
(USB systems)
Electrical system and others
MX-RPX1
MX-VRX1
MX-DEX1
MX-DEX2
MX-LCX1
MX-TRX1
MX-RBX1
MX-FNX2
MX-FNX1
MX-PNX1 A/B/C/D
AR-PN1 A/B/C/D
MX-2300G
MX-2700G
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
MX-2300N
MX-2700N
STD
N/A
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
Reversing single pass feeder
Document cover
Stand/1x500 sheet paper drawer
Stand/2x500 sheet paper drawer
Large capacity tray
Exit tray unit
Paper pass unit
Saddle stitch finisher
Finisher
Punch module (For inner finisher)
Punch module
(For saddle stitch finisher)
Staple cartridge (For inner finisher)
Staple cartridge
(For saddle stitch finisher)
Barcode font kit
Data security kit
Data security kit
Printer expansion kit
Network scanner expansion kit
PS3 expansion kit
Internet Fax expansion kit
Sharpdesk 1 license kit
Sharpdesk 5 license kit
Sharpdesk 10 license kit
Sharpdesk 50 license kit
Sharpdesk 100 license kit
Application integration module
Application communication module
External account module
Facsimile expansion kit
Device Tray with USB Hub
AR-PF1
MX-FRX1U
MX-FRX1
MX-PBX1
MX-NSX1
MX-PKX1
MX-FWX1
MX-USX1
MX-USX5
MX-US10
MX-US50
MX-USA0
MX-AMX1
MX-AMX2
MX-AMX3
MX-FXX1
MX-RKX1
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT*1
OPT*1
OPT*2
OPT*1
OPT
OPT*3
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT*4
OPT
OPT
OPT*5
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
STD
STD
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT*3
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT*4
OPT
OPT
OPT*5
OPT
31.
256MB expansion memory board
MX-SMX1
OPT
N/A
12.
13.
Electrical system (ROM)
Model name
MX-SCX1
AR-SC2
Remarks
(A4)
(Inner finisher)
(Common in current models)
(Approx. 5000 x 3)
(Approx. 5000 x 3)
(Conventional model)
(Commercial version)
(Authentication version)
(PCL)
(Internet Fax)
STD: Standard provision. OPT: Installable option. Commercially available parts: Use the specified parts, recommended parts, or parts the operations of which have been confirmed. –: Cannot be connected.
*1: Memory expansion is required. (256MB). *2: Printer expansion (PCL) and memory expansion are required.
*3:Installation of the MX-NSX1 or the MX-AMX1 is required. *4: Installation of the MX-NSX1 and expansion of memory (256MB) are required.
*5: No support for some areas.
MX-2300/2700 N/G PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 – 3
MX2700N
[2]
SPECIFICATIONS
(4)
ShifterManual
Service
Type
Paper weight
Paper size
1. Basic specifications
A. Base engine
(1)
Type
Type
Color support
(2)
Desk-top
Full color
Engine speed
Productivity
(A4, 8.5x11)
a. Tray1 – 4 (Main unit), LCC
Paper size
A3, 11 x 17, 8K
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13
A4, B5, 8.5 x 11, 16K
A4R, B5R, A5R, 8.5 x 11R,
7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R, 16KR
Extra
MX-2700G/N
B/W
Color
14
14
16
16
27
27
19
19
13
13
MX-2300G/N
B/W
Color
12
12
14
14
23
23
16
16
11
11
b. Manual (Main unit)
Paper size
A3, 11 x 17, 8K
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13
A4, 8.5 x 11, 16K
B5
A4R, 16KR
8.5 x 11R
B5R, 7.25 x 10.5R
A5R, 5.5 x 8.5R
12 x 18
OHP(A4, 8.5 x 11)
OHP(A4R, 8.5 x 11R)
Extra
Envelope
Heavy paper (B5, A4, A5R, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 5.5R, 16K)
Heavy paper (Postcard HIGH)*1
Heavy paper (Postcard LOW)*1
Heavy paper (Other sizes)
MX-2700G/N
B/W
Color
14
11
16
12
23
21
23
23
19
14
19
15
19
16
19
19
13
11
11
10
9
7
13
11
13
13
11
10
11
7
7
10
7
5
MX-2300G/N
B/W
Color
12
11
14
12
23
21
23
23
16
14
16
15
13
13
19
19
11
11
11
10
9
7
11
11
11
11
11
10
11
7
7
10
7
5
*1: Switched by the service simulation setting
(3)
Shifter
55 – 209g/m2 (17 – 56 lbs)
Non offset
A3, B4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, Postcard, 8K,
mode
16K, 16KR,11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13,
(Normal
8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R,
output)
5.5 x 8.5R, Envelope, Extra
Offset
A3, B4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, Postcard, 8K,
mode
16K, 16KR, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13,
8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x
8.5R (Not Envelope, Extra)
Non-offset
MX-2300G/N B/W
23cpm
(Normal
Color
23cpm
output)
MX-2700G/N B/W
27cpm
Color
27cpm
Offset
MX-2300G/N B/W
23cpm
mode
Color
23cpm
MX-2700G/N B/W
27cpm
Color
27cpm
30mm
Horizontal
Vertical
Between
direction
direction
Jobs
Non-offset
Not drop from
the tray.
Offset
Within 50mm
Within
Min.10mm
mode
±10mm
Copying method
Developing system
Charging system
Transfer system
Cleaning system
Fusing system
Waste toner disposal
(5)
OPC (Drum diameter: Black; φ30mm, Color;
φ30mm x 3)
Electronic photo (Laser)
Dry-type dual-component magnetic brush
development
Charged saw-tooth method
Intermediate transfer belt
Counter blade
Heat roller
No toner recycling system
Engine resolution
Resolution
Writing:
600 x 600dpi
1200 x 600dpi (Monochome printing only.)
* Rotation output not allowed at 1200dpi x 600dpi. PS
expansion kit needed.
None
Smoothing
function
Gradation
(6)
Pre-heat
80 sec or less
* The value may be increased if process-control
processing is being executed. Same as current model
Yes
Jam recovery time
With the door
open
(8)
Writing:
Monochrome: 2 levels (1bit) / Equivalent of 256 steps
Color: Each color 2 levels (1bit) / Each color 16 levels
(4bits) / Equivalent of 256 steps
Warmup
Warmup time
(7)
Engine composition
Photoconductor kind
Offset range
Range of error
(In using the
recommended
paper, A4/8.5
x 11)
Approx.
60 sec
Condition: After the door is kept open for 60
seconds, standard setting, the polygon
motor halt
Printable area
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5
7.25 x 10.5
Postcard
293 x 413mm
253 x 357mm
206 x 290mm
178 x 250mm
144 x 203mm
180 x 260mm
96 x 141mm
12 x 18 *
11 x 17
8.5 x 14
8.5 x 13
8.5 x 11
5.5 x 8.5
8K
16K
279 x 432mm
275 x 425mm
212 x 349mm
212 x 323mm
212 x 272mm
136 x 209mm
266 x 383mm
191 x 263mm
* The printable area for 12 x 18 must be as large as the A3/11 x 17
page dimension by PCL / PS driver.
(9)
Void area
Void area
Image loss
MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 1
Top: 4 mm or less
Bottom: 3 mm or less
FR Total: 4 mm or less
(10) Auto Color Selection
Read
Output
Count
Copy
Print
Scan
The decision -color N/A
The decision -color
or monochrome- is
or monochrome- is
decided when the
decided when the
document is
document is
scanned.
scanned.
The scanning
The scanning
speed for color is
speed for color is
always adopted.
always adopted.
N/A
For the output of a black-white original,
the decision to switch from color mode
to black-white mode is made when the
drum running distance shortens.
First copy (print):
If a fixed number of black-white pages
are contained in a series, switch from
color mode to black-white mode, starting
with the first page of the batch. If the
original starts with a black-white page,
the output will start in the black-white
mode.
From the second copy (print) on:
The condition is completely understood.
If there are a fixed number of blackwhite pages in a series, switch to the
black-white mode, starting with the first
page in the series.
Black-white count for the pages recognized as black-white.
Color count for the pages recognized as colored.
For N-UP, a page will be counted as a color page if there is at
least one colored page inserted upon N-UP.
(11) Power source
Voltage / Current
Frequency
Power source
code
Power switch
100V type
100 – 127V 12A
50/60Hz
Fixed type (direct)
200V type
220 – 240V 8A
Inlet type
2 switches (Primary switch: in the front cover;
Seconday switch: the operation panel)
(12) Power consumption
Maximum rated power
consumption
100V type
1.44kW
200V type
1.84kW
(16) Dimensions occupied by Machine (with Multi
Manual/Exit tray extended)
MX-2300G/MX-2700G
MX-2300N/MX-2700N
W1050 x D670mm (W41-22/64 x D26-3/8 inch)
B. Paper feed unit/Transport/Paper exit secton
(1)
Machine paper feed tray
Form
Feeding method
Heater (Engine part)
(2)
Paper feed tray 1/tray 2
Feeding method
Heater (Engine part)
Paper size
Changing of paper
size
Paper type setting
Default paper size
setting
Feedable paper
type/weight
Paper capacity
Paper Type
Paper size detection
(Size setting through
key input)
Detection of
Remaining Paper
(3)
Paper Size
(13) Noise
Standby
B/W
Color
B/W
: 63dB or less
: 63dB or less
: 55dB or less
(14) Dimensions
Outer dimensions
(W x D x H)
(with Multi
Manual)
Footprint (W x D)
MX-2300G/MX-2700G
620 x 670 x 795mm
(24 13/32 x 26 3/8 x
31 inch)
MX-2300N/MX-2700N
620 x 670 x 950mm
(24 13/32 x 26 3/8 x
37 26/64 inch)
590 x 670mm
(23 15/64 x 26 3/8 inch)
590 x 670mm
(23 15/64 x 26 3/8 inch)
MX-2300G/MX-2700G
Approx. 102kg (225lbs)
Approx. 106kg (234lbs)
MX-2300N/MX-2700N
Approx. 112kg (247lbs)
Approx. 116kg (256lbs)
Changing of
paper size
Paper type setting
Feedable paper
type/weight
Paper capacity
(15) Weight
Main unit
Main unit +
Developer +
Toner cartridge
Feeding from the upper section with front loading
Service parts
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K, 16KR
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R
Guide adjustment by users and size setting
through key input
Yes
(Tray 1)
Abroad-AB : A4
Abroad-inches : 8.5 x 11
(Tray 2)
Abroad-AB : A3
Abroad-inches : 11 x 17
Plain paper: 60-105g/m2 (16-28 lbs)
Standard paper: 500 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs)
Plain paper, pre-printed paper (not including
backing paper), recycled paper, letter head, prepunched paper, colored paper
* Users can set up all of these paper types.
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8.5 x 13
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5R,
7.25 x 10.5R, 8K, 16K, 16KR
Level detection (4 levels: 100%, 67%, 33%, and
none)
Manual feed tray (Bypass tray)
*1: Heater is OFF when power source ON.
In action
Standard: Double feeder tray + multi manual
Maximum: Fourfold feeder tray + multi manual +
large capacity feeder cassette
Feeding from the upper section with front loading
Service parts
Paper Type
MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 2
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K, 16KR
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x
11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R
Envelope (Monarch / Com-10 / DL / C5 / Rectangle 3 /
Western 2 / Western 4)
Extra Size (Tab paper is limited to A4; tab width
12mm-20mm / 8.5 x 11; tab width 6.1-17mm)
Guide adjustment by users
Yes
Thin paper: 55 – 59g/m 2 (15 – 16 lbs)
Plain paper: 60 – 105g/m2 (16 – 28 lbs)
Heavy Paper: 106 – 209g/m2 (28+ – 56 lbs)
Envelope: 75 – 90g/m2 (20 – 24 lbs)
OHP
Label paper
Tab paper
Gloss Paper
Standard paper: 100 sheets
Envelope: 20 sheets
OHP: 20 sheets
Heavy paper: 40 sheets
Tab paper: 20 sheets
Gloss paper: 20 sheets
Other special paper: 1 sheet
Plain paper, pre-printed paper (Excluding back print
paper), recycled paper, letter head, pre-punched
paper, colored paper, heavy paper, thin paper, label
paper, OHP, tab paper, envelope.
* Users can set up all of these paper types.
Paper size
detection
Auto Detect
Auto-AB
Auto Detect
Auto-Inch
For China
Detection of
remaining paper
(4)
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8.5 x
13, Postcard, 8.5 x 11, 11 x 17
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5R, 7.25 x 10.5R,
A3, B4, A4, B5
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11 x
17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8K, 16K
(7)
Reversing single pass feeder (MX-2300N/2700N)
Form
Scan speed
Copy
yes or no only
Double-sided
Fax
Method
Paper size
Non-Stack
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K, 16KR,
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R,
8.5 x 5.5R
Plain paper, pre-printed paper (not including
backing paper), recycled paper, letter head, prepunched paper, colored paper
Plain paper: 60-105g/m2 (16-28 lbs)
Paper type
Paper weight
(for duplex operation)
Logo paper support
(5)
Exit paper size/
type
Exit paper
detection
Exit tray full
detection
Shifting function
Rotation sort
(6)
For paper such as letterhead paper with frontback attributes, the engine control must be cared
for printing side.
Paper exit tray (Center tray)
Exit location/
method
Exit capacity
Scanner
Face down in the main unit
500 sheets (A4 or 8.5 x 11 (color recommended
paper))
All feedable paper except 12x18.
Internet
Fax
Document setup
direction
Document standard
location
Document transport
method
Document sizes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Paper exit tray unit (Right tray)
* Option (MX-TRX1)
Form
Transport standard
Ejecting location/
method
Tray capacity
Ejected paper size/
type
Full tray detection
Shifter
Dimensions
Weight
Installation/
maintenance
Optional detection
Packaged items
Exit tray unit
Center standard
External ejection from the right face of the main unit
/ face-down ejection
100 sheets (A4 or 8.5 x 11 (color recommended
paper))
Any feedable paper except envelope and tab paper.
Yes
No
W289 x D405 x H52mm
(W11-3/8 x D15-61/64 x H2-3/64 inch)
With tray extended: W419 x D405 x H52mm
(W16-1/2 x D15-61/64 x H2-3/64 inch)
Approx. 0.93kg (2lbs)
Installation by service personnel.
Setting by simulation (Sim. 26-1)
Exit tray, full actuator, installation advisory (in 6
languages)
Document
weights
1-side
2-side
Document carrying
capacity
Types of document
that may not be
transported
Paper detection
MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 3
RSPF (Reversing single pass feeder)
Monochrome
Color
(A4/8.5 x 11)
(A4/8.5 x 11)
1-sided: 27 sheets/minute 1-sided: 27 sheets/
(600 x 300dpi, 1bit)
minute (600 x
2-sided: 15 pages/minute 600dpi, 4bit)
(600 x 300dpi, 1bit)
2-sided: 12 pages/
minute (600 x
600dpi, 4bit)
1-sided: 48 sheets/minute N/A
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
2-sided: 15 pages/minute
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
1-sided: 48 sheets/minute 1-sided: 35 sheets/
minute (200 x
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
2-sided: 15 pages/minute 200dpi, 8bit) (when
(200 x 200dpi, 1bit)
in full color)
2-sided: 15 pages/
minute (200 x
200dpi, 8bit)
1-sided: 48 sheets/minute N/A
(200 x 200 dpi, 1bit)
2-sided: 15 pages/minute
(200 x 200 dpi, 1bit)
Upward standard (1toN feeding standard)
Center standard (Rear one-side standard for
random feeding)
Sheet-through method
Inch type-1
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 8.5 x 5.5, A4, A3
Inch type-2 11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 8.5 x 5.5, A4, A3
AB type-1
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5,
8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 14, 11 x 17
AB type-2
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5,
8.5 x 11, 216 x 330, 11 x 17
AB type-3
A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 8K, 16K,
16KR, 8.5 x 11, 216 x 330, 11 x 17
Long paper 800mm (Monochrome 2 levels
only)
Mixed feeding (same type / same width) possible
Random feeding (feeding of different types /
different widths)
Only the following combinations of 2 size types
are allowed: A3 and B4; B4 and A4R; A4 and B5;
B5 and A5; and 11-inch and 8.5-inch.
2-sided scanning is disabled during random
feeding.
* When mix feeding, random feeding, or manual
set of document size, scan speed is 16 pages/
minute (A4, 8.5 x 11)
Thin paper 35 – 49g/m2 (9 – 13 lbs)
* Thin paper mode is (18 pages/
minute (A4, 8.5 x 11) set up for
the thin paper.
Plain paper 50 – 128g/m2 (13 – 34 lbs)
50 – 105 g/m2 (13 – 28 lbs)
Maximum: 100 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs), or
Maximum: 13 mm, 1/2 inch or less
The following documents are NOT allowed:
OHP, second original drawing, tracing paper,
carbon paper, thermal paper, wrinkled / broken /
torn document, document with cuts and pastes,
documents printed by an ink ribbon, and
perforated document except 2-punched / 3punched (Perforated document by punch unit is
allowed.)
Yes
Paper detection size
Paper feeding
direction
Document inversion
Simultaneous doublesided scanning
Maintenance parts
Power source
Power consumption
Dimensions
Weight
Auto detection (Switching one type of detection
unit through system setting)
Inch-1
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A4, A3
Inch-2
11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5, A4, A3
AB-1
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5
x 11, 8.5 x 14, 11 x 17
AB-2
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 8.5
x 11, 216 x 330,
11 x 17
AB-3
A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 8K, 16K,
16KR, 8.5 x 11,
216 x 330, 11 x 17
Right hand feeding
Original cover
Scan Range
Original Cover
Standard
Location
Detection
Detection Size
Yes
Not allowed
Paper feed roller, pick-up roller, separation roller
Provided from the main unit
35.8W
W590 x D510 x H155 (mm)
W23-15/64 x D20-5/64 x H6-7/64 (inch)
Approx. 10kg (22.0lbs)
Heater
(Scanner part)
297 x 432mm
Left back as standard
Yes
Auto Detect (One type of detection unit to be switched
for software destination)
Inch
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
AB
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 x 330
8K, A4, A4R, A5, B4, 16K, 16KR
Service parts
D. Fuser section
(1)
Type
System
C. Scanner section
(1)
(2)
Heat roller attachment system
Resolution/Gradation (or Levels)
Scan
resolution (dpi)
Original
Cover
RSPF
Copy mode
Monochrome
Color
600 x 600dpi
600 x 600dpi
600 x 300dpi
(Default)
(Default)
600 x 600dpi
600 x 600dpi
600 x 300dpi
(Default)
(Default)
(Scanner)
100 x 100dpi / 200 x 200dpi / 300 x 300dpi
/ 400 x 400dpi / 600 x 600dpi
(Internet Fax)
200 x 100dpi (Half tone not allowed) /
200 x 200dpi / 200 x 400dpi /
400 x 400dpi / 600 x 600dpi
(FAX)
Standard (203.2 x 97.8dpi) (Half tone not
allowed) / Fine (203.2 x 195.6 dpi) /
Super fine (203.2 x 391dpi) /
Ultra fine (406.4 x 391 dpi)
200 x 100dpi / 200 x 200dpi / 200 x 400dpi
/ 400 x 400dpi
Transmission
resolution (dpi)
Image
process
Exposure lamp
Scan Levels
Output levels
PC-FAX/
PC-Internet
Fax
Network
75dpi / 100dpi / 150dpi / 200dpi / 300dpi /
TWAIN
400dpi / 600dpi or custom: 50-9600dpi
Xenon
10bits
FAX mode: 1bit
Internet Fax mode: 1bit
Scanner mode:
Black & White: 1bit
Gray Scale: 8bit
Full Color: Each color RGB 8bit
MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 4
2. Functional specifications
A. Specifications of copy functions
(1)
Copy speed (Continuous copy speed)
a. Tray 1 – 4, LCC
Model name
MX-2700G/N
Color / B/W
Print / Copy
Paper size
Magnification
Color
MX-2300G/N
B/W
Color
B/W
Print
Copy
Print
Copy
Print
Copy
Print
Copy
Normal
Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%)
Normal
Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%)
Normal
Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%)
Normal
Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%)
14
16
27
19
14
16
27
19
14
16
27
19
14
16
27
19
12
14
23
16
12
14
23
16
12
14
23
16
12
14
23
16
13
13
13
13
11
11
11
11
A3, 11 x 17, 8K
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13
A4, B5, 8.5 x 11, 16K
A4R, B5R,A5R, 8.5 x 11R,
7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R, 16KR
Extra
b. Manual feed
Model name
MX-2700G/N
Color / B/W
Print / Copy
Paper size
Magnification
Color
MX-2300G/N
B/W
Color
B/W
Print
Copy
Print
Copy
Print
Copy
Print
Copy
Normal
Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%)
Normal
Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%)
Normal
Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%)
Normal
Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%)
11
12
21
23
14
15
16
19
11
10
7
11
13
10
11
12
21
23
14
15
16
19
11
10
7
11
13
10
14
16
23
23
19
19
19
19
13
11
9
13
13
11
14
16
23
23
19
19
19
19
13
11
9
13
13
11
11
12
21
23
14
15
13
19
11
10
7
11
11
10
11
12
21
23
14
15
13
19
11
10
7
11
11
10
12
14
23
23
16
16
13
19
11
11
9
11
11
11
12
14
23
23
16
16
13
19
11
11
9
11
11
11
10
10
11
11
10
10
11
11
7
5
7
5
7
7
7
7
7
5
7
5
7
7
7
7
A3, 11 x 17, 8K
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13
A4, 8.5 x 11, 16K
B5
A4R, 16KR
8.5 x 11R
B5R, 7.25 x 10.5R
A5R, 5.5 x 8.5R
A3W, 12 x 18
OHP(A4, 8.5 x 11)
OHP(A4R, 8.5 x 11R)
Extra
Envelope
Heavy paper (B5, A4, A5R, 8.5 x
11, 8.5 x 5.5R, 16K)
Heavy paper (Postcard HIGH)
*1
Heavy paper (Postcard LOW) *1
Heavy paper (Other sizes)
*1: Switched by the service simulation setting
(2)
First copy time
Platen/RSPF
Platen
RSPF
b. BLI standard
B/W
6.3 sec
11.6 sec
Color
8.9 sec
16.9 sec
Copy
method
[Measuring Conditions]
* Feeding A4/8.5 x 11 (landscape) paper from the main unit tray 1
* No Auto Color Selection and No Auto Color for color
Job speed
S to S
D to D
MX-2700G/N
B/W
Color
(1bit)
(4bit)
24cpm
23cpm
(89%)
(85%)
21cpm
20cpm
(78%)
(74%)
21cpm
19cpm
(78%)
(70%)
MX-2300G/N
B/W
Color
(1bit)
(4bit)
20cpm
20cpm
(89%)
(85%)
19cpm
18cpm
(83%)
(78%)
19cpm
17cpm
(83%)
(74%)
* S to S: 10 pages of A4/8.5 x 11 document and 5 copies
* S to D: 10 pages of A4/8.5 x 11 document and 5 copies
a. Document changing speed (in copy mode)
MX-2700G/N
B/W
Color
27cpm
27cpm
(100%)
(100%)
S to S
S to D
* Polygon in rotation
(3)
Model name / Mode
MX-2300G/N
B/W
Color
23cpm
23cpm
(100%)
(100%)
* D to D: 10 pages (20 sides) of A4/8.5 x 11 document and 5 copies
* The copy speed in combination of the main unit and the auto
document feed user is defined.
* S to S: A4/8.5 x 11 document, 11 pages and 1 copy (not including
the first copy)
Monochrome: 600 x 300dpi and color: 600 x 600dpi (default)
MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 5
(10) Color Adjustment
c. Bertl standard
Model name / Mode
Copy
method
S to S
S to D
D to D
MX-2700G/N
B/W
Color
(1bit)
(4bit)
23cpm
21cpm
(84%)
(78%)
14cpm
12cpm
(52%)
(44%)
20cpm
19cpm
(74%)
(70%)
MX-2300G/N
B/W
Color
(1bit)
(4bit)
19cpm
18cpm
(84%)
(78%)
13cpm
11cpm
(57%)
(48%)
18cpm
17cpm
(78%)
(74%)
* S to S: 5 pages of A4/8.5 x 11 document and 5 copies
* S to D: 10 pages of A4/8.5 x 11 document and 1 copy
* D to D: 5 pages (10 sides) of A4/8.5 x 11 document and 5 copies
(4)
Continuous copy
Multi max. number
(5)
999 sheets
Copy document
Zoom
Preset
magnification ratio
XY zoom
Max. A3 (11 x 17)
Sheet/Book original
No
Yes
Yes
Allowed by system setting
Allowed by system setting (automatic-manual)
Automatic paper
selection
Automatic
magnification selection
Paper type select
Auto tray switching
Rotated copy
Normal:
Electronic sort
Rotated sort
1:1±0.8%
AB series:
25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%,
115%, 122%, 141%, 200%, 400%
Inch series: 25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%,
129% , 200%, 400%
25 – 400% (25 – 200% for RSPF)
4
Job reservation
Program call/
registration.
Preheat function
Auto power shutoff
Yes
Density, copy image quality processing
Exposure mode
Copy document
mode
Color emphasis
Manual steps
Toner save mode
(9)
Yes
Copy magnification ratio
Copy
magnification ratio
(8)
Function
600 x 600dpi
600 x 600dpi
Document
Document type
(7)
Yes
Yes
Yes
(11) Copy functions
Resolution
Scan resolution
Writing resolution
(6)
RGB adjustment
Color balance
Saturation
adjustment
Brightness
adjustment
Contrast
adjustment
Sharpness
adjustment
Background
removal
Auto color
calibration
Registration
adjustment
Automatic (Color: Auto Color, Black-white: Character
AE)
Text,Text/Printed Photo, Print photo, Text/Photo,
Photo, Map, Pale-color document.
Effective for Text, Text/Printed photo, Printed photo
mode.
Effective for Text, Text/Printed photo, Printed photo,
Text/Photo, Photo, Map mode.
9 steps
Monochrome: Yes
Color: Yes
Off on printed photo, photo or pale-color document
Color copy mode
Auto Color
Selection copy
Full color mode
2-color mode
Single color mode
Monochrome copy
mode
Copy mode automatically discerning color/
monochrome.
Enforced full color mode
Red-black mode (Change red point in document into
other color)
Mode to select black and another color from R/G/B/
C/M/Y
Mode to select one color from R/G/B/C/M/Y
Enforced monochrome copy mode
Special
function
User authentication
Process control
Tandem copy
Mixed document
feeder
Document paper size
input
Indeterminate paper
size input
2-sided copy direction
switch
Margin shift
Edge/center erase
Dual page copy
Cover/insertion
Tab paper insertion
OHP insertion
Tab copy
Centering
2in1/4in1
Pamphlet
Card shot
Book copy
Large capacity
document mode
Black-white Inversion
Multi-Page
Enlargement
Mirror image
Photo repeat
MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 6
Yes (Mixed/random size feeding
supported)
Yes
Yes
Type setting allowed
Yes
Yes
Large rotated copy exceeding A4
supported
Yes
No
Unavailable
Yes
Yes (The program name can be
registered.)
Yes
Conditions set up by system setting
Yes
Conditions set up by system setting
200
Yes
Yes
Yes (Random + MIX)
Yes (Determinate/indeterminate
size)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (Insertion only. Tab copy not
allowed. Staple/Punch not allowed.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes (Only black-white copy allowed/
color copy not allowed upon setup
Not ready)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Special
function
Date print
Character
Stamp
Page printing
Shading
Proof copy
Document Control
Yes (Colored allowed: Bk, C, M, Y)
Yes (Colored allowed: Bk, C, M, Y)
Yes (Colored allowed: Bk, C, M, Y)
Yes (Colored allowed: Bk, C, M, Y)
No
Yes
Yes (with Data Security Kit
equipped)
c. Image processing
Mode
Original scanning
color
Auto color selection
B. Image send function
(1)
Mode
Scanner
Internet
Fax
IP-FAX
(2)
Halftone
reproduction
Density adjustment
System environment
Scanner
Internet
Fax
(3)
Scan to e-mail
Scan to Desktop
Scan to FTP
Scan to Folder(SMB)
Scan to USB memory
Scan to e-mail with Meta
Scan to Desktop with Meta
Scan to FTP with Meta
Scan to SMB with Meta
Internet Fax to e-mail/FTP
Full mode supported (including Simple mode)
No
Copier memory
(Local memory)
768MB
(Standard)
768MB
(Standard)
Printer memory
(System Memory)
640MB (Expansion
required for G model)
640MB (Expansion
required for G model)
HDD (Standard)
Image send function (Push send from the main
unit)
Mode
Corresponding
server
/protocol
Scanner
SMTP
FTP(TCP/IP)
SMB
Internet Fax
POP server
SMTP server
ESMTP server
Scanner
Monochrome: TIFF, PDF,
Encrypted PDF
Color: Gray scale, color
TIFF, JPEG, PDF,
Encrypted PDF
[Monochrome]
• Non-compression
• G3 (1-dimensional)
= MH (Modified
Huffman)
• G4
= MMR (Modified MR)
[Color/Gray scale]
• JPEG (High, middle,
low)
Yes
Internet Fax
Monochrome TIFF-FX
(TIFF-F, TIFF-S)
b. Support image
Mode
File format
Compression
method
Specified pages per
size (number of
page(s)
specification
allowed)
MH, MMR
Internet Fax
B/W
[When Color start key
pressed.]
• Auto (When judged as
Color : Full color, When
judged as B/W : B/W (2
value)/Gray scale)
[When B/W start key]
• B/W (2 value)
• Gray scale
Equivalent of 256 steps
---
Auto + 5 steps
(The image quaity of
"Auto" is the same as that
of "Manual = 3" when
selecting full color/
grayscale.)
Black-white enabled
• Auto
• Manual
Auto + 5 steps
---
Color button enabled
When selecting "Auto":
• Text/printed photo
• Text/photo
• Text
Data saving
destination
HDD (Standard)
a. Support system
Scanner
Full color, grayscale, B/W
Selection of image
quality
When selecting "Manual":
• Text/printed photo
• Text/Photo
• Text
• Photo
• Printed photo
• Map
---
Half tone (Black-white
only) ON/OFF
Resolution
(depends on file
format/transmission
method)
100 x 100 dpi
200 x 200 dpi
300 x 300 dpi
400 x 400 dpi
600 x 600 dpi
200 x 100dpi
(Half tone not allowed)
200 x 200dpi
200 x 400dpi
400 x 400dpi
600 x 600dpi
Moire reduction
mode
Notes' security
feature
Yes (Color/grayscale)
---
Yes (color only)
---
d. Specification of Addresses
Mode
Address
specification
---
Setting of default
address *1
Number of Onetouch address key
registration
Number of Group (1
key) address
registtation
Program
Direct entry of
addresses
Chain dial
Resend
MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 7
Scanner
Internet Fax
Specification by one-touch/group/direct address
entry.
Entry from soft keyboard. (Scanner/Internet Fax)
Entry from 10-key. (Fax)
Selection from LDAP server
Yes
--Total (number of key): Maximum 999
Number of Group (1 key) address registration :
maximum 500
Number of Group key registration : 5000 (Total
address number included in /999 key)
48
Soft keyboard
--Call up nearest 8 addresses. *4
Mode
Shortcut for address
selection (quick
key)
CC/BCC sending
Subjet
File name
Sender name
Transmission
message (message
body)
Preset mail footer *2
Disable direct entry
transmission *3
Disable PC- Fax
sending
Disable Internet Fax
sending
Scanner
Internet Fax
Use the 10-key to call up registered numbers of
addresses.
Yes
--Selective/direct entry from the list
Selective/direct entry from the list
Selective/direct entry
--from the list/selection
(1 default address fixed
from LDAP server
as sender name)
Selective/direct entry from the list.
(Number of characters: Maximum of 1800 half-size
characters (888 full size characters))
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
*1: The scanner mode allows setting the default address. To
transmit data, users only have to set the original and press the
start key.
*2: Function to set up a text message that will be added
automatically to the message body upon mail transmission.
Editing upon transmission is not allowed.
*3: When disabled, the address registration is not allowed either.
*4: Except for FTP, Desktop, SMB, USB memory, Broadcast.
e. Specification of Multiple Addresses
Mode
Broadcast
Scanner
Yes (500 destinations)
(e-mail/FTP/Desktop
allowed)
Internet Fax
Yes (500 destinations)
* Broadcast transmission by scanner, Internet Fax and Fax is
allowed. (Monochrome only)
f. Transmission function
Memory transmission
Rotated transmission
Scaled transmission
Recall mode
Error
Busy
Long original
transmission
Change of the number
of pages for each file
Job partition through
recognition of white
paper.
Restriction on
transmission size
Large capacity original
mode
Scanning of thin paper
Mixed originals feeder
Default date sender
transmission
Scanner
Internet Fax
94 destinations in all
--Yes
Yes
Enlargement/reduction is allowed only from a
fixed size to another. Reduction may be done
on the receiver side with Fax/Internet Fax
sending.
--Yes
------Number/time to be
set up through
system setup
Yes
Maximum of 800mm (single side only/blackwhite 2 values only)
Yes
--No
---
Yes
---
Scanner
Internet Fax
Automatic reception
Manual reception
Memory reception
Fixed size reduced
reception
Specified size scaled
reception
Rotated reception
Setting of received data
print condition
2-sided reception
---------
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
---
No
-----
Yes
No
---
2-in-1 reception
Automatic reduction
setting upon receiving
A3
Automatic reduction
setting upon receiving
letter
Address/Domainspecified reception
allowed
Address/Domainspecified reception not
allowed. (To be rejected)
Received data bypass
output
Reception confirmation
cycle setting
POP3 communications
timeout setting
Index printing
Body text print select
setting
Transfer function upon
disabling of output.
Internet Fax/Fax to email (Transfer of Internet
Fax/Fax reception data
to e-mail, inbound
routing)
Exit tray setting
Insertion of job
separator sheet
Staple function of
received data
Auto wake up print *1
Received data print hold
*2
Color toner print when
black toner runs out.
Fax response lamp
-----
Condition setting
through system setting
No
Yes
---
Yes
---
Yes (50 domains)
---
Yes (50 domains)
---
Yes
---
Setting by 0-8 hours/
each minute
Setting by 30-300/every
30 seconds
No
Yes
-----------
Yes (1 receiver (of
transfer) registration)
Yes
-----
Yes
No
---
Yes
-----
Yes
Yes
---
No
---
Yes
*1: The auto wake up print for Internet Fax is a pseudo night-time
mode with main power source (primary) switch ON and main
unit power (secondary) switch OFF. Following the interval of
the reception confirmation cycle, it allows reception of the data
from a POP server (if there are any) and launch the main unit
for output. (It cannot attain the pseudo night-time mode if the
main power source (primary) switch is off. In this case, this
function is not supported.)
*2: This function saves all received data in memory and starts out
put after password entry. (Confidential reception is excluded.)
Setting only on the reciver side.
Yes
Yes
Yes (Random + MIX)
---
g. Reception function
Yes (ON only)
MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 8
h. Report/list function
Image sending activity
report
Transaction report
Address/phone number
table
Group table
Program table
Communication original
contents print
List of addresses
allowed or not allowed
for reception
Scanner
Internet Fax
Yes
Time-specified output
Output with memory full
* Maximum of 200 times including both
transmission and reception
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
---
Always print/Upon
error/no print
Yes
---
Scanner
Yes
-------
Page partition
transmission
Page connection
Edge erase
Center erase
2 in 1
Yes
Confirm transmission
Forward data
transmission/reception
(Document Admin)
Internet Fax
Yes
Yes
Yes (Date can be
expressed
alternatively)
Yes (By address book conversion utility)
Yes (By storage backup)
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
(Allowed for Fax /
Internet Fax
broadcast)
Yes
--(Only color and gray
scale)
Yes (Equivalent or enlargement up to the paper
width. The maximum enlargement is not
allowed to exceed 400%)
--Yes
Timeout time Setting
for 1 minute – 240
hours/each minute
Yes
Data transmission by PC-Fax/PC-Internet Fax
is allowed, too.
l. Sound settings
Mode
Reception sound
Communication
error sound
Sound setting for
end of original
reading (image
send)
Scanner
-----
Internet Fax
293mm / 11-17/32
A3 – A5/11 x 17 – 5.5 x 8.5
Scanner
Internet Fax
999 destinations
Use of LDAP allowed
Up to 500 registered addresses for each group
dial.
Registered name in 18 full-size character (36
half-size characters)
Yes
----Yes
Registration by using
Web or NST (network
scanner tool) *2
Registration of addresses (groups), settings
(density, image quality) and special functions in
one set is allowed. (48 of them)
Item
Sound volume setting
Sound volume setting
Scanner
-----
Sound volume setting
Yes *1
Internet Fax
Yes *1
Yes *2
*1: Large/middle/small. Setup by system setting.
*2: Large/middle/small/no sound. Setup by system setting.
m. Others
Mode
PC-Internet Fax
Trial mode
Scanner
--Yes
Internet FAX
Yes
No
C. PC-Fax functions
(1)
PC-Fax/PC-Internet Fax operating environment
OS
PC
CPU
Monitor
k. Registration-related settings
Program
Yes (001 – 999)
*4: Quick key is the function to select an address based on the
registered number of each address within the book for address
selection. Users should be able to select a quick key number.
j. Record size
Mode
One-touch/group *1
E-mail
FTP
Desktop
SMB
Internet Fax
Default address setup
Desktop registration
1 (20 characters)
*1: Since scan/Internet Fax/Fax uses the common address book,
the number of addresses allowed for registration is the sum
total of all modes.
* This function means that e-mail address setteing on F code relay
broadcast allowed.
Mode
Maximum record width
Record size
Internet Fax
---
*3: The book for address selection is used when a scan sender is
selected.
Time specification
Sender print
Page number print
Date print
Card shot
Number of sender
registration
Quick key (short cut
registration) *4
Retrieving/scanning of
registered data to other
model
Import/export of address
book
Scanner
200 (user registration
from Web) *3
---
*2: The network scanner expansion kit (MX-NSX1) required
(G model).
i. Other Functions
Background removal
Mode
Sender registration
Memory
HDD
Interface
Communications
protocol
MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 9
Windows 98 (IE4.0 or more)
Windows Me (IE4.0 or more)
Windows NT4.0 Workstation (Service Pack5,
IE4.0 or more)
Windows 2000 (IE4.0 or more)
Windows XP Home Edition (IE4.0 or more)
Windows XP Professional (IE4.0 or more)
Windows Server 2003 (IE4.0 or more)
IBM PC/AT compatible machine
Pentium II 300MHz or more
640x480 Pixels or more of screen resolution
256 or more of colors
64MB or more
Free space of 50MB or more
USB2.0
10/100BASE-TX
LPR/lp
Port9100(RAW)
IPP
USB2.0
(2)
PC-Fax/PC-Internet Fax functions
PC-Fax Send
PC-Internet Fax Send
Resolution
Transmission original
sizes
Compression method
Braodcast transmission
F code transmission
Phone book
registration/
transmission function
Use of MFP phone book
Attach a cover sheet
Create cover sheets
function
Sender print
Preview function
Transmission
confirmation (Notice to
PC by NJR)
Document filing function
PC-Fax Transmission
log
User authentication
Timer
R-KEY (SEEG/SEF
only)
Yes (with Fax equipped)
Maximim of 64 digits for Fax number (including
sub-address and passcode)
Yes (Necessary options: 256MB expansion
memory (G model), Internet Fax expansion kit)
Maximum of 64 digits for Internet Fax address
200 x 100dpi/200 x 200dpi
/200 x 400dpi/400 x 400dpi
A3/B4/A4/A5/B5/11 x 17/8.5 x 14/8.5 x 11/5.5 x
8.5/8.5 x 13/8K/16K
MH/MMR
Yes (Fax, Internet Fax mixture possible.
Maximum of 500)
Yes
SubYes Maximum of
address
20 digits
Passcode
Yes Maximum of
20 digits
Yes
No
Yes (Not allowed for bradcast transmission)
Yes
Selection of illuminant
color
Selection of threshold
value
Addition of void area
Save of setup contents
Save of preview image
Display unit of
scanning range
Notes's security
function
Image acquision
method from the main
unit
(1)
2-sided scan
Color modes
Resolutions
Scanning ranges
Preview function
Zoom preview function
Rotated scan
Brightness/contrast
adjustment
Gamma adjustment
Color matching
Edge emphasis
Black-white inversion
Yes
Non-compression
Platform
(2)
Support OS
Custom PS
Windows 98/Me
Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98/Me
Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98/Me
Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
MacOS 9.0-9.2.2, x 10.1.5, x 10.2.8, x 10.3.3 – 10.3.9,
x 10.4
Windows 98/Me
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Custom
PCL5c/6
Filing
Yes
Quick File
Yes
Yes (Re-transmission not allowed)
PPD
Yes
No
Yes
SPLC-c
Pull scan (TWAIN) specification
OS's
WHQL validated OS's
Hardware environment
Allowed (4 sides; 2.5mm for each)
Yes
Yes
Pixel/mm/inch
• IBM PC/AT compatible machine
• Macintosh
Yes (Editable by PC-Fax driver for only Japan.
Always printed for abroad.)
Yes
Yes
NIC
Yes
USB
No
Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/2003 Server
Windows 2000/XP
System: Must satisfy the operational conditions
for each OS.
HDD: 10MB or more: 100MB or more
recommended.
Monitor: 800 x 600 dots or more; 256 or more of
colors must be available.
Other: Network port
Yes
Mono 2 gradation/Mono Diffusion/Grayscale/Full
Color
75dpi/100dpi/150dpi/200dpi/300dpi/400dpi/
600dpi or custom: 50-9600dpi
A3/A4/A4-R/A5/A5-R/B4/B5/B5-R/11 x 17/
8.5 x 11/8.5 x 11-R/7.25 x 10.5/7.25 x 10.5-R/
8.5 x 13/5.5 x 8.5/5.5 x 8.5-R/8.5 x 14/Postcard/
8K/16K/16K-R/Auto/Auto(Mixed size)/Custom
* "Auto" includes the same width (Mix). "Auto
(Mixed size)" means random.
Yes
Yes
Yes (90-degree/ 180-degree/ 270-degree)
Auto/ manual (-100 – +100)
Auto/ manual (1 – 254)
E. Printer function
D. Remote PC Functions (Network TWAIN)
Interfaces
Yes (Red/Green/Blue/White)
WHQL
(3)
Command system
Command system
SPLC-c
PCL5c compatible
PCL6 compatible
BMLinkS
PS3 compatible
EFI controller
(4)
MX-2300G/2700G
MX-2300N/2700N
Standard
No
Option (Printer
Standard
expansion kit: MXPBX1)
No
Option (PS3 expansion kit: MX-PKX1)
No
Installed fonts
For PCL5c/
PCL6
compatible
For PS3
Roman outline fonts = 80 types
Line printer font (Bitmap) = 1 type
Bar code fonts = 28 types (Can be
provided by the flash ROM kit as well)
Roman outline fonts = 136 types
Yes
None/For Printer/For CRT/For LCD/ICM
None/Normal/Sharp/Blur
Yes
MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 10
Standard (MX2300N/2700N)
Option (MX2300G/2700G)
Option
Option
(5)
Print channel
Support print
channel
USB
PSERVER/
RPRINT for
NetWare
environment
LPR
IPP
PAP:
EtherTalk
(AppleTalk)
(8)
FTP
• USB2.0 (high speed)
• PSERVER/RPRINT for netware environment
• LPR
• IPP
• PAP: EtherTalk (AppleTalk)
• FTP
• NetBEUI
• Raw Port (Port9100)
• HTTP (Web Submit Print)
• POP3 (E-Mail To Print)
USB 1.1: Windows 98/Me/2000/Server 2003/XP only
USB 2.0 (High speed): Windows 2000/XP only
Print channel in PSERVER/PRINT mode to be used
in netware environment
UNIX LPR/LPD command-compatible print channel
Print channel in compliance with IPP1.0
Print channel to be used for Machintosh environment
NetBEUI
Port9100
(6)
Command Compatibility
PCL5c
compatibility
PCL XL
compatibility
PostScript
compatibility
(7)
Equipped with the function to print data received via
built-in FTP server
Microsoft NetBEUI compatible print channel
9100 TCP port (Raw Port) supported
PCL5c must be compatible with HP Color Laser Jet
4600.
PCL XL must be compatible with HP Color Laser Jet
4600.
Must be compatible with Adobe PS3.
Environmental settings
Setting item
Initial setting
PCL seting
PS setting
Overview
Basic settings for printer use such as number of
copies or printing direction.
Setting of PCL symbols and fonts
Whether or not printing is allowed upon PS error is to
be set up.
Print functions
Function
Content
PCL6/5c
(G model:
option)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Multiple Pamphlet
Bar code font
Network tandem print
Binds multiple pamphlet outputs into a single booklet.
JetCAPS BarDIMM emulation
Two units connected via network can be used simultaneously for a printout.
Encryption PDF/PDF/
TIFF/JPEG direct print
PDF/TIFF/JPEG file can be printed without printer driver.
1) Printing of e-mail attachment file
2) Printing from FTP server
3) Printing from setup file on Web page
4) USB memory
Direct printing of an attached file upon receipt of the e-mail.
Browsing of FTP server from front panel and pull-printing of a specified file (direct
printing).
Setting and direct printing of a file on network through Web page.
Yes (No for
encrypted
PDF/PDF)
E-Mail To Print
Pull print from front panel
Print by file setup on Web
page [Web Submit Print]
Continuous print function
ROPM
Multi-access
Paper direction setting for
2-sided printing of
letterhead paper and prepunched paper.
Enable selected paper
type in bypass tray
Setting environmental
control under terminal
server control
Driver delivery function
Form overlay
Planet Press
Improvement of
downloading method of
font form
Management of password
by hidden Web page
Expansion font list
PS (Option)
SPLC-c
(G model)
Yes
No
Yes (Windows
only)
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
The function executes multiple print jobs continuously as if they are one single job
even if the unit receives an end of job command, in order to support print from the
application assuming printout on continuous pages.
The function enables the printout of a multiple number of copies in one RIP
processing.
RIP processing must be allowed during printing. Printing must also be allowed
during scanning.
Pages with front-back attribute such letterhead or punch paper are to be printed
correctly in front-back page order for 2-sided printing.
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
For setting of bypass tray, even if the setup values on the main unit side do not
match with those on the driver side, the printing will be executed in the setting of
the driver regardless of the setup values on the main unit side.
Print setting of each client is memorized under meta frame environment (auto print
create environment). (Setup for each log-in can be skipped.)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PAU4.0 allows the administrator to deliver a driver to clients.
The function downloads a form to the main unit beforehand, sends the contained
data only, and inserts the data into the form in the main unit for printout.
Object Lune Corporation's Planet Press (Software to execute the mapping of forms
(DL beforehand) and variable data in the printer interior)
This expands the function to prevent the deletion and overwriting of the editing
functional enhancement font/form on Web page. A unified UI for the lineup is
necessary.
Currently, registration is done by Web page and deleted by PJL. This function is
supported by HDD.
The purpose is to prevent the access even if the hidden Web page address
becomes known.
In self-print of a font list, ESC command information is needed for BITMAP font.
Yes
Yes
(5c only)
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
(5c only)
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
(5c only)
No
No
MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 11
No
Function
Content
Bonjour for Macintosh
environment
Document control
Object judgement (screen
change/color change)
CMYK Simulation
ICC Profile
Pantone color
(9)
This technology detects and connects peripheral equipment on the network
automatically.
The dynamic network connection (computer, peripheral equipment and software) is
possible without user setting.
When printing, the unique pattern for prevention against unauthorized copy
is embedded in printing.
In the printer color mode output, object of image data (area of photograph/graphic
text) is judged. Print screen (resolution) and profile (color) are changed
automatically.
Choice of CMYK simulation is as follows.
1) Default
2) Custom
Default is defined depending on the destination of service simulation.
1. Japan = Japan Color
2. North America / China / Other abroad inch type = SWOP
3. Europe / Other abroad AB type = Euroscale
Custom profile can upload by Web setting. Notation of driver is Custom.
Example: Use SWOP profile in Japan.
Choice of source profile is as follows.
• sRGB
• AppleRGB
• Custom
Custom profile can upload by Web setting. (The attached ICC profile on devices is
available.)
There is no user selection for output profile. Sharp provides Custom profile. Upload
of profile supports by service. The tool is set on the Web (service setting). The
concrete method of profile making is to be considered separately.
For Pantone color support, the profile upload can be made by Web setting.
Windows driver function
Function
Paper Size
PS: Option (Installation of the printer expansion kit (MX-PBX1) and
the PS3 expansion kit (MX-PKX1) and expansion of memory
(256MB) are required.)
SPLC-c: G model only
Paper Selection
a. Frequently used functions
Pamphlet
(Pamphlet
processing by
MFP/Printer
firmware)
Binding Edge
N-Up Printing
Black N-Up
Border
N-Up Order
PCL5-c/6
PS
PS (Option)
SPLC-c
(G model)
Yes
No
Yes (OPT)
Yes (OPT)
Yes (OPT)
PCL6: Yes
PCL5: No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
b. Paper feed system
PCL5-c/6: N mode standard, G model option (Installation of the
printer expansion kit (MX-PBX1) and expansion of memory
(256MB) are required.)
Function
Copies (Copy
processing by
MFP/Printer
firmware)
Orientation
Duplex
PCL6/5c
(G model:
option)
No
SPLC-c
1-999
PPD
Different Paper
Portrait/Landscape
2-Sided (Book)
2-Sided (Tablet)
2-Up Pamphlet
N/A
Tiled Pamphlet
Multiple 2-Up
N/A
Pamphlet
Multiple Tiled
N/A
Pamphlet
Top/Left/Right
N/A
1-Up, 2-Up, 4-Up, 6-Up,
(Windows NT: N/A)
8-Up, 9-Up, 16-Up
(Windows 9x:
1-Up/2-Up/4-up)
Yes/No
N/A
[2-Up]
Left to Right
Right to Left
[4, 6, 8, 9, 16-Up]
Right, and Down
Down, and Right
Left, and Down
Down, and Left
Transparency
Inserts
Tab Printing
Set Tray Status
Paper Type
Name (USER
TYPE 1-7)
Input Tray
Options
PCL5-c/6
PS
SPLC-c
PPD
A2 (Fit To
N/A
A2 (Fit To
N/A
Page)
Page)
(PCL6 only)
12 x 18, A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 14,
7.25 x 10.5, 8.5 x 13, 5.5 x 8.5, 8K, 16K, DL, C5,
COM10, Monarch, Custom Paper
Paper Source
Auto
Paper Type
Selection/
Paper
Source /
Paper Type
Cover Page
N/A
Last Page
N/A
Other Page
N/A
Blank/Printed
Image Shift
Tab Paper
Printing
(PCL6 only)
Set Paper Size
Set Paper Type
Display Name
N/A
N/A
Two Trays/Three Trays/Four Trays
N/A
N/A
N/A
c. Paper exit method
Function
Output Tray
Staple
Punch
No Offset
Large Capacity Tray
Output Tray Options
Punch Module
Right Tray
MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 12
PCL5-c/6
PS
SPLC-c
PPD
Center Tray/Right Tray/Offset Tray/Saddle
Stitch Tray
None/1-Staple/2-Staples
Yes/No
Yes/No
None/MX-LCX1
None/Finisher/Saddle Stitch Finisher
None/2 Holes/3 Holes/4 Holes/4 Holes (Wide)
Yes/No
d. Exposure
Function
Resolution
Color Mode
ICM Method (Cannot be specified
with the monochrome mode)
Rendering Intent (Cannot be
specified with the monochrome
mode)
ICC Profile Selection (Cannot be
specified with the monochrome
mode)
Print Priority (Cannot be specified
with the monochrome mode)
Contrast
* Some OS may not allow onenumber-to-next specification for
setup values.
Brightness
* Some OS may not allow onenumber-to-next specification for
setup values.
Saturation (Cannot be specified
with the monochrome mode)
* Some OS may not allow onenumber-to-next specification for
setup values.
Color Balance (RGB)
(Cannot be specified with the
monochrome mode)
* Some OS may not allow onenumber-to-next specification for
setup values.
Text To Black (Can be specified only
with the monochrome mode)
Vector To Black (Can be specified
only with the monochrome mode)
Toner Save (1bit only)
Screen Setting (Cannot be specified
with the monochrome mode)
Pure Black Print (Cannot be
specified with the monochrome
mode)
Black Overprint (Cannot be
specified with the monochrome
mode)
CMYK Simulation (Cannot be
specified with the monochrome
mode)
Bitmap Compression
PCL5-c/6
600 x 600dpi
300 x 300dpi
PS
SPLC-c
PPD
1200 x 600dpi
600 x 600dpi
600 x 600dpi
(monochrome only)
300 x 300dpi
600 x 600dpi
Auto/Color(CMYK)/Monochrome (K only)
N/A
OFF
N/A
OFF
System (Windows ICM). Effective only when Color Options is Custom.
Windows NT: N/A
Printer
N/A
Printer
N/A
Driver
N/A
When ICM Method is anything other than Custom: Default
Perceptual matching
Relative colorimetric
When ICM Method is Custom:
Perceptual matching
Saturation matching
Relative colorimetric
Absolute colorimetric
Saturation matching
Absolute colorimetric
When Windows ICM is off:
Source Profile (Monitor
Source Profile (Monitor Profile)
When Windows ICM is off:
None
Profile)
sRGB
sRGB
None
Apple RBG
Apple RGB
sRGB
Apple RGB
Custom
Custom
When Windows ICM is on:
Monitor Profile installed in PC
1 bit or 2 bit
1bit only
1 bit or 2 bit
2 bit or 4 bit
N/A
2 bit or 4 bit
0-100
N/A
N/A
0-100
N/A
0-100
N/A
Yes/No
N/A
Yes/No
N/A
Yes/No
N/A
Yes/No
Default
Photo
Text & Graphic
N/A
Yes/No
N/A
Yes/No
N/A
Yes/No
N/A
Yes/No
N/A
Yes/No
In case of Yes:
Default /Custom
None
N/A
Off/
Default/Custom
N/A
N/A
None
(PCL6 only)
Image Type
Neutral Grays (Cannot be specified
with the monochrome mode)
0-100
CAD
Black Only
4-Color
Standard/Graphics/Photo/Custom
N/A
N/A
MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 13
CAD
Black Only
4-Color
e. Font
Function
Font Source
PCL5-c/6
Font Substitution
Download Font Type
PS
SPLC-c
Resident Font
Download Font
N/A
TrueType (Type 42)
N/A
Bitmap (Type 3)
N/A
N/A
Adobe
N/A
(Type1)
As Graphics
N/A
PPD
N/A
Yes
Function
Auto Job
Control Review
Tandem Print
Set Tandem
Print
Auto
Configuration
PCL5-c/6
PS
Yes/No
SPLC-c
Yes/No
IP Address (Slave Machine)
PPD
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
(10) Macintosh driver functions
a. Frequently used functions
f. Other functions
Function
Watermark
Overlay
Rotate 180
degrees
Collate
Carbon Copy
Fit To Page
Poster
Poster Dash
Border
Poster Overlap
Margin Shift
(Margin Shift
processing by
MFP/Printer
firmware
Zoom
Mirror Image
Graphics Mode
PS Pass
Through
PS Error
Printing
Job
Compression
Retention
Document
Filing
User
Authentication
Job ID
Notify Job End
PCL5-c/6
PS
SPLC-c
Transparent Text
Overwrite Text
Outline Text
Image Stamp
Yes
(PCL6
only)
Create Overlay
Load Overlay
Delete
Query Page Overlay
Yes/No
PPD
N/A
N/A
Yes/No
Yes/No
Top Copy
N/A
Carbon Copy
A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11,
N/A
8.5 x 14, 7.25 x 10.5/8.5 x 13/5.5 x 8.5,
8K, 16K, DL, C5, COM10, Monarch
2 x 2/3 x 3/
2 x 2/3 x 3/4 x 4
N/A
4x4
(PCL6
only)
Yes/No
Yes/No
N/A
(PCL6
only)
Yes/No
Yes/No
N/A
(PCL6
only)
None/10mm (0.4 inch)/20mm (0.8 inch)/30mm (1.2
inch)
N/A
N/A
Vector /
Raster
N/A
N/A
N/A
25% – 400%
X-Y Zoom
N/A
No Mirror
Image
Vertical
Horizontal
N/A
Yes/No
Yes/No
None/
Fastest/Fast/
Medium/Best
Compression
Hold Only
Hold After Printd
Sample Print
Password
Quick File
Main Folder
Custom Folder
Login Name
Password
User Name
Job Name
Yes/No
Function
Copies
Orientation
Duplex
Pamphlet (Pamphlet
processing by MFP/
Printer firmware)
Binding Edge
N-Up Printing
N-Up Border
N-Up Order
Function
Paper Size Setting
Paper Selection
Different Paper
Transparency Inserts
Tab Printing
Set Tray Status
Paper Type Name
(USER TYPE 1-7)
Input Tray Options
N/A
Yes/No
N/A
OS9 PPD
OSX 10.1
OSX 10.2/3/4
12 x 18, A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 14, 7.25 x 10.5, 8.5 x 13, 5.5 x 8.5, 8K,
16K, DL, C5, COM10, Monarch, Custom Paper
Auto Select
Paper Source
Paper Type
Cover Page
Blank/Printed
N/A
N/A
Yes
Two Trays/
Three Trays/
Four Trays
N/A
Two Trays/
Three Trays/
Four Trays
c. Paper exit method
Function
Output Tray
N/A
OSX 10.1
OSX 10.2/3/4
1-999
Portrait/Landscape
2-Sided (Long)
2-Sided (Short)
Tiled Pamphlet
Multiple Tiled Pamphlet
(Only more than 10.2)
Top/Left/Right
N/A
Top/Left/Right
1-Up/2-Up/4-Up/6-Up/9-Up/16-Up
Yes/No
[2-Up]
Left to Right
Right to Left
[4, 6, 8, 9, 16-Up]
Right, and Down
Down, and Right
Left, and Down
Down, and Left
b. Paper feed method
N/A
None
Vertical
Horizontal
OS9 PPD
Staple
Punch
No Offset
Large Capacity Tray
Output Tray Options
N/A
Punch Module
N/A
N/A
Right Tray
N/A
N/A
MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 14
OS9 PPD
OSX 10.1
OSX 10.2/3/4
Center Tray/Right Tray/Offset Tray/Saddle
Stitch Tray
None/1-Staple/2-Staples
Yes/No
Yes/No
None/MXN/A
None/MXLCX1
LCX1
N/A
None /
None/
Finisher/
Finisher/
Saddle Stitch
Saddle Stitch
Finisher
Finisher
N/A
None /
None /
2 Holes /
2 Holes /
3 Holes /
3 Holes /
4 Holes /
4 Holes /
4 Holes
4 Holes
(Wide)
(Wide)
Yes/No
N/A
Yes/No
d. Exposure
Function
Resolution
Color Mode
ICM Method ColorSync
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
* Specification
depending on OS
Rendering Intent
* Specification
depending on OS
ICC Profile Selection
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
* Specification
depending on OS
Print Priority
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
Contrast
* Some OS may not
allow one-number-tonext specification for
setup values
Brightnesst
* Some OS may not
allow one-number-tonext specification for
setup values
Saturationt
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
* Some OS may not
allow one-number-tonext specification for
setup values
Color Balance (RGB)
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
* Some OS may not
allow one-number-tonext specification for
setup values
Text To Black
Vector To Black
Toner Save (1bit only)
Screen Setting
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
Pure Black Print
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
Black Overprint
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
CMYK Simulation
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
Bitmap Compression
Image Type
Neutral Grays
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
e. Font
OS9 PPD
OSX 10.1
OSX 10.2/3/4
600 x 600dpi
Auto/Color (CMYK) /Monochrome (K only)
OFF
N/A
OFF
System
N/A
System
(10.3 only)
Printer
Perceptual matching
Relative colorimetric
Saturation matching
Absolute colorimetric
N/A
Source
Source
Profile
Profile
(Monitor
(Monitor
Profile)
Profile)
sRGB
sRGB
Apple RGB
Apple RGB
Custom
Custom
(10.3 only)
1 bit or 2 bit
2 bit or 4 bit
Function
Font Source (Resident
Font/Download Font)
Font Substitution
Download Font Type
0-100
N/A
Function
Watermark
Overlay
Rotate 180 degrees
Collate
Carbon Copy
Fit To Page
Poster
Black Poster Border
Poster Overlap
Margin Shift
(Margin Shift
processing by MFP/
Printer firmware
Zoom
Mirror
Graphics Mode
PS Pass through
PS Error Printing
Job Compression
Retention
0-100
Document Filing
User Authentication
Yes/No
Yes/No
N/A
OS9 PPD
OSX 10.1
OSX 10.2/3/4
Transparent Text/Overwrite Text/Outline Text
N/A
Yes/No
N/A
Yes/No
Yes/No
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
None/10mm/20mm/30mm (1.2inch)
25% – 400%
None
Vertical
Horizontal
Auto Configuration
N/A
Hold Only,
Hold After
Print, Sample
Print, Pass
Code
N/A
Login Name
Password
N/A
N/A
Yes/No
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Notify Job End
Auto Job Control
Review
Tandem Print
Set Tandem Print
N/A
N/A
Yes/No
Default
Photo
Test & Graphic
N/A
Standard/Graphic/Photo/CAD/Custom
Black Only
4-Color
Hold Only,
Hold After
Print, Sample
Print, Pass
Code
Quick File
Main Folder
Custom
Folder
Login Name
Password
User Name
Job Name
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
Yes/No
IP Address
(Slave
Machine)
Yes
(10.3 only)
F. Document filing function
(1)
Basic function
Capacity for document
filing
Pages or files for
allowed for filing
Main folder
Custom folder
Quick file folder
Main folder
Custom folder
Quick file folder
Off
Default
Custom
OSX 10.2/3/4
N/A
Yes
Job ID
N/A
OSX 10.1
N/A
f. Other functions
N/A
N/A
OS9 PPD
Maximum number of
user folder
Number of users
allowed for registration
MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 15
10GB
10GB
1,400 pages or 1,000
files (SHARP standard
document)
1,400 pages or 1,000
files (SHARP standard
document)
Maximum of 500 folders
Depends on the number of user registrations.
(Maximum of 200 users)
(2)
3. Ambient conditions
Data saving for each function
Job
Copy
Printer
Direct print (FTP)
Direct print (e-mail)
Direct print (Web)
Scan to e-mail/FTP
Scan to SMB
Scan to USB
memory
Fax reception
Fax transmission
Internet Fax
reception
Internet Fax
transmission
PC-Fax/PC-Internet
Fax transmisson
Remote PC Scan
Scan to HDD
Quick File Folder
Shared Confidential
storage
storage
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
-----
Main/Custom Folder
Shared Confidential
storage
storage
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
---------
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
--No
--Yes
--Yes
G. Safety and environmental protection
standards
(1)
A. Operating environmental conditions (Main
unit)
Temperature: 10°C – 35°C, Humidity: 20 – 85%RH
Air pressure: 590 – 1013hPa (height: 0 – 2000m)
Humidity (RH)
85%
60%
20%
B. Ambient conditions for transporting (Main
unit)
–20°C to 45°C (No condensation)
Humidity (RH)
90%
Safety standards
60%
Safety standard
EMC
Line standard (for
Fax expansion)
(2)
100V type
Electrical safety law:
J60950(compliant)
UL60950, 21CFR
(Laser)
CSA C22.2 No.60950
CNS14336 (Taiwan)
VCCI Class A
FCC Class B
High harmonic guideline
ICES Class B (Canada)
CNS 13438 (Taiwan)
Validation of Technology
Standard Conformance
(Electrical
Communications Project
Law)
FCC part 68
ICCS-03
PSTN01 (Taiwan)
200V type
EN60950
IEC60825 (Laser)
GB4943 (China)
20%
EN55022 Class A
CISPR22 Class A
EN61000-3-2
EN61000-3-3
GB9254, GB17625.1,
GB/T17618 (China)
TS 103 021, EG 201
120, EG 201 121
(Europe)
AS/ACIF S0002
(Australia)
GB/T 3382.1-2003, GB/T
3382.2-2003, YD/T 5141998, YD/T 589-1996,
YD/T 703-1993, YD/T
965-1998, YD/T 9931998 (China)
Environmental Readiness
C. Standard environmental conditions (Supply)
• An available life time under an environmental condition.
1)
Photoconductor drum
2)
Photoconductor drum unit
3)
Toner (K)/Color toner (C/M/Y)
36 months from the production month
24 months from the production month
24 months from the production month
D. Operating environmental conditions (Supply)
Humidity (RH)
85%
• International Energy Star Program MFP (EPA)
• The Eco Mark Program
60%
• Environmental Choice Program (ECP)
• New Blue Angel
• Nordic Swan
20%
• European ROHS regulations
• Chinese ROHS
• WEEE (Following to SHARP super green product declaration.)
E. Ambient conditions for transporting
–20°C to 45°C (No condensation)
F. Ambient storage conditions (Supply) (packed
conditions)
–10°C to 40°C (No condensation)
MX-2300/2700 N/G SPECIFICATIONS 2 – 16
1 : Dec. 15 2005
MX2700N
[3]
CONSUMABLE PARTS
Service Manual
1. Supply system table
A. USA/Canada/South and Central America
1
No.
1
Item
Toner Cartridge (Black)
Content
Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip
(Black toner : Net 440g)
x1
Life
18K *1
Model Name
MX-27NTBA
2
Toner Cartridge (Cyan)
3
Toner Cartridge (Magenta)
4
Toner Cartridge (Yellow)
5
Developer (Black)
6
7
Developer
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow)
Drum
Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip
(Cyan toner : Net 352g)
Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip
(Magenta toner : Net 352g)
Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip
(Yellow toner : Net 352g)
Developer (Black)
(Black developer : Net 265g)
Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow)
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow developer : Net 265g)
OPC Drum
x1
15K *1
MX-27NTCA
x1
15K *1
MX-27NTMA
x1
15K *1
MX-27NTYA
x1
100K
MX-27NVBA
x1
60K
MX-27NVSA
x1
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
MX-27NRSA
8
Drum Unit
Drum Unit (OPC Drum/Unit Parts included)
Color identification seal (Bk/C/M/Y) x 1 each
x1
x1
Remarks
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 15K for A4/Letter 6%)
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
MX-27NUSA
*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
B. European Subsidiary/Australia/New Zealand
1
No.
1
Item
Toner Cartridge (Black)
Content
Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip
(Black toner : Net 440g)
x1
Life
18K *1
Model Name
MX-27GTBA
2
Toner Cartridge (Cyan)
3
Toner Cartridge (Magenta)
4
Toner Cartridge (Yellow)
5
Developer (Black)
6
7
Developer
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow)
Drum
Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip
(Cyan toner : Net 352g)
Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip
(Magenta toner : Net 352g)
Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip
(Yellow toner : Net 352g)
Developer (Black)
(Black developer : Net 265g)
Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow)
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow developer : Net 265g)
OPC Drum
x1
15K *1
MX-27GTCA
x1
15K *1
MX-27GTMA
x1
15K *1
MX-27GTYA
x1
100K
MX-27GVBA
x1
60K
MX-27GVSA
x1
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
MX-27GRSA
8
Drum Unit
Drum Unit (OPC Drum/Unit Parts included)
Color identification seal (Bk/C/M/Y) x 1 each
x1
x1
Remarks
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 15K for A4/Letter 6%)
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
MX-27GUSA
*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
C. Asia-Subsidiary/Hong Kong
1
No.
1
Item
Toner Cartridge (Black)
Content
Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip
(Black toner : Net 440g)
x1
Life
18K *1
Model Name
MX-27ATBA
2
Toner Cartridge (Cyan)
3
Toner Cartridge (Magenta)
4
Toner Cartridge (Yellow)
5
Developer (Black)
6
7
Developer
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow)
Drum
Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip
(Cyan toner : Net 352g)
Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip
(Magenta toner : Net 352g)
Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip
(Yellow toner : Net 352g)
Developer (Black)
(Black developer : Net 265g)
Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow)
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow developer : Net 265g)
OPC Drum
x1
15K *1
MX-27ATCA
x1
15K *1
MX-27ATMA
x1
15K *1
MX-27ATYA
x1
100K
MX-27AVBA
x1
60K
MX-27AVSA
x1
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
MX-27ARSA
8
Drum Unit
Drum Unit (OPC Drum/Unit Parts included)
Color identification seal (Bk/C/M/Y) x 1 each
x1
x1
MX-27AUSA
*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
MX-2300/2700 N/G CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 1
Remarks
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 15K for A4/Letter 6%)
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
1 : Dec. 15 2005
D. Middle East/Africa/Israel/Philippines/Taiwan
1
No.
1
Item
Toner Cartridge (Black)
Content
Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip
(Black toner : Net 440g)
x1
Life
18K *1
Model Name
MX-27FTBA
2
Toner Cartridge (Cyan)
3
Toner Cartridge (Magenta)
4
Toner Cartridge (Yellow)
5
Developer (Black)
6
7
Developer
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow)
Drum
Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip
(Cyan toner : Net 352g)
Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip
(Magenta toner : Net 352g)
Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip
(Yellow toner : Net 352g)
Developer (Black)
(Black developer : Net 265g)
Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow)
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow developer : Net 265g)
OPC Drum
x1
15K *1
MX-27FTCA
x1
15K *1
MX-27FTMA
x1
15K *1
MX-27FTYA
x1
100K
MX-27FVBA
x1
60K
MX-27FVSA
x1
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
MX-27FRSA
8
Drum Unit
Drum Unit (OPC Drum/Unit Parts included)
Color identification seal (Bk/C/M/Y) x 1 each
x1
x1
Remarks
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 15K for A4/Letter 6%)
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
MX-27FUSA
*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
E. China
1
No.
1
Item
Toner Cartridge (Black)
Content
Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip
(Black toner : Net 440g)
x1
Life
18K *1
Model Name
MX-27CTBA
2
Toner Cartridge (Cyan)
3
Toner Cartridge (Magenta)
4
Toner Cartridge (Yellow)
5
Developer (Black)
6
7
Developer
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow)
Drum
Toner Cartridge (Cyan) with IC Chip
(Cyan toner : Net 352g)
Toner Cartridge (Magenta) with IC Chip
(Magenta toner : Net 352g)
Toner Cartridge (Yellow) with IC Chip
(Yellow toner : Net 352g)
Developer (Black)
(Black developer : Net 265g)
Developer (Cyan/Magenta/Yellow)
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow developer : Net 265g)
OPC Drum
x1
15K *1
MX-27CTCA
x1
15K *1
MX-27CTMA
x1
15K *1
MX-27CTYA
x1
100K
MX-27CVBA
x1
60K
MX-27CVSA
x1
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
100K (Black)
60K (Color)
MX-27CRSA
8
Drum Unit
Drum Unit (OPC Drum/Unit Parts included)
Color identification seal (Bk/C/M/Y) x 1 each
x1
x1
MX-27CUSA
*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
MX-2300/2700 N/G CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 2
Remarks
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 15K for A4/Letter 6%)
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
2. Maintenance parts list
A. U.S.A/Canada/South and Central America/Asia/Middle East/Agencies
No.
1
Item
Heat roller kit
2
Primary transfer kit
3
Secondary transfer kit
4
5
Filter kit
Waste toner box kit
6
DV seal kit
7
8
9
10
11
Staple cartridge
Staple cartridge
Primary transfer belt unit
Secondary transfer belt unit
Fusing unit
Content
Upper heat roller
Fuser gear
Upper separation pawl
Upper thermistor sub
Upper heat roller bearing
Lower heat roller
Lower thermistor
Lower heat roller bearing
Intermediate transfer belt
Primary transfer blade
Primary transfer conductive collar
Transfer cleaning roller
PS paper dust removal cleaner
Secondary transfer belt
Secondary transfer roller
Secondary drive idle gear
Upper thermistor
Primary transfer roller
Belt drive gear
Ozone filter PA
Waste toner box unit (with LSU cleaner x 3)
x1
x1
x4
x1
x2
x1
x1
x2
x1
x1
x4
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x4
x1
x1
x1
DV seal
DV side seal F/R
Toner filter
Staple cartridge
Staple cartridge
For service rotation
For service rotation
For service rotation (Heater lamp 120V)
For service rotation (Heater lamp 230V)
x3
x3
x3
x3
x3
x1
x1
x1
x1
Life
200K
Model name
MX-270HK
100K
MX-270Y1
300K
MX-270Y2
100K
50K
MX-270FL
MX-270HB
Black: 100K,
Color: 60K
MX-270DS
5000 times
5000 times
AR-SC2
MX-SCX1
MX-270U1
MX-270U2
MX-270FU1
MX-270FU
Life
200K
Model name
MX-270UH
200K
MX-270LH
100K
MX-270B1
300K
MX-270X1
300K
300K
MX-270B2
MX-270X2
100K
50K
MX-270FL
MX-270HB
Black: 100K,
Color: 60K
MX-270DS
5000 times
5000 times
AR-SC2
MX-SCX1
MX-270U1
MX-270U2
MX-270FU
MX-270FU2
Remarks
Each color 5% coverage, color
ratios 25%
For saddle finisher
For inner finisher
B. Europe/UK/Australia/New Zealand/Taiwan
No.
1
Item
Upper heat roller kit
2
Lower heat roller kit
3
Primary transfer kit
4
Primary transfer roller kit
5
6
Secondary transfer belt kit
Secondary transfer roller kit
7
8
Filter kit
Waste toner box kit
9
DV seal kit
10
11
12
13
14
Staple cartridge
Staple cartridge
Primary transfer belt unit
Secondary transfer belt unit
Fusing unit
Content
Upper heat roller
Fuser gear
Upper separation pawl
Upper thermistor sub
Upper heat roller bearing
Lower heat roller
Lower thermistor
Lower heat roller bearing
Intermediate transfer belt
Primary transfer blade
Primary transfer conductive collar
Transfer cleaning roller
PS paper dust removal cleaner
Primary transfer roller
Belt drive gear
Secondary transfer belt
Secondary transfer roller
Secondary drive idle gear
Upper thermistor
Ozone filter PA
Waste toner box unit (with LSU cleaner x3)
x1
x1
x4
x1
x2
x1
x1
x2
x1
x1
x4
x1
x1
x4
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
DV seal
DV side seal F/R
Toner filter
Staple cartridge
Staple cartridge
For service rotation
For service rotation
For service rotation (Heater lamp 230V)
For service rotation (Heater lamp 100V)
x3
x3
x3
x3
x3
x1
x1
x1
x1
MX-2300/2700 N/G CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 3
Remarks
Each color 5% coverage, color
ratios 25%
For saddle finisher
For inner finisher
3. Production number identification
C. Toner cartridge
A. Drum cartridge
The label indicating the management number is attached to the
side of the toner cartridge.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Part name
10
The lot number is of 10 digits. Each digit indicates the content as
follows.
Toner color
The number is printed on the flange on the front side. The laser
print shows the production year and month.
Production
place
1:
2:
3:
4:
5/6:
7:
8/9:
10:
Number
For this model, this digit is 2.
Alphabet
Indicates the model conformity code. H for this model.
Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the production month.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the production month.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
Number
Indicates the production month.
Indicates the day of the month of packing.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
Number
Indicates the day of the day of packing.
Alphabet
Indicates the production factory. "C" for China.
Destination
Incompatibility
Production
year/month/day
Version
Serial No. in production day
Example: 134th of production on August 24, 2005
B. Developer
BK
C. M .Y
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
The lot number is of 8 digits. Each digit indicates the content as follows.
The number is printed on the right under side of the back surface of
the developer bag.
1:
2:
3/4:
5/6:
7:
8:
Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
Number
Indicates the production year.
Number
Indicates the production month.
Number
Indicates the production day.
Hyphen
Number
Indicates the production lot.
MX-2300/2700 N/G CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 – 4
MX2700N
Service Manual
[5]
EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
1. Identification of each section and functions
A. External view
1
2
3 4
5
7
6
When the auto document
feeder is not installed:
When the options (the finisher, the
paper pass unit, and the saddle stitch
finisher) are not installed.
8
When the option (the finisher) is
installed (When the option (the
saddle stitch finisher) is not installed.).
9 10 11 12 13
No.
1
2
Name
Document cover
Auto document feeder *1, *2
3
Front cover
4
5
6
7
8
9
Interface unit *1
Operation panel
Paper exit tray unit (Right tray) *1
Paper exit tray (Center tray)
Finisher *1
Saddle stitch finisher *1
10
11
12
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3 (When the stand/1 x 500 sheet
paper drawer or the stand/2 x 500 sheet
paper drawer is installed) *1
Tray 4 (When the stand/2 x 500 sheet
paper drawer is installed) *1
Tray 5 (When the large capacity paper
feed tray is installed) *1
13
14
14
Function/ Operation
Holds a document.
This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided
originals can be automatically scanned.
Open this cover when turning ON/OFF the main power switch or replacing
the toner cartridge.
Feeds the output paper to the saddle finisher.
Used to set the functions and enter the copy quantity.
Receives discharged paper if installed and set.
Copied or printed paper is discharged to this tray.
Staples paper, and makes punch holes if the punch unit is installed.
Staples and outputs paper. It is also provided with the center-stapling
function. Makes punch holes if the punch unit is installed.
Stores paper. Max. 500 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs)
Stores paper. Max. 500 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs)
Stores paper. Max. 500 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs)
Stores paper. Max. 500 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs)
Stores paper. Max. 3500 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs)
*1: Peripheral unit (option): The peripheral units are options. Some model is provided with this unit as a standard unit.
*2: The MX-2300N/2700N are equipped standard with peripheral unit.
MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 1
Note
B. Internal structure
1
7
8 9
3
4
5 6
10 11 12 13
No.
1
Toner cartridge
2
Fusing section
3
Transfer belt
4
Right side cover
5
6
Paper reverse section cover
Manual feed tray
7
Main power switch
8
Waste toner box
Receives waste toner when copying or printing.
9
Waste toner box release button
10
11
Handle
2-stage paper feed desk right side
cover (When the 2-stage paper feed
desk is installed)
Paper feed tray right side cover
Right side cover open lever
Press this button to release lock of the waste toner box when replacing
the waste toner box or cleaning the wiring unit.
Used to lift the machine for transit.
Open this cover to remove a paper jam in the tray 3 or 4.
12
13
Name
2
Function/ Operation
Contains toner. If toner is exhausted, remove the cartridge of
exhausted color and replace it with a new one.
Fuses images transferred on paper by heat.
In full color copy, the transfer belt overlaps 4-color toner images on the
transfer belt. In black copy, black toner images are shifted to the
transfer belt.
This cover is opened to operate the fusing section pressure
adjustment lever or to remove a paper jam.
Used to reverse paper in duplex print or to remove a paper jam.
In manual paper feed, paper is inserted from this tray. When paper
greater than A4R or 8-1/2” x 11” R, be sure to pull out the auxiliary tray.
Turns on the power of the machine. When FAX or internet is used,
keep it ON.
Note
Note: The fusing section is heated to a
high temperature. Be careful not to burn
when paper jam.
Do not touch or scratch. It may cause
degraded images.
The main power lamp may remain ON
for about 1 minute after turning OFF the
main power switch. (When the main
power is turned OFF in the nighttime
FAX mode and OFF mode or when the
power outlet is disconnected. (This is
because the amount of electric charges
is great when only the resident power is
supplied.))
The waste toner box is collected by the
servicemen.
Open this cover to remove a paper jam in the tray 1 or 2.
Lift this lever and open the right side cover to remove a paper jam.
MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 2
C. Auto document feeder and document cover
• Auto document feeder
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
8
• Document cover
9
10
No.
1
2
Name
Document feed roller
Document feed section cover
3
4
Document guide
Document set table
5
6
Document exit section
Document scan section
7
Document size detection plate
8
Document reverse tray
9
10
Document stocker
Document table (Glass surface)
Function/ Operation
Transports a document automatically.
This cover is opened when removing a paper jam or cleaning the
document feed roller.
Guides to scan a document properly. Set to the set document size.
A document is set on this table. In the case of a single-surface
document, set it face up.
The scanned document is discharged to this section.
The document set on the document set table is scanned in this
section.
Detects the size of a document set on the document table (glass
surface).
When scanning a document, it is temporarily discharged to this
section to be reversed for scanning the back surface.
Stores documents.
Used for thick documents or book documents which cannot be
entered to the auto document feeder.
MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 3
Note
D. Connectors
1
2
3
Service-only connector
No.
1
2
3
Name
USB connector (Type A)
USB connector (Type B)
LAN connector
Function/ Operation
Used to connect a USB hub or USB memory.
Used to connect a computer to use this machine as a printer.
Used to connect a LAN cable to use this machine in a network.
MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 4
Note
E. Operation panel
1
2
3
5
PRINT
READY
DATA
DOCUMENT
FILING
LINE
DATA
IMAGE SEND
COPY
4
SYSTEM
JOB STATUS SETTINGS
LOGOUT
6
No.
1
Name
Touch panel
2
Mode select key/Lamp
3
Printer lamp (Ready lamp/Data lamp)
4
5
6
Numeric key (10-key)
[C] key
[Job status] key
7
[System setting] key
8
9
[Logout/Tone] key ([Logout] key for the
models without the FAX function)
[Program] key
10
[CA] key
11
12
13
[STOP] key
[BLACK START] key
[COLOR START] key
14
[Power save] key/Lamp
15
[Power] key
16
Main power lamp
7
8
9
10
11
Function/ Operation
A message or a key is displayed on the LCD screen. Touch the
displayed key with your finger to perform various operations. When the
displayed key is touched, a sound is generated and the selected item is
highlighted to confirm.
Used to switch the display mode of the touch panel. The lamp of the
selected key is lighted.
• [Document Filing] key
Press this key to switch to the document filing mode in order to store
a document to the hard disk in the form of a image or to print or send
the image stored in the hard disk.
• [FAX/Image send] key ([Image send] key for the models without the
FAX function)
Press this key to switch to the FAX mode/network scanner in order to
use the FAX function or the scanner function.
• Communicating lamp
This lamp is lighted during sending or receiving in the FAX mode, and
lighted during sending in the scanner mode.
• Data lamp
This lamp flashes when FAX data cannot be outputted due to paper
empty, etc. If there is data which has not been sent, the lamp is
lighted.
• [COPY] key
Press this key to switch to the copy mode in order to use the copy
function. When this key is pressed continuously, the total copy
quantity and the toner remaining quantity can be checked.
• Ready lamp
When this lamp is lighted, print data can be received.
• Data lamp
This lamp flashes during reception of print data, and lights up during
printing.
Used to enter the copy quantity or the FAX number, etc.
Used to clear the set value of copy quantity, etc. to “0.”
Press this key to display the job status. On the job status screen, the
details of the job can be checked and the job can be terminated.
When this key is pressed, the system setting menu screen is displayed
to allow the paper feed tray setting, destination registration, and other
setting for easy operations of this machine.
Used to logout after user authentication. Used to deliver the tone signal
in the dial line when the FAX function is used.
Used to use the job program when the copy function is used, and to dial
when the FAX function is used.
Press this key to reset the operation, cancel setting, and start from the
initial state.
Used to stop copying and scanning a document.
Used to scan a document in black.
Used to make a color copy in the copy mode and to scan a document in
colors. When the FAX or the internet FAX is used, this key cannot be
used.
Used to set the machine to the auto power shut off mode of power
saving. [Power save] key flashes in the auto power shut off mode.
Turns ON/OFF the power of the machine.
Used in the FAX nighttime mode when the FAX is installed.
This lamp lights up when the main power switch of the machine is ON.
MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 5
12
13
Note
14 15 16
F. Print and send status (Job status)
1
JOB QUEUE
SPOOL
SETS / PROGRESS
STATUS
COPY
020 / 001
COPYING
COPY
020 / 000
PAPER EMPTY
BBB BBB
020 / 000
WAITING
PRIORITY
0312345678
002 / 000
WAITING
STOP/DELETE
PRINT JOB
4
No.
1
3
2
Name
Paper empty display
2
Job list
3
Job status screen select key
4
Mode select key
5
6
[↓] [↑] keys
[STOP/DELETE] key
7
[PRIORITY] key
8
[DETAIL] key
9
[CALL] key
SCANNER
FAX JOB
SPOOL
JOB QUEUE
JOB QUEUE
COMPLETE
COMPLETE
DETAIL
DETAIL
CALL
INTERNET-FAX
5
Complete job
status screen
INTERNET-FAX
6 7 8
Function/ Operation
Supply paper. If the status display indicates “Paper empty,” the specified size paper is
empty. In this case, if paper is not supplied, the output is reserved and the job data in
standby state which can be outputted are outputted in priority. (When, however, paper is
exhausted during outputting, the priority output of another job data is not made.)
To select another paper size for outputting because the specified size paper cannot be
supplied immediately, touch the key of the job in the job list and touch “8. [DETAIL] key,”
and the paper size specification can be changed.
• The list of jobs reserved, during execution, or completed is displayed. When [PRINT] key
is touched with the mode select key, the display of the job status screen select key is
changed over to display the list of “SPOOL”. The list indicates the jog outline and the
status.
• When a print job during spooling or an encrypted PDF is directly printed, the job is
displayed on the “SPOOL” screen. If there is a list of encrypted PDF files, touch the job
key and enter the password, and the selected job is shifted to the list of [Reserve/
Executing], and the job enters the standby state.
The job list display is switched to one of “SPOOL” job, “JOB QUEUE” job, or “COMPLETE”
job.
“SPOOL”: When an encrypted PDF is printed directly, the print job list is displayed. Can be
displayed when the print job is displayed.
“JOB QUEUE”: The job list which is reserved or executing is displayed.
“COMPLETE”: The job list which completed is displayed.
Used to select the print mode, the scanner mode, the Fax mode, or the internet FAX mode.
• [PRINT JOB] key displays the list of copy, printer, Fax receive, internet Fax receive, and
the self print.
• [SCANNER] key displays the send list of the scanner function.
• [FAX JOB] key displays the send list of the Fax and the PC-Fax functions.
• [INTERNET FAX] key displays the send list of the internet Fax and the PC-Internet Fax
function.
Selects the page of the displayed job list.
Used to stop or delete the job which is executing or to delete a selected or reserved job.
However, the FAX receive print jog and the internet Fax receive print job cannot be stopped
or deleted.
When a job is selected in the reserved jobs displayed in the job list of “JOB QUEUE” screen
and the key is touched, the job reservation priority is changed to the top priority.
For a print job, select a priority job and touch this key, and the previous copying or printing
is interrupted and the selected job copy or print is started. After completion of the selected
job, the interrupted job is resumed from the interrupted point.
Used to display the details of the selected job. When the automatic temporal save of the
document filing function or filing is executed, or when sequential broadcasting send is
executed with the FAX/image send function, the key display is made in the complete job
status screen. When this key is touched, the details of the completed jobs are displayed
and reprint or resend of the job can be executed by touching [CALL] key.
When the displayed key is touched on the complete job status screen and [CALL] key is
touched, the operation (reprint or resend) of the touched job is executed. Same as when
[DETAIL] key is touched and [CALL] key is touched.
MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 6
9
Note
G. Sensors
OCSW
MHPS
TFD2
POD2 HOPS
TFD3
POD3
APPD1
DSW_ADU
POD1
REGS_F/R
PCS_CL/K
1TUD_K
1TUD_CL
APPD2
MPFD
MPED
MPWD
MTOP1
MTOP2
TCS_Y
TCS_M
TCS_C
MPLD
TH_M/HUD_M
PPD1
PPD2
DHPD_CL
TCS_K
DHPD_K
CPFD1
DSW_C
CPFD2
CPED1 CLUD1 CSS1 CSPD1 CSS2 CPED2 CSPD2 CLUD2
Signal name
1TUD_CL
1TUD_K
APPD1
APPD2
CLUD1
CLUD2
CPED1
CPED2
CPFD1
CPFD2
CSPD1
CSPD2
CSS1
CSS2
DHPD_CL
DHPD_K
DSW_ADU
DSW_C
HOPS
MHPS
MPED
Name
Transfer belt separation CL detection
Transfer belt separation BK detection
ADU transport path detection 1
ADU transport path detection 2
Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP
detection)
Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift HP
detection)
Tray 1 paper empty detection
Tray 2 paper empty detection
Tray 1 transport detection (Paper entry
detection)
Tray 2 transport detection (Paper entry
detection)
Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection
Tray 1 installation detection
Tray 2 installation detection
CL phase detection
BK phase detection
ADU transport open/close detection
Tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close
detection
Shifter home position detection
Scanner home position sensor
Manual feed paper empty detection
Function/Operation
Detects the transfer belt separation CL.
Detects the transfer belt separation BK.
Detects the duplex (ADU) upstream paper pass.
Detects the duplex (ADU) midstream paper pass.
Detects tray 1 upper limit.
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Detects tray 2 upper limit.
Transmission type
Detects tray 1 paper empty.
Detects tray 2 paper empty.
Detects tray 1 paper pass.
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Detects tray 2 paper pass.
Transmission type
Detects tray 1 paper remaining quantity.
Detects tray 2 paper remaining quantity.
Detects the tray 1.
Detects the tray 2.
Detects the CL phase.
Detects the BK phase.
Detects the duplex (ADU) cover open/close.
Detects the tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close.
Detects the shifter home position.
Detects the scanner home position.
Detects the manual feed paper empty.
Type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 7
NOTE
Signal name
MPFD
MPLD
Name
Manual feed paper entry detection
Manual feed paper length detector
Function/Operation
Detects the manual feed paper entry.
Detects the manual paper feed tray paper length.
Type
Transmission type
MPWD
Manual paper feed tray paper width
detector
Manual paper feed tray pull-out position
detector 1
Manual paper feed tray pull-out position
detector 1
Original cover SW
Process control sensor
Fusing after-detection
Paper exit detection
Right tray paper exit detection
Registration pre-detection
Registration detection
Resist sensor
Toner density sensor
Toner density sensor
Toner density sensor
Toner density sensor
Paper exit full detection
Right tray paper exit full detection
Temperature/humidity detection
Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width.
Volume resistor
Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out
position (storing position).
Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out
position (pull-out position).
Document size detection trigger.
Detects the toner patch density.
Detects the paper exit from fusing.
Detects the paper from paper exit.
Detects the paper exit to right tray.
Detects the paper in front of resist roller.
Detects the paper in rear of resist roller.
Detects the resist shift.
Detects the toner density (C).
Detects the toner density (K).
Detects the toner density (M).
Detects the toner density (Y).
Detects the face down paper exit tray full
Detects the right tray paper exit full.
Detects the temperature/humidity.
Transmission type
MTOP1
MTOP2
OCSW
PCS_CL/K
POD1
POD2
POD3
PPD1
PPD2
REGS_F/R
TCS_C
TCS_K
TCS_M
TCS_Y
TFD2
TFD3
TH_M/HUD_M
NOTE
Manual paper
feed unit
Transmission type
Manual paper
feed unit
Manual paper
feed unit
Transmission type
Reflection type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Reflection type
Magnetic sensor
Magnetic sensor
Magnetic sensor
Magnetic sensor
Transmission type
H. Switches
PWRSW
DSW-R
DHSW
MSW
DSW-F
1TNFD
Signal name
1TNFD
DHSW
(Japan only)
Name
Waste toner full detection switch
Dehumidifier heater switch
Type
Mechanical switch
Seesaw switch
DSW-F
Front door open/close switch
Micro switch
DSW-R
Right door open/close switch
Micro switch
MSW
PWRSW
Main SW
Operation panel power switch
Seesaw switch
Push switch
Function/Operation
Detects the waste toner full.
Turns ON/OFF the power lone of the dehumidifier heaters
provided in the scanner (reading) section and the paper
feed section.
Detects open/close of the front door, and turns ON/OFF
the power line of the fusing motor and the LSU laser.
Detects open/close of the right door, and turns ON/OFF
the power line of the fusing motor and the LSU laser.
Turns ON/OFF the main DC power source.
Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power source.
MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 8
Note
I. Clutches and solenoids
1TURC
MPGS
LSUSS1
PCSS
MPFS
MPUC
CPUC1
CPFC
CPUC2
Signal name
1TURC
Name
Primary transfer separation clutch
Type
Electromagnetic clutch
CPFC
Tray vertical transport clutch
Electromagnetic clutch
CPUC1
Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
Electromagnetic clutch
CPUC2
Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2)
Electromagnetic clutch
LSUSS1
MPFS
Electromagnetic solenoid
Electromagnetic solenoid
MPGS
LSU shutter solenoid
Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper
feed)
Manual paper feed gate solenoid
MPUC
Manual paper feed clutch
Electromagnetic clutch
PCSS
Process control shutter solenoid
Electromagnetic solenoid
Electromagnetic solenoid
Function/Operation
Controls the primary transfer separation
mode.
Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport
roller in the paper feed tray section.
Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the
paper feed tray 1 section.
Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the
paper feed tray 2 section.
Opens/closes the LSU shutter.
Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper
feed)
Controls open/close of the manual paper
feed gate solenoid.
Controls ON/OFF of the manual paper
feed roller in the manual paper feed
section.
Opens/closes the shutter of the process
control and the registration sensor.
MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 9
Note
J. Drive motors
MIM
PGM
TNM_Y
OSM
POM
TNM_M
TNM_C
DVM_CL
FUM
WTNM
TNM_K
DM_CL
DM_K
DVM_K
RRM
ADUM_L
PFM
CPFM
CLUM1
CLUM2
Signal name
ADUM_L
CLUM1
Type
Stepping motor
DC brush-less motor
Function/Operation
Drives the right door section.
Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
DC brush-less motor
Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
CPFM
DM_CL
DM_K
DVM_CL
DVM_K
FUM
MIM
OSM
PFM
Name
ADU motor lower
Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper
feed tray 1)
Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper
feed tray 2)
Paper feed motor
Drum motor (CL)
Drum motor (K)
Developing drive motor (CL)
Developing drive motor (K)
Fusing drive motor
Scanner motor
Shifter motor
PS front motor
Brush-less motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
Brush-less motor
Brush-less motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
PGM
POM
RRM
TNM_C
TNM_K
TNM_M
TNM_Y
WTNM
Polygon motor
Paper exit drive motor
Registration motor
Toner motor C
Toner motor K
Toner motor M
Toner motor Y
Waste toner drive motor
DC brushless motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
Synchronous motor
Synchronous motor
Synchronous motor
Synchronous motor
Synchronous motor
Drives the paper feed section.
Drives the color OPC drum unit.
Drives the black OPC drum unit.
Drives the developing section (CL).
Drives the developing section/transfer section (K).
Drives the fusing unit.
Drives the scanner (reading) section.
Performs offset of paper.
Drives transport between the resist roller and the paper feed
section, transport between the resist roller and the right door
section.
Scans the laser beam
Drives the paper exit roller.
Drives the resist roller and controls ON/OFF.
Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
Transports toner from the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
Stirs waste toner.
CLUM2
MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 10
Note
K. Lamps
CLI
CCFT
DL_Y
DL_M
DL_C
DL_K
HL_UM
HL_US
HL_LM
Signal name
CCFT
CLI
Name
LCD backlight
Scanner lamp
Type
CCFT cool cathode ray tube
Xenon lamp
DL_C
DL_K
DL_M
DL_Y
HL_LM
HL_UM
HL_US
Discharge lamp C
Discharge lamp K
Discharge lamp M
Discharge lamp Y
Heater lamp lower main
Heater lamp upper main
Heater lamp upper sub
LED
LED
LED
LED
Function/Operation
Backlight for the CCD
Radiates lights onto a document for the CCD to scan
document images.
Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
Heats the lower heat roller. (Main)
Heats the upper heat roller. (Main)
Heats the upper heat roller. (Sub)
MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 11
Note
1 : December 15 2005
L. Fans and filters
POFM_R
POFM_F
3
2
HDDFM
CPUFM
PSFM
OZFM
1
Signal name
CPUFM
HDDFM
OZFM
POFM_F
POFM_R
PSFM
1
No.
1
2
3
Name
Controller cooling fan motor
HDD cooling fan motor
Ozone fan motor
Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side)
Paper exit cooling fan motor (R side)
Power cooling fan motor
Name
Ozone filter
Toner filter
Paper exit filter
Function/Operation
Cools the controller PWB.
Cools the HDD.
Exhausts ozone.
Cools the fusing unit.
Cools the fusing unit.
Cools the power unit.
Note
Function/Operation
Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.
Prevents dispersing of toner.
Note
MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 12
M. PWB
DV
32
16
15
31
12
17
14
18
13
LSU
9
10
33
30
37
19
21
29
20
38
28
7
1
6
23
8
control box
27
26
22
11
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
2
3
Name
RD I/F PWB
Tray 1 detection PWB
Tray 2 detection PWB
DC power PWB
Driver main PWB
MC PWB
Primary transfer PWB
AC power PWB
Scanner control PWB
CCD PWB
Phase detection PWB
CL inverter PWB
Document detection light receiving PWB
Document detection light emitting PWB
LCD INV PWB
LVDS PWB
MFP OPE-P PWB
Power SW PWB
HL PWB
Driver sub PWB
Secondary transfer PWB
Temperature/humidity sensor PWB
Manual paper feed width detection PWB
MFPcnt PWB
Mother PWB
PCU PWB
PCU Flash ROM PWB
BD PWB
LSU CNT PWB
LSU thermistor
DL PWB
DV initial PWB
LD PWB
4
34
25
5
24
35
36
Function/Operation
Detects the sensors in the right door unit.
Detects the tray 1.
Detects the tray 2.
Outputs the secondary side voltage.
Drives the transport motor and related sections.
Generates the high voltage for the main charger and the developing bias voltage.
Generates the primary transfer voltage.
Controls the primary side power source.
Controls the scanner section.
Scans the document images.
Adjusts the BL/CL drum phase.
Drives the xenon lamp.
Outputs the document size detection signal.
Emits the document size detection LED lights.
Generates the high voltage for the LCD backlight.
Converts the display signal and outputs to the LCD.
Outputs the key operation signal.
Outputs the ON/OFF control signal of the DC power source.
Controls the heater lamp.
Drives the process motor and related sections.
Generates the secondary transfer voltage and the transfer belt cleaning voltage.
Detects the ambient temperature and humidity.
Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width.
Controls images and the whole machine.
Interfaces the MFPcnt PWB and other PWB.
Controls the engine section.
Controls the PCU PWB.
Detects laser and outputs the synchronous signal.
Controls the LSU.
Measures the temperature in the LSU.
Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
Detects the DV model.
Controls laser lighting.
MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 13
Note
No.
34
35
36
37
38
Name
SCAN IN PWB
DOCC PWB
BOOT ROM PWB
PROGRAM ROM PWB
SCN Flash ROM PWB
HVR PWB
Function/Operation
Rectifies the waveform of scanner image data.
Recognizes the document control pattern.
Stores the program to boot the printer controller.
Stores the program.
Stores the scanner control program.
Divides the primary transfer electrode for each color to improve the transfer capability.
Note
Option
N. Fuses/Thermostats
18
1
2
3
13
14
15
16
17
4
5
6
7
8
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Signal name
HLTS1
HLTS2
HLTS3
F201
F202
F203
F204
F205
F1
F2
F3
F4
F1
F101
F102
F103
F301
F1
Name
Thermostat
Thermostat
Thermostat
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Specifications
Prevents against overheating of the fusing roller.
Prevents against overheating of the fusing roller.
Prevents against overheating of the fusing roller.
T6.3AH250V
T6.3AH250V
T6.3AH250V
T6.3AH250V
T6.3AH250V
20A 125V
20A 125V
T2AH250V
T2AH250V
200mA 250V
125V 12A
T1AH250V
T8AH250V
T5AH250V
1.25A250V
MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 14
9
10
11
12
Section
Fusing unit
Fusing unit
Fusing unit
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
AC power PWB
AC power PWB
AC power PWB
AC power PWB
LCD INV PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
CL invertor PWB
O. Adjustment volumes
VR402
VR205
VR204
VR201
VR203
Signal name
VR201
VR203
VR204
VR205
VR402
Function/ Operation
+12V output adjustment
+24V output adjustment
+5VN output adjustment
+3.3V output adjustment
+5VO, +5VL output adjustment
Section
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
Note
P. Gate
1
2
No.
1
2
Name
ADU reverse gate
ADU gate lower
Function/ Operation
Switches the paper route: discharged to the inner tray or
discharged to the right tray.
Switches the transport route by switchback when paper is
transported to the duplex (ADU) section.
MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 15
Note
Q. Rollers
35
34
32
33
36
37
24
25
27
26
39
38
11
10
28
29
1
3
2
22
23
5
4
8
20
21
31
30
19
17
18
6
15
16
14
7
12
13
9
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Name
Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray)
Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray)
Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray)
Paper feed roller (No. 1 paper feed tray)
Paper pickup roller (No. 1 paper feed tray)
Separation roller (No. 1 paper feed tray)
Paper feed roller (No. 2 paper feed tray)
Paper pickup roller (No. 2 paper feed tray)
Separation roller (No. 2 paper feed tray)
Resist roller (Drive)
11
Resist roller (Idle)
12
Transport roller 1 (Idle)
13
Transport roller 1 (Drive)
14
15
Transport roller 3 (Idle)
Transport roller 4 (Idle)
16
Transport roller 4 (Drive)
17
18
Transport roller 5 (Drive)
Transport roller 5 (Idle)
19
20
Transport roller 6 (Idle)
Transport roller 7 (Idle)
Function/ Operation
Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
Separate paper to prevent against double feed.
Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
Separates paper to prevent against double feed.
Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
Separates paper to prevent against double feed.
Transports paper to the transfer section. Controls the paper transport
timing to adjust relative relations between images and paper.
Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Transports paper from No. 3 and No. 4 paper feed tray to the
transport roller 4.
Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Transports paper from the transport roller 1 and paper feed roller (No.
2 paper feed tray) to the transport roller 7.
Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1 to the transport roller 7.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 16
Note
No.
21
Name
Transport roller 7 (Drive)
22
Transport roller 8 (Idle)
23
24
Transport roller 8 (Drive)
Transport roller 9 (Idle)
25
26
Transport roller 9 (Drive)
Transport roller 10 (Idle)
27
28
Transport roller 10 (Drive)
Transport roller 11 (Idle)
29
30
Transport roller 11 (Drive)
Transport roller 12 (Idle)
31
Transport roller 12 (Drive)
32
Transport roller 13 (Drive)
33
Transport roller 13 (Idle)
34
Paper exit roller 1 (Idle)
35
Paper exit roller 1 (Drive)
36
Paper exit roller 2 (Idle)
37
38
39
Paper exit roller 2 (Drive)
Fusing roller (Heating)
Fusing roller (Pressing)
Function/ Operation
Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1, 2, 3, and 4 to the
transport roller 8.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Transports paper to the resist roller.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Transports paper from the fusing roller to the transport roller 13.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Transports paper from the transport roller 13 to the transport roller 11.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Transports paper from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 12.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Transports paper from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8. /
Transports the paper from the manual paper feed tray to the transport
roller 8.
Transports paper from the transport roller 9 to the transport roller 1. /
Transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Discharges paper. Transports paper to the right paper exit tray.
Transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Discharges paper.
Heats toner on paper, and fuses it onto paper.
Applies a pressure to the fusing roller (heating).
MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 5 – 17
Note
MX2700N
[6]
ADJUSTMENTS
Service Manual
1. General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with
a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest.
Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, however, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
must be observed.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Perform only the necessary adjustments according to the need.
If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would
not complete normally or trouble may occur.
2. Adjustment item list
Job No.
ADJ 1
ADJ 2
ADJ 3
ADJ 4
Adjustment item list
Developing doctor gap adjustment
Developing roller main pole position adjustment
Toner density reference control level setting
High voltage adjustments
ADJ 5
Image density sensor, image registration sensor
adjustment
ADJ 6
ADJ 7
Image skew adjustment (LSU unit)
OPC drum phase adjustment
ADJ 8
Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment
(BK) (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section)
Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section)
Image registration adjustment (Print engine section)
ADJ 9
ADJ 10
ADJ 4A
ADJ 4B
ADJ 4C
ADJ 5A
ADJ 5B
Main charger grid voltage adjustment
Developing bias voltage adjustment
Transfer voltage adjustment
Color image density sensor calibration
Color image density sensor, black image density sensor, image
registration sensor adjustment
ADJ 7A
ADJ 7B
ADJ 8A
OPC drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment)
OPC drum phase adjustment (Manual adjustment)
Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (BK) (Main
scanning direction) (Print engine section) (Manual adjustment)
ADJ 10A
Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction, sub
scanning direction) (Auto adjustment)
Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual
adjustment)
Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual
adjustment)
Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment
Scan image (sub scanning direction) distortion adjustment
Scan image (main scanning direction) distortion adjustment
Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole scanner)
ADJ 10B
ADJ 10C
ADJ 11
ADJ 12
ADJ 13
ADJ 14
ADJ 15
Scan image distortion adjustment
ADJ 11A
ADJ 11B
ADJ 11C
ADJ 11D
Scan image focus adjustment (CCD unit position adjustment)
Scan image skew adjustment (RSPF) (Refer to MX-RPX1 SM.)
Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
ADJ 14A
(Document table mode)
ADJ 14B
Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (RADF
mode) (Refer to the MX-RPX1 SM.)
ADJ 15A
ADJ 15B
ADJ 16
ADJ 17
ADJ 18
ADJ 19
ADJ 20
Scan image off-center adjustment
ADJ 16A
ADJ 16B
Print area (Void area) adjustment (Print engine section)
Copy image position, image loss adjustment
ADJ 18A
Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning
direction) (Document table mode)
Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scanning direction)
(Document table mode)
Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning
direction) (RADF mode) (Refer to the MX-RPX1 SM.)
Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (Sub scanning direction)
(RADF mode) (Refer to the MX-RPX1 SM.)
Scan image off-center (Document table mode)
Scan image off-center (RSPF mode) (Refer to the MX-RPX1 SM.)
Copy image position, image loss adjustment (Document table
mode)
ADJ 18B Copy image position, image loss adjustment (RSPF mode) (Refer to
the MX-RPX1 SM.)
Print lead edge image position adjustment (Printer mode) (Print engine section)
Copy color balance/density adjustment
ADJ 20A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) (Normal document copy
mode)
ADJ 20B Copy color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
ADJ 20C Copy color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
ADJ 20D Copy density adjustment (Each color copy mode) (Whole
adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
ADJ 20E Copy density adjustment (each monochrome copy mode) (Whole
adjustment) (Normally unnecessary to adjust)
ADJ 20F Copy color balance adjustment (Color balance adjustment at each
density level in each color copy mode) (Normally not required)
ADJ 20G Monochrome copy density adjustment (Density adjustment at each
density level in each monochrome copy mode) (Normally not
required)
ADJ 20H Gamma/density adjustment in the text image edge section
(Normally not required)
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 1
Simulation
8-2
8-1
8-6
44-13
44-2
64-1/61-4
50-22
44-31
50-10
50-10
50-22
50-20
50-21
48-1
48-1
48-1
48-1
50-12
50-12
50-10/50-1
50-1 (50-2)
50-6 (50-7)
50-5
63-3 (63-5)
46-24
46-21
46-1
46-2
46-10
46-16
46-27
2 : Jan. 15 2006
Job No.
ADJ 20
ADJ 21
Printer color balance/density adjustment
ADJ 22
ADJ 23
Fusing paper guide position adjustment
Document size sensor adjustment
ADJ 24
ADJ 25
ADJ 26
ADJ 27
Adjustment item list
ADJ 20I Copy color balance adjustment (Single color copy mode) (Normally
not required)
ADJ 20J Auto color balance adjustment by the user (Copy color balance auto
adjustment enable setting and adjustment)
ADJ 20K Background process condition setting in the color auto copy mode
ADJ 20L Color document identification level (ACS operation) setting
ADJ 21A Printer color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
ADJ 21B Printer color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
ADJ 21C Auto color balance adjustment by the user (Copy color balance auto
adjustment ENABLE setting and adjustment)
Copy color balance/density adjustment
ADJ 23A Document size sensor detection point adjustment
ADJ 23B Document size sensor sensitivity adjustment
Manual paper feed tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment
RSPF tray paper size (width) sensor adjustment (Refer to the MX-RPX1 SM.)
Touch panel coordinate setting
Image loss, void area, image off-center, image
ADJ 27A Print image main scanning direction image magnification ratio
magnification ratio auto adjustment with SIM50-28
automatic adjustment
ADJ 27B Image off-center automatic adjustment
ADJ 27C Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image offcenter, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic
adjustment
ADJ 27D SPF mode image off-center, image lead edge position, sub
scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment
Simulation
46-25
26-53
46-33
46-33
67-24
67-25
26-54
41-2
41-2
40-2
53-7
65-1
50-28
50-28
50-28
50-28
3. Details of adjustment
1 Developing doctor gap adjustment
2)
Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw.
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
* When the developing unit is disassembled.
* When the print image density is low.
* When there is a blur on the print image.
* When there is unevenness in the print image density.
* There is abnormally much toner dispersion.
1)
Remove the developing unit from the main unit, and remove
the developing unit upper cover and the developing doctor
cover.
2
1
2 3)
Insert a thickness gauge of 0.40mm between 40mm – 70mm
from the edge of the developing doctor.
70mm
70mm
40mm
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 2
40mm
2 : Jan. 15 2006
4)
Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction, and tighten
the fixing screw of the developing doctor. (Perform the similar
procedure for the front frame and the rear frame.)
5)
Measure the distance between the marking position and position A of the developing unit frame, and check that it is 37.8 ±
0.5mm.
If the distance is not within the above range, adjust the developing roller main pole position in the following procedures.
2 5)
Check that the doctor gaps at two positions in 40mm – 70mm
from the both sides of the developing doctor are in the range of
0.40 ± 0.05mm.
A
37.8 + 0.5mm
* When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the
developing doctor and the developing roller.
37.8 + 0.5mm
70mm
40mm
70mm
6)
40mm
Remove the developing unit front cover, loosen the fixing
screw of the developing roller main pole adjustment plate, and
move the adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.
2 Developing roller main pole position
adjustment
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
* When the developing unit is disassembled.
Repeat procedures 3) – 6) until the developing roller main pole
position comes to the specified range.
* When the print image density is low.
* When there is a blur on the print image.
* When there is unevenness in the print image density.
* There is abnormally much toner dispersion.
7)
After completion of the adjustment of the developing roller
main pole position, fix the developing roller main pole adjustment plate with the fixing screw.
1)
Remove the developing doctor cover, and place the developing unit on a flat surface.
2)
Attach a thread to a needle or a pin.
3)
Hold the thread and bring the needle near the developing
roller. (Do not use a paper clip because it will not provide a correct position.)
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
Mark the developing roller surface on the extension line of the
needle with the needle at 2 – 3mm from the developing roller
surface. (Never touch the needle tip with the developing roller.)
NOTE: Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer is
replaced. Never execute it in the other cases.
4)
3 Toner density reference control level
setting
* When developer is replaced.
2㨪3mm
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 3
1)
With the front cabinet open, enter SIM25-2.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.25-02
AUTOMATIC
DEVELOPER
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K :
xxx
AT DEVE VO_L_K :
xxx
xxx
AT DEVE VO_L_C :
xxx
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M :
xxx
AT DEVE VO_L_M :
xxx
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y :
xxx
M
AT DEVE VO_L_Y :
xxx
EXECUTE
C
EL abnormality
EE-EU
EU abnormality
EE-EC
EC abnormality
Y
1/2
Use SIM24-5 to clear the developer counter.
6)
Use SIM44-27 to clear the half-tone correction data.
NOTE:
EXECUTE
a)
M
When replacing developer, always replace all the three
colors of Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan.
or process interrupt
EXECUTE
If only one color is replaced, color balance may be
adversely affected. Black developer can be replaced individually.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.25-02
DEVELOPER
ADJUSTMENT
TCD_K
:
xx
TCV_K
:
xx
TCD_C
:
xx
TCV_C
:
xx
TCD_M
:
xx
TCV_M
:
xx
TCD_Y
:
xx
TCV_Y
:
xx
K
C
M
b)
EXECUTE
Y
If the above procedure is neglected, the half-tone correction may not be performed correctly.
4 High voltage adjustments
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.25-02
AUTOMATIC
DEVELOPER
AT DEVE VO_L_K :
xxx
xxx
AT DEVE VO_L_C :
xxx
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M :
xxx
AT DEVE VO_L_M :
xxx
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y :
xxx
AT DEVE VO_L_Y :
xxx
EXECUTE
M
Main charger grid voltage adjustment
* When the MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced.
xxx
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C :
C
4-A
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
ADJUSTMENT
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K :
K
After replacement of developer or the photoconductor, be
sure to execute SIM44-27 to clear the half-tone correction
data.
1/1
Adjustment completed
TEST
Detail of error
Sensor output level, 1.5V or below; control
voltage, 8.0V or above
Sensor output level, 3.45V or above;
control voltage, 2.0V or below
Sensor output level, other than 2.5V ± 0.2V
5)
K
AUTOMATIC
Error name
ADJUSTMENT
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C :
K
Error
display
EE-EL
Y
* When U2 trouble occurs.
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
1/2
* When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
1)
Enter SIM8-2 mode.
0
Abnormal
end
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.25-02
AUTOMATIC
DEVELOPER
:
EE-EL
TCV_K
:
TCD_C
:
xx
TCV_C
:
TCD_M
:
EE-EL
TCV_M
:
TCD_Y
:
xx
TCV_Y
:
K
C
M
0
ADJUSTMENT
TCD_K
Y
TEST
MHV/GRID SETTING
A:
EXECUTE
230
1/1
2)
Close the front cabinet.
3)
Select a developing unit to be adjusted.
4)
When [EXECUTE] key it pressed, it is highlighted. The developing roller rotates, and the toner sensor detects toner density,
and the output value is displayed.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08-02
AND OUTPUT
xxx
850
MIDDLE
A : xxx
;
MIDDLE SPEED
GB_K
B: xxx
;
MIDDLE SPEED
GB_C
C: xxx
;
MIDDLE SPEED
GB_M
D: xxx
;
MIDDLE SPEED
GB_Y
LOW
EXECUTE
10-key
OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.
The above operation is executed for 3 minutes, and the average value of the toner density sensor detection level is set
(saved) as the reference toner density control value.
0
When the reference toner density control adjustment operation
is completed, [EXECUTE] key display return, to normal from
highlight. This makes you know whether the adjustment operation is completed or not.
TEST
MHV/GRID SETTING
A:
The above operation is executed each of the lower speed
mode and the middle speed mode, and the reference toner
density control value is set for each of them.
230
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08-02
xxx
850
MIDDLE
AND OUTPUT
A : xxx
;
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_K
B: xxx
;
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_C
C: xxx
;
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_M
D: xxx
;
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_Y
LOW
EXECUTE
OK
NOTE: If the operation is interrupted within 3 minutes, the
adjustment result is not reflected (enabled).
2)
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during rotation, the operation is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and
the scroll key.
3)
Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle
speed mode and press [OK] key.
If [EE-EU], [EE-EL], or [EE-EG] is displayed, setting of the reference toner density control value is not completed normally.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 4
Item
MIDDLE
LOW
Mode
A
MIDDLE SPEED GB_K
K
B
MIDDLE SPEED GB_C
C
C
MIDDLE SPEED GB_M
M
D
MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y
Y
A
LOW SPEED GB_K
K
B
LOW SPEED GB_C
C
C
LOW SPEED GB_M
M
D
LOW SPEED GB_Y
Y
Main charger grid voltage
(Middle speed mode)
Main charger grid voltage
(Middle speed mode)
Main charger grid voltage
(Middle speed mode)
Main charger grid voltage
(Middle speed mode)
Main charger grid voltage
(Low speed mode)
Main charger grid voltage
(Low speed mode)
Main charger grid voltage
(Low speed mode)
Main charger grid voltage
(Low speed mode)
Adjustment value
Adjustment Default
range
value
230 – 850
615
Monitor (MC/DV high voltage PWB)
Monitor voltage
Pin
Connector
(Specified value)
No.
53.6 ± 1.61V
CNMON
8
Actual
voltage
–615V
230 – 850
615
53.6 ± 1.61V
CNMON
6
–615V
230 – 850
615
53.6 ± 1.61V
CNMON
4
–615V
230 – 850
615
53.6 ± 1.61V
CNMON
2
–615V
230 – 850
605
52.7 ± 1.58V
CNMON
8
–605V
230 – 850
605
52.7 ± 1.58V
CNMON
6
–605V
230 – 850
605
52.7 ± 1.58V
CNMON
4
–605V
230 – 850
605
52.7 ± 1.58V
CNMON
2
–605V
Remark: By setting the default value, the specified voltage is
normally outputted.
2)
Open the PWB holder.
3)
Enter SIM8-2 mode.
The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label
attached to the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. Enter that value.
4)
Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and
the scroll key.
5)
Check the relationship between the pin No. of the connector
CNMON on the MC/DV high voltage PWB and each adjustment mode.
6)
Apply a digital multi-meter to the connector CNMON pin on the
MC/DV high voltage PWB corresponding to the adjusted
mode.
7)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
The main charger grid voltage is outputted for 30sec.
If this procedure is executed for a long time, the OPC drum
and the developing roller may be adversely affected. Use this
procedure as short as possible.
GBK:XXX
GBC:XXX
GBM:XXX
If possible, it is recommendable to use an unnecessary developing unit and an unnecessary OPC drum for this adjustment.
GBY:XXX
When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed
mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are automatically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a certain relationship.
To adjust all the modes individually, first adjust the middle speed
mode, and then adjust the other mode.
If the middle speed mode is adjusted after adjustment of all the
modes individually, the adjustment values of the other modes are
automatically changed. Use care for that.
Therefore, unless there may be an abnormality in the output voltage, there is no need to check the output value.
If it must be checked that the normal voltage is outputted or if an
adjustment is required by referring to the output voltage, follow the
procedures below.
1)
8)
Check the monitor voltage with the digital multi-meter.
If the monitor voltage is not in the range of the specified values
shown in the table above, change the adjustment value and
adjust again. If the specified value voltage is not obtained even
though the adjustment value is changed, the following parts
may be defective.
MC/DV high voltage PWB
PCU PWB
Developing unit
OPC drum unit
High voltage circuit electrode
4-B
Developing bias voltage adjustment
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
Remove the main unit rear cover.
* When MC/DV high voltage power PWB is replaced.
* When U2 trouble occurs.
* When PCU PWB is replaced.
* When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
2
1
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 5
1)
Enter SIM8-1 mode.
0
TEST
DV
A:
AND
xxx
ġ 0
700
MIDDLE
Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and
the scroll key.
3)
Enter the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle
speed mode and press [OK] key.
CLOSE
SIMULATIONġ NO.08-01
SETTING
2)
OUTPUT
Aȇxxx
Ȉġ MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_K
Bȇxxx
Ȉġ MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_C
Cȇxxx
Ȉġ MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_M
Dȇxxx
Ȉġ MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_Y
LOW
EXECUTE
OK
EXECUTE
10-key
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.
0
TEST
DV
SETTING
A:
AND
xxx
0
CLOSE
SIMULATIONġ NO.08-01
700
MIDDLE
OUTPUT
Aȇxxx
Ȉ
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_K
Bȇxxx
Ȉ
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_C
Cȇxxx
Ȉ
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_M
Dȇxxx
Ȉ
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_Y
LOW
EXECUTE
Item
MIDDLE
LOW
OK
Mode
A
MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K
K
B
MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C
C
C
MIDDLE SPEED DVB_M
M
D
MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y
Y
A
LOW SPEED DVB_K
K
B
LOW SPEED DVB_C
C
C
LOW SPEED DVB_M
M
D
LOW SPEED DVB_Y
Y
Developing bias voltage
(Middle speed mode)
Developing bias voltage
(Middle speed mode)
Developing bias voltage
(Middle speed mode)
Developing bias voltage
(Middle speed mode)
Developing bias voltage
(Low speed mode)
Developing bias voltage
(Low speed mode)
Developing bias voltage
(Low speed mode)
Developing bias voltage
(Low speed mode)
Adjustment value
Adjustment Default
range
value
0 – 700
450
Monitor (MC/DV high voltage PWB)
Monitor voltage
Pin
Connector
(Specified value)
No.
12.1 ± 0.36V
CNMON
7
Actual
voltage
–450V
0 – 700
450
12.1 ± 0.36V
CNMON
5
–450V
0 – 700
450
12.1 ± 0.36V
CNMON
3
–450V
0 – 700
450
12.1 ± 0.36V
CNMON
1
–450V
0 – 700
430
11.4 ± 0.34V
CNMON
7
–430V
0 – 700
430
11.4 ± 0.34V
CNMON
5
–430V
0 – 700
430
11.4 ± 0.34V
CNMON
3
–430V
0 – 700
430
11.4 ± 0.34V
CNMON
1
–430V
Remark: By setting the default value, the specified voltage is
normally outputted.
Therefore, unless there may be an abnormality in the output voltage, there is no need to check the output value.
The adjustment value of each color mode is specified on the label
attached to the MC/DV high voltage power PWB. Enter that value.
If it must be checked that the normal voltage is outputted or if an
adjustment is required by referring to the output voltage, follow the
procedures below.
1)
Remove the main unit rear cover.
2
1
DVK:XXX
DVC:XXX
DVM:XXX
DVY:XXX
When the adjustment value (specified value) of the middle speed
mode is set, the adjustment values of the other modes are automatically set according to the middle speed mode setting in a certain relationship.
To adjust all the modes individually, first adjust the middle speed
mode, then adjust the other mode.
If the middle speed mode is adjusted after adjustment of all the
modes individually, the adjustment values of the other modes are
automatically changed. Use care for that.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 6
1 : Dec. 15 2005
2)
Open the PWB frame.
3)
Enter SIM8-1 mode.
4)
Select an output mode to be adjusted with the mode key and
the scroll key.
5)
Check the relationship between the pin No. of the connector
CNMON on the MC/DV high voltage PWB and each adjustment mode.
4-C
Transfer voltage adjustment
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
* When the TC high voltage power PWB is replaced.
* When U2 trouble occurs.
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
* When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
1)
Enter SIM8-6 mode.
0
CNMON
1
CLOSE
SIMULATIONġ NO.08-06
TEST
THV SETTING AND OUTPUT
A:ġ
xxx
ġ 0
255
Aȇxxx
Ȉ
TC1 LOW SPEED CL K
Bȇxxx
Ȉ
TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K
Cȇxxx
Ȉ
TC1 LOW SPEED CLġ CMY
Dȇxxx
Ȉ
TC1 MIDDLE SPEED_CL CMY
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
10-key
EXECUTE
6)
Apply a digital multi-meter to the connector CNMON pin on the
MC/DV high voltage PWB corresponding to the adjusted
mode.
7)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
8)
Check the monitor voltage with the digital multi-meter.
or after 30 sec.
0
CLOSE
SIMULATIONġ NO.08-06
TEST
The developing bias voltage is outputted for 30sec.
THV SETTING AND OUTPUT
A:ġ
If the monitor voltage is not in the range of the specified values
shown in the table above, change the adjustment value and
adjust again. If the specified value voltage is not obtained even
though the adjustment value is changed, the following parts
may be defective.
xxx
0
255
Aȇxxx
Ȉġ TC1 LOW SPEEDġġCL K
Bȇxxx
Ȉġ TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K
Cȇxxx
Ȉġ TC1 LOW SPEED CL CMY
Dȇxxx
Ȉ
TC1 MIDDLE SPEED_CL CMY
EXECUTE
OK
MC/DV high voltage PWB
2)
Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
PCU PWB
3)
Enter an adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK]
key.
Developing unit
By setting the default value (specified value), the specified
voltage is outputted.
OPC drum unit
High voltage circuit electrode
1
OK
Item
Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
TC1 LOW SPEED CL K
TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K
TC1 LOW SPEED CL CMY
TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL CMY
TC1 LOW SPEED BW K
TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K
TC2 PLAIN CL SPX
TC2 PLAIN CL DPX
TC2 PLAIN BW SPX
TC2 PLAIN BW DPX
TC2 HEAVY1 CL SPX
TC2 HEAVY1 BW SPX
TC2 OHP CL
TC2 OHP BW
TC2 ENVELOPE CL
TC2 ENVELOPE BW
TC2 CLEANING
TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD
TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD
TC2 CLEAN CLEANING
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the transfer voltage is outputted.
Content
Primary transfer
bias reference
value
COLOR
BLACK
Secondary transfer
bias reference
value
COLOR
BLACK
COLOR
BLACK
COLOR
BLACK
COLOR
BLACK
Secondary transfer
cleaning bias
reference value
K
Low speed
Middle speed
CMY
Low speed
Middle speed
K
Low speed
Middle speed
Normal Front surface
paper
Back surface
Front surface
Back surface
Heavy paper
OHP
Envelope
Cleaning process
Low speed print
Middle speed print
Cleaning
Setting
range
Default
value
Actual output
setting range
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
232
232
139
139
232
232
100
100
90
90
69
69
60
60
184
184
79
72
72
156
–500V to 5000V
–500V to 5000V
–500V to 5000V
–500V to 5000V
–500V to 5000V
–500V to 5000V
2µA to 45µA
2µA to 45µA
2µA to 45µA
2µA to 45µA
2µA to 45µA
2µA to 45µA
2µA to 45µA
2µA to 45µA
2µA to 45µA
2µA to 45µA
2µA to 45µA
–50V to –1500
–50V to –1500V
–50V to –1500V
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 7
Default
value
Actual
output value
4500V
4500V
2500V
2500V
4500V
4500V
12.5µA
12.5µA
10µA
10µA
6µA
6µA
4µA
4µA
30µA
30µA
8µA
–200V
–200V
–800V
5 Image density sensor, image regis-
4)
Open the right cover unit (secondary transfer unit section).
5)
Open the process front cover, and pull out the primary transfer
belt unit.
6)
Install the image density sensor calibration jig to the sensor
housing section.
tration sensor adjustment
There are some assembly variations in the image density sensor
section. Therefore, the absolute detection level differs in each
machine. To correct this, calibration is executed.
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
* When the image density sensor is replaced.
* When the image resist sensor is replaced.
* When U2 trouble occurs.
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
* When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
The targets of the adjustment are the color image density sensor,
the black image density sensor, and the image registration sensor.
There are following adjustment methods.
* Color image density sensor adjustment (Calibration with the
adjustment jig) SIM44-13
* Black image density sensor and the image registration sensor
adjustment SIM44-2
Engage the projection (c) in the sensor housing groove, and
slide it to the rear frame side.
NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, check to confirm the following items.
* Check to confirm that the color image density sensor, the black
image density sensor, and the image registration sensor are
clean.
C
C
* Check to confirm that the image density sensor calibration plate
is clean.
* Check to confirm that the transfer belt is clean and free from
scratches.
5-A
Color image density sensor calibration
1)
Open the front cabinet of the main unit, and remove the waste
toner box.
2)
Remove the primary transfer unit fixing screw.
7)
Turn on the power and enter SIM44-13 mode.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION㩷 NO.44-13
PATCH SEAL ADJUSTMENT
PCS CL CARB OUT :
xxx
PCS CL DARK
:
xxx
PCS CL LED ADJ
:
xxx
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
3)
Turn to the transfer belt tension release cam and release the
primary transfer belt tension.
1/1
EXECUTE
or when the color sensor
adjustment is completed
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION㩷 NO.44-13
PATCH SEAL ADJUSTMENT
PCS CL CARB OUT :
xxx
PCS CL DARK
:
xxx
PCS CL LED ADJ
:
xxx
UN LOCK
EXECUTE
1/1
8)
Close the right cover unit (secondary transfer unit section).
9)
Install the waste toner bottle to the main unit.
10) Close the front cabinet.
11) Press [EXECUTE] key.
NOTE: When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer
unit is released manually, turn on the power again after completion of the work. (Power OFF-ON) This procedure initializes
the transfer roller to return it to the home position.
Color image sensor calibration is automatically executed.
When the operation is completed, the adjustment result is displayed and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 8
Display/Item
A
PCS_CL
CARB OUT
B
PCS_CL
DARK
PCS_CL
LED ADJ
C
Content
Color image density sensor
LED current adjustment
target value
Color image density sensor
dark-voltage level
Color image density sensor
LED current adjustment
target value (PCS CL CARB
OUT) registered LED current
level
Adjustment
value range
1 – 255
Default
value
108
0 – 255
0
1 – 255
21
5-B
1)
0
If an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised.
* Color image density sensor
* PCU PWB
* Image sensor calibration jig (standard reflection sheet dirt,
scratch, discoloration)
NOTE: Store the image sensor calibration jig under low temperature, low humidity and dark place.
REGIST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-02
PROCON GAIN ADJUSTMENT
In that case, check the following sections for any abnormality. If any
abnormality is found, repair and adjust again.
Display/Item
A
PCS_CL LED ADJ
B
PCS _K LED ADJ
C
PCS_CL DARK
D
PCS_K DARK
E
PCS_K GRND
F
PCS_K BELT MAX
G PCS_K BELT MIN
H
PCS_K BELT DIF
I
REG_F LED ADJ
J
REG_R LED ADJ
K
REG_F DARK
L
REG_R DARK
M REG_F GRND
N
REG_R GRND
O REG_F BELTMAX
P
REG_F BELT MIN
Q REG_F BELT DIF
R
REG_R BELT MAX
S
REG_R BELT MIN
T
REG_R BELT DIF
U
REG_F PATCH (K)
V
REG_F PATCH (C)
W REG_F PATCH (M)
X
REG_F PATCH (Y)
Y
REG_R PATCH (K)
Z
REG_R PATCH (C)
AA REG_R PATCH (M)
AB REG_R PATCH (Y)
Enter SIM44-2 mode.
TEST
If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.
PRO CON
Color image density sensor, black image
density sensor, image registration sensor
adjustment
PCS_CL LED ADJ :
xx
PCS_㧷 GRND
:
xx
PCS_㧷 LED ADJ :
xx
PCS_K BELT MAX :
xx
PCS_CL DARK
:
xx
PCS_KBELTMIN :
xx
PCS_K DARK
:
xx
PCS_KBELTDIF :
xx
EXECUTE
2)
1/4
Press [EXECUTE] key.
The color image density sensor, the black image density sensor, and the image registration sensor are automatically
adjusted.
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is
displayed and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
Content
Color image density sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value
Black image density sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value
Color image sensor dark voltage
Black image density sensor dark voltage
Belt base detection level when completion of Item B adjustment
Belt base detection level (Max.)
Belt base detection level (Min.)
Belt base detection level difference (Item F – Item G)
Image registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value F
Image registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value R
Image registration sensor dark voltage F
Image registration sensor dark voltage R
Belt base detection level when completion of Item I adjustment
Belt base detection level when completion of Item J adjustment
Belt base detection level (Max.) F
Belt base detection level (Min.) F
Belt base detection level difference (Item O – Item P)
Belt base detection level (Max.) R
Belt base detection level (Min.) R
Belt base detection level difference (Item R – Item S)
Patch detection level F (K)
Patch detection level F (C)
Patch detection level F (M)
Patch detection level F (Y)
Patch detection level R (K)
Patch detection level R (C)
Patch detection level R (M)
Patch detection level R (Y)
If the adjustment is not completed normally, "ERROR" is displayed.
In that case, check the following sections for any abnormality.
If any abnormality is found, repair and adjust again.
If an error occurs, the adjustment result is not revised.
* Color image density sensor
* Black image density sensor
* Image registration sensor
* PCU PWB
* Transfer belt (dirt, scratch)
* Transfer belt cleaner
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 9
Adjustment value range
1 – 255
1 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
1 – 255
1 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 256
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
Default value
21
21
0
0
0
0
0
0
56
56
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2 : Jan. 15 2006
6 Image skew adjustment (LSU unit)
Method 2: Use the right angle sides of A3 or 11 x 8.5 paper for
judgment of good or no good.
2
NOTE:
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
* When the LSU (writing) unit is removed from the main unit.
IN the case of Method 2, the right angle of paper to be used
may not be exact. Be sure to check the right angle of paper to
be used in advance.
* When a color image registration mistake occurs.
(Method 1)
* When the unit is installed or when the installing site is changed.
(Required depending on the cases.)
a) Measure the length of the diagonal lines from the cross
point of the outside cross pattern.
* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced.
* When there is an uneven density area or a difference in color
balance in the main scanning direction (back and forth).
R
* When the OPC drum drive unit is replaced.
* When the primary transfer unit is replaced.
* When the color phase is not matched by the color balance
adjustment.
1)
Diagonal line D
Enter SIM61-4 mode.
0
CLOSE
SIMULATIONġ NO.61-04
TEST
LSU POSITION ADJUSTMENT (SELF
A:
xxx
1
Aȇxxx
Ȉ
MULTICOUNT
Bȇ
Ȉ
PAPERȇCS1
x
Diagonal line C
PRINT)
999
F
EXECUTE
10-key
OK
b) Calculate the difference between the measured lengths C
and D of the diagonal lines.
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
c) Check to insure that the difference between C and D is in
the following range.
or end of print
C – D = ± 0.8mm
0
TEST
LSU POSITION ADJUSTMENT
A:
2
(SELF
PRINT)
Aȇxxx
Ȉ
MULTICOUNT
Bȇ
Ȉ
PAPERȇCS1
x
If the difference between C and D is in the above range,
there is no need to adjust.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.61-04
(Method 2)
a) Fit the three cross points of the cross patterns in a row with
the side of A3 or 11 x 8.5 paper for checking for any skew
(right angle).
1 999
EXECUTE
OK
A3 or 11 x 8.5 paper
2)
Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11 x 17) paper in it by
changing the value of set item B.
3)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
0.5 mm or less
The check pattern is printed out.
Comparison line
0.5 mm or less
Direction A
R
Comparison line
Direction A
R
Direction B
Direction B
Reference line
F
The cross patterns in a row
Reference line
b) Measure the shortest distance between the cross pattern
on the extended line of the vertical line and the paper side.
F
2 4)
If the above distance is 0.5mm or less, there is no need to
Check the printed black image for any skew (right angle).
adjust.
Measure the right angle level by using the six cross patterns
printed in black.
There are following two methods of checking the black image
for any skew (right angle).
If not, execute the following procedures.
5)
Open the front cabinet, and remove the waste toner box.
Method 1: Measure the length of the diagonal lines from the
cross point of the cross pattern. Check the difference in the
length of the diagonal lines for judgment of good or no good.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 10
2 : Jan. 15 2006
6)
Loosen the LSU (writing) unit fixing screws (2 pcs.) and shift
the skew adjustment screw in the arrow direction to adjust the
LSU (writing) unit skew.
11) Turn the image skew adjustment screw of the target color to
adjust.
(When Method 1 is used to check the black image for any
skew (right angle) in procedure 4)
2
When the lengths of the diagonal line are C > D, shift the
adjustment screw in the direction of Y.
Y
M
C
When the lengths of the diagonal line are C < D, shift the
adjustment screw in the direction of X.
(When Method 2 is used to check the black image for any
skew (right angle) in procedure 4)
If the image is skewed in the arrow direction of A, shift the
adjustment screw to X direction. If the image is skewed in the
arrow direction of B, shift the adjustment screw to Y direction.
When each adjustment screw is turned, it clicks. Turn it by
5 – 6 clicks and the check pattern is changed by 1 step (1
dot size).
Y
When the image skew pattern on the front frame side is
skewed in the arrow direction of A (to the smaller character)
from the rear frame side, turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise. When the image is skewed in the arrow direction of
B (to the larger character), turn the adjustment screw clockwise.
X
12) Print the check pattern.
13) Check the color image skew pattern.
Repeat procedures 11) – 13) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
7)
Install the waste toner box, and close the front cabinet.
8)
Execute procedures 3) – 4).
The image skew adjustment (LSU unit) is executed by changing
the parallelism of the LSU unit scan laser beam for the OPC drum.
(Repeat procedures 5) – 8) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.)
9)
If the adjustment result reaches the satisfactory level, tighten
the adjustment screw.
(The black image skew adjustment is completed with the
above.)
10) In the above black image skew adjustment, check the color
image skew pattern printed when completion of the adjustment.
R
7 OPC drum phase adjustment
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
* When the OPC drum is replaced.
* When the OPC drum is removed from the main unit.
* When the OPC drum drive section is disassembled.
* When the OPC drum drive unit is replaced.
* When U2 trouble occurs.
* When the PCU MAIN PWB is replaced.
* When EEPROM on the PCU MAIN PWB is replaced.
*B
Magenta
Cyan
Yellow
Direction A
*A
Direction B
*B
F
*A: Rough adjustment pattern
*B: Fine adjustment pattern
In each Y/M/C color print pattern printed separately in the front
frame direction and in the rear frame direction, note the same
print color pattern and check to confirm that the difference in
the highest density sections is within ± 1 step.
(Compare the front and the rear frame positions of the samecolor print color patterns. All the highest density sections of all
the print color patterns may not be aligned on a line. Compare
only the same-color patterns.)
If the above condition is not satisfied, execute the procedures
below.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 11
7-A
1)
OPC drum phase adjustment (Auto adjustment)
Enter SIM50-22 mode.
7-B
1)
OPC drum phase adjustment (Manual
adjustment)
Enter SIM44-31 mode.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-22
AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATIONɕDLUM POSITION
C
M
Y
,MAIN F
MAIN R
SUB
PHASE
xxx (xx)
xxx (xx)
xxx (xx)
xxx (xx)
xxx (xx)
xxx (xx)
xxx (xx)
xxx (xx)
REGIST
DRUM POS
0
DRUM
POSITION SETTING
Aȇ x
A:
x
ġ 1
xxx (xx)
CLOSE
SIMULATIONġ NO.44-31
TEST
Ȉġ PRINT MODEȇSETġ VALUE
Bȇ x
Ȉġ COLOR
Cȇ x
Ȉ
PAPERSELECT
3
xxx (xx)
ALL
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
1/1
OK
10-key
EXECUTE
Normal end
OK
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATIONġ NO.50-22
0
AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION & DLUM POSITION
CLOSE
SIMULATIONġ NO.44-31
TEST
ġ NOW EXECUTING …
DRUM
POSITION SETTING
Aȇ x
A:ġ
x
Ȉġ COLOR
Cȇ x
Ȉ
PAPERSELECT
3ȯ
1
EXECUTE
Ȉġ PRINT MODEȇSETġ VALUE
Bȇ x
EXECUTE
Abnormal end
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
0
TEST
or end of print
CLOSE
SIMULATIONġ NO.50-22
AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION & DLUM POSITION
PRESS
[EXECUTE] TO
0
START
DRUM
POSITION SETTING
A:
x
EXECUTE
1
Aȇ x
Ȉ
PRINT MODEȇSETġ VALUE
Bȇ x
Ȉ
COLOR
Cȇ x
Ȉ
PAPERSELECT
3
Press [ALL] key.
EXECUTE
(The machine enters the OPC drum phase adjustment mode/
image registration adjustment (auto adjustment) mode, and
both adjustments are executed simultaneously in this mode.)
The OPC drum phase adjustment and the image registration
adjustment can be individually executed by [REGIST] button
and [DRUM POS] button. Since, however, the image registration adjustment must be executed when the OPC drum phase
adjustment is completed, both adjustment are executed in this
adjustment simultaneously.
3)
CLOSE
SIMULATIONġ NO.44-31
TEST
ERRORȇTONNER EMPTY
2)
OK
10-key
OK
0
The OPC drum phase adjustment and the image registration
adjustment are executed automatically.
* After completion of the adjustment, the drum motor stops and
[EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display and the adjustment result is displayed.
CLOSE
SIMULATIONġ NO.44-31
TEST
DRUM
Press [EXECUTE] key.
OK
POSITION SETTING
A:ġ
x
ġ 1
Aȇ x
Ȉ
PRINT MODEȇ45Ɏ
Bȇ x
Ȉ
COLOR
Cȇ x
Ȉ
PAPERSELECT
3
EXECUTE
OK
MAIN, SUB: Image regist adjustment value is displayed.
( ) is the difference from the previous adjustment value.
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
Example: This time 105.0, previous time 103.0: 105.0 (+2)
or end of print
PHASE: OPC drum phase adjustment value is displayed.
0
( ) is the previous adjustment value.
Example: This time 90°, previous time 45°: 3 (2)
* In case of an error, "ERROR" is displayed with the details.
TEST
DRUM
CLOSE
SIMULATIONġ NO.44-31
POSITION SETTING
A:ġ
1
1
Aȇ 1
Ȉ
PRINT MODEȇ45
Bȇ 2
Ȉ
COLOR
Cȇ 2
Ȉ
3
EXECUTE
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 12
OK
2)
Enter "1" with 10-key in the PRINT MODE of set item A, and
press [OK] key.
3)
Select the paper feed stage with A3 (or 11 x 17) in it with
PAPER SELECT of set item C, and press [OK] key.
4)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
The adjustment patterns (8 pages) are printed.
8 Print engine image magnification
ratio adjustment (BK) (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section)
8-A
Print engine image magnification ratio
adjustment (BK) (Main scanning direction)
(Print engine section) (Manual adjustment)
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced.
* When U2 trouble occurs.
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
* When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
1)
Enter SIM50-10 mode.
8
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-10
TEST
PAPER
CENTER
A:
OFFSET
xxx
SETUP
Aȇxxx
Ȉ
BK-MAG
Bȇ xx
Ȉ
MTF
Cȇ xx
Ȉ
CS1
Dȇ xx
Ȉ
CS2
64 140
Each identification number ("1" – "8") is printed on each printed
page of 8 adjustment patterns.
5)
EXECUTE
Check the deflection in 94mm pitch cycle of each C/M/Y print
pattern. Select a print pattern of the smallest deflection for
each color of C/M/Y, and use the pattern identification number
as the adjustment value, and enter it to set item B. Press [OK]
key.
OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
end of print
0
TEST
PAPER
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-10
CENTER
OFFSET
xxx
SETUP
Aȇxxx
Ȉ
BK-MAG
Bȇxx
Ȉ
MTF
Cȇxx
Ȉ
CS1
Dȇxx
Ȉ
CS2
64 140ġ
EXECUTE
OK
2)
Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper in the paper feed tray.
3)
Select the paper feed tray set in procedure 2) with the scroll
key.
4)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
5)
Check that the inside dimension of the printed half tone is 240
± 0.5mm.
The check pattern is printed.
94mm
94mm
94mm
94mm
NOTE: If there is a peculiar deflection other than the drum cycle
(94mm pitch), check the following conditions.
* OPC drum drive section
* Transfer belt drive section
* Paper feed drive section
* Each motor speed set value (Set value of SIM48-6)
If the above condition is not satisfied, execute the procedures
below.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 13
6)
Change the set value of set item A.
When the set value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed
by 0.1mm.
When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification
ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set
value is decreased, the BK image magnification ratio in the
main scanning direction is decreased.
Repeat procedures 2) – 6) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
9 Image off-center adjustment (Print
engine section)
Display/Item
C
CS1
D
CS2
E
CS3
F
CS4
G
LCC
H
ADU
I
J
MULTI COUNT
PAPER
MFT
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
* When [ADJ8] print engine image magnification ratio (BK) (main
scanning direction) is performed.
* When a paper tray is replaced.
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
* When the manual feed tray is replaced.
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
CS 1
* When the duplex section is disassembled.
* When the duplex section is installed or replaced.
CS 2
* When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replaced.
CS 3
* When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled.
* When the regist roller section is disassembled.
CS 4
* When U2 trouble occurs.
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
K
* When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
(Caution)
* Before execution of this adjustment, check the following item.
* Check to insure that the print engine image magnification ratio
adjustment (BK) (main scanning direction) has been properly
adjusted.
1)
Enter SIM50-10 mode.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-10
LCC
YES
Print off-center adjustment
value (Paper feed tray 1)
Print off-center adjustment
value (Paper feed tray 2)
Print off-center adjustment
value (Paper feed tray 3)
Print off-center adjustment
value (Paper feed tray 4)
Print off-center adjustment
value (LCC)
Print off-center adjustment
value (ADU)
Note: Before execution of
this adjustment, check to
insure that the adjustment
items A – G have been
properly adjusted. If not,
this adjustment cannot be
made properly.
Print quantity
Paper feed Manual paper
tray select feed tray
Paper feed
tray 1
Paper feed
tray 2
Paper feed
tray 3
Paper feed
tray 4
LCC
Duplex
Selected
print select
Set
range
1 – 99
Default
value
50
1 – 99
50
1 – 99
50
1 – 99
50
1 – 99
50
1 – 99
50
1 – 999
1–6 1
1
2 (CS 1)
2
3
4
5
0–1
6
0
1 (NO)
3)
Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper in the paper feed tray selected in procedure 2).
4)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
5)
Check the adjustment pattern image position.
The adjustment pattern is printed.
Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and the
rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern, and check that
all the following conditions are satisfied.
0
TEST
DUPLEX
Content
PAPER CENTER OFFSET SET UP
A:
xxx
A : xxx
; BK- MAG
B : xx
; MTF
C : xx
; CS1
D : xx
; CS2
[ 60~140 ]
EXECUTE
OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-10
PAPER CENTER OFFSET SET UP
A:
xxx
A : xxx
; BK- MAG
B : xx
; MTF
C : xx
; CS1
D : xx
; CS2
[ 60~140 ]
EXECUTE
2)
OK
Select set item J with the scroll key and enter the value corresponding to the paper feed tray to be adjusted.
Display/Item
A
BK-MAG
B
MFT
Content
Main scan print
magnification ratio BK
Print off-center adjustment
value (Manual feed tray)
Set
range
60 – 140
Default
value
100
1 – 99
50
RV: REAR VOID AREA
FV: FRONT VOID AREA
RV + FV ≤ 4.0mm
RV = 2.0 ± 2.0mm
FV = 2.0 ± 2.0mm
If the above conditions are not satisfied, execute the procedures below.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 14
6)
Select the paper feed mode adjustment item (B – H) to be
adjusted with the scroll key.
7)
Change the adjustment value.
* Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (BK) (Main
scanning direction) (Print engine section)
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
printed.
10-A Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction, sub scanning direction)
(Auto adjustment)
When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pattern is shifted to the front frame side. When it is decreased, the
adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side.
In this adjustment, the image registration adjustment in the main
scanning direction and that in the sub scanning direction are executed simultaneously and automatically.
When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance is
changed by about 0.1mm.
1)
Enter the adjustment value and press [OK] or [EXECUTE] key.
0
Repeat procedures 3) – 7) until the conditions of procedure 5)
are satisfied.
8)
Enter SIM50-22 mode.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATIONġ NO.50-22
In case a satisfactory result cannot be obtained by repeating
the above procedures, perform the following procedure.
ġġ DLUM POSITION
AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION &
,MAIN F
MAIN R
SUB
Loosen the paper feed tray off-center adjustment screws (2
pcs.) at the center section of the lift plate of the paper feed tray,
and change the gear unit position in the front/back frame direction. Repeat the adjustment procedures from 4).
C
xxx (x)
xxx (x)
xxx (x)
M
xxx (x)
xxx (x)
xxx (x)
Y
xxx(x) ġġġġ
xxx (x)
xxx (x)
REGIST
DRUM POS
PHASE
xxx (x)
ALL
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
1/1
Normal end
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATIONġ NO.50-22
AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION & DLUM POSITION
ġ NOW
EXECUTING…
EXECUTE
Abnormal end
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATIONġ NO.50-22
AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION & DLUM POSITION
PRESS
[EXECUTE] TO
START
ERRORȇTONNER EMPTY
EXECUTE
10 Image registration adjustment (Print
engine section)
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced.
* When the LSU (writing) unit is removed from the main unit.
* When the color image registration mistake in the main scanning
direction occurs.
* When the color image registration mistake in the sub scanning
direction occurs.
* When the unit is installed or when the installing place is changed.
* When maintenance is executed. (Replacement of the OPC drum,
the OPC cartridge, the transfer unit, the transfer belt, etc.)
2)
Press [REGIST] key to select the image registration adjustment auto adjustment mode.
3)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the image registration auto
adjustment is started. After completion of the adjustment,
[EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display and the adjustment result is displayed.
It takes about 40 sec to complete the adjustment.
Display/Item
REGIST
MAIN
F
* When [ADJ8] print engine image magnification ratio (BK) (main
scanning direction) is performed.
Content
C
M
* When U2 trouble occurs.
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
* When EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
■ Note before adjustment
(Before execution of this adjustment, all the following adjustments
must have been completed.)
* Image skew adjustment (LSU (writing) unit)
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 15
Y
Image registration
adjustment value (Main
scanning direction)
(Cyan) (F side)
Image registration
adjustment value (Main
scanning direction)
(Magenta) (F side)
Image registration
adjustment value (Main
scanning direction)
(Yellow) (F side)
Adjustment
value range
1.0 – 199.0
Default
value
100
1.0 – 199.0
100
1.0 – 199.0
100
Display/Item
REGIST
MAIN
R
Content
C
M
Y
SUB
C
M
Y
Image registration
adjustment value (Main
scanning direction)
(Cyan) (R side)
Image registration
adjustment value (Main
scanning direction)
(Magenta) (R side)
Image registration
adjustment value (Main
scanning direction)
(Yellow) (R side)
Image registration
adjustment value (Sub
scanning direction)
(Cyan)
Image registration
adjustment value (Sub
scanning direction)
(Magenta)
Image registration
adjustment value (Sub
scanning direction)
(Yellow)
Adjustment
value range
1.0 – 199.0
Default
value
100
10-B Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
1)
1.0 – 199.0
Enter SIM50-20 mode.
0
100
CLOSE
SIMULATIONġ NO.50-20
TEST
REGISTRATIONġ ADJUSTMENT : FRONT-REAR
1.0 – 199.0
A:ġ
100
xxx
DIRECTION
Aȇxxx
Ȉ
CYAN(FRONT)
Bȇxxx
Ȉ
CYAN(REAR)
Cȇxxx
Ȉ
MAGENTA(FRONT)
Dȇxxx
Ȉ
MAGENTA(REAR)
ġ 1 199
1.0 – 199.0
EXECUTE
100
10-key
1.0 – 199.0
100
OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print
1.0 – 199.0
0
100
CLOSE
SIMULATIONġ NO.50-20
TEST
REGISTRATIONġ ADJUSTMENT : FRONT-REAR
A:ġ
MAIN, SUB: The entered value after adjustment is displayed.
( ): Difference from the previous value.
xxx
DIRECTION
Aȇxxx
Ȉ
CYAN(FRONT)
Bȇxxx
Ȉ
CYAN(REAR)
Cȇxxx
Ȉ
MAGENTA(FRONT)
Dȇxxx
Ȉ
MAGENTA(REAR)
1 199ġ
Example: This time 105, previous time 103: 105 (+2)
EXECUTE
* In case of an error, "ERROR" is displayed with the details.
OK
To check the auto adjustment result, use the manual image
registration adjustment mode below.
2)
* Image registration adjustment (Main scanning direction) (Manual
adjustment) (SIM50-20)
Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11 x 17) paper in it by
changing the value of set item H.
3)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
* Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual
adjustment) (SIM50-21)
The image registration adjustment pattern in the main scanning direction is printed.
㪩㩷㫊㫀㪻㪼㩷㫄㪸㫉㫂
㪝㩷㫊㫀㪻㪼㩷㫄㪸㫉㫂
A
A
C
C
A
A
C
C
A
A
C
B
C
B
A: Rough adjustment pattern
B: Fine adjustment pattern
C: Adjustment range (0 ± 1)
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 16
4)
Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pattern positions of each color in the front frame and the rear
frame sides.
When calculating, be careful of the plus polarity and the
minus polarity.
Use the visually highest color density section as the center,
and measure the shift amount.
In the case of the figure, the total shift amount is 27.
(Example)
Measurement value: 27 (= 20 + 7)
The front frame registration and the rear frame registration are
adjusted independently.
To check the image registration, therefore, check the front
frame side and the rear frame side individually.
Rough adjustment
print pattern check:
Fine adjustment
print pattern check:
20
Check that the rough adjustment print pattern is at
the center for the rough adjustment reference
pattern.
Check that the fine adjustment print pattern is at the
center for the fine adjustment reference pattern.
(If the fine adjustment print pattern is located in the range of 0
± 1 from the fine adjustment reference pattern scale, the
adjustment is not required.)
If the above condition is not satisfied, select the color mode
adjustment item A – F to be adjusted with the scroll key and
change the adjustment value to adjust.
Display/Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
CYAN
(FRONT)
CYAN
(REAR)
MAGENTA
(FRONT)
MAGENTA
(REAR)
Content
Image registration adjustment
value (Main scanning
direction) (Cyan) (F side)
Image registration adjustment
value (Main scanning
direction) (Cyan) (R side)
Image registration adjustment
value (Main scanning
direction) (Magenta) (F side)
Image registration adjustment
value (Main scanning
direction) (Magenta) (R side)
Image registration adjustment
value (Main scanning
direction) (Yellow) (F side)
Image registration adjustment
value (Main scanning
direction) (Yellow) (R side)
Adjustment
value range
1 – 199
1 – 199
1 – 199
Default
value
100
100
100
Measurement value: –27 (= –20 – 7)
1 – 199
100
(Example)
The measurement value of the figure is "7."
* Measurement of the rough adjustment pattern
YELLOW
(FRONT)
YELLOW
(REAR)
1 – 199
100
-20
1 – 199
100
Repeat procedures 3) – 4) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
For measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of the
adjustment value, refer to the table below.
(Measurement of the shift amount and the calculation of
the adjustment value)
a)
Measurement of the shift amount
* Measurement of the fine adjustment pattern
The visually highest color density section is regarded as
the center, and used as the measurement value.
Check that the color line is positioned in the plus direction or in the minus direction and judge the polarity from
that.
The center black line is scaled as 0, the first line mark
as 20, the second line mark as 40, the third line mark as
60. The interval between the rough adjustment marks
corresponds to 20.
(Example)
In the case of the figure, it is between 20 – 40 of the
plus polarity, and the measurement is "20."
* The actual shift amount is the sum of the rough adjustment reference shift amount and the fine adjustment
shift amount.
Shift amount (correction value) = Rough adjustment
shift amount + Fine adjustment shift amount
The shift amount from the adjustment reference position
is calculated for each of six kinds of adjustment items A
– F.
b)
Adjustment value calculation
Add or subtract the shift amount calculated above to or
from the current adjustment value, and the result value is
used as the new adjustment value.
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value + Shift
amount (correction value)
(When the shift amount (correction value) is plus)
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value – Shift
amount (correction value)
(When the shift amount (correction value) is minus)
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 17
Yellow
E
Magenta
C
Cyan
A
F
D
B
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 18
(Example)
Previous value before adjustment
A: 100
B: 112
C: 95
D: 98
E: 102
F: 96
New adjustment value
A: 93 (= 100 – 7)
B: 100 (= 112 – 12)
C: 96 (= 95 + 1)
D: 109 (= 98 + 11)
E: 109 (= 102 + 7)
F: 118 (= 96 + 22)
10-C Image registration adjustment (Sub scanning direction) (Manual adjustment)
1)
Enter SIM50-21 mode.
0
TEST
REGISTRATION
NOTE: If either of front or rear adjustment value is changed, the
other adjustment print pattern position may be varied. Be
careful of that.
A:
ADJUSTMENT : SCANNING
xxx
1
CLOSE
SIMULATIONġ NO.50-21
DIRECTION
Aȇxxx
Ȉ
CYAN
Bȇxxx
Ȉ
MAGENTA
Cȇxxx
Ȉ
YELLOW
Dȇxxx
Ȉ
MULTIOUNT
199
EXECUTE
10-key
OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or end of print
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATIONġ NO.50-21
REGISTRATIONġ ADJUSTMENT : SCANNING
Aȇxx
A:ġ
xxx
1
Ȉ
DIRECTION
CYAN
Bȇxx
Ȉ
MAGENTA
Cȇxxx
Ȉ
YELLOW
Dȇxxx
Ȉ
MULTIOUNT
199
EXECUTE
OK
2)
Select the paper feed tray with A4 (11 x 8.5) or A3 (11 x 17)
paper in it by changing the value of set item H.
3)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
The sub scanning direction image registration adjustment pattern is printed.
A
B
C
A: Rough adjustment pattern
B: Fine adjustment pattern
C: Adjustment range
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 19
4)
Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pattern positions of each color.
The visually highest color density section is regarded as the
center, and used as the measurement value.
Rough adjustment
print pattern check:
Fine adjustment
print pattern check:
Measurement value: –27 (= –20 – 7)
A
Check that the rough adjustment print pattern is at
the center for the rough adjustment reference
pattern.
Check that the fine adjustment print pattern is at the
center for the fine adjustment reference pattern.
If the above condition is not satisfied, select the color mode
adjustment item A – C to be adjusted with the scroll key, and
change the adjustment value to adjust.
Display/Item
A
CYAN
B
MAGENTA
C
YELLOW
Content
Image registration adjustment
value (Sub scanning
direction) (Cyan)
Image registration adjustment
value (Sub scanning
direction) (Magenta)
Image registration adjustment
value (Sub scanning
direction) (Yellow)
Default
value
100
1 – 199
100
1 – 199
100
C
Repeat procedures 3) – 4) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
For measurement of the shift amount and calculation of the
adjustment value, refer to the table below.
(Measurement of the shift amount and calculation of the
adjustment value)
a)
B
(If the fine adjustment print pattern is positioned in the range of
0 ± 1 for the fine adjustment reference pattern scale, the
adjustment is not required.)
Adjustment
value range
1 – 199
-20
Measurement of the shift amount
* Measurement of the fine adjustment pattern
Measurement value: 27 (= 20 + 7)
The visually highest color density section is regarded as
the center, and used as the measurement value of the
shift amount.
(Example)
A
20
The measurement value of the figure is "7."
* Measurement of the rough adjustment pattern
Check that the color line is positioned in the plus direction or in the minus direction and judge the polarity from
that.
B
The center black line mark is scaled as 0, the first line
mark as 20, the second line mark as 40, the third line
mark as 60. The interval between the rough adjustment
marks corresponds to 20.
(Example)
In the case of the figure, it is between 20 – 40 of the
plus polarity, and the measurement is "20."
A: Rough adjustment pattern
B: Fine adjustment pattern
C: Adjustment range
The shift amount is calculated from the adjustment reference position for each of the three adjustment items A
– C.
C
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 20
b)
Adjustment value calculation
Add or subtract the shift amount calculated above to or from the current adjustment value, and the result value is used as the new
adjustment value.
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value + Shift amount (correction value)
(When the shift amount (correction value) is plus)
Adjustment value = Current adjustment value – Shift amount (correction value)
(When the shift amount (correction value) is minus)
A
B
C
Previous adjustment value
A: 100
B: 112
C: 95
New adjustment value
A: 73 (= 100 – 27)
B: 119 (= 112 + 7)
C: 110 (= 95 + 15)
11 Scan image distortion adjustment
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the copy image is distorted.
11-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment
Before execution of this adjustment, remove the document table
glass. (For details, refer to Chapter [C]-3.)
1)
Loosen the fixing screws of the scanner unit A and the drive
wire, and remove the scanner unit A from the drive wire.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 21
2)
Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner
unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper. When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on the front and
the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is proper.
3)
Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame
side of the scanner unit.
4)
Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers
simultaneously.
5)
Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit
B.
6)
With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the
edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and
fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.
If not, perform the following procedures.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above procedures, perform the following procedures.
Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which
is not in contact.
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, turn the scanner
unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B
is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear
frame simultaneously. (Change the relative position of the
scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Fix the scanner
unit drive pulley fixing screw.
11-B Scan image (sub scanning direction) distortion adjustment
1)
Make a test chart with A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
L
L
L
L = 10mm
L
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 22
2)
Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the document table. (Shift the test chart edge 30mm from the reference
position as shown below.) With the document cover open,
make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
11-C Scan image (main scanning direction) distortion adjustment
1)
Make a test chart on A3 (11" – 17") paper. (Draw a rectangular
with four right angles.)
L
L
L
L = 10mm
L
3)
Check for distortion in the sub scanning direction.
If La = Lb, there is no distortion.
La
Lb
2)
Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the document table, and make a copy on A3 (11"x 17") paper.
3)
Check for distortion in the main scanning direction.
If the four angles of the copy image are right angles, there is
no distortion. (Completion of the adjustment)
If there is any distortion in the sub scanning direction, perform
the following procedures.
4)
Loosen either one of the fixing screws of the scanner unit drive
pulley. (Either one on the front frame or on the rear frame will
do.)
If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, perform
the following procedure.
4)
Check the difference (distortion balance) between the image
distortions on the right and the left.
Lc
Lc
Copy A
Copy B
Ld
There is no difference
between the distortion on
the right and that on the left.
Lc = Ld
5)
6)
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn the
scanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of the scanner unit A and B. (Change the relative position of the scanner
unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.)
Ld
There is some difference
between the distortion on
the right and that on the left.
Lc ≠ Ld
If Lc = Ld, there is no difference between the right and the left
image distortions.
If the above condition is satisfied, go to the procedure 6).
If not, perform the following procedures.
Tighten the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw.
Repeat the procedures 2) – 6) until the condition of the procedure
3) is satisfied.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted with
the above procedures, perform "ADJ 11D Scan image distortion
adjustment (whole scanner unit)."
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 23
5)
Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front
frame side.
12 Scan image focus adjustment (CCD
unit position adjustment)
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the CCD unit is removed from the machine.
* When the CCD unit is replaced.
* When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted.
* When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scanning direction is not properly adjusted.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
1)
Enter the simulation 48-1 mode.
0
Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen the
scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the
right and the left heights of the scanner rail.
MAGNIFICATION
Repeat the procedures 2) – 5) until the difference between the
image distortions (distortion balance) is deleted.
1
6)
Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front
frame side, change the overall height.
7)
Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) and make a
copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check that the distortion in the
main scanning direction is within the specified range.
Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the distortion in the main
scanning direction is in the specified range.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.48-01
TEST
A:
ADJUSTMENT
xx
99
A㧦xx
㧧 CCD(MAIN)
B㧦xx
㧧 CCD(SUB)
C㧦xx
㧧
SPF(MAIN)
D㧦xx
㧧
SPF(SUB)
OK
2)
Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value).
Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
3)
Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below.
4)
Make a normal copy on A4 paper.
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted
with the above procedures, perform "ADJ 11D Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole scanner)."
11-D Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole
scanner)
This adjustment is executed when scan image distortion cannot be
adjusted with ADJ 11A, ADJ 11B, and ADJ 11C related to the scan
image distortion adjustment.
Change the upper and lower positions of the scanner unit distortion
adjustment plate on the right edge of the scanner unit so that the
scan image distortion is minimized. By adjusting the distortion of
the whole scanner unit, the scan image distortion is adjusted.
1)
Loosen the fixing screw (A).
2)
Adjust the scanner unit distortion adjustment plate.
Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode, and make a copy.
5)
Compare the scale length with the scale image length on the
copy paper.
6)
Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main
scanning direction from the following formula.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (Original size – Copy image size) / Original size x 100%
Example: Compare the scale of 10mm with the scale of 10mm
on the copy image.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (100 – 99) / 100 x 100 = 1
A
A
A
A
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 24
11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
direction) to change the installing position.
100mm scale
(Original)
10
20
90
100
110
When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
in procedure 9).
1.0mm
Copy image
(1mm (1%)
shorter than
the original)
10
20
90
100
B
110
A
If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the
following procedures.
7)
Remove the document table glass.
8)
Remove the dark box cover.
9)
To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
CCD unit base as shown below.
12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 ± 1%,
repeat the procedures of 9) – 11) until the condition is satisfied.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simulation 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 ± 1.0%)
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the optical system structure.
13 Scan
image skew adjustment
(RSPF) (Refer to MX-RPX1 SM.)
14 Scan image magnification ratio
adjustment (Document table mode)
* This procedure must be executed also when the CCD unit is
replaced.
10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the copy image magnification ration in the sub scanning
direction is not properly adjusted.
* When the scanner motor is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing
position adjustment) must have been completed.
* Never loosen the screws marked with ✕.
If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and the
angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to cause a
problem, which cannot be adjusted in the market. In that
case, the whole scanner unit must be replaced.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 25
14-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scanning direction) (Document table
mode)
1)
2)
Enter the simulation 48-1 mode.
0
Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.48-01
TEST
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT
A:
xx
1
99
A㧦xx
㧧 CCD(MAIN)
B㧦xx
㧧 CCD(SUB)
C㧦xx
㧧
SPF(MAIN)
D㧦xx
㧧
SPF(SUB)
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
OK
3)
Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode and make a copy.
Copy magnification ratio
(Original dimension – Copy dimension)
x 100 [%]
=
Original dimension
2)
(Example 1)
Copy A
(Shorter than
the original)
Enter the simulation 48-1 mode.
10
20
90
100
110
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.48-01
TEST
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT
A:
xx
1
99
A㧦xx
㧧 CCD(MAIN)
B㧦xx
㧧 CCD(SUB)
C㧦xx
㧧
SPF(MAIN)
D㧦xx
㧧
SPF(SUB)
Scale
(Original)
10
20
90
100
110
OK
3)
Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.
Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode and make a copy.
4)
Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
range (100 ± 1.0%).
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
± 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
procedure.
5)
(Example 2)
Copy B
(Longer than
the original)
4)
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased.
Repeat the procedures 3) – 5) until the copy magnification
ratio is within the specified range (100 ± 1.0%).
14-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(Sub scanning direction) (Document table
mode)
1)
Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below.
20
90
100
110
Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
range (100 ± 1.0%).
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
± 1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
procedure.
Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnification ratio is changed by about 0.1%.
10
5)
Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnification ratio is changed by about 0.1%.
Repeat the procedures 3) – 5) until the copy magnification ratio is
within the specified range (100 ± 1.0%).
15 Scan image magnification ratio
adjustment (RSPF mode) (Refer to
the MX-RPX1 SM.)
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
15-A Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scanning direction) (RSPF mode)
(Refer to the MX-RPX1 SM.)
15-B Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(Sub scanning direction) (RSPF mode)
(Refer to the MX-RPX1 SM.)
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 26
16 Scan image off-center adjustment
4)
Select the adjustment mode OC with the scroll key.
5)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
The entered value is set.
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
When the set value is increased, the main scanning print position is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm.
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
6)
* When the RSPF section is disassembled.
* When the RSPF unit is installed.
Repeat the procedures of 2) – 6) until the above condition is
satisfied.
* When the RSPF unit is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
16-A Scan image off-center (Document table
mode)
1)
Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode and make a copy.
Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by your self) in the
adjustment mode (document table or RSPF).
16-B Scan image off-center (RSPF mode) (Refer
to the MX-RPX1 SM.)
17 Print area (Void area) adjustment
(Print engine section)
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
* When the paper tray is replaced.
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
* When the manual paper feed tray is replace.
ł
* When the manual paper feed tray is disassembled.
* When the duplex section is disassembled.
* When the duplex section is installed or replaced.
łġľġŃ
* When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replace.
* When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled.
* When the resist roller section is disassembled.
Ń
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
(Caution)
2)
Before executing this adjustment, be sure to execute ADJ 8 Print
image magnification ratio adjustment (BK) (Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) in advance.
Check the copy image center position.
If A – B = ± 1.0mm, the adjustment is not required.
1)
Enter the simulation 50-10 mode.
0
łĨ
CLOSE
SIMULATIONġ NO.50-10
TEST
PAPER
CENTER
A:
OFFSET
xxx
SETUP
Aȇxxx
Ȉġ BK-MAG
Bȇ xx
Ȉġ MTF
Cȇ xx
Ȉġ CS1
Dȇ xx
Ȉġ CS2
60 140
łĨġĮġŃĨġľġȾIJįıŮŮ
ĩIJııɓĪ
EXECUTE
OK
ŃĨ
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
procedures.
3)
Enter the simulation 50-12 mode.
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.50-12
CLOSE
ORGINAL CENTER OFFSET SETUP
A:
㨇
xx
1㨪
0
TEST
PAPER
CENTER
OFFSET
SETUP
Aȇ xxx
A:ġ
CLOSE
SIMULATIONġ NO.50-10
xxx
Ȉġ BK-MAG
Bȇ xx
Ȉġ MTF
Cȇ xx
Ȉġ CS1
Dȇ xx
Ȉġ CS2
60 140
A㧦 xx
㧧 OC
B㧦xx
㧧 SPF(SIDE1)
C㧦xx
㧧 SPF(SIDE2)
EXECUTE
99 㨉
OK
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 27
OK
2)
Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper to all the trays, and select the set item
J with the scroll key. Enter the value corresponding to the
adjustment target paper feed tray.
3)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
4)
Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below
are in the range of the standard values.
Content
Lead edge void area
Rear edge void area
FRONT/REAR void area
Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
adjustment value and press [OK] key.
Display/
Item
The adjustment pattern is printed.
X
Y
Z1/Z2
6)
Standard adjustment value
3.0 ± 1.0mm
2.0 ± 1.0mm
2.0 ± 2.0mm
DENA
Content
Void are
amount
adjustment
DENB
FRONT/
REAR
Z1
2.0±2.0mm
Lead edge
void area
adjustment
Rear edge
void area
adjustment
FRONT/
REAR void
area
adjustment
Standard
adjustment
value
Adjustment
range
Default
value
1 – 99
30
3.0 ±
1.0mm
1 – 99
20
2.0 ±
1.0mm
1 – 99
20
2.0 ±
2.0mm
When the adjustment value is increased, the void area is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the void
area is decreased. When the adjustment value is changed by
1, the void area is changed by 0.1mm.
(Note)
X
3.0±1.0mm
Y
2.0±1.0mm
The adjustment value and the actual void area are related as
follows:
Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area
After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) – 4) to
check that the void area is within the specified range.
Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if
the lead edge void area is not within the specified range,
change the adjustment value of RRCB-XXX of SIM 50-1.
Z2
2.0±2.0mm
(Note) Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm.
If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired
condition, execute the simulation 50-1.
5)
Enter the simulation 50-1 mode.
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-01
TEST
LEAD EDGE
A:
ADJUSTMENT
xx
0
99
㧧
RRCA
B㧦 xx
㧧
RRCB-CS12
C㧦 xx
㧧
RRCB-CS34
D㧦 xx
㧧
RRCB-LCC
Adjustment
range
1 – 99
Default
value
50
1 – 99
50
LCC
1 – 99
50
Manual
feed
ADU
1 – 99
50
1 – 99
50
Content
Image lead
edge
position
adjustment
value
Resist
motor ON
timing
adjustment
Standard
cassette
Desk
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
VALUE
A㧦 xx
Display
item
RRCBCS12
RRCBCS34
RRCBLCC
RRCBMFT
RRCBADU
18 Copy image position, image loss
OK
adjustment
18-A Copy image position, image loss adjustment (Document table mode)
10-key
OK
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50㧙01
LEAD EDGE
A:
㨇 0㨪
ADJUSTMENT
xx
99 㨉
VALUE
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
* When the resist roller section is disassembled.
A㧦 xx
㧧 RRCA
B㧦 xx
㧧 RRCB-CS12
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
C㧦 xx
㧧 RRCB-CS34
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
D㧦 xx
㧧 RRCB-LCC
* When the EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
OK
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to confirm that
the ADJ 17 Print area (Void area) adjustment (Print engine
section) has been completed normally.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 28
1)
Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below.
2)
Enter the simulation 50-1 mode.
0
Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction
and that its lead edge is in contact with the document guide
plate.
LEAD EDGE
Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead
edge can be seen.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-01
TEST
ADJUSTMENT
A:
xx
0
99
VALUE
A㧦 xx
㧧
RRCA
B㧦 xx
㧧
RRCB-CS12
C㧦 xx
㧧
RRCB-CS34
D㧦 xx
㧧
RRCB-LCC
OK
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
10-key
OK
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50㧙01
LEAD EDGE
ADJUSTMENT
A:
xx
㨇 0㨪
99 㨉
VALUE
A㧦 xx
㧧 RRCA
B㧦 xx
㧧 RRCB-CS12
C㧦 xx
㧧 RRCB-CS34
D㧦 xx
㧧 RRCB-LCC
OK
3)
Set RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values.
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
4)
Display item
RRCA
RRCB-CS12
RRCB-CS34
RRCB-LCC
RRCB-MFT
RRCB-ADU
LEAD
SIDE
DENA
DENB
FRONT/REAR
Image lead edge position
adjustment value
Image loss adjustment
Void area amount adjustment
Content
Document lead edge reference position (OC)
Resist motor ON timing
Standard cassette
adjustment
Desk
LCC
Manual feed
ADU
Lead edge image loss adjustment
Side image loss adjustment
Lead edge void area adjustment
Rear edge void area adjustment
FRONT/REAR void area adjustment
Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment.
Press [CLOSE] key, and shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode and make a copy in 100% mode and in 200%
mode.
When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead edge
image from 3.0mm is not copied in either of 100% and 200%
copy scale.
5)
Adjustment range
0 – 99
1 – 99
1 – 99
1 – 99
1 – 99
1 – 99
0 – 99
0 – 99
1 – 99
1 – 99
1 – 99
Default value
50
50
50
50
50
50
30
20
30
20
20
Image loss adjustment
When the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to the
default value, it is adjusted to the standard state.
If it is not in the above standard state, or when it is set to a
desired value, change these adjustment items.
Paper lead edge
If not, change and adjust the RRCA value.
(Adjust so that the lead edge image from 3.0mm is not copied
in either of different copy magnification ratios.)
Copy area
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
Paper lead
edge
1
2
3
Scale image 3.0mm position
4
Maginification ratio: 400%
10mm
5mm
Void area: 3.0mm, Image loss: 3.0mm
100%
5mm 10mm
LEAD
200%
5mm
Display/
Item
Content
Image loss
adjustment
value
SIDE
10mm
Lead edge
image loss
adjustment
Side image
loss
adjustment
Standard
adjustment
value
Adjustment
range
Default
value
0 – 99
30
3.0 ±
1.0mm
0 – 99
20
2.0 ±
1.0mm
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
image loss is decreased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the image loss is
changed by 0.1mm.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 29
18-B Copy image position, image loss adjustment (RSPF mode) (Refer to the MX-RPX1
SM.)
1)
Enter the simulation 50-05 mode.
0
TEST
LEAD
EDGE
ADJUSTMENT
VALUE (PRINTER)
A㧦xxx
19 Print lead edge image position
A:
adjustment (Printer mode) (Print
engine section)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-05
xxx
㧧 DEN-C
B㧦xxx
㧧 DEN-B
C㧦xxx
㧧 FRONT/REAR
D㧦xxx
㧧 MULTI COUNT
1 99
EXECUTE
OK
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the resist roller section is disassembled.
EXECUTE
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
EXECUTE
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
End of print
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
(Caution)
0
This adjustment is performed by the user to increase the lead edge
void area to greater than the standard value (3mm) in the printer
mode.
TEST
LEAD
EDGE
ADJUSTMENT
VALUE (PRINTER)
A㧦xxx
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-05
xxx
㧧 DEN-C
B㧦xxx
㧧 DEN-B
C㧦xxx
㧧 FRONT/REAR
D㧦xxx
㧧 MULTI COUNT
1 99
EXECUTE
2)
OK
Select the set item E with the scroll key, and enter the value
corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11 x 8.5) paper
in it.
A
D
E
F
Display/Item
DEN-C
MULTI COUNT
PAPER
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
DUPLEX
YES
Content
Printer print image lead edge adjustment
Print quantity
Cassette select
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Duplex print select
Select
3)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
4)
Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
in the standard adjustment value range.
Adjustment range
1 – 99
1 – 999
1–6
1
2
3
4
5
6
0–1
0
Standard adjustment value
3.0 ± 2.0mm
—
1 (NO)
5)
Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjustment item DENC with the scroll key.
6)
Change the adjustment value.
The adjustment pattern is printed.
Standard adjustment value: 3.0 ± 2.0mm
Default value
30
1
2 (CS1)
Enter the adjustment value and press [OK] or [EXECUTE] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
printed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When
the adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is
decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed
by about 0.1mm.
Repeat the procedures 4) – 6) until the condition of 4) is satisfied.
3.0±2.0mm
20 Copy color balance/density adjustment
(1) Note before execution of the copy color balance/density
adjustment
* After completion of this adjustment, the printer color balance/
density adjustment must be executed.
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
procedures.
* Requisite conditions before execution of the copy color balance/
density adjustment
Before execution of the copy color balance/density adjustment,
check to insure that the adjustments which affect the copy color
balance/density adjustment have been completed.
The importance levels of them are shown below.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 30
(The following items affect the copy color balance/density
adjustment, and must be checked and adjusted before execution of the image quality adjustments.)
1)
Display
ADJ
5
ADJ
6
ADJ
7
ADJ
10
Image density
sensor, image
registration
sensor
adjustment
ADJ
5A
ADJ
5B
Color image sensor calibration
Color image density sensor,
black image density sensor,
image registration sensor
adjustment
Image skew adjustment (LSU (writing) unit)
OPC drum
phase
adjustment
Image
registration
adjustment
(Print engine
section)
ADJ
7A
ADJ
7B
ADJ
10A
ADJ
10B
ADJ
10C
2)
Simulation
to be used
Adjustment item
OPC drum phase adjustment
(Auto adjustment)
OPC drum phase adjustment
(Manual adjustment)
Image registration adjustment
(Main scanning direction, sub
scanning direction) (Auto
adjustment)
Image registration adjustment
(Main scanning direction)
(Manual adjustment)
Image registration adjustment
(Sub scanning direction)
(Manual adjustment)
3)
Adjustment/setting item
A–U
A–L
A–O
A–O
Toner density life correction
YES/NO setting
TN_COV
Toner density print rate
correction YES/NO setting
TN_PROCON
Toner density process control
correction YES/NO setting
Allow
TN_ENV
Toner density environment
correction YES/NO setting
Allow
TN_DRIP
Toner density correction,
unconditional supply YES/
NO setting
Toner compulsory
consumption mode YES/NO
setting
1Pixel half-tone process
control correction YES/NO
setting
Auto resist adjustment YES/
NO setting
Allow
44-2
50-22
44-31
50-22
HV
HT
TC
MD VG
MD LD
MD EV
MD DL
MD DL EV
TN_HUM
TN_AREA
Set range
Normal operation highdensity process control YES/
NO setting
Normal operation half-tone
process control YES/NO
setting
Transfer output correction
YES/NO setting
Normal
(Inhibit: 1: NO)
Highlighted
(Allow: 0: YES)
Membrane decrease grid
voltage correction YES/NO
setting
Membrane decrease laser
power voltage correction
YES/NO setting
Membrane decrease
environment grid voltage
correction YES/NO setting
Membrane decrease
discharge light quantity
correction YES/NO setting
Membrane decrease
environment discharge light
quantity correction YES/NO
setting
Toner density humidity
correction YES/NO setting
Toner density area correction
YES/NO setting
TN_SPEND
PHT
Allow
Inhibit
50-20
AR_AUTO
50-21
AR_ERROR
Error check YES/NO setting
during auto resist adjustment
Allow
DM_PHASE
Drum phase alignment YES/
NO setting
Allow
SENSITIVITY
Toner density correction
YES/NO setting
Inhibit
PRT_HT
Half tone process control
printer correction feedback
Enable/Disable setting
Allow
Default value
50
50
500
500
Content
Allow
64-1/61-4
The following items (correction functions) of SIM 44-1 must be
set to ENABLE (default).
Display
Normal
(Inhibit: 1: NO)
Highlighted
(Allow: 0: YES)
Default
value
Allow
44-13
The set values of the following simulations must be set to the
default values.
SIM No
46-1
46-2
46-10
46-16
Set range
TN_LIFE
The following adjustment items must be adjusted properly.
Job
No
Content
Default
value
Allow
(The following items affect the copy color balance/density
adjustment, but it is not required to adjust them frequently.
When, however, a trouble occurs, check and adjust them.)
1)
The following items must be adjusted properly.
Job No
Allow
Allow
ADJ 1
ADJ 2
ADJ 4
Allow
Allow
ADJ 12
Inhibit
Adjustment item
Developing doctor gap adjustment
Developing roller main pole position adjustment
High voltage
ADJ Main charger grid voltage
adjustment
4A
adjustment
ADJ Developing bias voltage
4B
adjustment
ADJ Transfer voltage adjustment
4C
Scan image focus adjustment (CCD unit position
adjustment)
Simulation
to be used
8-2
8-1
8-6
(Relationship between the servicing job contents and the copy
color balance/density adjustment)
Allow
Allow
Inhibit
Note that the preliminary jobs before execution of the copy color
balance/density adjustment depend on the machine status and the
servicing conditions.
Follow the flowchart of the copy color balance/density adjustment
procedures depending on the actual conditions.
There are following four, major cases.
1)
Allow
Allow
When installing the machine.
2)
When the periodic maintenance is performed.
3)
When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.
(When a consumable part is replaced.)
4)
When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.
(Without replacement of a consumable part)
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 31
(2) Flowchart of the copy color balance/density adjustment procedures
START
㧝
When in repair, check/maintenance (with replacing consumable parts)
JOB No
Work item
Simulation
OPC drum counter clear
24-7
After
replacing
OPC drum
After
replacing
developer
drum
After
replacing
transfer belt
When in
After
After cleaning
install/repair/check
replacement
scanner
(without replacing
of the image
(reading)
consumable parts)
section
density sensor
∗
∗
Developer counter clear
24-5
ADJ 5A
Color image density sensor
calibration
44-13
ADJ 7
OPC drum phase adjustment
50-22 (44-31)
ADJ 6
Image skew adjustment
(LSU (writing) unit)
64-1/61-4
∗
ADJ 10
Image registration adjustment
(Print engine section)
50-22 (50-20/
50-21)
∗
∗
∗
The necessary work items for each condition are marked with " ∗."
Process correction is forcibly
performed. (SIM 44-6)
Execute the half tone image
correction. (SIM 44-26)
Check the copy color balance/density.
(Manual operation) Text/Printed photo mode
(Test chart UKOG-0162FCZZ/
UKOG-0283FCZZ is used.)
Are the copy
color balance and density
at satisfactory
levels?
Yes
No
Yes
Is the CCD replaced?
Set the ST chart
(UKOG-0280FCZZ) on
the original table.
No
Check the copy color balance/density.
(Manual operation) Text/Printed photo mode
(Test chart UKOG-0162FCZZ/
UKOG-0283FCZZ is used.)
(to Next page)
Perform ADJ 20A
CCD gamma adjustment.
SIM 63-3 (Normal document mode)
(to Next page)
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 32
Enter the SIM 63-03
mode and press the
EXECUTE key.
: Standard adjustment flow
(from Previous page)
(from Previous page)
Perform ADJ 20B copy color balance/
density auto adjustment. (SIM 46-24)
3
Can the
copy color balance and
density be adjusted to satisfactory
levels with the fine
adjustment?
Yes
Enter the SIM 46-24 mode and select
A3 (11 x 17) paper. (Auto selection)
No
No
Are the
color balance
and density at the
satisfactory
levels?
4
Perform the manual adjustment of ADJ 20C
copy color balance, density adjustment. (SIM 46-21)
Yes
Perform the initial setup of half tone
image correction. (SIM 44-21)
Execute the half tone image correction.
(Forcible execution) (SIM 44-26)
1
*2
The number of times
is limited to 3 times
Press the EXECUTE key. (The
adjustment pattern 1 is printed.)
Use SIM 46-21 to
print the color
balance check
sheet, and check
the patch color
balance of process
black.
/Check the copy
color balance and
density.
Check in the
(Manual operation)
Text/Printed photo
mode. (Use the
test chart
UKOG-0283FCZZ.)
Set the adjustment pattern 1
on the original table, select
the FACTORY mode, and
press the EXECUTE key.
(Auto adjustment step 1) *1
Press the OK key. (The initial
setup of half tone image correction
is automatically performed.)
Cancel SIM 46-24.
Check the copy color balance and the density.
(Check in the (Manual operation)
Text/Printed photo mode.)
(Use the test chart UKOG-0283FCZZ.)
No
Were all
the three kinds of
color balance/density adjustment
targets changed?
(SIM 63-11)
Are the copy
color balance and density
at satisfactory
levels?
Yes
Change the color balance/density
adjustment factory targets.
(SIM 63-11)
No
Yes
No
Were the
copy color balance and
density
customized?
Were
the three kinds of
color balance/density adjustment
targets changed?
(SIM 63-11)
Yes
4
Yes
Make the factory color balance target
(when adjusting the copy color
balance/density with SIM 46-24) same
as the service color balance target and
the color balance target when adjusting
the density. (SIM63-8)
No
Auto color balance adjustment
service target is set.
Enter the SIM 63-7 mode.
Perform the initial setup of half tone
image correction. (SIM 44-21)
Press the SETUP key.
1
Set the color patch image (adjustment
pattern) printed in the copy color balance/
density adjustment on the original table,
and press the EXECUTE key.
Execute the half tone image correction.
(Forcible execution) (SIM 44-26)
Check the copy color balance and density.
Check in the (Manual operation)
Text/Printed photo mode.
(Use the test chart UKOG-0283FCZZ.)
Press the REPEAT key.
Press the EXECUTE key.
No
Press the OK key.
*2
The number of
times is limited to
3 times
Cancel SIM 63-7.
Is the color balance/
density adjustment performed
for each copy mode ?
(Does the user request
that ?)
Yes
Are the
copy color
balance and the density
in the specified
level ?
Yes
Perform ADJ 20F copy color
balance/density adjustment
for each copy mode separately.
(SIM 46-10)
No
The copy color
balance and
density adjustment
completed.
Perform the printer color balance
adjustment.
*1: When adjusting to a customized color balance, select the
SERVICE mode.
*2: If a satisfactory result in the copy color balance or the density
cannot be obtained by repetition of this loop of procedures
3 times or more, there may be a problem in the machine conditions.
Check the cause, repair the trouble section, and execute all the
adjustment from the beginning again.
: Standard adjustment flow
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 33
3
(3) Copy color balance and density check
(Note)
20-A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration)
(Normal document copy mode)
Before checking the coy color balance and density, be sure to execute the following jobs.
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction)
forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* Execute the half-tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
* When the CCD unit is replaced.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
(Method)
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and a copy
of the servicing color test chart (UK0G-0283FCZZ), and check that
they are proper.
(1) Note before adjustment
a. Note for execution of the color balance and density check in the
color copy mode
1)
Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens
surface are free from dirt and dust. (If there is some dust and
dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.
2)
Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of
the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are
free from dirt and scratches.
To check the copy color balance and density, use the gray test
chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and the servicing color test chart (UK0G0283FCZZ). Set the copy density level to "3" in the Text/Printed
Photo mode (Manual), and make a copy.
If they are dirty, clean them.
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
At that time, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjustment mode must be set to the default (center).
(2) Adjustment procedures
In addition, be sure to use the specified paper for color.
1)
b. Note for checking the monochrome copy mode density
To check the density, use the gray chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ). Set
the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/Printed Photo mode
(Manual).
Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to
the reference position on the left rear frame side of the document table.
Set the chart so that the lighter density side of the patch is on
the left side.
In addition, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjustment
mode must be set to the default (center).
• Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)
In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure
the following conditions.
NOTE: For the color (gray) balance, use the servicing color test
chart (UKOG-0283FCZZ) to check.
(Color copy)
Patch 1 is
slightly copied.
1
2
SHARP gray chart
SHARP GRAY CHART
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
W
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjustment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
method using the SIT chart.
Patch 2 is copied.
(Black-and-white copy)
Patch 2 is
slightly copied.
1
2
SHARP gray chart
NOTE:
SHARP GRAY CHART
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
W
• Check to insure that the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or
UKOG-0280FCZ1) is in close contact with the document
table.
• UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.
2)
Patch 3 is copied.
Patch 1 is not copied.
• Check with the servicing color test chart (UK0G-0283FCZZ)
In the copy color balance check with the servicing color test chart,
check to insure the following conditions.
Enter the SIM 63-03 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
The automatic adjustment is started. During the adjustment,
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment, [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
0
(Color copy)
SCANNER COLOR
BALANCE
OC #1:197, #2:185, #3:165,
Serviceman chart (Color patch section)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63-03
TEST
#7: 88,
#8: 75,
AUTO
ADJUSUTMENT
#4:148, #5:117, #6:110,
#9: 55, #10: 45,
#11: 38,
#12: 29,
#13: 27,
#14: 21, #15: 18, #:16:15, #17: 10, #18: 8,
#19:
#20:
B
5,
G
4, #22: 2,
R
#:24: 2
OC
1/4
NOTE:
The densities of patches 1 – 6 of
each color are properly balanced.
Patch 7 is slightly
copied or not copied.
Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ) is easily discolored by
sunlight (especially ultraviolet rays) and humidity and temperature, put it in a bag such as a clear file) and store in a dark
place of low temperature and low humidity.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 34
20-B Copy color balance adjustment (Auto
adjustment)
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
replaced.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically
selected.)
3)
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in
procedure 2) on the document table.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper
so that the thin lines on the paper are on the left side. Place 5
sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper.
* When the CCD unit is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
a. General
The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust
the copy density of Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black with SIM 4624 or the user program automatically.
(When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
of all the copy modes are revised.)
There are following two modes in the auto color balance adjustment.
1)
Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 46-24
is used.)
2)
Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
mode is used.) (The color balance target is the service target.)
The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
reduce the number of service calls.
If the copy color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can
use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
machine environment is greatly changed, this function does
not work effectively.
On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the
serviceman functions to recover the normal color balance
though the machine environment is greatly changed. If the
machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining
the normal color balance.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.
4)
Press [FACTORY] key on the operation panel, and press
[EXECUTE] key.
When the color balance is customized with the manual color
balance adjustment (SIM 46-21) according to the user's
request and the color balance is registered as the service target with SIM 63-7, if the color balance is adjusted to that color
balance, select the service target.
0
TEST
ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
PLEASE SELECT THE MODE (FACTORY) OR (SERVICE) AND PLACE
THE PRINTED TEST PATCH ON DOCUMENT GLASS THEN PRESS [EXECUTE].
,
㪁LIGHT AREA AT LEFT SIDE ON DOCUMENT GLASS.
FACTORY
b. Note for executing the color balance adjustment (Auto
adjustment)
1)
The print engine section must have been adjusted properly.
2)
The CCD gamma adjustment must have been adjusted properly.
3)
Be sure to use the specified paper for color.
4)
Before execution of the image quality check and the image
quality adjustment, be sure to execute the following corrections forcibly to set the image forming section to the optimum
state.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) forcibly. (SIM44-6)
* Execute the half tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO. 46-24
SERVICE
EXECUTE
The copy color balance adjustment (step 1) is automatically
executed to print the color balance check patch image. Wait
until the operation panel shown in procedure 5) is displayed.
Remark:
(Descriptions on FACTORY key and SERVICE key in the color
balance auto adjustment menu.)
There are two kinds of the gamma target for the color balance
auto adjustment; Factory and Service.
FACTORY key and SERVICE key are used to select one of the
above two.
Factory target color balance: Standard color balance (It can be
selected from the three kinds of fixed color balances with SIM
63-11.)
c. Adjustment procedure (Auto color balance adjustment by
the serviceman)
Service target color balance: The color balance can be customized according to the user's request. (Variable)
1)
When shipping, the service target gamma data and the factory
target gamma data are the same. Both are set to the standard
color balance when shipping.
Enter the SIM 46-24 mode.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-24
ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
For the service target, the customized color balance gamma
can be registered with SIM 63-7.
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PROCON EXECUTION AND PRINT THE TEST PATCH.
(PLEASE USE SPECIFIED TYPE OF A3 OR 11”17” SIZE PAPER
FOR THIS ADJUSTMENT
EXECUTE
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 35
5)
Press [OK] key on the operation panel.
According to data of this adjustment, the initial setting of the
half tone image correction is performed.
High density
M
0
C
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO. 46-24
TEST
Bk
ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
CONFIRM THE ADJUSTED PATCH AND PRESS [OK] TO REGISTER THIS PATCH DATA
CMY
mixed
color
,PRESS [REPEAT] TO CONTINUE THIS PROCEDURE.
Max O
Remark:
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the half tone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTERING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON." is displayed. This operation takes several minutes.
PROCEDURE.
6)
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
3) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.
2) Patch A of each of Y, M,
C, and BK are not copied.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above procedure, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
20C).
ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
THIS
J
When satisfactory color balance and density are not obtained
from the automatic adjustment by selecting the factory target in
procedure 4), change the factory color balance target with SIM
63-11 and repeat the procedures from 1).
0
QUIT
K
Use the servicing color test chart (UK0G-0283FCZZ) in the
Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color balance and density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance
and density check.)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO. 46-24
PLEASE
L
(Method 3)
Do not cancel the simulation until "Please quit this mode" is
displayed.
THIS
M
4) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK
• The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
• The patch density is changed gradually.
After completion of the operation, "Please quit this mode" is
displayed.
COMPLETED
N
1) The max. density
section is not blurred.
OK
REPEAT
TEST
Low density
Y
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to execute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
20C).
MODE.
(Method 1)
7)
Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction.
(Forcible execution)
Check to insure that the printed color balance check patch
image is within the following specifications.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
Check the color balance and density.
Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
0
Fig. 1 PG image
High density
Low density
Y
HALF
M
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
TOUGH
DENSITY
CORRECT
[EXECUTE] THEN
EXECUTION
EXECUTION
START.
C
Bk
EXECUTE
Max O
N
M
L
1) The max. density
section is not blurred.
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.
3) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK
• The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
• The patch density is changed gradually.
Patch A of each of Y, M,
C, and BK are not copied.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed.
The density level of each color must be almost at the same
level.
Patch B may not be copied.
Patch A must not be copied.
(Normal end (Auto transition))
0
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
DENSITY
CORRECT
EXECUTION
[S_VALUE]
#1: 907,
#2: 902,
#3: 909,
#4:921,
#6: 347,
#7:992,
#8:1047,
#9:1081, #10:1137
#5:936
#11:1183, #12:1222, #13:1261, #14:1283,#15:1260
(Method 2)
K
C
M
By printing the color balance adjustment sheet with SIM 46-21
and comparing each process (CMY) black patch color balance
with the black patch, the color balance adjustment can be
checked more precisely.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 36
Y
EXECUTE
1/1
(Abnormal end (Auto transition))
b. Note for the color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment)
0
HALF
TONE
DENSITY CORRECT
The print engine section must have been adjusted properly.
2)
The CCD gamma adjustment must have been adjusted properly.
3)
Set the color patch image adjustment patter on the document
table, and place 5 sheet of white paper on it.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
1)
EXECUTION
[S_VALUE]
#1: ERR,
#2: ERR,
#3: ERR,
#4: ERR,
#5: ERR
4)
Be sure to use the specified paper for color.
#6: ERR,
#7: ERR,
#8: ERR,
#9: ERR, #10: ERR
5)
Before execution of the image quality check and adjustment,
be sure to execute the following corrections to set the image
forming section to the optimum state.
#11: ERR, #12: ERR, #13: ERR, #14: ERR,#15: ERR
K
C
M
Y
EXECUTE
1/1
* Execute the high density image correction (process correction) forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled.
8)
Use the servicing color test chart (UK0G-0283FCZZ) in the
Text/Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color balance/
density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/density
check.)
If the copy color balance and density are not satisfactory, perform the following procedures.
9)
* Execute the half tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
c. Adjustment procedure
1)
Enter the SIM 46-21 mode.
0
Execute the initial setting of the half tone image correction.
(SIM 44-21)
TEST
ENGINE COLOR
10) Execute the half tone image correction. (Forcible execution)
(SIM44-26)
A:
11) Use the servicing color test chart (UK0G-0283FCZZ) in the
Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) to check the copy color balance/density. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/density check.)
245 755
C
MANUAL
ADJUSTMENT [ALL(COLOR)]
A : xxx
㧧 POINT1
B : xxx
㧧 POINT2
C : xxx
㧧 POINT3
D : xxx
㧧 POINT4
M
Repeat the procedures 9) – 11) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
Y
EXECUTE
C
However, the number of times of repeat is limited to 3 times. If the
copy color balance and density are not adjusted to the specified
level by repeating the procedures 3 times, there may be another
cause.
OK
EXECUTE
10-key
or self print end
EXECUTE
Troubleshoot the cause and repair or perform proper treatments,
and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment from the
beginning.
0
If the automatic adjustment cannot obtain satisfactory results of the
copy color balance and density, use SIM 46-21 (ADJ M19C) (Manual adjustment).
TEST
A:
BALANCE
xxx
245 755
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
K
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-21
ENGINE COLOR
20-C Copy color balance adjustment (Manual
adjustment)
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
replaced.
BALANCE
xxx
K
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-21
C
MANUAL
ADJUSTMENT [ALL(COLOR)]
A : xxx
㧧 POINT1
B : xxx
㧧 POINT2
C : xxx
㧧 POINT3
D : xxx
㧧 POINT4
M
Y
EXECUTE
OK
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically
selected.)
3)
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
Check that the following specification is satisfied or the color
balance is satisfactory.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
If not, execute the following procedures.
* When the CCD is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
High density
a. General
Low density
Y
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to
adjust the copy density (15 pts for each color) of CMYK according
to a request from the user for changing (customizing) the color balance because the automatic adjustment stated above is resulted in
an unsatisfactory result or a fine adjustment is required.
In this manual adjustment, adjust only the color patch which could
not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color balance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better
efficiency.
M
C
Bk
CMY
mixed
color
Max O
N
M
L
1) The max. density
section is not blurred.
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
3) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.
4) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK
• The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
• The patch density is changed gradually.
2) Patch A of each of Y, M,
C, and BK are not copied.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 37
The density level of each color must be almost at the same
level.
(Abnormal end (Auto transition))
0
Patch B may not be copied.
Patch A must not be copied.
When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
color balance stated above.
4)
Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
5)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
HALF
7)
VALUE
REGISTER
EXECUTE
After completion of the operation, cancel the simulation.
This procedure is to save the copy color balance adjustment
data as the reference data for the half tone correction.
Immediately after execution of ADJ 20C (Color balance adjustment, Manual) with SIM 46-21, be sure to execute this procedure.
When ADJ 20B (Color balance adjustment, Auto) is executed
with SIM 46-24, this procedure is automatically executed.
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A – O to a same level collectively.
Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UK0G0283FCZZ) and a user's document according to necessity in
the normal copy mode, the text/Printed Photo mode (Manual)
to check the adjustment result. (Refer to the item of the copy
color balance/density check.)
STANDARD
RESULT
Repeat procedures of 2) – 5) until the condition of 3) is satisfied.
6)
PROCON
ERROR:K,C,M,Y
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
Referring to the black and gray patches, adjust so that each
process (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A – O
approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.
TONE
RESULT
The adjustment value is set in the range of 245 – 755 (1 –
999). When SIM 46-24 is used to adjust the automatic color
balance and density, all the set values of this simulation are set
to 500.
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
way of adjustment.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-21
TEST
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the
operation is started.
8)
Execute SIM 44-26 to perform the half tone image correction.
(Forcible execution)
Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
0
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
TOUGH
DENSITY
CORRECT
[EXECUTE] THEN
EXECUTION
EXECUTION
START.
Execute SIM 44-21. (Execute the initial setting of the half tone
image correction.)
EXECUTE
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-21
TEST
HALF
TONE
TOUCH
PROCON STANDARD VALUE
[EXECUTE]
THEN
EXECUTION
REGISTER
START.
It takes several minute to complete the operation. After completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
(Normal end (Auto transition))
0
EXECUTE
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
DENSITY
CORRECT
EXECUTION
RESULT
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
COMPLETE
(Normal end (Auto transition))
RESULT
0
HALF
TONE
PROCON
STANDARD
(Abnormal end (Auto transition))
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-21
TEST
EXECUTE
VALUE
0
REGISTER
RESULT
HALF
COMPLETE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
DENSITY
CORRECT
EXECUTION
RESULT
RESULT
EXECUTE
ERROR:K,C,M,Y
RESULT
EXECUTE
After completion of the operation, cancel the simulation.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 38
9)
Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UK0G0283FCZZ) and a user's document according to necessity in
the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) and check the adjustment result again. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/
density check.)
In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set
to a desired level.
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment (manual adjustment) is executed with SIM 46-21).
If the copy color balance and density are not in the specified
level, repeat procedures of 7) – 9) until they are in the specified range.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
The number of repeat is, however, limited to 3 times.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
If the copy color balance and density are not adjusted to the
specified level by repeating the procedures 3 times, there may
be another cause.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the user requests for customizing the color balance.
Troubleshoot the cause, and repair or perform proper treatments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment
from the beginning.
* When the service color balance target gamma is judged as
improper.
• Each color balance target for the copy color balance adjustment
(NOTE)
If the color balance is customized, use SIM 63-7 to register the
color balance as the service target.
A
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
required.
If the customized color balance is registered as the service target, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in
the next color balance adjustment.
B
In the next color balance adjustment, select the service target
color balance in the automatic color balance adjustment mode
to make an adjustment to the similar color balance as the registered color balance.
Kind
Factory
color
balance
(gamma)
target
Service
color
balance
(gamma)
target
(Auto color balance adjustment target gamma setting)
a. General
When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a certain color balance (gamma) is used as the target.
There are following three kinds of the target.
• Factory color balance (gamma) target
• Service color balance (gamma) target
• User color balance (gamma) target
C
User
color
balance
(gamma)
target
Descriptions
There are three kinds of the color balance target, and each
of them is specified according to the machine design. Use
SIM 63-11 to select one of them as the factory target. The
default setting (factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1)
which emphasizes color reproduction.
This target is used when the user requests to customize
the color balance to user’s desired level. In advance, the
user’s unique color balance must be registered as the
service color balance target.
The above registration (setting) is made by the serviceman
with SIM 46-21 to adjust the color balance and with SIM
63-7 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user executes
the color balance adjustment.
When, therefore, the service color balance target is
changed, the color balance target of the user’s color
balance adjustment is also changed. When, however, SIM
63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to the factory
color balance target set with SIM 63-11.
The default setting (factory setting) of the color balance is
same as the factory color balance target. (Emphasized on
color reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the color
balance, be sure to use SIM 63-8 to set the color balance
to the factory color balance target.
Same color balance as the service color balance (gamma)
target
When the service color balance target is changed, this
color balance target is also changed accordingly.
• Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the copy
color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24)
Use SIM 63-11 to select
one of the three kinds of
color balance targets.
Factory color balance
target (DEF1)
Factory color balance
target (DEF2)
Factory color balance
target (DEF3)
Color balance target in the copy color balance
automatic adjustment (SIM 46-24)
Factory color balance
target (DEF1)
=
Service color balance
target
Factory color balance
target (one of DEF1 – 3)
≠
Service color balance
target (Unique)
Factory color balance
target (one of DEF1 – 3)
=
Service color balance
target
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
Color balance target for
the user color balance
adjustment
=
Service color balance
target
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 39
Factory setting
Use SIM 46-21 to adjust the
optional color balance, and
use SIM 63-7 to register it.
Execute SIM 63-8.
(The service color balance
target is the same as the
factory color balance target.)
• Factory target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24)
By use of SIM 63-11, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM63-8
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Service color balance target/Color balance
target for the user color balance adjustment
Factory color balance target (DEF2)
Fig. 6 L*a*b* table color system
chromaticity diagram
(hue and chrome)
+b* Direction of Yellow
SIM63-8
Hue
Factory color
balance target
(DEF1)
+a*
Direction
of Red
Direction
of Green
DEF1
Factory color balance target
(DEF1) = Service color balance
target/Color balance target for the
user color balance adjustment
Color balance with emphasis on color
reproduction (factory setting)
DEF2
Color balance with slightly strong Cyan
DEF3
Color balance with emphasis on Cyan
Default
Direction of Blue
Factory color balance target (DEF3) =
Service color balance target/Color balance
target for the user color balance adjustment
Factory color balance target (DEF3)
SIM63-8
• Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 45-24).
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance
can be adjusted with SIM 46-21 and registered with SIM 63-7.
When, however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to
the same balance as the factory color balance target set with
SIM 63-11.
• Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in
the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24). When, therefore,
the service color balance target is changed, this target is also
changed accordingly.
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and
the purpose of registration)
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
customized with SIM 46-21.
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
required.
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21 according to the user's request, use SIM 63-7
to register the service color balance target data by use of the
printed adjustment pattern.
By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised.
It is recommendable to keep the printed adjustment pattern with
SIM 46-21. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the
same color balance target to another machine.
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data.
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21, the color balance of the
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time.
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
The correctness of the service color balance target data can be
judges as follows.
Select the service color balance target with SIM 46-24 and execute
the color valance adjustment (Auto), and check the adjustment
result. When the result is unsatisfactory or abnormal, the registered
service target data for the color balance adjustment (Auto) may be
improper.
This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 63-7.
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
SIM 46-21. This procedure may have been executed erroneously.
b. Setting procedure
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as
the service color balance target)
1)
Use SIM 46-21 (Copy color balance adjustment (manual
adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image
(adjustment pattern).
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment
is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an
optional color balance is requested by the user, make an
adjustment.
Do not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it
from discoloration and dirt.
The service color balance target data are basically registered
immediately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM
46-21.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 40
2)
Enter the SIM 63-7 mode.
0
SCANNER
#B:
#G:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63-07
TEST
TARGET
91,
28935,
#L: 169731,
K
OF
#C
2944,
#H:
54344,
#M: 195950,
C
M
COLOR
CALIB SETUP:SERVICE
#D:
3227,
#E:
5822,
#I:
86968,
#J: 122678,
#N: 201249,
#:O: 207112
#F:
8600
#K: 151198
(Procedures to set the service color balance target and the
color balance target for the user color balance adjustment to
the same color balance as the factory color balance target)
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
was adjusted with SIM 46-21 to a unique color balance requested
by the user and it was registered as the service color balance target with SIM 63-7.
* When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 63-11,
be sure to execute this procedure.
Y
1/1
SETUP
3)
Press [SETUP] key.
4)
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly
adjusted and printed in the copy color balance adjustment
(Manual adjustment) (SIM 46-21) (ADJ 20C) on the document
table.
1)
Enter the SIM 63-8 mode.
0
STANDARD
SCANNER
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed with SIM
64-2 can be used instead. In this case, however, check that the
printed pattern is normal.
(When the color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed by
SIM 64-2, set the item B (PROC ADJ) to "0 (YES)" and press
[EXECUTE] key to print.)
A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another
machine can be used.
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image
(adjustment pattern).
If the color balance could not be adjusted satisfactorily with
SIM 46-21 (Color balance adjustment (Manual)), do not execute SIM 63-7 to register the service color balance target data.
5)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
SET
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO. 63-07
SCANNER
THE
TARGET
OF
PRINTER
CHART
ON
PLATEN
ARE
TARGET
YOU
SETTING:SERVICE
YES
SURE?
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
3)
Press [YES] key.
NO
The service color balance target and the color balance target for
the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color balance as the factory color balance target.
20-D Copy density adjustment (Each color copy
mode) (Whole adjustment) (Normally
unnecessary to adjust)
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
COLOR
AND
CALIB
TOUCH
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. Normally
individual adjustments are not required. When there is a request
from the user, execute this adjustment.
SETUP㧦SERVICE
[EXECUTE].
1)
Enter the SIM 46-1 mode.
EXECUTE
0
EXPOSURE
Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image
(adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again.
ADJUSTMENT (COLO R)[ COP Y]
A:
xx
1
99
0
㧧 AUTO
B㧦 xx
㧧 TEXT
C㧦 xx
㧧
D㧦 xx
㧧 TEXT/PHOTO
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
OK
SCANNER
NOW
A㧦 xx
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO. 63-07
TEST
CLOSE
S I M U LA TI O N N O . 4 6 - 0 1
TEST
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.
6)
EXECUTE
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63㧙08
TEST
TARGET
CHART
OF
PATCH
PRINTER
COLOR
CALIB
SETUP㧦SERVICE
READING...
10-key
OK
EXECUTE
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color
(KCMY) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B – O.
If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is judged as
abnormal.
In case of an abnormality, settle the problem and try again.
7)
0
TEST
EXPOSURE
A:
ADJUSTMENT (COLO R)[ COP Y]
xx
1
CLOSE
CLOSE
S I M U LA TI O N N O . 4 6 - 0 1
99
Press [OK] key.
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjustment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service target.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 41
A㧦 xx
㧧 AUTO
B㧦 xx
㧧 TEXT
C㧦 xx
㧧
D㧦 xx
㧧 TEXT/PHOTO
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
OK
2)
Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
Display/Item (Copy mode)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
AUTO
TEXT
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
LIGHT
TEXT (COPY TO
COPY)
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO (COPY TO
COPY)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
TEXT (COLOR
TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO (COLOR
TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
TEXT/PHOTO
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
PHOTOGRAPH
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
MAP (COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
SINGLE COLOR
SINGLE COLOR
(COPY TO COPY)
TWO COLOR
TWO COLOR
(COPY TO COPY)
Auto
Text
Text/Printed Photo
Adjustment
value range
1 – 99
1 – 99
1 – 99
1)
Default
value
50
50
50
Text/Photograph
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
Light document
Text (Copy
document)
Text/Printed Photo
(Copy document)
1 – 99
1 – 99
1 – 99
1 – 99
1 – 99
1 – 99
50
50
50
50
50
50
1 – 99
50
Printed Photo
(Copy document)
Text (Color tone
enhancement)
1 – 99
50
1 – 99
50
Enter the SIM 46-2 mode.
0
TEST
CLOSE
E
SIMULATION NO.46-02
EXPOSURE
A:
ADJUSTMENT(B/W)[COPY]
xx
1
99
A㧦 xx
㧧 AUTO1
B㧦 xx
㧧 AUTO2
C㧦 xx
㧧 TEXT
D㧦 xx
㧧 TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
OK
10-key
OK
0
TEST
EXPOSURE
A:
Text/Printed Photo
(Color tone
enhancement)
1 – 99
50
Text/Photograph
(Color tone
enhancement)
Printed Photo
(Color tone
enhancement)
Photograph (Color
tone enhancement)
1 – 99
50
1 – 99
50
1 – 99
50
Map (Color tone
enhancement)
Single color
Single color (Copy
document)
Two-color (Red/
Black) copy
Two-color (Red/
Black) copy (Copy
document)
1 – 99
50
1 – 99
1 – 99
50
50
1 – 99
50
E
F
G
H
I
1 – 99
50
J
㨇
CLOSE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-02
ADJUSTMENT(B/W)[COPY]
xx
1 㨪 99㨉
A㧦 xx
㧧 AUTO1
B㧦 xx
㧧 AUTO2
C㧦 xx
㧧 TEXT
D㧦 xx
㧧 TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
OK
3)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
4)
Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the normal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-1) and the
normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and
checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
20-E Copy density adjustment (each monochrome copy mode) (Whole adjustment)
(Normally unnecessary to adjust)
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. Normally
individual adjustments are not required. This adjustment is executed when there is a request from the user.
2)
Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
Adjustment
value range
1 – 99
1 – 99
1 – 99
1 – 99
Default
value
50
50
50
50
Text/Photograph
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
Text (Copy
document)
Test/Printed Photo
(Copy document)
1 – 99
1 – 99
1 – 99
1 – 99
1 – 99
50
50
50
50
50
1 – 99
50
Printed Photo
(Copy document)
Light density
document
1 – 99
50
1 – 99
50
Display/Item (Copy mode)
A
B
C
D
K
L
AUTO1
AUTO2
TEXT
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
TEXT (COPY TO
COPY)
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO (COPY TO
COPY)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
LIGHT
Auto 1
Auto 2
Text
Text/Printed Photo
3)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
4)
Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the normal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-1) and the
normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and
checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
20-F Copy color balance adjustment (Color balance adjustment at each density level in
each color copy mode) (Normally not
required)
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
This is to adjust the color balance at each density level in each
color copy mode.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 42
Normally individual adjustments are not required. This adjustment
is executed when there is a request from the user.
1)
5)
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the density is decreased.
Enter the SIM 46-10 mode.
0
When the arrow key is pressed, the color densities selected
with the color keys are collectively adjusted. That is, all the
density levels (points) from the low density point to the high
density point can be adjusted collectively.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-10
TEST
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT
TEXT
TEXT / PRT PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
MAP
LIGHT
COPY ORG
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
PHOTO+TEXT/PHOTO
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
printed out.
The color balance at each density level (point) and the density
can be checked by referring to this printed adjustment pattern.
However, it is more practically to make a cop and check it.
1/1
TEXT
0
20-G Monochrome copy density adjustment
(Density adjustment at each density level in
each monochrome copy mode) (Normally
not required)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO. 46-10
TEST
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [TXST]
A:
xxx
245
K
755
C
A㧦xxx
㧧 POINT 1
B㧦xxx
㧧 POINT 2
C㧦xxx
㧧 POINT 3
D㧦xxx
㧧 POINT 4
M
Y
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
EXECUTE
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
OK
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
C
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
This is to adjust each density level in each monochrome copy
mode.
10-key
Normally individual adjustments are not required. This adjustment
is executed when there is a request from the user.
OK
1)
0
TEST
Enter the SIM 46-16 mode.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO. 46-10
0
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [TXST]
A:
xxx
245
K
755
C
A㧦xxx
㧧 POINT 1
B㧦xxx
㧧 POINT 2
C㧦xxx
㧧 POINT 3
D㧦xxx
㧧 POINT 4
M
Y
TEST
ENGINE
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
A:
OK
EXECUTE
or end of print
COLOR
BALANCE
xxx
373 627
[SYSTEM
SETTINGS]
key
ADJUSTMENT [ALL(B/W)]:PG
㧧 POINT1
B㧦xxx
㧧 POINT2
C㧦xxx
㧧 POINT3
D㧦xxx
㧧 POINT4
10-key
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO. 46-10
MANUAL
A㧦xxx
EXECUTE
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-16
OK
EXECUTE
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT [TXST]
A:
xxx
㨇245㨪 755 㨉
K
C
A㧦xxx
㧧 POINT 1
B㧦xxx
㧧 POINT 2
C㧦xxx
㧧 POINT 3
D㧦xxx
㧧 POINT 4
M
Y
EXECUTE
or self print end
EXECUTE
0
OK
TEST
2)
Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the mode key.
3)
ENGINE
Select a color to change the adjustment value with the color
key.
4)
A:
COLOR
BALANCE
xxx
373 627
Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll
key.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-16
MANUAL
ADJUSTMENT [ALL(B/W)]:PG
A㧦xxx
㧧 POINT1
B㧦xxx
㧧 POINT2
C㧦xxx
㧧 POINT3
D㧦xxx
㧧 POINT4
EXECUTE
Item/Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
Density level
(Point)
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
Adjustment
value range
245 – 755
245 – 755
245 – 755
245 – 755
245 – 755
245 – 755
245 – 755
245 – 755
245 – 755
245 – 755
245 – 755
245 – 755
245 – 755
245 – 755
245 – 755
Default value
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
OK
2)
Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll
key.
3)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the density is decreased.
When the arrow key is pressed, the selected are collectively
adjusted. That is, all the density levels (points) from the low
density point to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
printed out.
The density at each density level (point) can be checked by
referring to this printed adjustment pattern. However, it is more
practically to make a cop and check it.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 43
20-H Gamma/density adjustment in the text
image edge section (Normally not required)
3)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
When the adjustment value of item A, C, or E is changed, the
gamma at the edge area of text and lines is changed.
This adjustment is used to change the reproduction level of text
and outline to an optional level by changing the gamma and the
density at the edge section of text image. The thickness of fine text
and fine lines is changed by this adjustment.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image contrast at
the edge area of text and lines is increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the contrast is decreased.
When the adjustment value of item B, D, or F is increased, the
image density at the edge area of text and lines is increased.
When the value is decreased, the density is decreased.
The adjustment result must be checked in the Text/Printed Photo
copy mode (Manual).
This adjustment is enabled only in the Text mode, the Text/Printed
Photo mode, and the Text/Photograph copy mode.
4)
Press [OK] key.
When the default adjustment value is changed, this adjustment is
required in the following cases.
5)
Press [CLOSE] key to exit from the simulation.
6)
Make a copy in the TEXT/Printed Photo copy mode (Manual),
and check the copy.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
Use a document with fine text and line images for copying and
checking.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
1)
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-27
mode and change the adjustment value.
Enter the SIM 46-27 mode.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-27
TEST
COEFFICIENT
A:
OF
xx
1
99
20-I
GAMMA SETUP
A㧦 xx
㧧 BLACK TEXT (SLOPE)
B㧦 xx
㧧 BLACK TEXT (INTERCEPTE)
C㧦 xx
㧧 COLOR TEXT (SLOPE)
D㧦 xx
㧧 COLOR TEXT (INTERCEPTE)
Copy color balance adjustment (Single
color copy mode) (Normally not required)
This adjustment is used to set the color balance and the density in
the single color copy mode to the user's request.
OK
The adjustment is made by changing YMC components of each
color.
10-key
This adjustment is not required normally, but executed when there
is a request from the user.
OK
When the default adjustment value is changed, this adjustment is
required in the following cases.
* When the CCD unit is replaced.
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-27
TEST
COEFFICIENT
A:
OF
xx
1
99
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
GAMMA SETUP
A㧦 xx
㧧 BLACK
TEXT
(SLOPE)
B㧦 xx
㧧 BLACK
TEXT
(INTERCEPTE)
C㧦 xx
㧧 COLOR TEXT (SLOPE)
D㧦 xx
㧧 COLOR TEXT (INTERCEPTE)
a. Adjustment procedures
1)
Enter the SIM 46-25 mode.
0
OK
TEST
2)
Select an adjustment item with the scroll key.
Display/Item
(Copy mode)
A BLACK TEXT
(SLOPE)
B
BLACK TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
C
COLOR TEXT
(SLOPE)
D
COLOR TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
E
F
ED TEXT
(SLOPE)
ED TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
Content
Black text edge area
engine γ curve calculation
coefficient (slope) setting
Black text edge area
engine γ curve calculation
coefficient (density) setting
Color text edge area
engine γ curve calculation
coefficient (slope) setting
Color text edge area
engine γ curve calculation
coefficient (density) setting
Error diffusion edge area
engine γ curve calculation
coefficient (slope) setting
Error diffusion edge area
engine γ curve calculation
coefficient (density) setting
Adjustment
range
1 – 99
SINGLE COLOR
A:
Default
value
50
K
1 – 99
MODE
xxx
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-25
255
C
COLOR
BALANCE
A㧦x x x
㧧 RED
B㧦xxx
㧧 GREEN
C㧦xxx
㧧 BLUE
D㧦xxx
㧧 YELLOW
M
SETUP
Y
OK
50
10-key
1 – 99
50
1 – 99
50
OK
0
TEST
1 – 99
50
SINGLE COLOR
A:
1 – 99
50
K
MODE
xxx
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-25
255
C
M
COLOR
BALANCE
A㧦xxx
㧧 RED
B㧦xxx
㧧 GREEN
C㧦xxx
㧧 BLUE
D㧦xxx
㧧 YELLOW
SETUP
Y
2)
Select the color to be adjusted with the scroll key.
3)
Select the color (YMC) to be adjusted with the color key.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 44
OK
4)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
Display/Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
Adjustment
value
RED
GREEN
BLUE
YELLOW
MAGENTA
CYAN
C
0
255
255
0
0
255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
2)
Default value
M
255
0
255
0
255
0
Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.
When disabling, set to "0" (NO).
Y
255
255
0
255
0
0
5)
Press [OK] key.
6)
Press [CLOSE] key to exit from the simulation.
7)
Make a copy in the single color copy mode and check the
copy.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-25 mode
and change the adjustment value. Repeat the above procedures
until a satisfactory result is obtained.
20-J Auto color balance adjustment by the user
(Copy color balance auto adjustment
enable setting and adjustment)
When enabling, set to "1" (Yes).
3)
Press [OK] key.
When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto color calibration (automatic adjustment of copy color balance and density)
is not displayed in the user program mode.
(Auto color calibration by the user (Auto color balance adjustment))
Remark: This adjustment is based on the service target color balance set with SIM 63-7 and SIM 63-8. If, therefore, the above settings are not properly performed, this adjustment cannot be made
properly.
1)
Enter the system setting mode.
2)
Enter the copy setting mode.
3)
Press the auto color calibration key.
4)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
5)
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in procedure 4) on the document table. Set the patch image so that
the light density area is on the left side.
a. General
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color calibration (auto adjustment of the copy color balance and density).
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user operation with SIM 26-53.
NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's
understanding on the automatic adjustment of the copy
color balance and density and the user's operational ability
are judged enough to execute the adjustment.
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color
patch image (adjustment pattern).
When set to ENABLE, give enough explanations on the
operating procedures, notes, and operations to the user.
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
Black
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
Yellow
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
Red
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
Blue
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
b. Setting procedure
1)
Enter the SIM 26-53 mode.
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-53
TEST
DISABLING OF AUTOMATIC
A㧦 x
A:
COLOR
6)
CALIBRATION
㧧 (1:YES 0:NO)
x
0
Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment
is executed automatically. After completion of the adjustment,
the display returns to the original operation screen.
1
OK
20-K Background process condition setting in
the color auto copy mode
When the adjustment value is changed from the default adjustment
value, this adjustment is required in the following cases.
10-key
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
OK
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-53
TEST
DISABLING OF AUTOMATIC
A㧦 x
A:
COLOR
CALIBRATION
This adjustment is used to set the condition for inhibiting copy of
the background depending on the document image kind and state.
The setting is applied to the color auto copy mode.
㧧 (1:YES 0:NO)
x
0
* When the user request for the adjustment.
1
OK
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 45
1)
Set item A (SW MODE1) – G (SW MODE7):
Enter the SIM 46-33 mode.
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-43
TEST
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : SUPER FINE)
A:
x
1
1
A
x
AUTO
B
x
EXPOSURE1
C
x
EXPOSURE2
D
x
EXPOSURE3
2)
Select COLOR AE mode with [NEXT] and [BACK] key.
3)
Select the setting mode with the scroll key.
COLOR
AE
A
B
C
Content
SW_
MODE1
ON
OFF
SW_
MODE2
ON
OFF
SW_
MODE3
ON
OFF
D
SW_
MODE4
ON
OFF
E
SW_
MODE5
ON
OFF
SW_
MODE6
ON
OFF
F
G SW_
MODE7
H
ON
OFF
TH_MAX_
MONO
I
TH_MAX_
COLOR
J
SW_NEWS
K
SW_MODE_
SCR1
L
SW_MODE_
SCR2
M SW_MODE_
MIX
N
SW_HOSEI
A
TH_MODE_
SCR
TH_SITAJI_
SCR
B
Auto mode: Text
document
background
detection
Auto mode: Text
mesh document
background
detection
Auto mode: Texton-mesh
document
background
detection
Auto mode: Mesh
document
background
detection
Auto mode: Photo
document
background
detection
Auto mode: text
document
background
detection
Auto mode: Other
document
background
detection
Monochrome
background
detection threshold
value
Color background
detection threshold
value
Newspaper
background
forcible delete
switch
Mesh area
background
judgment switch
Mesh area
background delete
select switch
Auto other
document
background
detection switch
Correction table
correction
Mesh ratio
threshold value
Background mesh
threshold value
When the value of the set item corresponding to the document
kind is set to 1, the background delete function of the document kind is enabled.
To reproduce the document colors directly, set this setting to
OFF (0).
EXECUTE
Display/Item
Used to set Enable/Disable of the background delete function
for various kinds of documents.
OK
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the entered
value to the memory.
Set item H (TH_MAX_MONO):
Used to set the density level at which the background delete
function is enabled for monochrome background documents.
Adjustment
range
Default
value
0–1
1
Set to the range of 0 – 16.
To delete the background of light-density documents: Increase
the set value.
To delete the background of dark-density documents:
Decrease the set value.
0–1
1
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set
value to the memory.
Set item I (TH_MAX_COLOR):
0–1
1
Used to set the density level at which the background delete
function is enabled for color background documents.
Set to the range of 0 – 16.
To delete the background of light-density documents: Increase
the set value.
0–1
0
0–1
0
To delete the background of dark-density documents:
Decrease the set value.
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set
value to the memory.
Set item J (SW_NEWS):
0–1
0
Used to set Enable/Disable of the newspaper (monochrome)
background delete function.
It is not affected by the set item H.
For newspapers of color background, this setting is invalid.
0–1
0
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set
value to the memory.
Set item A (TH_MODE_SCR):
0 – 32
15
Used to set the mesh are level at which the background delete
function is enabled for printed documents with mesh images.
To delete background of documents with much mesh area:
Increase the set value.
0 – 32
15
To delete background of documents with less mesh area:
Decrease the set value.
0–1
0
Select TH_MODE_SCR, enter the set value, and press [SET]
key to save the entered value to the memory.
(NOTE)
1–3
3
0–1
0
1–2
2
0–8
(–4 – +4)
0 – 10000
4
3000
0 – 10000
3000
Enable/Disable of the background delete operation is determined
by AND condition of A (SW MODE1) – G (SW MODE7), H (TH_
MAX_MONO), I (TH_MAX_COLOR), and A (TH_MODE_SCR).
For newspapers documents, however, it is determined by the set
item J (SW_NEWS) only.
Except for the above set items, do not change the setting in the
market. Set them to the default values.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 46
20-L Color document identification level (ACS
operation) setting
1)
Enter the SIM 46-33 mode.
0
When the machine is used with some adjustment values changed
from the default values, this adjustment is required in the following
cases.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-43
TEST
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : SUPER FINE)
A:
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
x
1
1
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
A
x
AUTO
B
x
EXPOSURE1
C
x
EXPOSURE2
D
x
EXPOSURE3
EXECUTE
* When the user requests for the adjustment.
This setting is used to set the recognition level of a color image in a
document.
The actual ACS operation is executed according to the combination
of the judgment reference value in the color auto mode set by the
device and this setting.
OK
2)
Select the ACS mode with [NEXT] key and [BACK] key.
3)
Select the setting mode of "P/SIM LEVEL" with the scroll key.
When a monochrome document cannot be judged as a monochrome document or when a color document cannot be judged as a
color document, change this setting. This setting is applied to the
color auto copy mode.
When a monochrome document is not recognized as a monochrome document, increase the set value.
When a color document is not recognized as a color document, decrease the set value.
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set
value to the memory.
The figure in the table indicates the ACS setting level in the
device setting.
The ACS setting level of the device setting (the judgment reference value in the color auto mode) is changed with the setting
of SIM 46-33 ACS/P/SIM LEVEL.
The left and the upper area from the cross point of the device
setting on the table and the ACS/P/SIM LEVEL setting serves
as the ACS operation condition.
Small hue area
Large hue area
Hue area (Device setting ACS setting level
(Judgment reference set value in the color auto mode))
ACS color judgment setting
Area level 5 Area level 4
Area level 3 Area level 2
Can be set About 10mm x About 5mm x
optionally.
5mm
5mm
(30000 pixel or (30000 pixel) (15000 pixel)
more)
About 3mm x
4mm
(7000 pixel)
Area level 1
About 1mm x
3mm
(1875 pixel)
Area level 5 Area level 4 Area level 3 Area level 2 Area level 1
Can be set
optionally.
(30000 pixel or
more)
Large color
area
Hue level
(ACS/P/SIM
LEVEL)
Small color
area
About
10mm × 5mm
(30000 pixel)
About
5mm × 5mm
(15000 pixel)
About
3mm × 4mm
(7000 pixel)
Hue
level 5
C
C
Hue
level 4
B
B
㪚
Hue
level 3
A
A
㪙
㪙
㪚
㪘
㪙
㪘
Hue
level 2
Hue
level 1
Device setting ACS setting level (Judgment reference set
value in the color auto mode) (5 steps)
[Monochrome]
1←2←3→4→5
[Color]
SIM 46-33 ACS/P/SIM LEVEL (3 steps)
Weak hue [Monochrome] ↔ [Color] Strong hue
XC
XB
About
1mm × 3mm
(1875 pixel)
XA
* Adjustment in 3 steps of device setting
(Example) When the ASC setting level of device setting (judgment
reference set value in the color auto mode) is 2 and SIM 46-33
ACS/P/SIM LEVEL is set to 3, the following area serves as the
ACS operating condition.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 47
㪚
㪘
Large hue area
ACS color judgment setting
Hue level
(SIM LEVEL)
⦡⋡䈏ᒝ䈇
Strong
hue
Weak hue
⦡⋡䈏ᒙ
䈇
Small hue area
Hue area (Device setting ACS setting level
(Judgment reference set value in the color auto mode))
Area level 5 Area level 4 Area level 3 Area level 2 Area level 1
Can be set About 10mm x About 5mm x
optionally.
5mm
5mm
(30000 pixel or (30000 pixel) (15000 pixel)
more)
About 3mm x About 1mm x
4mm
3mm
(7000 pixel)
(1875 pixel)
Hue
level 5
Hue
level 4
Hue
level 3
Hue
level 2
Hue
level 1
(NOTE) Though the judgment reference in the color auto mode of
device setting is set to "5: Monochrome," if a monochrome document is not recognized as a monochrome document, increase the
set value of the set item A TH ACS5 ENLARGE (area level 5).
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set value to
the memory.
Except for the above set item, do not change the setting in the market. Set it to the default value.
21 Printer color balance/density adjustment
(1) Note before execution of the printer color balance/density
adjustment
(Requisite condition before execution of the printer color balance/
density adjustment)
Before execution of the printer color balance/density adjustment,
the copy color balance/density adjustment must have been completed properly.
(This adjustment is required in the following cases.)
* Basically same as when the copy color balance/density adjustment is required. Refer to the page of the ADJ 20 print color balance/density adjustment.
* After the copy color balance/density adjustment.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 48
(2) Flow of printer color balance/density adjustment procedures
Printer color balance/density adjustment
START
Process correction is forcibly
performed. (SIM 44-6)
Execute the half tone image
correction. (SIM 44-26)
No
Is PCL mode
supported?
Yes
Check the printer color balance/
density. (Check the test pattern
of SIM 64-5.)
Use SIM 67-25 to the color balance
check sheet, and check the patch
color balance of process black.
Are the copy
color balance and density
at satisfactory
levels?
No
Yes
(to Next page)
(to Next page)
: Standard adjustment flow
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 49
(from Previous page)
(from Previous page)
Perform ADJ 21B printer color balance/
density auto adjustment. (SIM 67-24)
3
Can the
printer color balance and
density be adjusted to satisfactory
levels with the fine
adjustment?
Press the EXECUTE key.
(The adjustment pattern 1 is printed.)
No
Yes
4
Enter the SIM 67-24 mode and select
A3 (11 x 17) paper. (Auto selection)
No
Is PCL mode
supported?
Perform the manual adjustment of ADJ 21C
printer color balance, density adjustment. (SIM 67-25)
Yes
Yes
Use SIM 67-25 to print
the color balance
check sheet, and
check the patch color
balance of process
black./Check the
printer color balance
and density.
(Check the test pattern
of SIM 64-5)
Is PCL mode
supported?
No
Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance
check sheet, and check the patch color
balance of process black.
Cancel SIM 67-24.
No
Are
the color
balance and density at
the satisfactory
levels?
Yes
No
Press the OK key. (The initial
setup of half tone image correction
is automatically performed.)
Use SIM 67-25 to print
the color balance
check sheet, and
check the patch color
balance of process
black.
Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance
check sheet, and check the patch color
balance of process black./Check the
printer color balance and density.
(Check the test pattern of SIM 64-5)
No
Set the adjustment pattern 1 on the
original table, select the FACTORY
mode, and press the EXECUTE key.
(Auto adjustment step 1) *1
Are the printer
color balance and density
at satisfactory
levels?
Were
all the three kinds
of color balance/density
adjustment targets
changed?
(SIM 67-26)
Yes
Yes
No
Change the color balance/
density adjustment factory
targets. (SIM 67-26)
Were the
printer color balance
and density
customized?
Were
the three kinds of
color balance/density
adjustment targets
changed?
(SIM 67-26)
Yes
Auto color balance adjustment
service target is set.
3
Yes
No
Enter the SIM 67-27 mode.
4
Make the factory printer balance target
(when adjusting the printer color
balance/density with SIM 67-24) same
as the service color balance target and
the color balance target when adjusting
the density. (SIM67-28)
Press the SETUP key.
No
Is PCL mode
supported?
Set the color patch image (adjustment
pattern) printed in the printer color
balance/density adjustment on the original
table, and press the EXECUTE key.
Yes
Execute the half tone image correction.
(Forcible execution) (SIM 44-26)
Press the REPEAT key.
Check the printer color balance/density.
(Check the test pattern of SIM 64-5)
Press the EXECUTE key.
Press the OK key.
No
The printer color
balance and density
adjustment completed.
Are the
printer color
balance and the density
in the specified
level ?
Yes
Cancel SIM 67-27.
No
Yes
Is the printer
color balance density
adjustment performed
with SIM67-25?
*1: When adjusting to a customized color balance, select the SERVICE mode.
: Standard adjustment flow
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 50
㧠
(3) Printer color balance/density check
(Note)
Before checking the copy color balance and the density, be sure to
execute the following procedures in advance.
* Execute the high density image correction (process correction)
forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
* Execute the half tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
(Procedure)
a. When the PCL mode is supported:
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed.
The density level of each color must be almost at the same level.
Patch B may not be copied.
Patch A must not be copied.
21-A Printer color balance adjustment (Auto
adjustment)
a. General
Execute SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The
print test pattern is printed.
The color balance adjustment (auto adjustment) is used to adjust
the print density of each color (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) automatically with SIM 67-24 or the user program.
(When this adjustment is executed, the color balance adjustments
of all the print modes are revised.)
There are following two modes of the automatic color balance
adjustment.
1)
Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman) (SIM 67-24
I used.)
2)
Auto color balance adjustment by the user (The user program
is used.) (The color balance target becomes the service target.)
The auto color balance adjustment by the user is provided to
reduce the number of service calls.
If the print color balance is lost for some reasons, the user can
use this color balance adjustment to recover the balance.
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the
machine environment is greatly changed, this function does
not work effectively.
On the other hand, the auto color balance adjustment by the
serviceman functions to recover the normal color balance
though the machine environment is greatly changed. If the
machine has a fatal problem, repair and adjust it for obtaining
the normal color balance.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully
understood.
b. Note for execution of the color balance adjustment (Auto adjustment)
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed. The density level of each color must be almost at the
same level.
1)
The copy color balance adjustment must have been completed
properly.
2)
Be sure to use the specified paper for color.
3)
Before execution of the image quality check and the image
quality adjustment, be sure to execute the following corrections forcibly to set the image forming section to the optimum
state.
b. When the PCL mode is not supported: (In the case of GDI
model)
Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance adjustment sheet and
compare each process (CMY) black patch color balance and the
black patch to check the color balance.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
* Execute the half tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
c. Adjustment procedure
(Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)
Fig. 1 PG image
Low density
High density
1)
Enter the SIM 67-24 mode.
Y
0
M
TEST
C
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PRINT THE TEST PATCH.
Bk
(PLEASE USE SPECIFIED TYPE OF A3 OR 11”17” SIZE PAPER
FOR THIS ADJUSTMENT
Max O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
EXECUTE
1) The max. density
section is not blurred.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.
3) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK
• The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
• The patch density is changed gradually.
Patch A of each of Y, M,
C, and BK are not copied.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically
selected.)
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 51
3)
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in
procedure 2) on the document table.
5)
Press [OK] key on the operation panel.
0
Place the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper
so that the thin lines on the paper are on the left side. Place 5
sheets of white paper on the printed color patch image (adjustment pattern) paper.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
TEST
PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE
CONFIRM THE ADJUSTED PATCH AND PRESS [OK] TO REGISTER THIS PATCH DATA
PRESS [REPEAT] TO CONTINUE THIS PROCEDURE.
PRINTER CALIBRATION
OK
REPEAT
Remark:
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the half tone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTERING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE" is displayed. This
operation takes several minutes.
After completion of the operation, "Please quit this mode" is
displayed.
Do not cancel the simulation until "Please quit this mode" is
displayed.
0
4)
Press [FACTORY] key on the operation panel, and press
[EXECUTE] key.
PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE
COMPLETED
When the color balance is customized with the manual color
balance adjustment (SIM 67-25) according to the user's
request and the color balance is registered as the service target with SIM 67-27, if the color balance is adjusted to that color
balance, select the service target.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE
PLEASE SELECT THE MODE (FACTORY) OR (SERVICE) AND PLACE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
TEST
THIS
PROCEDURE.
PLEASE
6)
QUIT
THIS
MODE.
Check the color balance and density.
(Method 1)
Check to insure that the printed color balance check patch
image is within the following specifications.
THE PRINTED TEST PATCH ON DOCUMENT GLASS THEN PRESS [EXECUTE].
Fig. 1 PG image
,
High density
㪁LIGHT AREA AT LEFT SIDE ON DOCUMENT GLASS.
FACTORY
SERVICE
Low density
Y
EXECUTE
The print color balance adjustment (step 1) is automatically
executed to print the color balance check patch image. Wait
until the operation panel shown in procedure 5) is displayed.
M
C
Bk
Remark:
(Descriptions on FACTORY key and SERVICE key in the color
balance auto adjustment menu.)
There are two kinds of the gamma target for the color balance
auto adjustment; Factory and Service.
FACTORY key and SERVICE key are used to select one of the
above two.
Max O
N
M
L
K
J
1) The max. density
section is not blurred.
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.
3) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK
• The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
• The patch density is changed gradually.
Patch A of each of Y, M,
C, and BK are not copied.
Factory target color balance: Standard color balance (It can be
selected from the three kinds of fixed color balances with SIM
63-11.)
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed.
Service target color balance: The color balance can be customized according to the user's request. (Variable)
The density level of each color must be almost at the same
level.
When shipping, the service target gamma data and the factory
target gamma data are the same.
Patch B may not be copied.
Both are set to the standard color balance when shipping.
Patch A must not be copied.
For the service target, the customized color balance gamma
can be registered with SIM 63-7.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 52
(Method 2)
(Normal end (Auto transition))
By printing the color balance adjustment sheet with SIM 67-25
and comparing each process (CMY) black patch color balance
with the black patch, the color balance adjustment can be
checked more precisely.
0
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
DENSITY
CORRECT
EXECUTION
[S_VALUE]
High density
#1: 907,
#2: 902,
#3: 909,
#4:921,
#6: 347,
#7:992,
#8:1047,
#9:1081, #10:1137
#5:936
Low density
Y
#11:1183, #12:1222, #13:1261, #14:1283,#15:1260
M
K
C
Bk
C
M
Y
EXECUTE
(Abnormal end (Auto transition))
CMY
mixed
color
0
Max O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
3) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.
4) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK
• The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
• The patch density is changed gradually.
TONE
DENSITY CORRECT
EXECUTION
[S_VALUE]
2) Patch A of each of Y, M,
C, and BK are not copied.
#1: ERR,
#2: ERR,
#3: ERR,
#4: ERR,
#6: ERR,
#7: ERR,
#8: ERR,
#9: ERR, #10: ERR
#5: ERR
#11: ERR, #12: ERR, #13: ERR, #14: ERR,#15: ERR
(Method 3)
(This method cannot be used when the machine supports only
the GDI mode.)
When the PCL mode is supported, use SIM 64-5 to print the
print test pattern.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key,
and the print test pattern is printed out.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed. The density level of each color must be
almost at the same level.
When the factory target is selected in the procedure 4) and the
auto adjustment is executed but a satisfactory result is not
obtained on the color balance and the density, use SIM 67-26
to change the factory color balance target and repeat the procedures from 1).
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above procedures, execute the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
20C).
When the service target is selected in the procedure 4) and the
auto adjustment is executed but a satisfactory result is not
obtained, execute the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
21C).
Cancel SIM 67-25.
For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, the
adjustment is completed.
8)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
HALF
1) The max. density
section is not blurred.
7)
1/1
Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction (forcible execution).
Enter the SIM 44-26 mode, and press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
K
9)
C
M
Y
EXECUTE
1/1
After completion of the operation, cancel SIM 44-26.
10) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern and check the print
color balance and the density again.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The
print test pattern is printed out.
If a satisfactory result on the print color balance and the density is
not obtained with the automatic adjustment, execute the manual
adjustment (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 21B).
21-B Printer color balance adjustment (Manual
adjustment)
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment is required.
Refer to the page of the ADJ print color balance/density adjustment.
* After execution of the copy color balance/density adjustment.
a. General
The color balance adjustment (Manual adjustment) is used to
adjust the copy density (15 points for each color) of each color
(CMYK) manually when the automatic adjustment cannot obtain
the specified result or when a fine adjustment is required or when
the user requests to change (customize) the color balance.
In this adjustment, only the patch of each color is adjusted in the
above case where the automatic adjustment cannot obtain the
specified result.
When the color balance is lost, execute the automatic color balance adjustment in advance and execute this adjustment for better
efficiency.
0
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
TOUGH
DENSITY
CORRECT
[EXECUTE] THEN
EXECUTION
EXECUTION
b. Note for execution of the color balance adjustment (Manual
adjustment)
START.
1)
The copy color balance adjustment must have been completed
properly.
2)
When setting the color patch image adjustment pattern on the
document table, place 5 sheets of white paper on the color
patch image adjustment pattern.
3)
Be sure to use the specified paper for color.
4)
Before execution of the image quality check and the image
quality adjustment, be sure to execute the following corrections forcibly to set the image forming section to the optimum
state.
EXECUTE
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
* Execute the half tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 53
c. Adjustment procedure
1)
Enter the SIM 67-25 mode.
4)
Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
5)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set in the range of 245 – 755 (1 –
999). When SIM 67-24 is used to adjust the automatic color
balance and density, all the set values of this simulation are set
to 500.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-25
PRINTER ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT 㧦PG
A:
㨇
xx
1㨪 99㨉
K
C
M
A㧦 xx
㧧 POINT1
B㧦 xx
㧧 POINT2
C㧦 xx
㧧 POINT3
D㧦 xx
㧧 POINT4
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
Y
EXECUTE
Repeat procedures of 2) – 5) until the condition of 3) is satisfied.
OK
10-key
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
adjustment values of A – O to a same level collectively.
OK
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
way of adjustment.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-25
Referring to the black and gray patches, adjust so that each
process (CMY) black/gray patch color balance of A – O
approaches the black/gray patch level as far as possible.
PRINTER ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT 㧦PG
A:
㨇
xx
1㨪 99㨉
K
C
M
A㧦 xx
㧧 POINT1
B㧦 xx
㧧 POINT2
C㧦 xx
㧧 POINT3
D㧦 xx
㧧 POINT4
6)
Y
EXECUTE
(For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, the
adjustment is completed.)
OK
7)
EXECUTE
or self print end
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key.
The print test pattern is printed out.
0
TEST
CLOSE
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed. The density level of each color must be
almost at the same level.
PRINTER ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT 㧦PG
A:
㨇
K
xx
1㨪 99㨉
C
M
A㧦 xx
㧧 POINT1
B㧦 xx
㧧 POINT2
C㧦 xx
㧧 POINT3
D㧦 xx
㧧 POINT4
8)
Y
Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern.
NOTE: Only for the machine which support the PCL mode.
(For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, this procedure cannot be used.)
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.67-25
Cancel SIM 67-25.
EXECUTE
OK
Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction (forcible execution).
Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 or 11" x 17" paper is automatically
selected.)
3)
Check that the following specification is satisfied or the desired
color balance is obtained.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
0
The color balance adjustment pattern is printed.
If the above specification is not satisfied, perform the following
procedures.
High density
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
TOUGH
DENSITY
CORRECT
[EXECUTE] THEN
EXECUTION
EXECUTION
START.
Low density
EXECUTE
Y
M
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
C
Bk
(Normal end (Auto transition))
CMY
mixed
color
0
Max O
N
M
L
K
J
I
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A
1) The max. density
section is not blurred.
3) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.
4) Patch for each of C, M, Y, BK
• The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
• The patch density is changed gradually.
2) Patch A of each of Y, M,
C, and BK are not copied.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed.
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
DENSITY
CORRECT
EXECUTION
[S_VALUE]
#1: 907,
#2: 902,
#3: 909,
#4:921,
#6: 347,
#7:992,
#8:1047,
#9:1081, #10:1137
#5:936
#11:1183, #12:1222, #13:1261, #14:1283,#15:1260
K
C
M
The density level of each color must be almost at the same
level.
Patch B may not be copied.
Patch A must not be copied.
When, however, the color balance is adjusted according to a
request from the user, there is no need to set to the standard
color balance stated above.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 54
Y
EXECUTE
1/1
(Abnormal end (Auto transition))
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
HALF
TONE
DENSITY CORRECT
EXECUTION
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
#1: ERR,
#2: ERR,
#3: ERR,
#4: ERR,
#6: ERR,
#7: ERR,
#8: ERR,
#9: ERR, #10: ERR
#5: ERR
* When the user requests for customizing the color balance.
* When the service color balance target gamma is judged as
improper.
#11: ERR, #12: ERR, #13: ERR, #14: ERR,#15: ERR
9)
C
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
[S_VALUE]
K
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment (manual adjustment) is executed with SIM 67-25.
M
Y
EXECUTE
1/1
• Color balance target for the printer color balance adjustment
After completion of the operation, cancel SIM 44-26.
10) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern again.
A
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key.
The print test pattern is printed out.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed. The density level of each color must be
almost at the same level.
Kind
Factory color
balance (gamma)
target
B
Service color
balance (gamma)
target
C
User color
balance (gamma)
target
If the color balance is customized, use SIM 67-27 to register
the color balance as the service target.
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
required.
If the customized color balance is registered as the service target, the automatic color balance adjustment can be made in
the next color balance adjustment.
In the next color balance adjustment, select the service target
color balance in the automatic color balance adjustment mode
to make an adjustment to the similar color balance as the registered color balance.
(Auto color balance adjustment service color balance target
gamma setting)
a. General
When the automatic color balance adjustment is executed, a certain color balance (gamma) is used as the target.
There are following three kinds of the target.
• Factory color balance (gamma) target
• Service color balance (gamma) target
• User color balance (gamma) target
In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set
to a desired level.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 55
Descriptions
There are three kinds of the color balance target,
and each of them is specified according to the
machine design. Use SIM 67-26 to select one of
them as the factory target. The default setting
(factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1)
which emphasizes color reproduction.
This target is used when the user requests to
customize the color balance to user’s desired
level. In advance, the user’s unique color
balance must be registered as the service color
balance target.
The above registration (setting) is made by the
serviceman with SIM 67-25 to adjust the color
balance and with SIM 67-27 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user
executes the color balance adjustment.
When, therefore, the service color balance target
is changed, the color balance target of the user’s
color balance adjustment is also changed.
When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color
balance is set to the factory color balance target
set with SIM 67-26.
The default setting (factory setting) of the color
balance is same as the factory color balance
target. (Emphasized on color reproduction
(DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the
color balance, be sure to use SIM 67-28 to set
the color balance to the factory color balance
target.
Same color balance as the service color balance
(gamma) target
When the service color balance target is
changed, this color balance target is also
changed accordingly.
• Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the
printer color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24)
Color balance target in the copy color balance
automatic adjustment (SIM 67-24)
Use SIM 67-26 to select
one of the three kinds of
color balance targets.
Factory color balance
target (DEF1)
Factory color balance
target (DEF2)
Factory color balance
target (DEF3)
Factory color balance
target (DEF1)
=
Service color balance
target
Factory color balance
target (one of DEF1 – 3)
≠
Service color balance
target (Unique)
Factory color balance
target (one of DEF1 – 3)
=
Service color balance
target
Factory setting
Use SIM 67-25 to adjust the
optional color balance, and
use SIM 67-27 to register it.
Execute SIM 67-28.
(The service color balance
target is the same as the
factory color balance target.)
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
Color balance target for
the user color balance
adjustment
=
Service color balance
target
• Factory target in the printer color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24)
By use of SIM 67-26, one of the following color balances can be set as the factory color balance target.
Each of the three color balances cannot be changed. (Fixed)
SIM67-28
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Service color balance target/Color balance
target for the user color balance adjustment
Factory color balance target (DEF2)
+b* Direction of Yellow
SIM67-28
Hue
Factory color balance target
(DEF1) = Service color balance
target/Color balance target for the
user color balance adjustment
Direction of Green
Factory color
balance target
(DEF1)
(A)
+a*
Direction
of Red
DEF1
Color balance with emphasis on color
reproduction (factory setting)
DEF2
Color balance with slightly strong Cyan
DEF3
Color balance with emphasis on Cyan
Default
Direction of Blue
Factory color balance target (DEF3)
SIM67-28
Factory color balance target (DEF3) =
Service color balance target/Color balance
target for the user color balance adjustment
• Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 67-28).
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
required.
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance
can be adjusted with SIM 67-25 and registered with SIM 67-27.
When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color balance is set
to the same balance as the factory color balance target set with
SIM 67-26.
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25 according to the user's request, use SIM 67-27
to register the service color balance target data by use of the
printed adjustment pattern.
• Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in
the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24). When, therefore,
the service color balance target is changed, this target is also
changed accordingly.
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and
the purpose of registration)
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
customized with SIM 67-25.
By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised.
It is recommendable to keep the printed adjustment pattern with
SIM 67-25. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the
same color balance target to another machine.
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data.
Do not fold it and keep it under the circumstances which protect it
from discoloration and dirt.
The service color balance target data are basically registered
immediately after the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM
67-25.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 56
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25, the color balance of the
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time.
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
6)
0
SCANNER
#B:
K
0
#B:
#G:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-27
TEST
SCANNER
TARGET
91,
28935,
OF
PRINTER COLOR CALIB
#C
2944,
#D:
3227,
#H:
54344,
#I:
86968,
#E:
5822,
#J: 122678,
#F:
K
#M: 195950,
C
M
#N: 201249,
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image
(adjustment pattern).
If the color balance could not be adjusted satisfactorily with
SIM 67-25 (Color balance adjustment (Manual)), do not execute SIM 67-27 to register the service color balance target
data.
Press [EXECUTE] key.
0
NOW
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-27
CHART
PATCH
#E:
1249,
#J: 128495,
#N: 194377,
#:O: 197276
#F:
2074
#K: 165225
REPEAT
Y
OK
CALIB
1/1
Press [OK] key.
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjustment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service target.
(Procedures to set the service color balance target and the
color balance target for the user color balance adjustment to
the same color balance as the factory color balance target)
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color balance requested
by the user and it was registered as the service color balance target with SIM 67-27.
* When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 6726, be sure to execute this procedure.
1)
Enter the SIM 67-28 mode.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-28
1/1
SETUP
COLOR
908,
76117,
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB㧦SERVICE
A color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed by another
machine can be used.
PRINTER
M
#I:
In case of an abnormality, settle the problem and try again.
#:O: 207112
Y
OF
#M: 189254,
#D:
0
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) correctly
adjusted and printed in the printer color balance adjustment
(Manual adjustment) (SIM 67-25) (ADJ 21C) on the document
table.
TARGET
624,
18951,
8600
Press [SETUP] key.
TEST
SETUP㧦SERVICE
#K: 151198
4)
SCANNER
CALIB
SETUP㧦SERVICE
3)
5)
#C
#H:
C
TEST
#L: 169731,
PRINTER COLOR
Check that the set level is increased in the sequence of B – O.
If there is no variation or variation is reversed, it is judged as
abnormal.
7)
Enter the SIM 67-27 mode.
OF
The color balance (gamma) target set level of each color
(KCMY) can be checked with K/C/M/Y keys.
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as the
service color balance target)
2)
3298,
#L: 184155,
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
SIM 67-25. This procedure may have been executed erroneously.
If the color balance is shifted from the standard, an adjustment
is required. If not, an adjustment is not required. When an
optional color balance is requested by the user, make an
adjustment.
227,
#G:
This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 67-27.
Use SIM 67-25 (Printer color balance adjustment (manual
adjustment) mode) to print two sheets of the color patch image
(adjustment pattern).
TARGET
BASE:8800
Select the service color balance target with SIM 67-24 and execute
the color valance adjustment (Auto), and check the adjustment
result. When the result is unsatisfactory or abnormal, the registered
service target data for the color balance adjustment (Auto) may be
improper.
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-27
TEST
The correctness of the service color balance target data can be
judges as follows.
b. Setting procedure
Press [REPEAT] key, set the second color patch image
(adjustment pattern), and execute the procedure 5) again.
SETUP㧦SERVICE
ARE
YOU SURE?
2)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
3)
Press [YES] key.
YES
NO
EXECUTE
The service color balance target and the color balance target for
the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color balance as the factory color balance target.
21-C Auto color balance adjustment by the user
(Copy color balance auto adjustment
ENABLE setting and adjustment)
a. General
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color calibration (auto adjustment of the copy color balance and density).
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user operation with SIM 26-54.
NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's
understanding on the automatic adjustment of the copy
color balance and density and the user's operational ability
are judged enough to execute the adjustment.
READING...
EXECUTE
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.
When set to ENABLE, give enough explanations on the
operating procedures, notes, and operations to the user.
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 57
1 : Dec. 15 2005
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
22 Fusing paper guide position adjust-
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
ment
b. Setting procedure
1)
Enter the SIM 26-54 mode.
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
* When the fusing section is disassembled.
0
TEST
DISABLING OF AUTOMATIC
COLOR
㨇
0㨪
* When a wrinkle is made on paper in the fusing section.
CALIBRATION OF PRINTER
x
* When an image deflection or image blur occurs in the paper rear
edge section.
1 㨉
1)
Loosen the C fixing screw.
2)
Shift the fusing paper guide in the arrow direction A or B (up
and down direction).
A㧦 x
A:
* When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-54
㧧 (1:YES 0:NO)
OK
2)
Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key.
When disabling, set to "0" (NO).
When enabling, set to "1" (Yes).
3)
Press [OK] key.
When set to DISABLE, the menu of the user auto color calibration (automatic adjustment of printer color balance and density) is not displayed in the user program mode.
(Auto color calibration by the user (Auto color balance adjustment))
Remark: This adjustment is based on the service target color balance set with SIM 67-27 or SIM 67-28. If, therefore, the above settings are not properly performed, this adjustment cannot be made
properly.
1)
Enter the system setting mode.
2)
Enter the printer setting mode.
3)
Press the auto color calibration key.
4)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
A
A
B
B
The standard fixing position is the center of the marking scale.
Change the position depending on the situation.
* When a wrinkle is formed on paper, change the position
upward (in the arrow direction A).
* When an image deflection or image blur occurs in the paper
rear edge section, shift the position downward (in the arrow
direction B).
1
23 Document size sensor adjustment
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the document size sensor section is disassembled.
5)
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
* When the document size sensor section is replaced.
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in procedure 4) on the document table. Set the patch image so that
the light density area is on the left side.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color
patch image (adjustment pattern).
Black
Yellow
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
23-A Document size sensor detection point
adjustment
1)
Red
Enter the SIM 41-1 mode.
Blue
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41-01
PD SENSOR CHECK
OCSW
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
1/1
1/1
6)
Press [EXECUTE] key, and the copy color balance adjustment
is executed automatically. After completion of the adjustment,
the display returns to the original operation screen.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 58
Slowly tilt the document detection arm unit in the arrow direction. Loosen the original cover switch actuator adjustment
screw so that the display OCSW is returned to the normal display when the height of the arm unit top from the table glass is
32 ± 0.5mm. Slide the actuator position and adjust. (If the ON
timing of the original cover switch is shifted, the document
detection function may malfunction.)
2)
Execute the sensor adjustment without document.
With the document cover open, without placing a document on
the table glass, press [EXECUTE] key.
3)
Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press
[EXECUTE] key.
If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT PHOTO
SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUESTED" is displayed.
24 Manual paper feed tray paper size
(width) sensor adjustment
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the manual paper feed tray section is disassembled.
* When the manual paper feed tray unit is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the PCU PWB is replaced.
1)
32+
-0.5mm
Enter the SIM 40-2 mode.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.40-02
BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT
MAXPOSITION
PRESS
ADJUSTMENT.
[EXECUTE]
TO START
EXECUTE
23-B Document size sensor sensitivity adjustment
1)
EXECUTE
Enter the SIM41-2 mode.
0
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41-02
DOCUMENT
SIZE
PHOTO-SENSOR
SETUP
TEST
BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT
MAXPOSITION
WITH THE ORIGINAL COVEROPENED,TURN ON THE EXECUTE
KEY WITH THE ORIGINAL ON THE ORIGINAL TABLE.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.40-02
ADJUSTMENTE.
EXECUTING…
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
0
TEST
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41-02
TEST
DOCUMENT SIZE PHOTO-SENSOR SETUP
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.40-02
BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT
SET AN A3-SIZE(11”17”)COPY PAPER ON THE ORIGINAL TABLE,
AND WITH THE OC OPEND,TURN ON THE EXECUTE KEY.
P1(A4)POSITION
PRESS
ADJUSTMENT.
[EXECUTE]
TO START
EXECUTE
Adjustment completed
Adjustment
failed
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41-02
DOCUMENT
SIZE
PHOTO-SENSOR
SETUP
DOCUMENT
SIZE
PHOTO- SENSOR
LEVEL
IS
Repeat the above procedure to adjust
the A4R width MIN POSITION.
ADJUSTED.
EXECUTE
0
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41-02
DOCUMENT
SIZE
PHOTO-SENSOR
PHOTO-SENSOR
ERROR
TEST
SETUP
SIMULATION NO.40-02
CLOSE
BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT
POSITION
. COMPLETE
PD1 ,---,---,---,---,---,---,---
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 59
2)
Set the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width position.
25 RSPF tray paper size (width) sensor
adjustment (Refer to the MX-RPX1
SM.)
26 Touch panel coordinate setting
This adjustment is required in the following cases:
* When the operation panel is replaced.
When a U2 trouble occurs.
When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.
3)
1)
Enter the SIM65-1 mode.
2)
Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions).
Press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
The maximum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
4)
Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4 size.
5)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
The A4 size width position detection level of the manual paper
feed guide is recognized.
6)
Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4R size width.
7)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds
and the display is reversed. When all the four points are
pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the display returns to the simulation sub number entry screen.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen
again.
The A4R size width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display
frame and the detection position when the touch panel is
pressed.
8)
Set the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width position.
* When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such
as a needle or a pin).
27 Image loss, void area, image off-center, image magnification ratio auto
adjustment with SIM50-28
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with
SIM50-28.
* ADJ 8 Print image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning
direction) (Print engine section)
* ADJ 9 Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section)
* ADJ 14/15 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
9)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
* ADJ 16 Scan image off-center adjustment
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
* ADJ 17 Print area (void area) adjustment (Print engine section)
The minimum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
(Menu in SIM50-28 mode)
If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR"
display is highlighted.
When the operation is completed normally, the above data are
saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.
* ADJ 18 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
Display/Item
OC ADJ
BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ
SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT
DATA
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 60
Content
Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (Document table
mode)
Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
adjustment
Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (RSPF mode)
Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each
paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
Adjustment result display
Display of data used when an adjustment is
executed
27-A Print image main scanning direction image
magnification ratio automatic adjustment
1)
Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
2)
Select [BK-MAG ADJ] with the key button.
7)
Press [OK] key.
The adjustment result becomes valid.
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT㧦SERVICE
0
TEST
BK MAG
: ** |**|
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE
OC ADJ
BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ
SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT
DATA
REPRINT
1/1
3)
Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key button.
(Any paper size will do.)
RESCAN
RETRY
DATA
27-B Image off-center automatic adjustment
1)
Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
2)
Select [SETUP/PRINT] ADJ with the key button.
0
TEST
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT㧦SERVICE
CS1
MFT
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE
CS2
EXECUTE
4)
OK
OC ADJ
BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ
SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT
DATA
1/1
Press [EXECUTE] key.
1/1
3)
Select [ALL] with the key button.
The adjustment pattern is printed out.
5)
0
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direction)
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE
Note: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
guide.
LEAD
OFFSET
ALL
1/1
(NOTE)
By pressing [LEAD] or [OFFSET] button, the following items
can be executed individually.
* [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment
When [ALL] is selected, both of the above two items are
executed simultaneously.
4)
Select a paper feed tray to be adjusted.
0
TEST
6)
Press [EXECUTE] key.
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
ADU
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT 㧦SERVICE
PLEASE WAIT
EXECUTE
NOW EXECUTING…
REPRINT
EXECUTE
The following item is automatically adjustment.
* Print image main scanning direction image magnification
ratio
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 61
1/1
5)
6)
Press [EXCUTE] key.
The adjustment pattern is printed out.
5)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direction)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direction)
Note: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
guide.
Note: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
guide.
6)
7)
0
Press [EXCUTE] key.
AUTO
* Print image lead edge image position adjustment
IMAGE
PLEASE
* Print image off-center adjustment
THEN
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
The following items are automatically adjusted.
8)
Press [EXCUTE] key.
SET
PRESS
POSITION
THE
SIT
ADJUSTMENT
CHART
[EXECUTE]
TO
SERVICE
PAPER
ON
THE
OC
START
Press [OK] key.
The adjustment result becomes valid.
Perform procedures 4) to 7) for each paper feed tray.
REPRINT
27-C Copy lead edge image reference position
adjustment, image off-center, sub scanning
direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment
1)
Enter the SIM50-28 mode.
EXECUTE
The following items are automatically adjusted.
Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment,
image off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment
7)
Press [OK] key.
The adjustment result becomes valid.
0
TEST
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE
AUTO
OC ADJ
BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ
SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT
DATA
1/1
2)
Select [OC ADJ] with the key button.
3)
Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key button.
(Any paper size will do.)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
CS1
ADJUSTMENT
LEAD
REPRINT
RESCAN
SERVICE
OFFSET
RETRY
SUB
DATA
OK
27-D SPF mode image off-center, image lead
edge position, sub scanning direction
image magnification ratio automatic adjustment
CS2
EXECUTE
4)
POSITION
Refer to the RSPF (MX-RPX1) SM.
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT㧦SERVICE
MFT
IMAGE
OC
1/1
Press [EXCUTE] key.
The adjustment pattern is printed out.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ADJUSTMENTS 6 – 62
[7] SIMULATION
MX2700N
Service Manual
1. General
There are the following simulation functions for grasping the
machine operating conditions, troubleshooting, early detection of
trouble causes, speedy setting and adjustments, and improvements in servicing.
1)
Various adjustments
2)
Setting of the specifications and functions
3)
Canceling troubles
4)
Operation check
5)
Counters check, setting, clear
6)
Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis), data
check, clear
7)
Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc.) data
transfer
The operating procedures and displays depend on the form of the
operation panel of the machine.
A. Basic operation
(1)
Starting the simulation
* Entering the simulation mode
1)
Copy mode key ON → Program key ON → Asterisk (*) key
ON → CLEAR key ON → Asterisk (*) key ON → Ready for
input of a main code of simulation
2)
Entering a main code with the 10-key → START key ON
3)
Entering a sub code with the 10-key → START key ON
4)
Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
5)
The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected
item.
Press START key or EXECUTE key to start the simulation
operation.
To cancel the current simulation mode or to change the main
code and the sub code, press the user setup key.
* Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode
1)
Press CA key.
(Note for the simulation mode)
Do not turn OFF the power switch on the operation panel when the
machine is in the simulation mode.
If the power switch should be turned OFF in the simulation mode, a
malfunction may be resulted. In this case, turn OFF/ON the main
power source.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 1
Basic operation flowchart
START (Copy mode)
Press the Program key.
Press the asterisk (*) key.
Press the clear key.
Press the Program key.
Press the SYSTEM
SETTINGS key
Standby for entry of
SIM code.
Enter the main code of
SIM with the 10-key.
The main code of SIM
is displayed.
NO
Press the START button.
YES
Standby for entry of SIM
sub code
YES
You have to exit
simulation mode
before entering into
this mode for self
printing type.
Is there a sub code ?
NO
Enter SIM sub code with
the 10-key.
Select the mode and the
item with the scroll key
and the item key.
Press the START button.
NO
YES
If there is no item.
Operation check ?
NO
Operating conditions
check ?
NO
Data clear ?
Adjustments
or setting (counter data
change) ?
Do you want
to perform another
simulation ?
YES
NO
Do you
want to end the
simulation ?
Press the EXECUTE button
and OK button.
The display is made according to
the selected some and the item.
YES
Press the EXECUTE button
and OK button.
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.
NO
Operation is made according
to the selected mode and the item.
(Other modes)
The display is made according
to the selected mode and the item.
Do you
want to change the
content ?
NO
The changed content
is stored.
YES
Enter the new setting and
adjustment values.
The simulation mode
is canceled.
Press the EXECUTE button
and OK button.
Operation is made according
to the selected mode and item.
NO
YES
Is it the same
simulation main
code?
In the power OFF/ON type
simulation, OFF/ON
message is
Press the SYSTEM
displayed by the
SETTINGS key
SYSTEM
SETTINGS key.
YES
Press the EXECUTE button
and OK button.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 2
YES
Press the clear all key.
2. List of simulation codes
Code
Main Sub
1
1
2
2
5
1
2
3
3
2
4
3
10
2
3
5
5
1
6
2
3
4
1
7
8
9
2
3
1
6
8
9
1
Function (Purpose)
Section
Used to check the operations of the scanner unit and its control circuit.
Used to check the operation of sensor and detector in the scanning (read)
section and the related circuit.
Used to check the operations of the scanner unit.
Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder unit and the
control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the automatic
document feeder unit and the related circuits.
Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feeder unit
and the control circuits.
Used to check the operation of sensor and detector in the finisher and the
related circuit.
Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit.
Used to adjust the finisher.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk/large
capacity tray and the related circuit.
Used to check the operations of the loads in the large capacity tray and the
related circuit.
Used to check the operations of the clutches and the related circuits.
Optical (Image scanning)
Optical (Image scanning)
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
Optical (Image scanning)
RSPF
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
RSPF
Operation test/check
RSPF
Operation test/check
Finisher
Operation test/check
Finisher
Finisher
Desk/Large capacity tray
(LCC)
Desk/Large capacity tray
(LCC)
Desk/Large capacity tray
(LCC)
Operation panel
Operation test/check
Adjustment
Operation test/check
Fusing
Optical (Image scanning)
Process
Paper transport section
(Transport, paper exit)
Other
Process (Transfer)
Other
Other
Fusing
–
Process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)
Process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)
Process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)/Transfer
Duplex
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and
control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the circuit.
Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the related circuit.
Used to check the operations of the paper transport system, the transfer system,
the fusing system (clutches and solenoids) and the control circuits.
Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the primary transfer unit and the related circuit.
Used to set the operating conditions of aging.
Used to set the intermittent aging cycle.
Used to display the warm-up time.
Used to check printing in the color mode.
Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage of each color
and the control circuit.
2
Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each
printer mode and the control circuit.
6
Used to check and adjust the operation of the transfer voltage and the control
circuit.
2
10
13
14
15
16
1
-----
Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the duplex section
and its control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the loads in the duplex section and the control
circuits.
Used to check the operations of the toner motor and the related circuit.
Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U1/LCC/U2/PF troubles.
Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09" (large capacity paper feed tray) trouble.
Used to cancel the self-diag U2 trouble.
17
--
Used to cancel the self-diag PF.
21
22
1
1
3
Used to set the maintenance cycle.
Used to check the print count value in each section and each operation mode.
(Used to check the maintenance timing.)
Used to check the total numbers of misfeed and troubles. (When the number of
total jam is considerably great, it is judged as necessary for repair.)
Used to check misfeed positions and the misfeed count of each position.
4
Used to check the trouble (self diag) history.
–
5
6
Used to check the ROM version of each unit (section).
Used to output the list of the setting and adjustment data (simulations, FAX soft
switch, counters).
Used to check the number of use of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scan
(reading) unit.
Used to check the number of use (print quantity) of each paper feed section.
–
–
3
2
8
9
Purpose
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
Setting
Setting
Operation display
Operation test/check
Operation test/Check/
Adjustment
Operation test/Check/
Adjustment
Operation test/Check/
Adjustment
Operation test/check
Duplex
Operation test/check
Process (Developing)
FAX
–
LCC
MFPcnt PWB / PCU PWB
/ SCU PWB
Communication unit (RIC/
MODEM)
–
–
Operation test/check
Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
–
–
–
Paper feed, ADU
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 3
Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
Setting
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
Others
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
Code
Main Sub
22
10
11
12
13
19
90
23
2
2
Used to make the initial setting of toner concentration when replacing developer.
1
2
Used to set the paper exit tray (MX-TRX1).
Used to set the paper size of the large capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper
size is changed, this simulation must be executed to change the paper size in
software.)
Used to set the specifications of the auditor.
Used to set the count mode of the total counter and the maintenance counter.
Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed magnification ratio, etc.) of the
destination.
Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner.
Used to set the toner save mode.
Used to set allow/inhibit of HL slow-up control (CE mark support control).
Used to set the trouble memory saving procedure.
Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the developer life is reached.
Used to set YES/NO of AMS setting in the center binding mode.
Used to set the copy speed mode.
Used to set functions.
Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted
up or not.
Used to set YES/NO of the auto color calibration.
Used to set the printer calibration YES/NO.
Used to set the finisher alarm mode.
Used to set the summer time (switching timing to the summer time and the
adjustment time (shift amount)) and the time zone (for switching to the summer
time and the difference between the local time and GMT (UTC) for
synchronization with the internet time server).
Used to set whether the toner preparation message and the toner near end
message are displayed or not when the toner quantity reaches 25%.
Used to set whether the detection of communication error with RIC (U7-00) is
disabled or not.
2
3
4
5
6
7
25
26
3
5
6
10
18
30
35
38
41
49
50
52
53
54
65
67
69
27
Used to check the use frequency (send/receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is
installed)
Used to check the RSPF misfeed positions and the number of misfeed at each
position. (When the number of misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as
necessary for repair.)
Used to check the operating time of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit,
toner cartridge).
Used to check the values of the counters related to the scan mode and the
internet FAX mode.
Used to output the various set data lists.
9
10
15
30
31
1
1
1
Section
Used to check the system configuration (option, internal hardware).
Used to check the trouble history of paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of
misfeed and troubles is considerably great, it may be judged as necessary to
repair.)
Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed and
transport section.
Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (The counters are
cleared after completion of maintenance.)
Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed
section.
Used to clear the number of use of the finisher, RSPF, and the scan (reading)
unit.
Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transfer unit
and the fusing unit. (After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
Used to clear the developer counter. (After replacement of developer, clear the
counter.)
Used to clear the copy counter.
Used to clear the OPC drum counter. (After replacement of the OPC drum, clear
the counter.)
Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter.
Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed)
Used to clear the counters related to the image send.
Used to initialize the administrator password.
Used to initialize the service mode password.
Used to check the operations of the developing section.
80
24
Function (Purpose)
Purpose
–
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
–
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
FAX
RSPF
Scanner
–
–
Paper feed, transport
Operation test/Check
–
Data clear
–
Data clear
–
Data clear
–
Data clear
–
Data clear
–
–
Data clear
Data clear
–
–
–
–
–
Process (Developing
section)
Process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)
Paper exit
Paper feed
Data clear
Data clear
Data clear
Data clear
Clear
Operation test/Check
Auditor
Setting
Setting
Setting
–
–
–
–
–
–
Other
–
–
–
–
–
Printer
–
–
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Process
Setting
Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
Operation test/Check
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 4
Code
Main Sub
27
2
Used to set the FSS functions (initializing, call, toner order auto send).
5
Used to set the tag number.
6
Used to set YES/NO of the manual service call.
7
Used to set the FSS functions (enable, alert callout).
9
Used to set the threshold value for determining whether the paper feed time
between sensors is recorded or not and the threshold value for determining
whether the gain adjustment retry number is recorded or not.
Used to clear the trouble prediction history information.
11
12
13
14
1
2
33
1
40
2
7
41
1
2
3
43
1
4
20
21
22
23
24
44
Used to set the FSS function (Password, HOST server TEL number).
4
10
30
Function (Purpose)
1
2
4
6
9
12
13
14
16
21
Used to display the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain
adjustment retry number history. (for RSPF)
Used to display the high-density, half-tone process control error history and the
automatic register adjustment error history.
Used to display the history of paper feed time between sensors.
The FSS connection test mode setting is made.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed
section, the paper transport section, and the paper exit section.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors of the paper feed
section and the related circuits.
Used to check the operations of the card reader sensor and the related circuits.
(The card reader sensor operation can be monitored with the LCD display.)
(Japan only)
Used to adjust the detection level of the manual feed tray paper width detector.
Used to set the adjustment value of the detection level of the manual paper feed
tray paper width detector.
Used to display the operating state of the document sensor.
Used to adjust the detection level of the document size sensor.
Used to display the document sensor detection level (A/D) in real time and to
display the threshold value adjusted with SIM 41-2 in [ ] beside the sensor
name.
Used to set the fusing temperature in each operation mode.
Used to set the fusing temperature in each operation mode. (Continued from 4301.)
Used to correct the environments of low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for
the fusing temperature setting 1 for each paper (SIM 43-0).
Used to perform correction of high temperature and high humidity (H/H)
environment for the fusing temperature setting 1 (SIM 43-01) for each paper.
Used to perform L/L (low temperature, low humidity) correction for the fusing
temperature setting 1 (SIM 43-04) for each paper.
Used to perform H/H (high temperature, high humidity) correction for the fusing
temperature setting 1 (SIM 43-04) for each paper.
Used to enter the correction values for SIM 43-1 and SIM 43-4 temperature
corrections.
Used to set whether the correction functions of the image forming (process)
section are enabled or not.
Used to perform the light quantity adjustment of the process control sensor and
the registration sensor (two for resist are adjusted simultaneously) and the
surface scan.
Used to perform the correction operation of the image forming section and to set
the process control sensor adjustment conditions.
Used to forcibly execute the correction in the image process section (highdensity process correction) (process correction).
Used to check the data related to the result of the image forming section
correction (high density process correction). (Corrected main charger grid
voltage in each print mode, developing bias voltage, etc.) (This simulation is
used to check whether the correction is normally executed or not.)
Used to check the sampling toner image patch density data in the image forming
section correction (high density process correction). (This simulation is used to
check whether the correction is normally executed or not.)
Color image density sensor adjustment (Adjustment by the jig)
Used to check the output level of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine
temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor.
Used to check data related to the toner density correction result. (This
simulation allows to check that the correction is normally performed or not.)
Used to register the half tone process control reference value (half tone
correction).
Section
Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
–
Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
Process
Purpose
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Data clear
Paper feed
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Operation test/Check
Operation test/Check
Paper feed
Operation test/Check
Other
Operation test/Check
Paper feed
Paper feed
Adjustment
Setting
Other
Other
Other
Operation test/Check
Operation test/Check
Operation test/Check
Fusing
Fusing
Setting
Setting
Fusing
Setting
Fusing
Setting
Fusing
Setting
Fusing
Setting
Fusing
Setting
–
–
–
Setting
Process
Adjustment
Process
Setting
Process
Operation test/Check
Process
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Process
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Process
Process
Adjustment
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Setting
Process (Developing)
Process
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 5
Code
Main Sub
44
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
43
52
54
56
57
46
1
2
4
5
8
9
10
16
19
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
33
36
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
48
47
1
Function (Purpose)
Used to check the toner patch image density level of each color in half tone
image forming section correction (process correction). (This simulation is used
to check that the correction is normally executed or not.)
(This simulation is not used in the market.)
Used to display the process control result.
Used to check the initial condition of process control (half tone correction).
Used to execute the half tone process control forcibly.
Used to clear the half tone process control correction value.
Used to set the timing (ON/OFF) of process control execution.
Enable/disable of the half tone correction during each job is switched.
Used to perform the phase adjustment for OPC drum deflection. (Used to adjust
the phases of four OPC drums deflection.)
Used to display each developing unit installing state AD value.
This simulation is added to check the sampling data of the detection judgment of
developing unit installation not only as the judgment result (trouble display) but
also as the current state value.
(This function is not used. Do not operate.)
Used to check the toner patch image density level of each color in 1 pixel half
tone correction. (The simulation is used to check whether the correction is
normally executed or not.)
(This function is not used. Do not operate.)
Used to display the 1 pixel half tone correction result.
(This function is not used. Do not operate.)
Used to perform the forcible execution of 1 pixel half tone correction.
(This function is not used. Do not operate.)
Used to clear the correction value of 1 pixel half tone correction.
Used to set the default exposure (color copy) for every document mode.
Used to adjust the exposure in BLACK copy.
Used to adjust the exposure of the color scanner.
Used to adjust the exposure of the black scanner.
Used to make the scanner color balance RGB adjustment (for color push
scanner mode).
Used to adjust the exposure.
Used to the copy density adjustment (manual). (color mode)
Used to the copy density adjustment (manual) [Monochrome, all modes] PG
print.
Used to set the BLACK auto exposure mode.
Used to perform the copy color balance manual correction. [Color, All modes]:
PG print
Used to set ENABLE/DISABLE of the half tone highest density correction.
Used to the copy color balance auto adjustment.
Used to execute the fine adjustment of single color mode color balance.
Used to reset the single color mode color balance set value to the default.
Used to set the engine gamma calculating formula coefficient.
(Information on this simulation may be requested in some cases. However, this
function is basically not used in the market.)
Used to check the auto exposure/Auto document recognition/ Line number
recognition (Color mode). If the local memory size is less than 256MB, the
operation of this simulation may not operate normally.
Used to execute the color auto mode adjustment.
Used to perform the fine adjustment of 2-color (Red, Black) copy.
Used to perform the BLACK image forming adjustment.
Used to execute the image send sharpness adjustment. (Only when FAX is
installed)
Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment. (Collective adjustment of all the
modes). (Only when FAX is installed)
Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Normal). (Only when FAX is
installed)
Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Fine text). (Only when FAX is
installed)
Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Super Fine). (Only when FAX is
installed)
Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Ultra Fine). (Only when FAX is
installed)
Used to execute the FAX exposure level adjustment and the individual setting
(600DPI). (Only when FAX is installed)
Used to set the JPEG compression rate in Copy/Scanner (PUSH SCAN).
Used to execute the magnification adjustment in the scan system (for RSPF).
Section
Purpose
Process
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Process
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Adjustment
Data clear
Setting
Setting
Adjustment
Process
Process
Process
Process
Process
Process (OPC drum)
Process (Developing)
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Process
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Process
Process
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Setting
Process
Data clear
Scanner
Scanner
Scanner
Scanner
Scanner
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
RSPF
Engine
Engine
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Scanner
Engine
Adjustment
Adjustment
–
Engine
Image process (ICU)
Image process (ICU)
Image process (ICU)
Image process (ICU)
Setting
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Image process (ICU)
–
–
FAX
Setting
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
ICU/FAX
Adjustment
ICU/FAX
Adjustment
ICU/FAX
Adjustment
ICU/FAX
Adjustment
ICU/FAX
Adjustment
FAX
Adjustment
–
RSPF/Scanner
Setting
Adjustment
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 6
Code
Main Sub
48
5
49
50
6
1
3
1
2
5
6
7
10
12
20
21
22
24
27
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
51
1
2
53
55
6
7
8
1
2
3
Function (Purpose)
This adjustment is executed when a satisfactory result is not obtained when a
different copy magnification ratio is specified and copying is made after
adjustment of the sub scanning direction image magnification ratio with SIM 481.
When there is an error in the copy magnification ratio in reduction copy, the
adjustment value of high speed mode is adjusted.
When there is an error in the copy magnification ratio in enlargement copy, the
adjustment value of low speed mode is adjusted. This is the magnification ratio
adjustment in the scan system.
Used to adjust the rotating speed of each motor.
Used to execute the firmware update.
The Operation Manual saved in the hard disk is updated.
Used to adjust the copy image position on print paper in the copy mode and to
adjust the void area (image loss). (The similar adjustment can be executed with
SIM50-05 and 50-02 (Simple method). (Document table mode))
Used to adjust the copy image position on print paper in the copy mode and to
adjust the void area (image loss). (Simple adjustment)
(Similar to SIM50-01. This simulation provides the simpler method.)
Used to set the lead edge adjustment value which affects only the printer print.
Used to adjust the copy image position on the print paper in the copy mode and
to adjust the void area (image loss). (The similar adjustment can be executed
with SIM50-7 (Simple method).) (RSPF mode)
Used to adjust the copy image position on print paper in the copy mode and to
adjust the void area (image loss). (The similar adjustment can be executed with
SIM50-6 (Simple type).) (RSPF mode)
Used to adjust the print off-center for each tray.
Image print center position adjustment (Adjusted for each paper feed section.)
Used to execute the scan image off-center position adjustment. (Adjusted for
each scan mode.)
Used to execute the manual adjustment of the main scanning direction
registration (color shift). (Backup value input)
Used to execute the manual adjustment of the sub scanning registration (color
shift). (Backup value input)
Used to execute the auto adjustment of the main/sub scan the main/sub
registration. (Print on the belt/ Scan with the registration sensor (photo sensor)
Image registration adjustment (Auto adjustment) adjustment image quality
image position
Used to display the data acquired with the auto registration adjustment
simulation (SIM50-22).
Used to adjust the image loss of scanned image in the FAX/Scanner mode.
Used to execute the service adjustment, the OC adjustment, the BK main scan
magnification ration correction, the RSPF adjustment, and the print position
adjustment (Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment)).
Used to adjust the OC document lead edge, off-center, and the sub scan
magnification ratio. (Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) (1:
OC adjustment))
Used to execute the BK main scan magnification ratio adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service instillation) (2: BK-main scan magnification ratio
correction))
Used to execute the RSPF (Front/Back) document lead edge, off-center, and
sub scan magnification ratio adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) (3: RSPF adjustment))
Used to execute the print lead edge adjustment and the all-cassette print offcenter (individual cassette, ADU) adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) (4: Print position
adjustment)
Used to display the adjustment result.
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) (5: result display)
Used to display the data used for the adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) (6: data display))
Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the transfer voltage and the separation
bias voltage.
Used to adjust the contact pressure of paper against the registration roller (main
unit paper feed section, duplex paper feed, SPF paper feed) on each section.
(When there are much variations in print image positions for paper or when the
paper jam occurs, the adjustment is required.) Used to change the deflection
quantity correction value of each specified cassette.
Used to adjust the RSPF document tray size of the main unit.
Used to enter the adjustment value of the main unit RSPF document tray size
adjustment value. SIM53-06 A/D value manual input (for RSPF).
Used to adjust the RSPF scan position.
Used to set the engine soft SW.
Used to set the scanner soft SW
Used to set the controller soft SW.
Section
RSPF/Scanner
Purpose
Adjustment
–
–
–
–
Adjustment
Version-up
Version-up
Adjustment
–
Adjustment
Printer
RSPF
Adjustment
Adjustment
RSPF
Adjustment
–
Adjustment
–
Adjustment
–
Adjustment
–
Adjustment
–
Adjustment
–
Adjustment
FAX/Scanner
–
Adjustment
Adjustment
–
Adjustment
–
Adjustment
RSPF
Adjustment
–
Adjustment
–
Adjustment
–
Adjustment
Process
Adjustment
Paper transport
Adjustment
RSPF
RSPF
Adjustment
Adjustment
RSPF
PCU
Scanner
MFP
Adjustment
Setting
Setting
Setting
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 7
Code
Main Sub
56
1
2
60
61
62
1
2
1
4
1
2
3
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
63
1
2
3
5
6
7
8
11
64
65
67
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
24
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
33
Function (Purpose)
Used to execute data transfer.
Used to backup the data (user authentication data, address book, etc.) of
EEPROM, SRAM, or HDD to a USB memory and to restore the data.
Used to check read/write of the expansion DIMM installed to the ICU PWB.
After completion of execution, the result of each slot is displayed on the panel.
ICU PWB image DRAM read/write operation check, check ICU (memory)
operation.
Used to set the data of onboard SDRAM.
The polygon motor rotation and the BD signal detection are checked.
Used to execute self-print of the LSU position adjustment.
Used to execute the hard disk format (except operation manual area).
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to execute the partial check of the hard disk read/write.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to execute read/write check (all areas) of the hard disk.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to execute the HDD self-diagnostics.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to print the self-diagnostics error log.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to format the hard disk excluding the system area and operation manual
area.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to delete the job completion list. (The job log data are also deleted.)
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to delete the document filing data.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in HDD trouble.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to format the hard disk (operation manual area only).
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to check the following values related to shading for RGB and OC. (3 x 2 =
6 kinds)
Used to execute shading forcibly.
Used to execute the gamma correction and density conversion for RGB image
data inputted from the CCD. Gamma correction 1 of the SCAN ASIC and the set
value of color correction are set by calculating from the image data.
Used to reset the gamma correction and color correction parameters of the
SCAN ASIC.
Used to scan the engine color balance auto adjustment pattern and to display
the sampling result.
Used to display and register the engine auto density adjustment scanner target
value.
Used to execute the standard value reset of the engine auto adjustment scanner
target value (for servicing).
Used to set the factory target color balance in the auto color balance adjustment
(SIM46-24).
Used to execute self-print (Color mode).
Used to print the density adjustment pattern.
Used to execute self-print. (BW mode)
Used to execute self-print.
Used to execute self print (PCL).
Used to execute the printer self print (PS).
Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection position.
Used to check the touch panel (LCD display section) detection position
adjustment result.
Use to execute the printer setting of auto color calibration.
Used to set the manual correction of the printer engine color balance.
Used to set the reference scanner target value of the printer engine auto density
adjustment.
Used to display and register the scanner target value (for servicing) of the
printer engine auto density adjustment.
The scanner target value (for servicing) of the printer engine auto density
adjustment is reset to the standard value.
Used to set YES/NO of delivery of the main unit calibration data and the process
control correction data to the client PC by the GDI printer.
Used to clear the printer calibration value.
Used to set YES/NO of screen color change for each object.
Used to execute the gamma correction between printer screens. (for PCL)
Used to execute the gamma correction between printer screens. (for GDI)
Section
Purpose
MFP
Memory, HDD
Data transfer
Backup
Image process (ICU)
Operation test/Check
LSU
LSU
MFP (HDD)
–
Setting
Operation test/Check
Adjustment
Data clear
MFP (HDD)
Operation test/Check
MFP (HDD)
Operation test/Check
MFP (HDD)
Operation test/Check
MFP
Operation test/Check
MFP (HDD)
Data clear
MFP (HDD)
Data clear
MFP (HDD)
Data clear
MFP (HDD)
Data clear
MFP (HDD)
Data clear
Scanner (Exposure)
Scanner
Scanner (scan)
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Adjustment
Adjustment
Scanner
Adjustment
Image process (ICU)
Image process (ICU)
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Setting
Image process (ICU)
Setting
Scanner (Scanning)
Setting
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Operation test/Check
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Operation test/Check
Operation test/Check
Operation test/Check
Operation test/Check
Adjustment
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Printer
Adjustment
Scanner
Adjustment
Printer
Setting
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Operation panel
Operation panel
Printer
–
Printer
Printer
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 8
Data clear
Setting
Adjustment
Adjustment
3. Details of simulation
1-5
1
Purpose
: Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the scanner unit.
1-1
Purpose
: Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the scanner unit and its control circuit.
Section
: Optical (Image scanning)
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the operation mode with the buttons on the touch panel.
2)
Select the magnification ratio with [ZOOM] button on the touch
panel.
3)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
The scanner scans at the speed corresponding to the operation mode.
Button
display
50
100
200
Content
Scan magnification ratio:
50%
Scan magnification ratio:
100%
Scan magnification ratio:
200%
Selectable
magnification ratios
COLOR: 50%, 100%,
200%
BLACK (High speed):
100%, 200%
BLACK (Low speed):
50%, 100%, 200%
Default
value
100%
Section
: Optical (Image scanning)
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the operation mode with the buttons on the touch panel.
2)
Select the magnification ratio with [ZOOM] button on the touch
panel.
3)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
The scanner scans continuously at the speed corresponding to
the operation mode.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the operation is terminated.
Button
display
50
100
200
Scan magnification ratio:
50%
Scan magnification ratio:
100%
Scan magnification ratio:
200%
0
SCANNER CHECK
SCANNER CHECK
25
100
50
400
150
BLACK(SLOW)
100
50
ZOOM
100
300
BLACK(FAST)
BLACK(FAST)
25
400
%
300
%
ZOOM
100
Default
value
100%
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.01-05
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.01-01
Selectable
magnification ratio
COLOR: 50%, 100%,
200%
BLACK (High speed):
100%, 200%
BLACK (Low speed):
50%, 100%, 200%
0
TEST
TEST
Content
150
BLACK(SLOW)
200
COLOR
EXECUTE
200
COLOR
EXECUTE
2
1-2
Purpose
2-1
: Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operation of sensor and
detector in the scanning (read) section and
the related circuit.
Purpose
: Operation test/check
Section
: Optical (Image scanning)
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder unit and the control
circuit.
Item
: Operation
Section
: RSPF
Operation/Procedure
Item
: Operation
The sensor and detector operation conditions are displayed.
Operation/Procedure
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
1)
Select the operation mode with the buttons on the touch panel.
• The scanner (read) unit is in the home position.: "MHPS" section
is highlighted.
2)
Select the aging mode with [1SIDE] and [2SIDE] buttons on
the touch panel.
• The scanner (read) unit is not in the home position.: "MHPS" is
normally displayed.
3)
Select the magnification ratio with [ZOOM] button on the touch
panel.
4)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
0
TEST
SCANNER
S I M U LA TI O N N O . 0 1㧙 02
SENSO R
CLOSE
CHE CK
Aging is performed in the mode corresponding to the operation
mode.
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed during aging, the operation is terminated and [EXECUTE] button returns to the
original state.
MHPS
1/1
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 9
Operation/Procedure
Button
display
50
100
200
Content
Scan magnification ratio:
50%
Scan magnification ratio:
100%
Scan magnification ratio:
200%
Selectable
magnification ratio
COLOR: 50%, 100%,
200%
BLACK (High speed):
100%, 200%
BLACK (Low speed):
50%, 100%, 200%
Default
value
100%
RSPF AGING
25
100
1-SIDE
400
%
2-SIDE
50
100
BLACK(FAST)
ZOOM
300
150
200
BLACK(SLOW)
COLOR
2)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the operation is terminated.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.02-01
Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch
panel.
The selected load operation is performed.
0
TEST
1)
SPFM
SPRM_F
SPRM_R
SPFC
SRRC
SGS
STMPS
SPF transport motor
SPF paper feed reverse motor normal rotation
SPF paper feed reverse motor reverse rotation
SPF paper feed clutch
SPF resist roller clutch
SPF document exit gate solenoid
Finish stamp solenoid (*1)
*1: Since the stamp solenoid is an option unit, it can be operated
only when it is installed.
EXECUTE
* For the same loads displayed separately depending on normal
rotation and rotation, if they are selected together, normal rotation is performed.
2-2
Purpose
In addition, if the load is rotating, reverse rotation is not accepted
until the operation is stopped.
: Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the automatic document feeder unit and the related circuits.
Section
: RSPF
Item
: Operation
㩷
TEST
RSPF
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are displayed.
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
SSET
SOCD
SCOV
SPED
SPPD1
SPF installation detection
SPF open/close detection
SPF cover SW
SPF document empty detection
SPF paper entry detection 1 and random detection
(common)
SPF paper entry detection 2 PS front
SPF before-scan detection
SPF Reverse gate front detection
SPF Reverse rear detection
SPF Document length detection short
SPF Document length detection long
SPF stamp unit installation detection
SPF guide plate position
SPF document detection volume output
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPPD5
SPLS1
SPLS2
STMPU
SWD_LEN
SWD_AD
㩷 SIMULATION NO.02̆03
㩷
OUTPUT
CHECK
㩷 SPFM
㩷 SPRM_R
SRRC
㩷 STMPS
㩷
0
CLOSE
SPRM_F
SPFC
SGS
EXECUTE
3
3-2
Purpose
: Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operation of sensor and
detector in the finisher and the related circuit.
Section
: Finisher
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are displayed.
NOTE: SWD_LEN and SWD_AD are not ON/OFF display.
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.02-02
RSPF SENSOR CHECK SWD_LEN: **** SWD_AD: ***
SSET
SOCD
SCOV
SPED
SPPD1
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPPD5
SPLS1
SPLS2
STMPU
1/1
1/1
2-3
Purpose
: Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the loads
in the automatic document feeder unit and
the control circuits.
Section
: RSPF
Item
: Operation
1/1
FJPID
FJPOD
FJPDD
FED
FPDHPD
FARHPD
FFJHPD
FRJHPD
FAD
FOBHPD
FBED
FSLD
FFPD
FFHPD
FFRHPD
FFED
FFE
FULD
FLLD
Interface transport unit entry port detection
Interface transport unit exit port detection
Interface transport unit cover detection
Entry port paper detection
Paddle HP detection
Bundle roller HP detection
Alignment plate HP detection front
Alignment plate HP detection rear
Alignment tray detection
Discharge belt HP detection
Tray paper detection
Paper surface detection
Binding position detection
Binding HP detection
Binding roller HP detection
Binding paper detection
Binding lock detection
Lift upper limit detection
Lift lower limit detection
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 10
FLE
FSHPD
FSTHPD
FSD
FSUC
FSPD
FMLD
FFDD
FCD
FFDSW
FJSW
FSSSW
FFANLK
Lift lock detection
Staple drive HP detection
Staple shift HP detection
Staple empty detection
Staple connection detection
Self prime detection
Tray intermediate detection
Front door detection
Upper cover detection
Front door SW detection
Joint SW detection
Staple safety SW detection
Fan motor lock detection
FPE
FPUC
FPHPD
FPDD
FPSHPD
FPTD
FPSD1
FPSD2
FPSD3
FPSD4
Punch motor lock detection
Punch unit connection detection
Punch HP detection
Punch dust detection
Punch horizontal resist HP detection
Punch timing detection
Punch horizontal resist detection 1
Punch horizontal resist detection 2
Punch horizontal resist detection 3
Punch horizontal resist detection 4
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.03-02
FIN SENSOR CHECK
FJPID
FJPOD
FJPDD
FED
FPDHPD
FARHPD
FFJHPD
FRJHPD
FAD
FOBHPD
FBED
FSLD
FFPD
FFHPD
FFRHPD
FFED
FFE
FULD
FLLD
FLE
1/2
3-3
Purpose
: Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operation of the load in
the finisher and the control circuit.
Section
: Finisher
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch
panel.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
The selected load operation is performed.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the operation is terminated.
FED
FBED
FULD
FMLLD
FLLD
FSLD1
FSLD2
FRLD
FBRD
FFJHPD
FRJHPD
FJPD
FSTPD
FSHPD
FSTHPD
FSD
FSTD
FDSW
FFANLK
Entry port paper detection
Tray paper detection
Tray upper limit detection
Tray intermediate lower limit detection
Tray lower limit detection
Paper surface detection 1
Paper surface detection 2
Roller up/down detection
Belt separation detection
Alignment plate HP detection front
Alignment plate HP detection rear
Alignment guide position detection
Staple tray paper detection
Staple drive HP detection
Staple shift HP detection
Staple empty detection
Staple lead edge position detection
Door open detection
Fan motor lock detection
FPRPD
FPUC
FPHPD
FPSHPD
FPDD
FPPEND
FPPD1
FPPD2
FPPD3
FPPD4
FPPD5
FPPD6
FPDES1
FPDES2
Punch rear position detection
Punch unit connection detection
Punch HP detection
Punch horizontal resist HP detection
Punch dust detection
Punch paper rear edge detection
Punch paper surface detection 1
Punch paper surface detection 2
Punch paper surface detection 3
Punch paper surface detection 4
Punch paper surface detection 5
Punch paper surface detection 6
Punch destination detection 1
Punch destination detection 2
FINRPS
FJPM
FJFM
FFM
FPM
FAM
FFJM
FRJM
FSM
FFSM
FLM
FFC
Entry port reverse solenoid
Interface transport motor
Interface transport fan motor
Transport motor
Paddle motor
Bundle paper exit motor
Alignment motor front
Alignment motor rear
Staple shift motor
Staple motor
Lift motor
Folding clutch
FINRPS
FSLS
FPDS
FBRS
FRM
FSWM
FAM
FFJM
FRJM
FSM
FFSM
FTLM
FFANM
Entry port reverse path solenoid
Paper surface detection solenoid
Paddle solenoid
Belt separation solenoid
Resist motor
Oscillation motor
Bundle paper exit motor
Alignment motor front
Alignment motor rear
Staple shift motor
Staple motor
Tray lift motor
Fan motor
FPNM
FPSM
Punch motor
Punch horizontal resist motor
FPNM
FPSM
Punch motor
Punch horizontal resist motor
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 11
0
TEST
Item
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.03̆03
Display
Item
F
STAPLE PITCH
G
PUNCH CENTER
H
PUNCH HOLE
Staple binding position
adjustment (two
positions in pitch)
Punch center
adjustment
Punch hole position
adjustment
FIN LOAD CHECK
FJPM
FJFM
FFM
FPM
FAM
FFJM
FRJM
FSM
FFSM
FLM
FFC
FINRPS
1/1
EXECUTE
1/1
Set
range
68 to 132
Default
value
100
37 to 63
50
42 to 58
50
[Screen (Saddle finisher installed)]
0
3-10
Purpose
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the finisher.
Section
: Finisher
Item
: Operation
FINISHER
A:
1)
ADJUSTMENT
200
㨇 0 㨪400 㨉
Operation/Procedure
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.03-10
TEST
A㧦200
㧧 SADDLE POSITION
B㧦200
㧧 FOLDING POSITION
C㧦 10
㧧 FRONT ADJUSUT
D㧦 10
㧧 REAR ADJUSUT
Select the item according to the adjustment content with [↑] [↓]
buttons.
2)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
3)
Press [OK] button. (The set value is saved.)
4
Item
Display
Item
A
SADDLE POSITOIN
Saddle binding
position adjustment
Saddle folding
position adjustment
Alignment position
adjustment (front)
Alignment position
adjustment (rear)
Staple binding
position adjustment
(one position at the
rear)
Staple binding
position adjustment
(one position in front)
Staple binding
position adjustment
(two positions at the
center)
Staple binding
position adjustment
(two positions in
pitch)
Punch center
adjustment
Punch hole position
adjustment
B
FOLDING POSITION
C
FRONT ADJUST
D
REAR ADJUST
E
STAPLE REAR
F
STAPLE FRONT
G
STAPLE BOTH
H
STAPLE PITCH
I
PUNCH CENTER
J
PUNCH HOLE
Set
range
0 to 400
Default
value
200
0 to 400
200
0 to 20
10
0 to 20
10
0 to 200
100
Item
Display
Item
A
FRONT ADJUST
B
REAR ADJUST
C
STAPLE REAR
Alignment position
adjustment (front)
Alignment position
adjustment (rear)
Staple binding position
adjustment (one
position at the rear)
Staple binding position
adjustment (one
position in front)
Staple binding position
adjustment (two
positions at the
center)
STAPLE FRONT
E
STAPLE BOTH
4-2
Purpose
: Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk/large capacity tray and the related circuit.
Section
: Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
0 to 200
100
0 to 200
100
0 to 100
50
47 to 53
50
0 to 100
50
D
OK
Set
range
2 to 18
Default
value
10
2 to 18
10
68 to 132
100
DCSI1
DPFD1
DLUD1
DPED1
DCSPD1
DCSS11
DCSS12
DCSS13
DCSS14
DCSI2
DPFD2
DLUD2
DPED2
DCSPD2
DCSS21
DCSS22
DCSS23
DCSS24
DSW_DSK
Desk 1 installation detection
Desk 1 transport detection
Desk 1 upper limit detection
Desk 1 paper empty detection
Desk 1 remaining paper quantity detection
Desk 1 rear edge detection 1
Desk 1 rear edge detection 2
Desk 1 rear edge detection 3
Desk 1 rear edge detection 4
Desk 2 instillation detection
Desk 2 transport detection
Desk 2 upper limit detection
Desk 2 paper empty detection
Desk 2 remaining paper quantity detection
Desk 2 rear edge detection 1
Desk 2 rear edge detection 2
Desk 2 rear edge detection 3
Desk 2 rear edge detection 4
Desk transport cover open/close detection
68 to 132
100
68 to 132
100
LPFD
LUD
LDD
LPED
LCD
LDSW
LRE
L24VM
LLSW
LTOD
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 12
LCC transport sensor
LCC tray upper limit sensor
LCC tray lower limit sensor
LCC tray paper empty sensor
LCC tray insertion detection
LCC upper open/close detection SW
LCC lift motor encoder sensor
LCC24V power monitor
LCC upper limit SW
LCC main unit connection detection
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.04-02
TEST
DSK/LCC SENSOR CHECK
SIMULATION NO. 04㧙05
TEST
DESK/LCC
DCSI1
DPFD1
DLUD1
DPED1
DCSPD1
DCSS11
DCSS12
DCSS13
DCSS14
DCSI2
DPFD2
DLUD2
DPED2
DCSPD2
DCSS21
DCSS22
DCSS23
DCSS24
DSW_DSK
CLOSE
SYNCRONIZING SIGNAL CHECK
DTRC
:
DTRC ON
LTRC
:
LTRC OFF
1/1
1/1
4-3
Purpose
5
: Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the loads
in the large capacity tray and the related circuit.
5-1
Section
: Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
Purpose
Item
: Operation
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operation of the display,
LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit.
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch
panel.
Press [EXECUTE] button.
Section
: Operation panel
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
The selected load operation is performed.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the operation is terminated.
DPFM
DLUM1
DPUC1
DLUM2
DPUC2
DTRC
: Operation test/check
The LCD is changed as shown below. (The contrast changes every
2sec from the current level to MAX → MIN → the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted.
Desk main motor
Desk 1 lift-up motor
Desk 1 paper feed clutch
Desk 2 lift-up motor
Desk 2 paper feed clutch
Desk transport clutch
TEST
S I M U LA TI O N N O . 0 5㧙 01
TEST
S I M U LA TI O N N O . 0 5㧙 01
LPFM
LLM
LPFC
LPFS
LTRC
LCC transport motor
LCC lift motor
LCC paper feed clutch
LCC paper feed solenoid
LCC transport clutch
0
㩷 SIMULATION NO.04̆03
DSK/LCC㩷 LOAD CHECK
CLOSE
TEST
DPFM
DPUC2
DLUM1
DPUC1
DLUM2
DTRC
5-2
Purpose
EXECUTE
1/1
4-5
Purpose
: Operation test/check
: Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operation of the heater
lamp and the control circuit.
Section
: Fusing
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the
clutches and the related circuits.
1)
Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch
panel.
Section
: Desk/Large capacity tray (LCC)
2)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
Item
: Operation
The selected heater lamp is operated.
Operation/Procedure
Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch panel.
The selected clutch operation is performed.
When the operation is normally completed, the button is highlighted.
DTRC
LTRC
Desk transport clutch
A4 LCC transport clutch
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the operation is terminated.
HL_UM
HL_LM
HL_US
HL_ALL
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 13
Heater lamp upper main
Heater lamp lower main
Heater lamp upper sub
All heater lamps ON
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
㩷
6
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.05̆02
TEST
HEATER LAMP LOAD SETUP
HL_UM
HL_LM
HL_US
HL_ALL
6-1
Purpose
EXECUTE
1/1
5-3
Purpose
: Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operation of the scanner
lamp and the circuit.
Section
: Optical (Image scanning)
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Press [OC COPY LAMP] button on the touch panel.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
Section
: Paper transport section (Transport, paper
exit)
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch
panel.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
The selected load operation is performed.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the operation is terminated.
The target lamp is lighted for 10 sec.
0
TEST
: Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the paper
transport system, the transfer system, the
fusing system (clutches and solenoids) and
the control circuits.
Transport/
imaging
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.05̆03
COPY LAMP CHECK
OC
COPY LAMP
EXECUTE
1/1
5-4
Purpose
Paper feed
: Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the related circuit.
Section
: Process
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch
panel.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
Discharge lamp K
Discharge lamp C
Discharge lamp M
Discharge lamp Y
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.05-04
DISCHARGE LAMP CHECK
DL_K
DL_C
DL_M
(*): For the same loads displayed separately depending on normal
rotation and rotation, if they are selected together, normal rotation
is performed.
㩷
Same control
0
TEST
Transport motor
Resist motor
Paper exit motor normal rotation
Paper exit motor reverse rotation
Fusing motor
Cassette paper feed motor
Shifter motor
Waste toner drive motor
Cassette vertical transport clutch
Primary transfer separation clutch
Process control shutter solenoid
LSU shutter solenoid 1
LSU shutter solenoid 2
Cassette 1 lift-up motor
Cassette 1 paper feed clutch
Cassette 2 lift-up motor
Cassette 2 paper feed clutch
Manual paper feed clutch
Manual feed take-up solenoid
Manual feed gate solenoid
In addition, if the load is rotating, reverse rotation is not accepted
until the operation is stopped.
The selected discharge lamp is lighted.
DL_K
DL_C
DL_M
DL_Y
PFM
RRM
POMF (*)
POMR (*)
FUM
CPFM
OSM
WTNM
CPFC
1TURC
PCSS
LSUSS1
LSUSS2
CLUM1
CPUC1
CLUM2
CPUC2
MPUC
MPFS
MPGS
DL_Y
EXECUTE
㩷
㩷 TEST SIMULATION NO.06̆01
FEED OUTPUT CHECK
㩷
PFM
RRM
㩷
FUM
CPFM
㩷
1TURC
PCSS
CPUC1
CLUM2
㩷
㩷
㩷
1/1
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 14
0
CLOSE
POMF
POMR
OSM
CPFC
WTNM
CLUM1
CPUC2
MPUC
EXECUTE
1/2
7
6-2
Purpose
: Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of each fan
motor and its control circuit.
Section
: Other
Item
: Operation
7-1
Purpose
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the operating conditions of
aging.
Operation/Procedure
Section
: Other
1)
Item
: Operation
Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch
panel.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
The selected load operation is performed.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the operation is terminated.
POFM
OZFM
PSFM
Paper exit cooling fan motor (* POFM_U, POFM_F, and
POFM_R are driven at the same time.)
Ozone fan motor
Power cooling fan motor
㩷
㩷
SIMULATION NO.06̆02
TEST
FAN 㩷LOAD SETUP
㩷 POFM
㩷
PSFM
㩷
0
CLOSE
OZFM
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the target to be set with buttons on the touch panel.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.
The contents set with this simulation are retained until the
power is turned OFF.
AGING
INTERVAL
MISFEED DISABLE
FUSING DISABLE
WARMUP DISABLE
DV CHECK DISABLE
SHADING DISABLE
CCD GAIN FREE
Aging operation setup
Intermittent setup
JAM detection enable/disable setup
Fusing operation enable/disable setup
Warm-up disable setup
DV unit detection enable/disable setup
Shading disable setup
CCD gain adjustment free setup
0
㩷
㩷
EXECUTE
1/1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.07̆01
TEST
AGING TEST
SETTING
AGING
6-3
INTERVAL
MISFEED DISABLE
: Operation test/check
WARMUP DISABLE
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the primary
transfer unit and the related circuit.
SHADING DISABLE
Purpose
Section
: Process (Transfer)
Item
: Operation
Press [EXECUTE] button.
2)
The load operation is started. (Separation operation: BLACK
→ COLOR → FREE Stops at each position for 5 sec.) During
the operation, the current position is displayed.
Black mode position
→ COLOR mode position
→ Drum separation position
→ Shift to the black mode
position is repeated.
0
TEST
CHECK
CCD
̆̆
1/1
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the intermittent aging cycle.
Section
: Other
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Enter the intermittent aging cycle (unit: sec) with 10-key.
2)
Press [OK] button.
The time entered in procedure 1) is set.
Item
A
Item
CYCLE TIME(SEC)
Set range
1 to 900
Default value
3
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.06̆03
:
DISABLE
GAIN FREE
0
TRANSFER LOAD CHECK
POSITION
DISABLE
EXECUTE
Purpose
1)
Black mode position
COLOR mode position
Drum separation position
DV
7-6
Operation/Procedure
BLACK
COLOR
FREE
FUSING
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.07-06
INTERVAL AGING CYCLE TIME SETUP
A㧦 3
EXECUTE
A:
1/1
㨇
㧧 CYCLE TIME(SEC)
3
1㨪 900 㨉
OK
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 15
7-8
Purpose
: Operation display
2)
Select a target item to be adjusted with [↑] [↓] buttons.
3)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
4)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
set value is outputted for 30 sec.
Function (Purpose) : Used to display the warm-up time.
Section
: Fusing
Item
: Operation
* The adjustment values of [MIDDLE] and [LOW] are related
together.
Operation/Procedure
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the output is terminated.
Press [EXECUTE] button.
Counting of the warm-up time is started.
* Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] button is inhibited.
Button
Item
Display
Content
MIDDLE
A
MIDDLE
SPEED DVB_K
B
MIDDLE
SPEED DVB_C
C
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_M
MIDDLE
SPEED DVB_Y
K developing
bias set value
at middle speed
C developing
bias set value
at middle speed
M developing
bias set value
at middle speed
Y developing
bias set value
at middle speed
K developing
bias set value
at low speed
C developing
bias set value
at low speed
M developing
bias set value
at low speed
Y developing
bias set value
at low speed
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.07̆08
WARM UP TIME
DISPLAY
SETTING
0 SECONDS
D
EXECUTE
LOW
7-9
Purpose
Section
: —
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a print color with buttons on the touch panel.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
Printing is started in the selected color.
K
C
M
Y
TEST
DV
Setup/cancel of black
Setup/cancel of cyan
Setup/cancel of magenta
Setup/cancel of yellow
LOW SPEED
DVB_C
C
LOW SPEED
DVB_M
D
LOW SPEED
DVB_Y
SELECT(COLOR
SETTING
450
0 to 700
450
0 to 700
450
0 to 700
430
0 to 700
430
0 to 700
430
0 to 700
430
CLOSE
MIDDLE
A㧦450
㧧 MIDDLE SPEED DVB_K
B㧦450
㧧 MIDDLE SPEED DVB_C
C㧦450
㧧 MIDDLE SPEED DVB_M
D㧦450
㧧 MIDDLE SPEED DVB_Y
LOW
EXECUTE
OK
CLOSE
MODE)
C
M
8-2
Y
Purpose
EXECUTE
: Operation test/Check/Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to check and adjust the operation of
the main charger grid voltage in each
printer mode and the control circuit.
1/1
8
Section
: Process (Photoconductor/Developing/
Transfer/Cleaning)
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
8-1
Purpose
: Operation test/Check/Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to check and adjust the operations of
the developing voltage of each color and
the control circuit.
Section
: Process (Photoconductor/Developing/
Transfer/Cleaning)
Item
: Operation
Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] buttons on the touch
panel.
2)
Select a target item to be adjusted with [↑] [↓] buttons.
3)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
4)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
set value is outputted for 30 sec.
* The adjustment values of [MIDDLE] and [LOW] are related
together.
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the output is terminated.
Operation/Procedure
1)
450
AND OUTPUT
㨇 0㨪 700㨉
SIMULATION NO.07̆09
COLOR
0 to 700
SIMULATION NO.08㧙01
A:
0
K
B
Default
value
450
0
㩷
* If no color is specified, printing is made in all colors.
TEST
LOW SPEED
DVB_K
: Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check printing in the color mode.
PRINTING
A
Setting
range
0 to 700
Select a speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] buttons on the touch
panel.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 16
Button
Item
MIDDLE
A
B
C
D
LOW
A
B
C
D
Display
Content
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_K
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_C
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_M
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_Y
LOW
SPEED
GB_K
LOW
SPEED
GB_C
LOW
SPEED
GB_M
LOW
SPEED
GB_Y
K charging/grid
bias set value at
middle speed
C charging/grid
bias set value at
middle speed
M charging/grid
bias set value at
middle speed
Y charging/grid
bias set value at
middle speed
K charging/grid
bias set value at
low speed
C charging/grid
bias set value at
low speed
M charging/grid
bias set value at
low speed
Y charging/grid
bias set value at
low speed
Setting
range
230 to 850
Default
value
615
0
TEST
MHV/GRID SETTING
230 to 850
A:
615
615
㨇230㨪 850㨉
230 to 850
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08㧙02
AND
OUTPUT
A㧦615
㧧 MIDDLE SPEED GB_K
B㧦615
㧧 MIDDLE SPEED GB_C
C㧦615
㧧 MIDDLE SPEED GB_M
D㧦615
㧧 MIDDLE SPEED GB_Y
615
MIDDLE
230 to 850
615
230 to 850
605
LOW
605
230 to 850
605
230 to 850
OK
8-6
Purpose
230 to 850
EXECUTE
: Operation test/Check/Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to check and adjust the operation of
the transfer voltage and the control circuit.
Section
: Process (Photoconductor/Developing/
Transfer/Cleaning)/Transfer
Item
: Setting
Operation/Procedure
605
1)
Select a target item to be adjusted with [↑] [↓] buttons.
2)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
3)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
set value is outputted for 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the output is terminated.
Item
Display
Content
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
TC1 LOW SPEED CL K
TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K
TC1 LOW SPEED CL CMY
TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL CMY
TC1 LOW SPEED BW K
TC1 MIDDLE SPEED BW K
TC2 PLAIN CL SPX
TC2 PLAIN CL DPX
TC2 PLAIN BW SPX
TC2 PLAIN BW DPX
TC2 HEAVY1 CL SPX
TC2 HEAVY1 BW SPX
TC2 OHP CL
TC2 OHP BW
TC2 ENVELOPE CL
TC2 ENVELOPE BW
TC2 CLEANING
TC2 CLEAN LOW SPD
TC2 CLEAN MIDDLE SPD
TC2 CLEAN CLEANING
Primary transfer
bias reference
value
COLOR
BLACK
Secondary transfer
bias reference
value
COLOR
BLACK
COLOR
BLACK
COLOR
BLACK
COLOR
BLACK
K
Low speed
Middle speed
CMY
Low speed
Middle speed
K
Low speed
Middle speed
Normal Front surface
paper
Back surface
Front surface
Back surface
Heavy paper
OHP
Envelope
Cleaning process
Low speed print
Middle speed print
Cleaning
Secondary transfer
cleaning bias
reference value
Setting
range
Default
value
Actual output
setting range
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
232
232
139
139
232
232
100
100
90
90
69
69
60
60
184
184
79
72
72
156
–500V to 5000V
–500V to 5000V
–500V to 5000V
–500V to 5000V
–500V to 5000V
–500V to 5000V
2µA to 45µA
2µA to 45µA
2µA to 45µA
2µA to 45µA
2µA to 45µA
2µA to 45µA
2µA to 45µA
2µA to 45µA
2µA to 45µA
2µA to 45µA
2µA to 45µA
–50V to –1500
–50V to –1500V
–50V to –1500V
0
TEST
CLOSE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08-06
THV SETTING AND OUTPUT
A:
[ 0~255]
232
A : 232
TC1 LOW SPEED CL K
B : 232
TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL K
C : 139
TC1 LOW SPEED CL CMY
D : 139
TC1 MIDDLE SPEED CL CMY
EXECUTE
OK
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 17
Default
value
Actual
output value
4500V
4500V
2500V
2500V
4500V
4500V
12.5µA
12.5µA
10µA
10µA
6µA
6µA
4µA
4µA
30µA
30µA
8µA
–200V
–200V
–800V
10
9
10-1
9-2
Purpose
: Operation test/check
Purpose
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the duplex section
and its control circuit.
Section
Item
: Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the toner
motor and the related circuit.
Section
: Process (Developing)
: Duplex
Item
: Operation
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
* Before execution of this simulation, remove the toner cartridges.
The sensor and detector operation conditions are displayed.
1)
Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch
panel.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
DSW_ADU
APPD1
APPD2
* The selected load operation is performed for 10 sec.
ADU transport open/close detection
ADU transport path detection 1
ADU transport path detection 2
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the operation is terminated.
TNM_K
TNM_C
TNM_M
TNM_Y
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.09㧙02
TEST
ADU SENSOR CHECK
APPD1
DSW_ADU
APPD2
Toner motor K
Toner motor C
Toner motor M
Toner motor Y
0
TEST
TONER
1/1
MOTOR
ACTIVATION
TNM_K
1/1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.10-01
TNM_C
TNM_M
TNM_Y
9-3
Purpose
EXECUTE
: Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the loads
in the duplex section and the control circuits.
Section
: Duplex
Item
: Operation
13
13--
Operation/Procedure
Purpose
: Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
1)
Select the item to be operation tested with the buttons on the
touch panel.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
Section
: FAX
The selected load operation is performed.
Item
: Trouble
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the output is terminated.
Operation/Procedure
ADUM_L
ADU motor lower
Function (Purpose) : Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
1)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
2)
Press [YES] button to execute cancellation of the trouble.
0
0
TEST
1/1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.09-03
TEST
U1 TROUBLE
ADU LOAD CHECK
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.13
CANCELLATION
ADUM_L
EXECUTE
1/1
ARE
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 18
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
0
14
U2 TROUBLE
14-Purpose
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.16
TEST
CANCELLATION
: Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) : Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U1/
LCC/U2/PF troubles.
Section
: —
Item
: Trouble
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
Operation/Procedure
1)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
2)
Press [YES] button to execute cancellation of the trouble.
17
0
TEST
TRO UBLE
CLOSE
S I MU LA TI O N N O . 1 4
17-Purpose
: Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) : Used to cancel the self-diag PF.
CANCELLATIO N(O THER)
Section
: Communication unit (RIC/MODEM)
Item
: Trouble
Operation/Procedure
ARE
YO U
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
2)
Press [YES] button to execute cancellation of the trouble.
0
15
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.17
TEST
PF TROUBLE CANCELLATION
15-Purpose
: Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) : Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09" (large
capacity paper feed tray) trouble.
Section
: LCC
Item
: Trouble
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] button.
2)
Press [YES] button to execute cancellation of the trouble.
NO
EXECUTE
21-1
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.15
LCC TROUBLE
YES
21
1)
TEST
ARE YOU SURE?
CANCELLATION
Purpose
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the maintenance cycle.
Section
: —
Item
: Specifications
Operation/Procedure
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
16
16-Purpose
: Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
Function (Purpose) : Used to cancel the self-diag U2 trouble.
Section
: MFPcnt PWB / PCU PWB / SCU PWB
Item
: Trouble
1)
Select an item corresponding to the set contents with [↑] [↓]
buttons.
2)
Enter the value corresponding to the maintenance timing with
10-key.
3)
Press [OK] button to save the entered conditions in step 2).
Item
Display
Content
Set range
A
MAINTENANCE
COUNTER
(TOTAL)
MAINTENANCE
COUNTER
(COLOR)
Maintenance
counter
(total)
Maintenance
counter
(color)
0: DEFAULT,
1 – 300: 1K – 300K
999: FREE
0: DEFAULT,
1 – 300: 1K – 300K
999: FREE
B
Operation/Procedure
1)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
2)
Press [YES] button to execute cancellation of the trouble.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 19
Default
value
100K
60K
0
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.21-01
0
A: 0
; MAINTENANCE COUNTER (TOTAL)
B: 0
; MAINTENANCE COUNTER (COLOR)
TOTAL OUT(BW)
: 00000000
TOTAL OUT(COL) : 00000000
[ 1~300]
OK
TOTAL(SGL_COL)
: 00000000
COPY(BW)
: 00000000
TOTAL(BW)
: 00000000
COPY(COL)
: 00000000
TOTAL(COL)
: 00000000
COPY(2COL)
: 00000000
TOTAL(2COL)
: 00000000
COPY(SGL_COL)
: 00000000
Purpose
22-1
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the print count value in each
section and each operation mode. (Used to
check the maintenance timing.)
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the total numbers of misfeed
and troubles. (When the number of total
jam is considerably great, it is judged as
necessary for repair.)
Section
: —
Item
: Counter
Section
: —
Operation/Procedure
Item
: Counter
The paper jam/trouble counter value is displayed.
Operation/Procedure
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
Change the display page with [↑] [↓] buttons.
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
TOTAL OUT(BW)
TOTAL OUT(COL)
TOTAL(BW)
TOTAL(COL)
TOTAL(2COL)
TOTAL(SGL_COL)
COPY(BW)
COPY(COL)
COPY(2COL)
COPY(SGL_COL)
PRINT(BW)
PRINT(COL)
DOC FIL(BW)
DOC FIL(COL)
DOC FIL(2COL)
DOC FIL(SGL COL)
OTHER(BW)
OTHER(COL)
MAINTENANCE ALL
MAINTENANCE COL
TC1 BELT
TC1 BELT RANGE
TC1 BELT DAY
TC2 BELT
TC2 BELT RANGE
TC2 BELT DAY
FUSER UNIT
FUSER ACUM DAY
DRUM LIFE(K)
DRUM LIFE(C)
DRUM LIFE(M)
DRUM LIFE(Y)
DEVE LIFE(K)
DEVE LIFE(C)
DEVE LIFE(M)
DEVE LIFE(Y)
1/3
22-2
22
Purpose
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-01
COUNTER DISPLAY
MAINTENANCE CYCLE SETUP
A
TEST
Total output quantity of black
Total output quantity of color
Total use quantity of black
Total use quantity of color
Total use quantity of 2-color
Total use quantity of single color
Black copy counter
Color copy counter
2-color copy counter
Single color copy counter
Black print counter
Color print counter
Black document filing print counter
Color document filing print counter
2-color document filing print counter
Single-color document filing print counter
Black other counter
Color other counter
Maintenance counter (Total)
Maintenance counter (Color)
Primary transfer unit print counter
Primary transfer unit accumulated traveling
distance (cm)
Use day of primary transfer (Day)
Secondary transfer unit print counter
Secondary transfer unit accumulated traveling
distance (cm)
Use day of secondary transfer unit (Day)
Fuser unit print counter
Use day of fuser unit (Day)
Accumulated number of drum rotations (K)
Accumulated number of drum rotations (C)
Accumulated number of drum rotations (M)
Accumulated number of drum rotations (Y)
Accumulated number of developer rotations (K)
Accumulated number of developer rotations (C)
Accumulated number of developer rotations (M)
Accumulated number of developer rotations (Y)
MACHINE JAM
RSPF/DSPF JAM
TROUBLE
Machine JAM counter
SPF JAM counter
Trouble counter
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-02
JAM/TROUBLE COUNTER DISPLAY
MACHINE JAM
: 00000000
RSPF/DSPF JAM : 00000000
TROUBLE
: 00000000
1/1
22-3
Purpose
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check misfeed positions and the
misfeed count of each position.
Section
: —
Item
: Trouble
Operation/Procedure
The history of paper jams and misfeed is displayed.
The above histories are displayed from the newest one to the oldest in this sequence. The max. 50 items are saved. (The oldest one
is sequentially erased.)
* List of JAM codes: Refer to "2. Paper JAM code" in the "[12]
OTHERS."
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-03
JAM HISTORY DATA DISPLAY
PPD2_N1
CPFD2_S2
MFT
TRAY3
PPD2_N1
CPFD2_S2
APPD3_S
DPFD2_S4
LCC
PPD2_PRI
CPID2_S2
CPID2_S2
CPFD1_N1
PPD2_PRI
TRAY3
APPD3_S
TRAY2
MFT
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 20
1/1
1/1
22-4
0
Purpose
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
TEST
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the trouble (self diag) history.
Section
Item
S/N : **********
ICU(MAIN)
: 00.00.00
COLOR PROFILE : 00.00.00
: —
ICU(BOOT)
: 00.00.00
PCU
: Trouble
LANGUAGE
: 00.00.00
SCU
: 00.00.00
GRAPHIC
: 00.00.00
SPF
: NONE
IMG DATA ROM
: 00.00.00
FAX1(MAIN)
: NONE
Operation/Procedure
The trouble history is displayed.
The trouble history is displayed sequentially from the latest one.
The max. 30 items can be stored. (The oldest one is deleted
sequentially.)
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
* Trouble code list: Refer to "2. Trouble code list" in the "[8] SELF
DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE".
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-05
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-04
TROUBLE CODE DATA DISPLAY
Purpose
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) : Used to output the list of the setting and
adjustment data (simulations, FAX soft
switch, counters).
Section
: —
Item
: Data (Setting, adjustment data)
Operation/Procedure
* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing.
(Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.)
F9-20
F2-39
L4-31
F1-50
L4-02
F2-39
F1-50
F1-50
L4-02
F1-61
F1-50
F1-50
F2-39
H5-01
E7-23
1)
Select the print mode with 10-key.
U5-12
F2-39
L1-00
E7-23
2)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
1/2
The list print selected in step 1) is started.
* When [C] key, [CA] key, [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, or [EXECUTE] button is pressed during printing, the operation is terminated.
22-5
: Others
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the ROM version of each
unit (section).
Section
: —
Item
: Software
1/2
22-6
E7-23
Purpose
: 00.00.00
Item
A
Display item &
detail display
DATA PATTERN
Operation/Procedure
Description
Data pattern selection
1: List print
2: List print (Sim50-24)
Set
range
1 to 2
Default
value
1
The ROM version can be checked with [↑] [↓] buttons.
When there is any problem in the software, use this simulation to
check the ROM version of each section and revise the version if
necessary.
0
TEST
DATA PRINT MODE
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
A: 1
A:
S/N
ICU(MAIN)
ICU(BOOT)
LANGUAGE
GRAPHIC
IMG DATA ROM
COLOR PROFILE
PCU
SCU
SPF
FAX1(MAIN)
FAX2(MAIN)
DESK
LCC
FINISHER
SADDLE
PUNCH
NIC
POWER-CON
E-MANUAL
Serial No.
ICU (Main section)
ICU (Boot section)
Language support data version
Graphic data for LCD
ImageASIC FlashROM data
Color profile
PCU
SCU
SPF
FAX1 line (Main section)
FAX2 line (Main section)
Desk unit
Side LCC
Finisher
Saddle unit
Punch unit
NIC
Power controller
Operation manual (HDD storage)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-06
; DATA PATTERN
1
[ 1~ 2 ]
EXECUTE
OK
22-8
Purpose
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the number of use of the finisher, the RSPF, and the scan (reading)
unit.
Section
: —
Item
: Counter
Operation/Procedure
The values of the finisher counter, the RSPF counter, and the scanner (read) related counters are displayed.
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
RSPF/DSPF
SCAN
STAPLER
PUNCHER
STAMP
SADDLE STAPLER
OC_OPEN
RSPF/DSPF_OPEN
OC LAMP_TIME
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 21
Document feed quantity
Number of scan
Staple counter
Puncher counter
Stamp counter
Saddle staple counter
OC open/close counter
RSPF/DSPF open/close counter
Total lighting time of the lamp in OC section
0
TEST
Item display
PUNCHER
Display content
MX-PNX1A
MX-PNX1B
AR-PN1A
AR-PN1B
MX-FNX1
MX-FNX2
MX-FXX1
MX-FLX1
AR-MM9
MX-MMX1
MX-HNX1
MX-NSX1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-08
ORG./STAPLE COUNTER DISPLAY
RSPF/DSPF :
00000000
SADDLE STAPLER :
00000000
SCAN
:
00000000
OC OPEN
:
00000000
STAPLER
:
00000000
RSPF/DSPF_OPEN :
00000000
OC LAMP TIME
00000:00
PUNCHER
:
00000000
STAMP
:
00000000
:
FINISHER
FAX1
FAX2
FAX MEMORY
22-9
Purpose
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the number of use (print
quantity) of each paper feed section.
Section
: Paper feed, ADU, LCC
Item
: Counter
Operation/Procedure
The values of the paper feed related counters are displayed.
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
MFT TOTAL
MFT HEAVY
MFT OHP
MFT ENV
LCC
ADU
Tray 1 paper feed counter
Tray 2 paper feed counter
Tray 3 paper feed counter
Tray 4 paper feed counter
Manual paper feed counter (Total)
Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
Side LCC paper feed counter (A4LCC)
ADU paper feed counter
HAND SET
NETWORK
SCANNER
PRINTER
PS
SECURITY
AIM
SDRAM(SYS)
SDRAM(ICU)
HDD
NIC
BARCODE
INTERNET-FAX
MX-PBX1
MX-PKX1
MX-FRX1
MX-AMX1
*****MB
*****MB
*****MB
STANDARD
AR-PF1
MX-FWX1
Content
Punch unit
Finisher
FAX kit
FAX2 line kit
FAX expansion memory
Handset
Network scanner expansion kit
Printer expansion kit
PS expansion kit
Security kit
Application expansion kit
SDRAM capacity
SDRAM capacity
Hard disk capacity
NIC
Barcode font
Internet Fax expansion kit
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-10
MACHINE SYSTEM
MACHINE
:
MX-2300G
PUNCHER
:
MX-PNX1A
RSPF/DSPF
:
MX-RPX1/STANDARD
FINISHER
:
MX-FNX1
STAMP
:
AR-SU1
FAX䋱
:
MX-FNX1
DESK
:
MX-DEX1
FAX2
:
MX-FLX1
LCC
:
MX-LCX1
FAX MEMORY
:
AR-MM9
1/ 3
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-09
PAPER FEED COUNTER DISPLAY
TRAY1
:
00000000
MFT HEAVY
:
TRAY2
:
00000000
MFT OHP
:
00000000
TRAY3
:
00000000
MFT ENV
:
00000000
TRAY4
:
00000000
LCC
:
00000000
MFT TOTAL
:
00000000
ADU
:
00000000
22-11
Purpose
00000000
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the use frequency (send/
receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is
installed)
1/1
Section
: FAX
Item
: Counter
Operation/Procedure
22-10
Purpose
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the system configuration
(option, internal hardware).
Section
: —
Item
: Specifications (Option)
Operation/Procedure
1)
The system configuration is displayed. (The model names of
the installed devices and options are displayed.)
2)
Change the display with [↑] [↓] buttons.
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
Item display
MACHINE
RSPF/DSPF
STAMP
DESK
LCC
Display content
MX-2300G
MX-2300FG
MX-2700G
MX-2700FG
MX-2300N
MX-2700N
MX-RPX1/
STANDARD
AR-SU1
MX-DEX1
MX-DEX2
MX-LCX1
The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter
are displayed.
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
FAX OUTPUT
FAX OUTPUT_L2
FAX SEND
FAX RECEIVED
SEND IMAGES
SEND IMAGES_L2
SEND TIME
RECEIVED TIME
ACR SEND
FAX print quantity counter (for line 1)
FAX print quantity counter (for line 2)
FAX send counter
FAX receive counter
FAX send quantity counter (for line 1)
FAX send quantity counter (for line 2)
FAX send time
FAX receive time
Number of carrier prefix adding communications
Content
0
Machine
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22̆11
FAX COUNTER DISPLAY
FAX OUTPUT
㧦
00000000
FAX OUTPUT_L2 㧦 00000000
Document feed unit
FAX SEND
㧦 00000000
FAX RECEIVED㧦 00000000
Finisher stamp
Desk unit
SEND IMAGES
㧦 00000000
Large capacity cassette (Side LCC)
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 22
SEND IMAGES_L2 㧦
00000000
SEND TIME
㧦
00000000:00:00
RECEIVED TIME
㧦
00000000:00:00
ACR SEND
㧦
00000000
1/1
22-12
Purpose
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the RSPF misfeed positions
and the number of misfeed at each position. (When the number of misfeed is considerably great, it can be judged as
necessary for repair.)
Section
: RSPF
Item
: Function
TONER MOTOR M
TONER MOTOR Y
TONER TURN K
TONER TURN C
TONER TURN M
TONER TURN Y
TEST
PROCESS
Operation/Procedure
Toner motor print counter (M)
Toner motor print counter (Y)
Toner motor accumulated rotation time (SEC)(K)
Toner motor accumulated rotation time (SEC)(C)
Toner motor accumulated rotation time (SEC)(M)
Toner motor accumulated rotation time (SEC)(Y)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22̆13
CARTRIDGE
DISPLAY
DRUM CTRG K
:
00000000
DRUM RANGE K
:
00000000
The history of paper jam and misfeed is displayed.
DRUM CTRG C
: 00000000
DRUM RANGE C
:
00000000
The misfeed history is displayed sequentially from the latest one.
The max. 50 items are recorded. (The oldest one is sequentially
deleted.) This data can be used to identify the trouble position.
DRUM CTRG M
: 00000000
DRUM RANGE M
:
00000000
DRUM CTRG Y
: 00000000
DRUM RANGE Y
:
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
List of JAM codes: Refer to "2. Paper JAM code" in the "[12] OTHERS".
TEST
CLOSE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22㧙12
52(,#/*+5614;#&+52.#;
1/2
22-19
Purpose
0
00000000
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the values of the counters
related to the scan mode and the internet
FAX mode.
Section
: Scanner
Item
: Counter
Operation/Procedure
Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner.
Change the display with [↑] [↓] buttons.
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
22-13
Purpose
NET SCN ORG_B/W
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operating time of the
process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner
cartridge).
Section
: —
Item
: Counter
The rotating time and the print quantity of the process section are
displayed.
Change the display with [↑] [↓] buttons.
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
DRUM RANGE C
DRUM RANGE M
DRUM RANGE Y
DEVE CTRG K
DEVE CTRG C
DEVE CTRG M
DEVE CTRG Y
DEVE RANGE K
DEVE RANGE C
DEVE RANGE M
DEVE RANGE Y
TONER MOTOR K
TONER MOTOR C
NET SCN ORG_2CL
NET SCN ORG_SGL
Operation/Procedure
DRUM CTRG K
DRUM CTRG C
DRUM CTRG M
DRUM CTRG Y
DRUM RANGE K
NET SCN ORG_CL
Drum cartridge print counter (K)
Drum cartridge print counter (C)
Drum cartridge print counter (M)
Drum cartridge print counter (Y)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(CM)(K)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(CM)(C)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(CM)(M)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(CM)(Y)
Developer cartridge print counter (K)
Developer cartridge print counter (C)
Developer cartridge print counter (M)
Developer cartridge print counter (Y)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(CM)(K)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(CM)(C)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(CM)(M)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(CM)(Y)
Toner motor print counter (K)
Toner motor print counter (C)
INTERNET FAX OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX SEND
OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX RECEIVE
INTERNET FAX SEND
MAIL COUNTER
FTP COUNTER
SMB SEND
USB CNT
TRIAL MODE_B & C
SCAN TO HDD_B/W
SCAN TO HDD_CL
SCAN TO HDD_2CL
SCAN TO HDD_SGL
Network scanner document read quantity
counter (B/W) (B/W scan job)
Network scanner document read quantity
counter (COLOR) (Color scan job)
Network scanner document read quantity
counter (2-COLOR) (2-Color scan job)
Network scanner document read quantity
counter (SINGLE) (Single-color scan job)
Number of times of internet FAX output
Number of times of internet FAX send
Number of times of internet FAX receive
Number of times of internet FAX send
Number of times of E-MAIL send
Number of times of FTP send
Number of times of SMB send
Number of times of USB storage
Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan
job)
SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)
SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR)
SCAN TO HDD record quantity (2-COLOR)
SCAN TO HDD record quantity (SINGLE
color)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22̆19
NETWORK SCANNER
COUNTER
DISPLAY
NET SCN ORG_B/W
:
NET SCN ORG_CL
:
00000000
NET SCN ORG_2CL
:
00000000
NET SCN ORG_SGL
:
00000000
INTERNET FAX OUTPUT
:
00000000
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 23
00000000
1/4
22-90
Purpose
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
Function (Purpose) : Used to output the various set data lists.
Section
: —
Item
: Function
23
23-2
Purpose
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
Select the print target with the buttons on the touch panel.
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the trouble history of paper
jam and misfeed. (If the number of misfeed
and troubles is considerably great, it may
be judged as necessary to repair.)
Press [EXECUTE] button to start self print.
Section
: —
* When [C] key, [CA] key, [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, or [EXECUTE] button is pressed during printing, the operation is terminated.
Item
: Trouble
Operation/Procedure
Change the display with [↑] [↓] buttons.
All custom setting list
Printer test page
Address registration
list
Document filing
folder list
System setting list
Receive rejection
number table
Receive rejection/
allow address/
domain table
Transfer to Email
table list
Transfer to
Administrator list
Web setting list
Meta data set list
ALL CUSTOM
SETTING LIST
PCL SYMBOL SET
LIST
PCL INTERNAL FONT
LIST
PCL EXTENDED
FONT LIST
PS FONT LIST
PS KANJI FONT LIST
PS EXTENDED FONT
LIST
NIC PAGE
INDIVIDUAL LIST
GROUP LIST
PROGRAM LIST
MEMORY BOX LIST
ALL SENDING
ADDRESS LIST
DOCUMENT FILING
FOLDER LIST
ADMIN. SETTINGS
LIST (COPY)
ADMIN. SETTINGS
LIST (PRINT)
ADMIN. SETTINGS
LIST (IMAGE SEND)
ADMIN. SETTINGS
LIST (DOC FILING)
ADMIN. SETTINGS
LIST (SECURITY)
ADMIN. SETTINGS
LIST (COMMON)
ALL ADMINISTRATOR
SETTINGS LIST
ANTI JUNK FAX
NUMBER LIST
ANTI JUNK MAIL/
DOMAIN NAME LIST
INBOUND ROUTING
LIST
DOCUMENT ADMIN
LIST
WEB SETTING LIST
METADATA SET LIST
TEST
PRESS
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.23-02
JAM/TROUBLE
PCL internal font list
DATA PRINT
MODE
[EXECUTE] TO PRINT
THE
JAM/TROUBLE PRINT
PCL extended font list
PS extended font list
PS kanji font list
PS extended font list
NIC page
One-touch address list
Group list
Program list
Memory box list
All address registration
list
Folder list
EXECUTE
23-80
Purpose
: Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed and
transport section.
Section
: Paper feed, transport
Item
: Function
Operation/Procedure
Copy
Press [EXECUTE] button to execute print of the list.
Printer
* When [C] key, [CA] key, [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, or [EXECUTE] button is pressed during printing, the operation is terminated.
FAX/Image send
Document filing
0
TEST
Security
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.23-80
DATA PRINT
Common
MODE㧔PAPER FEED㧕
PAPER FEED TIME LIST
All system setting list
Receive rejection
number table
Receive rejection/allow
address/domain table
Transfer to Email table
list
Transfer to
Administrator list
Web setting list
Meta data set list
CL
CLOSE
LIST PRINT
ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST
PCL SYMBOL SET LIST
PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST
PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST
PS EXTENDED FONT LIST
0
PCL symbol set list
SIMULATION NO.22-90
PS FONT LIST
Press [EXECUTE] button to execute print of the list.
All custom setting list
0
TES
TEST
Operation/Procedure
EXECUTE
24
24-1
Purpose
: Data clear
Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (The counters are cleared after
completion of maintenance.)
Section
: —
Item
: Counter
Operation/Procedure
1)
PS KANJI FONT LIST
NIC PAGE
EXECUTE
EX
1/1
1/4
Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch
panel.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
3)
Press [YES] button.
The target counter is cleared.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 24
MACHINE
RSPF
TROUBLE
Machine JAM counter
RSPF JAM counter
Trouble counter
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24̆01
JAM/TROUBLE
COUNTER
MACHINE
DATA CLEAR
RSPF
TROUBLE
RSPF
SCAN
STAPLER
PUNCHER
STAMP
SADDLE STAPLER
OC OPEN
RSPF OPEN
OC LAMP TIME
SPF counter
Scan counter
Staple counter
Puncher counter
Stamp counter
Saddle staple counter
OC open/close counter
OPEN RSPF open/close counter
OC section lamp total lighting time
0
TEST
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24-03
ORG./OUTPUT COUNTER DATA CLEAR
RSPF
24-2
STAPLER
SCAN
STAMP
SADDLE STAPLER
OC OPEN
PUNCHER
RSPF/DSPF OPEN
OC LAMP TIME
Purpose
: Data clear
Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section.
Section
: —
Item
: Counter
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/1
24-4
Operation/Procedure
Purpose
1)
Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch
panel.
: Data clear
2)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
3)
Press [YES] button.
Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the maintenance counter, the
printer counters of the transfer unit and the
fusing unit. (After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
The target counter is cleared.
Section
: —
Item
: Counter
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
MFT TOTAL
MFT HEAVY
MFT OHP
MFT ENV
LCC
ADU
Tray 1 paper feed counter
Tray 2 paper feed counter
Tray 3 paper feed counter
Tray 4 paper feed counter
Manual paper feed counter (Total)
Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
Side LCC paper feed counter (A4LCC)
ADU paper feed counter
Operation/Procedure
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24̆02
PAPER FEED COUNTER CLEAR
TRAY1
TRAY2
MFT TOTAL
LCC
TRAY3
MFT HEAVY
MFT OHP
YOU SURE?
Press [EXECUTE] button.
3)
Press [YES] button.
TRAY4
MAINTENANCE ALL
MAINTENANCE COL
TC1 BELT
TC1 BELT RANGE
TC1 BELT DAY
TC2 BELT
TC2 BELT RANGE
MFT ENV
TC2 BELT DAY
FUSER UNIT
FUSER ACUM DAY
ADU
ARE
2)
The target counter is cleared.
0
TEST
Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch
panel.
YES
NO
EXECUTE
Maintenance counter (Total)
Maintenance counter (Color)
Primary transfer unit print counter
Primary transfer unit accumulated traveling
distance (cm)
Primary transfer unit use day (Day)
Secondary transfer unit print counter
Secondary transfer unit accumulated traveling
distance (cm)
Secondary transfer unit use day (Day)
Fusing unit print counter
Fusing unit use day (Day)
1/1
0
24-3
Purpose
TEST
MAINTENANCE COUNTER
: Data clear
Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the number of use of the finisher, RSPF, and the scan (reading) unit.
Section
: —
Item
: Counter
1)
MAINTENANCE ALL
TC1 BELT DAY
ARE
TC2 BELT
Press [EXECUTE] button.
3)
Press [YES] button.
TC1 BELT
TC2 BELT RANGE
TC1 BELT RANGE
TC2 BELT DAY
FUSER ACUM DAY
YOU SURE?
Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch
panel.
2)
CLEAR
MAINTENANCE COL
FUSER UNIT
Operation/Procedure
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24̆04
The target counter is cleared.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 25
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/1
24-5
24-7
Purpose
: Data clear
Purpose
: Data clear
Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the developer counter. (After
replacement of developer, clear the
counter.)
Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the OPC drum counter. (After
replacement of the OPC drum, clear the
counter.)
Section
: —
Section
: —
Item
: Counter
Item
: Counter (OPC drum)
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch
panel.
1)
2)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
3)
Press [YES] button.
3)
Press [YES] button.
Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch
panel.
The target counter is cleared.
The target counter is cleared.
K
K
Developer cartridge print counter (K)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
Developer cartridge print counter (C)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C)
Developer cartridge print counter (M)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M)
Developer cartridge print counter (Y)
Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y)
C
M
Y
Drum cartridge print counter (K)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
Drum cartridge print counter (C)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (C)
Drum cartridge print counter (M)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (M)
Drum cartridge print counter (Y)
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (Y)
C
M
Y
0
TEST
DEVELOPER COUNTER
K
M
YOU SURE?
YES
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24̆07
TEST
DRUM CTRG COUNTER CLEAR
DATA CLEAR
C
ARE
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24̆05
NO
K
Y
EXECUTE
ARE
1/1
24-6
C
YOU
M
SURE?
YES
NO
Y
EXECUTE
1/1
24-9
Purpose
: Data clear
Purpose
Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the copy counter.
: Data clear
Section
: —
Function (Purpose) : Used clear the printer mode print counter
and the self print mode print counter.
Item
: Counter
Section
: —
Operation/Procedure
Item
: Counter
1)
Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch
panel.
Operation/Procedure
2)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
3)
Press [YES] button.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
The target counter is cleared.
3)
Press [YES] button.
COPY BW
COPY COL
SINGLE COLOR
2COLOR
1)
Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch
panel.
The target counter is cleared.
Copy (B/W) counter
Copy (COLOR) counter
Single color
2-color
PRINT BW
PRINT COL
OTHER BW
OTHER COL
Printer (B/W) counter
Printer (COLOR) counter
Other (BW) counter
Other (COLOR) counter
0
TEST
COPY COUNTER
COPY BW
DATA CLEAR
COPY COL
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24̆06
TEST
SINGLE COLOR
㧞 COLOR
PRINT/OTHER
COUNTER
PRINT BW
ARE YOU SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24̆09
CLEAR
OTHER BW
PRINT COL
OTHER COL
1/1
ARE YOU SURE?
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 26
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/1
24-10
Purpose
: Data clear
Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when
FAX is installed)
Section
: —
Item
: Counter
Scan to HDD record quantity (B/W)
Scan to HDD record quantity (COLOR)
Scan to HDD record quantity (2-color)
Scan to HDD record quantity (Single color)
0
NETWORK
Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch
panel.
SCANNER
COUTNER
NET SCN ORG_CL
NET SCN ORG_2CL
NET SCN ORG_SGL
Press [EXECUTE] button.
INTERNET FAX OUTPUT
3)
Press [YES] button.
INTERNET FAX RECEIVE
The target counter is cleared.
ARE YOU
Print quantity counter (for line 1)
Print quantity counter (for line 2)
Send counter
FAX receive counter
FAX send quantity counter (for line 1)
FAX send quantity counter (for line 2)
FAX send time
FAX receive time
Number of carrier prefix attached communications
DATA CLEAR
NET SCN ORG_B/W
2)
FAX OUTPUT
FAX OUTPUT_L2
FAX SEND
FAX RECEIVED
SEND IMAGES
SEND IMAGES_L2
SEND TIME
RECEIVED TIME
ACR SEND
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24̆15
TEST
Operation/Procedure
1)
SCAN TO HDD_B/W
SCAN TO HDD_CL
SCAN TO HDD_2CL
SCAN TO HDD_SGL
SURE?
INTERNET FAX SEND OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX SEND
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/3
24-30
Purpose
: Data clear
Function (Purpose) : Used to initialize the administrator password.
Section
: —
Item
: Clear
Operation/Procedure
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24̆10
1)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
2)
Press [YES] button.
The administrator password is initialized.
FAX COUNTER DATA CLEAR
FAX OUTPUT
SEND IMAGES
FAX OUTPUT_L2
SEND IMAGES_L2
FAX SEND
FAX RECEIVED
SEND TIME
RECEIVED TIME
0
ADMIN
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION
NO.24-30
TEST
ACR SEND
PASSWORD
INITIALIZE
1/1
24-15
Purpose
ARE
: Data clear
Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the counters related to the
image send.
Section
: —
Item
: Counter
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
24-31
Purpose
: Data clear
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) : Used to initialize the service mode password.
1)
Section
: —
Item
: Clear
Select the item to be cleared with the buttons on the touch
panel.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
3)
Press [YES] button.
Operation/Procedure
The target counter is cleared.
NET SCN ORG_B/W
NET SCN ORG_CL
NET SCN ORG_2CL
NET SCN ORG_SGL
INTERNET FAX
OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX SEND
OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX
RECEIVE
INTERNET FAX SEND
MAIL COUNTER
FTP COUNTER
SMB SEND
USB CNT
TRIAL MODE_B&C
Network scanner document read quantity
counter (B/W) (B/W scan job)
Network scanner document read quantity
counter (COLOR) (COLOR scan job)
Network scanner document read quantity
counter (2-color) (2-color scan job)
Network scanner document read quantity
counter (Single) (Single scan job)
Internet FAX output quantity
1)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
2)
Press [YES] button.
The service mode password is initialized.
0
TEST
SERVICE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24-31
PASSWORD INITIALIZE
Internet FAX send quantity
ARE
YOU SURE?
Number of internet FAX receive
Number of internet FAX send
Number of E-Mail send
Number of FTP send
Numeric SMB send
Number of USB save
Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job)
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 27
YES
NO
EXECUTE
Display items
25
25-1
Purpose
: Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the developing section.
Section
: Process (Developing section)
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the process speed with [MIDDLE] and [LOW] buttons.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3
min and the detection level of the toner density sensor is displayed.
TCD_K
TCD_C
TCD_M
TCD_Y
TCV_K
TCV_C
TCV_M
TCV_Y
Toner concentration sensor K
Toner concentration sensor C
Toner concentration sensor M
Toner concentration sensor Y
Toner concentration control voltage K
Toner concentration control voltage C
Toner concentration control voltage M
Toner concentration control voltage Y
AT DEVE VO_L_K
AT DEVE VO_L_C
AT DEVE VO_L_M
AT DEVE VO_L_Y
AT DEVE VO_M_K
AT DEVE VO_M_C
AT DEVE VO_M_M
AT DEVE VO_M_Y
Automatic developer
adjustment control voltage
at low speed
Automatic developer
adjustment control voltage
at middle speed
TCD_K
TCD_C
TCD_M
TCD_Y
TCV_K
TCV_C
TCV_M
TCV_Y
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.25-02
AUTOMATIC
DEVELOPER
ADJUSTMENT
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K :
128
AT DEVE VO_L_K :
128
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C :
128
AT DEVE VO_L_C :
128
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M :
128
AT DEVE VO_L_M :
128
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y :
128
AT DEVE VO_L_Y :
128
K
C
M
EXECUTE
Y
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.25-01
Default
value
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
Toner concentration sensor K
Toner concentration sensor C
Toner concentration sensor M
Toner concentration sensor Y
Toner concentration control K
Toner concentration control C
Toner concentration control M
Toner concentration control Y
TEST
0
TEST
Display
range
1 – 255
1 – 255
1 – 255
1 – 255
1 – 255
1 – 255
1 – 255
1 – 255
Item descriptions
1/2
TONER SENSOR OUTPUT MONITOR
TCD_㧷
:
TCV_㧷
:
TCD_C
:
TCV_C
:
TCD_M
:
TCV_M
:
TCD_Y
:
TCV_㨅
:
LOW
MIDDLE
26
26-1
EXECUTE
1/1
Purpose
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the paper exit tray (MX-TRX1).
25-2
Purpose
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to make the initial setting of toner
concentration when replacing developer.
Section
: Process (Photoconductor/Developing/
Transfer/Cleaning)
Item
: Adjustment
: Setting
Operation/Procedure
1)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
2)
Press [OK] button to save the entered content in step 1).
A
1)
Select the adjustment target with the buttons on the touch
panel.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
NOTE: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the
reference toner concentration level is not set. Also when
error code of EE-EC, EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the reference toner concentration level is not set normally.
Item descriptions
Automatic developer
adjustment value at low
speed
Automatic developer
adjustment value at middle
speed
Display
Content
(0:YES 1:NO)
0
1
Escape tray YES
Escape tray NO
Set
range
0 to 1
Default
1 (NO)
0
The toner concentration sensor makes sampling of toner concentration to display the detection level.
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y
AT DEVE ADJ_M_K
AT DEVE ADJ_M_C
AT DEVE ADJ_M_M
AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y
: Paper exit
Item
Item
Operation/Procedure
Display items
Section
Display
range
1 – 255
1 – 255
1 – 255
1 – 255
1 – 255
1 – 255
1 – 255
1 – 255
TEST
ESCAPE TRAY
SETUP
A㧦 0
A:
㨇
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26㧙01
㧧 (0:YES
1:NO)
0
0㨪
1 㨉
Default
value
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 28
OK
26-2
Item
Purpose
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the paper size of the large
capacity tray (LCC). (When the paper size
is changed, this simulation must be executed to change the paper size in software.)
Section
: Paper feed
Item
: Setting
COUNTUP
TIMING1
Button
display
FUSER_IN
FUSER_OUT
EXIT_OUT
Operation/Procedure
Select the paper size with the buttons on the touch panel.
LCC
0
1
Diagnosis
setting
0
TEST
SIZE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-02
MODE1
MODE2
MODE3
SETUP
LCC
8.5
B5
A4
11
Default
EXIT_OUT
(*): AR-C260 series VENDOR MODE is supported.
8.5 x 11 (Default: U.S.A, Canada, Inch)
A4 (Japan, AB_B, Europe, U.K,
Australia, AB_A)
B5
2
Content
The charging timing is when
passing the sensor paper lead
edge after fusing.
The charging timing is when
passing the sensor paper rear
edge after fusing.
The charging timing is when
passing the (machine, right)
tray/after-process unit paper
exit sensor paper rear edge.
The
specified
quantity is
completed.
Remainder
of money
left.
Condition 1
Operation 1
Operation 1
Operation 1
Insufficient money during
copy job
BLACK/
COLOR (No
remainder
of money)
COLOR
(Remainder
of money
left)
Condition 2
Operation 2
Operation 1
Operation 3
Condition 3
Operation 2
Operation 2
Operation 2
The
specified
quantity is
completed.
No
remainder
of money.
Condition 4
Operation 1
Operation 1
Operation 3
Operation 1: Wait for auto clear setting time. Default, 60sec. Can
be changed by the system setting.
1/1
Operation 2: Auto clear is not made.
Operation 3: Setting is immediately cleared. The display returns to
the initial screen.
26-3
Purpose
: Setting
0
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the specifications of the auditor.
Section
Item
: Auditor
AUDITOR
: Specifications
BUILT-IN AUDITOR 㧦
P10
OUTSIDE AUDITOR 㧦
NONE
Operation/Procedure
Select the set target with the button on the touch panel.
When a button is pressed, the set content is saved.
Item
BUILT-IN
AUDITOR
Button
display
P10
EC1
OUTSIDE
AUDITOR
NONE
P VENDOR1
P OTHER
DOC ADJ
ON
OFF
PF ADJ
ON
OFF
VENDOR
MODE (*)
MODE1
MODE2
MODE3
Content
Default
Built-in auditor mode
(standard mode) operation
The built-in auditor mode is
changed to EC1.
Normal operation
Vendor mode for old-type coin
vendor. Control in the copy
mode only.
Vendor mode for the other
external auditor connected to
the coin vendor I/F
Document filing function
enabled
Document filing function
disabled
Continuous paper feed is
performed.
Continuous paper feed is not
performed.
Vendor mode 1
Vendor mode 2
Vendor mode 3
P10
SETUP
EC1
P VENDOR1
DOC ADJ
㧦
ON
OFF
PF ADJ
㧦
ON
OFF
VENDOR MODE
㧦
MODE1
MODE2
P OTHER
MODE3
1/2
26-5
Purpose
NONE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-03
TEST
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the count mode of the total
counter and the maintenance counter.
Section
: —
Item
: Counter
Operation/Procedure
OFF
1)
Select the set item with [↑] [↓] buttons.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
Press [OK] button.
The set content in step 2) is saved. (Count-up number for A3
paper is 1 or 2.)
OFF
MODE3
Item
Display
A
B
C
E
TOTAL (B/W)
TOTAL (COL)
MAINTENANCE
(B/W)
MAINTENANCE
(COL)
DEV (B/W)
F
DEV (COL)
D
* 1 = Count up by 1
2 = Count up by 2
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 29
Content
Total counter (BLACK)
Total counter (COLOR)
Maintenance counter
(BLACK)
Maintenance counter
(COLOR)
Developer counter
(BLACK)
Developer counter
(COLOR)
Setting
range *
1 to 2
1 to 2
1 to 2
Default
2
2
2
1 to 2
2
1 to 2
2
1 to 2
2
0
0
A3(1117)
2
1㨪
2 㨉
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-10
TEST
NETWORK SCANNER TRIAL MODE SETUP
COUNTUP
A:
㨇
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26㧙05
TEST
A㧦 2
㧧 TOTAL(B/W)
B㧦 2
㧧 TOTAL(COL)
C㧦 2
㧧 MAINTENANCE(B/W)
D㧦 2
㧧 MAINTENANCE(COL)
A:1
A:
TRIAL MODE (0:YES 1:NO)
1
[ 0~ 1 ]
OK
OK
26-6
26-18
Purpose
: Setting
Purpose
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the specifications (paper, fixed
magnification ratio, etc.) of the destination.
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the toner save mode.
Section
: —
Section
: —
Item
: Specifications (Destination)
Item
: —
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the set target with the button on the touch panel.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
1)
Use [↑] and [↓] buttons to select an item.
The set value is highlighted and the value is displayed in the
setting area.
The selected set content is saved.
U.S.A.
CANADA
INCH
JAPAN
AB_B
EUROPE
U.K.
AUS.
AB_A
CHINA
* When there is an item over [↑], the display becomes active
and shifts to another item.
United States of America
Canada
Inch series, other destinations
Japan
AB series (B5 detection), other destinations
Europe
United Kingdom
Australia
AB series (A5 detection), other destinations
China
When there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled.
When there is an item under [↓], the display becomes active
and shifts to another item.
When there is no item under [↓], the display grays out and
the operation is disabled.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [OK] button is pressed, the current entered value is
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
0
DISTINATION SETUP
CANADA
U.S.A
* When [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed,
the value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-06
TEST
INCH
AB_B
EUROPE
AB_A
CHINA
U.K.
JAPAN
Item
AUS
A
Display
Content
COPY
(1:YES 0:NO)
0
Copy toner save mode
is allowed
Copy toner save mode
is inhibited.
Printer toner save
mode is allowed.
Printer toner save
mode is inhibited.
1
EXECUTE
1/1
B
PRINTER
(1:YES 0:NO)
26-10
0
1
Purpose
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the trial mode of the network
scanner.
Section
: —
Item
: Operation
1)
TONER
SAVE
MODE
0
㨇
0㨪
1 㨉
When [OK] button is pressed, the current entered value is
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the value is
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Item
A
Display
TRIAL MODE
(0:YES 1:NO)
Content
0
1
Trial mode setting
Trial mode cancel
0
SETUP
A㧦 0
㧧 COPY(1:YES
B㧦 0
㧧 PRINTER(1:YES
0:NO)
0:NO)
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
2)
0 to 1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26㧙18
A:
Enter the set value with 10-key.
Default
value
0
0
TEST
Operation/Procedure
Setting
range
0 to 1
Setting
range
0 to 1
Default
value
1
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 30
OK
26-30
Purpose
: Setting
Item
Display
A
(0:ONCE
1:ANY)
Function (Purpose) : Used to set allow/inhibit of HL slow-up control (CE mark support control).
Section
: —
Item
: Specifications (Operation mode (common
operation))
Content
0
Only once. If same as the
previous one, it is not saved.
Any time. Though same as
the previous one, it is saved.
1
Setting
range
0 to 1
0
Operation/Procedure
1)
TROUBLE
A:
MODE
SETUP
㧧
(0:ONCE
1:ANY)
0
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
3)
MEMORY
A㧦 0
Enter the set value with 10-key.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-35
TEST
When the machine enters the simulation, the following screen
is displayed.
2)
Default
value
0
㨇
0㨪
1 㨉
When [OK] button is pressed, the current entered value is
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
OK
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
26-38
Item
Display
A
(0:YES 1:NO)
Content
0
1
CE mark
control allowed
CE mark
control inhibited
Setting
range
0 to 1
Default value
Refer to .
Purpose
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set Continue/Stop of print when the
developer life is reached.
Section
: Other
Item
: Specifications (Operation mode)
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: Even though the control is allowed, the CE mark support
control may not be executed depending on the power frequency, etc.
Destination
U.S.A
CANADA
INCH
JAPAN
AB_B
EUROPE
U.K
AUS.
AB_A
CHINA
Setting value
1 (CE not supported)
1 (CE not supported)
1 (CE not supported)
1 (CE not supported)
1 (CE not supported)
0 (CE supported)
0 (CE supported)
0 (CE supported)
0 (CE supported)
0 (CE supported)
1)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
2)
When [OK] button is pressed, the current entered value is
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Item
Display
Content
A
MAINTENANCE
LIFE OVER
(0:CONTINUE
1:STOP)
0
1
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.26-30
Continue/Stop setting
of print when the
maintenance life is
over (Print Continue)
Continue/Stop setting
of print when the
maintenance life is
over (Print Stop)
Setting
range
0 to 1
Default
value
0
CLOSE
0
CE MARK CONTROL SETTING
A㧦 1
A:
[
0~
㧧 (0:YES 1:NO)
TEST
1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-38
ENGINE LIFE OVER SETTING
A㧦 0
1]
A:
MAINTENANCE LIFE OVER (0:CONTINUE 1:STOP)
0
[ 0~ 1 ]
OK
OK
26-35
Purpose
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the trouble memory saving procedure.
Section
: —
Item
: —
Operation/Procedure
1)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
2)
When [OK] button is pressed, the current entered value is
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
26-41
Purpose
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set YES/NO of AMS setting in the
center binding mode.
Section
: —
Item
: Specifications (Operation mode)
Operation/Procedure
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
1)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
2)
When [OK] button is pressed, and the current entered value is
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 31
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Item
Display
A
Content
(0:YES
1:NO)
0
Center binding
mode AMS setting
Center binding
mode AMS cancel
1
Setting
range
0 to 1
26-50
Purpose
Default value
Refer to .
Section
: —
Item
: Specifications (Operation)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an item to be set with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The selected value is highlighted and the value is displayed in
the setting area.
Destination
U.S.A
CANADA
INCH
JAPAN
AB_B
EUROPE
U.K
AUS.
AB_A
CHINA
* When there is an item over [↑], the display becomes active
and shifts to another item.
Setting value
0 (Cancel)
0 (Cancel)
0 (Cancel)
0 (Cancel)
0 (Cancel)
1 (Setting)
1 (Setting)
0 (Cancel)
0 (Cancel)
0 (Cancel)
When there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled.
When there is an item under [↓], the display becomes active
and shifts to another item.
When there is no item under [↓], the display grays out and
the operation is disabled.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [OK] button is pressed, the entered value is set.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
* When [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed,
the current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
0
MODE
AMS
A:
SETTING.
A㧦 0
㨇
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-41
TEST
PAMPHLET
㧧 (0:YES
1:NO)
Item
0
0㨪
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set functions.
A
1 㨉
Display
BW
REVERSE
YES
NO
OK
Content
description
B/W REVERSE
allowed
B/W REVERSE
inhibited
Setting
range
0–1
0–1
26-49
Purpose
: Setting
B
COLOR MODE
2-color/Single
color inhibit
setting
0 to 7
C
FINISHER
FUNCTION
The number of
discharge of
special paper
from the finisher
is limited.
The number of
discharge of
special paper
from the finisher
is not limited.
0–1
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the copy speed mode.
Section
: —
Item
: Setting
Operation/Procedure
1)
When the machine enters Simulation 26-49, the current set
status is displayed.
2)
Select an item to be changed, and it is highlighted. The setting
is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
YES
* The current set button is highlighted.
NO
* Only one can be selected for each item.
-
Item
POSTCARD
Set
value
LOW
HIGH
Content
Postcard copy speed LOW
Postcard copy speed HIGH
Default
value
LOW
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-49
COPY SPEED MODE SETUP
POSTCARD 㧦
LOW
HIGH
1/1
Default value
Refer to
"Setting value
A."
Refer to
"Setting value
B."
0 (YES)
0–1
Mode inhibit
Single
2-color
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
* OFF: Inhibit cancel state
ON: Inhibit state
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 32
When 2-color/
Single color inhibit
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
SIM setting
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Destination
U.S.A
CANADA
INCH
JAPAN
AB_B
EUROPE
U.K
AUS.
AB_A
CHINA
Setting value A
1 (Display allowed)
1 (Display allowed)
1 (Display allowed)
1 (Display allowed)
1 (Display allowed)
1 (Display allowed)
0 (Display inhibited)
1 (Display allowed)
1 (Display allowed)
1 (Display allowed)
26-53
Setting value B
0
0
0
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
Purpose
Section
: —
Item
: —
Operation/Procedure
1)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
2)
When [OK] button is pressed, the current set value is saved to
EEPROM and RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
0
FUNCTION SETTING
A:
㨇
1
0㨪
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-50
TEST
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set YES/NO of the auto color calibration.
A㧦 1
; BW
B㧦 0
;
COLOR MODE
C㧦 0
;
FINISHER FUNCTION : NO
REVERSE : YES
Item
Display
A
1 㨉
Content
(1:YES 0:NO)
1
0
ACC YES
ACC NO
Setting
range
0 to 1
Default
value
1
OK
0
26-52
Purpose
ENABLING
: Setting
: —
Item
: —
OF
AUTOMATIC
COLOR
A㧦 1
Function (Purpose) : Used to set whether non-printed paper
(insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up
or not.
Section
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-53
TEST
A:
㨇
CALIBRATION
㧧 (1:YES
0:NO)
1
0㨪
1 㨉
OK
Operation/Procedure
1)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
26-54
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
2)
Purpose
When [OK] button is pressed, the entered value is set.
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Item
Display
A
(0:YES
1:NO)
Setting
range
0 to 1
Content
0
1
White paper
countup (YES)
White paper
coutup (NO)
Section
: Printer
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
Default value
1)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
Refer to .
2)
When [OK] button is pressed, and the current set value is
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
After completion of setting, [OK] button returns to the normal
display.
Destination
U.S.A
CANADA
INCH
JAPAN
AB_B
EUROPE
U.K
AUS.
AB_A
CHINA
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the printer calibration YES/NO.
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Setting value
0 (countup)
0 (countup)
0 (countup)
1 (No countup)
0 (countup)
0 (countup)
0 (countup)
1 (No countup)
0 (countup)
0 (countup)
Item
A
Display
(1:YES 0:NO)
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-52
TEST
COUNT
A㧦 1
A:
㨇
MODE
OF
AUTOMATIC
A:
Default
value
1
CLOSE
COLOR
CALIBRATION OF PRINTER
㧧 (1:YES
0:NO)
1
0㨪
1 㨉
SETUP
㧧 (0:YES
1:NO)
OK
1
0㨪
ACC YES
ACC NO
SIMULATION NO.26㧙54
A㧦 1
㨇
PAPER
1
0
Setting
range
0–1
0
TEST
ENABLING
A BLANK
Content
1 㨉
OK
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 33
26-65
26-67
Purpose
: Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the finisher alarm mode.
When the machine enters Simulation 26-65, the following
screen is displayed.
* The current set value is highlighted.
Section
: —
When the set value button of an item to be changed is
pressed, it is highlighted and the setting is saved to EEPROM
and RAM.
Item
: Specifications
Section
: —
Item
: Specifications
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the summer time (switching
timing to the summer time and the adjustment time (shift amount)) and the time zone
(for switching to the summer time and the
difference between the local time and GMT
(UTC) for synchronization with the internet
time server).
Operation/Procedure
1)
* Only one can be selected for each item.
-
Set
value
30
50
ON
OFF
Item
LIMIT
SHEETS
LIMIT
COPIES
Content
Staple limit sheets: 30 sheets
Staple limit sheets: 50 sheets
Staple limit copies ON
Staple limit copies OFF
Setting
range
30 or 50
Default
value
30
ON or OFF
ON
Select a mode to be set. ([SUMMER TIME] is selected in this
example.)
* When [TIME ZONE] or [SUMMER TIME] button is pressed,
it is highlighted and item of the selected button is displayed.
* Only one can be selected, and the selected button is highlighted.
In the default display, [TIME ZONE] is selected.
2)
Change the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and the
value is displayed in the setting area.
* When there is an item over [↑], the display becomes active
and shifts to another item.
* Valid only when the 1K finisher is installed.
[Target paper size]
When there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled.
Staplable S-size paper described on the product specifications
A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 16K, 16KR
When there is an item under [↓], the display becomes active
and shifts to another item.
* 25 sheets for L-size paper (A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13,
8K) regardless of setting
When there is no item under [↓], the display grays out and
the operation is disabled.
* 25 sheets for mixed loading of a same width regardless of setting
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.26-65
3)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
4)
When [OK] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the current
set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
CLOSE
FINISHER ALARM MODE SETUP (STAPLE LIMIT)
LIMIT SHEETS
:
30
50
LIMIT COPIES
:
ON
OFF
After completion of setting, [OK] button returns to the normal
display.
* When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the current set value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
1/1
Category
TIME ZONE
SUMMER
TIME
Common
Item
Display
A
GMT +/-
B
C
D
GMT HOUR
GMT MINUTE
INTERNET
A
AUTO SUMMER
TIME ADJ
B
ADJ TIME HOUR
C
ADJ TIME MINUTE
+
–
YES
NO
ON
OFF
Content
GMT +/–
GMT HOUR
GMT MINUTE
Internet time YES/
NO
Auto summertime
setting ON/OFF
Adjustment time
HOUR
Adjustment time
MINUTE
Setting
range
0
1
0 to 13
0 to 59
0
1
0
1
0 to 23
Default
value
1
0 to 59
*
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 34
*
*
*
*
1
Remark
When YES, time is synchronized with
the internet time server.
Category
SUMMER
TIME
Item
Display
D
E
F
G
START TIME MONTH
START TIME DAY
START TIME WEEK
START TIME A DAY MONDAY
OF THE WEEK
TUESDAY
WEDNESDAY
THURSDAY
FRIDAY
SATURDAY
SUNDAY
START TIME HOUR
START TIME MINUTE
START MODE
DAY
WEEK & A DAY
OF THE WEEK
START UTC
YES
NO
END TIME MONTH
END TIME DAY
END TIME WEEK
END TIME A DAY
MONDAY
OF THE WEEK
TUESDAY
WEDNESDAY
THURSDAY
FRIDAY
SATURDAY
SUNDAY
END TIME HOUR
END TIME MINUTE
END MODE
DAY
WEEK & A DAY
OF THE WEEK
END UTC
YES
NO
Start time
setting
H
I
J
K
End time
setting
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
Content
Start time MONTH
Start time DAY
Start time WEEK
Stat time DAY OF
THE WEEK
Start time HOUR
Start time MINUTE
Start mode
UTC YES/NO
End time MONTH
End time DAY
End time WEEK
End time DAY OF
THE WEEK
End time HOUR
End time MINUTE
End mode
Setting
range
1 to 12
1 to 31
1 to 5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0 to 23
0 to 59
0
1
Default
value
*
*
*
*
0
1
1 to 12
1 to 31
1 to 5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0 to 23
0 to 59
0
1
*
UTC YES/NO
0
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Remark
When the set value is changed, it is
reflected to the START MODE.
Specified with date (Related item: E)
Specified with WEEK, DAY OF THE
WEEK. (Related item: F, G)
When set to YES, values of D to I are
not used.
When the set value is changed, it is
reflected to END MODE.
Specified with DATE (Related item: M)
Specified with WEEK, DAY OF WEEK
(Related item: N, O)
When set to YES, values of L to Q are
not used.
Displays of Item A, D, G, J, K, O, R, S are "Item name: Detail."
Example: PAPER: CS1
*: Refer to <>.
Setting
value
Time zone
correction
value (hour)
Time zone
correction
value
(minute)
Summer time
enable/
disable flag
Summer time
start date
(Month)
Summer time
start date
(Day)
Summer time
start date
(Hour)
Summer time
start date
(Minute)
Summer time
start date
(Week)
Summer time
start date
(Day of
week)
Destination
AB_B
EUROPE
8 (Hour)
0 (Hour)
U.S.A
–5 (Hour)
CANADA
–5 (Hour)
INCH
–5 (Hour)
JAPAN
9 (Hour)
U.K.
0 (Hour)
AUS.
10 (Hour)
AB_A
8 (Hour)
CHINA
8 (Hour)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
Summer
OFF
Summer
OFF
Summer
OFF
Summer
OFF
Summer
OFF
Summer
ON
Summer
ON
Summer
ON
Summer
OFF
Summer
OFF
4 (Month)
4 (Month)
1 (Month)
1 (Month)
1 (Month)
3 (Month)
3 (Month)
10
(Month)
1 (Month)
1 (Month)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
2 (Hour)
2 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
2 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
1 (Week)
1 (Week)
1 (Week)
1 (Week)
1 (Week)
5 (Week)
5 (Week)
5 (Week)
1 (Week)
1 (Week)
0
(Sunday)
0
(Sunday)
1 (Monday)
1 (Monday)
1 (Monday)
0
(Sunday)
0
(Sunday)
0
(Sunday)
1 (Monday)
1 (Monday)
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 35
Setting
value
Day of week
specifying
flag
UTC
specifying
flag
Summer time
end date
(Month)
Summer time
end date
(Day)
Summer time
end date
(Hour)
Summer time
end
Week of
summer time
end
Day of week
of summer
time end
Flag to
specify the
day of week
Flag to
specify UTC
Summer time
correction
value (Hour)
Summer time
correction
value
(minute)
Flag to
synchronize
with the
internet clock
server
U.S.A
0 (Day of
week
specifying)
0 (UTC
OFF)
CANADA
0 (Day of
week
specifying)
0 (UTC
OFF)
10
(Month)
Destination
AB_B
EUROPE
1 (Day
0 (Day of
specifying)
week
specifying)
1 (UTC ON)
1 (UTC
ON)
INCH
1 (Day
specifying)
JAPAN
1 (Day
specifying)
U.K.
0 (Day of
week
specifying)
1 (UTC
ON)
AUS.
0 (Day of
week
specifying)
0 (UTC
OFF)
AB_A
1 (Day
specifying)
CHINA
1 (Day
specifying)
1 (UTC ON)
1 (UTC ON)
1 (UTC ON)
1 (UTC ON)
10
(Month)
1 (Month)
1 (Month)
1 (Month)
10
(Month)
10
(Month)
3 (Month)
1 (Month)
1 (Month)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
2 (Hour)
2 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
3 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
5th (week)
5th (week)
1st (week)
1st (week)
1st (week)
5th (week)
5th (week)
5th (week)
1st (week)
1st (week)
0
(Sunday)
0
(Sunday)
1 (Monday)
1 (Monday)
1 (Monday)
0
(Sunday)
0
(Sunday)
0
(Sunday)
1 (Monday)
1 (Monday)
0 (Day of
week is
specified)
UTC OFF
0 (Day of
week is
specified)
UTC OFF
1 (Date
specification)
1 (Date
specification)
1 (Date
specification)
UTC ON
0 (Day of
week is
specified)
UTC OFF
1 (Date
specification)
UTC ON
0 (Day of
week is
specified)
UTC ON
1 (Date
specification)
UTC ON
0 (Day of
week is
specified)
UTC ON
UTC ON
UTC ON
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
0 (Hour)
0 (Hour)
0 (Hour)
0 (Hour)
0 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
0 (Hour)
0 (Hour)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
When there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled.
When the values of E to G (M to O) are changed and settled and
[OK] button is pressed, the values are saved to EEPROM and RAM
and set to Item J (R) at the same time.
When there is an item under [↓], the display becomes active
and shifts to another item.
When there is no item under [↓], the display grays out and
the operation is disabled.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-67
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [OK] button is pressed, the current set value is set.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
SUMMER TIME&TIME ZONE ADJUSTMENT
A:
1
[ 0~ 1 ]
TIME ZONE
; GMT ±:-
A:
1
B:
0
; GMT HOUR
C:
0
; GMT MINUTE
D:
0
; INTERNET: YES
* When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the current set value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
SUMMER TIME
OK
26-69
Purpose
Item
Display
A
TONER
PREPARATION
(0:YES 1:NO)
0
TONER NEAR
END (0:YES
1:NO)
0
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set whether the toner preparation
message and the toner near end message
are displayed or not when the toner quantity reaches 25%.
Section
: Process
Item
: Specifications
B
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an item to be set with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and the
value is displayed in the setting area.
* When there is an item over [↑], the display becomes active
and shifts to another item.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 36
Content
1
1
Toner preparation
message is displayed.
Toner preparation
message is not
displayed.
Toner near end
message is displayed.
Toner near end
message is not
displayed.
Setting
range
0 to 1
Default
value
0
0 to 1
0
Item
Display
C
Content
TONER END
D
1
Operation is enabled
when TONER END.
(*1)
2 Operation is stopped
when TONER END.
(*2)
3 Operation is stopped
when TONER END.
(*3)
Used to set the number of
detection of toner end.
TONER END
COUNT
Setting
range
1 to 3
Default
value
2
TONER END flag detection
No detection
No detection
Detection
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the FSS function (Password,
HOST server TEL number).
Section
: Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Item
: Data (User data)
Operation/Procedure
1 to 5
1)
When the machine enters Simulation 27-02, the screen is displayed.
2)
Select a desired button.
3)
Enter the set value with 10-key. The entered value is displayed
at "NEW."
4)
When [SET] button is pressed, the entered value is set.
3
The button is highlighted and the value is displayed.
*1
*2
*3
27-2
Purpose
CRUM ID machine history check
No detection
Detection
Detection
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
When the entered value is set, it is displayed in "PRESENT:"
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-69
TEST
TONER
NEAR
A:
END
SETTING
0
0
1
A㧦 0
㧧
B㧦 0
㧧 TONER NEAR END (0:YES 1: NO)
C㧦 2
㧧 TONER END
D㧦 3
㧧 TONER END COUNT
TONER PREPARATION(0:YES 1 :NO)
-
Display
USER FAX_NO.
SERVA TEL_NO.
Description
Sender registration number
HOST server TEL number
Number of digits
Max. 16 digits
Max. 16 digits
0
TEST
OK
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-02
FSS FUNCTION SETUP㧔INPUT㧕
PRESENT㧦
00000000000000000000000000000001
NEW 㧦
27
㧦
USER
FAX_NO.
SET
SERVA TEL_NO
1/1
27-1
Purpose
: Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) : Used to set whether the detection of communication error with RIC (U7-00) is disabled or not.
27-4
Purpose
: Setting
Section
: Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the FSS functions (initializing,
call, toner order auto send).
Item
: Specifications (Operation mode)
Section
: Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Operation/Procedure
Item
: Data (User data)
1)
When the machine enters Simulation 27-01, following the
screen is displayed.
Operation/Procedure
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [OK] button is pressed, and the current set value is
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
1)
When the machine enters the simulation, the following screen
is displayed.
2)
Select an item to be set with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted section of the set value is changed and the
value is displayed in the setting area.
After completion of setting, [OK] button returns to the normal
display.
* When there is an item over [↑], the display becomes active
and shifts to another item.
* When [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the
current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
When there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled.
Item
Display
A
DISABLE
Content
0: YES
1: NO
(U7-00) Not
detected
YES
NO
Setting
range
0 to 1 0
1
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.27-01
CLOSE
DISABLING OF U7-00 TROUBLE
㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷㧧DISABLE㧦
㩷 㩷 㩷 㩷 NO
㨇
0
0㨪
When there is no item under [↓], the display grays out and
the operation is disabled.
3)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
4)
When [OK] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the current
set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
After completion of setting, [OK] button returns to the normal
display.
A㧦 0
A:
When there is an item under [↓], the display becomes active
and shifts to another item.
Default
value
0: Not
detected
* When [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the
current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
1㨉
OK
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 37
Item
Display
A
FSS MODE
B
C
D
RETRY
TIMER (MINUTE)
TONER ORDER
TIMING (K)
E
TONER ORDER
TIMING (C)
F
TONER ORDER
TIMING(M)
G
TONER ORDER
TIMING(Y)
Content
NEB1
NEB2
100% – 75%
74% – 50%
49% – 25%
LOWER 25
NEAREND
EMPTY
100% – 75%
74% – 50%
49% – 25%
LOWER 25
NEAREND
EMPTY
100% – 75%
74% – 50%
49% – 25%
LOWER 25
NEAREND
EMPTY
100% – 75%
74% – 50%
49% – 25%
LOWER 25
NEAREND
EMPTY
FSS mode setting
Only send in NE-B mode
Send/Receive in NE-B mode
Retry number setting
Retry timer setting (minute)
Toner order auto send
100% to 75%
timing setting (K)
74% to 50%
49% to 25%
25% or less
Near end
Empty
Toner order auto send
100% to 75%
timing setting (C)
74% to 50%
49% to 25%
25% or less
Near end
Empty
Toner order auto send
100 to 75%
timing setting (M)
74% to 50%
49% to 25%
25% or less
Near end
Empty
Toner order auto send
100% to 75%
timing setting (Y)
74% to 50%
49% to 25%
25% or less
Near end
Empty
Purpose
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-04
[
1
0~
1]
Remark
1
2
3
3 (49% to 25%)
* 0: No retry
3 (49% to 25%)
3 (49% to 25%)
3 (49% to 25%)
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set YES/NO of the manual service
call.
FSS FUNCTION SETUP
A:
Default value
27-6
0
TEST
Setting
range
0
1
0 to 15
1 to 15
5
4
3
2
1
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
A:
1
;
FSS MODE: NEB2
B:
2
;
RETRY
Section
: Communication (RIC/MODEM)
C:
3
;
TIMER (MINUTE)
Item
: Specifications
D:
3
;
TONER ORDER TIMING (K): 3 (49% - 25%)
Operation/Procedure
OK
1)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
2)
When [OK] button is pressed, the current set value is saved to
EEPROM and RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
27-5
Purpose
: Setting
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the tag number.
Section
: Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Item
: Data (User data)
Operation/Procedure
1)
When the machine enters Simulation 27-05, the following
screen is displayed.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key. (Max. 8 digits)
Item
Display
Content
A
(0:YES 1:NO)
0
1
Manual service call YES
Manual service call NO
The entered value is displayed on "NEW."
TEST
When [SET] button is pressed, the entered value is set.
When the entered value is set, it is displayed in "PRESENT:"
and "NEW" disappears.
0
TEST
MANUAL SERVICE CALL SETUP
A㧦 0
A:
㨇
㧧 0:YES,
1:NO
0
0㨪
1 㨉
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-05
NEW :
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-06
OK
TAG# SETTING
PRESENT :
Default
value
0
0
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
3)
Setting
range
0 to 1
11111111
SET
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 38
27-9
27-7
Purpose
Purpose
: Setting
: Setting
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the threshold value for determining whether the paper feed time
between sensors is recorded or not and the
threshold value for determining whether the
gain adjustment retry number is recorded
or not.
1)
When the machine enters the simulation, the following screen
is displayed.
Section
: —
Item
: Specifications
Select an item to be set with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
Operation/Procedure
The highlighted section of the set value is changed and the
value is displayed in the setting area.
1)
When the machine enters the simulation, the following screen
is displayed.
* When there is an item over [↑], the display becomes active
and shifts to another item.
2)
Select an item to be set with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the FSS functions (enable, alert
callout).
Section
: Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Item
: Specifications
2)
The highlighted section of the set value is changed and the
value is displayed in the setting area.
When there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled.
* When there is an item over [↑], the display becomes active
and shifts to another item.
When there is an item under [↓], the display becomes active
and shifts to another item.
When there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled.
When there is no item under [↓], the display grays out and
the operation is disabled.
3)
When there is an item under [↓], the display becomes active
and shifts to another item.
Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
4)
When there is no item under [↓], the display grays out and
the operation is disabled.
* In the FSS function setting, change from YES (0) to NO (1)
cannot be made.
3)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
When [OK] button is pressed, the current set value is saved to
EEPROM and RAM.
4)
When [OK] button is pressed, the current set value is saved to
EEPROM and RAM.
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
After completion of setting, [OK] button returns to the normal
display.
* When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed to
exit the simulation, the machine is rebooted.
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Item
Display
Content
A
FUNCTION
(0:YES 1:NO)
0
1
B
ALERT
(0:YES 1:NO)
0
1
FSS function is
enabled.
FSS function is
disabled. (*)
Alert callout is enabled.
Alert callout is disabled.
Setting
range
0 to 1
0 to 1
Default
value
1
(NO)
0
(YES)
(*): In the FSS function setting, change from Disable to Enable can
be made, but change from Disable to Enable cannot be made.
Item
Send timing
Initial/Trouble/Continuous JAM alert
Maintenance timing detection
When Service Call key is pressed.
When toner order auto send setting reaches.
Toner installation data revision. However, only
for a new product.
Alert resend
Content
A
FEED TIME1
B
FEED TIME2
C
GAIN
ADJUSTMENT
RETRY
JAM ALERT
Item
No cause of callout
Maintenance
Service call
Toner send request
Toner collect request
Display
D
Threshold value of paper
feed time between sensors
(Main unit)
Threshold value of paper
feed time between sensors
(SPF)
Threshold value of gain
adjustment retry number
Threshold value of
continuous JAM alert
judgment
Setting
range
0 to 100
Default
value
50 (%)
0 to 100
50 (%)
1 to 100
50
(TIMES)
1 to 100
10
(TIMES)
* Item A: 0% is the standard passing time between sheets. 100%
is the time for judgment as a JAM between sheets.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-09
FSS FUNCTION ADJUSTMENT
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-07
A:
1
; FUNCTION(0:YES 1:NO)
B
㧧 ALERT(0:YES 1:NO)
0
50
㨇 0㨪100㨉
FSS FUNCTION SETUP (FUNCTION)
A 1
A:
A㧦 50
㧧 FEED TIME1
B㧦
50
㧧
C㧦
50
㧧
FEED TIME2
GAIN ADJUSTMENT RETRY
D㧦
50
㧧
JAM ALERT
OK
[ 0~ 1 ]
OK
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 39
27-10
Purpose
: Data clear
Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the trouble prediction history
information.
Section
: Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Item
: Specifications
Operation/Procedure
1)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
become active display.
2)
Press [YES] button.
The history information of the trouble prediction information is
cleared. [YES] button is highlighted.
Item
LSU1
LSU2
DESK1
DESK2
FINISHER1
FINISHER2
SCAN GAIN ADJ1
SCAN GAIN ADJ2
SCAN GAIN ADJ3
SCAN GAIN ADJ4
SCAN GAIN ADJ5
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
TROUBLE
PRECOGNITION
DATE
LSU1
Serial
communication
retry number
history display
Scanner gain
adjustment retry
history
CLOSE
RESULT
㧦 99/99/99
DESK1
㧦 99/99/99
99㧦99㧦99
DESK2
㧦 99/99/99
99㧦99㧦99
99999999
FINISHER1 㧦 99/99/99
99㧦99㧦99
99999999
FINISHER2
99㧦99㧦99
LSU2
99㧦99㧦99
RETRY
㧦 99/99/99
㧦 99/99/99
99㧦99㧦99
99999999
99999999
99999999
99999999
1/2
27-12
Purpose
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
Check (Display/Print)
0
TROUBLE
Content
0
TEST
Retry
number
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
SIMULATION NO.㪉㪎㪄㪈㪈
TEST
* After completion of the trouble prediction information history
clear, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display and
[YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
Target history
Serial communication retry number history
High density process control error history
Half tone process control error history
Automatic register adjustment error history
Gain adjustment retry history
Paper transport time between sensors
Display item
Occurrence date
and time (Display)
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-10
PRECOGNITION HISTORY CLEAR
Function (Purpose) : Used to display the high-density, half-tone
process control error history and the automatic register adjustment error history.
Section
: Process
Item
: Specifications
Operation/Procedure
1)
ARE YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
* Select the display page of process data with [↓] and [↑] buttons.
* When there is an item over [↑], the display becomes active
and shifts to the previous page.
27-11
Purpose
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
Check (Display/Print)
Function (Purpose) : Used to display the serial communication
retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry number history. (for RSPF)
Section
: Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Item
: Specification
Operation/Procedure
1)
When the machine enters Simulation 27-12, the following
screen is displayed.
When the machine enters Simulation 27-11, the following
screen is displayed.
* Select the display page of process data with [↓] and [↑] buttons.
When there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled.
When there is an item under [↓], the display becomes active
and shifts the following page.
When there is no item under [↓], the display grays out and
the operation is disabled.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy
basic screen of the simulation.
* Press [COLOR]/[BLACK] key to execute copying.
Display item
Content
* When there is an item over [↑], the display becomes active
and shifts to the previous page.
HV_ERR1
High density error history 1
When there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled.
HV_ERR2
High density error history 2
When there is an item under [↓], the display becomes active
and shifts the following page.
HV_ERR3
High density error history 3
HV_ERR4
High density error history 4
HV_ERR5
High density error history 5
H_TONE ERR1
Half tone error history 1
H_TONE ERR2
Half tone error history 2
When there is no item under [↓], the display grays out and
the operation is disabled.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy
basic screen of the simulation.
* Press [COLOR]/[BLACK] key to execute copying.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 40
Occurrence
date and time
(Display)
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
Error
code
(Digits)
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Display item
Occurrence
date and time
(Display)
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
Content
H_TONE ERR3
Half tone error history 3
H_TONE ERR4
Half tone error history 4
H_TONE ERR5
Half tone error history 5
AUTO REG
ADJ1
AUTO REG
ADJ2
AUTO REG
ADJ3
AUTO REG
ADJ4
AUTO REG
ADJ5
Automatic register
adjustment error history 1
Automatic register
adjustment error history 2
Automatic register
adjustment error history 3
Automatic register
adjustment error history 4
Automatic register
adjustment error history 5
Error
code
(Digits)
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
4 digits
27-13
Purpose
Check (Display/Print)
Function (Purpose) : Used to display the history of paper feed
time between sensors.
Section
: —
Item
: Specifications
Operation/Procedure
1)
When the machine enters Simulation 27-13, the following
screen is displayed.
* Select the display page of process data with [↓] and [↑] buttons.
* When there is an item over [↑], the display becomes active
and shifts to the previous page.
When there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled.
0
TROUBLE
PRECOGNITION
HV
ERR1
HV
ERR2
HV
ERR3
HV
ERR4
HV
ERR5
H_TONE
When there is an item under [↓], the display becomes active
and shifts the following page.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.㪉㪎㪄㪈㪉
TEST
RESULT(ADJUSTMENT_ERROR)
DATE
When there is no item under [↓], the display grays out and
the operation is disabled.
ERROR CODE
㧦 99/99/99 99㧦99㧦99 9999
㧦 99/99/99
99㧦99㧦99
9999
㧦 99/99/99 99㧦99㧦99
9999
㧦 99/99/99 99㧦99㧦99
9999
㧦 99/99/99 99㧦99㧦99
9999
ERR1 㧦 99/99/99 99㧦99㧦99
9999
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy
basic screen of the simulation.
* Press [COLOR]/[BLACK] key to execute copying.
1/3
Display item
Main
unit
Content
FEED TIME1
FEED TIME2
FEED TIME3
FEED TIME4
FEED TIME5
FEED TIME6
FEED TIME7
FEED TIME8
FEED TIME9
FEED TIME10
FEED TIME1(SPF)
FEED TIME2(SPF)
FEED TIME3(SPF)
FEED TIME4(SPF)
FEED TIME5(SPF)
FEED TIME6(SPF)
FEED TIME7(SPF)
FEED TIME8(SPF)
FEED TIME9(SPF)
FEED TIME10(SPF)
RSPF
History of paper feed time between sensors 1
History of paper feed time between sensors 2
History of paper feed time between sensors 3
History of paper feed time between sensors 4
History of paper feed time between sensors 5
History of paper feed time between sensors 6
History of paper feed time between sensors 7
History of paper feed time between sensors 8
History of paper feed time between sensors 9
History of paper feed time between sensors 10
History of SPF paper feed time between sensors 1
History of SPF paper feed time between sensors 2
History of SPF paper feed time between sensors 3
History of SPF paper feed time between sensors 4
History of SPF paper feed time between sensors 5
History of SPF paper feed time between sensors 6
History of SPF paper feed time between sensors 7
History of SPF paper feed time between sensors 8
History of SPF paper feed time between sensors 9
History of SPF paper feed time between sensors 10
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-13
TROUBLE PRECOGNITION RESULT(FEED TIME)
DATE
Occurrence date
and time
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
Code between
sensors
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
Passing time
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
Passing
reference time
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
27-14
Purpose
: Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) : The FSS connection test mode setting is
made.
SENSOR CODE
PASS TIME
STANDARD TIME
FEED
TIME1 : 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999
99999
99999
FEED
TIME2 : 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999
99999
99999
Section
: —
FEED
TIME3 : 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999
99999
99999
FEED
TIME4 : 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999
99999
99999
Item
: Operation
FEED
TIME5 : 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999
99999
99999
FEED
TIME6 : 99/99/99 99:99:99
99999
99999
99999
Operation/Procedure
1/4
1)
When the machine enters Simulation 27-14, following the
screen is displayed.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered value.
* The FSS connection test mode setting cannot be changed
from Enable (1:ON) to Disable (0:OFF).
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 41
3)
When [OK] button is pressed, and the current set value is
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
0
TEST
MAIN UNIT SENSOR CHECK
* When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed to
exit the simulation, the machine is rebooted.
Item
Display
Content
A
CONNECTION
TEST MODE
(1: ON 0: OFF)
1
0
Set the FSS connection
test mode to Enable.
Set the FSS connection
test mode to Disable. *
Setting
range
0 to 1
POD1
POD2
TFD2
TFD3
HPOS
DSW_R
DSW_C
DSW_F
DHPD_K
DHPD_CL
1TNFD
1TUD_CL
1TUD_K
1/1
0
(OFF)
Purpose
0
CLOSE
FSS TEST MODE SETUP
A:0
PPD2
POD3
30-2
SIMULATION NO.27-14
A:
PPD1
Default
*: The FSS connection test can be changed only from Disable to
Enable, and cannot be changed from Enable to Disable.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.30-01
: Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors of the paper feed section and the related circuits.
Section
: Paper feed
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
; CONNECTION TEST MODE (1:ON 0:OFF)
1)
0
[ 0~ 1 ]
OK
When the machine enters Simulation 30-02, the following
screen is displayed to show the sensor status change.
* When each sensor is turned ON, the corresponding sensor
name is highlighted.
30
30-1
Purpose
: Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed section, the paper transport section, and the
paper exit section.
Section
: Paper feed
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
When the machine enters Simulation 30-01, the following
screen is displayed to show the sensor status change.
Sensor name (Display)
CPFD1
CLUD1
CPED1
CSPD1
CSS1
CPFD2
CLUD2
CPED2
CSPD2
CSS2
MPFD
MPLD
MTOP1
MTOP2
MPED
Content
Cassette 1 transport detection
Cassette 1 upper limit detection
Cassette 1 paper empty detection
Cassette 1 paper remaining quantity detection
Cassette 1 presence detection
Cassette 2 transport detection
Cassette 2 upper limit detection
Cassette 2 paper empty detection
Cassette 2 paper remaining quantity detection
Cassette 2 presence detection
Manual feed paper entry detection
Manual feed paper length detection
Manual feed tray reduction detection
Manual feed tray extension detection
Manual feed paper empty detection
* When each sensor is turned ON, the corresponding sensor
name is highlighted.
Code of sensor
PPD1
PPD2
POD1
POD2
POD3
TFD2
TFD3
HPOS
DSW_R
DSW_C
DSW_F
DHPD_K
DHPD_CL
1TNFD
1TUD_CL
1TUD_K
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.30㧙02
TRAY SENSOR CHECK(MAIN)
Sensor name
Resist front detection
Resist detection
Fusing after detection
Paper exit detection
Right tray paper exit detection
Main unit paper exit full detection
Right tray paper exit full detection
Shifter home detection
Right door open/close detection
Cassette 1 transport cover open/close detection
Front cover open/close detection
K phase detection
CL phase detection
Waste toner full detection
Primary transfer belt separation CL detection
Primary belt separation BK detection
CPFD1
CLUD1
CPED 1
CPED 2
MPLD
CSS1
CPFD2
CLUD 2
CSPD 2
CSS2
MPFD
MTOP1
MTOP2
MPED
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 42
CSPD 1
1/1
1/1
33
Display
MAX POSITION
P1 (A4) POSITION
P2 (A4R) POSITION
MIN POSITION
33-1
Purpose
: Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the operations of the card
reader sensor and the related circuits. (The
card reader sensor operation can be monitored with the LCD display.) (Japan only)
Section
: Other
Item
: Operation
Description of item
Manual feed max. width
Manual feed P1 position width (A4)
Manual feed P2 position width (A4R)
Manual feed min. width
Item name
COMPLETE
ERROR
Item content
Adjustment completed
Adjustment failed
0
Operation/Procedure
1)
TEST
When the machine enters Simulation 33-01, the following
screen is displayed to show the sensor status change.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.40-02
BYPASS TRAY ADJUSTMENT
MAXPOSITION
* When each sensor is turned ON, the corresponding sensor name
is highlighted.
PRESS
ADJUSTMENT.
[EXECUTE]
TO
START
Code (Display)
CARD
DATA
CLOCK
Sensor name
Card insertion detection
Card number signal detection
Standard clock signal detection
EXECUTE
40-7
Purpose
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.33㧙01
CARD READER SENSOR CHECK
CARD
DATA
CLOCK
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the adjustment value of the
detection level of the manual paper feed
tray paper width detector.
Section
: Paper feed
Item
: Specifications
Operation/Procedure
1/1
1)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
1/1
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
40
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
40-2
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
Purpose
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the detection level of the
manual feed tray paper width detector.
Section
: Paper feed
Item
: Operation
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the currently entered data are saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
Operation/Procedure
1)
Extend the manual feed tray guide to the max. width and press
[EXECUTE] button. [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and the
current AD value is temporality saved to RAM as the max.
width.
* During adjustment, "EXECUTING..." is displayed.
* After completion of the max. width adjustment, the P1 width
(A4) adjustment value start screen is displayed.
2)
Extend the manual feed tray guide to the P1 (A4) width position and press [EXECUTE] button. [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and the current AD value is temporality saved to RAM
as the P1 width (A4) position. (Hereinafter, the value is saved
for each size setting.)
3)
Perform the adjustment of P2 position width (A4R) and min.
position according to the above procedures.
4)
After completion of the adjustment, "COMPLETE" is displayed
and the RAM contents are saved to EEPROM. If the adjustment is not completed normally for any reason, "ERROR" is
displayed and data are not saved to EEPROM. In this case,
the adjustment must be tried again.
Item
Item
Item content
A
B
MAX POSITION
P1 POSITION
C
P2 POSITION
D
MIN POSITION
Manual feed max. width
Manual feed P1 position
(A4)
Manual feed P2 position
(A4R)
Manual feed min. width
Set
range
0 to 255
0 to 255
Default
value
241
231
0 to 255
140
0 to 255
19
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.40-07
BYPASS TRAY VALUE SETTING
A:
241
[ 0~ 255 ]
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 43
A : 241
;
MAX POSITION
B : 231
;
P1 POSITION
C : 140
;
P2 POSITION
D : 19
;
MIN POSITION
OK
41
41-1
Purpose
: Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) : Used to display the operating state of the
document sensor.
Section
: Other
Item
: Operation
Sensor name
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
Content
Document sensor 1
Document sensor 2
Document sensor 3
Document sensor 4
Document sensor 5
Document sensor 6
Document sensor 7
Set range
0 – 255
Default value
128
Operation/Procedure
1)
0
When the machine enters Simulation 41-01, the following
screen is displayed to show the sensor status change.
TEST
* When each sensor is turned ON, the corresponding sensor
name is highlighted.
DOCUMENT SIZE PHOTO-SENSOR SETUP
WITH THE ORIGINAL COVEROPENED, TURN ON THE EXECUTE
KEY WITH THE ORIGINAL ON THE ORIGINAL TABLE.
Code (Display)
OCSW
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
Sensor name
Original cover SW
Document detection 1
Document detection 2
Document detection 3
Document detection 4
Document detection 5
Document detection 6
Document detection 7
EXECUTE
41-3
Purpose
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41㧙01
PD SENSOR CHECK
Section
: Other
Item
: Operation
PD1
PD2
PD3
Operation/Procedure
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
1)
1/1
1/1
41-2
: Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the detection level of the
document size sensor.
Section
: Other
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
: Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) : Used to display the document sensor
detection level (A/D) in real time and to display the threshold value adjusted with SIM
41-2 in [ ] beside the sensor name.
OCSW
Purpose
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41-02
When the machine enters Simulation 41-02, the following
screen is displayed.
When the machine enters Simulation 41-03, the following
screen is displayed.
* ON/OFF detection of the OCSW sensor and the A/D value
check of each PD sensor are performed in real time.
Display
OCSW
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
Content
Original cover SW
Document detection 1
Document detection 2
Document detection 3
Document detection 4
Document detection 5
Document detection 6
Document detection 7
Range
0 – 1 ("1": Close)
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
0 – 255
* In an actual control, the A/D value is sent by polling at a regular
interval from the SCU or the controller.
Press [EXECUTE] button without a document on OC.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and the sensor level setting
without document is performed.
2)
3)
The sensor level setting without document is completed.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41̆03
PD SENSOR DISPLAY
Set A3 (11" x 17") paper on OC and press [EXECUTE] button.
OCSW
:
1
PD5[㪁㪁㪁]
:
㪁㪁㪁㩷
The sensor level setting with document detection is performed.
PD1[㪁㪁㪁]
:
㪁㪁㪁㩷
PD6[㪁㪁㪁]
:
㪁㪁㪁㩷
After completion of sensor level setting with document, the
message is displayed to show the adjustment has been successfully completed. (In case of an error, the error message is
displayed with the failed sensor name.)
PD2[㪁㪁㪁]
:
㪁㪁㪁㩷
PD7[㪁㪁㪁]
:
㪁㪁㪁㩷
PD3[㪁㪁㪁]
:
㪁㪁㪁㩷
PD4[㪁㪁㪁]
:
㪁㪁㪁㩷
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 44
1/1
43
Item
Display
Q
HL_LM OHP
PAPER
HL_US OHP
PAPER
HL_UM ENV
PAPER
HL_LM ENV
PAPER
HL_US ENV
PAPER
HL_UM ESTAR
TH_US ESTAR
PRE-JOB
43-1
Purpose
R
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the fusing temperature in each
operation mode.
S
Section
: Fusing
T
Item
: Operation
U
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
V
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
W
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
X
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [OK] button is pressed, the currently entered data are
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
Content
OHP-TH_LM set
value
OHP-TH_US set
value
Envelope TH_UM
set value
Envelope TH_LM
set value
Envelope TH_US
set value
TH_UM set value
when preheating
TH_US set value
when preheating
TH_UM set value
when resetting from
preheating
Set
range
30 to
200
70 to
230
70 to
230
30 to
200
70 to
230
30 to
200
30 to
200
30 to
200
Display
Content
A
HL_UM READY
B
HL_LM READY
C
HL_US READY
D
HL_UM PLAIN
PAPER BW
HL_LM PLAIN
PAPER BW
HL_US PLAIN
PAPER BW
HL_UM PLAIN
PAPER CL
TH_UM set value in
READY standby
TH_LM set value in
READY standby
TH_US set value in
READY standby
BW normal paper
TH_UM set value
BW normal paper
TH_LM set value
BW normal paper
TH_US set value
COLOR normal
paper TH_UM set
value
COLOR normal
paper TH_LM set
value
COLOR normal
paper TH_US set
value
Fusing paper front
rotation start
TH_UM set value
Fusing paper front
rotation start
TH_LM set value
WARM UP
complete time
Heavy paper
TH_UM set value
Heavy paper
TH_LM set value
Heavy paper
TH_US set value
OHP-TH_UM set
value
E
F
G
H
HL_LM PLAIN
PAPER CL
I
HL_US PLAIN
PAPER CL
J
WARMUP
FUMON
HL_UM T
WARMUP
FUMOFF
HL_LM T
WARM UP
END TIME
HL_UM HEAVY
PAPER
HL_LM HEAVY
PAPER
HL_US HEAVY
PAPER
HL_UM OHP
PAPER
K
L
M
N
O
P
70 to
230
30 to
200
70 to
230
70 to
230
30 to
200
70 to
230
70 to
230
170
180
180
145
145
180
180
145
142
130
130
160
160
*2: U.S.A, Canada, Europe, U.K, Australia, Inch, AB_A
TH_UM
TH_LM
TH_US
HL_UM
HL_LM
HL_US
Fusing upper thermister main
Fusing lower thermister main
Fusing upper thermister sub
Heater lamp upper main
Heater lamp lower main
Heater lamp upper sub
0
TEST
Item
170
*1: Japan, China, AB_B
* When [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed,
the current set values is saved in EEPROM and RAM.
Set
range
Default value
Group Group
A *1
B *2
145
145
FUSER
Default value
Group Group
A *1
B *2
175
180
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.43㧙01
TEMP SETUP
180
㨇 70㨪230㨉
FOR
PAPER
A㧦180
㧧 HL_UM
READY
B㧦105
㧧 HL_LM
READY
C㧦160
㧧 HL_US
READY
D㧦175
㧧 HL_UM
PLAIN PAPER BW
105
105
155
160
170
175
Purpose
130
130
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the fusing temperature in each
operation mode. (Continued from 43-01.)
180
180
Section
: Fusing
Item
: Operation
OK
43-4
: Setting
170
175
30 to
200
130
130
70 to
230
180
180
30 to
200
145
145
30 to
200
75
75
30 to
255
70 to
230
30 to
200
70 to
230
70 to
230
76
76
170
170
140
140
175
175
When setting is completed, [OK] button returns to the normal
display.
170
170
* When [↑], [↓], [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current
set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [OK] button is pressed, the currently entered data are
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 45
Display
Content
A
HL_UM PLAIN
PAPER BW
DUP
HL_LM PLAIN
PAPER BW
DUP
HL_US PLAIN
PAPER BW
DUP
PLAIN PAPER
BW DUP APP
CNT
HL_UM PLAIN
PAPER CL
DUP
HL_LM PLAIN
PAPER CL
DUP
HL_US PLAIN
PAPER CL
DUP
PLAIN PAPER
CL DUP APP
CNT
BW plain paper
duplex TH_UM
set value
BW plain paper
duplex TH_LM
set value
BW plain paper
duplex TH_US
set value
BW plain paper
duplex applicable
number of sheets
COLOR plain
paper duplex
TH_UM set value
COLOR plain
paper duplex
TH_LM set value
COLOR plain
paper duplex
TH_US set value
COLOR plain
paper duplex
applicable
number of sheets
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Default value
Group Group
A *1
B *2
170
175
Set
range
Item
70 to 230
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
4)
When [OK] button is pressed, the currently entered data are
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
30 to 200
100
100
70 to 230
175
180
0 to 60
1
1
70 to 230
170
175
30 to 200
100
100
70 to 230
175
180
0 to 60
1
1
* When [↑], [↓], [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* Input value: The intercept for the correction value is 50. This is
because the set value is kept as a positive number in case of a
negative setting due to negative correction.
• Correction value: (–49 to +49) Input value: Actually entered value
(1 to 99)
Correction value
Input value
*2: U.S.A, Canada, Europe, U.K, Australia, Inch, AB_A
Fusing upper thermister main
Fusing lower thermister main
Fusing upper thermister sub
Heater lamp upper main
Heater lamp lower main
Heater lamp upper sub
0
FUSER
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.43-04
TEST
TEMP SETUP2
A:
170
㨇 70㨪230㨉
FOR
㧧 HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP
B : 100
㧧 HL_LM
PLAIN
PAPER BW
DUP
C : 175
㧧 HL_US
PLAIN
PAPER BW
DUP
D:
㧧 PLAIN
PAPER
BW
DUP APP
43-20
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to correct the environments of low
temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the
fusing temperature setting 1 for each paper
(SIM 43-01).
Section
: Fusing
Item
: Operation
0
50
Display item
Item content
A
HL_UM READY
LL
B
HL_LM READY
LL
C
HL_US READY
LL
D
HL_UM PLAIN
BW LL
E
HL_LM PLAIN
BW LL
F
HL_US PLAIN
BW LL
G
HL_UM PLAIN
CL LL
H
HL_LM PLAIN
CL LL
I
HL_US PLAIN
CL LL
J
WARMUP
FUMON
HL_UM T LL
K
WARMUP
FUMOFF
HL_LM T LL
L
WARMUP END
TIME LL
M
HL_UM HEAVY
LL
N
HL_LM HEAVY
LL
Correction value for
TH_UM set value in Ready
standby under LL
environment
Correction value for TH_LM
set value in Ready standby
under LL environment
Correction value for TH_US
set value in Ready standby
under LL environment
Correction value for BW
plain paper TH_UM set
value under LL
environment
Correction value for BW
plain paper TH_LM set
value under LL
environment
Correction value for BW
plain paper TH_US set
value under LL
environment
Correction value for
COLOR plain paper
TH_UM set value under LL
environment
Correction value for
COLOR plain paper TH_LM
set value under LL
environment
Correction value for
COLOR plain paper TH_US
set value under LL
environment
Correction value for fusing
motor front rotation start
TH_UM set value under LL
environment
Correction value for fusing
motor front rotation start
TH_LM set value under LL
environment
Correction value for
WARMUP complete time
under LL environment
Correction value for heavy
paper TH_UM set value
under LL environment
Correction value for heavy
paper TH_LM set value
under LL environment
CNT
OK
Purpose
–5
45
Item
PAPER
A : 170
1
–25
25
+5
55
+25
75
+49
99
*1: Japan, China, AB-B
TH_UM
TH_LM
TH_US
HL_UM
HL_LM
HL_US
–49
1
Operation/Procedure
1)
When the machine enters Simulation 43-20, the screen on the
right is displayed. (The current set value is displayed.)
2)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and displayed on the set setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 46
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
55
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
80
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
60
Item
Display item
Item content
O
HL_US HEAVY
LL
P
HL_UMOHP LL
Q
HL_LM OHP LL
Correction value for heavy
paper TH_US set value
under LL environment
Correction value for OHP
TH_UM set value under LL
environment
Correction value for OHP
TH_LM set value under LL
environment
Correction value for OHP
TH_US set value under LL
environment
Correction value for
ENVELOPE TH_UM set
value under LL
environment
Correction value for
ENVELOPE TH_LM set
value under LL
environment
Correction value for
ENVELOPE TH_US set
value under LL
environment
Correction value for
preheating TH_UM set
value under LL
environment
Correction value for
preheating TH_US set
value under LL
environment
Correction value for
TH_UM set value when
resetting from preheating
under LL environment
R
HL_US OHP LL
S
HL_UM
ENVELOPE LL
T
HL_LM
ENVELOPE LL
U
HL_US
ENVELOPE LL
V
HL_UM E-STAR
LL
W
HL_US E-STAR
LL
X
PRE-JOB LL
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
60
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
60
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and displayed on the set setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
4)
When [OK] button is pressed, the currently entered data are
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
60
* When [↑], [↓], [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current
set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* Input value: The intercept for the correction value is 50. This is
because the set value is kept as a positive number in case of a
negative setting due to negative correction.
• Set value: Value to be set (–49 to +49), Input value: Actual input
(1 to 99)
Set value
Input value
–49
1
1 to 99
1 to 99
60
Item
Item display
A
HL_UM READY
HH
B
HL_LM READY
HH
C
HL_US READY
HH
D
HL_UM PLAIN
BW HH
E
HL_LM PLAIN
BW HH
F
HL_US PLAIN
BW HH
G
HL_UM PLAIN
CL HH
H
HL_LM PLAIN
CL HH
I
HL_US PLAIN
CL HH
J
WARMUP
FUMON HL_UM
T HH
K
WARMUP
FUMOFF HL_LM
T HH
60
Fusing upper thermister main
Fusing lower thermister main
Fusing upper thermister sub
Heater lamp upper main
Heater lamp lower main
Heater lamp upper sub
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.43-20
FUSER TEMP ADJUSTMENT (LL)
A:
55
㨇 1㨪 99㨉
A : 55
;
HL_UM READY LL
B : 55
;
HL_LM READY LL
C : 55
;
HL_US READY LL
D : 55
;
HL_UM PLAIN BW LL
OK
43-21
Purpose
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to perform correction of high temperature and high humidity (H/H) environment
for the fusing temperature setting 1 (SIM
43-01) for each paper.
Section
: Fusing
Item
: Operation
–5
45
0
50
+5
55
+25
75
+49
99
TH_UM
TH_LM
TH_US
HL_UM
HL_LM
HL_US
–25
25
Operation/Procedure
1)
When the machine enters SIM 43-21, the following screen is
displayed. (The current set value is displayed.)
2)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 47
Content of item
Correction value for
TH_UM set value in
READY standby under
HH environment
Correction value for
TH_LM set value in
READY standby under
HH environment
Correction value for
TH_US set value in
READY standby under
HH environment
Correction value for BW
plain paper TH_UM set
value under HH
environment
Correction value for BW
plain paper TH_LM set
value under HH
environment
Correction value for BW
plain paper TH_US set
value under HH
environment
Correction value for
COLOR plain paper
TH_UM set value under
HH environment
Correction value for
COLOR plain paper
TH_LM set value under
HH environment
Correction value for
COLOR plain paper
TH_US set value under
HH environment
Correction value for
fusing motor front rotation
start TH_UM set value
under HH environment
Correction value for
fusing motor front rotation
end TH_UM set value
under HH environment
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
45
1 to 99
45
1 to 99
45
1 to 99
45
1 to 99
45
1 to 99
45
1 to 99
45
1 to 99
45
1 to 99
45
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
Item
L
Item display
Content of item
WARMUP END
TIME HH
M
HL_UM HEAVY
HH
N
HL_LM HEAVY
HH
O
HL_US HEAVY
HH
P
HL_UM OHP HH
Q
HL_LM OHP HH
R
HL_US OHP HH
S
HL_UM
ENVELOPE HH
T
HL_LM
ENVELOPE HH
U
HL_US
ENVELOPE HH
V
E-STAR HH
W
HL_US E-STAR
HH
X
PRE-JOB HH
Correction value for
WARMUP end time under
HH environment
Correction value for
heavy paper TH_UM set
value under HH
environment
Correction value for
heavy paper TH_LM set
value under HH
environment
Correction value for
heavy paper TH_US set
value under HH
environment
Correction value for OHP
TH_UM set value under
HH environment
Correction value for OHP
TH_LM set value under
HH environment
Correction value for OHP
TH_US set value under
HH environment
Correction value for
ENVELOPE TH_UM set
value under HH
environment
Correction value for
ENVELOPE TH_LM set
value under HH
environment
Correction value for
ENVELOPE TH_US set
value under HH
environment
Correction value for
preheating TH_UM set
value under HH
environment
Correction value for
preheating TH_US set
value under HH
environment
Correction value for
TH_UM set value when
resetting from preheating
under HH environment
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default
value
50
50
50
50
43-22
Purpose
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to perform L/L (low temperature, low
humidity) correction for the fusing temperature setting 1 (SIM 43-04) for each paper.
Section
: Fusing
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
When the machine enters Simulation 43-22, the following
screen is displayed. (The current set value is displayed.)
2)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↑] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
1 to 99
50
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
1 to 99
50
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
4)
When [OK] button is pressed, the currently entered data are
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
1 to 99
50
* When [↑], [↑], [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current
set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
* Input value: The intercept for the correction value is 50. This is
because the set value is kept as a positive number in case of a
negative setting due to negative correction.
• Set value: Value to be set (–49 to +49)
50
Input value: Actual input value (1 to 99)
Set value
Input value
–49
1
1 to 99
50
Item
Display item
A
HL_UM PLAIN
BW DUP LL
B
HL_LM PLAIN
BW DUP LL
C
HL_US PLAIN
BW DUP LL
D
PLAIN BW DUP
APP CNT LL
E
HL_UM PLAIN
CL DUP LL
F
HL_LM PLAIN CL
DUP LL
G
HL_US PLAIN CL
DUP LL
The other correction values → 1°C change by 1 count
Fusing upper thermister main
Fusing lower thermister main
Fusing upper thermister sub
Heater lamp upper main
Heater lamp lower main
Heater lamp upper sub
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.43-21
FUSER TEMP ADJUSTMENT (HH)
A:
45
[ 1 㨪 99]
A : 45
㧧 HL_UM READY HH
B 45
㧧 HL_LM READY HH
C 45
㧧 HL_US READY HH
D 45
㧧 HL_UM PLAIN BW HH
–5
45
0
50
+5
55
+25
75
+49
99
* WARMUP END TIME HH → 1s change by 1 count
TH_UM
TH_LM
TH_US
HL_UM
HL_LM
HL_US
–25
25
OK
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 48
Item content
Correction value for upper
TH_UM BW plain paper
duplex under LL
environment
Correction value for lower
TH_LM BW plain paper
duplex under LL
environment
Correction value for upper
TH_US BW plain paper
duplex under LL
environment
Correction value for BW
plain paper duplex
applicable number of
sheets under LL
environment
Correction value for upper
TH_UM COLOR plain
paper duplex under LL
environment
Correction value for upper
TH_LM COLOR plain
paper duplex under LL
environment
Correction value for upper
TH_US COLOR plain
paper duplex under LL
environment
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
60
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
60
Item
Display item
H
Item content
PLAIN CL DUP
APP CNT LL
Correction value for
COLOR plain paper
duplex applicable number
of sheets under LL
environment
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
50
* PLAIN BW DUPCNT LL, PLAIN CL DUPCNT LL, HEAVY BW
DUP APCNT LL, HEAVY CL DUP APCNT LL → 1s change by 1
count
The other correction values → 1°C change by 1 count
Item
A
HL_UM PLAIN BW
DUP HH
B
HL_LM PLAIN BW
DUP HH
C
HL_US PLAIN BW
DUP HH
D
PLAIN BW DUP
APP CNT HH
E
HL_UM PLAIN CL
DUP HH
F
HL_LM PLAIN CL
DUP HH
G
HL_US PLAIN CL
DUP HH
H
PLAIN CL DUP APP
CNT HH
TH_UM
TH_LM
TH_US
HL_UM
HL_LM
HL_US
Fusing upper thermister main
Fusing lower thermister main
Fusing upper thermister sub
Heater lamp upper main
Heater lamp lower main
Heater lamp upper sub
Display item
0
CLOSE
TEST
FUSSIMULATION NO.43-22
A:
60
㨇 1 㨪
99㨉
A : 60
㧧 HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP
B : 60
㧧 HL_LM PLAIN BW DUP
C : 60
㧧 HL_US PLAIN BW DUP
D : 50
㧧 PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL
OK
43-23
Purpose
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to perform H/H (high temperature,
high humidity) correction for the fusing temperature setting 1 (SIM 43-04) for each
paper.
Section
: Fusing
Item
Item content
Correction value for
TH_UM BW plain paper
duplex under HH
environment
Correction value for
TH_LM BW plain paper
duplex under HH
environment
Correction value for
TH_US BW plain paper
duplex under HH
environment
Correction value for
BW plain paper duplex
applicable number of
sheets under HH
environment
Correction value for
TH_UM COLOR plain
paper duplex under HH
environment
Correction value for
TH_LM COLOR plain
paper duplex under HH
environment
Correction value for
TH_US COLOR plain
paper duplex under HH
environment
Correction value for
COLOR plain paper
duplex applicable
number of sheets under
HH environment
: Operation
1)
When the machine enters Simulation 43-23, the following
screen is displayed. (The current set value is displayed.)
2)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
TH_UM
TH_LM
TH_US
HL_UM
HL_LM
HL_US
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
45
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
45
1 to 99
50
FUSER
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.43-23
TEMP ADJUSTMENT
45
㨇 1 㨪 99㨉
(HH:DUP)
A : 45
HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP HH
B : 50
HL_LM PLAIN BW DUP HH
C : 45
HL_US
D : 50
PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT HH
PLAIN BW DUP HH
OK
* Input value: The intercept for the correction value is 50. This is
because the set value is kept as a positive number in case of a
negative setting due to negative correction.
• Set value: Value to be set (–49 to +49)
Input value: Actual input value (1 to 99)
–5
45
45
0
TEST
When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the currently entered data are saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
–25
25
1 to 99
Fusing upper thermister main
Fusing lower thermister main
Fusing upper thermister sub
Heater lamp upper main
Heater lamp lower main
Heater lamp upper sub
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
–49
1
50
The other correction values → 1°C change by 1 count
Enter the set value with 10-key.
Set value
Input value
1 to 99
* PLAIN BW DUPCNT HH, PLAIN CL DUPCNT HH, HEABY BW
DUP APCNT HH, HEABY CL DUP APCNT HH → 1s change by
1 count
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
4)
Default
value
45
Operation/Procedure
3)
Set
range
1 to 99
0
50
+5
55
+25
75
+49
99
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 49
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the entered value is set.
43-24
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
Purpose
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to enter the correction values for SIM
43-1 and SIM 43-4 temperature corrections.
Section
: Fusing
* Input value: The intercept for the correction value is 50. This is
because the set value is kept as a positive number in case of a
negative setting due to negative correction.
Item
: Operation
• Set value: Value to be set (–49 to +49)
Input value: Actual input value (1 to 99)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and displayed on the set setting area.
Set value
Input value
–49
1
–25
25
–5
45
0
50
+5
55
+25
75
+49
99
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Item
Display items
A
NN_120_ WUP_HL_UM & HL_US
B
C
NN_120_WUP_HL_LM
LL_120_WUP_HL_UM & HL_US
D
E
LL_120_WUP_HL_LM
HH_120_WUP_HL_UM & HL_US
F
G
H
HH_120_WUP_HL_LM
ON_120_WUP_HL_UM
ON 120 WUP HL_US
I
NN_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_UM & HL_US
J
K
NN_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_LM
LL_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_UM & HL_US
L
M
LL_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_LM
HH_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_UM & HL_US
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
HH_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_LM
NN_120_ FUS_DUP_CNT
LL_120_ FUS_DUP_CNT
HH_120_ FUS_DUP_CNT
COOL_DOWN_HEAVY
COOL_DOWN_OHP
COOL_DOWN_DEVELOP
WUP DUP TIME
Item descriptions
WARMUP end temperature
correction value
120°C or below when turning
on the power under NN
environment
Common to items
HL_UM, HL_US
Item HL_LM
Common to items
HL_UM, HL_US
Item HL_LM
Common to items
HL_UM, HL_US
Item HL_LM
Item HL_UM
Item HL_US
120°C or below when turning
on the power under LL
environment
120°C or below when turning
on the power under HH
environment
Temperature correction value
immediately after completion of
warm-up and during continuation
of temperature correction
Fusing temperature correction
value
Fusing duplex paper exit count
Cool-down time
Temperature correction
continuation time immediately
after completion of warm-up
120°C or below when turning
on the power
120°C or below when turning
on the power under NN
environment
Common to items
HL_UM, HL_US
Item HL_LM
120°C or below when turning Common to items
HL_UM, HL_US
on the power under LL
environment
Item HL_LM
120°C or below when turning Common to items
HL_UM, HL_US
on the power under HH
environment
Item HL_LM
Under NN environment
Under LL environment
Under HH environment
Heavy paper
OHP
Envelope
-
* On adjustment values
Each temperature correction value → Temperature 1°C change
by 1 count
Each paper exit count → 1 sheet by 1 count
㨇
TH_UM
TH_LM
TH_US
HL_UM
HL_LM
HL_US
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
50
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
50
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
40
55
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
60
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
50
1 to 99
1 to 60
1 to 60
1 to 60
1 to 60
1 to 60
1 to 60
0 to 255
50
5
10
5
15
30
40
90
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.43-24
TEMP
A:
Default
value
50
0
TEST
FUSER
Each cool-down time → 1s change by 1 count
Set
range
1 to 99
RESET
50
1㨪
99 㨉
Fusing upper thermister MAIN center
Fusing lower thermister MAIN
Fusing upper thermister SUB edge
Heater lamp upper MAIN
Heater lamp lower MAIN
Heater lamp upper SUB
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 50
A : 50
NN_120_WUP_HL_UM&HL_US
B : 50
NN_120_WUP_HL_LM
C : 50
LL_120_WUP_HL_UM㧒HL_US
D : 50
LL_120_WUP_HL_LM
OK
Display
44
AR_AUTO
44-1
Purpose
AR_ERROR
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set whether the correction functions of the image forming (process) section are enabled or not.
Section
: —
Item
: —
SENSITIVITY
PRT_HT
Operation/Procedure
1)
DM_PHASE
When the machine enters Simulation 44-01, the currently set
button is highlighted.
Set the item to be set to the normal display.
HT
TC
MD VG
MD LD
MD EV
MD DL
MD DL EV
TN_HUM
TN_AREA
TN_LIFE
TN_COV
TN_PROCO
N
TN_ENV
TN_DRIP
TN_SPEND
PHT
Normal (Inhibit:
1: NO)
Highlighted
(Allow: 0: YES)
Set range
Normal operation highdensity process control YES/
NO setting
Normal operation half-tone
process control YES/NO
setting
Transfer output correction
YES/NO setting *1
Membrane decrease grid
voltage correction YES/NO
setting
Membrane decrease laser
power voltage correction
YES/NO setting
Membrane decrease
environment grid voltage
correction YES/NO setting
Membrane decrease
discharge light quantity
correction YES/NO setting
Membrane decrease
environment discharge light
quantity correction YES/NO
setting
Toner density humidity
correction YES/NO setting
Toner density area correction
YES/NO setting
Toner density life correction
YES/NO setting
Toner density print rate
correction YES/NO setting
Toner density process control
correction YES/NO setting
Toner density environment
correction YES/NO setting
Toner density correction,
unconditional supply YES/
NO setting
Toner compulsory
consumption mode YES/NO
setting
1Pixel half-tone process
control correction YES/NO
setting
Normal
(Inhibit: 1: NO)
Highlighted
(Allow: 0: YES)
Allow
Allow
Inhibit
Allow
CLOSE
MODE SETTING
HV
MD
LD
TN_HUM
TN_PROCON
Content
Default
value
Allow
0
HV
Auto resist adjustment YES/
NO setting
Error check YES/NO setting
during auto resist adjustment
Drum phase alignment YES/
NO setting
Toner density correction
YES/NO setting
Half tone process control
printer correction feedback
Enable/Disable setting
SIMULATION NO.44-01
TEST
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the current set value is
saved to EEPROM and RAM. After completion of setting,
[EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
Display
Set range
*1: The transfer efficiency fluctuation is corrected with temperature
and humidity (absolute moisture). YES/NO setting. Transfer
high output voltage correction.
(Two or more items can be selected.) When an item is
selected, its button is highlighted. When the highlighted button
is pressed again, it returns to the normal display.
2)
Content
HT
MD
TC
EV
MD
MD
DL
MD
VG
DL
EV
TN_AREA
TN_LIFE
TN_COV
TN_ENV
TN_DRIP
TN_SPEND
Default
value
Allow
EXECUTE
1/2
44-2
Allow
Allow
Allow
Inhibit
Allow
Allow
Inhibit
Purpose
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to perform the light quantity adjustment of the process control sensor and the
registration sensor (two for resist are
adjusted simultaneously) and the surface
scan.
Section
: Process
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and all
the drum motors are driven to start the adjustments of the process control sensor and the registration sensor.
* After completion of the adjustments of the process control
sensor and the registration sensor, the drum motors are
stopped and the set contents are displayed. The necessary
data are saved to EEPROM.
[EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
Allow
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed during adjustment of
the process control sensor and the registration sensor, the
monitor is terminated and the drum motor is stopped. [ECECUTE] button returns to the original state.
Allow
Data saving is not performed, but the result at that time is
displayed.
Allow
Allow
Allow
Allow
Allow
Allow
Inhibit
* When an error occurs in the adjustment, "ERROR" is displayed in the value display section at the right of the error
item, and the drum motor is stopped. Data saving to
EEPROM is not performed at all and the operation is terminated. [EXECUTE] button returns to the original state.
* When there is a page over [↑], the display becomes active
and shifts up to another page. When there is no page over
[↑], the display grays out and the operation is disabled.
* When there is a page under [↓], the display becomes active
and shifts down to another page. When there is nor page
under [↓], the display grays out and the operation is disabled.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 51
1)
Adjust so that the LED light emitting quantity of BK/CL is the
target value ± 2.
* Target value
BK: Item B of SIM 44-04
CL: Item A of SIM 44-13
2)
After completion of the adjustment, check the belt surface condition with the BK sensor.
Classification
PROCON
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
AA
AB
REGIST
REGIST
Display item
PCS_CL LED ADJ
PCS_K LED ADJ
PCS_CL DARK
PCS_K DARK
PCS_K GRND
PCS_K BELT MAX
PCS_K BELT MIN
PCS_K BELT DIF
REG_F LED ADJ
REG_R LED ADJ
REG_F DARK
REG_R DARK
REG_F GRND
REG_R GRND
REG_F BELT MAX
REG_F BELT MIN
REG_F BELT DIF
REG_R BELT MAX
REG_R BELT MIN
REG_R BELT DIF
REG_F PATCH (K)
REG_F PATCH (C)
REG_F PATCH (M)
REG_F PATCH (Y)
REG_R PATCH (K)
REG_R PATCH (C)
REG_R PATCH (M)
REG_R PATCH (Y)
Content
Color sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value
Black sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value
Color dark voltage
Black dark voltage
Belt surface when item B adjustment is completed.
Belt surface input max. value
Belt surface input min. value
Belt surface input difference (Item E – Item F)
Registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value F
Registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value R
Registration sensor dark voltage F
Registration sensor dark voltage R
Belt surface when completion of Item I adjustment
Belt surface when completion of Item J adjustment
Belt surface input max. value (Front side)
Belt surface input min. value (Front side)
Belt surface input difference (Item O – Item P)
Belt surface input max. value (Rear side)
Belt surface input min. value (Rear side)
Belt surface input difference (Item R – Item S)
Patch light receiving potential F (K)
Patch light receiving potential F (C)
Patch light receiving potential F (M)
Patch light receiving potential F (Y)
Patch light receiving potential R (K)
Patch light receiving potential R (C)
Patch light receiving potential R (M)
Patch light receiving potential R (Y)
Default value
21
21
0
0
0
0
0
0
56
56
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Save
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
44-4
Error name
Black sensor
adjustment error
Color sensor
adjustment error
Surface read error
Registration sensor F
adjustment error
Registration sensor R
adjustment error
Registration surface F
read error
Registration surface R
read error
Error content
→ PCS_K LED ADJ error, retry in 3 times, target
not reached
→ PCS_CL LED ADJ error, retry in 3 times,
target not reached
→ PCS_K GRND error, belt 1 lap, outside the
range of effective difference between upper and
lower values
→ REG_F LED ADJ error, retry in 3 times, target
not reached
→ REG_R LED ADJ error, retry in 3 times, target
not reached
→ REG_F GRND error, belt 1 lap, outside the
range of effective difference between upper and
lower values
→ REG_R GRND error, belt 1 lap, outside the
range of effective difference between upper and
lower values
Purpose
Section
: Process
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: Unless a special change is required, set the set values to
the default values.
1)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-02
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to perform the correction operation of
the image forming section and to set the
process control sensor adjustment conditions.
0
TEST
Set range
1 to 255
1 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
1 to 255
1 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 256
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
PROCON GAIN ADJUSTMENT
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
PCS_CL LED ADJ :
21
PCS_K GRND
:
0
PCS_K LED ADJ
:
21
PCS_K BELT MAX :
0
PCS_CL DARK
:
0
PCS_K BELT MIN :
0
PCS_K DARK
:
0
PCS_K BELT DIF :
0
EXECUTE
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
1/4
When setting is completed, [OK] button returns to the normal
display.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 52
3)
When [OK] button is pressed, the current set value is saved to
EEPROM and RAM.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed and the execution result is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
* When [↑], [↓], [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
In case of an error, "ERROR" is displayed and the details of
the error are displayed below.
Item
Display content
A
PCS_CL TARGET
B
PCS_K TARGET
C
LED_CL OUTPUT
D
LED_K OUTPUT
E
PCS ADJSTMENT
LIMIT
BELT GROUND
DIF
F
G
BIAS_CL
STANDARD DIF
H
BIAS_BK
STANDARD DIF
I
BIAS PATCH
INTERVAL
Y_PAT TARGET
ID
M_PAT TARGET
ID
C_PAT TARGET
ID
K_PAT TARGET
ID
HV BK_GROUND
LIMIT
J
K
L
M
N
Color sensor target set
value
Black sensor target set
value
Color sensor light
emitting quantity set
value
Black sensor light
emitting quantity set
value
Sensor adjustment
target limit value
Belt 1 lap, effective
difference between
upper and lower values
Bias (for color)
reference calculating
difference
Bias (for black)
reference calculating
difference
Patch bias output
interval
Patch density standard
value (YELLOW)
Patch density standard
value (MAGENTA)
Patch density standard
value (CYAN)
Patch density standard
value (BLACK)
Patch position surface
light receiving effective
range
Set
range
1 to 255
Default
value
108
* When the high-density process control is interrupted by an
external factor (pressing [EXECUTE] button), the forcible
interruption screen is displayed and the drum motors are
stopped. [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
1 to 255
155
* The result of the high-density process control is displayed
with the following simulations:
1 to 255
21
SIM.44-09 (Process control result display (High density correction))
1 to 255
21
SIM.44-12 (Process control result display (Half tone correction))
1 to 255
2
1 to 255
255
0 to 255
0
0 to 255
0
1 to 255
60
1 to 255
123
1 to 255
140
1 to 255
132
1 to 255
5
1 to 255
29
Result display
COMPLETE
ERROR
INTERRUPTION
Content description
Normal completion
Abnormal completion
Forcible interruption
Detailed error display
CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR
BK_ SEN _ADJ_ERR
K_HV_ERR
C_ HV_ERR
M_ HV_ERR
Y_ HV _ERR
TIMEOUT_ERR
Content description
Color sensor adjustment error (*)
Black sensor adjustment error (*)
K high density process control error
C high density process control error
M high density process control error
Y high density process control error
Timeout
* (*) Same as the error in SIM 44-02.
0
TEST
PROCON
SIMULATION NO.44̆06
COMPULSORY
PRESS[EXECUTE]
TO
EXECUTION
START
0
PROCON
A:
㨇
INITIAL
DENSITY
108
1㨪 255 㨉
SETUP
A : 108
㧧 PCS_C
TARGET
B : 155
㧧 PCS_K
TARGET
C : 21
㧧 LED_C
OUTPUT
D : 21
㧧 LED_K
OUTPUT
44-9
Purpose
OK
44-6
Purpose
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-04
TEST
CLOSE
: Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) : Used to forcibly execute the correction in
the image process section (high-density
process correction) (process correction).
Section
: Process
Item
: Operation
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
Check (Display/Print)
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the data related to the result
of the image forming section correction
(high density process correction). (Corrected main charger grid voltage in each
print mode, developing bias voltage, etc.)
(This simulation is used to check whether
the correction is normally executed or not.)
Section
: Process
Item
: Data (Machine condition)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Operation/Procedure
Change the page with [↑] [↓] buttons.
1)
When the machine enters SIM 44-06, the screen shown on the
right is displayed.
* If there is a page over [↑], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
2)
When [EXCECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and all
the drum motors are driven to rotate. The high-density process
control is started.
If there is a page under [↓], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
display grays out and the operation becomes invalid.
3)
While the high-density process control is executed, "NOW
EXECUTING..." is displayed.
4)
After completion of the high-density process control, the drum
motors are stopped and [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
2)
Select a mode with the following buttons:
[CPY/PRN] button: Display of each process control mode in
the copier/printer.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 53
[OTHER] button: Display of environment area, membrane
decrease correction steps and process control execution
counter, and model type.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy
basic screen of simulation.
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.
Mode
CPY/PRN
OTHER
Page number
1/2
Display item (*: correction value)
P (PROCON)
Left
N (M)
(NORMAL
(MIDDLE))
Right
2/2
N (L) (NORMAL
(LOW))
1/10
TN/TC
Left
Right
BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
CYAN : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
MAGENTA : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
YELLOW : GB ***/*** DV ***/***
TN HUD AREA
TN HUD DATA
TC TMP AREA
TC TMP DATA
TC HUD AREA
TC HUD DATA
MD HUD AREA
MD HUD DATA
2/10
DRUM
3/10
VG
4/10
LD
5/10
HV
6/10
CP
7/10
DL
8/10
DL EV
Left
MD K STEP
MD C STEP
MD M STEP
MD Y STEP
MD K DRUM COUNTER
MD C DRUM COUNTER
MD M DRUM COUNTER
MD Y DRUM COUNTER
MD K REVISE(VG) : L *** M *** H***
MD C REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
MD M REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
MD K REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** H***
MD C REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
MD M REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
MD K REVISE(HV) : L *** M *** H***
MD C REVISE(HV) : L *** M ***
MD M REVISE(HV) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(HV) : L *** M ***
MD K REVISE(CP) : L *** M *** H***
MD C REVISE(CP) : L *** M ***
MD M REVISE(CP) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(CP) : L *** M ***
MD K REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
MD C REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
MD M REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
MD K REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M***
MD C REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M***
MD M REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M***
High density process control GB/DV
data (KCMY)
GB: 230 to 850
DV: 0 to 700
Default
value
GB: 630
DV: 430
High density normal (middle speed
display) GB/DV data (KCMY)
GB: 230 to 850
DV: 0 to 700
GB: 630
DV: 430
High density normal (low speed
display) GB/DV data (KCMY)
GB: 230 to 850
DV: 0 to 700
GB: 600
DV: 400
1 to 14
0 to 1023
9
0
1 to 9
0 to 1023
1 to 9
0 to 1023
1 to 14
4
0
4
0
9
0 to 1023
0
0 to 4
0
Membrane decrease drum traveling
distance area
0 to 20
0
Drum membrane decrease grid voltage
correction display (KCMY)
0 to 255
0
Drum membrane decrease laser power
voltage correction (KCMY)
0 to 255
0
High density membrane decrease
environment GB correction display
(KCMY)
0 to 255
0
Drum membrane decrease
environment grid voltage correction
display (KCMY)
0 to 255
0
Drum membrane decrease discharge
light quantity correction (%)
0 to 100
50
Drum membrane decrease
environment discharge light quantity
correction (%)
–100 to 100
0
Content description
Toner control display humidity area
Toner control display humidity AD
value
Transfer display temperature area
Transfer display temperature AD value
Transfer display humidity area
Transfer display humidity AD value
Membrane decrease display humidity
area
membrane decrease display humidity
AD value
Drum membrane decrease correction
step display (KCMY)
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 54
Display range
Mode
Page number
OTHER
9/10
CRUM
Display item (*: correction value)
Left
Right
10/10
CNT
Left
DESTINATION
Machine side control CRUM
destination
MODEL TYPE
CRUM DEST_K
CRUM DEST_C
CRUM DEST_M
CRUM DEST_Y
PROCON COUNT HV
Machine model type
CRUM destination
PROCON COUNT HT
Display code No.
01
02
03
04
05
Content description
Destination
A
B EX Japan
C
B Japan
E
Control specification
AR control
AR control
AR control
AR control
AR control
Item
Display item
TARGET
(Page 1)
CARB DATA
SEAL ADJ
DATA
ADK_SL (K)
ADK_INT (K)
CLOSE
PROCON DATA DISP (PROCON/NORMAL(M))
BLACK
: GB_ 230/630 DV_ 0/430
BLACK
: GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/400
CYAN
: GB_ 230/630 DV_ 0/430
CYAN
: GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/400
MAGENTA : GB_ 230/630 DV_ 0/430
MAGENTA : GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/400
YELLOW
YELLOW
: GB_ 230/630 DV_ 0/430
ID(K)
ID(CMY)
: GB_ 230/600 DV_ 0/400
1/2
OTHER
44-12
Purpose
PATCH
(Page 1
to 5)
Section
: Process
Item
: Data (Machine condition)
N-1
N-2
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
Check (Display/Print)
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the sampling toner image
patch density data in the image forming
section correction (high density process
correction). (This simulation is used to
check whether the correction is normally
executed or not.)
N-3
0
CRUM
information
0 to 99999999
0
0 to 99999999
0
Content
description
Calibration plate
sensor value
Jig patch seal
sensor value
Developing
characteristics
gradient coefficient
Developing
characteristics
intercept
coefficient
Sensor target
value
Color sensor
target set value
Patch data nth
front patch
(n = 1 to 10)
Patch data nth
center patch
(n = 1 to 10)
Patch data nth rear
patch
(n = 1 to 10)
Display
range
1 to 255
Default
value
108
1 to 255
108
–9.99 to 9.99
0
–999.9 to
999.9
0
0.00 to
255.00
0.00 to
255.00
0 to 255
0.00
0.00
0 to 255
0
0 to 255
0
0
* PATCH item: If the patch is converged to the target range in less
than 10 times of patch acquisition, "0" is displayed in the other
display items.
* When [PATCH] button is pressed, the following page is displayed.
Operation/Procedure
• n = 1 to 2 Page 1
1)
Change the page with [↑] [↓] buttons.
• n = 3 to 4 Page 2
* If there is a page over [↑], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
• n = 5 to 6 Page 3
If there is a page under [↓], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
display grays out and the operation becomes invalid.
2)
Default
value
CRUM
information
SIMULATION NO.44-09
CPY/PRN
Refer to
.
0 to 1
Refer to
.
Number of execution of high density
process control
Number of execution of half tone
process control
0
TEST
Display range
Change the display with the following buttons:
[TARGET] button: Display of each color target
[PATCH] button: Display of patch sampling data
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy
basic screen of simulation.
• n = 7 to 8 Page 4
• n = 9 to 10 Page 5
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-12
PATCH/TARGET DATA DISPLAY
: 108
TARGET(K) : 0.00
SEAL ADJ DATA : 108
TARGET(C) : 0.00
ADK SL(K)
: 0.00
TARGET(M) : 0.00
ADK INT(K)
: 0.0
TARGET(Y) : 0.00
CARB DATA
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 55
TARGET
PATCH
1/1
44-13
Purpose
Display item
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Color image density sensor adjustment
(Adjustment by the jig)
Section
: Process
Item
: Operation
TH_UM
TH_UM_AD1
Operation/Procedure
1)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted, and the
color sensor adjustment is started by using the patch seal.
* After completion of the color sensor adjustment, [EXECUTE]
button returns to the normal display, and the set content is
displayed. At that time, the necessary data are saved to
EEPROM and RAM.
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed during the sensor
adjustment, the sensor adjustment is interrupted and [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
* In case of an adjustment error, "ERROR" is displayed in the
value display section at the right of the error item. No data
are saved to EEPROM, and the operation is terminated.
[EXECUTE] button returns to the original state.
1)
TH_UM_AD2
TH_LM
TH_US
TEMPRATURE
The target value of CL is set and the LED emitting level is
adjusted, and the operation is terminated.
Item
Display item
Description
A
PCS_CL
CARB OUT
PCS_CL
DARK
PCS_CL LED
ADJ
Calibration plate
sensor value
Color dark voltage
B
C
Color sensor light
emitting quantity
adjustment value
HUMIDITY
Set
range
1 to 255
Default
value
108
0 to 255
0
NO
1 to 255
21
YES
Writing
YES
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44̆13
TH1_LSU
Description
Display range
Fusing upper
thermister main A/D
value (Temperature
°C/AD value)
Fusing upper
thermistor main
compensation
sensor temperature
(°C)
AD value (AD value)
Fusing upper
thermistor main
sensor AD value
(AD value)
Fusing lower
thermister main A/D
value (Temperature
°C/AD value)
Fusing upper
thermister sub A/D
value (Temperature
°C/AD value)
Temperature
thermister
(Temperature/AD
value)
Humidity sensor
(Humidity/AD value)
Thermister 1 A/D
value (Temperature
°C/AD value)
Temperature:
0 to 255 °C (±1°C)
AD value: 0 to 1023
Default
value
Sensor
value
Temperature:
0.0 to 255.0 °C
(±0.2°C)
AD value: 0 to 1023
Sensor
value
AD value: 0 to 1023
Sensor
value
Temperature:
0 to 255 °C (±1°C)
AD value: 0 to 1023
Sensor
value
Temperature:
0 to 255 °C (±1°C)
AD value: 0 to 1023
Sensor
value
Temperature: –40.0 to
60.0°C (±0.1°C)
AD value: 0 to 1023
Sensor
value
Humidity:
5.0 to 90.0% (±0.1%)
AD value: 0 to 1023
Humidity:
5.0 to 60.0 °C
(±0.1°C)
AD value: 0 to 255
Sensor
value
Sensor
value
* The above display range is converted into hexadecimal number
to display the AD value.
* When the door open, the power of the sensor would be down, so
that the sensor display is treated as outside the range.
* "°C" is displayed as "deg" on the panel because of the display
fonts.
PATCH SEAL ADJUSTMENT
PCS CL CARB OUT:
0
108
:
0
PCS CL LED ADJ :
21
PCS CL DARK
TEST
SENSOR DATA DISPLAY MONITOR
EXECUTE
1/1
44-14
Purpose
TH_UM
:
255deg / XXX
255.0deg / XXX
TH_UM_AD1
:
TH_UM_AD2
:
XXX
TH_LM
:
255deg / XXX
TH_US
:
255deg / XXX
1/2
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
Check (Display/Print)
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the output level of the fusing
temperature sensor, the machine temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor.
Section
: Process
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-14
The machine enters this simulation, the current data are displayed.
* If there is a page over [↑], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
If there is a page under [↓], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
display grays out and the operation becomes invalid.
* Data are revised every 5sec.
* For the temperature and humidity only, data outside the range
are displayed as "-".
44-16
Purpose
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
Check (Display/Print)
Function (Purpose) : Used to check data related to the toner
density correction result. (This simulation
allows to check that the correction is normally performed or not.)
Section
: Process (Developing)
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
When the machine enters Simulation 44-16, the screen on the
right is displayed.
Specify the color with [K][C][M][Y] buttons. (In this example, [K]
is selected.) The data of the selected color are displayed.
* Only one color button can be selected. When a color button
is selected, it is highlighted. (Black ([K]) is selected in the initial state.)
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 56
2)
* Change the page with [↓] or [↑] key.
* If there is a page over [↑], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
* Common to KCMY
Display item
If there is a page under [↓], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
display grays out and the operation becomes invalid.
TONER
DEN_LT(M)
When [NEXT] button is pressed, data of another category are
displayed.
TONER
DEN_ST(M)
* When [NEXT] button is pressed on the last category data
display, the data of the first category are displayed.
* When [NEXT] button is pressed, the data of the next category are displayed regardless of the display page.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the
copy basic screen of simulation.
TONER
DEN_LT(L)
TONER
DEN_ST(L)
Item content
Current toner density sensor
output value (final value) at
middle speed
Current toner density reference
value (including all the correction
values) at middle speed
Current toner density sensor
output value (final value) at low
speed
Current toner density reference
value (including all the correction
values) at low speed
Set
range
1 to 255
Default
value
129
128
129
128
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/
[BLACK] key.
* Common to KCMY
Display item
AUTO DEVE (M)
ALL(M)
AUTO DEVE (L)
ALL(L)
AREA
HUD
PRINT RATE
PROCON
LIFE
SENSITIVITY
Item content
Content description
Automatic developer adjustment value (at
middle speed)
All correction reference value (at middle
speed)
Automatic developer adjustment value (at
low speed)
All correction reference value (at low
speed)
Area correction value
Humidity correction value
Print rate correction value
Process control correction value
Life correction value
Sensitivity correction value
Sensor output value after execution of SIM 25-02 (at middle speed)
Set
range
1 to 255
Default
value
128
–127 to
127
0
1 to 999
500
Set
range
1 to 255
Default
value
128
–127 to
127
0
1 to 999
–127 to
127
500
0
Correction reference value (at middle speed) used to calculate all the
correction values for auto developer adjustment value
Sensor output value after execution of SIM 25-02 (at low speed)
Correction reference value (at low speed) used to calculate all the
correction values for auto developer adjustment value
Correction value for environment area
Correction value for humidity change
Correction value for document print rate
Correction value for high density process control result
Correction value for developer life
Correction for toner density sensor sensitivity
* Common to KCMY
Display item
AUTO DEVE VO(M)
ALL VO(M)
AUTO DEVE VO(L)
ALL VO(L)
AREA VO
HUD VO
PRINT RATE VO
PROCON VO
LIFE VO
SENSITIVITY VO
ENV VO
Item content
Content description
Automatic developer adjustment control
voltage (at middle speed)
All correction reference control voltage (at
middle speed)
Automatic developer adjustment control
voltage (at low speed)
All correction reference control voltage (at
low speed)
Area correction control voltage
Humidity correction control voltage
Print rate correction control voltage
Process control correction control voltage
Life correction control voltage
Sensitivity correction control voltage
Environment correction control voltage
Sensor control voltage value (at middle speed) after executing SIM
25-02
Control voltage reference value (at middle speed) used to calculate all
the correction values for auto developer adjustment value
Sensor control voltage value (at low speed) after executing SIM 25-02
Control voltage reference value (at low speed) used to calculate all
the correction values for auto developer adjustment value
Control voltage correction value for environment area
Control voltage correction value for humidity change
Control voltage correction value for document print rate
Control voltage correction value for high density process control result
Control voltage correction value for developer life
Control voltage correction value for toner density sensor sensitivity
Control voltage correction value under high temperature environment
* When the correction for the developer counter (life) or the humidity correction is inhibited (OFF) in SIM 44-01, the correction level is displayed as "0."
* Common to KCMY
Display item
AUTO DEVE AREA
AREA
Item content
Auto developer adjustment area
Current area
Content description
Auto developer adjustment humidity area display
Current humidity area display
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 57
Set
range
1 to 14
Default
value
8
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-16
TEST
TONER
CONTROL DATA DISPLAY
:
128
44-22
Purpose
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
Check (Display/Print)
TONER DEN_LT(M)
TONER DEN_ST(M)
:
128
TONER DEN_LT(L)
:
128
:
128
TONER DEN_ST(L)
K
C
M
NEXT
Y
1/1
44-21
Purpose
: Setting
: Process
Item
: Operation
Section
: Process
Item
: Data (Machine condition)
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) : Used to register the half tone process control reference value (half tone correction).
Section
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the toner patch image density level of each color in half tone image
forming section correction (process correction). (This simulation is used to check that
the correction is normally executed or not.)
1)
Change the page with [↑] [↓] buttons.
* If there is a page over [↑], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
If there is a page under [↓], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
display grays out and the operation becomes invalid.
Operation/Procedure
1)
When the machine enters Simulation 44-21, the screen shown
on the right is displayed.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the process control reference value is registered. (When [ECXECUTE] button is
pressed during execution, the operation is interrupted.)
2)
The display automatically shifts to the first step completion
screen or the sensor adjustment error screen.
When the display shifts to the first step completion screen, the
second step is automatically started.
When the display shifts to the sensor adjustment error screen,
press [EXECUTE] button to resume the operation.
2)
[1ST STEP] button: [1ST STEP] patch sampling data display
[2ND STEP] button: [2ND STEP] patch sampling data display
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy
basic screen of simulation.
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.
Button item
1ST STEP
2ND STEP
* When the process control is executed second time, "2nd" is
displayed.
3)
Select desired patch sampling data with the following buttons:
Content description
1ST patch data display (n = 1 to 5)
2ND patch data display (n = 1 to 16)
When the second step is completed, the following message is
displayed. (The message is automatically proceeds.)
0
BLACK: 2ND STEP BLACK END
TEST
CYAN: 2ND STEP CYAN END
HALF
MAGENTA: 2ND STEP MAGENTA END
The display shifts to the normal completion screen or the error
screen automatically.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44̆22
TONE CORRECT
PTK/BASE
YELLOW: 2ND STEP YELLOW END
4)
Display item
ID_n
ID_n
RESULT
PTC
PTM
PTC PTM
PTY
ID 1 :
255/255
255
255
PTY
255
ID 4 :
PTK/BASE
255/255
255
255
255
ID 2 :
255/255
255
255
255
ID 5 :
255/255
255
255
255
ID 3 :
255/255
255
255
255
1ST STEP
When [RESULT] button is pressed, the result screen is displayed.
* Data of each color are displayed with [K] [C] [M] [Y] buttons.
Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
is highlighted. (Black ([K]) is selected in the initial state.)
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the process control
reference value setting is performed again.
0
TEST
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44̆21
TONE
TOUCH
PROCON STANDARD VALUE
[EXECUTE] THEN
EXECUTION
2ND STEP
1/1
44-24
Purpose
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
Check (Display/Print)
Function (Purpose) : (This simulation is not used in the market.)
Used to display the process control result.
Section
: Process
Item
: Data (Machine condition)
Operation/Procedure
REGISTER
START.
1)
Select a color with [K][C][M][Y] buttons. (In this example, [K] is
selected.) The data of the selected color are displayed.
* Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
is highlighted. (In the initial screen, black ([K]) is selected.)
EXECUTE
* Change the display page with [↓] or [↑] .
* If there is a page over [↑], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
If there is a page under [↓], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
display grays out and the operation becomes invalid.
2)
When [NEXT] button is pressed, data of another category are
displayed.
* When [NEXT] button is pressed on the last category data
display, the data of the first category are displayed.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 58
* When [NEXT] button is pressed, the data of the next category are displayed regardless of the display page.
44-25
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy
basic screen of simulation.
Purpose
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the initial condition of process control (half tone correction).
Category
Coefficient
Page
number
1/2
Display item
Low density rising point
High density saturation
point
(Saturation pint – Rising
point) / 10
Coefficient of the
approximation formula
of lowest density
Coefficient of the
approximation formula
of low density
Coefficient of the
approximation formula
when connecting low
density and middle
density
Coefficient of the
approximation formula
of middle density
Coefficient of the
approximation formula
of high density
Density sections
connection output ratio
Half tone process
control reference value
Half tone process
control correction
amount
Printer half tone
process control
correction value
Printer half tone
process control
reference dither value
Printer auto density
adjustment correction
value
[STEP]
[EX-LOW]
[LOW]
[CONNECT]
2/2
[MID]
[HIGH]
[CONNECT POINT]
Reference
value
Correction
value
1/1
[SENSOR_TARGET]
1/1
[S_VALUE]
For printer
1/3
[PRINTER_S_VALUE]
2/3
[PRINTER_BASE_DI
THER_VALUE]
3/3
[PRINTER_AUTO_HT
_VALUE]
Section
: Process
Item
: Data (Machine condition)
Operation/Procedure
Content
[RIZE]
[SATURATE]
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
Check (Display/Print)
* When the display item is not executed yet, “–––” is displayed. In
case of an error, "ERR" is displayed.
* An error display is not made for the reference value and the correction value, and the previous value is displayed.
1)
Select a color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] buttons. (In this example, [K]
is selected.) The data of the selected color are displayed.
* Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
is highlighted. (In the initial screen, black ([K]) is selected.)
2)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
4)
When [OK] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the current
set data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
* Also when [OK], [↑], [↓], [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the current set value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
Item
Display
A
1ST PATCH
Set
range
0 to 255
B
2ND PATCH
0 to 255
C
3RD PATCH
0 to 255
D
4TH PATCH
0 to 255
E
5TH PATCH
0 to 255
Content
Half tone process control
1ST step 1st patch print
gradation
Half tone process control
1ST step 2nd patch print
gradation
Half tone process control
1ST step 3rd patch print
gradation
Half tone process control
1ST step 4th patch print
gradation
Half tone process control
1ST step 5th patch print
gradation
Default
value
40
60
80
100
255
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44㧙24
TEST
HALF
TONE
[RIZE]
16
PROCON RESULT
DISPLAY
[SATURATE]
109
[EX-LOW]
A:
0.0
,
B:
[LOW]
A:-
0.013
,
B:-
0.569
0.0
,
B:
0.0
[CONNECT] A:
K
C
M
Y
[STEP]
0
HALF
100.0
,
C:
107.444
TONE
A:
NEXT
K
PROCON
40
0
1/2
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-25
TEST
9.3
255
C
M
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 59
INITIAL
VALUE
DISPLAY
A
40
1ST PATCH
B
60
2ND
PATCH
C
80
3RD
PATCH
D 100
4TH
PATCH
Y
OK
44-26
44-27
Purpose
: Adjustment
Purpose
: Data clear
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the half tone process control forcibly.
Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the half tone process control
correction value.
Section
: Process
Section
: Process
Item
: Operation
Item
: Clear
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
When the machine enters Simulation 44-26, the screen on the
right is displayed.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the process control is
forcibly executed. (When [EXECUTE] button is pressed during
execution, the operation is interrupted.)
2)
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
become active display.
2)
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
When the display shifts to the sensor adjustment error screen,
press [EXECUTE] button to resume the operation.
* After completion of clearing the half tone process control
correction value, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal
display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
When the second step is completed, the following message is
displayed. (The message is automatically proceeds.)
BLACK : 2ND STEP BLACK END
* The restored data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
CYAN : 2ND STEP CYAN END
MAGENTA : 2ND STEP MAGENTA END
1 to 15
YELLOW : 2ND STEP YELLOW END
4)
Press [YES] button.
The half tone process control correction value is cleared.
[YES] button is highlighted.
The display automatically shifts to the first step completion
screen or the sensor adjustment error screen.
When the display shifts to the first step completion screen, the
second step is automatically started.
3)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
Standard value restore item
Half tone process control correction value
The display shifts to the normal completion screen or the error
screen automatically.
When [RESULT] button is pressed, the result screen is displayed.
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44̆27
TEST
HALF TONE
PROCON
ADJUSTMENT
DATA CLEAR
* Data of each color are displayed with [K][C][M][Y] buttons.
Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
is highlighted. (In the initial screen, [K] is selected.)
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the half tone process
control correction value setting is resumed.
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
Display
COMPLETE
INTERRUPTION
CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR
BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR
[YMCK]
CONNECTION_ERR
Content
Normal completion
Forcible interruption
Color sensor adjustment error
Black sensor adjustment error
High density process control [YMCK] error
Connection error
0
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44̆26
TEST
TONE
TOUCH
DENSITY
[EXECUTE]
CORRECT
THEN
44-28
Purpose
Section
: Process
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
EXECUTION
EXECUTION
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the timing (ON/OFF) of process
control execution.
START.
* If there is a page over [↑], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
EXECUTE
If there is a page under [↓], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
display grays out and the operation becomes invalid.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the current set data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 60
Item
A
Display
Process control
SW ON
execution YES/NO
setting
24H
B
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
C
HUM
D
REV1
YES
NO
E
REV2
YES
NO
F
INITIAL
G
PIX
YES
NO
YES
NO
H
HUM_LIMIT
I
HUM HOUR
J
HUM_DIF
K
BK_RATIO
L
M_RATIO
M
PIX_RATIO
YES
NO
Content
When supplying the power (when canceling sleep.)
When READY (sleep setting) is kept for 24H or more
The temperature and humidity in the machine are monitored
every 2 hours (which can be set with Item I), and they are more
than the specified level (more than the set value of item 10)
compared with the previous process control.
When the power is supplied, and when the accumulated
traveling distance of BK or M position drum unit reaches a
certain level.
When the accumulated traveling distance of BK or M position
drum unit reaches a certain level from the previous density
correction.
When warming up after clearing the counter of OPC drum and
the developing unit.
When one of the accumulated toner counts for each colors
reaches over the specified count from the previous high density
correction.
The set conditions of item C are added to the set conditions of
items A to G.
Item
0
CLOSE
PROCON TIMING ADJUSTMENT
A:
㨇
0
0㨪 1 㨉
A㧦 0
㧧SW ON 㧦NO
B㧦 0
㧧24H 㧦YES
C㧦 0
㧧HUM 㧦YES
D㧦 0
㧧REV1 㧦YES
Default value
0
0
0
0 to 1
0
1
0
Allowed
Inhibited
0 to 1
0
1
0
Allowed
Inhibited
Allowed
Inhibited
0 to 1
0
1
0
1
0
0 to 1
0 to 1
0
1
1
1
1 to 24
2
1 to 9
2
1 to 999
20
1 to 999
20
1 to 999
100
Example: SW ON:YES
SIMULATION NO.44㧙28
Set range
0 to 1
0
1
0 to 1
0
1
0 to 1
0
1
Allowed
Inhibited
Allowed
Inhibited
Item C temperature/humidity monitor monitoring time interval setting (H:
Hour)
Specified value of area difference compared with that in the previous process
control execution of item C
Setting of the zoom ratio (%) of BK position OPC drum traveling distance of
item E
Setting of the zoom ratio (%) of M position OPC drum traveling distance of
item E
Pitch count zoom ratio setting (%)
* A – H display: "Item name: Detail display."
TEST
Allowed
Inhibited
Allowed
Inhibited
Allowed
Inhibited
A
B
C
D
Display
item
COPY
PRINTER
FAX
SELF
PRINT
Description
of item
Copier
Printer
FAX
Self print
Set range
0 to 4
0: No execution
1: HV only
2: HV → PHT
3: HV → HT
4: HV → PHT → HT
Default
value
4
2
2
4
* The actual display is "Display item: Set range."
Example: COPY:HV → PHT → HT
OK
0
TEST
44-29
HALF
Purpose
Function (Purpose) : Enable/disable of the half tone correction
during each job is switched.
Section
: Process
Item
: Operation
TONE
SETTING
A㧦 4
: Setting
A:
㨇
4
0㨪 4 㨉
㧧 COPY : HV
B㧦 2
㧧 PRINTER : HVψPHTψHT
C㧦 2
㧧 FAX : HVψPHT
D㧦 4
㧧 SELF PRINT : HVψPHTψHT
OK
Operation/Procedure
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-29
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, it is highlighted and the current set data are saved to
EEPROM and RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 61
5)
44-31
Purpose
Section
: Process (OPC drum)
Item
: Adjustment
6)
Check the output pattern to examine deflections of C, M, Y,
and K.
• The deflection is within 2 lines. → Simulation is completed.
• The deflection is not within 2 lines. → Go to step 9.
Operation/Procedure
1)
* When [EXECUTE], [↑], [↓], [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the current set value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to perform the phase adjustment for
OPC drum deflection. (Used to adjust the
phases of four OPC drums deflection.)
When [OK] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the current
set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
Enter "3" with 10-key in the print mode of set item A to change
the set value. (Default is 3.)
3)
Set A3 paper in the cassette 1 tray.
4)
Use [↓] button to shift to the paper of set item "C" and enter "3"
with 10-key. (The default is 3.)
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
7)
Shift to the set item A and enter "1" with 10-key.
8)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the drum deflection
adjustment pattern is printed. (8 sheets are outputted.)
9)
Check 8 sheets of print patterns to find the print pattern in
which the deflection is within2 lines for C, M, and Y. Set the
print value of the print pattern to set item B.
* Numbers 1 – 8 are printed sequentially in the output pattern.
10) To check the deflection in the set value, enter "3" to set item A
with 10-key, and press [EXECUTE] button to print one sheet of
the drum deflection adjustment pattern.
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is
pressed during self print, the operation is interrupted.
* After completion of self print, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
original state.
* For cassette selection, the manual feed cassette is set. (Set item
C is 1)
Item
A
Display item: Detail
of display
PRINT
45deg
MODE
Description
Print mode
90deg
90 degree
SET VALUE
B
COLOR
C
PAPER
45 degree
SET VALUE
Phase adjustment value
BK → CL
Cassette selection
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
Deflection check pattern every 45 degree (8 sheets of print)
(1) 0° (2) 45° (3) 90° (4) 135° (5) 180° (6) 225° (7) 270° (8) 315°
* The number in ( ) is printed on the output pattern.
2: Deflection check pattern for every 90 degree (4 sheets of print)
(1) 0° (3) 90° (5) 180° (7) 270°
* The number in ( ) is printed on the output pattern.
3: Deflection check print (One sheet of print) at the set value.
Angle step 0° (1) → 45° (2) → 90° (3) → 135° (4) → 180° (5) →
225° (6) → 270° (7) → 315° (8)
Manual feed
Machine 1 stage
Machine 2 stage
Option paper feed desk 1 stage
Option paper feed desk 2 stage
LCC
* The display of item A/C is "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER : CS2
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-31
TEST
DRUM
POSITION
A:
㨇 1㨪
3
3㨉
SETTING
A㧦 3
㧧 PRINT
B㧦 2
㧧 COLOR
C㧦 3
㧧
MODE㧦SET VALUE
PAPER:CS2
EXECUTE
OK
Default
value
3
(SET
VALUE)
Writing
NO
2
3
1 to 8
1 to 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
YES
3
(CS2)
NO
44-43
Purpose
0
Set
range
1 to 3 1
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
Check (Display/Print)
Function (Purpose) : Used to display each developing unit
installing state AD value.
This simulation is added to check the sampling data of the detection judgment of
developing unit installation not only as the
judgment result (trouble display) but also as
the current state value.
Section
: Process (Developing)
Item
: Data (Machine condition)
Operation/Procedure
1)
When the machine enters Simulation 44-43, the data stored in
EEPROM are displayed.
* Data are revised every 5sec.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 62
A
B
C
D
DVCH KIND K
DVCH KIND C
DVCH KIND M
DVCH KIND Y
K developing unit kind state
C developing unit kind state
M developing unit kind state
Y developing unit kind state
Display
range
1 to 9 (*)
1 to 9 (*)
1 to 9 (*)
1 to 9 (*)
E
F
G
H
DVCH_AD_K
DVCH_AD_C
DVCH_AD_M
DVCH_AD_Y
K developing unit installation AD value
C developing unit installation AD value
M developing unit installation AD value
Y developing unit installation AD value
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
Item
Item name
Item content
Remark
Developing unit model identification information saved in EEPROM on the
machine side.
A judgment is made by verifying this information and the model information in
CRUM. Since the result (OK or NG) is known when warming up, the error
display is not required in SIM. The display is made by the division code of 1
to 9 instead of the model name.
Actual measurement value of the developing unit output voltage AD value
Actual measurement value of the developing unit output voltage AD value
Actual measurement value of the developing unit output voltage AD value
Actual measurement value of the developing unit output voltage AD value
(*): The kind of a developing unit is identified with the ID number.
For ID and the contents of developing unit models, refer to ‚ below.
ID number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Developing unit model name
OEM4, etc.
PASTEL MFP
PASTEL PRT
C-JUPITER MFP
C-JUPITER PRT
OEM1, etc.
OEM2, etc.
OEM3, etc.
No developing unit
Display item
ID_n
Content description
Patch data display
(n = 1 to 16)
0
1 PIXEL HALF TONE CORRECT RESULT
PTK
PTC
ID 1 :
PTK PTC PTM PTY
255
255
255
255
ID 4 :
255
255
255
UNIT
AD
255
ID 2 :
255
255
255
255
ID 5 :
255
255
255
255
ID 3 :
255
255
255
255
ID 6 :
255
255
255
255
1/3
MONITOR
DVCH KIND K
:
㪁㩷
DVCH AD K
:
㪁㪁㪁㩷
44-54
DVCH KIND C
:
㪁㩷
DVCH AD C
:
㪁㪁㪁㩷
Purpose
DVCH KIND M
:
㪁㩷
DVCH AD M
:
㪁㪁㪁㩷
DVCH KIND Y
:
㪁㩷
:
㪁㪁㪁㩷
DVCH AD Y
1/1
44-52
Purpose
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
Check (Display/Print)
Section
: Process
Item
: Data (Machine condition)
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
Check (Display/Print)
Function (Purpose) : (This function is not used. Do not operate.)
Used to display the 1 pixel half tone correction result.
Section
: Process
Item
: Data (Machine condition)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Function (Purpose) : (This function is not used. Do not operate.)
Used to check the toner patch image density level of each color in 1 pixel half tone
correction. (The simulation is used to check
whether the correction is normally executed
or not.)
Select a color with [K][C][M][Y] buttons. (In this example, [K] is
selected.) The data of the selected color are displayed.
* Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
is highlighted. (In the initial screen, black ([K]) is selected.)
* Change the display page with [↑] [↓] buttons.
* If there is a page over [↑], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
If there is a page under [↓], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
display grays out and the operation becomes invalid.
Operation/Procedure
1)
PTM PTY
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-43
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44̆52
TEST
0
DEVELOPER
Display range
0 to 255
Change the page with [↑] [↓] buttons.
* If there is a page over [↑], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
If there is a page under [↓], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
display grays out and the operation becomes invalid.
2)
When [NEXT] button is pressed, data of another category are
displayed.
* When [NEXT] button is pressed on the last category data
display, the data of the first category are displayed.
* When [NEXT] button is pressed, the data of the next category are displayed regardless of the display page.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy
basic screen of simulation.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy
basic screen of simulation.
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 63
Category
Approximation
result
Page number
1/2
Display item
[EX-LOW]
[LOW]
[CONNECT]
Reference
register value
Correction value
Content
EXTRA lowest density area approximation formula
coefficient
Low density approximation formula coefficient
[MID]
Approximation formula coefficient when connecting low
density and middle density
Middle density approximation formula coefficient
2/2
[HIGH]
High density approximation formula coefficient
1/1
[CONNECT SENSOR]
[SENSOR_TARGET]
1/1
[S_VALUE]
Sensor output at connecting point of each density area
Reference value registration value of each color and each
point of 1 pixel half tone correction
Correction value of each color and each point of 1 pixel
half tone correction
Display range
A: –10.000 to +10.000
B: –255.000 to +255.000
A: –10.000 to +10.000
B, C:-255.000 to +255.000
A: –10.000 to +10.000
B: –255.000 to +255.000
A: –10.000 to +10.000
B, C: –255.000 to +255.000
A: –10.000 to +10.000
B: –255.000 to +255.000
#1 to #4: 0 to 255
#1 to #15
#1 to #15
* When the display item is not executed yet, “–––” is displayed. In case of an error, “ERR” is displayed.
* An error display is not made for the reference value and the correction value, and the previous value is displayed.
0
TEST
1 PIXEL HALF
[EX-LOW]
A:
[LOW]
TONE RESULT
01.000
,
A:
-10.000
,
B:
-200.000
10.000
,
B:
-150.000
[MID]
05.000
,
B:
200.000
A:
C
M
1PIXEL HALF
100.000
TOUGH
, C: 200.000
, C:
Y
NEXT
: Process
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
When the machine enters Simulation 44-56, the following
screen is displayed.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the forcible execution of
1 pixel process control is started. (When [EXECUTE] button is
pressed during execution, the operation is interrupted.)
2)
CORRECT
EXECUTION
EXECUTION
START.
EXECUTE
44-57
Function (Purpose) : (This function is not used. Do not operate.)
Used to perform the forcible execution of 1
pixel half tone correction.
Item
DENSITY
THEN
1/2
: Setting
Section
TONE
[EXECUTE]
150.000
44-56
Purpose
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44̆56
TEST
DISPLAY
B:
[CONNECT] A:
K
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44㧙54
Purpose
: Data clear
Function (Purpose) : (This function is not used. Do not operate.)
Used to clear the correction value of 1 pixel
half tone correction.
Section
: Process
Item
: Data clear
Operation/Procedure
1)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
becomes active display.
2)
Press [YES] button.
* In case of a sensor adjustment error, press [EXECUTE] button to resume the operation.
* The half tone correction value is cleared. [YES] button is
highlighted.
The display shifts to the normal completion screen or the error
screen automatically.
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
When [RESULT] button is pressed, the result screen is displayed.
* Select a color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] buttons. The data of the
selected color are displayed.
Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
is highlighted. (In the initial screen, black ([K]) is selected.)
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the 1 pixel process
control correction value setting is performed again.
* After completion of clearing the half tone correction value,
[EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES]
and [NO] buttons gray out.
* The cleared data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
1 to 15
Half tone correction value clear item
Process control half tone correction value
Display
COMPLETE
INTERRUPTION
CL_SEN_ADJ_ERR
BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR
[YMCK]
CONNECTION_ERR
Content
Normal completion
Forcible interruption
Color sensor adjustment error
Black sensor adjustment error
High density process control [YMCK] error
Connection error
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44̆57
1 PIXEL HALF TONE
ADJUSTMENT
ARE YOU SURE?
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 64
YES
DATA CLEAR
NO
EXECUTE
46
Item
Display
P
PHOTOGRAPH
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
MAP (COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
SINGLE COLOR
SINGLE COLOR
(COPY TO COPY)
TWO COLOR
46-1
Purpose
Q
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the default exposure (color
copy) for every document mode.
Section
: Scanner
Item
: Adjustment
R
S
T
Operation/Procedure
1)
U
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
Description
Photograph(Color
tone enhancement)
Map (Color tone
enhancement)
Single color
Single color (Copy
document)
2-color (red/black)
copy
2-color (red/black)
copy (Copy
document)
TWO COLOR (COPY
TO COPY)
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Default
value
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
0
S I M U LA TI O N
TEST
EXPOSURE
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
A:
CLOSE
CLOSE
N O . 4 6㧙 01
ADJUSTMENT (COLO R)[ COP Y]
50
㨇 1 㨪 99㨉
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
Set
range
1 to 99
A㧦 50
㧧 AUTO
B㧦 50
㧧 TEXT
C㧦 50
㧧
D㧦 50
㧧 TEXT/PHOTO
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
OK
Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
* The set values can be collectively changed by pressing [V]
[U] buttons.
When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
3)
When [OK] button is pressed, the currently entered data are
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* When [↑], [↓], [U], [V] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
copy basic screen of simulation.
46-2
Purpose
Section
: Scanner
Item
: Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
Display
AUTO
TEXT
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
LIGHT
TEXT (COPY TO
COPY)
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO (COPY TO
COPY)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
TEXT (COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO (COLOR
TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
TEXT/PHOTO
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the exposure in BLACK
copy.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default
value
50
50
50
Text/Photo
Printed photo
Photograph
Map
Light density
document
Text (Copy
document)
Text/Print (Copy
document)
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
50
50
50
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
Printed photo (Coy
document)
Text (Color tone
enhancement)
Text/Print (Color tone
enhancement)
1 to 99
50
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
copy basic screen of simulation.
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.
Text/Photograph
(Color tone
enhancement)
Printed Photo (Color
enhancement)
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
Description
Auto
Text
Text/Printed Photo
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
* The set values can be collectively changed by pressing [V]
[U] buttons.
When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
3)
When [OK], [↑], [↓], [U], [V] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key
is pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
Item
Display
Content
A
B
C
D
E
F
AUTO1
AUTO2
TEXT
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
Auto1
Auto2
Text
Text/Printed Photo
Text/Photo
Printed Photo
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 65
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
Item
Display
Content
G
H
I
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
TEXT (COPY TO COPY)
Photograph
Map
Text (Copy
document)
Text/Printed Photo
(Copy document)
Printed Photo
(Copy document)
Light density
document
J
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
LIGHT
K
L
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default
value
50
50
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
A:
㨇
CLOSE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46㧙02
TEST
ADJUSTMENT(B/W)[COPY]
50
1 㨪 99㨉
EXPOSURE
A:
㧧 TEXT/PHOTO
D㧦 50
㧧 PTINTED PHOTO
PHOTO
: Adjustment
A㧦 50
㧧 AUTO1
Section
: Scanner
B㧦 50
㧧 AUTO2
Item
: Adjustment
C㧦 50
㧧 TEXT
Operation/Procedure
D㧦 50
㧧 TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
1)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
Purpose
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
: Adjustment
Section
: Scanner
Item
: Adjustment
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Operation/Procedure
2)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* The set values can be collectively changed by pressing [V]
[U] buttons.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
* The set values can be collectively changed by pressing [V]
[U] buttons.
When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
When [OK], [↑], [↓], [U], [V] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key
is pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
copy basic screen of simulation.
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.
Item
㧧 TEXT/PRINTED
C㧦 50
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the exposure of the black
scanner.
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the exposure of the color
scanner.
3)
㧧 TEXT
B㧦 50
Purpose
46-4
2)
1 㨪 99㨉
A㧦 50
OK
OK
1)
ADJUSTMENT(COLOR)[ SCANNER]
50
㨇
CLOSE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46㧙04
46-5
0
EXPOSURE
0
TEST
Display
A
B
TEXT
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
C
D
E
F
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
Content
Text
Text/Printed
Photo
Text/Photo
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default
value
50
50
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
50
50
50
When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
3)
When [OK], [↑], [↓], [U], [V] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key
is pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
copy basic screen of simulation.
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.
Item
A
B
AUTO TEXT
AUTO TEXT/PRINT
PHOTO
AUTO TEXT/PHOTO
TEXT
TEXT/PRINT PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Auto text
Auto text/Print Photo
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default
value
50
50
Auto text/Photo
TExt
Text/Print Photo
Text/Photo
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Display
Content
0
TEST
EXPOSURE
A:
㨇
CLOSE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46㧙05
ADJUSTMENT(B/W)[SCANNER]
50
1 㨪 99㨉
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 66
A㧦 50
㧧 AUTO TEXT
B㧦 50
㧧 AUTO
C㧦 50
㧧 AUTO TEXT/PHOTO
D㧦 50
㧧 TEXT
TEXT/PRINT
PHOTO
OK
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
46-8
Purpose
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to make the scanner color balance
RGB adjustment (for color push scanner
mode).
Section
: Scanner
Item
: Adjustment
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
* The set values can be collectively changed by pressing [V]
[U] buttons.
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a desired color with [B] [G] [R] buttons. (In this example,
[B] is selected.) The data of the selected color are displayed.
When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
3)
When [OK], [↑], [↓], [U], [V] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key
is pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
* Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
is highlighted. (Blue is selected in the initial screen.)
2)
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to
the copy basic screen of simulation.
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/
[BLACK] key.
Item
Display
Content
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
A
COPY: LOW
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
B
SCAN: LOW
C
FAX: LOW
D
COPY: HIGH
E
SCAN: HIGH
F
FAX: HIGH
RSPF copy mode exposure
adjustment (low density side)
RSPF scanner mode
exposure adjustment (low
density side)
RSPFFAX mode exposure
adjustment (low density side)
RSPF copy mode exposure
adjustment (high density side)
RSPF scanner mode
exposure adjustment (high
density side)
RSPFFAX mode exposure
adjustment (high density side)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
4)
When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
copy basic screen of simulation.
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.
Item
A
Display
Content
LOW DENSITY
POINT
HIGH DENSITY
POINT
B
Low density side
correction set value
High density side
correction set value
Default
value
50
TEST
1 to 99
50
㨇 1 㨪 99
B
A㧦 50
㧧 LOW
1 to 99
42
1 to 99
53
1 to 99
53
1 to 99
53
ADJUSTMENT(SPF)
42
㨇 1 㨪 99㨉
A㧦 42
㧧 COPY 㧦LOW
B㧦 42
㧧 SCAN㧦LOW
C㧦 42
㧧 FAX㧦LOW
D㧦 53
㧧 COPY㧦HIGH
OK
46-10
B㧦 50
㧧 HIGH
DENSITY POINT
Purpose
DENSITY POINT
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to the copy density adjustment (manual). (color mode)
㨉
G
42
CLOSE
SCANNER COLOR BALANCE ADJUSTMENT 㧔COLOR SCANNER MODE㧕
50
1 to 99
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46㧙09
EXPOSURE
A:
SIMULATION NO.46㧙08
A:
Default
value
42
0
Set
range
1 to 99
0
TEST
Set
range
1 to 99
R
OK
Section
: Engine
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
46-9
Purpose
When a button is pressed, the display is shifted to each setting
screen.
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the exposure.
Section
: RSPF
Item
: Adjustment
2)
Select a color.
* Select [K](BLACK), [C](CYAN), [M](MAGENTA), or [Y](YELLOW) button. The selected button is displayed and the
adjustment value of the selected color is displayed.
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select an item to be set.
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
* Only one color can be selected. The selected button is highlighted.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
On the initial screen, [K] is selected.
3)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 67
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
4)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
46-16
Purpose
Section
: Engine
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
* When [C] key is pressed, the input value is cleared.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
6)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* The set values can be collectively changed by pressing [V]
[U] buttons.
5)
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
When [OK], [EXECUTE], [↑], [↓], [U], [V] button, [COLOR], or
[BLACK] key is pressed, the current entered value is saved to
EEPROM and RAM.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and self
print is executed.
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is pressed during self print, the operation is terminated.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
* The set values can be collectively changed by pressing [U]
[V] buttons.
* When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed once during setting,
the display returns to the menu selecting screen.
Item
Text
Text/Printed Photo
Printed Photo
Photo+Text/Photo
Map
Light density document
Copy document
Display
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
Item
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
3)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and self
print is started.
* After completion of self print, [EXECUTE] button returns to
the normal display.
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
* When [OK], [EXECUTE], [↑], [↓], [U], [V] button, [COLOR],
or [BLACK] key is pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM
and RAM.
Item content
TEXT
TEXT/PRT PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTO+TEXT/PHOTO
MAP
LIGHT
COPY ORG
Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
* After completion of self print, [EXECUTE] button returns to
the original state.
* When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed twice during setting,
the display returns to the sub number entry screen.
Set range
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
Default value
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46̆10
ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT
TEXT
TEXT / PRT PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
MAP
LIGHT
COPY ORG
Display
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
Item
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
Set range
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
Default value
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
0
TEST
ENGINE
TEST
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to the copy density adjustment (manual) [Monochrome, all modes] PG print.
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46㧙16
COLOR
BALANCE
500
㨇373㨪627㨉
PHOTO+TEXT/PHOTO
MANUAL
ADJUSTMENT [ALL(B/W)]:PG
A㧦500
㧧 POINT1
B㧦500
㧧 POINT2
C㧦500
㧧 POINT3
D㧦500
㧧 POINT4
EXECUTE
1/1
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 68
OK
2)
46-19
Purpose
Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
: Setting
* The set values can be collectively changed by pressing [V]
[U] buttons.
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the BLACK auto exposure
mode.
Section
: Scanner
Item
: Operation
When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
3)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted, and self
print is started.
Operation/Procedure
* When [OK], [EXECUTE], [↑], [↓], [U], [V] button, [COLOR],
or [BLACK] key is pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM
and RAM.
1)
When the machine enters the simulation, the current set status
is highlighted.
2)
Press a set value button to be changed, and the button is highlighted and the set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. (In
this example, [MODE2] button is pressed.)
* After completion of self print, [EXECUTE] button returns to
the normal display.
* Only one item can be selected.
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] key
is pressed during self-printing, the operation is stopped.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
copy basic screen of simulation.
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.
Item
Content
AE_MODE
Auto exposure mode
AE_STOP_COPY
Auto BLACK exposure STOP
(for copy)
Auto BLACK exposure STOP
(for FAX)
Auto BLACK exposure STOP
(for scanner)
AE_STOP_FAX
AE_STOP_SCAN
Set value
MODE1,
MODE2
ON/OFF
Default
value
MODE1
ON
ON/OFF
ON
ON/OFF
ON
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.46-19
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
Display
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
Item
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
Set range
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
Default value
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
CLOSE
EXPOSURE MODE SETUP (B/W-AE)
AE MODE
:
MODE1
OFF
ON
AE STOP FAX
OFF
ON
:
AE STOP SCAN :
0
MODE2
AE STOP COPY :
OFF
ENGINE COLOR
ON
A:
1/1
500
K
Purpose
BALANCE
㨇245~755㨉
46-21
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46㧙21
TEST
C
M
MANUAL
ADJUSTMENT [ALL(COLOR)]
A㧦500
㧧 POINT1
B㧦500
㧧 POINT2
C㧦500
㧧 POINT3
D :500
㧧 POINT4
Y
EXECUTE
OK
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to perform the copy color balance
manual correction.
[Color, All modes]: PG print
Section
: Engine
Item
: Adjustment
46-23
Purpose
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set ENABLE/DISABLE of the half
tone highest density correction.
Operation/Procedure
Section
:
1)
Item
: Specifications
Select a color with [K][C][M][Y] buttons. The adjustment value
of the selected color is displayed. (In this example, [C] is
selected.)
* Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
is highlighted. (On the default display, [K] is selected.)
* Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Operation/Procedure
1)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
2)
When [OK] button, [COLOR] or [BLACK] key is pressed, the
current entered value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
Item
Display
A
(0: ENABLE
1: DISABLE)
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 69
Content
0
1
Engine highest density
correction mode ENABLE
Engine highest density
correction mode DISABLE
Set
range
0 to 1
Default
value
0
0
ENGINE MAXIMUM
DENSITY
A㧦 0
A:
㨇
ADJUSTMENT
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-24
TEST
ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
MODE
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PROCON EXECUTION AND PRINT THE TEST PATCH.
㧧 (0:ENABLE 1:DISABLE)
(PLEASE USE SPECIFIED TYPE OF A3 OR 11"x17” SIZE PAPER
0
0㨪
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46㧙23
TEST
FOR THIS ADJUSTMENT)
1 㨉
EXECUTE
OK
(48-patch print)
0
46-24
Purpose
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to the copy color balance auto adjustment.
Section
: Engine
Item
: Adjustment
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO. 46-24
TEST
ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
TEST PATCH PRINTING IN PROGRESS...
EXECUTE
Operation/Procedure
1)
When the machine enters Simulation 46-24, the initial screen
is displayed.
(Output patch read (FACTORY))
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the high density process
control is executed and self print of 48 patches is started.
Check to confirm that there is A3 paper on the paper feed tray.
If there is no A3 paper, supply it.
2)
While the high density process control is executed, [EXECUTE] button is highlighted.
3)
During the self print of 48 patches, [EXECUTE] button is highlighted.
4)
After completion of the self print, the display is shifted to the
output patch read standby screen.
Place the printed 48 patches on the glass table, and press
[FACTORY] or [SERVICE] button to select the process mode.
5)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
48 patches set on the table glass are scanned.
Check to confirm that there is A3 paper on the paper feed tray.
If there is no A3 paper, supply it.
6)
After reading the patches, self print of 16patches is automatically started.
7)
After completion of the self print, the display is shifted to the
registration standby screen. When [REPEAT] button is
pressed, the display returns to the initial screen without executing registration.
[When [OK] button is pressed, the correction value is saved to
EEPROM and RAM, and the half tone process control reference value correction is started.
8)
The display is shifted to the reference value registration process 1 end screen automatically, and the reference value registration process 2 (BLACK) is executed automatically.
9)
After completion of the reference value registration process 2,
the following message is displayed. (Each message is automatically shifted.)
BLACK: 2ND STEP BLACK END
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO. 46-24
ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
PLEASE SELECT THE MODE (FACTORY) OR (SERVICE) AND PLACE
THE PRINTED TEST PATCH ON DOCUMENT GLASS THEN PRESS [EXECUTE].
,
㪁LIGHT AREA AT LEFT SIDE ON DOCUMENT GLASS.
FACTORY
SERVICE
EXECUTE
(16-patch self print)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO. 46-24
ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
ADJUSTED PATCH PRINTING IN PROGRESS.
EXECUTE
(Standby for registration process)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO. 46-24
ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
CONFIRM THE ADJUSTED PATCH AND PRESS [OK] TO REGISTER THIS PATCH DATA
,PRESS [REPEAT] TO CONTINUE THIS PROCEDURE.
REPEAT
OK
(Registration of half tone process control reference value)
CYAN: 2ND STEP CYAN END
0
MAGENTA: 2ND STEP MAGENTA END
TEST
YELLOW: 2ND STEP YELLOW END
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO. 46-24
ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
* When the process control is executed second time, "2nd" is
displayed.
10) All the registration processes are completed normally.
* When [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is
pressed during self print, the operation is interrupted.
PLEASE WAIT.
NOW REGISTERING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON.
[Cancel during execution of the operation]
• To cancel and resume the operation, press [EXECUTE].
(Initial screen)
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 70
OK
(Completion of all the processes)
46-26
0
TEST
Purpose
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO. 46-24
ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
COMPLETED
THIS
PROCEDURE.
PLEASE
QUIT
THIS
Section
: Image process (ICU)
Item
: Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
MODE.
1)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons
become active display.
46-25
Purpose
2)
: Adjustment
Section
: Image process (ICU)
Item
: Adjustment
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
* After completion of default reset of the single color mode
color balance set value, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
Operation/Procedure
Select a color to be set. (In this example, [C] (Cyan) is
selected.)
* When a color button ([C](Cyan), [M](Magenta), [Y](Yellow))
is selected, the selected button is highlighted and the adjustment value of the selected button is displayed.
Press [YES] button.
The single color mode color balance set value is reset to the
default value. [YES] button is highlighted.
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the fine adjustment of single color mode color balance.
1)
* The restored data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* Only one color can be selected. The selected button is highlighted.
Standard value reset item
RED set ratio
GREEN set ratio
BLUE set ratio
YELLOW set ratio
MAGENTA set ratio
CYAN set ratio
1
2
3
4
5
6
In the initial state, [C] is selected.
2)
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to reset the single color mode color
balance set value to the default.
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
0
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46̆26
SINGLE COLOR
MODE
STANDARD
RATE SETUP
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
ARE
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
4)
When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
copy basic screen of simulation.
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
Description
Range
RED
GREEN
BLUE
YELLOW
MAGENTA
CYAN
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
C
0
255
255
0
0
255
Default value
M
255
0
255
0
255
0
TEST
Purpose
A:
MODE COLOR BALANCE
255
㨇
0 㨪 255㨉
K
C
A㧦255
㧧 RED
B㧦255
㧧 GREEN
C㧦
㧧 BLUE
0
D㧦255
M
Y
YES
NO
EXECUTE
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the engine gamma calculating
formula coefficient.
Section
: Image process (ICU)
Item
: Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
Y
255
255
0
255
0
0
1)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46㧙25
SURE?
46-27
0
SINGLE COLOR
YOU
SETUP
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the currently entered data are saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
㧧 YELLOW
OK
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 71
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
copy basic screen of simulation.
Item
Display
Set range
A
BLACK TEXT
(SLOPE)
B
BLACK TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
C
COLOR TEXT
(SLOPE)
D
COLOR TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
E
ED TEXT
(SLOPE)
F
ED TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
Black text edge area
engine γ curve
calculating coefficient
(slope) setting
Black text edge area
engine γ curve
calculating coefficient
(intercept) setting
Color text edge area
engine γ curve
calculating coefficient
(slope) setting
Color text edge area
engine γ curve
calculating coefficient
(intercept) setting
Error diffusion edge
area engine γ curve
calculating coefficient
(slope) setting
Error diffusion edge
area engine γ curve
calculating coefficient
(intercept) setting
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1
99
: Image process (ICU)
Item
: Adjustment
1)
Press [EXECUTE] button to start scanning. After completion of
scanning, the result is displayed.
2)
Press [NEXT] button to switch to the process data of another
category.
Use [↓] and [↑] keys to change the display page of the process
data.
* If there is a page over [↑], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
If there is a page under [↓], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
display grays out and the operation is invalid.
Press [SETUP] button to return to the initial screen.
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.
CLOSE
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
copy basic screen of simulation.
* When [NEXT] button is pressed under the final category data display state, the head category data are displayed.
COEFFICIENT OF GAMMA SETUP
50
Section
3)
0
A:
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : (Information on this simulation may be
requested in some cases. However, this
function is basically not used in the market.)
Used to check the auto exposure/Auto document recognition/ Line number recognition
(Color mode). If the local memory size is
less than 256MB, the operation of this simulation may not operate normally.
Operation/Procedure
SIMULATION NO.46-27
TEST
46-28
Purpose
A㧦 50
㧧
BLACK
TEXT (SLOPE)
B㧦 50
㧧
BLACK
TEXT (INTERCEPTE)
C㧦 50
㧧
COLOR
TEXT (SLOPE)
D㧦 50
㧧
COLOR
TEXT (INTERCEPTE)
* Pressing [NEXT] button displays the next category data regardless of the display page.
OK
Category
ACS (Auto
recognition of
Color document/
Monochrome
document)
COLOR AE
(Color auto
exposure)
Detail of category
Display
RESULT
(Judgment result)
COL/MONO
STATISTICS
(Image process
statistic amount)
RESULT
(Judgment result)
STATISTICS
(Image process
statistic amount)
COLOR
MONO
Content
Set range/
Number of
digits
1 to 2
ACSCONT
2 kinds
COLOR
(COLOR
BLACK
document,
Monochrome
document)
ACS judgment counter value
Max. 10 digits
SITAJI_JUDGE
Base division detection result
0 to 32
RATE_SCR
SHITAJI
BEAT_JUDGE
SUM_SITAJI_SCR
Mesh ratio
Base number judgment result
Background judgment result
Base area mesh number
0 to 10000
0 to 3
0 to 8
Max. 10 digits
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 72
Remark
A3 pixel number
A3 pixel number
Category
ORG RECOG
(Document type
auto recognition)
Detail of category
RESULT
(Judgment result)
Display
ORIGINAL
BACKGROUND
MESH
HTFE
STATISTICS
(Image process
statistic amount)
HTCNT
PHOTOCNT
STRCNT
FLATCNT
PREHTCNT
HTXTCNT
SUMF
SUMM_L
SUMM_H
SUMFM_L
SUMFM_H
FHSTDR
FHSTDG
FHSTDB
HTHSTDR
TXT
TXT/HT
HT
TXT/PIC
PIC
TXT ON HT
OHT
–
GR
WH
NE
WH_GR
WH_NE
WH_CO
CO
IM
–
IMAGE
BASE
HIGH
LOW
Content
Document
Auto text
Auto text mesh
Auto mesh
Auto text/photo
Auto photo
Auto text on dot
Other auto
Base
None
Gray
White
Newspaper
White gray
White newspaper
White color
Color
Image
Mesh
No mesh
Image mesh
Base mesh (Non-image
mesh)
Line
High number of lines
Low number of lines
Mesh counter value
Photographic paper counter value
Text counter value
Background counter value
Document type judgment mesh counter
value
Text on mesh counter value
Flat mesh counter value
Total of Max. reverse numbers (lower
32bit)
Total of Max. reverse numbers (Upper
4bit)
Total of flat section max. reverse
number (lower 32bit)
Total of flat section max. reverse
number (Upper 4bit)
Background pixel histogram value
(RED)
Background pixel histogram value
(GREEN)
Background pixel histogram value
(BLUE)
Mesh pixel histogram value (RED)
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 73
Set range/
Number of
digits
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
1
0
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Remark
A3 pixel number
A3 pixel number
A3 pixel number
A3 pixel number
A3 pixel number
A3 pixel number
Max. 3 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 3 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
#1 to #32 display A3
pixel number
Category
ORG RECOG
(Document type
auto recognition)
Detail of category
STATISTICS
(Image process
statistic amount)
Display
HTHSTDG
HTHSTDB
LHSTD
Content
REVERSE AVE
Mesh pixel histogram value (GREEN)
Mesh pixel histogram value (BLUE)
L component histogram value other
than mesh
Max. difference histogram value other
than mesh
Pixel histogram value other than mesh
(RED)
Pixel histogram value other than mesh
(GREEN)
Pixel histogram value other than mesh
(BLUE)
Total of high-level division number in
background pixel histogram
Number of high-level division areas in
background pixel histogram (for base)
Number of high-level division areas in
background pixel histogram (for
photographic paper)
Background ratio
Base number judgment result
Background judgment result
Mesh ratio
Mesh judgment ratio
Text-on-mesh ratio
Line number judgment result
Mesh histogram judgment result
Mesh counter value judgment result
Text-on-mesh counter value judgment
result
Mesh judgment result
Other ratio
Text judgment result
Photographic paper pixel counter value
judgment result
Other pixel counter value judgment
result
Photographic paper judgment result
Threshold value to detect high-level
division in background pixel histogram
Threshold value to detect high-level
division in background pixel histogram
(photographic paper)
Mesh high-level threshold value
Threshold value for the mesh counter
value
Threshold value for the text-on-mesh
counter value
Text judgment threshold value
Photographic paper judgment threshold
value
Total pixel number of judgment area
Number of
High number of lines 2
mesh lines
(htfe_out = 3)
High number of lines 1
(htfe_out = 2)
Low number of lines 1
(htfe_out = 1)
Low number or lines 2
(htfe_out = 0)
Max. reverse average
REVERSE AVE(FLAT)
Flat section max. reverse average
FLAT SELECT
Flat section
mesh pixel
comparison
MDHSTD
OHSTDR
OHSTDG
OHSTDB
SUM_BETA_RGB
EREA_BETA RGB
SUM_BETA_PHOTORGB
RATE_BETA
SHITAJI
BETA_JUDGE
RATE_SCR
RATE_SCR2
RATE_TSCR
HTFE_JUDGE
SCR_HIST_JUDGE
SCR_CNT_JUDGE
TSCR_JUDGE
SCR_JUDGE
RATE_OTHER
TEXT_JUDGE
PHOTO_CNT_JUDGE
OTHER_JUDGE
PHOTO_JUDGE
TH_BETA2
TH_BETA_PHT2
TH_SCR2
TH_SCR_CNT2
TH_TSCR_CNT2
TH_TEXT2
TH_PHOTO2
ALLCNT
HTFE RESULT
HIGH2
HIGH1
LOW1
LOW2
YES
NO
When flatr > THflatr
When other than flatr >
THflatr
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 74
Set range/
Number of
digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Remark
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
0 to 32
0 to 16
0 to 16
0 to 10000
0 to 3
0 to 8
0 to 10000
0 to 10000
0 to 10000
Max. 3 digits
0 to 2
0 to 1
0 to 2
0 to 5
0 to 10000
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
A3 pixel
number
Max. 2 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
A3 pixel number
Max. 5 digits
A3 pixel number
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
A3 pixel number
A3 pixel number
Max. 10 digits
2
A3 pixel number
1
3
4
0 to 100.00
0 to 100.00
0
1
********: ave_m (When
100 is exceeded, "-" is
displayed.)
******** : ave_fm
(When 100 is
exceeded, "-" is
displayed.)
(Initial screen)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-28
* The display in the frame of [NEW] is deleted, and the value
entered in the procedure 6 is displayed in the column of
[PRESENT].
* If a new value if less than 9 digits, revision is not made.
* Switch the category sequentially with [NEXT] and [BACK]
buttons.
AUTO EXPOSURE/ORG AUTO RECOG/MESH LINE RECOG OF CONFIRM
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO SCAN
START
EXECUTE
(Completion of scan = ACS judgment result screen)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-28
AUTO EXPOSURE/ORG AUTO RECOG/MESH LINE RECOG OF CONFIRM
NOW READING THE ORIGINAL.
PLEASE WAIT…
* Press [↓] to display the image process statistic amount, and
press [NEXT] to display the judgment result of "COLOR
AE","ORG RECOG", and"SCR RECOG".
46-33
Purpose
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the color auto mode
adjustment.
Section
: Image process (ICU)
Item
: Image quality
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: Unless a special change is required, keep the default values except for the following items. For the following items,
change the set values according to the necessity.
COLOR AE(SW MODE 1 - 7 / TH MAX MONO / TH MAX
COLOR / SW NEWS / TH MODE SCR)
ACS(SIM LEVEL)
1)
Select a category to be set with [NEXT] and [BAC] buttons. (In
this example, "ACS4 digits or less" is set.)
2)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
4)
When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the currently entered data are saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
5)
Select a desired button.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
The selected button is highlighted and the value is displayed.
(In the default state, [TH_ACS5 ENLARGE] is highlighted.)
6)
Enter a new value (000000002 in this example) with 10-key.
* The number of digits is max. 9. The 10th digit cannot be
entered. Entry is made after clearing.
* 10-key: [0] to [9]
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
7)
When [SET] button is pressed, setting is revised.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 75
Category
ACS
COLOR AE
Item
4 digits or
less setting
5 digits or
less setting
4 digits or
less setting
5 digits or
less setting
Content
Display
A
THCLMK_1
B
THCLBK_1
C
D
ACSMSK_1
THCLMK_2
E
THCLBK_2
F
G
ACSMSK_2
THCLMK_3
H
THCLBK_3
I
J
ACSMSK_3
THCLMK_4
K
THCLBK_4
L
M
ACSMSK_4
THCLMK_5
N
THCLBK_5
O
P
ACSMSK_5
SIM_LEVEL
Q
TH_ACS5_RT
A
TH_ACS5 ENLARGE
A
SW_MODE1
B
SW_MODE2
C
SW_MODE3
D
SW_MODE4
E
SW_MODE5
F
SW_MODE6
G
SW_MODE7
H
TH_MAX_MONO
I
TH_MAX_COLOR
J
SW_NEWS
K
SW_MODE_SCR1
L
SW_MODE_SCR2
M
SW_MODE_MIX
N
A
B
SW_HOSEI
TH_MODE_SCR
TH_SITAJI_SCR
Default
value
Set range/Number of digits
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Pixel judgment threshold value
(1)
Final pixel judgment threshold
value (1)
ACS mask size select (1)
Pixel judgment threshold value
(2)
Final pixel judgment threshold
value (2)
ACS mask size select (2)
Pixel judgment threshold value
(3)
Final pixel judgment threshold
value (3)
ACS mask size select (3)
Pixel judgment threshold value
(4)
Final pixel judgment threshold
value (4)
ACS mask size select (4)
Pixel judgment threshold value
(5)
Final pixel judgment threshold
value (5)
ACS mask size select (5)
ACS judgment select switch
(density difference)
TH_ACS5: Calculation ratio of
the threshold value for
reduction
ACS judgment threshold value
5 (for enlargement)
Base detection of auto text
document
Base detection of auto text
mesh document
Base detection of auto text-onmesh document
Base detection of auto mesh
document
Base detection of auto photo
document
Base detection of auto text/
photo document
Base detection of auto other
document
Monochrome base detection
threshold value
Color base detection threshold
value
Newspaper base forcible
removal switch
Mesh area base judgment
switch
Mesh area base removal select
switch
Auto other document base
detection switch
Correction table correction
Mesh ratio threshold value
Base mesh threshold value
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 76
Screen
type
A
0–9
7
0–3
2
0–1
0
0–9
7
0–3
2
0–1
0
0–9
7
0–3
2
0–1
0
0–9
7
0–3
2
0–1
0
0–9
7
0–3
2
0–1
0
1–3
2
0 – 100
50
0 – 134217727
(A3 pixel number)
0–
1
1
0
0–
1
1
0
0–
1
1
0
0–
1
1
0
0–
1
1
0
0–
1
1
0
0–
1
1
0
0 – 32
000030000
B
1
A
0 – 32
0–1
1–3
0–1
1–2
0 – 8 (-4 – +4)
0 – 10000
0 – 10000
1
1
0
0
0
0
17
17
0
3
0
2
4
03000
03000
B
Category
ORG RECOG
Item
4 digits or
less setting
Content
Display
A
MVSTRSEL REDUCE
B
MVSTRSEL ENLARGE
C
PSEL1 REDUCE
D
PSEL1 ENLARGE
E
PSEL2 REDUCE
F
PSEL2 ENLARGE
G
BUSYSEL REDUCE
H
BUSYSEL ENLARGE
I
HTSEL REDUCE
AREA
ORG
J
HTSEL ENLARGE
AREA
ORG
K
ASEL REDUCE
L
ASEL ENLARGE
M
HSTSEL REDUCE
N
HSTSEL ENLARGE
O
HSTSEL2 REDUCE
P
HSTSEL2 ENLARGE
Q
TH_SUM_BETARGB
R
TH_BETA_SUB
S
TH_WHITE_BETA
T
TH_GRAY_BETA1
U
TH_GRAY_BETA2
V
TH_NOISE REDUCE
W
TH_NOISE ENLARGE
X
Y
SW_SCR1
SW_SCR2
0–2
Default
value
0
0–2
0
0–1
0
0–1
0
0–2
0
0–2
0
0–1
1
0–1
1
Set range/Number of digits
Text pixel judgment result
select register (for reduction)
Text pixel judgment result
select register (for
enlargement)
Photographic paper judgment
table select register for each
signal (for reduction)
Photographic paper judgment
table select register for each
signal (for enlargement)
Photographic paper pixel final
judgment table select register
(for reduction)
Photographic paper pixel final
judgment table select register
(for enlargement)
Frequency comparison value
select register (for reduction)
Frequency comparison value
select register (for
enlargement)
Mesh
Area
judgment
separation
result select
mesh
(for reduction) judgment
result
Document
discrimination
mesh
judgment
result
Mesh
Area
judgment
separation
result select
mesh
(for
judgment
enlargement)
result
Document
discrimination
mesh
judgment
result
Integrated judgment priority
select register (for reduction)
Integrated judgment priority
select register (for
enlargement)
Histogram division fluctuation
register (for reduction)
Histogram division fluctuation
register (for enlargement)
Max. density difference
histogram division fluctuation
register (for reduction)
Max. density difference
histogram division fluctuation
register (for enlargement)
Threshold value of all divisions
of background high level
number (for base)
Monochrome base judgment
threshold value
White base judgment threshold
value
Gray base judgment threshold
value 1
Gray base judgment threshold
value 2
Mesh noise threshold value (for
reduction)
Mesh noise threshold value (for
enlargement)
Mesh ratio judgment switch
Mesh judgment switch
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 77
0–
1
0
1
1
0–
1
0
1
1
0 – 23
16
0 – 23
16
0–3
0
0–3
0
0–3
3
0–3
3
0 – 32
6
0 – 32
5
0 – 32
25
0 – 32
18
0 – 32
25
0 – 32
10
0 – 32
10
0–1
0–1
0
0
Screen
type
A
Category
ORG RECOG
Item
4 digits or
less setting
5 digits or
less setting
SCR RECOG
4 digits or
less setting
Content
Display
Z
TH_HTFE
AA
AB
SW_TSCR
TH_SUM_PHOTO_RGB
AC
TH_BETA_RT
AD
TH_SCR_RT
AE
TH_SCR_CNT_RT
AF
TH_TSCR_ CNT_RT
AG
TH_TEXT_RT
AH
TH_PHOTO_RT
AI
TH_BETA_PHT_RT
A
TH_BETA ENLARGE
B
TH_SCR ENLARGE
C
D
TH_SCR_RATE
TH_SCR_CNT EL
E
TH_MANSEN_RATE
F
TH_TSCR_RATE
G
TH_TSCR_CNT EL
H
TH_TEXT ENLARGE
I
TH_PHOTO ENLARGE
J
TH_BETA_RATE
K
TH_BETA_PHT_EL
L
TH_OTHER
A
THBAVEM1 REDUCE
B
THBAVEM1 ENLARGE
C
THBAVEM2 REDUCE
D
THBAVEM2 ENLARGE
E
THBAVEM3 REDUCE
Default
value
Set range/Number of digits
Threshold value of high
number of lines
Text-on-mesh judgment switch
Threshold value of all divisions
of background high level
number (photographic paper)
TH_BETA: Calculation ratio of
the threshold value for
reduction
TH_SCR: Calculation ratio of
the threshold value for
reduction
TH_SCR_CNT: Calculation
ratio of the threshold value for
reduction
TH_TSCR_ CNT: Calculation
ratio of the threshold value for
reduction
TH_TEXT: Calculation ratio of
the threshold value for
reduction
TH_PHOTO: Calculation ratio
of the threshold value for
reduction
TH_BETA_PHT: Calculation
ratio of the threshold value for
reduction
Threshold value to detect high
level number division in
background pixel histogram
(base) (for enlargement)
Mesh high level number
threshold value (for
enlargement)
Threshold value for mesh ratio
Threshold value (for
enlargement) for the mesh dot
counter value
Ten-thousand line/print area
judgment threshold value
Threshold value for ratio of text
on mesh dots
Threshold value for counter
value of text on mesh (for
enlargement)
Threshold value of text
judgment (for enlargement)
Threshold value of
photography judgment (for
enlargement)
Background ratio threshold
value
Threshold value to detect high
density section in background
pixel histogram (photograph)
(for enlargement)
Text judgment threshold value
(for reduction)
Threshold value 1 for 13 x 7
mask average value (for
reduction)
Threshold value 1 for 13 x 7
mask average value (for
enlargement)
Threshold value 2 for 13 x 7
mask average value (for
reduction)
Threshold value 2 for 13 x 7
mask average value (for
enlargement)
Threshold value 3 for 13 x 7
mask average value (for
reduction)
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 78
0–3
0
0–1
0 – 32
1
15
0 – 100
50
0 – 100
50
0 – 100
50
0 – 100
50
0 – 100
50
0 – 100
50
0 – 100
50
0 – 134217727
(A3 pixel number)
1000000
0 – 134217727
(A3 pixel number)
20000
0 – 10000
0 – 134217727
(A3 pixel number)
000800000
0 – 10000
1500
0 – 10000
00300
0 – 134217727
(A3 pixel number)
000010000
0 – 134217727
(A3 pixel number)
0 – 134217727
(A3 pixel number)
000050000
0 – 10000
03000
0 – 134217727
100000
0 – 10000
07000
0 – 255
170
0 – 255
170
0 – 255
105
0 – 255
105
0 – 255
50
Screen
type
A
B
04500
000050000
A
Category
SCR RECOG
SEGMENT
Item
4 digits or
less setting
4 digits
or less
setting
Text-onmesh ON/
OFF (auto/
manual
mode)
Print
document
text
detection
level
Display
Content
F
THBAVEM3 ENLARGE
G
CMSUB1 REDUCE
H
CMSUB1 ENLARGE
I
CMSUB2 REDUCE
J
CMSUB2 ENLARGE
K
MREVSEL REDUCE
L
MREVSEL ENLARGE
M
MSDSEL REDUCE
N
MSDSEL ENLARGE
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
A
THAVEFM1 REDUCE
THAVEFM1 ENLARGE
THAVEFM2 REDUCE
THAVEFM2 ENLARGE
THAVEFM3 REDUCE
THAVEFM3 ENLARGE
THAVEM1 REDUCE
THAVEM1 ENLARGE
THAVEM2 REDUCE
THAVEM2 ENLARGE
THAVEM3 REDUCE
THAVEM3 ENLARGE
MESH_TXT ON HT
0 – 255
Default
value
50
0 – 255
55
0 – 255
55
0 – 255
0
0 – 255
0
0–3
0
0–3
0
0–1
0
0–1
0
0 – 720
0 – 720
0 – 720
0 – 720
0 – 720
0 – 720
0 – 720
0 – 720
0 – 720
0 – 720
0 – 720
0 – 720
0–
0
3
(THROUGH)
1 (OFF)
65
96
54
80
48
70
65
96
54
80
48
70
0
Set range/Number of digits
Threshold value 3 for 13 x 7
mask average value (for
enlargement)
Adjustment value 1 for 13 x 7
mask average value (for
reduction)
Adjustment value 1 for 13 x 7
mask average value (for
enlargement)
Adjustment value 2 for 13 x 7
mask average value (for
reduction)
Adjustment value 2 for 13 x 7
mask average value (for
enlargement)
High line number judgment
method select (for reduction)
High line number judgment
method select (for
enlargement)
Output select when
MREVSEL=3 (for reduction)
Output select when
MREVSEL=3 (for enlargement)
THAVEFM1 for reduction
THAVEFM1 for enlargement
THAVEFM2 for reduction
THAVEFM2 for enlargement
THAVEFM3 for reduction
THAVEFM3 for enlargement
THAVEM1 for reduction
THAVEM1 for enlargement
THAVEM2 for reduction
THAVEM2 for enlargement
THAVEM3 for reduction
THAVEM3 for enlargement
(Auto) text on mesh
B
MESH_TXT/HT1
(Auto) text mesh (Under 1, Line
1)
(Auto) text mesh (Under 2, Line
1)
(Manual) test print
(Auto) Text on mesh
C
MESH_TXT/HT2
D
E
MESH_TXT/PR
PR_TXT ON HT
F
PR_TXT/HT1
G
PR_TXT/HT2
H
I
PR_TXT/PR
PR_CHECK1(*2)
J
PR_CHECK2(*2)
K
PR_CHECK3(*2)
ON
OFF
L
PR_CHECK4(*2)
ON
OFF
M
THWMAX(*2)
N
THWMIN(*2)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
(Auto) text mesh (Under 1, Line
1, 2)
(Auto) text mesh (Under 1, Line
1, 2)
(Manual) Text print
Check button for investigation
[(Auto) text on mesh]
Check button for investigation
[(Auto) Text mesh (Under 2,
Line 1, 2)]
Check button for investigation
[(Auto) Text mesh (Under 2,
Line 1, 2)]
Check button for investigation
[(Manual) text print]
THWMAX (Print document text
detection level)
THWMIN (Print document text
detection level)
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 79
(THROUGH)
2 (ON1)
0–
2
3 (ON2)
0
(THROUGH)
1(ON1)
2 (ON2)
0–
1
3 (ON3)
0
1
0
1
0–
1
0
1
0
0–
1
0
1
0 – 255
0
220
0 – 255
153
0–
1
0
0
Screen
type
A
A
Category
SEGMENT
4 digits
or less
setting
Item
Chroma
saturation/
No Chroma
saturation
judgment
level
Color auto
document
recognition
filter
emphasis
setting
Specification
mode area
separate
(ON/OFF
setting)
INDEX
direct
appointment
Quantity of
detection
adjustment
Content
Display
O
COLOR_PRINT MODE
Print mode
P
COLOR_PHOTO MODE
Photographic paper mode
Q
COLOR_CHECK1
(*3)
Check button for investigation
(Print mode)
R
COLOR_CHECK2
(*3)
S
THILVC(*3)
T
THACOLL(*3)
U
THACOLH(*3)
V
THILVG(*3)
W
THAGRYL(*3)
X
THAGRYH(*3)
Y
SCREEN FILTER
LEVEL
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
H
L
AUTO
Z
SEG_ACT_A_OTR
AA
SEG_ACT_M_PRT1
AB
SEG_ACT_M_PRT2
AC
SEG_DS_A_TOH
AD
SEG_DS_M_TPP
AE
AF
AG
AH
SEG_ADJ_TPP_BK1
SEG_ADJ_TPP_BK2
SEG_ADJ_TPP_CL
SEG_ADJ_TPP_PR
AI
AJ
AK
AL
AM
SEG_ADJ_TPP_MESH
SEG_ADJ_TXT_BK1
SEG_ADJ_TXT_BK2
SEG_ADJ_TXT_CL
SEG_ADJ_TXT_PR
AN
AO
AP
AQ
AR
AS
AT
SEG_ADJ_TXT_MESH
SEG_ADJ_OTR_BK1
SEG_ADJ_OTR_BK2
SEG_ADJ_OTR_CL
SEG_ADJ_OTR_PR
SEG_ADJ_OTR_MESH
BKUCR_ACTM (–
THROUGH
99%)
OFF
ON
BKUCR_ACTM
THROUGH
(100% – 199%)
OFF
ON
BKUCR_ACTM
THROUGH
(200% –)
OFF
ON
AU
AV
0
Default
value
0
(THROUGH)
(THROUGH)
Set range/Number of digits
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Check button for investigation
(Photographic paper mode)
THILVC (Chromatic/Achromatic
judgment level print system
mode)
THACOLL (Chromatic/
Achromatic judgment level print
system mode)
THACOLH (Chromatic/
Achromatic judgment level print
system mode)
THILVG (Chromatic/
Achromatic judgment level print
system mode)
THAGRYL (Chromatic/
Achromatic judgment level print
system mode)
THAGRYH (Chromatic/
Achromatic judgment level print
system mode)
Filter
Heavy
emphasis
emphasis
setting
Light
emphasis
Auto
(Auto) Other mode
(Manual) Print document mode
(Text)
(Manual) Print document mode
(Text/Print)
(Auto) Text on mesh
(Manual) Text print
Text print system, Black text 1
Text print system, Black text 2
Text print system, Color text
Text print system, Chromatic/
Achromatic
Text print system, Mesh
Text system, Black text 1
Text system, Black text 2
Text system, Color text
Text system, Chromatic/
Achromatic
Text system, Mesh
Other, Black text 1
Other, Black text 2
Other, Color text
Other, Chromatic/Achromatic
Other, Mesh
– 99%
100% – 199%
200% –
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 80
0–
3
1(OFF)
2(ON1)
3(ON2)
0–
0
1
1
0–
0
1
1
0 – 255
0
0
166
0 – 255
21
0 – 255
18
0 – 255
118
0 – 255
14
0 – 255
20
1–3
3 (Auto)
0–
1
1
0
0–
1
1
0
0–
1
1
0
0 – 512
0 – 512
1
1
1
0
0 – 20
0 – 20
0 – 20
0 – 20
10
10
10
0 – 20
0 – 20
0 – 20
0 – 20
0 – 20
10
10
10
10
0 – 20
0 – 20
0 – 20
0 – 20
0 – 20
0 – 20
0–
0
2
1
2
0–
0
2
1
2
0–
0
2
1
2
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
0
0
0
Screen
type
A
Category
SEGMENT
Item
4 digits
or less
setting
Quantity of
detection
adjustment
AW
BKUCR_ACTA (–
99%)
AX
Text on
mesh ON/
OFF (Auto/
Manual
mode)
Set range/Number of digits
– 99%
0–
2
100% – 199%
0–
2
THROUGH
200% –
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
0–
2
Check button for investigation
[(Auto) text on mesh]
0–
1
Check button for investigation
[(Auto) Text mesh (Under 1,
Line 1)
Check button for investigation
[(Auto) Text mesh (Under 2,
Line 1)
Check button for investigation
[(Auto) text print]
0–
1
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
1
0
1
0–
1
0
1
THROUGH
OFF
ON
BKUCR_ACTA
(100% – 199%)
AY
5 digits
or more
setting
Content
Display
THROUGH
OFF
ON
BKUCR_ACTA
(200% –)
A
MESH_CHECK1
B
MESH_CHECK2
C
MESH_CHECK3
ON
OFF
D
MESH_CHECK4
ON
OFF
E
THED3A(*1)
F
THED3B(*1)
0–
1
THED3A (Text on mesh ON/
OFF)
THED3B (Text on mesh ON/
OFF)
Default
value
0
Screen
type
A
0
0
0
B
0
0
0
1
0 – 65535
0
1000
0 – 65535
1000
(Initial screen)
46-36
0
TEST
COLOR
AUTO
A:
MODE ADJUSTMENT(ACS4DIGIT UNDER)
0
㨇
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46㧙33
0㨪 9 㨉
Purpose
A㧦 0
㧧 THCLMK_1
B㧦 0
㧧 THCLBK_1
Section
: –
C㧦 0
㧧 ACSMSK_1
Item
: Image quality
D㧦 0
㧧 THCLMK_2
Operation/Procedure
BACK
NEXT
OK
1)
0
COLOR AUTO
MODE ADJUSTMENT(ACS
* Only one button can be selected. The selected button is
highlighted.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-33
5DIGIT
OVER)
In the initial state, [RANGE] is selected.
PRESENT㧦 000010000
SET
NEW㧦
Select a category to be set.
* When [RANGE] (red judgment range), [COEFFICIENT] (output color coefficient) button is pressed to select each category, the selected button is highlighted and the set items of
the selected category are displayed.
(On the screen, [NEXT] is pressed.)
TEST
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to perform the fine adjustment of 2color (Red, Black) copy.
2)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
TH_ACS5ENLARGE
BACK
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
NEXT
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
4)
When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the currently entered data are saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 81
Category
Item
Display
Content
Color
button
Set
range
A
B
C
A
B
C
D
E
F
PARAMETER O
PARAMETER M
PARAMETER INTENSITY
RED
GREEN
BLUE
CYAN
Red adjustment coefficient O
Red adjustment coefficient M
Chroma saturation emphasis coefficient
R output color
G output color
B output color
C output color
M output color
Y output color
—
—
—
CMY
CMY
CMY
CMY
CMY
CMY
0 to 6
0 to 6
0 to 6
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
RANGE (Red judgment range)
COEFFICIENT (Output color coefficient)
MAGENTA
YELLOW
Default value
C
M
Y
3
3
3
0
255 255
255
0
255
255 255
0
255
0
0
0
255
0
0
0
255
0
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-36
TEST
RED/BLACK COLOR COPY ADJUSTMENT
A:
3
0
6
A㧦 3
㧧
PARAMETER
O
B㧦 3
㧧
PARAMETER
M
C㧦 3
㧧
PARAMETER
INTENSITY
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46㧙37
TEST
B&W IMAGE CREATE ADJUSTMENT
A:
35
㨇 0 㨪
RANGE
COEFFICIENT
OK
46-37
A㧦 35
㧧R/G
B㧦 0
㧧B/G
99 㨉
DEFAULT
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
46-39
Purpose
: Adjustment
Purpose
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to perform the BLACK image forming
adjustment.
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the image send sharpness
adjustment. (Only when FAX is installed)
Section
:
Section
: FAX
Item
: Image quality
Item
: Image quality
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
2)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Enter the set value with 10-key.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
3)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [YES] and [NO] buttons
become active.
4)
When [YES] button is pressed, [YES] button is highlighted.
The set value is saved to EEPROM.
* When [NO] button is pressed, the display returns to the set
value changing screen.
5)
When [DEFAULT] button is pressed, each set value (ratio) is
reset to the default value and the set value is saved to
EEPROM and RAM.
Item
Display
A
200 x 100[DPI]
OFF
200 x 200[DPI]
OFF
200 x 200[DPI] ON
B
Item
A
B
Display
R/G
B/G
Content
Gray forming setting (R/G)
Gray forming setting (B/G)
Set
range
0 to 99
0 to 99
Default
value
35
0
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
200 x 400[DPI]
OFF
200 x 400[DPI] ON
400 x 400[DPI]
OFF
400 x 400[DPI] ON
600 x 600[DPI]
OFF
600 x 600[DPI] ON
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 82
half tone
Set
range
0 to 2
Default
value
1
half tone
0 to 2
1
half tone
0 to 2
1
half tone
0 to 2
1
half tone
0 to 2
1
half tone
0 to 2
1
half tone
0 to 2
1
half tone
0 to 2
1
half tone
0 to 2
1
Content
200 x 100[DPI]
OFF
200 x 200[DPI]
OFF
200 x 200[DPI]
ON
200 x 400[DPI]
OFF
200 x 400[DPI]
ON
400 x 400[DPI]
OFF
400 x 400[DPI]
ON
600 x 600[DPI]
OFF
600 x 600[DPI]
ON
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-39
TEST
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
IMAGE SEND SHARPNESS ADJUSTMENT
A:
1
㨇 0 㨪 2 㨉
A㧦 1
㧧 200
100
DPI
OFF
B㧦 1
㧧 200
200
DPI
OFF
C:
1
㧧 200
200
DPI
ON
D:
1
㧧 200
400
DPI
OFF
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. Printing for
the adjustment is started.
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared.
OK
After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
* When [↑], [↓], [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
46-40
Purpose
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment. (Collective adjustment of all the
modes). (Only when FAX is installed)
Section
: MFP/FAX
Item
: Image quality
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is
pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Operation/Procedure
1)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
2)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. Printing for
the adjustment is started.
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared.
After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
* When [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the
data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is
pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
Display item &
Detail of display
EXPOSURELEVEL
(ALL)
A
Content
Exposure data value
(Collective)
TEST
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
50
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed after changing and settlement of
exposure adjustment values A to F, the data are saved to EEPROM
and RAM and set to item G at the same time.
0
A:
TEST
㧧 EXPOSURE LEVEL(ALL)
A:
50
EXECUTE
ADJUSTMENT(FAX㧦NORMAL)
50
㨇 1㨪
㨇 1㨪 99㨉
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-41
EXPOSURE
ADJUSTMENT(FAX㧦ALL)
A㧦 50
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
1 (AUTO)
Example: EXECUTE MODE: AUTO
0
EXPOSURE
Auto
Exposure 1
Exposure 2
Exposure 3
Exposure 4
Exposure 5
Print
Auto
mode Exposure 1
Exposure 2
Exposure 3
Exposure 4
Exposure 5
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1
2
3
4
5
6
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-40
Content
* Items G are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Item
Display item &
Detail of display
AUTO
EXPOSURE1
EXPOSURE2
EXPOSURE3
EXPOSURE4
EXPOSURE5
EXECUTE
AUTO
MODE
EXP1
EXP2
EXP3
EXP4
EXP5
99㨉
A㧦 50
㧧 AUTO
B㧦 50
㧧 EXPOSURE1
C㧦 50
㧧
EXPOSURE2
D㧦 50
㧧
EXPOSURE3
EXECUTE
OK
46-41
46-42
Purpose
Purpose
: Adjustment
OK
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Normal). (Only when FAX is
installed)
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Fine text). (Only when FAX is
installed)
Section
: MFP/FAX
Section
: MFP/FAX
: Image quality
Item
: Image quality
Item
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the operation is invalid.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 83
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
Enter the set value with 10-key.
* When [↑], [↓], [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared.
3)
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. Printing for
the adjustment is started.
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Display item & Detail of display
AUTO
EXPOSURE1
EXPOSURE2
EXPOSURE3
EXPOSURE4
EXPOSURE5
AUTO H_TONE
EXPOSURE1 H_TONE
EXPOSURE2 H_TONE
EXPOSURE3 H_TONE
EXPOSURE4 H_TONE
EXPOSURE5 H_TONE
EXECUTE MODE
AUTO
EXP1
EXP2
EXP3
EXP4
EXP5
AUTO H_TONE
EXP1 H_TONE
EXP2 H_TONE
EXP3 H_TONE
EXP4 H_TONE
EXP5 H_TONE
Content
Fine/Auto
Fine/Exposure 1
Fine/Exposure 2
Fine/Exposure 3
Fine/Exposure 4
Fine/Exposure 5
Fine/Auto/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone
Print mode
Fine/Auto
Fine/Exposure 1
Fine/Exposure 2
Fine/Exposure 3
Fine/Exposure 4
Fine/Exposure 5
Fine/Auto/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone
* Items M are displayed as "Display item : Detail of display."
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed after changing and settlement
of the exposure adjustment values A to L, the data are saved to
EEPROM and RAM and reflected to item M at the same time.
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-42
A:
50
[ 1~ 99]
AUTO
B : 50
EXPOSURE1
C : 50
EXPOSURE2
D : 50
EXPOSURE3
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. Printing for
the adjustment is started.
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared.
After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : FFINE)
A : 50
* When [↑], [↓], [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
EXECUTE
OK
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
46-43
Purpose
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Super Fine). (Only when FAX is
installed)
Section
: MFP/FAX
Item
: Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1)
Default value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
1 (AUTO)
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
Example: EXECUTE MODE: AUTO
TEST
Set range
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 84
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Display item & Detail of display
AUTO
EXPOSURE1
EXPOSURE2
EXPOSURE3
EXPOSURE4
EXPOSURE5
AUTO H_TONE
EXPOSURE1 H_TONE
EXPOSURE2 H_TONE
EXPOSURE3 H_TONE
EXPOSURE4 H_TONE
EXPOSURE5 H_TONE
EXE-CUTE MODE
AUTO
EXP1
EXP2
EXP3
EXP4
EXP5
AUTO H_TONE
EXP1 H_TONE
EXP2 H_TONE
EXP3 H_TONE
EXP4 H_TONE
EXP5 H_TONE
Content
Super Fine/Auto
Super Fine/Exposure 1
Super Fine/Exposure 2
Super Fine/Exposure 3
Super Fine/Exposure 4
Super Fine/Exposure 5
Super Fine/Auto/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone
Print mode
Super Fine/Auto
Super Fine/Exposure 1
Super Fine/Exposure 2
Super Fine/Exposure 3
Super Fine/Exposure 4
Super Fine/Exposure 5
Super Fine/Auto/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone
* Items M are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: EXECUTE MODE: AUTO
1)
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
0
CLOSE
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : SUPER FINE)
A : 50
A:
[ 1~ 99]
50
;
AUTO
B : 50
;
EXPOSURE1
C : 50
;
EXPOSURE2
D : 50
;
EXPOSURE3
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
EXECUTE
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. Printing for
the adjustment is started.
OK
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared.
46-44
Purpose
: Adjustment
After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Ultra Fine). (Only when FAX is
installed)
Section
: MFP/FAX
Item
: Image quality
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed after changing and settlement
of the exposure adjustment values A to L, the data are saved to
EEPROM and RAM and reflected to item M at the same time.
SIMULATION NO.46-43
Default value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
1 (AUTO)
Operation/Procedure
TEST
Set range
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
* When [↑], [↓], [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
Display item & Detail of display
AUTO
EXPOSURE1
EXPOSURE2
EXPOSURE3
EXPOSURE4
EXPOSURE5
AUTO H_TONE
EXPOSURE1 H_TONE
EXPOSURE2 H_TONE
EXPOSURE3 H_TONE
EXPOSURE4 H_TONE
EXPOSURE5 H_TONE
Content
Ultra Fine/Auto
Ultra Fine/Exposure 1
Ultra Fine/Exposure 2
Ultra Fine/Exposure 3
Ultra Fine/Exposure 4
Ultra Fine/Exposure 5
Ultra Fine/Auto/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 85
Default value
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Item
M
Display item & Detail of display
EXECUTE MODE AUTO
EXP1
EXP2
EXP3
EXP4
EXP5
AUTO H_TONE
EXP1 H_TONE
EXP2 H_TONE
EXP3 H_TONE
EXP4 H_TONE
EXP5 H_TONE
Content
Ultra Fine/Auto
Ultra Fine/Exposure 1
Ultra Fine/Exposure 2
Ultra Fine/Exposure 3
Ultra Fine/Exposure 4
Ultra Fine/Exposure 5
Ultra Fine/Auto/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone
Print mode
* Items M are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: EXECUTE MODE: AUTO
1)
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
0
CLOSE
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
EXPOSURE ADJUSTMENT(FAX : ULTRA FINE)
A : 50
A:
[ 1~ 99]
50
;
AUTO
B : 50
;
EXPOSURE1
C : 50
;
EXPOSURE2
D : 50
;
EXPOSURE3
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
EXECUTE
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the FAX exposure level
adjustment and the individual setting
(600DPI). (Only when FAX is installed)
Section
: FAX
Item
: Image quality
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. Printing for
the adjustment is started.
OK
46-45
Purpose
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed after changing and settlement of
exposure adjustment values A to L, the data are saved to EEPROM
and RAM and set to item M at the same time.
SIMULATION NO.46-44
Default value
1 (AUTO)
Operation/Procedure
TEST
Default value
1 to 12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared.
After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
* When [↑], [↓], [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed,
the data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button
is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Display item & Detail of display
AUTO
EXPOSURE1
EXPOSURE2
EXPOSURE3
EXPOSURE4
EXPOSURE5
AUTO H_TONE
EXPOSURE1 H_TONE
EXPOSURE2 H_TONE
EXPOSURE3 H_TONE
EXPOSURE4 H_TONE
EXPOSURE5 H_TONE
EXECUTE MODE AUTO
EXP1
EXP2
EXP3
EXP4
EXP5
AUTO H_TONE
EXP1 H_TONE
EXP2 H_TONE
EXP3 H_TONE
EXP4 H_TONE
EXP5 H_TONE
Content
600dpi/Auto
600dpi/Exposure 1
600dpi/Exposure 2
600dpi/Exposure 3
600dpi/Exposure 4
600dpi/Exposure 5
600dpi/Auto/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 1/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 2/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 3/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 4/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 5/Half tone
Print mode
600dpi/Auto
600dpi/Exposure 1
600dpi/Exposure 2
600dpi/Exposure 3
600dpi/Exposure 4
600dpi/Exposure 5
600dpi/Auto/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 1/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 2/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 3/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 4/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 5/Half tone
* Items M are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: EXECUTE MODE: AUTO
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 86
Set range
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Default value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
1 (AUTO)
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-45
TEST
EXPOSURE
A:
Operation/Procedure
1)
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
ADJUSTMENT(FAX㧦600DPI)
50
㨇 1㨪 99㨉
A㧦 50
㧧 AUTO
B㧦 50
㧧 EXPOSURE1
C㧦 50
㧧
EXPOSURE2
D㧦 50
㧧
EXPOSURE3
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
EXECUTE
OK
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
46-47
Purpose
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the JPEG compression rate in
Copy/Scanner (PUSH SCAN).
Section
: —
Item
: Setting
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the currently entered data are saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
Category
COPY (COLOR)
Item
A
COPY (GRAY)
B
PUSH SCAN (COLOR)
C
Display
COPY (C)
LOW
MIDDLE
HIGH
COPY (G)
LOW
MIDDLE
HIGH
SCAN (C)
MIDDLE1
MIDDLE2
MIDDLE3
PUSH SCAN (GRAY)
D
SCAN (G)
MIDDLE1
MIDDLE2
MIDDLE3
Content
Low compression (Color)
Middle compression (Color)
High compression (Color)
Low compression (Gray)
Middle compression (Gray)
High compression (Gray)
Middle compression mode 1, for compression, Q table (for
brightness, color difference)
Middle compression mode 1, for decompression, Q table (for
brightness, color difference)
Middle compression mode 2, for compression, Q table (for
brightness, color difference)
Middle compression mode 2, for decompression, Q table (for
brightness, color difference)
Middle compression mode 3, for compression, Q table
Middle compression mode 3, for decompression, Q table
Middle compression mode 1, for compression, Q table
Middle compression mode 1, for decompression, Q table
Middle compression mode 2, for compression, Q table
Middle compression mode 2, for decompression, Q table
Middle compression mode 3, for compression, Q table
Middle compression mode 3, for decompression, Q table
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46̆47
㨇
0
0㨪
2 㨉
A㧦 0
㧧 COPY(C) 㧦 LOW
B㧦 0
㧧 COPY(G) 㧦 LOW
C㧦 0
㧧 SCAN(C) 㧦 MIDDLE㧝
C㧦 0
㧧 SCAN(G) 㧦 MIDDLE㧝
1
2
0
0 (MIDDLE1)
1
2
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
48
48-1
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/
[BLACK] key.
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the magnification adjustment in the scan system (for RSPF).
Section
: RSPF/Scanner
Item
: Image quality (Size/magnification ratio)
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to
the copy basic screen of simulation.
Operation/Procedure
1)
0 (MIDDLE1)
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
OK
Purpose
0 (LOW)
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
COPYSCAN COMPRESS RATE ADJUSTMENT
A:
Default value
0 (LOW)
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
0
TEST
Set range
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 87
Item
Display
A
CCD (MAIN)
B
CCD (SUB)
C
SPF (MAIN)
D
SPF (SUB)
E
SPFB (MAIN)
F
SPFB(SUB)
Content
SCAN, main scan
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
SCAN, sub scan
magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
RSPF document front
surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Main scan)
RSPF document front
surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub scan)
RSPF document back
surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Main scan)
RSPF document back
surface magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub scan)
3)
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
Item
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
Display
A
B
MR (HI)
MR (MID)
C
D
MR (LO)
RSPF (HI)
E
RSPF (MID)
F
RSPF(LO)
㨇
1 㨪99 㨉
A:
CLOSE
1 to 99
50
SPEED
ADJUSTMENT
1㨪99
㨉
A㧦 50
㧧 MR(HI)
B㧦 50
㧧 MR(MID)
C㧦 50
㧧
MR(LO)
D㧦 50
㧧
RSPF(HI))
㧧 CCD(MAIN)
B㧦 50
㧧 CCD(SUB)
C㧦 50
㧧
SPF(MAIN)
D㧦 50
㧧
SPF(SUB)
OK
OK
48-6
Purpose
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the rotating speed of each
motor.
48-5
Purpose
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : This adjustment is executed when a satisfactory result is not obtained when a different copy magnification ratio is specified and
copying is made after adjustment of the sub
scanning direction image magnification
ratio with SIM 48-1.
Section
:
Item
: Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1)
When there is an error in the copy magnification ratio in enlargement copy, the adjustment value of low speed mode is adjusted.
This is the magnification ratio adjustment in
the scan system.
Section
: RSPF/Scanner
Item
: Adjustment
Only one button can be selected.
In the initial state, [COLOR] is selected.
2)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
Operation/Procedure
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Enter the set value with 10-key.
Select a mode to be set.
* When [COLOR], [MONO], or [HEAVY] button is selected,
the selected button is highlighted and the set item of the
selected mode is displayed.
When there is an error in the copy magnification ratio in reduction copy, the adjustment value of high speed mode is adjusted.
2)
50
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.48㧙05
50
㨇
㩷㩷
1)
1 to 99
0
TEST
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT
50
50
50
LO=78.5mm/sec
MOTOR
A:
1 to 99
1 to 99
MID=157mm/sec
0
A㧦 50
Default
value
50
50
* This adjustment affects PC scanning and other scanning other
than copy.
SIMULATION NO.48㧙01
Scanner motor (High speed)
Scanner motor (Reference
speed)
Scanner motor (Low speed)
Document feed (SPF) motor
(High speed)
Document feed (SPF) motor
(Reference speed)
Document feed (SPF) motor
(Low speed)
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
HI=248mm/sec
* When the set value is increased by 1, the magnification ratio is
increased by 0.02%.
TEST
Content
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
4)
When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the currently entered data are saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
The correction value of the specified motor is changed. The
smaller the correction value is, the slower the speed is, and
vice versa. When the value is changed by 1, the speed is
changed by 0.1%.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 88
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/
[BLACK] key.
* When USB is not connected, "INSERT A STORAGE FIRMWARE STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] button is
pressed, the display is shifted to the folder or file selection
screen.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to
the copy basic screen of simulation.
2)
Item
A
Display
RRM
B
Resist motor
correction value
DVM_K/
BTM
C
FSM
D
DM_K
E
PFM
Mode select
Color
COLOR
Monochrome
MONO
Heavy paper
HEAVY
Developing K
motor correction
value
Color
COLOR
Fusing motor
correction value
Color
COLOR
Monochrome
MONO
Heavy paper
HEAVY
Color
COLOR
Drum K motor
correction value
DM_CL
F
Content
Drum CL motor
correction value
Monochrome
MONO
Heavy paper
HEAVY
Monochrome
MONO
Heavy paper
HEAVY
Color
COLOR
Heavy paper
HEAVY
Transport motor correction value
COLOR
Set
range
Default
value
1 to 99
50
* The number of buttons depends on the number of files in the
inserted USB memory.
A folder name or file name is displayed on the button.
If the folder name or file name is of more than 34 characters,
only 34 characters are displayed.
54
1 to 99
45
For a folder name, "" is displayed at the head.
1 to 99
* When [ .. ] button is pressed on the file selection screen, the
display is shifted to the folder or file selection screen. On the
folder or file selection screen, the keys are disabled.
37
43
* The path of the folder or file is displayed on the title section.
1 to 69
43
1 to 69
43
3)
The current version and the update version are displayed for
each firmware.
1 to 99
50
4)
When a button of the firmware to be updated is selected, it is
highlighted.
If the path is of more than 50 characters, only 50 characters
are displayed.
*1
G
POM
Paper exit motor correction value
COLOR
*1
1 to 99
50
H
FUSER
SETTING
Fusing speed switch timing
HEAVY
1 to 99
50
* When the selected button is pressed again, its selection is
canceled (normal display).
* When [ALL] button is pressed, all the buttons are selected
and highlighted.
*1: Common to COLOR, MONO, and HEAVY paper. The item is
displayed only when COLOR button is highlighted.
* If there is a page over [↑], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
* Since the belt is driven in cooperation with the developing K
motor (DVM-K) in this machine, the DVM-K also serves as the
belt motor (BTM).
When there is a page under [↓], the display becomes active
and the page is shifted down.When there is no page under
[↓], the display grays out and the operation is invalid.
* Adjustment value
The greater the correction value is, the higher the speed is, and
vice versa. When the value is changed by 1, the speed is
changed by about 0.1%.
5)
A3W, A3, WLT, EXTRA, USER EXTRA (420mm or above) are
large sizes.
* If no firmware button is selected, [EXECUTE] button is disabled.
6)
0
VELOCITY
A:
㨇
1㨪99 㨉
COLOR
* When [NO] and [EXECUTE] button are pressed, the display
returns to the firmware select screen. At that time, the
selected firmware remains highlighted, and [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
ADJUSTMENT
50
A㧦 50
RRM
B㧦 45
DVM_K/BTM
C㧦 40
FSM
D㧦 43
DM _K
MONO
7)
HEAVY
OK
Press [YES] button.
[YES] button is highlighted, and update of the selected firmware is executed.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.48 06
Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
are changed from gray-out display to active display.
* Paper size detection method for fusing motor (FSM) normal
paper
TEST
When a firmware update folder or file button is pressed, the
display is shifted to the firmware update screen.
After completion of update, the result is displayed.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLET" is displayed. In case of an error, "ERROR" and the firmware where
the error occurred are displayed.
* The operation cannot be interrupted midway.
* When [OK] button is pressed, the machine is rebooted.
49
* When [CA] key is pressed on the folder or file selection screen or
the file selection screen, the simulation is terminated.
49-1
* When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed on the folder or file
selection screen or the file selection screen, the display returns
to the sub code entry screen.
Purpose
: Version-up
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the firmware update.
Section
: —
Item
: Adjustment
* When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed to exit
the simulation on the file version display screen and the following
screens before execution, the machine is rebooted.
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: To update the firmware, set DIP SW 2 on the MFP control
PWB to ON.
1)
Insert the USB memory into the machine.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 89
Display item
Item description
CONFIG
ICU (MAIN)
ICU (BOOTM)
ICU (BOOTS)
LANGUAGE
GRAPHIC
SLIST
PCU (BOOT)
PCU (MAIN)
DESK (BOOT)
DESK (MAIN)
A4LCC (BOOT)
A4LCC (MAIN)
FIN (BOOT)
FIN (MAIN)
INSERTER (BOOT)
INSERTER (MAIN)
1KFIN (BOOT)
1KFIN (MAIN)
4KFIN (BOOT)
4KFIN (MAIN)
A3LCC (BOOT)
A3LCC (MAIN)
SCU (BOOT)
SCU (MAIN)
DSPF (BOOT)
DSPF (MAIN)
FAX1 (BOOT)
FAX1 (MAIN)
FAX OPTION (BOOT)
FAX OPTION (MAIN)
ESCP_FONT
PDL_FONT
ANIMATION
IMAGE_DATA
COLOR PROFILE
Configuration data
ICU main section former half
ICU boot section main
ICU boot section sub
Language support data program
(Generic name)
Graphic data for L-LCD
SLIST data for L-LCD
PCU boot section
PCU main section
Desk unit boot section
Desk unit main section
Side LCC (A4) boot section
Side LCC (A4) main section
Inner finisher boot section
Inner finisher main section
Inserter boot section *1
Inserter main section *1
1K Finisher boot section
1K Finisher main section
4K Finisher boot section *1
4K Finisher main section *1
Side LCC (A3) boot section *1
Side LCC (A3) main section *1
SCU
Main section
DSPF boot section *1
DSPF main section *1
FAX1 line (Boot section)
FAX1 line (Main section)
FAX2 line (Boot section)
FAX2 line (Main section)
ESC/P fonts
PDL fonts
Animation data
Image ASIC data
Color profile
0
Number of
digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
TEST
FIRMWARE
FILE1
FOLDER2
..
1/1
49-3
Purpose
: Version-up
Function (Purpose) : The Operation Manual saved in the hard
disk is updated.
Section
: —
Item
: Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
Insert the USB memory into the machine.
* When USB is not connected, "INSERT A STORAGE EMANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] button is
pressed, the display is shifted to the folder selection screen
1.
2)
8 digits
8 digits
When a operation manual update folder button is pressed, the
display is shifted to the operation manual update screen.
* A folder name is displayed on the button.
* "" is displayed at the head.
If the folder name is of more than 34 characters, only 34
characters are displayed.
* When [ .. ] button is pressed on the folder selection screen 2,
the display is shifted to the folder selection screen 1. On the
folder or file selection screen, the keys are disabled.
* The path of the folder or file is displayed on the title section.
If the path is of more than 50 characters, only 50 characters
are displayed.
3)
The current version and the update version are displayed.
4)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
are changed from gray-out display to active display.
Display item
CONF
ICUM
ICUBM
ICUBS
LANG
GRAPH
SLIST
PCUB
PCUM
DESKB
DESKM
LCC4B
LCC4M
FINB
FINM
FIN1B
FIN1M
SCUB
SCUM
FAXB
FAXM
FAXOPB
FAXOPM
ESCP
PDL
ANIME
IMGDT
FOLDER1
FILE2
1)
*1: Not supported for the MX-2300/2700 series.
UPDATE/usbbd00
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.49-01
Item description
Configuration data
ICU main section former half
ICU boot section main
ICU boot section sub
Language support data program (Generic name)
Graphic data for L-LCD
SLIST data for L-LCD
PCU Boot section
PCU main section
Desk unit Boot section
Desk unit main section
Side LCC(A4) Boot section
Side LCC(A4) main section
Inner Finisher Boot section
Inner Finisher main section
1K Finisher Boot section
1K Finisher main section
SCU
Main section
FAX1 Boot section
FAX1 main section
FAX2 Boot section
FAX2 main section
ESC/P fonts
PDL fonts
Animation data
Image ASIC data
5)
Press [YES] button.
[YES] button is highlighted, and update of the selected operation manual is executed.
* When [NO] and [EXECUTE] button are pressed, the display
returns to the version display screen.
6)
After completion of update, the result is displayed.
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLET" is displayed. In case of an error, "ERROR" is displayed.
* When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTING] key is pressed during
execution, the operation is interrupted and the machine is rebooted.
* When [OK] button is pressed, the machine is rebooted.
* When [CA] key is pressed on the folder selection screen 1 and 2,
the simulation is terminated.
* When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed on the folder selection screen 1 and 2, the display returns to the sub code entry
screen.
* When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed to exit
the simulation on the version display screen and the following
screens before execution, the machine is rebooted.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 90
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.49-03
E-MANUAL
UPDATE/usbbd00
FOLDER1
FOLDER2
FOLDER3
MANUAL1
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.49-03
E-MANUAL UPDATE/usbbd00
MANUAL2
50-1
Purpose
1/1
..
50
Section
: —
Item
: Image quality (Image position)
Operation/Procedure
1)
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the copy image position on
print paper in the copy mode and to adjust
the void area (image loss). (The similar
adjustment can be executed with SIM50-05
and 50-02 (Simple method). (Document
table mode))
MANUAL3
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
1/1
..
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to
the copy basic screen of simulation.
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/
[BLACK] key.
Item
A
Display item
Lead edge adjustment
RRCA
value
B
C
D
E
F
G
RRCB-CS12
RRCB-CS34
RRCB-LCC
RRCB-MFT
RRCB-ADU
Image loss quantity set
value
H
I
LEAD
SIDE
Void amount setting
DENA
J
DENB
K
FRONT/REAR
Description
Document lead edge reference position (OC)
The timing from start of document scan to recognition of the image lead
edge is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
* The smaller the set value is, the faster the timing is. The greater the set
value is, the slower the timing is.
Resist motor ON timing adjustment
Standard cassette
The timing to turn ON the resist roller from reception Desk
of the resist signal is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
LCC
* The smaller the set value is, the faster the timing
Manual feed
is. The greater the set value is, the slower the
ADU
timing is.
Lead edge image loss quantity setting
The lead edge image loss quantity is specified. The difference between the
document lead edge scan start position and the document lead edge
(0.1mm/step))
* The greater the value is, the grater the image loss is.
Side image loss quantity setting
The side image loss quantity is specified. (Document width – Document
edge scan range) / 2 (0.1mm/step)
(The rear edge image loss quantity is fixed to 0. (Without adjustment))
* The greater the value is, the greater the image loss is.
Print lead edge adjustment
The void quantity formed at the paper lead edge is specified. (0.1mm/step)
* The greater the value is, the greater the void is.
Sub scan direction print range adjustment
The void quantity formed at the paper rear edge is specified. (0.1mm/step)
* The greater the value is, the greater the void is.
FRONT/REAR void amount adjustment
The void quantities formed at the right and left edges are adjusted.
(0.1mm/step)
* The greater the value is, the greater the void is.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 91
Set range
0 to 99
Default value
50
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
50
50
50
50
0 to 99
30
0 to 99
20
1 to 99
30
1 to 99
20
1 to 99
20
1 : Dec. 15 2005
0
EDGE
A:
ADJUSTMENT
50
0
99
4)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50㧙01
TEST
LEAD
1
VALUE
A㧦 50
㧧
RRCA
B㧦 50
㧧
RRCB-CS12
C㧦 50
㧧
RRCB-CS34
D㧦 50
㧧
RRCB-LCC
Measure the distances L1 and L2 on the copied image in the
unit of 0.1mm, and multiple the distance values with 10, and
enter the obtained values. (Be sure to enter L1 and L2
together.)
• L1: Distance between the copy image lead edge position
and the scale of 10mm.
• L2: Distance between the paper lead edge and the copy
image lead edge position.
OK
L1
50-2
Purpose
Paper lead
edge
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the copy image position on
print paper in the copy mode and to adjust
the void area (image loss). (Simple adjustment)
(Similar to SIM50-01. This simulation provides the simpler method.)
Section
: –
Item
: Image quality (Image position)
L2
Operation/Procedure
1)
In advance to this adjustment, execute the magnification ratio
adjustment in the sub scanning direction (SIM48-01).
2)
Select "TRAY"and set 0 to L1 and L2.
Fig. 1
* L1 and L2 are changed to 0, the following adjustment values
are automatically set.
RRCA adjustment value: 50
RRCB adjustment value: 90
(Reference value 50 + paper lead 49 (4.9mm))
1
3)
400% enlargement copy
Place a ruler along the left edge of the document table, and
make a black copy in 400%.
5)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the current entered value
is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
6)
Make a black copy in 100%, and adjust the rear edge void.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
copy basic screen of simulation.
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.
Item
A
B
C
Display item
Actual measured L1
value
L2
Image loss
LEAD
quantity set value
D
E
SIDE
Void quantity
setting
DENA
F
DENB
G
FRONT/REAR
Description
Distance between the image lead edge and the scale of 10mm (Platen 400%,
unit of 0.1mm)
Distance between the paper lead edge and the image lead edge (unit of 0.1mm)
Lead edge image loss quantity setting
The lead edge image loss quantity is specified. Difference between the
document lead edge scan start position and the document lead edge
* The greater the value is, the greater the image loss is.
Side image loss quantity setting
The side image loss (SIDE) is specified. (Document width – Document edge
scan range / 2
(The rear edge image loss quantity is fixed to 0. (Without adjustment))
* The greater the value is, the greater the image loss is.
Print lead edge adjustment
The void quantity at the paper lead edge is specified.
* The greater the value is, the greater the void is.
Sub scanning direction print range adjustment
The void quantity at the paper rear edge is specified.
* The greater the value is, the greater the void is.
FRONT/REAR void quantity adjustment
The void quantities at the left and right edges of paper are specified.
* The greater the value is, the greater the void is.
Set range
0 to 999
Default value
–
0 to 999
0 to 99
–
30
0 to 99
20
1 to 99
30
1 to 99
20
1 to 99
20
A to G:1step = 0.1mm
A. Document lead edge reference position: (L1), B. Paper lead
edge positions
Except for A and B, same as the item adjusted with SIM50-01.
The values adjusted with A and B are reflected to the document
lead edge reference position (RRC-A) and all the paper lead edge
positions (RRCB-**).
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-02
TEST
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE(CALC)
A:
60
0
999
A㧦
60
㧧
L1
B㧦
0
㧧
L2
C㧦
30
㧧
LEAD
D㧦
15
㧧
SIDE
EXECUTE
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 92
* When [↑], [↓], [OK], [EXECUTE] button, [COLOR], or
[BLACK] key is pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM
and RAM.
50-5
Purpose
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the lead edge adjustment value
which affects only the printer print.
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
Section
: Printer
Item
: Image quality
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occurrence of an interruption, self print is resumed.
4)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Measure the dimensions of void area in the right and the left
frame direction of the adjustment pattern to check that the
dimensions are as follows:
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
If DEN-C = 3.0 ± 2.0mm and DEN-B = 3.0 ± 2.0mm, there is no
need to adjust.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If the values are as shown above, there is no need to adjust.
If not, go to step 5.
5)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and printing for adjustment is started with the current set value.
Change the adjustment values of A (DEN-C) and B (DEN-B).
When the adjustment value of A (DEN-A) is decreased by 1,
the sub scanning direction print start position is shifted toward
the paper lead edge by 0.1mm.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
Check the adjustment pattern image position.
When the adjustment value of B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1,
the paper transport direction print range is extended toward
the rear edge by 0.1mm.
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared.
6)
Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the conditions of step 4 are satisfied.
After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
A
Display item &
Detail of display
DEN-C
Printer print lead edge
adjustment
1 to 99
Default
value
30
B
DEN-B
Sub scanning direction print
range adjustment
1 to 99
20
C
FRONT/REAR
1 to 99
20
D
E
MULTI COUNT
PAPER
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
DUPLEX
YES
NO
FRONT/REAR void quantity
adjustment
Print quantity
Cassette
Manual feed
select
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Duplex print
Selected
select
Not selected
1 to 99
1 to 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 1
0
1
1
2 (CS1)
Item
F
Description of item
Set range
* Items E and F are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER:CS1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-05
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE (PRINTER)
A:
30
[ 1~99 ]
1 (NO)
50-6
Purpose
0
TEST
Remark
Adjustment value to fit with the print lead edge for the printer.
When the adjustment value of this item is decreased by 1, the
printer print start position is shifted toward the lead edge in the
paper transport direction by 0.1mm.
Void quantity formed at the paper rear edge. When the adjustment
value of Item B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1, the sub scanning
direction print range adjustment value in the paper transport
direction is decreased by 0.1mm.
Adjustment of void quantity formed at the right and left edges of
paper. The greater the value is, the greater the void quantity is.
A : 30
;
DEN-C
B : 20
;
DEN-B
C : 20
;
FRONT/REAR
D: 1
;
MULTI COUNT
EXECUTE
OK
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the copy image position on
the print paper in the copy mode and to
adjust the void area (image loss). (The similar adjustment can be executed with
SIM50-7 (Simple method).) (RSPF mode)
Section
: RSPF
Item
: Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 93
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, it is highlighted and the currently entered data are
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
50-7
Purpose
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the copy image position on
print paper in the copy mode and to adjust
the void area (image loss). (The similar
adjustment can be executed with SIM50-6
(Simple type).) (RSPF mode)
Section
: RSPF
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
copy basic screen of simulation.
Item
: Image quality
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.
1)
In advance, execute the SPF sub scanning direction magnification ratio (SIM48-01).
2)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
Item
Display item
A
Description
SIDE1
B
SIDE2
C
Image
loss
quantity
setting
SIDE1
D
E
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE1)
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE1)
F
Image
loss
quantity
setting
SIDE2
G
H
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE2)
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE2)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE2)
Front surface
document
scan start
position
adjustment
(CCD)
Back surface
document
scan start
position
adjustment
(CCD)
Front surface
image loss
quantity
setting
Front surface
side image
loss quantity
setting
Front surface
rear edge
image loss
quantity
adjustment
Back surface
image loss
quantity
setting
Back surface
side image
loss quantity
setting
Back surface
rear edge
image loss
quantity
adjustment
Set
range
1 to 99
Operation/Procedure
The highlighted section is and the value is displayed in the setting area.
Default
value
50
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
1 to 99
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
50
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
0 to 99
Set L4 and L5 to 0.
When the values of L4 and L5 are changed to 0, the following
adjustment values are automatically set.
20
Adjustment values of SIDE1, 2: 50
After completion of calculation, the value of L4/L5 returns to 0.
0 to 99
20
0 to 99
30
4)
Set the magnification ratio to 200%, and press [COLOR] or
[BLAC] key to make a copy.
5)
Measure the copied image, and enter the measure value of
distance A (RSPF) to L4 and L5 in the unit of 0.1mm.
L4 : Distance A (SPF front surface: 200%) (Unit: 0.1mm)
L5 : Distance A (SPF back surface: 200%) (Unit: 0.1mm)
0 to 99
20
0 to 99
20
0 to 99
30
A,B: The greater the value is, the slower the scan timing is.
The greater the adjustment values of C to H are, the greater the
image loss is.
Distance A
A to H: 1 step = 0.1 m
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
copy basic screen of simulation.
The RSPF rear edge image loss is provided against shade.
0
SIMULATION NO.50-06
TEST
CLOSE
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE(SPF)
A:
50
[
1~
99 ]
A : 50
;
SIDE1
B : 50
;
SIDE2
C : 20
;
LEAD EDGE
D : 20
;
FRONT_REAR
OK
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 94
1 : Dec. 15 2005
Item
A
Display item
L4
B
L5
C
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE1)
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE1)
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE2)
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE2)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE2)
D
E
F
G
H
Description of item
Distance from the front
surface image lead edge to
the scale of 10mm (SPF
200%, unit 0.1mm)
Distance from the back
surface image lead edge to
the scale of 10mm (SPF
200%, unit 0.1mm)
Image loss quantity setting
SIDE1
Image loss quantity setting
SIDE2
Set
range
0 to 999
0
Default
value
—
0 to 999
CLOSE
LEAD EDGE ADJUSTMENT (SPF CALC.).
C:
20
0
—
999
A
0
L4
B
0
L5
C
20
LEAD_EDGE(SIDE1)
D
20
FRONT_REAR(SIDE1)
EXECUTE
0 to 99
20
0 to 99
20
0 to 99
30
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the print off-center for each
tray.
0 to 99
20
0 to 99
20
Image print center position adjustment
(Adjusted for each paper feed section.)
0 to 99
30
50-10
Purpose
: Adjustment
Section
: –
Item
: Image quality (Image position)
Operation/Procedure
1)
A to H: 1step=0.1mm
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
C to H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is
increased.
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and displayed on the set setting area.
* It is linked with items C to H of SIM50-6.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
1
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
1
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
SIDE1 adjustment value: Old set value -
value *
( L4 - Correction
)
2*
SIDE2 adjustment value: Old set value +
value *
(L5 - Correction
)
2*
2
2
*1: Correction value = (Measurement reference 10mm –
Lead edge image loss set value) x 10 x (Magnification ratio/
100)
1
SIMULATION NO.50-07
TEST
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and printing for adjustment is started with the current set value.
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared.
Example of calculation: 140 = (100 – 30) x 10 x (200%/100)
*2: 2 = (Magnification ratio 200%/100)
1 If L4 = 0, do not make calculation of SIDE1, but adjust the value of
L5.
If L5 = 0, do not make calculation of SIDE2, but adjust the value of
L4.
If L4 = L5 = 0, the adjustment values of SIDE1 and SIDE2 are the
default values.
After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
* When [↑], [↓], [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed,
the data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is
pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occurrence of
an interruption, self printing is resumed.
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
Display item & Detail of display
BK-MAG
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
ADU
MULTI COUNT
PAPER
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
DUPLEX
YES
NO
Item content
Main scan print magnification ratio BK
Print off-center adjustment value (manual feed)
Print off-center adjustment value (Cassette 1)
Print off-center adjustment value (Cassette 2)
Print off-center adjustment value (Cassette 3)
Print off-center adjustment value (Cassette 4)
Print off-center adjustment value (LCC)
Print off-center adjustment value (ADU)
Print quantity
Cassette select
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Duplex print select
Selected
Not selected
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 95
Set range
60 to 140
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 999
1 to 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 1
0
1
Default value
100
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
1
2 (CS1)
Writing
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
1 (NO)
NO
* Item A adjustment position
The main scanning direction paper size is greater than 216mm:
→ Reference: Main scanning direction print front image center
position (160mm from the BD sensor in the LSU unit) ±120mm in
the main scanning direction
Shift the pixel center position. The default value of the center is
3750 pixels.
A to C: When the adjustment value is increased, the center position
is shifted to the rear side. 1step=0.1mm
0
The main scanning direction paper size is 257mm or less:
Reference: Main scanning direction print front image center position (160mm from the BD sensor in the LSU unit) ±60mm in the
main scanning direction
SIMULATION NO.50㧙12
TEST
CLOSE
ORIGINAL CENTER OFFSET SETUP
A:
* Adjustment direction
+ direction: Enlargement of magnification ratio
㨇
50
1㨪
99 㨉
A㧦
50
㧧 OC
B㧦
50
㧧 SPF(SIDE1)
C㧦
50
㧧 SPF(SIDE2)
- direction: Reduction of magnification ratio
* When the adjustment value of item B to H is decreased by 1, the
main scanning print position is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm.
OK
* When the adjustment value of item B to H is increased by 1, the
main scanning print position is shifted to the rear side by 0.1mm.
50-20
* Items J and K are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Purpose
0
TEST
PAPER CENTER
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50㧙10
OFFSET
100
㨇 60㨪140 㨉
SETUP
A㧦100
㧧 BK-MAG
B㧦50
㧧 MFT
C㧦50
㧧 CS1
D㧦50
㧧 CS2
Section
:
Item
: Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1)
EXECUTE
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and displayed on the set setting area.
OK
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
50-12
Purpose
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the scan image off-center
position adjustment. (Adjusted for each
scan mode.)
Section
:
Item
: Image quality (Image position)
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
currently entered data are saved to EEPROM and RAM. Then
the main scanning direction registration adjustment pattern is
printed.
Operation/Procedure
1)
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared.
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and displayed on the set setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the currently entered data are saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
4)
When [↑], [↓], [OK], [EXECUTE] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK]
key is pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occurrence of an interruption, self printing is resumed.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
copy basic screen of simulation.
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.
Item
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the manual adjustment of
the main scanning direction registration
(color shift). (Backup value input)
Example: PAPER:CS1
Display item
A
OC
B
SPF (SIDE1)
C
SPF (SIDE2)
Set range
OC document off-center
adjustment
SPF front surface off-center
adjustment
SPF back surface off-center
adjustment
Set
value
1 to 99
Default
value
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 96
Item
A
Display item & Detail of display
CYAN (FRONT)
B
CYAN (REAR)
C
MAGENTA (FRONT)
D
MAGENTA (REAR)
E
YELLOW (FRONT)
F
YELLOW (REAR)
G
H
MULTICOUNT
PAPER
I
DUPLEX
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
YES
NO
Description of item
Registration adjustment value main scanning direction
(Cyan laser writing position F side)
Registration adjustment value main scanning direction
(Cyan laser writing position R side)
Registration adjustment value main scanning direction
(Magenta laser writing position F side)
Registration adjustment value main scanning direction
(Magenta laser writing position R side)
Registration adjustment value main scanning direction
(Yellow laser writing position F side)
Registration adjustment value main scanning direction
(Yellow laser writing position R side)
Print quantity
Cassette select
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Duplex print select
Selected
Not selected
* Items H and I are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
A:
100
㨇 1㨪199 㨉
DIRECTION
A㧦100
㧧 CYAN(FRONT)
B㧦100
㧧 CYAN(REAR)
C㧦100
㧧 MAGENTA(FRONT)
D㧦100
㧧 MAGENTA(REAR)
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the manual adjustment of
the sub scanning registration (color shift).
(Backup value input)
: —
: Image quality
100
YES
1 to 199
100
YES
1 to 199
100
YES
1 to 199
100
YES
1 to 999
1 to 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 1
0
1
1
3 (CS2)
NO
NO
1 (NO)
NO
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
currently entered data are saved to EEPROM and RAM. Then
the main scanning direction registration adjustment pattern is
printed.
* When [↑], [↓], [OK], [EXECUTE] button, [COLOR], or
[BLACK] key is pressed, the data are saved to EEPROM
and RAM.
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is
pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occurrence of
an interruption, self printing is resumed.
Operation/Procedure
1)
1 to 199
After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
: Adjustment
Item
YES
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared.
OK
50-21
Section
100
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
EXECUTE
Purpose
1 to 199
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50㧙20
Writing
YES
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
0
TEST
Default value
100
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
Example: PAPER:CS1
REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT : FRONT-REAR
Set range
1 to 199
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and displayed on the set setting area.
Item
A
Display item & Detail of display
CYAN
B
MAGENTA
C
YELLOW
D
E
MULTICOUNT
PAPER
F
DUPLEX
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
YES
NO
Description
Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction
(Cyan drum → Black drum)
Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction
(Magenta drum → Black drum)
Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction
(Yellow drum → Black drum)
Print quantity
Cassette select
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Duplex print select
Selected
Not selected
* Items E and F are displayed as "Display item : Detail of display."
Example: PAPER:CS1
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 97
Set value
1 to 199
Default value
100
Writing
YES
1 to 199
100
YES
1 to 199
100
YES
1 to 999
1 to 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 1
0
1
1
2 (CS1)
NO
NO
1 (NO)
NO
Operation/Procedure
0
TEST
REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT : SCANNING
A:
100
㨇 1㨪199 㨉
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50㧙21
* Press the button to select a category. The selected button is
highlighted. The set item of the selected button is displayed.
DIRECTION
A㧦100
㧧 CYAN
B㧦100
㧧 MAGENTA
C㧦100
㧧
D㧦 1
㧧 MULTICOUNT
Select the mode. (In this example, [REGIST] is selected.)
* Only one button can be selected. The selected button is
highlighted. In the initial state, [ALL] button is selected.
YELLOW
EXECUTE
* If there is a page over [↑], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
OK
If there is a page under [↓], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
display grays out and the operation is invalid.
50-22
Purpose
2)
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the auto adjustment of the
main/sub scan the main/sub registration.
(Print on the belt/ Scan with the registration
sensor (photo sensor)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and all
the drum motors are driven to start the adjustment.
* After completion of the adjustment, the drum motor is
stopped and [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display. The adjustment result is displayed.
MAIN, SUB:
Image registration adjustment (Auto adjustment) adjustment image quality image position
After the adjustment, the adjustment value is displayed.
( ) Difference from the previous value.
Section
: –
Example: This time 105, previous time 103: 105 (+2)
Item
: Image quality
PHASE:
The number assigned to the phase is displayed.
( ) Difference from the previous value.
Button
ALL (All
execution (Both
of the auto
registration
adjustment and
the auto phase
adjustment are
executed.)
Display
REGIST (Auto
registration
adjustment is
executed.)
MAIN F
MAIN R
SUB
DLUM POS
(Auto phase
adjustment is
executed.)
PHASE
Content
Display
C
Registration adjustment value main scan
direction (Cyan laser writing position F side)
M
Registration adjustment value main scan
direction (Magenta laser writing position F
side)
Y
Registration adjustment value main scan
direction (Yellow laser writing position F side)
C
Registration adjustment value main scan
direction (Cyan laser writing position R side)
M
Registration adjustment value main scan
direction (Magenta laser writing position R
side)
Y
Registration adjustment value main scan
direction (Yellow laser writing position R side)
C
Registration adjustment value sub scan
direction (Cyan drum → Black drum)
M
Registration adjustment value sub scan
direction (Magenta drum → Cyan drum)
Y
Registration adjustment value sub scan
direction (Yellow drum → Magenta drum)
Phase adjustment
Angle step
value BK → CL
0° (1) → 45° (2) → 90° (3) → 135°
(4) → 180° (5) → 225° (6) → 270°
(7) → 315°(8)
1.0 –
199.0
1.0 –
199.0
Default
value
100.0
100.0
1.0 –
199.0
1.0 –
199.0
1.0 –
199.0
100.0
1.0 –
199.0
1.0 –
199.0
1.0 –
199.0
1.0 –
199.0
1–8
100.0
Remark
Same item with SIM50-20
*
However, the adjustment
accuracy is in the unit of
±0.1 dot. (The adjustment
accuracy of 50-20, -21 is
in the unit of ±1.0dot.)
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
2
Same item with SIM 44-31
Compulsory
end error
Basic error
Error
code
1
2
4
5
7
Error display
SUSPENDED
SUSPENDED
TONER EMPTY
TONER BEFORE
BEHAVIOR
SENSOR CALIBRATION
TIME OVER
PROCESS CONTROL
Error content
Detail of content
Door open end
CA end
OFF end
Toner empty
Other conditions
Door open during operation
Pressing [CA] button during operation
Unconfirmed operation (power OFF) during operation
BK or all colors toner empty detection
Other conditions
Calibration error
Time error
Process control error
With 3 times of retry of F or R, the target is not reached.
Data is not acquired for 90sec from data acquisition
Process control error detection
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 98
1 : Dec. 15 2005
Sub scan
adjustment
error
Main scan
adjustment
error
1
Error
code
10
11
15
16
20
21
22
Error display
Error content
MAIN BLACK FRONT
MAIN BLACK FRONT
SUB BLACK REAR
SUB BLACK REAR
SUB CYAN FRONT
SUB CYAN FRONT
SUB CYAN FRONT
Number error sub scan BLACK F
Pitch error sub scan BLACK F
Number error sub scan BLACK R
Pitch error sub scan BLACK R
Number error sub scan CYAN F
Pitch error sub scan CYAN F
Adjustment value error sub scan
CYAN F
Result value error sub scan CYAN F
23
SUB CYAN FRONT
25
26
27
SUB CYAN REAR
SUB CYAN REAR
SUB CYAN REAR
28
SUB CYAN REAR
30
SUB MAGENTA FRONT
31
32
SUB MAGENTA FRONT
SUB MAGENTA FRONT
33
SUB MAGENTA FRONT
35
SUB MAGENTA REAR
36
37
SUB MAGENTA REAR
SUB MAGENTA REAR
38
SUB MAGENTA REAR
40
41
42
SUB YELLOW FRONT
SUB YELLOW FRONT
SUB YELLOW FRONT
43
SUB YELLOW FRONT
45
46
47
SUB YELLOW REAR
SUB YELLOW REAR
SUB YELLOW REAR
48
SUB YELLOW REAR
50
51
55
56
60
61
62
MAIN BLACK FRONT
MAIN BLACK FRONT
MAIN BLACK REAR
MAIN BLACK REAR
MAIN CYAN FRONT
MAIN CYAN FRONT
MAIN CYAN FRONT
63
MAIN CYAN FRONT
65
66
67
MAIN CYAN REAR
MAIN CYAN REAR
MAIN CYAN REAR
68
MAIN CYAN REAR
70
MAIN MAGENTA FRONT
71
72
MAIN MAGENTA FRONT
MAIN MAGENTA FRONT
Number error sub scan CYAN R
Pitch error sub scan CYAN R
Adjustment value error sub scan
CYAN R
Result value error sub scan CYAN
R
Number error sub scan MAGENTA
F
Pitch error sub scan MAGENTA F
Adjustment value error sub scan
MAGENTA F
Result value error sub scan
MAGENTA F
Number error sub scan MAGENTA
R
Pitch error sub scan MAGENTA R
Adjustment value error sub scan
MAGENTA R
Result value error sub scan
MAGENTA R
Number error sub scan YELLOW F
Pitch error sub scan YELLOW F
Adjustment value error sub scan
YELLOW F
Result value error sub scan
YELLOW F
Number error sub scan YELLOW R
Pitch error sub scan YELLOW R
Adjustment value error sub scan
YELLOW R
Result value error sub scan
YELLOW R
Number error main scan BLACK F
Pitch error main scan BLACK F
Number error main scan BLACK R
Pitch error main scan BLACK R
Number error main scan CYAN
Pitch error main scan CYAN
Adjustment value error main scan
CYAN F
Result value error main scan CYAN
F
Number error main scan CYAN R
Pitch error main scan CYAN R
Adjustment value error main scan
CYAN R
Result value error main scan CYAN
R
Number error main scan MAGENTA
F
Pitch error main scan MAGENTA F
Adjustment value error main scan
MAGENTA F
Detail of content
The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not in the specified range.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
range.
The variation of the calculation result value is over the
specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
range.
The variation of the calculation result value is over the
specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
range.
The variation of the calculation result value is over the
specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
range.
The variation of the calculation result value is over the
specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
range.
The variation of the calculation result value is over the
specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
range.
The variation of the calculation result value is over the
specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not in the specified range.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
range.
The variation of the calculation result value is over the
specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
range.
The variation of the calculation result value is over the
specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
range.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 99
Error
code
73
Main scan
adjustment
error
Other error
Error display
Error content
MAIN MAGENTA FRONT
75
MAIN MAGENTA REAR
76
77
MAIN MAGENTA REAR
MAIN MAGENTA REAR
78
MAIN MAGENTA REAR
80
MAIN YELLOW FRONT
81
82
MAIN YELLOW FRONT
MAIN YELLOW FRONT
83
MAIN YELLOW FRONT
85
MAIN YELLOW REAR
86
87
MAIN YELLOW REAR
MAIN YELLOW REAR
88
MAIN YELLOW REAR
99
OTHER
(Initial screen or when in normal end)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-22
MAIN R
C
105.0 (+0.2)
110.0 (-0.1)
103.0 (+0.4)
M
100.0 (+0.0)
99.0 (-0.2)
99.0 (+0.2)
Y
98.0 (+0.3)
98.0 (+0.1)
105.0 (+0.0)
REGIST
DRUM POS
SUB
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
range.
The variation of the calculation result value is over the
specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
range.
The variation of the calculation result value is over the
specified allowable range.
Other error
* If there is a page over [↑], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
PHASE
4 (3)
ALL
EXECUTE
If there is a page under [↓], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
display grays out and the operation is invalid.
1/1
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
copy basic screen of simulation.
(Adjustment screen)
0
TEST
The pitch data is not in the specified allowable range.
The calculation result value is not in the specified allowable
range.
The variation of the calculation result value is over the
specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
* Specify the color with [K], [C], [M], and [Y] buttons. (Depending on the selected kind of data, selection of a color button
cannot be made. In that case, the key entry is disabled.)
AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION&DLUM POSITION
MAIN F
The variation of the calculation result value is over the
specified allowable range.
The number of pitch data is not the specified number.
* Select the kind of display with [NEXT] and [BACK] buttons.
0
TEST
Detail of content
Result value error main scan
MAGENTA F
Number error main scan MAGENTA
R
Pitch error main scan MAGENTA R
Adjustment value error main scan
MAGENTA R
Result value error main scan
MAGENTA R
Number error main scan YELLOW
F
Pitch error main scan YELLOW F
Adjustment value error main scan
YELLOW F
Result value error main scan
YELLOW F
Number error main scan YELLOW
R
Pitch error main scan YELLOW R
Adjustment value error main scan
YELLOW R
Result value error main scan
YELLOW R
Other error
SIMULATION NO.50-22
CLOSE
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.
AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION&DLUM POSITION
NOW EXECUTING…
1)
Registration adjustment confirmation screen
Use [K][C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (No color
specified/C/M/Y).
Press [NEXT] button to display the next category.
EXECUTE
Press [BLACK] button to display the previous category.
(Error end screen)
2)
Press [K][C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (K/C/M/
Y).
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.50-22
Phase adjustment status check screen
CLOSE
Press [NEXT] button to display the next category.
AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION&DLUM POSITION
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category.
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO START
ERROR : TONNER EMPTY 01
3)
Sensor calibration status check (No color specification)
Press [K] button to display the initial screen of K.
Press [NEXT] button to display the category.
EXECUTE
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category.
4)
Press [K][C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (K/C/M/
Y).
50-24
Purpose
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to display the data acquired with the
auto registration adjustment simulation
(SIM50-22).
Section
: —
Item
: Image quality
Press [NEXT] button to display the next category.
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category.
5)
Sampling status check (2) (KCMY)
Press [K][C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (K/C/M/
Y).
Press [NEXT] button to display the next category.
Operation/Procedure
1)
Sampling status check (1) (KCMY/No color specification)
When the machine enters Simulation 50-24, the following
screen is displayed.
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 100
6)
Sampling status check (3) (KCMY)
0
Press [K][C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (K/C/M/
Y).
7)
TEST
Press [NEXT] button to display the next category.
AUTO REGISTRATION
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category.
REG_EXE_CNT
REG_SUC_CNT 00000000
Press [K][C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (K/C/M/
Y).
REG_CNT
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category.
8)
Sampling status check (5) (KCMY)
Press [K][C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (K/C/M/
Y).
Press [NEXT] button to display the next category.
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category.
9)
DATA DISPLAY
00000000
Sampling status check (4) (KCMY)
Press [NEXT] button to display the next category.
Sampling status check (6) (KCMY)
Press [K][C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (K/C/M/
Y).
Press [NEXT] button to display the next category.
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category.
10) Sampling status check (7) (KCMY)
Press [K][C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (K/C/M/
Y).
K
: FAX/Scanner
Item
: Image quality
1/1
1)
Use [FAX] button and [SCANNER] button to select the mode.
2)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and displayed on the set setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
12) Temperature correction value check screen (No color specification)
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category.
NEXT
Operation/Procedure
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category.
Press [NEXT] button to display the next category.
BACK
: Adjustment
Section
Press [NEXT] button to display the next category.
Press [K] button to display the initial screen (K).
Y
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the image loss of scanned
image in the FAX/Scanner mode.
Press [C][M][Y] button to display the initial screen (C/M/Y).
13) Error code status check (No color specification)
M
Purpose
11) Temperature correction value check screen (CMY)
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category.
C
50-27
Press [BACK] button to display the previous category.
Press [NEXT] button to display the next category.
00000000
Initial screen (Registration adjustment status check screen (No
color specification))
Press [NEXT] button to display the next category.
Press [K] button to display the initial screen (K).
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO. 50-24
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
4)
When [OK] button is pressed, the current entered value is
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
* When [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed,
the data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
copy basic screen of simulation.
FAX send
SCANNER
mode (FAX,
other than
COPY)
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Image loss
setting OC
Image loss
setting SPF
SIDE1
Image loss
setting SPF
SIDE2
Image loss
setting OC
Image loss
setting SPF
SIDE1
Image loss
setting
SPFSIDE2
Display item
LEAD_EDGE (OC)
FRONT_REAR (OC)
TRAIL_EDGE (OC)
LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1)
FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1)
LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2)
FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2)
TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2)
LEAD_EDGE(OC)
FRONT_REAR(OC)
TRAIL_EDGE(OC)
LEAD_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1)
FRONT_REAR(SPF_SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1)
LEAD_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2)
FRONT_REAR(SPF_SIDE2)
TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2)
Description
OC lead edge image loss setting
OC side image loss setting
OC rear edge image loss setting
Front surface lead edge image loss setting
Front surface side image loss setting
Front surface rear edge image loss setting
Back surface lead edge image loss setting
Back surface side image loss setting
Back surface rear edge image loss setting
OC lead edge image loss setting
OC side image loss setting
OC rear edge image loss setting
Front surface lead edge image loss setting
Front surface side image loss setting
Front surface rear edge image loss setting
Back surface lead edge image loss setting
Back surface side image loss setting
Back surface rear edge image loss setting
* A to I: The greater the adjustment value is, the greater the image loss is. 1step=0.1mm
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 101
Set range
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
Default value
30 (3mm)
20 (2mm)
20 (2mm)
20 (2mm)
20 (2mm)
30 (3mm)
20 (2mm)
20 (2mm)
30 (3mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
Adjustment item
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50㧙27
TEST
Engine
–
BK main scan
magnification ratio
Print off-center
Print lead edge
Print off-center
Print lead edge
Print off-center
Print lead edge
Print off-center
Print lead edge
Print off-center
Print lead edge
Print off-center
Print lead edge
Print off-center
Print lead edge
SCANNER/FAX-SEND ALL EDGE ADJUSTMENT VALUE
A:
30
㨇
0㨪
100 㨉
FAX
MFT
A㧦
30
㧧 LEAD_EDGE(OC)
B㧦
20
㧧 FRONT_REAR(OC)
C㧦
20
㧧 TRAIL_EDGE(OC)
D㧦
30
㧧 LEAD_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1)
CS1
CS2
OK
SCANNER
ADU
50-28
CS3
Purpose
: Adjustment
CS4
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the service adjustment,
the OC adjustment, the BK main scan magnification ration correction, the RSPF
adjustment, and the print position adjustment (Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment)).
Section
: —
Item
: Image quality
LCC
0
OC ADJ
When the machine enters Simulation 50-28, the following
screen is displayed.
2)
Press the button of an item to be adjusted, and the display is
shifted to the adjustment screen.
* The operating procedures and the display shift for each adjustment and the display, refer to the next page.
1
2
3
4
BK-MAG
ADJ
OC adjustment
SETUP/
PRINT ADJ
Print position
adjustment
5
RESULT
Result display
6
DATA
Data display
Description
OC document lead edge,
off-center, and sub scan
magnification ratio
adjustment
BK main scan
magnification ratio
adjustment
RSPF (front/back)
document lead edge, offcenter, sub scan
magnification ratio
adjustment
Print lead edge adjustment,
all-cassette print off-center
(individual cassette, ADU)
adjustment
Display of the adjustment
result
Display of data used for the
adjustment
Adjustment item
OC
RSPF
SIDE1
(front)
SIDE2
(back)
Document lead edge
Document off-center
Sub scan
magnification ratio
γ adjustment
Document lead edge
Document off-center
Sub scan
magnification ratio
Document lead edge
Document off-center
Sub scan
magnification ratio
DATA
1/1
50-28
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the OC document lead
edge, off-center, and the sub scan magnification ratio. (Auto void adjustment (Service
installation adjustment) (1: OC adjustment))
Section
: —
Item
: Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1)
When [OC ADJ] button is pressed on the top menu screen, the
screen shown on the right side is displayed.
2)
Select a cassette of self print of the OC adjustment pattern.
(Only one cassette can be selected.)
3)
Press [EXECUTE] button to start self print of the OC adjustment pattern.
* During self printing of the OC adjustment
After completion of self print, the display is shifted to the OC
adjustment start screen.
4)
Set the OC adjustment pattern on the OC with the corner reference, and cover the black background chart over the OC
adjustment pattern.
* Set the adjustment pattern in traversal position (A4). Check
to confirm that there is no clearance with the document
guide.
Adjustment
menu
OC ADJ
–
SPF ADJ
(RSPF)
SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT
Scanner
BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ
Purpose
Content
BK main scan
magnification ratio
correction
SPF adjustment
SPF ADJ
CLOSE
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT㧦SERVICE
1)
Menu
display item
OC ADJ
SETUP/PRINT
ADJ
SIMULATION NO.50̆28
TEST
Operation/Procedure
NO.
Adjustment
menu
BK-MAG ADJ
* Kind and size of black background charts made with a cutting sheet equivalent to 310 x 470 cutting sheet No. 791
(Black).
5)
Press [EXECUTE] button to start scanning of the OC adjustment pattern.
* When [REPRINT] button is pressed, the display returns to
the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the OC
adjustment pattern again.
* During scanning of the OC adjustment pattern and calculating of the adjustment value
After completion of scanning, the adjustment value is calculated.
After completion of calculation of the adjustment value, the
display is shifted to the result display screen.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 102
After completion of calculation, the display is shifted to the
result display screen.
• OC document lead edge adjustment
• OC document off-center adjustment
• BK magnification ratio adjustment
• OC sub scan magnification ratio adjustment
6)
7)
6)
The adjustment result is displayed.
The adjustment result screen is displayed.
The value of this time is displayed together with the difference
from the previous value in ( ).
The value of this time is displayed together with the difference
from the previous value in ( ).
* When [REPRINT] button is pressed, the display returns to
the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the OC
adjustment pattern again.
* When [REPRINT] button is pressed, the display returns to
the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the BK
magnification ratio adjustment pattern again.
* When [RESCAN] button is pressed, scanning of the OC
adjustment pattern is started again.
* When [RESCAN] button is pressed, scanning of the BK
magnification ratio adjustment pattern is started again.
* When [RETRY] button is pressed, the adjustment value is
not saved to EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to
the top menu screen.
* When [RETRY] button is pressed, the adjustment value is
not saved to EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to
the top menu screen.
* When [DATA] button is pressed, the data used for the adjustment are displayed.
* When [DATA] button is pressed, the data used for the adjustment are displayed.
When [OK] button is pressed, the adjustment value is saved to
EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to the top menu
screen.
7)
When [OK] button is pressed, the adjustment value is saved to
EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to the top menu
screen.
* When [BACK] button is pressed, the display returns to the
result display screen.
* When [BACK] button is pressed, the display returns to the result
display screen.
0
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50̆28
TEST
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT㧦SERVICE
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT㧦SERVICE
MFT
CS1
MFT
CS2
EXECUTE
CS2
EXECUTE
1/1
50-28
Purpose
Purpose
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the BK main scan magnification ratio adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service instillation)
(2: BK-main scan magnification ratio correction))
Section
: —
Item
: Image quality
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the RSPF (Front/Back)
document lead edge, off-center, and sub
scan magnification ratio adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation
adjustment) (3: RSPF adjustment))
Section
: RSPF
Item
: Image quality
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
When [BK-MAG ADJ] button is pressed on the top menu
screen, the following screen is displayed.
2)
Select a cassette for self print of the BK magnification ratio
adjustment pattern. (Only one cassette can be selected.)
3)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, self print of the BK magnification ratio adjustment pattern (print position adjustment
pattern) is started.
1)
When [SPF ADJ] button is pressed on the top menu screen,
the screen on the right is displayed.
2)
Select an item to be adjusted. The display is shifted to the cassette select screen for printing the SPF adjustment pattern.
3)
Select a cassette for printing the SPF adjustment pattern.
(Only one cassette can be selected.)
4)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, self print of the SPF
adjustment pattern is started.
* During self print of the BK magnification ratio adjustment
pattern
After completion of self print, the display is shifted to the OC
adjustment screen.
Load the BK magnification ratio adjustment pattern to the OC.
* When [REPRINT] button is pressed, the display returns to
the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the BK
magnification ratio adjustment pattern again.
5)
CS1
1/1
50-28
4)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50̆28
Press [EXECUTE] button to start scanning of the BK magnification ratio adjustment pattern.
* During scanning of the main scan magnification ratio correction pattern and calculating the magnification ratio adjustment value
After completion of scanning, calculation of the adjustment
value is started.
* During self print of the SPF adjustment pattern
After completion of self print, the display is shifted to the
SPF adjustment screen.
5)
Load the SPF adjustment pattern to the SPF.
* When [REPRINT] button is pressed, the display returns to
the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the SPF
adjustment pattern again.
6)
Press [EXECUTE] button to start scanning the SPF adjustment pattern (front surface).
* During scanning of the SPF adjustment pattern (front surface) and calculating
After completion of scanning the front surface, calculation of
the adjustment value (front surface) is started.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 103
After completion of calculation of the front surface adjustment value, the display is shifted to the SPF adjustment pattern (back surface) scan start screen.
• SPF sub scan magnification ratio adjustment front surface
Load the SPF adjustment pattern to the SPF.
Section
: —
* When [REPRINT] button is pressed, the display returns to
the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the SPF
adjustment pattern again.
Item
: Image quality
• SPF document off-center adjustment front surface
8)
Press [EXECUTE] button to start scanning the SPF adjustment pattern (back surface).
* During scanning of the SPF adjustment pattern (back surface)
After completion of scanning the back surface, calculation of
the adjustment value (back surface) is started.
Operation/Procedure
1)
When [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] button is pressed on the top menu
screen, the screen on the right is displayed.
2)
When an item to be adjusted is selected, the display is shifted
to the cassette select screen for printing the print position
adjustment pattern.
3)
Select a cassette for use in print. (Two or more cassettes can
be selected.) The selected cassette is highlighted.
After completion of calculation, the display is shifted to the
result display screen.
When the selected cassette is pressed again, it returns to the
normal display.
4)
• SPF Document lead edge adjustment back surface
• SPF Document off-center adjustment back surface
* When two or more cassettes are selected, continuous self
print (max. 7 sheets) is executed.
The adjustment result screen is displayed.
The value of this time is displayed together with the difference
from the previous value in ( ).
* When [REPRINT] button is pressed, the display returns to
the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the SPF
adjustment pattern (front/back) again.
* When [RESCAN] button is pressed, scanning of the SPF
adjustment pattern (front/back) is started again.
Press [EXECUTE] button to start self-printing of the print position adjustment pattern.
* During self-printing of the print position adjustment pattern
(CS3)
• SPF sub scan magnification ratio adjustment back surface
(RSPF)
9)
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the print lead edge adjustment and the all-cassette print off-center
(individual cassette, ADU) adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation
adjustment) (4: Print position adjustment)
• SPF document lead edge adjustment front surface
7)
50-28
Purpose
After completion of self-printing, the display is shifted to the
print position adjustment.
5)
Load the print position adjustment pattern (CS3) to the OC.
* When [REPRINT] button is pressed, the display returns to
the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the print
position adjustment pattern again.
6)
* When [RETRY] button is pressed, the adjustment value is
not saved to EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to
the top menu screen.
Press [EXECUTE] button to start scanning of the print position
adjustment (CS3).
* During scanning of the print position adjustment pattern
(CS3) and calculation
* When [DATA] button is pressed, the data used for the adjustment are displayed.
After completion of scanning, calculation of the adjustment
value (CS3) is started.
10) When [OK] button is pressed, the adjustment value is saved to
EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to the completed
screen.
After completion of calculation, the display is shifted to the
result display screen.
* When [BACK] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
result display screen.
• Print lead edge (CS3/CS4)
• Print off-center (CS3)
Menu display item
SIDE1
SIDE2
ALL
* When two or more cassettes are selected, scanning and calculation are repeated for the number of output sheets (3 to
max.7).
Content
SPF adjustment front surface
SPF adjustment back surface
SPF adjustment front/back surface
7)
The value of this time is displayed together with the difference
from the previous value in ( ).
0
TEST
* "**"is displayed for an item which is not adjusted yet.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50̆28
* An item which is not installed is not displayed depending on
the option status.
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT㧦SERVICE
SIDE1
The adjustment result screen is displayed.
SIDE2
* When [REPRINT] button is pressed, the display returns to
the cassette select screen to allow self-printing of the print
position adjustment pattern again.
ALL
* When [RESCAN] button is pressed, scanning of the print
position adjustment pattern is started again.
1/1
* When [RETRY] button is pressed, the adjustment value is
not saved to EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to
the top menu screen.
* When [DATA] button is pressed, the data used for adjustment are displayed.
8)
When [OK] button is pressed, the adjustment value is saved to
EEPROM and RAM and the display is shifted to the top menu
screen.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 104
* When [BACK] button is pressed, the display returns to the result
display screen.
0
Menu display item
LEAD
OFFSET
ALL
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT : SERVICE
Content
Print lead edge adjustment
Print off-center adjustment
Print lead edge, print of-center adjustment
OC
㧦 LEAD㧦㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖㧕 OFFSET 㧖㧖㧦㧔㧖㧖㧕 SUB㧖㧖㧦㧔㧖㧖㧕
SPF㧔SIDE1㧕
㧦LEAD㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖㧕 OFFSET㧦㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖㧕 SUB㧦㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖
SPF㧔SIDE2㧕
㧦LEAD㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖㧕 OFFSET㧦㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖㧕 SUB㧦㧖㧖㧔㧖㧖㧕
BK-MAG
㧦BK:㧖㧖 㧖㧖
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50̆28
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT㧦SERVICE
LEAD
50-28
OFFSET
Purpose
ALL
1/1
50-28
Purpose
1/2
BACK
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50̆28
TEST
: Adjustment
: —
Item
: Image quality
Section
: —
Item
: Image quality
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) : Used to display the adjustment result.
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation
adjustment) (5: result display)
Section
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to display the data used for the
adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation
adjustment) (6: data display))
1)
When the machine enters Simulation 50-28, the following
screen is displayed.
When [OC⋅SPF] button is pressed, the data used for the OC
adjustment and the SPF adjustment are displayed.
When [BK-MAG] button is pressed, the data used for BK main
scan magnification ratio adjustment are displayed.
Operation/Procedure
1)
When [RESULT] button is pressed on the top menu screen,
the screen on the right is displayed.
When [PRINT] button is pressed, the data used for the print
position adjustment are displayed.
2)
When [BACK] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
top menu screen.
* If there is a page over [↑], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
If there is a page under [↓], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
display grays out and the operation is invalid.
* When [OK] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the top
menu screen.
Adjustment item
(page)
OC⋅SPF
OC (1)
SCAN: %
LEAD: mm
mm
OC Main scan magnification ratio
correction value
SPF1 adjustment value,
correction value
SPF1 magnification ratio, lead
edge data
SPF1 off-center data
–4.99 to +4.99
%
1 to 99 ( ± 99)
STEP
SCAN: –4.99 to +4.99
LEAD: –4.9 to +4.9
–4.9 to +4.9
SCAN: %
LEAD: mm
mm
SPF1 main scan magnification
ratio correction value
SPF2 adjustment value,
correction value
SPF2 magnification ratio, lead
edge data
SPF2 off-center data
–4.99 to +4.99
%
1 to 99 (± 99)
STEP
SCAN: –4.99 to +4.99
LEAD: –4.9 to +4.9
–4.9 to +4.9
SCAN: %
LEAD: mm
mm
–4.99 to +4.99
%
A4, A4R, A3, LT, LTR, WL
0 to 255
–
–
Times
Error code
OC adjustment value, correction
value
OC magnification ratio, lead
edge data
OC off-center data
ADJ_SPF1
(SCAN/LEAD/OFST)
SCAN (F/C/R)/LEAD (F/C/R)
ADJ_SPF2
(SCAN/LEAD/OFST)
SCAN (F/C/R)/LEAD (F/C/R)
DATA_OFFSET
R (U/M/L)/F (U/M/L)
SCAN_MAIN
Status (4)
SCAN: –4.99 to +4.99
LEAD: –4.9 to +4.9
–4.9 to +4.9
ADJ_OC
(SCAN/LEAD/OFST)
SCAN (F/C/R)/LEAD (F/C/R)
DATA_OFFSET
R (U/M/L)/F (U/M/L)
SCAN_MAIN
SPF2 (3)
STEP
Display content
DATA_OFFSET
R (U/M/L)/F (U/M/L)
SCAN_MAIN
SPF1 (2)
Display range (difference from the
previous value)
1 to 99 (–99 to +99)
Item display
PAPER (OC/SPF1/SPF2)
COUNT (OC/SPF1/SPF2)
ERROR
SPF2 main scan magnification
ratio correction value
Paper information
Counter
Error history
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 105
Unit
Adjustment item
(page)
BK-MAG
Item display
Display content
ADJ (BK-MAG)/PAPER/
COUNT
BK-MAG adjustment value,
correction value
BK-MAG
SCAN_MAG (SUB, MAIN)
BK-MAG data
BK-MAG scan magnification ratio
correction value
Error history
PRINT adjustment value,
correction value
ERROR
ADJ_MFT (LEAD/OFST)
PRINT
LEAD (F/C/R)
OFFSET R (U/M/L)/F (U/M/L)
ERROR
PRINT lead edge data
Off-center data
Error history
0
Display range (difference from the
previous value)
ADJ: 1 to 199 (–199 to +199)
PAPER_SCAN DEVICE: OC, SPF1, SPF2
PAPER_PAPER_SIZE: A4, A4R, A3, LT,
LTR, WL PAPER_CS: MFT,CS1,CS2, CS3,
CS4,LCC PAPER_PRINT_DIR: F, R, U, L
COUNT: 0 to 255
-9.99 to +9.99
SUB:-99 to +99
MAIN:-4.99 to +4.99
–
LEAD,OFST:-4.9 to +4.9 PAPER_SCAN
DEVICE: LEAD, OFST: OC, SPF1, SPF2
PAPER_PAPER_SIZE: A4, A4R, A3, LT,
LTR, WL
PAPER_PRINT_DIR: F, R, U, L COUNT: 0
to 255
-4.9 to +4.9
-4.9 to +4.9
–
Unit
ADJ STEP
PAPER: COUNT: Times
mm
SUB:MAIN:-4.99
to +4.99
Error code
LEAD, OFST: mm
PAPER: –
COUNT: Times
mm
mm
Error code
When the value of transfer ON/OFF timing is decreased, the transfer ON/Off timing for paper is advanced.
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENT㧦SERVICE
When the value of transfer ON/OFF timing is increased, the transfer ON/Off timing for paper is delayed.
ADJ_OC
(±1: about 10ms change)(Set range: –490 to +490ms)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50̆28
TEST
(SCAN / LEAD / OFST)
SCAN(F /C /R) / LEAD(F /C /R)
㧦50(r99) / 50(r99) / 50(r99)
㧦r4.99 /r4.99 /r4.99 , r4.9 /r4.9 /r4.9
0
DATA_OFFSET R(U /M /L) / F(U /M /L) 㧦r
4.9 /r4.9 /r4.9 , r4.9 /r4.9 /r4.9
SCAN_MAIN
OCSPF
㧦r4.99
BK-MAG
TEST
PRINT
OK
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.51㧙01
TRANSCRIPTION TIMING SETUP
A:
40
㨇 1㨪
51
A㧦 40
㧧 TC2
B㧦 60
㧧 TC2 OFF
ON
TIMING
TIMING
99 㨉
OK
51-1
Purpose
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the
transfer voltage and the separation bias
voltage.
Section
: Process
Item
: Operation (Transfer)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and displayed on the set setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
Section
: Paper transport
Item
: Operation
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
1)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
3)
When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Item
A
B
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the contact pressure of
paper against the registration roller (main
unit paper feed section, duplex paper feed,
SPF paper feed) on each section. (When
there are much variations in print image
positions for paper or when the paper jam
occurs, the adjustment is required.) Used to
change the deflection quantity correction
value of each specified cassette.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
51-2
Purpose
Display item
TC2 ON TIMING
TC2 OFF TIMING
Description of
content
Secondary transfer
voltage ON timing
setting
Secondary transfer
voltage OFF timing
setting
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default
value
40
60
Operation/Procedure
Select a category to be set. (In this example, [SIDE1] is
selected.)
* Select a category, and the selected button is highlighted.
The set item of the selected category button is displayed.
* Only one button can be selected. The selected button is
highlighted.
On the initial display, [SIDE1] is selected.
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and displayed on the set setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 106
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the
copy basic screen of simulation.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
Item
Button
A
SIDE1
Display item
NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH
B
NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW
C
NORMAL_ THIN _HIGH
D
NORMAL__THIN LOW
E
RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW
F
RANDOM_ THIN _LOW
A
SIDE2
NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH_1
B
NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_1
C
NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH_2
D
NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_2
A
ENGIN
TRAY1(S)
B
TRAY1(L)
C
TRAY2(S)
D
TRAY2(L)
E
MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (S)
F
MANUAL PLAIN PAPER (L)
G
MANUAL HEAVY PAPER1 (S)
H
MANUAL HEAVY PAPER1 (L)
I
J
MANUAL OHP1
MANUAL ENV
K
ADU PLAIN PAPER (S)
L
ADU PLAIN PAPER (L)
M
ADU HEAVY PAPER1 (S)
N
ENGIN ADU HEAVY PAPER1 (L)
O
DESK(S)
P
DESK(L)
Q
A4LCC
Description of item (Mode, document, paper feed
speed)
RSPF front surface document, deflection quantity
adjustment value (normal, plain paper, HIGH)
RSPF front surface document, deflection quantity
adjustment value (normal, plain paper, LOW)
RSPF front surface document, deflection quantity
adjustment value (normal, thin paper, HIGH)
RSPF front surface document, deflection quantity
adjustment value (normal, thin paper, LOW)
RSPF front surface document, deflection quantity
adjustment value (random, plain paper, LOW)
RSPF front surface document, deflection quantity
adjustment value (random, thin paper, LOW)
RSPF back surface document, deflection quantity
adjustment value 1(normal, plain paper, HIGH)
RSPF back surface document, deflection quantity
adjustment value 1(normal, plain paper, LOW)
RSPF back surface document, deflection quantity
adjustment value 2(normal, plain paper, HIGH)
RSPF back surface document, deflection quantity
adjustment value 2(normal, plain paper, LOW)
Main unit cassette 1 (upper stage), deflection
adjustment value (small size)
Main unit cassette 1 (upper stage), deflection
adjustment value (large size)
Main unit cassette 1 (upper stage), deflection
adjustment value (small size)
Main unit cassette 1 (upper stage), deflection
adjustment value (large size)
Manual tray, deflection adjustment value (plain paper,
small size)
Manual tray, deflection adjustment value (plain paper,
large size)
Manual feed tray, deflection adjustment value (Heavy
paper, small size)
Manual feed tray, deflection adjustment value (Heavy
paper, large size)
Manual feed tray, deflection adjustment value (OHP)
Manual feed tray, deflection adjustment value
(Envelope)
ADU, deflection adjustment value (Plain paper, small
size)
ADU, deflection adjustment value (Plain paper, large
size)
ADU, deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper, small
size)
ADU, deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper, large
size)
DESK, deflection adjustment value (Plain paper, small
size)
DESK, deflection adjustment value (Plain paper, large
size)
A4LCC, Deflection adjustment value
–
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
50
–
1 to 99
50
–
1 to 99
50
–
1 to 99
50
–
1 to 99
50
–
1 to 99
50
–
1 to 99
50
–
1 to 99
50
–
1 to 99
50
–
1 to 99
50
LT size or less
1 to 99
40
Longer size than the above
1 to 99
40
LT size or less
1 to 99
40
Longer size than the above
1 to 99
40
LT size or less
1 to 99
40
Longer size than the above
1 to 99
40
LT size or less
1 to 99
25
Longer size than the above
1 to 99
25
–
–
1 to 99
1 to 99
40
40
LT size or less
1 to 99
40
Longer size than the above
1 to 99
40
LT size or less
1 to 99
25
Longer size than the above
1 to 99
25
LT size or less
1 to 99
40
Longer size than the above
1 to 99
40
1 to 99
40
Transport direction
(Small size): The paper length in the transport direction is LT
(216mm) or less.
(Large size): The paper length in the transport direction is longer
than LT (216mm).
When the adjustment value is increased, the deflection quantity is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the deflection
quantity is decreased. (When the adjustment value is changed by
1, the stop timing is changed by 0.1mm.)
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.51㧙02
REGIST
ROLLER ADJUSTMENT
A:
㨇
50
1㨪
99 㨉
SIDE1
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 107
CLOSE
A㧦
50
㧧 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH
B㧦
50
㧧 NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW
C㧦
50
㧧 NORMAL_THIN_HIGH
D㧦
50
㧧 NORMAL_THIN_LOW
SIDE2
ENGIN
OK
53-7
53
Purpose
53-6
Purpose
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the RSPF document tray
size of the main unit.
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to enter the adjustment value of the
main unit RSPF document tray size adjustment value. SIM53-06 A/D value manual
input (for RSPF).
Section
: RSPF
Section
: RSPF
Item
: Operation
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and displayed on the set setting area.
Set the tray document guide to the max. width position, and
press [EXECUTE] key. The button is highlighted and the tray
size volume maximum value adjustment is started.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
* During the adjustment, "EXECUTING..." is displayed.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
* After completion of the tray size volume maximum value
adjustment, the set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM
and the display is shifted to the tray volume A4R size adjustment value start screen. (Each set value is saved to
EEPROM and RAM at each setting.)
2)
If there is any item under [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Set the tray document guide to A4R (11 x 8.5R) width position
and press [EXECUTE] button. The pressed button is highlighted and the tray A4R size adjustment is started.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
Adjust the tray volume A5R size and the tray size volume minimum value according to the above procedures.
3)
4)
After completion of the adjustment, "COMPLETE"is displayed.
If the adjustment is not completed normally for any reason,"ERROR"is displayed. In that case, the adjustment must
be executed again.
When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the currently entered value is set.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
Item
A
B
C
D
No.
1
2
3
4
Display
TRAYVOLMAX
TRAYVOLA4R
TRAYVOLA5R
TRAYVOLMIN
Content
Tray size volume maximum value
Tray volume A4R size adjustment value
Tray volume A5R size adjustment
Tray size volume minimum value
Widths on the mechanism
No.
1
2
3
4
INCHI
series
Code in the
figure below
A/D value,
code in
the figure
below
Maximum
position
Middle
position (L)
Middle
position
(S)
Minimum
position
303.3
303.3
WIDTH_MAX
AD_MAX
215,9
WITH_P1
AD_P1
148.5
139.7
WITH_P2
AD_P2
118
118
WITH_MIN
Maximum position
Middle position (L)
Middle position (S)
Minimum position
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
0 to 1023
Default
value
791
713
456
66
0
CLOSE
SPF TRAY ADJUSTMENT(MANUAL).
A:
791
[ 0~ 1023 ]
A㧦 791
;
AD_MAX
B㧦 456
;
AD_P1
C㧦 713
;
AD_P2
D㧦 791
;
AD_MIN
OK
Remark
53-8
Purpose
210
Set range
SIMULATION NO.53-07
TEST
AB
series
Guide plate position
* A/D is 10 bit.
When one of 1-4 in the above table is selected, the guide plate is
shifted to each position of the four widths of the guide plate shown
in the table below. The value of the document width sensor
(RSPF_WIDTH) A/D value is saved to EEPROM.
Guide plate
position
Display
item
AD_MAX
AD_P1
AD_P2
AD_MIN
A4R OR
LTR
A5R OR
INVR
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the RSPF scan position.
Section
: RSPF
Item
: Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
AD_MIN
1)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
2)
When [OK] button is pressed, the currently entered value is
set.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
0
TEST
SPF
SIMULATION NO.53̆06
TRAY
ADJUSTMENT
TRAYVOLMAX
PRESS
CLOSE
TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
[EXECUTE] TO START
EXECUTE
Item
Display item
A
ADJUST VALUE
Description
SPF scan position
adjustment
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
50
• When the set value is increased by 1, the distance between the
home position and the RSPF scan position is increased by
0.1mm.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 108
• When the set value is changed by 1, the position is shifted by
0.1mm.
• Since the distance of RRCA-S and RSPF scan position is
changed, RRCA and RRCA-S are not changed by this adjustment value.
0
With [SW NO.] button highlighted, enter the SW number with
10-key.
3)
Press [DATA] button.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
[DATA] button is highlighted and the current set value is displayed.
4)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.53-08
TEST
2)
When 10-key corresponding to the bit is pressed, the bit data
display is switched as shown below.
SPF SCANNING POSITION ADJUSTMENT
A㧦 50
A:
ADJUST VALUE
[1] → [0]
50
[
With [DATA] button highlighted, enter the bit data with 10-key.
[0] → [1]
1~ 99 ]
* Entry of 1 to 8 only is effective.
OK
5)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the currently entered
data are set.
After completion of setting, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
55
0
TEST
55-1
SCANNER
Purpose
: Setting
: PCU
Item
: Operation (Specifications)
SOFT
SW.
SETTING.
SW NO.
㧦
AAA
DATA
㧦
12345678
12345678
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the engine soft SW.
Section
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.55-02
(SW No.1-16)
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
4)
EXECUTE
When the machine enters Simulation 55-01, the screen on the
right is displayed.
55-3
* On the initial screen, [SW-NO.] button is highlighted.
Purpose
With [SW NO.] button highlighted, enter the SW number with
10-key.
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the controller soft SW.
Section
: MFP
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
Item
: Operation (Specifications)
Press [DATA] button.
Operation/Procedure
[DATA] button is highlighted and the current set value is displayed.
1)
When the machine enters Simulation 55-03, the screen on the
right is displayed.
2)
With [SW NO.] button highlighted, enter the SW number with
10-key.
3)
Press [DATA] button.
With [DATA] button highlighted, enter the bit data with 10-key.
When 10-key corresponding to the bit is pressed, the bit data
display is switched as shown below.
* On the initial screen, [SW-NO.] button is highlighted.
[1] → [0]
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
[0] → [1]
* Entry of 1 to 8 only is effective.
5)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the currently entered
data are set.
After completion of setting, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
[DATA] button is highlighted and the current set value is displayed.
4)
[1] → [0]
ENGINE SOFT
SW.
[0] → [1]
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.55-01
* Entry of 1 to 8 only is effective.
SETTING
SW NO.
:
AAA
DATA
:
12345678
12345678
With [DATA] button highlighted, enter the bit data with 10-key.
When 10-key corresponding to the bit is pressed, the bit data
display is switched as shown below.
0
TEST
: Setting
5)
(SW No.1-16)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the currently entered
data are set.
After completion of setting, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
EXECUTE
0
TEST
MFP SOFT
55-2
Purpose
: Setting
SW.
SETTING.
SW NO.
㧦
AAA
DATA
㧦
12345678
12345678
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the scanner soft SW
Section
: Scanner
Item
: Operation (Specifications)
Operation/Procedure
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.55-03
When the machine enters Simulation 55-02, the screen on the
right is displayed.
* On the initial screen, [SW-NO.] button is highlighted.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 109
(SW No.1-16)
EXECUTE
56
56-2
Purpose
: Backup
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute data transfer.
Function (Purpose) : Used to backup the data (user authentication data, address book, etc.) of EEPROM,
SRAM, or HDD to a USB memory and to
restore the data.
Section
: MFP
Section
: Memory, HDD
Item
: Data transfer
Item
: Data
56-1
Purpose
: Data transfer
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
Select an item of data transfer.
* When another button is selected, the newly selected button
is highlighted and "ENABLE" is displayed in the corresponding display section. The previously selected button returns to
the normal display and "DISABLE" is displayed in the corresponding display section.
* On the initial screen, [ALL → HDD] is highlighted. Only one
button can be selected.
2)
2)
3)
3)
Select a file button to be imported, and the display is shifted to
the execution screen.
* A file name is displayed on the button. If the file name is of
more than 70 characters, only 70 characters are displayed.
* The maximum number of buttons is 30 items.
4)
Press [EXECUTE] button, and it is highlighted and [YES] and
[NO] buttons becomes active from the gray-out display.
* Display during importing
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and
[YES] and [NO] buttons become active.
"HDD IMPORT"
* Display during exporting
When [YES] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the data of
the highlighted button are transferred.
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the set item select screen.
Select a desired menu to be executed, and the display is
shifted to the execution screen.
* When [HDD EXPORT] or [EEPROM & SRAM EXPORT] is
selected, the display is shifted to the execution screen.
* If there is a page over [↑], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
If there is a page under [↓], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
display grays out and the operation is invalid.
Insert a USB memory into the machine.
* If a USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STORAGE TO
THE USB PORT" is displayed. When [OK] button is pressed,
the display is shifted to the menu selection screen.
* The selected button is highlighted and "ENABLE" is displayed in the corresponding display section.
"HDD EXPORT"
5)
Press [YES] button, and it is highlighted and importing is executed.
* During execution, "RUNNNING"is displayed in the corresponding display section.
* When [NO] or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the display is
shifted to the execution screen.
* After completion of execution,"COMPLETE"is displayed in
the corresponding display section, and reset is executed
automatically.
* Message during importing
If the execution is not completed for any reason,"ERROR"is
displayed in the corresponding display section. (Rest is not
executed.)
Target data
ALL → HDD
HDD → ALL
HDD → SRAM
“IMPORTING THE DATA. PLEASE WAIT...”
* Message during exporting
"EXPORTING THE DATA. PLEASE WAIT....."
6)
When updating is completed, the result is displayed.
After normal completion, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
Content
All memory contents are transferred to HDD.
The contents of HDD are transferred to all the
memories.
Transfer from EEPROM to HDD
Transfer from HDD to EEPROM
Transfer from SRAM to HDD.
If, however, a FAX memory or an option memory
(memory for FAX) is installed, the data are
transferred to HDD together with the contents of the
memory for FAX.
Transfer from HDD to SRAM.
If, however, a FAX memory or an option memory
(memory for FAX)* is installed, the data are
transferred to HDD together with the contents of the
memory for FAX.
EEPROM → HDD
HDD → EEPROM
SRAM → HDD
[EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
In case of an error completion, "EEROR" is displayed.
* When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed to
exit the simulation, the machine is rebooted.
0
TEST
EXPORT/IMPORT
HDD
FILING
EEPROM&SRAM
0
COPY
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.56-01
DATA
ALL HDD
:
ENABLE
HDD ALL
:
DISABLE
EEPROM HDD
:
DISABLE
HDD EEPROM
:
DISABLE
ARE
YOU SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
DATA
EXPORT
* If FLASHROM and OP.FLASHROM are not installed, transfer is
not executed.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.56̆02
1/2
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 110
EXPORT
HDD
IMPORT
EEPROM&SRAM IMPORT
1/1
60
SLOT
SLOT1
60-1
: Operation test/Check
SLOT2
Function (Purpose) : Used to check read/write of the expansion
DIMM installed to the ICU PWB.
SLOT3
Purpose
After completion of execution, the result of
each slot is displayed on the panel.
SLOT4
Descriptions
Memory connected to the MFP controller.
Since it is of only the system area, it is excluded from the targets
of Red/Write check.
Memory connected to the MFP controller.
Read/Write check is executed for some memory area.
• Option memory connected to the ICU-ASIC.
• Since SLOT4 (standard) memory is not installed, Read/Write
check cannot be executed.
Standard memory connected to the ICU-ASIC
ICU PWB image DRAM read/write operation check, check ICU (memory) operation.
Section
: Image process (ICU)
Item
: Operation
0
TEST
SDRAM READ/WRITE TEST
Operation/Procedure
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.60̆01
PRESS[EXECUTE] TO START
When the machine enters Simulation 60-01, the screen on the
right is displayed.
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
test is started.
EXECUTE
2)
During testing, "SLOT-2:NOW EXECUTING..." is displayed.
3)
SLOT-2 test completed
4)
SLOT-3 test completed
5)
SLOT-4 test completed
Purpose
[EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the data of onboard SDRAM.
When the test is normally completed,"OK"is displayed.
Section
:
Item
:
60-2
Result display
OK
NG
NG
(SDRAM IS NOT IN SLOT4)
NONE
Detail
Success
Fail
Fail: SLOT4 (standard) is unconnected
and SLOT3 (option) is connected.
Not installed (including DIMM trouble)
: Setting
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and displayed on the set setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the currently set data are set.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
Item
Display
Content
DDR setting of onboard SPD
DDR setting after the following
B.
Set
range
0
1
Default
value
0
A
SETTING ENABLE
DISABLE
ENABLE
SDRAM setting
change flag
B
NUMBER OF ROW
11BIT
12BIT
13BIT
ROW address width
0
1
2
2
C
NUMBER OF COLUMN
COLUMN address width
TWR SETTING VALUE
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
2
D
8BIT
9BIT
10BIT
11BIT
12BIT
2CLOCK
3CLOCK
4CLOCK
5CLOCK
TWR setting value
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 111
1
Item
Display
Content
E
TRAS SETTING VALUE
F
TRC SETTING VALUE
G
TRCD SETTING VALUE
H
TRP SETTING VALUE
I
TFRC SETTING VALUE
J
CAS LATENCY
K
TOTAL NUMBER OF MBYTES ONBOARD DDR
L
J
K
NUMBER OF ONBOARD-DDR CS-BANK
CAPACITY
BUFFER TYPE
4CLOCK
5CLOCK
6CLOCK
7CLOCK
6CLOCK
7CLOCK
8CLOCK
9CLOCK
10CLOCK
2CLOCK
3CLOCK
4CLOCK
5CLOCK
2CLOCK
3CLOCK
4CLOCK
5CLOCK
7CLOCK
8CLOCK
:
20CLOCK
CL=2
CL=2.5
CL=3
NONE
128MBYTE
256MBYTE
NON
1CHIP SELECT
2CHIP SELECT
TRAS setting value
TRC setting value
TRCD setting value
TRP setting value
TFRC setting value
CAS latency
Total capacity of onboard DDR
Total capacity of onboard DDR
Set
range
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
:
13
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
1
2
Default
value
2
3
1
1
3
1
1
1
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.60㧙02
SDRAM SETTING
A:
㨇
0
0 㨪
1 㨉
A㧦 0
㧧 SETTING
B㧦 2
㧧 NUMBER OF
ROW㧦13BIT
C㧦 2
㧧
COLUMN㧦10BIT
D㧦 1
㧧 TWR SETTING
Display
LSU TESTRESULT
NG: PG
Content
LSU check polygon mirror is
abnormal
LSU TESTRESULT
NG: K
LSU check K-colored LD
emission of light is abnormal
LSU TESTRESULT
NG: CL
LSU check CL-colored LD
emission of light is abnormal
ENABLE㧦DISABLE
NUMBER OF
VALUE㧦3CLOCK
OK
0
61
TEST
LSU
SIMULATION NO.61̆01
CLOSE
TEST
PRESS[EXECUTE]
61-01
Purpose
Operation
Operation
interruption and
end
Operation
interruption and
end
Operation
interruption and
end
TO
START
: Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) : The polygon motor rotation and the BD signal detection are checked.
Section
: LSU
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the LSU check is started.
2)
When checking is normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
When an error occurs in checking, [NG] is displayed and the
detail is displayed.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 112
EXECUTE
1/1
62
61-4
Purpose
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute self-print of the LSU position adjustment.
Section
: LSU
Item
: Adjustment
62-1
Purpose
: Data clear
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the hard disk format
(except operation manual area).
Operation/Procedure
1)
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
Section
: MFP (HDD)
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and displayed on the set setting area.
Item
: Clear
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
Operation/Procedure
1)
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons
become active.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and printing is started.
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared.
* When the hard disk formatting is not completed normally,
"HDD FORMAT NG" is displayed.
* After completion of the hard disk formatting, [EXECUTE]
button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and [NO]
buttons gray out.
* After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to
the normal display.
* When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the value is set to the set item. (The value is not
saved to EEPROM and RAM.)
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] key
is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occurrence of an interruption, printing is resumed.
Press [YES] button.
Execute formatting of the hard disk. [YES] button is highlighted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
* When [CA] key is pressed during formatting, the operation is
interrupted and the simulation is terminated. When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, formatting is interrupted
and the display returns to the sub number entry screen.
* When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed to exit
the simulation, the machine is rebooted.
0
Item
A
B
Display item &
Detail of
display
MULTICOUNT
PAPER
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
TEST
Description of item
Set range
Default
value
Print quantity
Cassette Manual
select
feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
1 to 999
1 to 6 1
1
3 (CS2)
2
3
4
5
6
0
A:
1
PRINT)
A㧦 1
㧧 MULTICOUNT
B㧦 3
㧧 PAPER㧦CS2
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
62-2
CLOSE
LSU POSITION ADJUSTMENT (SELF
YOU
Purpose
Example: PAPER:CS1
SIMULATION NO.61㧙04
FORMAT
ARE
* Item B is displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
TEST
HDD
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.62㧙01
: Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the partial check of the
hard disk read/write (except operation manual area).
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Section
: MFP (HDD)
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
㨇 1㨪 999㨉
EXECUTE
Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons
become active.
OK
2)
Press [YES] button.
The procedures (Write → Retrieve → Check for any abnormality.) are executed.
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
* When the procedures (Write → Retrieve → Abnormality
check) are not completed normally, "HDD R/W TEST NG" is
displayed.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 113
* When the procedures (Write → Retrieve → Abnormality
check) are completed normally, [EXECUTE] button returns
to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
* When [CA] key is pressed during the procedures (Write →
Retrieve → Check for any abnormality.), the operation is
interrupted and the simulation is terminated. When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the operation is interrupted
and the display returns to the sub number entry screen.
62-6
Purpose
: Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the HDD self-diagnostics.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Section
: MFP (HDD)
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
0
HDD
R/W
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.62-02
TEST
* The selected button is highlighted and "ENABLE" is displayed in the corresponding display section.
TEST(PART)
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
* When another button is selected, the newly selected button
is highlighted and "ENABLE" is displayed in the corresponding display section. The previously selected button returns to
the normal display and "DISABLE" is displayed in the corresponding display section.
EXECUTE
2)
62-3
Purpose
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute read/write check (all
areas) of the hard disk.
* After completion of self-diagnostics, [EXECUTE] button
returns to the normal display and the result of diagnostics is
displayed in the corresponding display section. (In the case
of OK, "OK (RESULT:0)" is displayed. In the case of NG,
"NG (RESULT: Other than 0)" is displayed.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
: MFP (HDD)
Item
: Operation
* If the operation is not executed or completed for any reason,
"ERROR" is displayed in the corresponding display section.
Operation/Procedure
1)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and YES] and [NO] buttons
become active.
2)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
self-diagnostics is started.
* During self diagnostics, "EXECUTING..." is displayed in the
corresponding display section.
: Operation test/Check
Section
Select an item to execute the self-diagnostics.
Target data
SHORT S.T
EXTENDED S.T
Press [YES] button.
The procedures (Write → Retrieve → Check for any abnormality.) are executed.
Content
Partial check
All areas check
0
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
TEST
SMART OFFLINE TEST
* When the procedures (Write → Retrieve → Abnormality
check) are not completed normally, "HDD R/W TEST NG" is
displayed.
SHORT S.T
㧦
ENABLE
EXTENDED S.T
㧦
DISABLE
* When the procedures (Write → Retrieve → Abnormality
check) are completed normally, [EXECUTE] button returns
to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
* When [CA] key is pressed during Write → Retrieve, the
operation is interrupted and the simulation is terminated.
When [SYSTEM SETTGINGS] key is pressed instead, the
operation is interrupted and the display is shifted to the sub
number entry screen.
0
TEST
HDD
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.62㧙03
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.62̆06
EXECUTE
1/1
62-7
Purpose
: Operation test/Check
Function (Purpose) : Used to print the self-diagnostics error log.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Section
: MFP
Item
: Data
Operation/Procedure
R/W TEST(ALL)
1)
When the machine enters Simulation 62-07, the following
screen is displayed.
Check that there is A4 paper in the paper feed tray. If not, supply paper.
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
2)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
error log is printed.
After completion of self-printing, the display returns to the initial
screen.
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] key
is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occurrence of an interruption, printing is resumed.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 114
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.62-07
TEST
SMART
ERROR
PRESS
LOG
PRINT
[EXECUTE] TO
* During delete operation of the job log data [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and "EXECUTING..." is displayed.
OUT
PRINT
THE
SMART ERROR PRINT
* If delete of the jog log data is not completed normally, "NG"
is displayed.
* After completion of delete of the job log data, [EXECUTE]
button returns to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
EXECUTE
* When [CA] key is pressed during delete operation, the operation is interrupted and the simulation is terminated. When
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the operation is interrupted and the display returns to the sub number entry
screen.
62-8
Purpose
: Data clear
Function (Purpose) : Used to format the hard disk excluding the
system area and operation manual area.
0
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Section
: MFP (HDD)
Item
: Clear
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.62㧙10
JOB COMPLETE
DATA CLEAR(WITH
JOB
LOG
DATA)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons
become active.
ARE YOU
2)
Press [YES] button.
3)
The hard disk (excluding the system area) is formatted. [YES]
button is highlighted.
SURE?
YES
Purpose
* During formatting the hard disk (excluding the system area),
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and "HDD FORMAT
(EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA) EXECUTING..." is displayed.
Section
: MFP (HDD)
Item
: Clear
* When formatting of the hard disk (excluding the system
area) is completed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal
display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
* When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed to
exit from the simulation are restart.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.62-08
HDD FORMAT(EXCEPT
SYSTEM
EXECUTE
62-11
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
* If formatting of the hard disk (excluding the system area) is
not completed normally, " HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA) NG" is displayed.
NO
: Data clear
Function (Purpose) : Used to delete the document filing data.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Operation/Procedure
1)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons
become active.
2)
Press [YES] button.
The document filing data are deleted.
[YES] button is highlighted.
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
* During delete of the document filing data, [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and "DOCUMENT FILING DATA CLEAR
EXECUTING..." is displayed.
AREA)
* If delete of the document filing data is not completed normally, "NG" is displayed.
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
62-10
Purpose
: Data clear
Function (Purpose) : Used to delete the job completion list. (The
job log data are also deleted.)
* After completion of delete of the document filing data, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
* When [CA] key is pressed during delete operation, the operation is interrupted and the simulation is terminated. When
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the operation is interrupted and the display returns to the sub number entry
screen.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Section
: MFP (HDD)
Item
: Clear
0
TEST
DOCUMENT FILING DATA CLEAR
Operation/Procedure
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.62㧙11
Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons
become active.
2)
Press [YES] button.
ARE YOU
The job log data are deleted. [YES] button is highlighted.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 115
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
62-12
Purpose
0
: Data clear
Function (Purpose) : Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format
in HDD trouble.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.62-13
TEST
HDD FORMAT (MANUAL AREA ONLY)
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Section
: MFP (HDD)
Item
: Clear
Operation/Procedure
ARE
1)
When the machine enters the simulation, the screen on the
right is displayed.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
When [OK] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, it is
highlighted and the current entered value is saved to EEPROM
and RAM.
A
Content
(0: YES,
1: NO)
0
1
Auto format Enable
Auto format Disable
Set
range
0 to 1
Default
value
1 (Disable)
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.62㧙12
CLOSE
CLOSE
A:
㧧 (0:YES 1:NO)
OK
: Data clear
Function (Purpose) : Used to format the hard disk (operation
manual area only).
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
: MFP (HDD)
Item
: Clear
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
Check (Display/Print)
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the following values related
to shading for RGB and OC. (3 x 2 = 6
kinds)
Section
: Scanner (Exposure)
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a color button to be displayed.
* Only one color button can be selected, and the selected button is highlighted. In the initial state, [B] is selected.
* If there is a page over [↑], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
62-13
Section
EXECUTE
* When [B](Blue), [G](Green), or [R](Red) button is selected,
the selected button is highlighted and the adjustment value
of the selected color is displayed.
1
㨇 0㨪 1㨉
Purpose
NO
The shading set value of the selected button is displayed.
AUTO FORMAT SETTING㧔HDD TROUBLE㧕
A㧦 1
YES
63-1
Purpose
Item
SURE?
63
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
3)
YOU
If there is a page under [↓], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
display grays out and the operation is invalid.
* When [CLOSE] button is pressed, the display shifts to the copy
basic screen of simulation.
Operation/Procedure
* Copying can be performed also by pressing [COLOR]/[BLACK]
key.
1)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons
become active.
2)
Press [YES] button.
3)
The hard disk (operation manual area only) is formatted. [YES]
button is highlighted.
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
* During formatting the hard disk (operation manual area
only), [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and "HDD FORMAT
(MANUAL AREA ONLY) EXECUTING..." is displayed.
* If formatting of the hard disk (operation manual area only) is
not completed normally, "HDD FORMAT (MANUAL AREA
ONLY) NG" is displayed.
Display item
GAIN ODD
TARGET VALUE
BLACK LEVEL
ERROR CODE
Description
Gain adjustment value
(ODD)
Gain adjustment value
(EVEN)
Offset value (ODD)
Offset value (EVEN)
Reference plat sampling
average value (ODD)
Reference plat sampling
average value (EVEN)
Target value
Black output level
Error code (0, 1 to 4)
RSPF WHITE
LEVEL 1ST
First scan, RSPF white
reference level
GAIN EVEN
OFFSET ODD
OFFSET EVEN
SMP AVE ODD
SMP AVE EVEN
* When formatting of the hard disk (operation manual area
only) is completed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal
display and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
* When [CA] key or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed to
exit the simulation, the machine is rebooted.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 116
Remark
0: No error
1: STAGE1. Over the
loop number
2: STAGE2. The target
value is less than the
specified level.
3: STAGE3. The gain
set value is negative.
4: END is not
asserted.
Display item
RSPF WHITE
LEVEL 2ND
Description
Second and later scan,
RSPF white reference
level
* If there is a page over [↑], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
Remark
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63̆01
TEST
If there is a page under [↓], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
display grays out and the operation is invalid.
2)
Press a button to be executed. (In this example, [OC] button is
pressed and the color auto adjustment execution screen is displayed.)
3)
Press [EXECUTE] button and it is highlighted and the color
auto adjustment is executed.
SHADING DATA DISPLAY
GAIN ODD
:
147
GAIN EVEN
:
143
OFFSET ODD
:
0
OFFSET EVEN
:
0
B
G
R
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed during the automatic
adjustment, the automatic adjustment is interrupted.
1/3
* On the screen, [G] is pressed.
63-2
Purpose
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute shading forcibly.
Section
: Scanner
Item
: Operation
a)
Sampling setting
b)
Scan request
c)
Waiting for reaching the document lead edge
d)
Sampling end
e)
Sampling result acquisition
f)
Calculation for sampling result
g)
Calculation result save
When a scanner motor error occurs (during execution):
Operation/Procedure
1)
* Process contents during execution
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and
shading is started.
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63㧙03
TEST
* During execution, "SHADING EXECUTING..." is displayed.
SCANNER
COLOR
BALANCE
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed during execution, the
operation is interrupted.
SCANNER
MOTOR
IS
AUTO
NOT
ADJUSUTMENT
READY
* When shading is completed normally, [EXECUTE] button
returns to the normal display and "COMPLETED" is displayed.
* When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during other
than printing, the display returns to the sub number entry
screen.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63̆02
[EXECUTE]
1/1
When auto adjustment error occurs:
* When an error occurs, all the error patch numbers are displayed.
If there is no error after selection of a color, the screen is similar
to the initial screen. Only the color of an error is displayed as the
above error display.
* When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. When [RESULT] button is pressed, the display returns to
the initial screen. (The calculation result of normal completion is
displayed.)
SHADING EXECUTION
PRESS
EXECUTE
TO SHADING START
0
EXECUTE
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63㧙03
SCANNER COLOR
BALANCE
AUTO
ADJUSUTMENT
SAMPRING DATA UNFIT
63-3
Purpose
#1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6, #7, #8, #9, #10, #11, #12, #13, #14, #15,
: Adjustment
#16, #17, #18, #19, #20, #22, #24
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the gamma correction and
density conversion for RGB image data
inputted from the CCD. Gamma correction
1 of the SCAN ASIC and the set value of
color correction are set by calculating from
the image data.
B
G
: Scanner (scan)
Item
: Image quality (Color balance)
Operation/Procedure
When a color button is selected, the adjustment value of the
selected color is displayed.
R
RESULT
1/1
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63㧙03
SCANNER COLOR
Section
1)
PLEASE CHECK THE CHART AND PLATEN GLASS
BALANCE
AUTO
ADJUSUTMENT
OC #1:197,
#2:185,
#3:165,
#4:148,
#5:117,
#6:110,
#7: 88,
#8: 75,
#9: 55,
#10: 45,
#11: 38,
#12: 29,
#13: 27,
#14: 21,
#19:
#20:
B
5,
G
* When [B] (Blue), [G] (Green), or [R] (Red) button is selected,
the selected button is highlighted and the adjustment value
of the selected color is displayed.
* Only one color button can be selected, and the selected button is highlighted. In the initial state, [B] is selected.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 117
4,
#15: 18,
#22:
R
2,
#:16:15,
#:24:
#17: 10,
#18:
8,
2
OC
1/2
* The sampling value of each patch from the high density side
is displayed as the result.
63-5
Purpose
: Adjustment
When [K][C][M][Y] button is pressed on the sampling result
display screen, the data of each color are displayed.
Function (Purpose) : Used to reset the gamma correction and
color correction parameters of the SCAN
ASIC.
Section
: Scanner
Item
: Clear
Only one color button can be selected. (In the initial screen,
[K] is selected.)
* After completion of sampling, [EXECUTE] button returns
to the normal display.
Operation/Procedure
1)
0
When a touch panel button to execute the standard reset is
pressed ([SIDE A(OC)] in this example), the selected button is
highlighted and [EXECUTE] button becomes active from the
gray-out display.
TEST
ENGINE COLOR
SET
THE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63̆06
BALANCE
CHART
ON
CHART
PLATEN
READING
AND
TOUCH
[EXECUTE]
* When the selected button is pressed again, selection is canceled and the button returns to the normal display.
* If no button is selected for standard reset, [EXECUTE] button grays out.
EXECUTE
* Two or more items can be selected for standard reset.
2)
Press [EXECUTE] button.
63-7
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons
become active.
3)
Purpose
The scanner color balance standard value reset is executed.
[YES] button is highlighted.
Section
: Image process (ICU)
Item
: Image quality (Color balance)
Press [YES] button.
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE]
button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
gray out.
* The restored data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Operation/Procedure
1)
* During the scanner color balance standard value reset, [EXECUTE] and [YES] buttons are highlighted.
* After completion of the scanner color balance standard value
reset delete, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display
and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
1
2
SIDE A
(OC)
3
2)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63̆05
STANDARD SCANNER
GAMMA SETUP
SIDE A㧔OC㧕
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/1
63-6
Purpose
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
Check (Display/Print)
Function (Purpose) : Used to scan the engine color balance auto
adjustment pattern and to display the sampling result.
Section
: Image process (ICU)
Item
: Image quality (Color balance)
When [SETUP] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
sampling start screen.
Put the chart self-printed with SIM46-21 on the glass table,
and press [EXECUTE] button. [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and the sampling screen is displayed.
Copy gamma correction 1 and color correction
coefficient
TWAIN gamma correction 1 and color correction
coefficient
Auto adjustment gamma correction 1 and color
correction coefficient
0
TEST
When the machine enters Simulation 63-07, the following
screen is displayed.
* Press [K][C][M][Y] button to display the data of each color.
Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
is highlighted. (In the initial screen, [K] is selected.)
3)
After completion of sampling, the sampling result is displayed.
When [REPEAT] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the
sampling start screen.
4)
When [OK] button is pressed, the displayed result of sampling
is saved to EEPROM and RAM as the target value.
Display data
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BASE
Display content
Point B target value
Point C target value
Point D target value
Point E target value
Point F target value
Point G target value
Point H target value
Point I target value
Point J target value
Point K target value
Point L target value
Point M target value
Point N target value
Point O target value
Base sampling value
* BASE is displayed only on the sampling result display screen.
Operation/Procedure
1)
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to display and register the engine
auto density adjustment scanner target
value.
Put the chart self-printed with SIM46-21 on the glass table,
and press [EXECUTE] button. Sampling is started. (When
[EXECUTE] button is pressed during execution, the operation
is interrupted.)
* During sampling, [EXECUTE] button is highlighted.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 118
0
#B:
#G:
TARGET
91,
28935,
#L: 169731,
K
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63㧙07
TEST
SCANNER
OF
C
COLOR
CALIB
#C
2944,
#D:
3227,
54344,
#I:
86968,
#J: 122678,
#N: 201249,
#:O: 207112
M
#E:
SETUP:SERVICE
#H:
#M: 195950,
5822,
#F:
Item
Target value table select
8600
#K: 151198
Y
Set
value
DEF1
DEF2
DEF3
Content
DEF1 mode setting
DEF2 mode setting
DEF3 mode setting
0
1/1
SETUP
Default
value
DEF1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63㧙11
TEST
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET SELECT OF ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT
63-8
TARGET
Purpose
TBL
㧦
DEF1
DEF2
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the standard value reset of
the engine auto adjustment scanner target
value (for servicing).
Section
: Image process (ICU)
Item
: Image quality (Color balance)
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
DEF3
: Setting
1/1
Press [EXECUTE] button.
64
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons
become active.
64-1
Press [YES] button.
Purpose
The standard value reset of the engine auto adjustment scanner target value is executed. [YES] button is highlighted.
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute self-print (Color mode).
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
Section
: Printer
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
* The restored data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
2)
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Auto density adjustment target value (KCMY)
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63㧙08
STANDARD
SCANNER
TARGET
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
1
Press [K][C][M][Y] button to select a color.
The selected button is highlighted. When the highlighted button is pressed, it returns to the normal display. (Two or more
buttons can be selected.)
* During execution of the standard value reset of the engine
auto adjustment scanner target value, [EXECUTE] and
[YES] buttons are highlighted.
* After completion of the standard value reset of the engine
auto adjustment scanner target value, [EXECUTE] button
returns to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons
gray out.
: Operation test/Check
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
SETTING:SERVICE
3)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
4)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the currently set selfprint is started.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
63-11
Purpose
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the factory target color balance
in the auto color balance adjustment
(SIM46-24).
Section
: Scanner (Scanning)
Item
: Image quality
[EXECUTE] button remains highlighted during self-printing,
and returns to the normal display after completion of self-printing.
* When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the value is set to the set item. (The value is not
saved to EEPROM and RAM.)
* When [C], [CA], or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed
during self-printing, the operation is interrupted.
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occurrence of an interruption (paper empty, jam, etc.), self-printing
is resumed.
Operation/Procedure
1)
When the machine enters Simulation 63-11, the button of the
current set value of the target value table is highlighted.
2)
When the button of the target value to be changed ([DEF2]
button in this example) is pressed, it is highlighted and the set
value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* When paper is selected which does not satisfy the paper
feed and paper exit conditions, printing cannot be made.
* Only one item can be selected.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 119
Item
A
Display item
PRINT PATTERN (1, 2, 9 ~ 11, 14 ~ 19)
Description of item
Print pattern specification
(* For details, refer to the following.)
B
DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A : 2, 11)
Print dot number setting (Self print patter: m by n)
C
DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A : 2, 11)
Empty dot number setting (Self print patter: m by n)
D
DENSITY (FIXED”255” IF A : 9)
Print gradation specifications
E
F
MULTI COUNT
EXPOSURE
(2 ~ 8 IF A : 14 ~
19)
Print quantity
Exposure mode
specifications
G
PAPER
H
DUPLEX
I
PAPER TYPE
THROUGH
CHAR/PIC
CHAR/PRPIC
CHAR
PRINT PIC
PRINT PAPER
MAP
STANDARD DITCH
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
YES
NO
PLAIN
HEAVY
OHP
ENVELOPE
Cassette select
Duplex print select
Paper type
No process (Through)
Text/Printed Photo
Text/Photograph
Text
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
Dither without correction
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Select
Not select
Plain paper
Heavy paper
OHP
Envelope
* Paper feed condition PLAIN: Cassette/Manual feed. For the other, manual feed only.
* Items F, G, H, I are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER:CS1
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 120
Set range
1 to 20
(Only 1, 2, 9 to 11,
and 14 to 19 can
be printed.)
Pattern 2, 11: 2 to
255
Other than above:
1 to 255
Pattern 2, 11: 2 to
255
Other than above:
0 to 255
Pattern 9: 255
(fixed)
Other than above:
1 to 255
1 to 999
1
Pattern 14 to
19: 2 to 8
2
Other than
3
above: 1 to 8 4
5
6
7
8
1 to 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 1
0
1
1 to 4
1
2
3
4
Default value
1
Writing
Yes
1
Yes
254
Yes
255
Yes
1
8 (STANDARD
DITCH)
No
Yes
2 (CS1)
No
1 (NO)
No
1 (PLAIN)
No
NO.
Content
1
Grid pattern
2
3
Mesh print
16 gradations:
sub scan
16 gradations:
main scan
4
5
6
7
8
9
Even pitch
pattern (MBYN):
sub scan
Even pitch
pattern (MBYN):
main scan
4-color overlap
even pitch
pattern (MBYN):
sub scan
4-color overlap
even pitch
pattern (MBYN):
main scan
Each color 10%
area (A4/4R)
density print
10
8-color band
print
11
4-color mesh
print
12
13
14
–
–
256 gradations:
sub scan
15
16 gradations
+MBYN (Center
gradation
section only):
sub scan
16 gradations
+MBYN (Center
gradation
section only):
main scan
16
Pattern
size
All
surface
Pattern
forming
section
LSU-ASIC
Sub
fixed
Main
fixed
All
surface
Fixed
range
All
surface
(Each
color
1/4)
–
Sub
fixed
Sub
fixed
Main
fixed
Color select
Gradation
select
Exposure
select
K only
{
{
{ (up to
3 colors)
{ (Up to
3 colors)
K only
K only
M parameter
N parameter
Enable/
Disable
Default
value
Enable/
Disable
Default
value
Remark
✕
{
1
{
254
{
No
✕
✕
{
2
{
K only
No
✕
{
K only
{
✕
{
1
{
4
• All colors are
selected in the print
width of 100 or more
(Print in 3 colors
(CMY), print is
started at 4mm from
the paper lead edge.
–
• When all colors are
selected, print is
made in CMY.
• 16-gradattion print
• Gradation change
for every 256dot.
–
✕ (4color
fixed)
–
{
✕
{
1
{
4
–
✕ (4color
fixed)
–
{
✕
{
10
✕ (4color
fixed)
✕ (4color
fixed)
–
{
✕
–
{
✕
{
2
{
2
–
–
–
–
–
–
Condition
When
NO
{
2
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
• Each interval is
41.86MM(989dot)
• When M is outside 1
to 13%, it is
rounded.
• [K] print is started at
17mm from the
paper lead edge.
–
✕
Input
process
(IMG-ASIC
preprocess)
–
–
{ (up to
3 colors)
K only
(For
through/
default,
C only.)
–
–
No
–
–
○
–
–
IMG-ASIC
{ (up to
3 colors)
K only
No
{
{
2
{
2
{ (up to
3 colors)
K only
No
{
{
2
{
2
✕
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 121
✕
• Each color print is
made for every 1/4
of sub scan paper
size.
• When N=0, 4-color
all surface print.
–
–
• When all colors are
selected, print is
made in CMY.
• Print is made from
255 gradations in
the range of 0 to 254
gradations.
• Print in 256
gradations.
• Print is started at
5mm from the paper
lead edge.
• When all colors are
selected, print is
made in CMY.
• Print in 16
gradations.
• Gradation is
changed for every
256dot.
NO.
Pattern
size
Content
17
All background
(Half tone)
All
surface
18
256-gradation
pattern (Other
dither)
256-gradation
pattern (Dither
for text)
Fixed
range
4-color grid
pattern (Cross):
main/sub scan
All
surface
19
20
Pattern
forming
section
Color select
When
NO
Condition
Half tone
(IMG-ASIC
afterprocess)
Fixed
range
Gradation
select
Exposure
select
M parameter
Enable/
Disable
N parameter
Default
value
Enable/
Disable
{ (up to
3 colors)
K only
{
{
✕
✕
{ (up to
3 colors)
K only
No
{
✕
✕
✕ (up to
3 colors)
K only
No
{
✕
✕
✕ (4color
fixed)
–
✕
✕
Controller
(memory)
✕
✕
Remark
Default
value
✕
117
• When all colors are
selected, print is
made in CMY.
• When all colors are
selected, print is
made in CMY.
• Print is made for 16
gradations in the
main scan direction,
and for the next 16
gradations, in return.
(16 x 16 patch print)
• Print is started at
5mm from the paper
lead edge.
• Print is started from
255 gradation in the
range of 0 to 254
gradations.
–
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.64-01
A
B
SELF PRINT(COLOR) : SERVICE
A:
㨇
1
1 㨪
K
C
20 㨉
A㧦 1
㧧 PRINT PATTERN (1,2,9~11, 14~19)
B㧦 1
㧧 DOT1 (DOT1>=2
IF
A : 2,11)
C㧦254
㧧 DOT2 (DOT2>=2
IF
A : 2,11)
D㧦255
㧧 DENSITY (FIXED”255” IF A : 9)
M
Y
EXECUTE
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
Check (Display/Print)
Function (Purpose) : Used to print the density adjustment pattern.
Section
: Printer
Item
: Operation
Content
Print quantity
0 The half tone
process control
correction value is
added.
1 The half tone
process control
correction value is
not added.
YES
NO
1 to 999
0 to 1
1
1
Example:PROC ADJ:NO
0
TEST
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.64㧙02
ENGINE COLOR
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
BALANCE
1
PATCH PRINT
MODE
A㧦 1
㧧 COPIES
B㧦 1
㧧 PROC ADJ:NO
㨇 1㨪999 㨉
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
Default
value
* Item B is displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
2)
Set
range
* When PROC ADJ is set to YES, the pattern with the half tone
process control correction value added is printed after execution
of high density process control.
Operation/Procedure
1)
COPIES
PROC ADJ
OK
64-2
Purpose
Display item & Detail
of display
Item
EXECUTE
64-3
Purpose
: Operation test/Check
Enter the set value with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute self-print. (BW mode)
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared.
Section
: Printer
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and the
main scan direction registration adjustment pattern is printed.
Item
: Operation
After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
normal display.
1)
* When [OK], [↑], [↓], [EXECUTE] button, [COLOR], or
[BLACK] key is pressed, the value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] key
is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occurrence of an interruption, self-printing is resumed.
OK
Operation/Procedure
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 122
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
* When [C] key is pressed, the entered value is cleared.
3)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and printing is started.
* After completion of printing, [EXECUTE] button returns to
the normal display.
* When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the value is set to the set item. (The value is not
saved to EEPROM and RAM.)
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] key
is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occurrence of an interruption, printing is resumed.
Item
A
Display item & Detail of display
PRINT PATTERN (1,2,9 ~ 11, 14 ~ 19)
Description of item
Print pattern specification (* For details, refer to below.)
B
DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A : 2, 11)
Print dot number setting (Self print pattern: for M BY N)
C
DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A : 2, 11)
Space dot number setting (Self print pattern: for M BY N)
D
DENSITY (FIXED”255” IF A : 9)
Print gradation specification
E
F
MULTI COUNT
EXPOSURE
(2 ~ 8 IF A : 14 ~
19)
Print quantity
No process (Through)
G
PAPER
H
DUPLEX
I
PAPER TYPE
THROUGH Exposure
mode specification
CHAR/PIC
CHAR/PRPIC
CHAR
PRINT PIC
PRINT PAPER
MAP
STANDARD DITCH
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
YES
NO
PLAIN
HEAVY
OHP
ENVELOPE
Text/Printed Photo
Text/Photograph
Text
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
Dither without correction
Paper feed tray select
Duplex print select
Paper kind select
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Selected
Not selected
Plain paper
Heavy paper
OHP
Envelope
Set range
1 to 20
(Only 1, 2, 9 to
11, and 14 to
19 can be
printed.)
Pattern 2, 11:
2 to 255
Other than
above: 1 to
255
Pattern 2, 11:
2 to 255
Other than
above: 0 to
255
Pattern 9: 255
(fixed)
Other than
above: 1 to
255
1 to 999
Pattern
1
14 to 19:
2 to 8
2
Other
3
than
4
above: 1
5
to 8
6
7
8
1 to 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 1
0
1
1 to 4
1
2
3
4
Default value
1
Writing
Yes
1
Yes
254
Yes
255
Yes
1
8 (STANDARD
DITCH)
No
Yes
2 (CS1)
No
1 (NO)
No
1 (PLAIN)
No
• When paper which does not satisfy the paper feed and paper exit conditions is selected, printing cannot be executed.
• Paper feed condition PLAIN: Cassette/Manual. For the other, manual feed only.
• Items F, G, H and I are as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER:CS1
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 123
NO.
Content
Pattern
size
Pattern
forming
section
Gradation
select
Exposure
select
LSU-ASIC
{
✕
M parameter
Enable/ Default
Disable
value
{
1
N parameter
Enable/ Default
Disable
value
{
254
Remark
1
Grid pattern
All surface
2
3
Mesh print
16 gradations: sub
scan
16 gradations: main
scan
All surface
Sub fixed
{
No
✕
✕
Main fixed
No
✕
Even pitch pattern
(MBYN): sub scan
Even pitch pattern
(MBYN): main scan
4-color overlap Even
pitch pattern (MBYN):
sub scan
4-color overlap Even
pitch pattern (MBYN):
main scan
Each color 10% area
(A4/4R) density print
All surface
{
✕
{
1
{
4
• When all colors are
selected in the print width
of 100 or more, print is
made in CMY (3 colors).
• Print is started at 4mm
from the paper lead edge.
–
• When all colors are
selected, print is made in
CMY.
• Print for 16 gradations.
• Gradation is changed for
every 256 dots.
–
All surface
{
✕
{
1
{
4
–
Fixing
range
{
✕
{
10
Fixing
range
All surface
(Each color
1/4)
{
✕
{
✕
{
2
{
2
–
–
–
–
–
–
4
5
6
7
8
9
2
{
2
{
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
• Each interval is
41.86mm(989dot)
• When M is other than 1 to
13%, it is rounded.
• K print is started at 17mm
from the paper lead edge.
–
✕
10
8-color band print
11
4-color Mesh print
12
13
14
–
–
256 gradations: sub
scan
–
–
Sub fixed
Input
process
(IMG-ASIC
preprocess)
–
–
No
–
–
{
–
–
15
16 gradations+M byN
(Center gradation
section only): sub scan
16 gradations+M byN
(Center gradation
section only): main
scan
All background (Half
tone)
Sub fixed
IMG-ASIC
No
✕
{
2
{
2
No
✕
{
2
{
2
{
{
✕
✕
No
{
✕
✕
No
{
✕
✕
✕
✕
16
17
18
19
20
Main fixed
All surface
256 gradation pattern
(Other dither)
256 gradation pattern
(Dither for text)
Fixing
range
Fixing
range
Frame cross pattern
All surface
Half tone
(IMG-ASIC
afterprocess)
Controller
(Memory)
✕
✕
✕
✕
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 124
✕
✕
• Each color print is made
for every 1/4 of sub scan
paper size.
• When N=0, 4-color all
surface print.
–
–
• When all colors are
selected, print is made in
CMY.
• Print is started at 255
gradation in the range of
0 to 254 gradations.
• Print in 256 gradations.
• Print is started at 5mm
fromthepaperleadedge.
• When all colors are
selected, print is made in
CMY.
• Print in 256 gradations.
• Gradation is changed for
every 256 dot.
• When all colors are
selected, print is made in
CMY.
• When all colors are
selected, print is made in
CMY.
• Print is made for 16
gradations in the main
scan direction, and for the
next 16 gradations, in
return. (16 x 16 patch
print).
• Print is started at 5mm
from the paper lead edge.
• Print is started at 255
gradation in the range of
0to254gradations.
–
2)
0
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.64-03
TEST
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
SELF PRINT(BW)
A:
1
㨇 1㨪 2 0 㨉
A㧦
1
㧧 PRINT PATTERN
B㧦
1
㧧 DOT1
C㧦254
㧧 DOT2
D㧦255
㧧 DENSITY
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
EXECUTE
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
OK
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
64-4
Purpose
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute self-print.
Section
: Printer
Item
: Operation
3)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
4)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the currently set selfprint is started.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
: Operation test/Check
[EXECUTE] button remains highlighted during self-printing.
After completion of self-printing, it returns to the normal display.
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a color with [K][C][M][Y] buttons.
The selected button is highlighted. When the selected button is
pressed again, it returns to the normal display. (Two or more
buttons can be selected.)
* When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the value is set to the set item. (The value is not
saved to EEPROM and RAM.)
* When [EXECUTE] button, [C], [CA], or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occurrence of an interruption (paper empty, jam, etc.), self-printing
is resumed.
* When paper which does not satisfy the paper feed conditions and the paper exit conditions, printing cannot be made.
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Display item & Detail of display
PRINT PATTERN
DENSITY
MULTI CONUT
PAPER
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
HALFTONE
PHOTO
TEXT/GRAPHICS
CAD
BIT DEPTH
1BIT
4BIT
DITHER
STRAIGHT
CALIB
Description of item
Print pattern specification (* For details, refer to below.)
Print gradation specification
Print quantity
Paper feed tray select
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Half tone
Photo
Text/Graphic
Design
Bit number
1 bit
4 bit
Dither correction
Straight
specification
Calibration
Set range
1 to 5
1 to 255
1 to 999
1 to 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 2
0
1
2
0 to 1
0
1
1 to 2
1
2
Default value
3
128
1
2 (CS1)
0 (PHOTO)
1 (4BIT)
2 (CALIB)
* When print pattern 2 or 5 is selected, items E to G cannot be selected. (Though entry of the value is possible, it is not reflected to setting.)
* When paper which does not satisfy the paper feed conditions, printing cannot be made.
* Paper feed condition PLAIN: Cassette/Manual feed. For the
other, manual feed only.
* Items D, E, F, G are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER: CS1
Condition
Color select
When NOT
256 gradation pattern (COLOR)
{
K only
2
256 gradation pattern (B/W)
✕
K only
3
✕
✕
4
256 gradation pattern (COLOR)
(Y-M-C-K continuous)
Half tone pattern (COLOR)
{
K only
Gradation
select/ Dither
select
1: Straight
2: Calibration
1: Straight
2: Calibration
1: Straight
2: Calibration
1 to 255
5
Half tone pattern (B/W)
✕
K only
1 to 255
NO.
Content
1
Remark
C only/ M only/ Y only/ K only/ C & M/ C & Y/ M & Y are
executable. For the other, rounded to K only.
Rounded to K only regardless of COLOR SELECT status.
4 pages are continuously printed in the sequence of Y only, M
only, C only, and K only.
C only/ M only/ Y only/ K only/ C & M/ C & Y/ M & Y/ C & M & Y are
executable. For the other, rounded to K only.
Rounded to K only regardless of COLOR SELECT status.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 125
2)
0
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.64㧙04
TEST
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
PRINTER SELF PRINT
A:
㨇
3
1 㨪
K
C
5㨉
M
A㧦 3
㧧 PRINT PATTERN
B㧦128
㧧 DENSITY
C㧦 1
㧧 MULTI
D㧦 2
㧧 PAPER
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
COUNT
Y
EXECUTE
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute self print (PCL).
: Printer
Item
: Operation
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
4)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the currently set selfprint is started.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
: Operation test/Check
Section
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
OK
64-5
Purpose
[EXECUTE] button remains highlighted during self-printing.
After completion of self-printing, it returns to the normal display.
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
Select a color with [K][C][M][Y] buttons.
* When [OK], [↑], [↓], [EXECUTE] button, [COLOR], or
[BLACK] key is pressed, the value is set to the set item. (The
value is not saved to EEPROM and RAM.)
The selected button is highlighted. When the selected button is
pressed again, it returns to the normal display. (Two or more
buttons can be selected.)
* When [EXECUTE] button, [C], [CA], or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occurrence of an interruption (paper empty, jam, etc.), self-printing
is resumed.
* When paper which does not satisfy the paper feed conditions
and the paper exit conditions, printing cannot be made.
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Display item & Detail of display
PRINT PATTERN
DITHER
STRAIGHT
CALIB
MULTI COUNT
PAPER
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
HALFTONE
PHOTO
TEXT/GRAPHICS
CAD
BIT DEPTH
1BIT
4BIT
INTENT
SHARP COLOR
PERCEPTUAL
COLORIMETRIC
SATURATION
CAD
GRAY COMPENSATION
K
KCMY
TONER SAVE MODE
ON
OFF
Description of item
Print pattern specification (*For details, refer to below.)
Dither correction
Straight
specification
Calibration
Print quantity
Paper feed tray select
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Half tone
Photo
Text/Picture
Design
Bit number
1 bit
4 bit
Rendering indent
Sharp color
Perceptual
Color metric
Saturation
CAD
Gray compensation
K only
KCMY
Toner save mode
Setting
No setting
Set range
1 to 3
1 to 2
1 to 999
1 to 6
0 to 2
0 to 1
0 to 4
0 to 1
0 to 1
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
2
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
0
1
Default value
3
2
1
2 (CS1)
0 (PHOTO)
1 (4BIT)
0 (SHARP COLOR)
0 (K)
1 (OFF)
* When B/W print is made, the bit number is fixed to 1 bit and selection of half tone/rendering intent/gray compensation is disabled. (Though
entry of a value can be made, it is not reflected to the setting.)
* Items B, D, E, F, G, H, and I are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER: CS1
NO.
1
2
Content
PCL process inspection pattern
(COLOR)
PCL process inspection pattern
(B/W)
Color select
Condition
✕
No
✕
✕
K only
Gradation
select
Dither select
1:Straight
2:Calibration
1:Straight
2:Calibration
Remark
Rounded to K only regardless of COLOR SELECT state. Print is made at
the B/W mode process speed.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 126
NO.
3
Gradation
select
Dither select
2:Calibration
Color select
Content
PCL process inspection pattern
(COLOR/B/W continuous)
Condition
✕
No
✕
Remark
Continuous printing is made at the default setting in the sequence of
COLOR and B/W. B/W printing is made at the B/W mode process speed.
2)
0
* The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.64㧙05
TEST
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
PRINTER SELF PRINT㧔PCL㧕
A:
㨇
3
1 㨪
K
3 㨉
C
A㧦 3
㧧 PRINT PATTERN
B㧦 2
㧧 DITHER 㧦 CALIB
C㧦 1
㧧 MULTI
D㧦 2
㧧 PAPER㧦CS1
M
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
COUNT
Y
EXECUTE
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the printer self print (PS).
: Printer
Item
: Operation
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
4)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the currently set selfprint is started.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
: Operation test/Check
Section
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
OK
64-6
Purpose
[EXECUTE] button remains highlighted during self-printing.
Select a color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] buttons.
* When [OK], [↑], [↓], [EXECUTE] button, [COLOR], or
[BLACK] key is pressed, the value is set to the set item. (The
value is not saved to EEPROM and RAM.)
The selected button is highlighted. When the selected button is
pressed again, it returns to the normal display. (Two or more
buttons can be selected.)
* When [EXECUTE] button, [C], [CA], or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occurrence of an interruption (paper empty, jam, etc.), self-printing
is resumed.
* When paper which does not satisfy the paper feed conditions
and the paper exit conditions, printing cannot be made.
Item
A
Display item & Detail of display
PRINT PATTERN
B
DITHER
C
D
MULTI CONUT
PAPER
E
HALFTONE
F
BIT DEPTH
G
INTENT
H
GRAY COMPENSATION
I
INK SIMULATION
STRAIGHT
CALIB
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
PHOTO
TEXT/GRAPHICS
CAD
1BIT
4BIT
SHARP COLOR
PERCEPTUAL
COLORIMETRIC
SATURATION
CAD
K
KCMY
OFF
SWOP
EURO
JAPAN COLOR
Description of item
Print pattern specification (* For details, refer to
below.)
Dither correction
Straight
specification
Calibration
Print quantity
Paper feed tray select
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Half tone
Photo
Text/Graphic
Design
Bit number
1 bit
4 bit
Rendering intent
Sharp color
Perceptual
Color metric
Saturation
CAD
Gray compensation
K only
KCMY
Ink simulation
OFF
SWOP
EURO
JAPAN COLOR
Set range
1 to 2
1 to 2
1 to 999
1 to 6
0 to 2
0 to 1
0 to 4
0 to 1
0 to 3
Default value
1
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
2
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
0
1
2
3
2
1
2 (CS1)
0 (PHOTO)
1 (4BIT)
0 (SHARP COLOR)
0 (K)
0 (OFF)
* When B/W print is made, the bit number is fixed to 1 bit and selection of half tone/rendering intent/gray compensation/ ink simulation is disabled. (Though entry of a value can be made, it is not reflected to the setting.)
* Items B, D, E, F, G, H, and I are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER: CS1
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 127
NO.
Content
1
PS inspection pattern (COLOR)
2
PS inspection pattern (B/W)
Color select
Condition
When NO
✕
✕
✕
Gradation select
dither select
1:Straight
2:Calibration
1:Straight
2:Calibration
K only
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.64㧙06
Remark
Rounded to K only regardless of COLOR SELECT status.
Print is made at the B/B mode process speed.
65-2
Purpose
: Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
Check (Display/Print)
PRINTER SELF PRINT㧔PS㧕
A:
㨇
1
1 㨪
K
C
2 㨉
M
A㧦 1
㧧 PRINT PATTERN
B㧦 2
㧧 DITHER 㧦 CALIB
C㧦 1
㧧 MULTI
D㧦 2
㧧 PAPER㧦CS1
Function (Purpose) : Used to check the touch panel (LCD display section) detection position adjustment
result.
COUNT
Y
EXECUTE
OK
Section
: Operation panel
Item
: Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Enter the simulation.
When the touch panel is not touched at all, the coordinates of
X and Y are "0."
65
2)
Touch the touch panel.
65-1
Purpose
The coordinates of the currently touched position are displayed in real time.
: Adjustment
* X-coordinates (horizontal direction) and Y-coordinates (vertical direction) are displayed in decimal numbers.
Function (Purpose) : Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection position.
Section
: Operation panel
Item
: Adjustment
* As far as the touch panel is properly adjusted, the range of coordinates in the LCD display range is:
Operation/Procedure
1)
* When you take your finger off the touch panel, the last display value is displayed. (It does not return to "0.")
Touch the four cross marks on the screen. The coordinates of
the pressed points are set.
X-axis: "0" to "639"
Y-axis: "0" to "239"
* The four cross marks may be touched in any sequence.
* A touched cross mark grays out.
* When all the four marks are touched and in the case of OK,
the sampled correction value is saved and the display
returns to the sub number entry screen.
In the case of NG, the display returns to the initial screen.
40
20
40
X㧦 0
40
Y㧦 0
600
70
20
* The correction value sampled by this simulation and the
coordinates of sampled positions are used to obtain the
coordinates from the correction values of the touched position.
120
40
220
320
120
420
520
620
170
200
220
200
600
67
67-24
Purpose
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Use to execute the printer setting of auto
color calibration.
Section
: Printer
Item
: Setting
Operation/Procedure
1)
When the machine enters Simulation 67-24, the following
screen is displayed.
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the high density process control is started and the 48-patch self-printing is
started.
Check to confirm that there is A3 paper in the paper feed
tray. If paper is insufficient, supply it.
2)
During the 48-patch self-printing, [EXECUTE] button is highlighted.
3)
After completion of self-printing, the display is shifted to the
output patch scan start standby screen.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 128
1 : Dec. 15 2005
Place the printed 48-patch pattern on the glass table, and
press [FACTORY] or [SERVICE] button to select the process
mode.
4)
(During the 16-patch self-printing)
0
Press [EXECUTE] button. [EXECUTE] button is highlighted
and the set 48-patch pattern is scanned.
PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE
Check to insure that there is A3 paper in the paper feed tray. If
paper is insufficient, supply it.
5)
After completion of patch scan, the 16-patch self-printing is
automatically started.
6)
After completion of self-printing, the display is shifted to the
registration process standby screen.
ADJUSTED PATCH PRINTING IN PROGRESS.
EXECUTE
(The half-tone process control reference value registration screen)
When [REPEAT] button is pressed, the correction value is not
saved and the display returns to the initial screen.
0
When [OK] button is pressed, the correction value is saved to
EEPROM and RAM and the half-tone process control reference value registration process is started.
7)
8)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
TEST
PRINTER
ENGINE
HALFTONE
AUTO
ADJUSTMENT
MODE
PLEASE WAIT.
The display is shifted to the reference value registration process 1 completion screen. The reference value registration
process 2 (Black) is automatically started.
NOW
When the reference value registration process 2 (Black) is
completed, the following message is displayed. (Each message is automatically shifted.)
REGISTERING
THE
NEW
TARGET
OF
HALFTONE
PROCON.
EXECUTE
(All processes complete screen)
BLACK: 2ND STEP BLACK END
CYAN: 2ND STEP CYAN END
0
MAGENTA: 2ND STEP MAGENTA END
TEST
YELLOW: 2ND STEP YELLOW END
PRINTER
* When the process control is executed second time, "2nd" is
displayed.
9)
ENGINE
COMPLETED
All the registration processes are completed.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
THIS
HALFTONE
AUTO
ADJUSTMENT
MODE
PROCEDURE.
PLEASE QUIT THIS MODE.
* When [CA], [SYSTEM STTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is
pressed during self-printing, the operation is interrupted.
[Cancel of execution during operation]
• To cancel or resume, press [EXECUTE] button.
67-25
[Initial Screen]
Purpose
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to set the manual correction of the
printer engine color balance.
PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE
PRESS [EXECUTE] TO PROCON EXECUTION AND PRINT THE TEST PATCH.
(PLEASE USE SPECIFIED TYPE OF A3 OR 11”17” SIZE PAPER
Section
: Printer
Item
: Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
FOR THIS ADJUSTMENT)
1)
EXECUTE
Use [K][C][M][Y] button to select a color. (The selected button
is highlighted.)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
(During the 48-patch printing)
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and displayed on the set setting area.
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.67-24
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
CLOSE
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE
TEST PATCH PRINTING IN PROGRESS...
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
EXECUTE
2)
(The output patch scan screen)
When [OK] button is pressed, the set value is saved to
EEPROM and RAM.
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.67-24
Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
CLOSE
PRINTER ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJUSTMENT MODE
* Use [U] [V] buttons to change the set values collectively.
When the set value is not the upper limit (lower limit) value,
each item value is increased (decreased) by one. If the set
value is the upper limit (lower limit) value, it is not changed.
PLEASE WAIT.
NOW READING THE PRINTED TEST PATCH
EXECUTE
1
To change the color balance, change each color set value as
below.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 129
1 : Dec. 15 2005
1
User request
Cyan-rich
Magenta-rich
Yellowish
Reddish
Greenish
Blueish
1
Black
–
–
–
–
–
–
Cyan
(increase)
decrease
decrease
decrease
(increase)
(increase)
Magenta
decrease
(increase)
decrease
decrease
decrease
decrease
Yellow
decrease
decrease
(increase)
(increase)
(increase)
decrease
1
Item content
Target value
table setting
Set value
DEF1
DEF2
DEF3
Target setting
Standard adjustment setting (Default)
5% reduced red setting (Color balance with
slightly strong Cyan)
10% reduced red setting (Color balance with
emphasis on Cyan)
Usually change the value 5 steps as standard.
3)
0
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and selfprinting is started.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-26
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET SELECT OF PRT ENGINE HALFTONE AUTO ADJ
* Also when [OK], [↑], [↓], [EXECUTE] button, [COLOR], or
[BLACK] key is pressed, the value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
TARGET TBL
:
DEF1
DEF2
DEF3
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed and the self-printing is
completed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, self-printing is interrupted.
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
Item name
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
1/1
67-27
Set range
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Purpose
Section
: Printer
Item
: Registration
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
PRINTER ENGINE COLOR BALANCE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT 㧦PG
A:
㨇
50
1㨪 99㨉
K
C
M
A㧦 50
㧧 POINT1
B㧦 50
㧧 POINT2
C㧦 50
㧧 POINT3
D㧦 50
㧧 POINT4
Y
EXECUTE
OK
: Adjustment
1 Function (Purpose) : Used to set the reference scanner target
value of the printer engine auto density
adjustment of Simulation 67-24.
Compaired to DEF1, DEF2 and DEF3 are
decreased-red color balance target value.
Section
: Printer
Item
: Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1)
When the machine enters Simulation 67-26, the current set
button of the target value table is highlighted.
2)
When the target value button to be changed is pressed, it is
highlighted and the setting is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* Only one item can be selected.
1 3)
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and the display is shifted to
the sampling screen.
3)
After completion of sampling, the display is shifted to the sampling result display screen. Press [REPEAT] button to return to
the sampling start screen.
4)
When [OK] button is pressed, the displayed sampling result is
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
5)
The display returns to the initial screen, and the registered target value is displayed.
67-26
Purpose
Press [SETUP] button, and the display is shifted to the sampling start screen.
Place the 16-patch pattern printed with SIM67-25 on the glass
table and press [EXECUTE] button.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-25
When the machine enters Simulation 67-27, the following
screen is displayed.
* Use [K][C][M][Y] buttons to display the data of each color.
Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
is highlighted. (In the initial screen, [K](BLACK) is selected.)
0
TEST
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to display and register the scanner
target value (for servicing) of the printer
engine auto density adjustment.
Excute Simulation 67-24.
Display data
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BASE
Display content
Point B target value
Point C target value
Point D target value
Point E target value
Point F target value
Point G target value
Point H target value
Point I target value
Point J target value
Point K target value
Point L target value
Point M target value
Point N target value
Point O target value
Base sampling value
* BASE is displayed only on the sampling result display screen.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 130
0
SCANNER
#B:
TARGET
91,
OF
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-27
TEST
PRINTER COLOR CALIB
#C
2944,
#D:
3227,
#E:
5822,
#H:
54344,
#I:
86968,
#J: 122678,
#N: 201249,
#:O: 207112
#F:
SETUP㧦SERVICE
CALIBRATION DATA RELEASE ADJUSTMENT
8600
A㧦 1
#G:
28935,
#L: 169731,
#M: 195950,
#K: 151198
A:
㨇
K
C
M
CLOSE
SIMULATION 67̆30
TEST
Y
㧧 (0:YES
1:NO)
1
0㨪
1 㨉
1/1
SETUP
OK
67-28
Purpose
67-31
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : The scanner target value (for servicing) of
the printer engine auto density adjustment
is reset to the standard value.
Purpose
Section
: Printer
Section
: Scanner
Item
: Clear
Item
: Image quality
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
Press [EXECUTE] button. [EXECUTE] button is highlighted
and [YES] and [NO] buttons become active.
2)
If it is ready for execution, press [YES]. The standard value
reset process is executed. [YES] button is highlighted.
2)
[YES] button is highlighted.
* The cleared data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
* After completion of the reset process, [EXECUTE] button
returns to the normal display and [YES] and [NO] buttons
gray out.
0
CLOSE
Press [YES] button.
The printer calibration value is cleared.
* The restored data are saved to EEPROM and RAM.
SIMULATION NO.67̆28
Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted and [YES] and [NO] buttons
become active.
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
TEST
: Data clear
Function (Purpose) : Used to clear the printer calibration value.
* After completion of calibration value clear, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
STANDARD SCANNER TARGET OF PRINTER COLOR CALIB㧦SERVICE
Clear item
1
Printer calibration value
0
ARE
YOU SURE?
YES
NO
TEST
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-31
PRINTER CALIBRATION DATA CLEAR
67-30
Purpose
: Setting
Function (Purpose) : Used to set YES/NO of delivery of the main
unit calibration data and the process control
correction data to the client PC by the GDI
printer.
Section
: Printer
Item
: Setting
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
When [OK] button is pressed, the current entered value is
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* When [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the value is
saved to EEPROM and RAM.
A
Display
(0:YES 1:NO)
Content
0
1
Delivery of
calibration data is
inhibited.
Delivery of
calibration data is
allowed.
EXECUTE
: Setting
Section
:
Item
: Setting
Operation/Procedure
1)
Set
range
0 to 1
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
Item
NO
Function (Purpose) : Used to set YES/NO of screen color
change for each object.
Enter the set value with 10-key.
2)
YES
67-32
Purpose
Operation/Procedure
1)
ARE YOU SURE?
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
Default
value
1
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 131
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
3)
67-33
When [OK], [↑], [↓] button, [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is
pressed, the current entered value is saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
Purpose
Item
Display
Content
A
SCREEN
(0:YES 1:NO)
0
Change of screen for
each object is allowed.
Change of screen for
each object is inhibited.
Change of color for
each object is allowed.
Change of color for
each object is inhibited.
1
B
COLOR
(0:YES 1:NO)
0
1
Set
range
0 to 1
0 to 1
Default
value
0
(YES)
Section
: Printer
Item
: Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1)
Use [K][C][M][Y] buttons to select a color. (The selected color
button is highlighted.)
Use [SCREEN] button to select a screen. (In this example,
SCREEN2 is selected.)
0
(YES)
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-32
TEST
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
MODE
A:
0
㨇
0㨪
A :0
SCREEN(0:YES 1:NO)
B:0
COLOR(0:YES
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the gamma correction
between printer screens. (for PCL)
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
1:NO)
1 㨉
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
OK
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
* Use [U] [V] buttons to change the set values collectively.
When the set value is not the upper limit (lower limit) value,
the value is increased (decreased) by 1. If the set value is
the upper limit (lower limit) value, it is not changed.
3)
When [OK] button is pressed, the current set data are saved to
EEPROM and RAM.
* Also when [↑], [↑], [U], [V] button, or [COLOR], [BLACK]
key is pressed, the value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
Display
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
Description
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
Set range
SCREEN1 – 9
(KCMY)
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
Display
SCREEN1
SCREEN2
SCREEN3
SCREEN4
SCREEN5
SCREEN6
SCREEN7
SCREEN8
SCREEN9
SCREEN10
SCREEN11
Content
4bit_LOW (Photo)
4bit_HIGH (Graphic)
1bit_LOW (Photo)
1bit_HIGH (Graphic)
4bit_CAD
Mono (600 x 600) (*)
Mono (1200 x 600) (*)
Toner save 1bit_LOW (Photo)
Toner save 1bit_HIGH (Graphic)
Toner save Mono (600 x 600) (*)
Toner save Mono (1200 x 600) (*)
Default value
SCREEN10, 11
(K)
K
127
125
124
124
122
120
114
105
95
82
70
64
57
62
75
128
128
127
127
127
127
123
119
111
112
106
110
120
110
110
SCREEN4
C
M
128
128
128
128
127
128
128
128
127
126
126
127
124
124
122
122
116
117
113
112
108
115
113
110
112
117
119
120
119
121
Y
128
127
127
127
126
126
123
123
121
117
116
115
118
118
116
(*): When SCREEN6/SCREEN7/SCREEN10/SCREEN11 is displayed, [K] data only. When [C] [M] [Y] button is pressed, the grayout keys are disabled.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-33
PRINTER SCREEN GAMMA ADJUSTMENT(SCREEN 1)
A:
128
㨇 0 㨪 255㨉
K
C
M
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 132
A㧦128
;
POINT1
B㧦128
;
POINT2
C㧦128
;
POINT3
D㧦128
;
POINT4
Y
SCREEN
OK
* If there is any item over [↑], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
67-33
Purpose
If there is no item over [↑], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
: Adjustment
Function (Purpose) : Used to execute the gamma correction
between printer screens. (for GDI)
Section
: Printer
Item
: Adjustment
If there is no item over [↓], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Operation/Procedure
1)
If there is any item under [↓], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
Use [K][C][M][Y] buttons to select a color. (The selected color
button is highlighted.)
2)
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
* Use [U] [V] buttons to change the set values collectively.
Use [SCREEN] button to select a screen. (In this example,
SCREEN2 is selected.)
When the set value is not the upper limit (lower limit) value,
the value is increased (decreased) by 1. If the set value is
the upper limit (lower limit) value, it is not changed.
Select the set item with [↑] and [↓] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
Enter the set value with 10-key.
3)
When [OK] button is pressed, the current set data are saved to
EEPROM and RAM.
* Also when [↑], [↑], [U], [V] button, or [COLOR], [BLACK]
key is pressed, the value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Item
Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
Description
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
Set range
SCREEN1•3
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
Display
SCREEN1
SCREEN2
SCREEN3
Content
1bit Photo
1bit Graphic
1bit Mono (*)
(*): When SCREEN3 is displayed, [K] data only. When [C] [M] [Y]
button is pressed, the gray-out keys are disabled.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-33
PRINTER SCREEN GAMMA ADJUSTMENT(SCREEN 1)
A:
128
㨇 0 㨪 255㨉
K
C
M
A㧦128
;
POINT1
B㧦128
;
POINT2
C㧦128
;
POINT3
D㧦128
;
POINT4
Y
SCREEN
OK
MX-2300/2700 N/G SIMULATION 7 – 133
K
128
128
127
127
127
127
123
119
111
112
106
110
120
110
110
Default value
SCREEN2
C
M
128
128
128
128
127
128
128
128
127
126
126
127
124
124
122
122
116
117
113
112
108
115
113
110
112
117
119
120
119
121
Y
128
127
127
127
126
126
123
123
121
117
116
115
118
118
116
MX2700N
[8]
SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE Service Manual
C. Self diag operation and related work flow
1. Self diag
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consumable part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user
and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble,
this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the
machine to minimize the damage.
A. Function and purpose
The machine always monitors its own state.
When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and
displays the trouble message.
A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is
nearly expired or is expired.
When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or
may not be stopped.
The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
the LCD.
1)
Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a
trouble.)
2)
The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is
stopped on detection of a trouble.)
Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simulation.
3)
By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair,
improving the repair efficiency.)
Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically
cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning messages must be cleared by a simulation.
4)
Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows
to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This
avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a consumable part.)
Monitors the machine
conditions.
Detects/analyzes
the content.
B. Self diag message kinds
The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below.
Class 1
User
Serviceman
Class 2
Other
Warning
Trouble
Other
Warning of troubles which can be recovered by
the user. (Paper jam, consumable part life
expiration, etc.)
Warning of troubles which can be recovered only
by a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance,
etc.)
—
Warning to the user, not a machine trouble
(Preliminary warning of life expiration of a
consumable part, etc.)
Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is
stopped.
—
Warning
Trouble/Warning
Trouble
The machine is stopped.
The content is displayed.
Trouble/Warning
Warning
Trouble
Troubleshoot the cause.
Repair
Cancel the selfdiagnostic message with
the diagnostics
(test commands).
Reset
Standby state
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 1
A consumable
part has reached
its lifetime.
YES
Replace or supply
the consumable part.
NO
D. Breakdown sequence
(1)
Breakdown mode list
There are following cases of the breakdown mode.
Kind of trouble
FAX board trouble (1 line)
FAX board trouble (2
lines)
HDD trouble
SCU communication
trouble
PCU communication
trouble
Backup battery voltage fall
Controller fan motor
trouble
Connection trouble (ICU
detection)
Serial number
discrepancy
Memory error (included
not installed the expansion
RAM)
HDD registration data sum
error
Image memory trouble,
decode error
Network error
Judgment
block
ICU
Trouble code
F6
F7
Copy scan
(including
interruption)
{
{
Scan
push
{
{
Operatable mode
Scan
FAX
Scan pull
To
send
HDD
{
{
U1
{
{
U1
FAX
print
Print
List
print
U1
U1
{
{
{
{
Notification
to FAST
host
U1
U1
E7 (03)
E7 (80), A0-02
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
{
{
E7 (90), A0-01
L8-20
U1 (01)
L4-30
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
{
✕
E7 (60 – 65),
A0 (10 – 12, 20)
U2 (30)
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
U2 (00, 05, 10,
11, 22, 23, 24,
25)
U2 (50)
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
{
E7 (00, 01, 05,
06, 08, 09)
CE
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
{
{
{
{
{
{
✕
{
{
Operatable
but send
NG
{
{
F2 (80 – 87)
{
Operatable
but send
NG
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
*7
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
*7
{
✕
*6
✕
*6
✕
*6
✕
*6
✕
*6
✕
*6
✕
*6
U2
{
{
{
{
U2
U2
Paper feed tray 2 trouble
F3-22
U2
{
{
{
{
U2
U2
Paper feed tray 3 trouble
U6-01
U2
{
{
{
{
U2
U2
Paper feed tray 4 trouble
U6-02
U2
{
{
{
{
U2
U2
Paper feed tray 5 trouble
U6 (09, 20 – 22,
51)
U6 (00, 10, 50)
U2
{
{
{
{
U2
U2
U8
{
{
{
{
U8
U8
F1 (10)
U3
U3
U3
U3
U3
U3
U3
F1 (excluding 10)
U3
U3
U3
U3
U3
U3
U3
EE (EL, EU, EC)
F2 (39, 44, 45,
49, 51, 58, 78)
{
{
*9
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
✕
*6
*7
U2
*7
U2
*7
U2
*7
U2
*7
U2
*7
U8
*7
U3
*7
U3
*7
{
{
{
Paper feed tray 1 trouble
E7 (20, 28, 29),
L6 (10)
E7 (50, 55),
A0 (21)
H2, H3, H4, H5,
L4 (excluding L430), U2 (90, 91),
F2 (40, 64, 70,
74), L8 (01, 02)
E7 (21), F2 (41 –
43, 65 – 67, 71 –
73, 75 – 77)
F3-12
Process control trouble
(Only history is left.) (ICU
detection)
Laser trouble
PCU
Connection trouble (PCU
detection)
PCU section troubles
(motor, fusing, etc.)
PCU color system
troubles
Paper feed tray other
troubles
Staple trouble
After-process trouble
Other troubles
Process control trouble
(PCU detection)
PCU
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 2
✕
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Kind of trouble
Connection trouble (SCU
detection)
SCU color system
troubles
Document control trouble
EEPROM system
Scanner section troubles
(mirror motor, lens, copy
lamp)
CCD troubles (shading,
etc.)
Process control trouble
(Only history is left.) (ICU
detection)
Process control trouble
(Only history is left.) (PCU
detection)
{: Operation enabled,
Judgment
block
SCU
Trouble code
E7 (70, 75),
A0 (22)
UC (02)
Copy scan
(including
interruption)
✕
Scan
push
✕
Operatable mode
Scan
FAX
Scan pull
To
send
HDD
✕
✕
✕
FAX
print
Print
List
print
✕
✕
✕
Notification
to FAST
host
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
{
{
{
{
UC (20)
U2 (80, 81)
L1, L3
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
E7 (10, 11, 14)
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
{
{
{
{
MFP
F2 (80 – 87, 90)
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
PCU
F2 (91 – 94)
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
✕: Operation disabled
U 1: The operation is enabled in a line other than the trouble line.
U 2: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray.
U 3: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section. * When, however,
the right tray is set.
U 4: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the OC mode.
* 5: Cannot be shifted to the nighttime mode/power saving function. The power cannot be turned OFF with the power SW on the operation
panel.
* 6: When the color mode is set to Disable in the "Color mode disable setting" of the system setting, the operation is enabled in the Black
mode.
* 7: Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred.
U 8: When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in other than the DESK.
* 9: Trouble display message is displayed in 2 lines. (Example: Ready to copy. F2 trouble)
* Trouble mode process
• Machine operation enabled under some conditions.
The operations excluding the trouble mode are enabled (READY). For the mode where operations are disabled, only setting is enabled and
the operation disable message is made.
(NOT READY)
(Display) A dialog is displayed when a trouble occurs. For the mode where operations are enabled, [OK] button is added to the message.
When operations are disabled, [OK] button is not displayed, and the message is displayed until the trouble is cancelled.
* For U 2, 3, 4, 8, perform the following procedures. (In order to avoid patent interference.)
• When a trouble is detected during a job, the machine operation is terminated. (Trouble display/without [OK] key)
• When a trouble is detected during other than a JOB, the trouble display is not made and the trouble position cannot be selected. (The display is not turned off. Machine/Button)
• Troubles which disable the machine operations
The trouble display is always made, and all the modes cannot be set.
• Writing to the trouble memory
Writing of a same trouble to the trouble memory can be selected with SIM 26-35. When this simulation is set, any trouble is written to the
trouble memory unconditionally.
(Sim.26-35)
0: Only once. If same as the previous one, it is not saved. (Default)
1: Any time. Though same as the previous one, it is saved.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 3
(2)
Power ON trouble detection sequence.
• When the power is turned ON and each trouble of H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, PF, U6 (09) is stored, it is judged as a trouble immediately.
MFP event
manager
Each block
(Power ON sequence)
· H3, H4, U1, U2, PF, U6 trouble check
Trouble check is made in each block when initializing
and data are sent to the MFPcnt.
H3, H4, H5: Saved in the MFPcnt.
U1: Saved in the MFPcnt.
U2: Saved in each block.
PF: Saved in the MFPcnt.
U6-09: Saved in the PCU.
When the power is turned on,
check is made in each block.
Communication of trouble status
[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
sim task
(Trouble cancel sequence)
· When executing SIM 13, 14, 15, 16, 17
(To the corresponding
block)
SIM 13: U1 trouble cancel
SIM 14: H3, H4, H5 (Color mode
cancel)
SIM 15: LCC (U6) trouble cancel
SIM 16: U2 trouble cancel
SIM 17: PF trouble cancel
Trouble cancel
(The trouble memory is
initialized.)
Trouble cancel command
Trouble cancel status is communicated.
2. Trouble code list
Trouble code
Main
Sub
code code
A0
01
02
10
11
12
20
21
22
CE
00
01
02
03
04
E7
05
06
07
08
00
01
03
05
06
08
09
10
11
14
20
21
Trouble code content
PCU ROM abnormality
SCU ROM abnormality
Controller ROM error
IF version discrepancy (CTL-PCU)
IF version discrepancy (CTL-SCU)
Machine level error (CTL detection)
Machine level error (PCU detection)
Machine level error (SCU detection)
Communication error other than CE-01 – 08
Network controller trouble
Not-specified mail/FTP server error
Communication error in image send
FTP server account name or authentication password
input error
FTP server directory input error
POP3 server access error
POP3 server authentication check error
POP3 server timeout error
System memory access error
System data trouble
HDD trouble
Local memory access error
Decode error trouble: Compression decode error (A
compression file cannot decompressed.)
Local memory specifications error
Local memory combination error
Shading trouble (Black correction)
Shading trouble (White correction)
SCAN-ASIC trouble
LSU BD detection trouble
LSU LD deterioration trouble
Remarks
Trouble
detection
Mechanism
Option
Electricity
PCU
Scanner
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
PCU
Scanner
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
MFP
MFP
Scanner
Scanner
Scanner
PCU
PCU
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 4
FAX
Supply
Trouble code
Main
Sub
code code
E7
28
29
50
55
60
61
62
65
70
75
80
90
EE
EC
EL
EU
F1
00
02
03
08
10
11
15
19
20
21
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
F2
50
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
49
50
51
58
64
65
66
67
70
71
72
73
74
Trouble code content
LSU control ASIC connection abnormality
LSU-ASIC frequency abnormality
Engine connection trouble
PWB information sum error (Engine detection)
Controller connection trouble (Engine detection)
Controller connection trouble (Engine)
Controller connection trouble (Scanner)
PWB information sum error (Controller detection)
Scanner connection trouble
PWB information sum error (Scanner detection)
Communication trouble between the controller and the
scanner
Communication trouble between the controller and the
engine
Auto developer adjustment trouble (The sample level
for every rotation is other than 128 ± 10.)
Auto developer adjustment trouble (overtoner error)
Auto development adjustment trouble (Under-toner
abnormality)
Finisher communication trouble (Machine side
detection)
Saddle finisher transport motor trouble
Finisher paddle motor trouble (MX-FNX2), finisher
swing motor trouble (MX-FNX1)
Finisher stapler shift motor trouble
Finisher staple motor abnormality
Finisher bundle process motor abnormality
Finisher tray lift motor abnormality
Finisher pre-alignment motor abnormality
Finisher after-alignment motor abnormality
Finisher fan motor abnormality (MX-FNX1), Finisher
interface fan motor abnormality (MX-FNX2)
Finisher folding sensor trouble (MX-FNX2)
Communication trouble between the finisher and the
punch unit (MX-FN2)
Finisher punch shift motor trouble
Finisher punch motor trouble
Finisher punch side registration sensor trouble (MXFNX2)
Finisher punch registration sensor trouble (MX-FNX2)
Finisher backup RAM trouble
Finisher punch backup RAM trouble (MX-FNX2)
Finisher punch dust sensor trouble (MX-FNX2)
Saddle finisher punch power interruption trouble (MXFNX2)
Finisher incompatibility trouble
Process thermistor trouble
Toner empty sensor abnormality (BLACK)
Toner empty sensor abnormality (CYAN)
Toner empty sensor abnormality (MAGENTA)
Toner empty sensor abnormality (YELLOW)
Black exclusive image density sensor trouble (Transfer
belt surface reflection ratio abnormality)
Color exclusive image density sensor trouble
(Calibration plate surface reflection ratio abnormality)
LSU thermistor trouble
K phase sensor sensing trouble
CL phase sensor sensing trouble
Process humidity sensor trouble
Toner supply abnormality error (BLACK)
Toner supply abnormality error (CYAN)
Toner supply abnormality error (MAGENTA)
Toner supply abnormality error (YELLOW)
Toner cartridge improper cartridge detection (BLACK)
Toner cartridge improper cartridge detection (CYAN)
Toner cartridge improper cartridge detection
(MAGENTA)
Toner cartridge improper cartridge detection
(YELLOW)
Toner cartridge CRUM error (BLACK)
Remarks
Trouble
detection
Mechanism
Option
Electricity
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
SCU
SCU
MFP
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
MFP
●
PCU
●
PCU
PCU
●
●
PCU
●
PCU
PCU
●
●
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
PCU
PCU
●
●
PCU
PCU
PCU
●
●
●
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
●
●
●
●
●
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
●
FAX
Supply
●
●
●
●
●
●
PCU
●
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
PCU
●
PCU
●
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 5
Trouble code
Main
Sub
code code
F2
75
76
77
78
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
92
93
94
F3
F6
12
22
00
01
04
21
30
97
98
F7
00
01
04
21
30
97
98
H2
00
01
02
03
H3
00
01
02
H4
00
01
02
H5
L1
L3
30
01
00
00
Trouble code content
Toner cartridge CRUM error (CYAN)
Toner cartridge CRUM error (MAGENTA)
Toner cartridge CRUM error (YELLOW)
Registration exclusive image density sensor trouble
(Transfer belt surface reflection ratio abnormality)
Half tone process control 1st patch reference value
trouble (BLACK)
Half tone process control 1st patch reference value
trouble (CYAN)
Half tone process control 1st patch reference value
trouble (MAGENTA)
Half tone process control 1st patch reference value
trouble (YELLOW)
Half tone process control 2nd patch reference value
trouble (BLACK)
Half tone process control 2nd patch reference value
trouble (CYAN)
Half tone process control 2nd patch reference value
trouble (MAGENTA)
Half tone process control 2nd patch reference value
trouble (YELLOW)
High-density process control density correction error
(CYAN)
High-density process control density correction error
(MAGENTA)
High-density process control density correction error
(YELLOW)
Main unit tray 1 lift-up trouble
Main unit tray 2 lift-up trouble
Communication trouble between the ICU and the FAX
FAX board EEPROM read/write error
FAX MODEM operation trouble
Combination error between the TEL/LIU PWB and the
FAX soft switch
Access error to power controller on the FAX board
(FAX detection)
FAX PWB incompatibility trouble
Combination error between the FAX-BOX PWB
destination information and the machine destination
information.
Communication trouble between the ICU and the FAX
(Second line)
FAX board EEPROM read/write error (Second line)
FAX MODEM operation trouble (Second line)
Combination error between the TEL/LIU PWB and the
FAX soft switch (Second line)
Access error to power controller on the FAX board
(Second line)
FAX PWB incompatibility trouble (Second line)
Combination error between the FAX-BOX PWB
destination information and the machine destination
information (Second line)
Non-contact thermistor detection thermistor open
(TH_UM_AD2)
Lower thermistor open (TH_LM)
Sub thermistor open (TH_US)
Non-contact thermistor compensation thermistor open
(TH_UM_AD1)
Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM)
Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_LM)
Sub thermistor fusing section high temperature trouble
(TH_US)
Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_UM_AD2)
Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_LM)
Sub thermistor fusing section low temperature trouble
(TH_US)
Thermistor differential input trouble (TH_UM)
5 continuous detection of POD1 not-reached jam
Mirror feed trouble
Mirror return trouble
Remarks
Trouble
detection
Mechanism
Option
Electricity
FAX
Supply
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
●
●
●
●
PCU
●
PCU
●
PCU
●
PCU
●
PCU
●
PCU
●
PCU
●
PCU
●
PCU
●
PCU
●
PCU
●
PCU
PCU
Refer to FAX manual for details
●
●
PCU
●
PCU
PCU
PCU
●
●
●
PCU
PCU
PCU
●
●
●
PCU
PCU
PCU
●
●
●
PCU
PCU
Scanner
Scanner
●
●
●
●
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 6
Trouble code
Main
Sub
code code
L4
02
04
05
06
11
30
31
32
L6
10
L8
01
02
20
PC
-U1
01
U2
00
05
10
11
22
23
24
25
U6
UC
30
50
80
81
90
91
00
01
02
09
10
20
21
22
50
51
02
20
Trouble code content
Paper feed motor lock trouble
Developing motor trouble (BLACK)
Developing motor trouble (COLOR)
Transfer belt separation position sensor trouble
Shift motor trouble
Controller fan/HDD fan motor trouble
Paper exit cooling fan trouble
Power cooling fan/ozone exhaust fan trouble
Polygon motor lock detection
No full wave signal
Full wave signal width abnormality
Power controller communication trouble
Personal counter not installed
Battery trouble
EEPROM read/write error (MFP detection)
HDD/Flash/EEPROM data discrepancy
SRAM user authentication index check sum error
EEPROM check sum error (MFP detection)
SRAM memory check sum error
MFPC section SRAM memory individual data check
sum error
SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum
error
Flash memory user authentication counter check sum
error
Serial number data discrepancy (MFP ↔ PCU)
HDD section individual data check sum error
EEPROM read/write error (SCU detection)
Adjustment value check sum error (SCU detection)
EEPROM read/write error (PCU detection)
EEPROM (PCU) check sum error
Desk communication trouble
Tray 1 lift-up trouble
Tray 2 lift-up trouble
LCC lift motor trouble
Desk transport motor trouble
LCC communication trouble
LCC transport motor trouble
LCC 24V power abnormality
Desk incompatibility trouble
LCC incompatibility trouble
CPT-ASIC abnormality
Document control module trouble
Remarks
Trouble
detection
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
MFP
PCU
PCU
LSUcnt
PCU
PCU
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
Mechanism
Option
Electricity
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
MFP
●
MFP
●
MFP
MFP
Scanner
Scanner
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
Scanner
Scanner
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 7
●
●
●
FAX
Supply
3. Details of trouble code
A0-01
PCU ROM abnormality
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
A0-02
SCU ROM abnormality
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
A0-10
SCU ROM content trouble
Scanner
Some part of SFU is not upgraded during upgrading of
the firmware.
Use SIM49-1 to execute the firmware.
Controller ROM error
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
A0-11
PCU ROM content trouble
PCU
Firmware upgrade is not made properly due to power
OFF, etc.
Use SIM49-1 to upgrade the firmware.
SFU combination error in the controller
MFP
SFU upgrade was not properly made when upgrading
the firmware.
Controller firmware upgrade
IF version discrepancy (CTL-PCU)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
A0-12
IF version discrepancy (CTL-SCU)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
A0-20
Combination error between CTL and SCU
MFP
Combination error between CTL and SCU
Check the firmware combination between CTL and
SCU.
Machine level error (CTL detection)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
A0-21
Combination error between CTL and PCU
MFP
Combination error between CTL and PCU
Check the firmware combination between CTL and
PCU.
Combination error between the machine production/
remodeling and the firmware
MFP
Combination error between the machine production/
remodeling and the firmware
Check the combination between the machine
production/remodeling and the firmware.
Machine level error (PCU detection)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Combination error between the machine production/
remodeling and the firmware
PCU
Combination error between the machine production/
remodeling and the firmware
Check the combination between the machine
production/remodeling and the firmware.
A0-22
Machine level error (SCU detection)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
CE-00
Communication error other than CE01 – 08
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
CE-01
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
CE-03
Network controller and its peripheral circuit trouble
MFP
Network controller and its peripheral circuit trouble
1) Check the network controller and its peripheral
circuit.
2) Output the NIC Config Page and check the NIC
version.
3) Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
Not-specified mail/FTP server error
Trouble content
Case 3
Another communication error occurs.
MFP
Network cable connection trouble
Check to insure that the network cable is securely
connected.
Network controller trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
CE-02
Combination error between the machine production/
remodeling and the firmware
Scanner
Combination error between the machine production/
remodeling and the firmware
Check the combination between the machine
production/remodeling and the firmware.
The specified mail server, FTP server, and SMB
server are not found
MFP
Network cable connection trouble
Check to insure that the network cable is securely
connected.
Network setup trouble
1) Check that the connected network supports TCP/
IP protocol.
2) Check from Web page that the Primary/
Secondary E-mail Server Address or the FTP
server/Desktop PC/SMB server address as the
destination is properly set.
3) When the above address is described with the
Hostname, check that the DNS server is properly
set or not.
SMTP server/FTP server/NST/SMB server trouble
Check the SMTP server/FTP server/NST/SMB server
for any trouble.
Communication error in image send
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
The specified server does not respond during image
send.
MFP
Network cable connection trouble
Check to insure that the network cable is securely
connected.
SMTP server/FTP server/NST/SMB server trouble
Check the SMTP server/FTP server/NST/SMB server
for any trouble.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 8
CE-04
FTP server account name or authentication password input error
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
CE-05
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
CE-06
The entered FTP server directory is invalid.
The entered SMB server folder is invalid.
MFP
Network cable connection trouble
Check to insure that the network cable is securely
connected.
The FTP server account name registered as the
destination or the password for the account is
incorrect.
Check to insure that there exits the FTP server
directory registered as the destination.
The SMB server account name registered as the
destination or the password for it is incorrect.
Check to insure that there exists the SMB server
folder registered as the destination.
POP3 server access error
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3
The FTP server account name registered as the
destination or the password for the account is
incorrect.
Check to insure that the FTP server account name
registered as the destination or the password for the
account is correct.
The SMB server account name registered as the
destination or the password for the account is
incorrect.
Check to insure that the SMB server account name
registered as the destination or the password for the
account is correct.
FTP server directory input error
Trouble content
Case 3
The entered FTP server account name or the
authentication password is invalid.
The entered SMB server log-in name or the password
is invalid.
MFP
Network cable connection trouble
Check to insure that the network cable is securely
connected.
Cause
Check
and
remedy
The specified mail server (POP3) is not found. (POP3
server access error)
MFP
Network cable connection trouble
Check to insure that the network cable is securely
connected.
Network setup error
1) Check that the connected network supports
TCP/IP protocol.
2) Check the Web page to insure that the POP3
server address is correctly set.
3) If the above address is described in Hostname,
check to insure that the DNS server is correctly
set.
PO3 server trouble
Check the POP3 server for any trouble.
CE-07
POP3 server authentication check
error
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
CE-08
The POP3 server account name or the password
registered for the account is incorrect.
Check to insure that the POP3 server account name
or the password for the account is correct.
POP3 server timeout error
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7-00
The entered POP3 server account name or the
authentication password is invalid. (POP3 server
authentication check error)
MFP
Network cable connection trouble
Check to insure that the network cable is securely
connected.
The specified mail server (POP3) does not respond.
(POP3 server timeout error)
MFP
Network cable connection trouble
Check to insure that the network cable is securely
connected.
POP3 server trouble
Check the POP3 server for any trouble.
System memory access error
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
System memory trouble (Tandem memory cannot be
guaranteed.)
Access to system memory cannot be made.
MFP
Expansion memory instillation error
Check installation of the system expansion memory.
Garbled data
1) Use SIM60-01 to check memory read/write
2) Replace the expansion memory (if installed.)
3) Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
Dirt on the memory pin
Clean the memory pin with alcohol.
* When E7-00 is in the following combination where system memory Slot 2 (inside) and Slot 1 (outside) operate normally but a
hard error occurs. (Combination of system memory (slot 1, slot 2)
1
System memory
Slot2
Slot1
(Inside)
(Outside)
–
–
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
256MB
512MB
256MB
512MB
256MB
512MB
–
–
No.
–
–
256MB
256MB
512MB
512MB
256MB
512MB
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 9
Operation guarantee
Hard
Soft
✕
✕
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
When turning
on the power
Since the
machine is not
booted, the
trouble display is
not made.
Normal operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
E7-01
System data trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7-03
HDD trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2
Case 3
E7-05
ICU data trouble occurs.
MFP
ICU image transfer trouble
1) Check the connection state of the MFPcnt PWB
connector.
2) Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
HDD connection trouble
File control area data trouble (when FAT is broken)
MFP
The HDD is not properly installed to the MFPcnt PWB
1) Check installation of the HDD of the MFPcnt
PWB.
2) Check connection of the harness of the MFPcnt
PWB.
3) Use SIM62-2 and -3 to check read/write from/to
the HDD.
The HDD does not work properly.
Replace the HDD.
E7-06
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2
Case 3
Case 4
MFPcnt PWB trouble
Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
Case 5
Local memory access error
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Local memory cannot be accessed.
MFP
Local memory installation abnormality
Check the installing state of the local memory.
Dirt on local memory pin
Clean the local memory pin with alcohol.
Garbled data
1) Use SIM60-01 to check memory read/write.
2) Replace the memory.
3) Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
* Combination where local memory Slot 4 (inside) and Slot 3 (outside) operate normally (Refer to E7-09) but a hard error occurs.
Decode error trouble: Compression
decode error (A compression file cannot decompressed.)
E7-08
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
A decode error occurs when forming an image.
MFP
Compression data abnormality
1) Check the installing state of the PWB. (PCI bus)
2) When an error occurs during a FAX job, check
the installation of the FAX PWB. In the other
cases, check the installation of the MFPcnt PWB
and HDD.
3) Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
HDD connection abnormality
Check the HDD connection.
Data are garbled in image compression/send.
1) Check the installation of the PWB. (PCI bus)
2) When an error occurs during a FAX job, check
the installation of the FAX PWB. In the other
cases, check the installation of the MFPcnt PWB
and HDD.
3) Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
MFPcnt PWB abnormality
Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
Local memory access trouble
Check and execute remedy similarly to E7-05.
Local memory specifications error
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
DIMM of different specification is detected in the local
memory slot.
MFP
DIMM of different specification is installed to the local
memory slot.
Check the installed DIMM.
* The error occurs when a DIMM which is not recommended by
Sharp.
E7-09
Local memory combination error
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Local memory slot combination error
MFP
DIMM of other than 256MB is installed to the default
slot.
Check the combination of installed DIMM.
DIMM of other than 256MB is installed to the
expansion slot.
Check the combination of installed DIMM.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 10
* When the following combination (E7-09) where operation is not
performed properly is used. Local memory (slot 3, slot 4) combination
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Local memory
Slot 4
Slot 3
(Inside)
(Outside)
–
–
256MB
–
512MB
–
256MB
256MB
512MB
256MB
256MB
512MB
512MB
512MB
–
256MB
–
512MB
E7-10
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 4
Case 5
Soft
When turning
on the power
✕
{
{
{
{
{
{
✕
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
✕
E7-09
Normal operation
E7-09
E7-09
E7-09
Normal operation
E7-09
E7-09
E7-09
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
E7-21
CCD unit abnormality
Check the CCD unit.
Case 2
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
SCU PWB abnormality
Check the SCU PWB.
E7-28
CCD white scan level abnormality when the copy lamp
is on.
Scanner
Installation error of the CCD unit flat cable
Check the installing state of the flat cable to the CCD
unit.
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2
Cause
Case 3
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Copy lamp lighting trouble
Check the installing state of the flat cable to the copy
lamp unit.
CCD unit abnormality
Check the CCD unit.
SCU PWB abnormality
Check the SCU PWB.
Written register value cannot be read correctly
Scanner
SCU PWB abnormality
Check the SCU PWB.
1)
2)
3)
1)
2)
3)
Optical axis shift
BK laser deterioration, power reduction
BD PWB trouble
Use SIM61-1 to check the LSU operation.
Replace the LSUcnt/BD PWB.
If the trouble cannot be removed by the above 1)
to 2), replace the LSU.
The color laser does not light up normally.
PCU
Disconnection or improper connection of harness and
connector between LD PWB and LSUcnt PWB
Check connection of the harness of each PWB inside
the LSU.
Y/M/C laser deterioration
1) Use SIM61-1 to check the LSU operation.
2) Replace the LSUcnt PWB.
3) If the trouble cannot be removed by the above 1)
to 2), replace the LSU.
LSU control ASIC connection abnormality
Trouble content
Dirt on the mirror, the lens, or the reference white
plate.
Clean the mirror, the lens, or the reference white plate.
LSU BD signal is not detected.
PCU
Disconnection or improper connection of harness and
connector between LD/BD PWB and LSUcnt PWB
Check connection of the harness of each PWB inside
the LSU.
LSU LD deterioration trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
SCAN-ASIC trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7-29
E7-14
LSU BD detection trouble
CCD black scan level abnormality when the copy lamp
is turned off.
Scanner
Installation error of the CCD unit flat cable
Check the installing state of the flat cable to the CCD
unit.
Shading trouble (White correction)
Trouble content
Case 3
Hard
Shading trouble (Black correction)
Trouble content
E7-11
Operation guarantee
E7-20
Access error between the CPU of the PCU PWB and
the LSU control ASIC
PCU
Communication connector trouble between the PCU
PWB and the LSUcnt PWB (interface PWB). Harness
trouble.
Check the connector connection between the PCU
PWB and the LSUcnt PWB (interface PWB).
Check the harness. If the trouble cannot be removed,
replace the LSUcnt PWB or the PCU PWB.
Connected the connector between the PCU PWB and
the LSUcnt PWB (interface PWB) / Harness trouble
Check the harness between the PCU PWB and the
LSUcnt PWB (interface PWB). If the trouble cannot be
removed, replace the LSUcnt PWB or the PCU PWB.
PCU PWB or LSUcnt PWB (interface PWB) trouble
Replace the PCU PWB or the LSUcnt PWB (interface
PWB).
LSU-ASIC frequency abnormality
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Oscillation trouble of the external oscillator used in
LSU-ASIC and the internal oscillation circuit
PCU
Trouble of the oscillator on the LSU-ASIC PWB, the
resistor and capacitor for the oscillation circuit, and the
LSU-ASIC itself.
Replace the LSUcnt PWB.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 11
E7-50
Engine connection trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Unknown PWB identification information is detected in
the PCU PWB.
PCU
A PWB which is incompatible with the machine
specifications is connected.
1) Replace the PCU PWB.
2) Replace the LSU PWB.
E7-65
PWB information sum error (Controller detection)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
A firmware which is incompatible with the machine
specifications is used.
Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
E7-70
Scanner connection trouble
Trouble content
E7-55
PWB information sum error (Engine
detection)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7-60
Controller connection trouble (Engine
detection)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7-61
Unknown PWB kind information is detected in the
MFPcnt PWB.
A PWB/firmware which is not compatible with the
machine specifications is connected.
MFP
Controller PWB trouble
Replace the controller PWB.
A firmware which is not compatible with the machine
specifications is applied.
Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
MFPcnt PWB connection trouble
Compatibility trouble between the controller and the
engine
MFP
Combination trouble of the controller PWB and the
engine
Check the controller PWB.
Check the combination between the controller PWB
and the engine.
Controller connection trouble
(Scanner)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7-75
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7-80
A firmware which is incompatible with the machine
specifications is connected.
Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
EEPROM PWB information sum error
SCU
1) EEPROM device trouble
2) EEPROM device contact failure
3) Device access error due to noises
Replace the scanner control PWB.
Communication trouble between the
controller and the scanner
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Unknown identification information is detected in the
SCU PWB.
SCU
SCU PWB trouble
Replace the SCU PWB.
PWB information sum error (Scanner
detection)
Trouble content
Controller connection trouble
(Engine)
Trouble content
E7-62
EEPROM PWB information sum error
PCU
1) EEPROM device error
2) EEPROM device contact failure
3) Device access error due to noises
Replace the PCU PWB.
EEPROM PWB information sum error
MFP
1) EEPROM device trouble
2) EEPROM device contact failure
3) Device access error due to noises
Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Communication trouble between the MFP and the
scanner MFP detection
Communication establishment error/Framing/Parity/
Protocol error
MFP
SCU PWB connector connection trouble
Check the connector connection between the SCU
PWB and the MFPcnt PWB.
Harness trouble between the SCU PWB and the
MFPcnt PWB
Check the harness between the SCU PWB and the
MFPcnt PWB.
Broken connector pin of the SCU PWB mother board
Check grounding of the machine.
Controller connection trouble
Compatibility trouble between the controller and the
scanners
MFP
Combination trouble between the controller PWB and
the engine
Replace the controller PWB.
Check the combination between the controller PWB
and the engine.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 12
E7-90
Communication trouble between the
controller and the engine
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Communication trouble between the MFP and the
PCU (MFP detection)
Communication establishment error/Framing/Parity/
Protocol error
MFP
PCU PWB connector connection trouble
Check the connector connection between the PCU
PWB and the MFPcnt PWB.
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3
Case 4
EE-EL Auto developer adjustment trouble
(overtoner error)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Broken connector pin of the PCU PWB mother board
Check grounding of the machine.
Auto developer adjustment trouble (The sample level
for every rotation is other than 128 ± 10.)
PCU
Toner density sensor trouble, charging voltage/
developing voltage trouble, toner density trouble,
developing unit trouble, PCU PWB trouble
Use SIM25-2 to execute the auto development
adjustment.
The sample level is 76 or below, or the control voltage
is 208V or above.
PCU
Toner density sensor trouble, charging voltage/
developing voltage trouble, toner density trouble,
developing unit trouble, PCU PWB trouble
Use SIM25-2 to execute the auto development
adjustment.
F1-02
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
The sample level is 178 or above, or the control
voltage is 51V or below.
PCU
Toner density sensor trouble, charging voltage/
developing voltage trouble, toner density trouble,
developing unit trouble, PCU PWB trouble
Use SIM25-2 to execute the auto development
adjustment.
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Check
and
remedy
F1-03
PCU finisher connector or harness connection error or
disconnection
Check the connector and harness in the
communication line.
Finisher control PWB trouble
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Control PWB (PCU) trouble
Replace the PCU PWB.
Transport drive motor trouble
PCU
Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
overvoltage, saddle finisher control PWB trouble
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the transport
motor (FFM).
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Finisher paddle motor trouble (MXFNX2), finisher swing motor trouble
(MX-FNX1)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Paddle motor operation trouble (MX-FNX2)
Swing motor operation trouble (MX-FNX1)
PCU
Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the motor (FPM/
FSWM).
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Finisher stapler shift motor trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F1-10
Communication line test error when turning on the
power or after canceling an exclusion simulation.
Communication error with the finisher
PCU
Malfunction due to noises
Turn OFF/ON the power to cancel.
Saddle finisher transport motor trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
F1-08
EE-EU Auto development adjustment trouble
(Under-toner abnormality)
Finisher communication trouble
(Machine side detection)
Trouble content
Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the
MFPcnt PWB
Check the harness between the PCU PWB and the
MFPcnt PWB.
EE-EC Auto developer adjustment trouble
(The sample level for every rotation is
other than 128 ± 10).
Trouble content
F1-00
Stapler shift motor operation trouble
PCU
Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple motor
(FSM).
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Finisher staple motor abnormality
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Staple operation trouble
PCU
Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
overvoltage, saddle finisher control PWB trouble
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple motor
(FFSM).
Replace the finisher control PWB.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 13
F1-11
Finisher bundle process motor
abnormality
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F1-15
Check
and
remedy
Finisher pre-alignment motor abnormality
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F1-20
Check
and
remedy
Pre-alignment motor trouble
PCU
Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
overvoltage, saddle finisher control PWB trouble
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the prealignment motor (FFJM).
Replace the finisher control PWB.
After-alignment motor trouble
PCU
Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the afteralignment motor (FRJM).
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Finisher fan motor abnormality (MXFNX1), Finisher interface fan motor
abnormality (MX-FNX2)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F1-31
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Case 4
F1-33
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cooling fan motor trouble (MX-FNX1)
Interface transport fan motor trouble (MX-FNX2)
PCU
Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the fan motor
(FFAM/FJFM).
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Finisher folding sensor trouble (MXFNX2)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F1-34
Connector/harness connection error or disconnection
between the finisher and the punch unit
Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line.
Finisher control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2)
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Control PWB (PCU) trouble
Replace the control PWB (PCU) trouble
Punch shift motor operation abnormality
PCU
Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble, punch
control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2)
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch shift
motor (FPSM).
Replace the finisher punch unit (Replace the punch
control PWB.).
Finisher punch motor trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F1-35
Finisher and punch unit communication trouble (MXFNX2)
PCU
Malfunction due to noises
Cancel by turning OFF/ON the power.
Finisher punch shift motor trouble
Finisher after-alignment motor abnormality
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
F1-21
Lift motor trouble
PCU
Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the tray lift
motor (FLM/FTLM).
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Communication trouble between the
finisher and the punch unit (MX-FN2)
Trouble content
Finisher tray lift motor abnormality
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
F1-19
Bundle process motor trouble
PCU
Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2)
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the bundle
process motor (FAM).
Replace the finisher control PWB.
F1-32
Punch motor operation abnormality
PCU
Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, motor
overvoltage, finisher control PWB trouble, punch
control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2)
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch motor
(FPNW).
Replace the finisher punch unit (Replace the punch
control PWB.).
Finisher punch side registration sensor trouble (MX-FNX2)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Sensor input value abnormality
PCU
Sensor breakage, harness disconnection, saddle
finisher control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2), punch
control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2)
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the punch
section sensor (FPSHPD/FPSD1-4).
Replace the finisher punch unit (Replace the punch
control PWB.).
Sensor input value abnormality
PCU
Sensor breakage, harness disconnection, finisher
control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2)
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the sensor
(FFPD).
Replace the finisher control PWB.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 14
F1-36
Finisher punch registration sensor
trouble (MX-FNX2)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F1-37
Finisher backup RAM trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F1-38
Check
and
remedy
Check
and
remedy
Punch dust sensor detection trouble
PCU
Sensor breakage, harness disconnection, finisher
control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2), punch control PWB
trouble (MX-FNX2)
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the sensor
punch dust sensor (FPDD).
Replace the finisher control PWB or the punch control
PWB.
Saddle finisher punch power
interruption trouble (MX-FNX2)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F1-50
Punch unit backup RAM data garbled
PCU
Punch control PWB trouble, malfunction due to
electrical noises
Replace the punch control PWB.
Finisher punch dust sensor trouble
(MX-FNX2)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
F1-40
Backup RAM data garbled
PCU
Finisher control PWB trouble, malfunction due to
electrical noises
Replace the finisher control PWB.
Finisher punch backup RAM trouble
(MX-FNX2)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
F1-39
Sensor input value abnormality
PCU
Sensor breakage, harness disconnection, saddle
finisher control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2), punch
control PWB trouble (MX-FNX2)
Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the punch
timing sensor (FPTD).
Replace the finisher punch unit (Replace the punch
control PWB.).
When the punch unit power interruption is detected.
PCU
Harness disconnection, punch control PWB trouble
Use SIM3-3 to check the operation punch motor
(FPNW).
Replace the finisher punch unit (Replace the punch
control PWB.).
F2-39
Process thermistor trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-40
Process thermistor trouble
Check the connection of the process thermistor.
PCU PWB trouble
Check the PCU PWB.
Toner empty sensor abnormality
(BLACK)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-41
Process thermistor open
PCU
Process thermistor harness connection trouble
Check the connection of the harness, connector of the
process thermistor.
Toner empty sensor output abnormality. Sample level
25 or less or 231 or above.
PCU
The connector is not installed.
Check the connection of the connector harness to the
PCU PWB. Check the connection of the toner empty
sensor.
Connector harness trouble
Check the harness disconnection.
Cartridge trouble
Check the cartridge connection.
Toner empty sensor abnormality
(CYAN)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Toner empty sensor output abnormality. Sample level
25 or less or 231 or above.
PCU
The connector is not installed.
Check the connection of the connector harness to the
PCU PWB. Check the connection of the toner empty
sensor.
Connector harness trouble
Check the harness disconnection.
Cartridge trouble
Check the cartridge connection.
Finisher incompatibility trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Detection of finisher incompatible with MX-2700**/
2300**
PCU
Connection of the AR-F13, etc. which is incompatible
with MX-2700**/2300** is detected.
Connect the MX-FNX1/MX-FNX2.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 15
F2-42
Toner empty sensor abnormality
(MAGENTA)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-43
Toner empty sensor output abnormality. Sample level
25 or less or 231 or above.
PCU
The connector is not installed.
Check the connection of the connector harness to the
PCU PWB. Check the connection of the toner empty
sensor.
Connector harness trouble
Check the harness disconnection.
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Toner empty sensor output abnormality. Sample level
25 or less or 231 or above.
PCU
The connector is not installed.
Check the connection of the connector harness to the
PCU PWB. Check the connection of the toner empty
sensor.
Connector harness trouble
Check the harness disconnection.
Color exclusive image density sensor
trouble (Calibration plate surface
reflection ratio abnormality)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Cartridge trouble
Check the cartridge connection.
Toner empty sensor abnormality
(YELLOW)
Trouble content
F2-45
Check
and
remedy
F2-49
LSU thermistor trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2
Cartridge trouble
Check the cartridge connection.
F2-50
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Black exclusive image density sensor
trouble (Transfer belt surface
reflection ratio abnormality)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
The transfer belt surface is scanned by the image
density sensor before starting the process control, and
adjust the sensor gain so that the output is kept at a
certain level. However, the output is not within the
specified range though the senor gain is adjusted.
PCU
Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
trouble between PCU PWB and the image density
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
cleaning trouble, calibration plate solenoid operation
trouble
Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control sensor
gain adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the
sensor, the harness, the calibration plate solenoid
operation for any trouble. If the adjustment is
completed, check the transfer belt surface state.
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
The detection temperature is out of the range of 5°C
to 55°C.
PCU
LSU thermistor harness connection trouble
Check the connection of the LSU thermistor harness
and connector.
If the trouble cannot be removed, replace the LSU
thermistor or the PCU PWB.
LSU thermistor trouble, PCU PWB trouble
Check the PCU PWB.
If the trouble cannot be removed, replace the LSU
thermistor or the PCU PWB.
K phase sensor sensing trouble
Trouble content
F2-44
The calibration plate surface is scanned by the image
density sensor before starting the process control, and
adjust the sensor gain so that the output is kept at a
certain level. However, the output is not within the
certain level though the senor gain is adjusted.
PCU
Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
trouble between PCU PWB and the image density
sensor, image density sensor dirt, calibration plate
dirt, calibration plate solenoid operation trouble
Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain
adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the
sensor and the harness. If the adjustment is
completed, check the calibration plate solenoid
operation.
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Detection is made by interruption of light in the sensor
section of the projection rib on the drum drive gear to
control the BK drum phase. The detection signal
cannot be acquired and phase control cannot be
made.
PCU
Sensor connector connection trouble
Check the sensor connector connection.
Dirt on the sensor light emitting section, or installation
trouble
Check for dirt on the sensor or check the installation
state.
Drum drive gear upper rib breakage, sensor trouble
If there is no trouble in the rib, replace the sensor.
(Use SIM30-1 "DHPD_K" to check interruption or
transmission of light.)
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 16
F2-51
CL phase sensor sensing trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Detection is made by interruption of light in the sensor
section of the projection rib on the drum drive gear to
control the phases of all the color drums. The
detection signal cannot be acquired and phase control
cannot be made.
PCU
Sensor connector connection trouble
Check the sensor connector connection.
F2-65
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2
Dirt on the sensor light emitting section, or installation
trouble
Check for dirt on the sensor or check the installation
state.
Drum drive gear upper rib breakage, sensor trouble
If there is no trouble in the rib, replace the sensor.
(Use SIM30-1 "DHPD_CL" to check interruption or
transmission of light.)
Toner supply abnormality (CYAN)
F2-66
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Toner supply abnormality (MAGENTA)
Trouble content
F2-58
Process humidity sensor trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Process humidity sensor open
PCU
Process humidity sensor harness connection trouble
Check the harness and connector connection of the
process humidity sensor.
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Process humidity sensor trouble
Check the process humidity sensor.
Case 2
Toner supply abnormality (BLACK)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
PCU PWB trouble
Check the PCU PWB.
F2-67
F2-64
Toner end with the remaining quantity of 50% or more.
The toner supply time exceeds 3 times as much as
the specified time.
PCU
Toner motor section connector harness trouble
Check the connector connection of the toner motor
section.
Check the connector harness (TM) connection to the
main PWB.
Toner motor and toner density sensor trouble
Check the toner density sensor output. (SIM25-1)
Check that the toner transport pipe is not clogged
between the toner cartridge and the developing unit.
Replace the toner cartridge (CRUM) if necessary.
If replacement of the toner cartridge (CRUM) does not
clear the trouble, check the developing unit.
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-70
Toner end with the remaining quantity of 50% or more.
The toner supply time exceeds 3 times as much as
the specified time.
PCU
Toner motor section connector harness trouble
Check the connector connection of the toner motor
section.
Check the connector harness (TM) connection to the
main PWB.
Toner motor and toner density sensor trouble
Check the toner density sensor output. (SIM25-1)
Check that the toner transport pipe is not clogged
between the toner cartridge and the developing unit.
Replace the toner cartridge (CRUM) if necessary.
If replacement of the toner cartridge (CRUM) does not
clear the trouble, check the developing unit.
Toner supply abnormality (YELLOW)
Trouble content
Case 2
Toner end with the remaining quantity of 50% or more.
The toner supply time exceeds 3 times as much as
the specified time.
PCU
Toner motor section connector harness trouble
Check the connector connection of the toner motor
section.
Check the connector harness (TM) connection to the
main PWB.
Toner motor and toner density sensor trouble
Check the toner density sensor output. (SIM25-1)
Check that the toner transport pipe is not clogged
between the toner cartridge and the developing unit.
Replace the toner cartridge (CRUM) if necessary.
If replacement of the toner cartridge (CRUM) does not
clear the trouble, check the developing unit.
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Toner end with the remaining quantity of 50% or more.
The toner supply time exceeds 3 times as much as
the specified time.
PCU
Toner motor section connector harness trouble
Check the connector connection of the toner motor
section.
Check the connector harness (TM) connection to the
main PWB.
Toner motor and toner density sensor trouble
Check the toner density sensor output. (SIM25-1)
Check that the toner transport pipe is not clogged
between the toner cartridge and the developing unit.
Replace the toner cartridge (CRUM) if necessary.
If replacement of the toner cartridge (CRUM) does not
clear the trouble, check the developing unit.
Toner cartridge improper cartridge
detection (BLACK)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Improper data are detected in the CRUM contents
when the normal CRUM of the cartridge is detected.
PCU
An improper cartridge is inserted. Toner cartridge
trouble
Replace the toner cartridge.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 17
F2-71
Toner cartridge improper cartridge
detection (CYAN)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-72
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3
F2-76
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2
Case 3
CRUM trouble
Replace the toner cartridge.
Control PWB (PCU) trouble
Replace the PCU PWB.
Toner cartridge CRUM error
(MAGENTA)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Improper data are detected in the CRUM contents
when the normal CRUM of the cartridge is detected.
PCU
An improper cartridge is inserted. Toner cartridge
trouble
Replace the toner cartridge.
CRUM cannot be read or written.
PCU
Connection trouble or disconnection of the connector
and the harness between the PCU and the toner
cartridge.
Check the connector and the harness between the
PCU and the toner cartridge.
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
CRUM cannot be read or written.
PCU
Connection trouble or disconnection of the connector
and the harness between the PCU and the toner
cartridge.
Check the connector and the harness between the
PCU and the toner cartridge.
CRUM trouble
Replace the toner cartridge.
Control PWB (PCU) trouble
Replace the PCU PWB.
Toner cartridge CRUM error (BLACK)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Case 3
Toner cartridge improper cartridge
detection (YELLOW)
Trouble content
F2-74
Improper data are detected in the CRUM contents
when the normal CRUM of the cartridge is detected.
PCU
An improper cartridge is inserted. Toner cartridge
trouble
Replace the toner cartridge.
Toner cartridge CRUM error (CYAN)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Toner cartridge improper cartridge
detection (MAGENTA)
Trouble content
F2-73
Improper data are detected in the CRUM contents
when the normal CRUM of the cartridge is detected.
PCU
An improper cartridge is inserted. Toner cartridge
trouble
Replace the toner cartridge.
F2-75
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
CRUM cannot be read or written.
PCU
Connection trouble or disconnection of the connector
and the harness between the PCU and the toner
cartridge.
Check the connector and the harness between the
PCU and the toner cartridge.
F2-77
Toner cartridge CRUM error
(YELLOW)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
CRUM trouble
Replace the toner cartridge.
Case 2
Control PWB (PCU) trouble
Replace the PCU PWB.
Case 3
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
CRUM cannot be read or written.
PCU
Connection trouble or disconnection of the connector
and the harness between the PCU and the toner
cartridge.
Check the connector and the harness between the
PCU and the toner cartridge.
CRUM trouble
Replace the toner cartridge.
Control PWB (PCU) trouble
Replace the PCU PWB.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 18
F2-78
Registration exclusive image density
sensor trouble (Transfer belt surface
reflection ratio abnormality)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
The transfer belt surface is scanned by the image
density sensor before starting the registration, and
adjust the sensor gain so that the output is kept at a
certain level. However, the output is not within the
specified range though the senor gain is adjusted.
PCU
Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
trouble between PCU PWB and the image density
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
cleaning trouble, calibration plate solenoid operation
trouble
Check the sensor and the harness. Check the
calibration plate solenoid operation and the transfer
belt surface state.
If the trouble is not cleared, replace the image sensor
exclusively used for registration, replace the transfer
belt, replace the calibration plate, replace the
solenoid, or replace the PCU PWB according to the
check result.
F2-82
Half tone process control 1st patch
reference value trouble (MAGENTA)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-83
Half tone process control 1st patch
reference value trouble (YELLOW)
Trouble content
F2-80
Half tone process control 1st patch
reference value trouble (BLACK)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
The low-density rising point or the high-density
saturation point cannot be calculated because of a
calculation error in the primary approximation formula
of the sensor output ratio for the LSU PWM value
obtained from the first step patch print result when
executing the half tone process control in BLACK.
PCU
Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image density
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
cleaning trouble
Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain
adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the
sensor and the harness. If the adjustment is
completed, check the drum surface state and the belt
surface state.
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-84
Half tone process control 1st patch
reference value trouble (CYAN)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
The low-density rising point or the high-density
saturation point cannot be calculated because of a
calculation error in the primary approximation formula
of the sensor output ratio for the LSU PWM value
obtained from the first step patch print result when
executing the half tone process control in CYAN.
PCU
Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image density
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
cleaning trouble
Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain
adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the
sensor and the harness. If the adjustment is
completed, check the drum surface state and the belt
surface state.
The low-density rising point or the high-density
saturation point cannot be calculated because of a
calculation error in the primary approximation formula
of the sensor output ratio for the LSU PWM value
obtained from the first step patch print result when
executing the half tone process control in YELLOW.
PCU
Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image density
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
cleaning trouble
Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain
adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the
sensor and the harness. If the adjustment is
completed, check the drum surface state and the belt
surface state.
Half tone process control 2nd patch
reference value trouble (BLACK)
Trouble content
F2-81
The low-density rising point or the high-density
saturation point cannot be calculated because of a
calculation error in the primary approximation formula
of the sensor output ratio for the LSU PWM value
obtained from the first step patch print result when
executing the half tone process control in MAGENTA.
PCU
Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image density
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
cleaning trouble
Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain
adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the
sensor and the harness. If the adjustment is
completed, check the drum surface state and the belt
surface state.
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
The low-density section output is greater than the
middle-density section output when connecting the
low-density section approximation formula and the
middle-density section approximation formula
(formula of the sensor output ratio for the LSU PWM
value) from the second step patch print result when
executing the half tone process control in BLACK.
PCU
Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image density
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
cleaning trouble, transfer belt cleaning trouble
Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain
adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the
sensor and the harness. If the adjustment is
completed, check the drum surface state and the belt
surface state.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 19
F2-85
Half tone process control 2nd patch
reference value trouble (CYAN)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-86
Half tone process control 2nd patch
reference value trouble (MAGENTA)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-87
The low-density section output is greater than the
middle-density section output when connecting the
low-density section approximation formula and the
middle-density section approximation formula
(formula of the sensor output ratio for the LSU PWM
value) from the second step patch print result when
executing the half tone process control in CYAN.
PCU
Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image density
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
cleaning trouble
Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain
adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the
sensor and the harness. If the adjustment is
completed, check the drum surface state and the belt
surface state.
The low-density section output is greater than the
middle-density section output when connecting the
low-density section approximation formula and the
middle-density section approximation formula
(formula of the sensor output ratio for the LSU PWM
value) from the second step patch print result when
executing the half tone process control in MAGENTA.
PCU
Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image density
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
cleaning trouble
Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain
adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the
sensor and the harness. If the adjustment is
completed, check the drum surface state and the belt
surface state.
Half tone process control 2nd patch
reference value trouble (YELLOW)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
The low-density section output is greater than the
middle-density section output when connecting the
low-density section approximation formula and the
middle-density section approximation formula (formula
of the sensor output ratio for the LSU PWM value)
from the second step patch print result when
executing the half tone process control in YELLOW.
PCU
Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
trouble between PCU sub PWB and the image density
sensor, image density sensor dirt, transfer belt
cleaning trouble
Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control gain
adjustment. If "ERROR" is displayed, check the
sensor and the harness. If the adjustment is
completed, check the drum surface state and the belt
surface state.
F2-92
High-density process control density
correction error (CYAN)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-93
High-density process control density
correction error (MAGENTA)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-94
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
The patch density value is not in the range of the
density correction reference density value (STD
value) ±30% at the upper limit or the lower limit bias
voltage when executing the high density process
control.
PCU
Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
trouble between PCU PWB-image density sensor, dirt
on image density sensor, transfer belt cleaning trouble
1) Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control
sensor gain adjustment.
2) If an error occurs, check the sensors and the
harnesses.
3) If the adjustment of 1) is completed, check the
drum surface state, the belt surface state, etc.
Main unit tray 1 lift-up trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
The patch density value is not in the range of the
density correction reference density value (STD
value) ±30% at the upper limit or the lower limit bias
voltage when executing the high density process
control.
PCU
Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
trouble between PCU PWB-image density sensor, dirt
on image density sensor, transfer belt cleaning trouble
1) Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control
sensor gain adjustment.
2) If an error occurs, check the sensors and the
harnesses.
3) If the adjustment of 1) is completed, check the
drum surface state, the belt surface state, etc.
High-density process control density
correction error (YELLOW)
Trouble content
F3-12
The patch density value is not in the range of the
density correction reference density value (STD
value) ±30% at the upper limit or the lower limit bias
voltage when executing the high density process
control.
PCU
Image density sensor trouble, harness connection
trouble between PCU PWB-image density sensor, dirt
on image density sensor, transfer belt cleaning trouble
1) Use SIM44-2 to execute the process control
sensor gain adjustment.
2) If an error occurs, check the sensors and the
harnesses.
3) If the adjustment of 1) is completed, check the
drum surface state, the belt surface state, etc.
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
LUD1 does not turn ON within the specified time.
PCU
LUD1 sensor trouble, harness connection trouble
between PCU PWB, the lift-up unit, and the paper
feed unit.
Check the harness and the connector of LUD1.
Tray 1 lift-up motor trouble
Check the lift-up unit.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 20
F3-22
Main unit tray 2 lift-up trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
H2-00
Check
and
remedy
Check
and
remedy
Thermistor open
PCU
Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
section connector connection trouble, AC power
source trouble, fusing unit not-installed
Check the harness and the connector from the
thermistor to the control PWB.
Fusing section high temperature
trouble (TH_UM)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Check
and
remedy
Thermistor open
PCU
Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
section connector connection trouble, AC power
source trouble, fusing unit not-installed
Check the harness and the connector from the
thermistor to the control PWB.
Non-contact thermistor
compensation thermistor open
(TH_UM_AD1)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
H3-01
The fusing temperature inside the PWB exceeds the
specified level.
PCU
Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
section connector connection error, AC power source
trouble
1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater lamp.
2) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor and the
harness.
Check the control PWB thermistor input circuit
section.
3) If the heater lamp keep lighting, check the AC
PWB and the control PWB lamp control circuit.
4) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_LM)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
H3-02
Sub thermistor open (TH_US)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
H2-03
Thermistor open
PCU
Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
section connector connection trouble, AC power
source trouble, fusing unit not-installed
Check the harness and the connector from the
thermistor to the control PWB.
Lower thermistor open (TH_LM)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
H2-02
Tray 2 lift-up motor trouble
Check the lift-up unit.
H3-00
Non-contact thermistor detection
thermistor open (TH_UM_AD2)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
H2-01
LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.
PCU
LUD2 sensor trouble, harness connection trouble
between PCU PWB, the lift-up unit, and the paper
feed unit.
Check the harness and the connector of LUD2.
The fusing temperature inside the PWB exceeds the
specified level.
PCU
Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
section connector connection error, AC power source
trouble
1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater lamp.
2) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor and the
harness.
Check the control PWB thermistor input circuit
section.
3) If the heater lamp keep lighting, check the AC
PWB and the control PWB lamp control circuit.
4) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Sub thermistor fusing section high
temperature trouble (TH_US)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
The fusing temperature inside the PWB exceeds the
specified level.
PCU
Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
section connector connection error, AC power source
trouble
1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater lamp.
2) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor and the
harness.
Check the control PWB thermistor input circuit
section.
3) If the heater lamp keep lighting, check the AC
PWB and the control PWB lamp control circuit.
4) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Thermistor open
PCU
Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
section connector connection trouble, AC power
source trouble
Check the harness and the connector from the
thermistor to the control PWB.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 21
H4-00
Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_UM_AD2)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
H4-01
Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_LM)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
H4-02
The temperature does not reach the specified level
within the specified time after turning on the power
relay.
PCU
Thermistor trouble, heater lamp trouble, PCU PWB
trouble, thermostat trouble, AC power source trouble,
interlock switch trouble
1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater lamp.
2) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor and the
harness.
Check the control PWB thermistor input circuit
section.
3) If it is not lighted, check for the heater lamp
disconnection and the thermostat breakage.
Check the interlock switch. Check the AC PWB
and the PCU PWB lamp control circuit.
4) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
The temperature does not reach the specified level
within the specified time after turning on the power
relay.
PCU
Thermistor trouble, heater lamp trouble, PCU PWB
trouble, thermostat trouble, AC power source trouble,
interlock switch trouble
1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater lamp.
2) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor and the
harness.
Check the control PWB thermistor input circuit
section.
3) If it is not lighted, check for the heater lamp
disconnection and the thermostat breakage.
Check the interlock switch. Check the AC PWB
and the PCU PWB lamp control circuit.
4) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Sub thermistor fusing section low
temperature trouble (TH_US)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
The temperature does not reach the specified level
within the specified time after turning on the power
relay.
PCU
Thermistor trouble, heater lamp trouble, PCU PWB
trouble, thermostat trouble, AC power source trouble,
interlock switch trouble
1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater lamp..
2) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor and the
harness.
Check the control PWB thermistor input circuit
section.
3) If it is not lighted, check for the heater lamp
disconnection and the thermostat breakage.
Check the interlock switch. Check the AC PWB
and the PCU PWB lamp control circuit.
4) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
H4-30
Thermistor differential input trouble
(TH_UM)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
H5-01
5 continuous detection of POD1 notreached jam
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Case 3
L1-00
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
POD1 sensor trouble or harness connection trouble
Check the POD1 sensor harness. Use SIM14 to
cancel the trouble.
Fusing unit installation trouble
Check the fusing unit installation.
Mirror feed is not completed within the specified time.
Scanner
Mirror unit trouble, mirror wire disengagement
Use SIM1-1 to check the mirror operation.
Mirror return trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
L4-02
5 continuous detection of POD1 not-reached jam
PCU
The fusing jam is not removed completely. (Jam paper
remains.)
Check the fusing section for jam paper. (winding, etc.)
Mirror feed trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
L3-00
TH_UM_AD1 and TH_UM_AD2 do not exceed the
specified level (50 count with the AD value) within
1minute after HL_UM is turned on.
PCU
HL_UM does not turn on. Thermistor trouble, harness
trouble, PCU PWB trouble
1) Use SIM5-2 to check blinking of the heater lamp.
2) If it blinks normally, check the thermistor and the
harness.
Check the PCU PWB thermistor input circuit
section.
3) If it is not lighted, check for the heater lamp
disconnection and the thermostat breakage.
Check the interlock switch. Check the AC PWB
and the PCU PWB lamp control circuit.
4) Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Mirror return is not completed within the specified
time.
Scanner
Mirror unit trouble, mirror wire disengagement
Use SIM1-1 to check the mirror operation.
Paper feed motor lock trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
When the paper feed motor is rotated in warming up
or in canceling a jam and the lock signal is not
detected within 1sec.
PCU
Paper feed motor trouble, harness connection trouble
between PCU PWB and paper feed motor, control
circuit trouble
Use SIM6-1 to check the paper feed motor operation.
Check the harness and the connector between the
PCU PWB and the paper feed motor.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 22
L4-04
Developing motor trouble (BLACK)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
L4-05
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
L4-06
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 3
The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the
developing motor.
PCU
Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB
and the developing motor.
Check the harness and the connector between the
PCU PWB and the developing motor.
Developing motor trouble, control circuit trouble
Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the developing
motor.
Transfer belt separation position sensor trouble
Trouble content
Case 2
Developing motor trouble, control circuit trouble
Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the developing
motor.
Developing motor trouble (COLOR)
Trouble content
Case 2
The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the
developing motor.
PCU
Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB
and the developing motor.
Check the harness and the connector between the
PCU PWB and the developing motor.
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
When separating the primary transfer belt unit,
change in the separation position sensor
characteristics is not detected within the specified
time.
PCU
Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB
and the separation position sensor
Check the harness between the PCU PWB and the
separation position sensor.
L4-11
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
L4-30
When the shift motor is initialized, no characteristics
change of the shifter home position sensor is not
detected within the specified time.
PCU
Shift motor trouble
Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the shift motor.
Harness connection trouble between the PCU PWB
and the shift motor, control circuit trouble
Use SIM30-1 to check the shifter home position
sensor. Check the harness and the connector
between the PCU PWB and the shift motor.
When the finisher is installed with the finisher
connector disconnected and when the finisher
communication trouble occurs.
Connect the finisher connector.
When the communication trouble occurs between the
PCU and the finisher, refer to the content of F1-00.
Controller fan/HDD fan motor trouble
Trouble content
1)
2)
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Case 4
The belt position sensor is not interrupted or it is
always interrupted. Belt separation clutch operation
trouble
Use SIM6-3 to check the belt separation operation.
L4-31
The primary transfer belt unit is not installed.
Install the primary transfer belt.
Shift motor trouble
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
The motor lock signal is detected during rotation
of the controller fan motor.
The motor lock signal is detected during rotation
of the HDD fan motor.
MFP
Fan motor trouble
Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Harness connection trouble between the mother PWB
and the fan motor.
Check the harness and the connector between the
mother PWB and the fan motor.
Control circuit trouble
Replace the controller PWB.
Mother PWB trouble.
Replace the mother PWB.
Paper exit cooling fan trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
When the paper exit cooling fan is operated, the fan
operation signal is not detected within the specified
time.
PCU
Fan connector disconnection
Check the harness and the connector between the
PCU PWB and the fan.
Fan does not rotate because of other trouble.
Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is rotation actually.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 23
L4-32
Power cooling fan/ozone exhaust fan
trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
L6-10
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
L8-01
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Case 3
It is judged that the LSU polygon motor lock signal is
not outputted, and the lock signal is checked after 7
sec from starting rotation of the polygon motor and it is
judged that the polygon motor does not rotate
properly.
LSU
Disconnection of the LSU connector or the LSU inside
harness, or breakage
Check connection of the harness and the connector.
If the trouble cannot be removed, replace the LSUcnt
PWB or the LSU.
Polygon motor trouble, LSU PWB trouble
Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon
motor.
If the trouble cannot be removed, replace the LSUcnt
PWB or the LSU.
No full wave signal
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
L8-02
Fan does not rotate because of other trouble
Use SIM6-2 to check that the fan is actually rotating.
No full wave signal is detected.
PCU
Harness trouble
Check connection of the harness and the connector.
Power unit trouble
Replace the power unit.
PCU PWB trouble
Replace the PCU PWB.
Full wave signal width abnormality
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
The full wave signal is judged as frequency
abnormality. (The detection frequency is judged as
65Hz or above or 45Hz or less.)
PCU
Harness trouble
Check the harness and the connector connection.
Power controller communication trouble
Trouble content
Polygon motor lock detection
Trouble content
Case 2
When the power cooling fan/ozone exhaust fan is
operated, the fan operation signal is not detected
within the specified time.
PCU
Power cooling fan or ozone exhaust fan connector
disconnection
Check the harness and the connector between the
PCU PWB and the fan.
L8-20
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
PC---
PCU PWB trouble
Replace the PCU PWB.
Mother PWB jumper error
Set the mother PWB jumper to the Default side.
Personal counter not installed
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
U1-01
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
U2-00
Backup SRAM battery voltage fall
MFP
1) Battery life
2) Battery circuit abnormality
Check that the battery voltage is about 2.5V or above.
EEPROM read/write error
(MFP detection)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
U2-05
The personal counter is not installed.
MFP
The personal counter is not installed.
Install the personal counter.
Battery trouble
EEPROM device read/write error
MFP
EEPROM device trouble
Replace the EEPROM device.
EEPROM device contact failure
Check that EEPROM device is properly inserted.
Device access error due to electrical noises
Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
HDD/Flash/EEPROM data discrepancy
Trouble content
Power unit trouble
Replace the power unit.
Communication establishment error/Framing/Parity/
Protocol error
MFP
Connector connection trouble between the mother
board PWB and the MFPcnt PWB.
MFPcnt PWB mother board connector pin breakage
Check the connector connection between the mother
board PWB and the MFPcnt PWB. Check grounding
of the machine.
Mother PWB trouble
Replace the mother PWB.
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
A HDD or Flash memory for user authentication
different from that used before turn off the power is
installed.
MFP
HDD replacement or Flash memory replacement
Initialize the authentication information with SIM16,
and import the backup data (exported data) if any.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 24
U2-10
SRAM user authentication
check sum error
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
index
User index information (basic data of user
authentication) check sum error on the SRAM
MFP
1) SRAM trouble
2) Hang-up of the control circuit due to electrical
noises
3) MFPcnt PWB SRAM access circuit trouble
Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
U2-24
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
U2-25
U2-11
EEPROM check sum error
(MFP detection)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
U2-22
SRAM memory check sum error
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2
Case 3
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
U2-23
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3
MFPcnt PWB SRAM memory check sum error
MFP
SRAM trouble
1) Initialize the communication management table
registered in SRAM and the FAX soft switch.
2) Since the registered contents have been deleted,
register them again.
Control circuit hang-up due to electrical noises
Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
MFPcnt PWB SRAM access circuit trouble
Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
U2-30
MFPcnt PWB SRAM memory individual data check
sum error (Communication management table, sender
registration data, etc.)
MFP
SRAM trouble
1) Turn OFF/ON the power to initialize the data
related to the check sum error automatically.
2) Since the registered contents have been deleted,
register them again.
Control circuit hang-up due to electrical noises
Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3
The serial number stored in the PCU differs from that
stored in the MFP.
MFP
EEPROM is not changed when the PCU/MFPcnt
PWB is replaced.
1) Check that EEPROM is properly set.
2) Check that EEPROM on the previous PWB is
inserted to the newly installed PWB.
HDD section individual data check
sum error
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2
Check sum error of the user authentication counter on
FLASH
MFP
Flash trouble. Control circuit hang-up due to electrical
noises
MFPcnt PWB FLASH access circuit trouble.
Use SIM16 to recalculate the check sum of the user
counter and save the normal sum value.
Serial number data discrepancy
(MFP ↔ PCU)
Trouble content
U2-50
Check sum error of the user counter on SRAM
MFP
1) SRAM trouble
2) Control circuit hang-up due to electrical noises
3) MFPcnt PWB SRAM access circuit trouble
Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
Flash memory user authentication
counter check sum error
Trouble content
MFPC section SRAM memory
individual data check sum error
Trouble content
Case 2
Counter information check sum error on the EEPROM
MFP
1) EEPROM device trouble
2) EEPROM device contact failure
3) Device access error due to electrical noises
Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
SRAM memory user authentication
counter check sum error
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
MFPcnt HDD individual data check sum error (Onetouch, group, program, etc.)
MFP
Write/read error to/from HDD
1) Turn OFF/ON the power to initialize the data
related to the check sum error contents.
2) Since the registered contents have been deleted,
register them again.
3) If the trouble is not canceled, replace the HDD.
Control circuit hang-up due to electrical noises
Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
MFPcnt PWB HDD access circuit trouble
Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
MFPcnt PWB SRAM access circuit trouble
Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 25
U2-80
EEPROM read/write error
(SCU detection)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
U2-81
Cause
Check
and
remedy
U2-90
EEPROM (SCU) check sum error
Scanner
Control circuit hang-up due to electrical noises
Use SIM16 to cancel U2 trouble.
EEPROM trouble
To avoid deletion of the counter data/adjustment data,
use the simulation to save the counter/adjustment
values. (If there is a printer option, execute SIM22-1 to
save the counter data and the adjustment values.)
Replace the SCU PWB. Use SIM16 to cancel the
trouble.
SCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Check that EEPROM is properly set.
EEPROM read/write error
(PCU detection)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
SCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
To avoid deletion of the counter data/adjustment data,
use the simulation to save the counter/adjustment
values. (If there is a printer option, execute SIM22-1 to
save the counter data and the adjustment values.)
Replace the SCU PWB. Use SIM16 to cancel the
trouble.
Adjustment value check sum error
(SCU detection)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3
1) EEPROM version error
2) Write error to EEPROM
Scanner
EEPROM trouble, installation of EEPROM which is
not initialized
Check that EEPROM is properly set.
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
EEPROM version error, write error to EEPROM
PCU
EEPROM trouble, installation of EEPROM which is
not initialized
Check that EEPROM is properly set.
PCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
To avoid deletion of the counter data/adjustment data,
use the simulation to save the counter/adjustment
values. (If there is a printer option, execute SIM22-1 to
save the counter data and the adjustment values.)
Replace the PCU PWB. Use SIM16 to cancel the
trouble.
U2-91
EEPROM (PCU) check sum error
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
U6-00
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Check
and
remedy
Desk communication error, communication line test
error after turning on the power or canceling the
exclusive simulation
PCU
Connector and harness connection trouble or
disconnection, desk control PWB trouble, control
PWB (PCU) trouble, malfunction due to electrical
noises
Cancel the trouble by turning OFF/ON. Check the
connector and the harness of the communication line.
DLUD1 does not turn ON within the specified time.
PCU
DLUD1 sensor trouble, tray 1 lift-up motor trouble,
desk PWB, lift-up unit, paper feed unit harness
connection trouble
Check DLUD1 and its harness and connector. Check
the lift-up unit.
Tray 2 lift-up trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
U6-09
PCU PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
To avoid deletion of the counter data/adjustment data,
use the simulation to save the counter/adjustment
values. (If there is a printer option, execute SIM22-1 to
save the counter data and the adjustment values.)
Replace the PCU PWB.
Tray 1 lift-up trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
U6-02
EEPROM trouble.
Check that EEPROM is properly set.
Desk communication trouble
Trouble content
U6-01
Check sum error of adjustment value (PCU)
PCU
Control circuit hang-up due to electrical noises
Use SIM16 to cancel the trouble.
DLUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.
PCU
DLUD2 sensor trouble, tray 2 lift-up motor trouble,
desk PWB, lift-up unit, paper feed unit harness
connection trouble
Check DLUD2 and its harness and connector. Check
the lift-up unit.
LCC lift motor trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
• The encoder input value is not changed in 0.13sec
(1st time)/0.5sec (2nd time and later) after rotation
of the motor.
• The motor is rotated for 18sec or more.
• The encoder is changed after passing a certain
time from stopping the motor. (2sec, 10 count or
more)
PCU
Sensor trouble, LCC control PWB trouble, gear
breakage, lift motor trouble
Use SIM4-2 and 4-3 to check the operation of the
sensor and the lift motor. Use SIM15 to cancel the
trouble.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 26
U6-10
Desk transport motor trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
U6-20
LCC communication trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
U6-21
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
CPT-ASIC access error (When the ASIC does not
operate normally.)
Scanner
CPT-ASIC abnormality, SCU PWB abnormality
Turn OFF/ON the power several times. If the trouble
still occurs, replace the SCU PWB or the CPT-ASIC.
UC-20 Document control module trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Case 3
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Communication error between SCU and DOCC
Communication line test error when turning on the
power or after canceling an exclusion simulation.
Scanner
Connector or harness connection error or
disconnection
Check the connector and harness in the
communication line.
Control PWB (SCU) trouble, DOCC PWB trouble.
Replace the SCU PWB or the DOCC PWB.
Malfunction due to electrical noises.
Turn OFF/ON the power to electrical cancel the
trouble.
DC24V power is not supplied to LCC.
PCU
Connector and harness connection trouble or
disconnection, LCC control PWB trouble, power unit
trouble
Check the connector and the harness of the power
line. Check that the power unit and the LCC control
PWB is of 24V.
Desk incompatibility trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
U6-51
• The encoder input value is not changed in 0.06sec
after turning on the motor.
• The encoder input value is changed after a certain
time from turning OFF the motor. (After 5sec, count
is made for 0.1sec to get 100 or more count.)
PCU
Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, an overcurrent to
the motor, LCC control PWB trouble
Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the transport
motor.
Trouble content
LCC 24V power abnormality
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
U6-50
LCC communication error. Communication line test
error after turning ON the power or canceling the
exclusive simulation. LCC and machine model codes
discrepancy error
PCU
Connector and harness connection trouble or
disconnection, LCC control PWB trouble, control PWB
(PCU) trouble, malfunction due to electrical noises
Turn OFF/ON the power to cancel the trouble. Check
the connector and the harness of the communication
line.
LCC transport motor trouble
Trouble content
U6-22
Desk transport motor operation trouble
PCU
Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, overcurent to the
motor, console finisher control PWB trouble
Use SIM 4-3 to check the operation of the desk
transport motor.
UC-02 CPT-ASIC abnormality
Detection of desk connection incompatible with the
MX-2300/2700 **
PCU
Connection of a desk which is incompatible with the
MX-2300/2700 ** is detected.
Connect the MX-DEX1/DEX2.
LCC incompatibility trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Detection of LCC connection which is incompatible
with the MX-2300/2700 **.
PCU
Connection of the LCC, which is incompatible with the
MX-2300/2700 ** is detected.
Connect the MX-LCX1.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 8 – 27
[9] MAINTENANCE
MX2700N
Service Manual
1. Maintenance system table
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shift the position.
Unit name
Part name
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
K
Color supply
Drum
peripheral
Developing
section
Drum (BK)
Cleaner blade (BK)
Charging unit (BK)
Drum (C)
Cleaner blade (C)
Charging unit (C)
Side seal F/R (BK)
Toner reception seal
(BK)
Side seal F/R(C)
Toner reception seal
(C)
Waste toner box
Developer (BK)
DV seal (BK)
DV side seal F (BK)
DV side seal R (BK)
Toner filter
Developer (C)
Developer (M)
Developer (Y)
DV seal (C)
DV side seal F/R (C)
Toner filter
Toner cartridge (BK/
C/M/Y)
Bias pin/Connector
Unit name
LSU
Transfer
section
Part name
Dust proof glass
Cleaning base
Intermediate
transfer belt
Primary transfer
roller
Intermediate
transfer blade
Belt drive gear
Primary transfer
conduction collar
Transfer drive roller
Transfer follower
roller
Tension roller
Belt CL brush
Y auxiliary roller
Resist backup roller
Secondary transfer
belt
Secondary transfer
roller
Secondary belt drive
roller
Secondary belt
tension roller
▲
▲
▲
Color supply
✕
✕
✕
✕
Monochrome
supply
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
Color supply
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
400
K
500
K
120
K
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
Monochrome/
Color supply
Mechanical
parts
300
K
60
K
Monochrome
supply
Mechanical
parts
200
K
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
700
K
180
K
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
600
K
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
800
K
240
K
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
900
K
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
1100
K
300
K
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
1000
K
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
360
K
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
1200
K
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement
parts are described.)
(P/G No.: [24]-14)
(P/G No.: [24]-2)
(P/G No.: [24]-14)
(P/G No.: [24]-2)
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
User replacement for every toner empty (or the specified traveling distance).
(P/G No.: [23]-42)
(P/G No.: [23]-26)
(P/G No.: [23]-15)
(P/G No.: [22]-37)
(P/G No.: [23]-42)
(P/G No.: [23]-26,
[23]-15)
(P/G No.: [22]-37)
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
{
✕
✕
{
▲
▲
{
▲
▲
{
▲
▲
{
▲
▲
{
▲
▲
{
▲
▲
{
▲
▲
{
▲
▲
{
▲
▲
{
▲
▲
{
▲
▲
{
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
{
✕
▲
{
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
{
✕
▲
{
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
{
✕
▲
{
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
{
✕
▲
(P/G No.: [30]-21)
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
(P/G No.: [30]-6)
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 1
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement
parts are described.)
(P/G No.: [2]-35)
(P/G No.: [26]-3)
(P/G No.: [27]-9)
(P/G No.: [28]-27)
(P/G No.: [25]-19)
(P/G No.: [27]-13)
(P/G No.: [27]-8)
(P/G No.: [28]-25)
1 : Dec. 15 2005
Unit name
Transfer
section
Fusing
section
1
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
(P/G No.: [26]-56)
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
(P/G No.: [32]-32)
(P/G No.: [33]-15)
(P/G No.: [32]-30)
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
(P/G No.: [32]-31)
(P/G No.: [33]-14)
(P/G No.: [32]-11)
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
(P/G No.: [32]-18)
(P/G No.: [33]-20)
✕
{
✕
✩
{
✕
✩
{
▲
✩
{
✕
✩
{
▲
✩
{
✕
✩
{
▲
✩
{
✕
✩
{
▲
✩
{
✕
✩
{
▲
✩
{
✕
✩
{
▲
Specified position
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Paper feed roller
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Separation roller
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
{
✕
✕
{
{
✕
✕
{
{
✕
✕
{
{
✕
✕
{
{
✕
✕
{
{
✕
✕
{
{
✕
✕
{
{
✕
✕
{
{
✕
✕
{
{
✕
✕
{
{
✕
✕
{
{
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
Part name
Secondary belt
follower roller
Secondary transfer
idle gear
Sensors (Process
control resist
sensors)
Primary CL roller
Cleaner seal
Cleaner seal R
Transfer toner
reception seal
Upper heat roller
Lower heat roller
Upper heat roller
gear
Upper roller bearing
Lower roller bearing
Upper separation
pawl
Upper thermistor
Lower thermistor
Non-contact
thermistor
Gears
Paper guides
Fusing unit
Ozone filter PA
Paper feed
section
Pickup roller
Drive
section
Torque limiter
PS follower roller
Transport rollers
Discharge brush
Paper exit filter
Gears
Gears (Grease)
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Shaft earth sections
(Conduction grease)
Others
Belts
Sensors
Image quality
Optical
section
Mirror/Lens/
Reflector/CCD
Table glass/
SPF glass
Scanner lamp
Rails
Drive belt/
Drive wire
When
calling
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement
parts are described.)
100
K
Filters
Transport
section/
Paper exit
reverse
section
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 2
(P/G No.: [29]-6)
(P/G No.: [31]-901)
(P/G No.: [32]-901)
(P/G No.: [33]-901)
(P/G No.: [47]-40)
(P/G No.: [11]-40,
[16]-33)
(P/G No.: [11]-41,
[16]-29)
(P/G No.: [10]-4,
[15]-37)
When checking, apply
to the necessary
positions (specified
positions).
HANARL FL955R/
FLOIL G313S
When checking, apply
to the necessary
positions (specified
positions).
When checking, apply
to the necessary
positions (specified
positions).
Specified positions
2. Details of maintenance
A. Drum peripheral
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shift the position.
No.
Part name
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Color supply
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Drum (BK)
Cleaner blade
(BK)
Charging unit
(BK)
Drum (C)
Cleaner blade (C)
Charging unit (C)
Side seal F/R
(BK)
Toner reception
seal (BK)
Side seal F/R(C)
Toner reception
seal (C)
Waste toner box
When
calling
Monochrome
supply
100
K
✕
400
K
500
K
120
K
600
K
700
K
180
K
800
K
900
K
240
K
1000
K
1100
K
300
K
1200
K
360
K
Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement parts are
described.)
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
(P/G No.: [24]-14)
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
(P/G No.: [24]-2)
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
(P/G No.: [24]-14)
(P/G No.: [24]-2)
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
300
K
60
K
Color supply
Mechanical
parts
200
K
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
7,9
8,10
1,4
2,5
7,9
3,6
11
MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 3
The PM cycle means the replacement timing of periodic replacement consumable parts which are required for maintaining the performance.
The PM cycle is specified only for B/W output. For color output, it is
used as a reference value.
[Reason] Since the ratio of B/W to color differs depending on the
user's operation scene which varies every day, the PM cycle cannot be specified in a certain cycle for color output.
Replacement of a PM item at the recommended life is performed
by the dealer's judgment or at PM call or at EM call.
Life end definition of a drum
When the drum counter exceeds the specified level of 100% black
output or 100% full color output, it is judged as life end.
However in practice, the number of rotations specifies quality
assurance policy of the tandem engine, where its wear cannot be
solely defined by the number of sheets but other operating conditions including increased slip rotations depending on the ratio of B/
W to color and/or B/W printing in the color mode using the ACS.
The guaranteed number of rotations for the MX-2300/2700 series
drum is 715K.
The drum life is affected by the number of sheets of one print job.
This is because the actual life is determined by rotations of the
drum. If the number of sheets of one print job is less than 3 sheets,
the number of rotations for page is increased. As shown in the figure below, therefore, the number of sheets of drum life varies
depending on the number of sheets of one print job.
As a reference of the drum life, "Life meter" can be checked with
SIM22-1 from the accumulated number of rotations of each drum.
"Life meter" indicates the remained life (%) of the drum with the
entire drum life as 100%.
(Example) If the used number of rotations is 550K:
100(%) - 550 (K rotations) / 715 (K rotations) x 100 = 030 (%)
Drum counter
B/W
Full color
100K
60K
Drum
* For 100% full color output by the user, the life of the black drum
is 60K similarly to the life of the color drums.
Drum Life
200
Black Drum
Drum Life ( - K pages)
150
Color Drum
100
50
0
0
1
2
Number of rotations of drum
B/W
Full color
715K rotations
715K rotations
3
Number of sheets of one print job
MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 4
4
5
B. LSU
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shift the position.
No.
1
2
Part name
Dust proof glass
Cleaning base
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
{
✕
{
▲
{
▲
{
▲
{
▲
{
▲
{
▲
{
▲
{
▲
{
▲
{
▲
{
▲
{
▲
Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement parts are
described.)
(P/G No.: [2]-35)
1
2
MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 5
C. Developing section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shift the position.
No.
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Part name
Color supply
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Developer (BK)
DV seal (BK)
DV side seal F
(BK)
DV side seal R
(BK)
Toner filter
Developer (C)
Developer (M)
Developer (Y)
DV seal (C)
DV side seal F/R
(C)
Toner filter
Toner cartridge
(BK/C/M/Y)
Bias pin/
Connector
When
calling
100
K
300
K
60
K
400
K
500
K
120
K
600
K
700
K
180
K
800
K
900
K
240
K
1000
K
1100
K
300
K
1200
K
360
K
Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement parts are
described.)
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
(P/G No.: [23]-42)
(P/G No.: [23]-26)
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
(P/G No.: [23]-15)
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
(P/G No.: [22]-37)
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
User replacement for every toner empty (or the specified traveling distance).
(P/G No.: [22]-37)
Monochrome
supply
Color supply
Monochrome/
Color supply
Mechanical
parts
200
K
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
(P/G No.: [23]-42)
(P/G No.: [23]-26, [23]-15)
✕
13
4,10
13
1,6,7,8
2,9
5,11
13
3,10
12
MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 6
D. Transfer section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shift the position.
No.
Part name
1
Intermediate
transfer belt
Primary transfer
roller
Intermediate
transfer blade
Belt drive gear
Primary transfer
conduction collar
Transfer drive roller
Transfer follower
roller
Tension roller
Belt CL brush
Y auxiliary roller
Resist backup roller
Secondary transfer
belt
Secondary transfer
roller
Secondary belt
drive roller
Secondary belt
tension roller
Secondary belt
follower roller
Secondary transfer
idle gear
Sensors (Process
control resist
sensors)
Primary CL roller
Cleaner seal
Cleaner seal R
Transfer toner
reception seal
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Mechanical
parts
Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement parts are
described.)
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
(P/G No.: [26]-3)
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
(P/G No.: [27]-9)
(P/G No.: [28]-27)
(P/G No.: [25]-19)
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
{
✕
▲
{
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
{
✕
▲
{
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
{
✕
▲
{
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
{
✕
▲
(P/G No.: [30]-21)
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
(P/G No.: [30]-6)
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
(P/G No.: [27]-13)
(P/G No.: [27]-8)
(P/G No.: [28]-25)
(P/G No.: [29]-6)
(P/G No.: [26]-56)
1
19
20
3
8
10
7
4
21
17
5
19
11
2
12
9
14
6
13
15
16
9 11
8
18
3
14
15
13,17
16
7
10
4,6
2,5
MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 7
E. Fusing section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shift the position.
No.
Part name
1
2
3
Upper heat roller
Lower heat roller
Upper heat roller
gear
Upper roller bearing
Lower roller bearing
Upper separation
pawl
Upper thermistor
Lower thermistor
Non-contact
thermistor
Gears
Paper guides
Fusing unit
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Mechanical
parts
Remark/Refer to the Parts
Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement parts are
described.)
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
(P/G No.: [32]-32)
(P/G No.: [33]-15)
(P/G No.: [32]-30)
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
(P/G No.: [32]-31)
(P/G No.: [33]-14)
(P/G No.: [32]-11)
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
(P/G No.: [32]-18)
(P/G No.: [33]-20)
✕
{
✕
✩
{
✕
✩
{
▲
✩
{
✕
✩
{
▲
✩
{
✕
✩
{
▲
✩
{
✕
✩
{
▲
✩
{
✕
✩
{
▲
✩
{
✕
✩
{
▲
Specified position
(P/G No.: [31]-901)
(P/G No.: [32]-901)
(P/G No.: [33]-901)
1
12
6
1
9
6
2
2
7
8
3
4
9
5
7
11
4
11
8
5
11
MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 8
F. Optical section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shift the position.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Part name
Mirror/Lens/
Reflector/CCD
Table glass/
SPF glass
Scanner lamp
Rails
Drive belt/
Drive wire
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement parts are
described.)
Specified positions
4
2
4
4
2
1
1
4
5
3
5
1
MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 9
G. Filters
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shift the position.
No.
1
Part name
Ozone filter PA
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement parts are
described.)
(P/G No.: [47]-40)
1
MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 10
H. Paper feed section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shift the position.
No.
Part name
1
2
3
4
Pickup roller
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
Torque limiter
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
✕
Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement parts are
described.)
(P/G No.: [11]-40, [16]-33)
(P/G No.: [11]-41, [16]-29)
(P/G No.: [10]-4, [15]-37)
4
2
3
1
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 11
1 : Dec. 15 2005
I. Transport section/Paper exit reverse section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shift the position.
1
No.
Part name
1
2
3
4
5
PS follower roller
Transport rollers
Discharge brush
Paper exit filter
Gears
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
✕
{
✕
{
{
✕
{
{
✕
{
{
✕
{
{
✕
{
{
✕
{
{
✕
{
{
✕
{
{
✕
{
{
✕
{
{
✕
{
{
✕
{
{
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
Remark/Refer to the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement parts are
described.)
When checking, apply to the
necessary positions (specified
positions).
4
1
4
2
3
3
2
3
1
2
2
MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 12
J. Drive section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shift the position.
No.
Part name
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
1
Gears (Grease)
2
Shaft earth sections
(Conduction grease)
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
3
Belts
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
Remark/Refer to the Parts
Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement
parts are described.)
HANARL FL955R/FLOIL
G313S
When checking, apply to
the necessary positions
(specified positions).
When checking, apply to
the necessary positions
(specified positions).
1
(FLOIL G313S)
1
(HANARL FL955R)
2
3
MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 13
3. Other related items
e. Developer cartridge system counters
A. Maintenance timing display
The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when
each counter reaches the set value. The relationship between the
messages and the counters is shown blow.
(1)
(Maintenance timing) (Frameless)
Code
Content
VK
The developer print counter (K) reaches
100,000 sheets, or the accumulated number of
rotations of the developer (K) reaches 715K.
The developer print counter (C) reaches
60,000 sheets, or the accumulated number of
rotations of the developer (C) reaches 715K.
The developer print counter (M) reaches
60,000 sheets, or the accumulated number of
rotations of the developer (M) reaches 715K.
The developer print counter (Y) reaches
60,000 sheets, or the accumulated number of
rotations of the developer (Y) reaches 715K.
VC
a. Maintenance counters
VM
Code
Content
TA
The maintenance counters (total) reaches 90%
of the set value of SIM21-1, or they reaches
the set value of SIM21-1 but SIM26-38 is set to
Print Enable.
The maintenance counters (color) reaches
90% of the set value of SIM21-1, or they
reaches the set value of SIM21-1 but SIM2638 is set to Print Enable.
The maintenance counters (both of total and
color) reaches 90% of the set value of SIM211, or they reaches the set value of SIM21-1 but
SIM26-38 is set to Print Enable.
CA
AA
Print job
Enable/Disable
Enable
Enable
Enable
VY
(2)
The primary transfer unit print counter reaches
100,000 sheets.
The secondary transfer unit print counter
reaches 300,000 sheets.
TK2
Print job
Enable/Disable
Enable
Code
Content
TA
The maintenance counters (total) reaches the
set value of SIM21-1, and SIM26-38 is set to
Print Disable.
The maintenance counters (color) reaches the
set value of SIM21-1, and SIM26-38 is set to
Print Disable.
The maintenance counters (both of total and
color) reaches the set value of SIM21-1, and
SIM26-38 is set to Print Disable.
AA
Enable
• After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Primary
and secondary transfer unit counters (number of the transfer unit
print counter, accumulated traveling distance of the transfer unit,
days of use of the transfer unit) clear).
c. Fusing unit counter
Content
FK1
The funsing unit print counter reaches 200,000
sheets.
Print job
Enable/Disable
Enable
(3)
Code
Content
Waste toner full
DK
The drum cartridge print counter (K) reaches
100,000 sheets, or the accumulated number of
rotations of the drum (K) reaches 715K.
The drum cartridge print counter (C) reaches
60,000 sheets, or the accumulated number of
rotations of the drum (C) reaches 715K.
The drum cartridge print counter (M) reaches
60,000 sheets, or the accumulated number of
rotations of the drum (M) reaches 715K.
The drum cartridge print counter (Y) reaches
60,000 sheets, or the accumulated number of
rotations of the drum (Y) reaches 715K.
DC
DM
DY
Disable
Print job
Enable/Disable
Disable
• After detection of the waste toner full, reset the full detection by
opening/close of the front door.
d. Drum cartridge system counters
Content
Disable
[Check the waste toner box.] (Framed)
• After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Fusing
unit counters (number of the fusing unit print counter, days of use
of the fusing unit) clear).
Code
Print job
Enable/Disable
Disable
• After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Maintenance counters (total, color) clear).
—
Code
Enable
[Maintenance timing] (Framed)
CA
TK1
Enable
• After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-5 (Developer counters (number of the developer print counter, accumulated traveling distance of the developer) clear).
b. Transfer unit system counters
Content
Enable
a. Maintenance counters
• After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Maintenance counters (total, color) clear).
Code
Print job
Enable/Disable
Enable
Print job
Enable/Disable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
• After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-7 (Drum
counters (number of the drum print counter, accumulated traveling distance of the drum) clear).
MX-2300/2700 N/G MAINTENANCE 9 – 14
1 : Dec. 15 2005
C.
UpdateManual
procedures and kinds of firmware
Service
[10] ROM VERSION-UP
MX2700N
There are following methods of downloading of the firmware.
1 1)
1. General
Firmware download using USB
2)
Firmware download using media
3)
Firmware download using FTP
ROM version-up is required in the following cases:
4)
Firmware download using Web page
1)
When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance.
• Firmware types
2)
When installing a new spare ROM to the machine for repair.
3)
When installing a new spare PWB unit with ROM installed to it.
4)
When there is a trouble in the programs in ROM and it must be
repaired.
A. Cases where version-up is required
Machine
Flash ROM
ALL
ICU(BOOT)
B. Notes for version-up
(1)
Relationship between each ROM and version-up
Before execution of ROM version-up, check combinations with
ROMís installed in the other PWBís including options.
Some combinations of versions may cause malfunctions of the
machine.
Option
ICU(MAIN)
IMG-ASIC
SCU
PCU
FAX1
FAX2
1K FINISHER
INNER FINISHER
LCC A4
DESK
Contents
Includes all contents shown below.
ANIME
BOOTSUB
CONFIG
ESCP FONT
GRPH
LANG
SPDL
XIO FONT
PROFILE
MAIN
IMG DATA ROM
SCU(MAIN)
PCU(MAIN)
FAX1(MAIN)
FAX2(MAIN)
FINISHER_1K(MAIN)
FINISHER_INNER(MAIN)
LCC_A4(MAIN)
DESK(MAIN)
NOTE: If the MFPcnt PWB DIP SW No. 2 is not set to ON, an error
occurs.
2. Version-up procedure
A. Firmware download using USB
Firmware.sfu
Controller
USB Cable
1
First you must install a USB print driver from the setup.exe
program in the MX-2300/2700 CD-ROM Disc 1
Create a folder on the root drive (usually C:\) of the PC. Name
the folder Pastel. Download the firmware (xxxx.sfu) and the
file2PRN program (File2PRN.exe) and place these files into the
pastel folder.
• Click on the firmware icon and drag it onto the File2PRN icon
• The Imager will automatically enter simulation 49-99.
• If you open the print queue on the PC, you can see the firmware
loading for a few minutes.
• When the firmware finishes loading from the print queue, the
Imager display in simulation 49-99 shows the following:
"S ***
E"
CAUTION DO NOT POWER OFF THE MFP! FIRMWARE
UPDATE IN PROGESS!"
USB Slave
Note: If the Imager locks up or loses power during the
upgrade, it could corrupt the firmware, preventing the imager
from booting up normally.
If this occurs, you can "rescue" the firmware using the following procedure:
• Rename the firmware file in the pastel folder to emupdate.sfu
• Click on the emupdate.sfu icon and drag it onto the
File2PRN icon.
• The Imager will automatically enter simulation 49-99.
• If you open the print queue on the PC, you can see the firmware loading for a few minutes.
• When the firmware finishes loading from the print queue,
the Imager display in simulation 49-99 shows the following:
"S ***
E"
• At the completion of the upgrade, the Imager will reboot automatically.
CAUTION DO NOT POWER OFF THE MFP! FIRMWARE
UPDATE IN PROGESS!"
• Go to Simulation 22-05 and confirm the firmware has
upgraded successfully.
• At the completion of the upgrade, the Imager will reboot
automatically.
• Go to Simulation 22-05 and confirm the firmware has
upgraded successfully.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ROM VERSION-UP 10 – 1
1 : Dec. 15 2005
1
B. Firmware download using USB device
Media
Adapter
Firmware.
Firmware.
+
USB Host
The machine recognizes the
Firmware.
USB Memory
media and automatically executes
processing.
Firmware.sfu
(1)
Firmware update from USB memory device
4)
1 First you must install the firmware file (xxx.sfu) to the root of a
USB jump drive.
Select the button of the firmware to be updated. The button will
be highlighted. (In this screen, [ICU(MAIN)] and [LANGUAGE]
are selected.) At the same time, [EXECUTE] button appears.
* Press the selected button again to release the selection.
• If the firmware is in a folder, Simulation 49-01 cannot open
the folder.
* Press [ALL] button to select all items.
• Secure Jumpdrive will not work.
• Must have a minimum of 32MB of storage capacity to load
the firmware onto it.
1)
Insert the USB memory device into the main unit.
2)
Enter the 49-01 screen. Press the button of the file to be
updated. The screen transfers to the update screen.
1
0
FIRMWARE
(In this screen, [FILE 1] is selected)
* The number of button changes depending on the number of
the file in the USB memory device inserted.
5)
0
FIRMWARE
UPDATE
FILE1
FILE2
FILE3
FILE4
S
E
NOW 01.00.00
: CURRENT
01.00.00
NEXT TO
01.01.00
UPDATED
01.01.00
ICU(BOOT)
NOW 01.00.00
: CURRENT
01.00.00
NEXT TO
01.01.00
UPDATED
01.01.00
LANGUAGE
01.00.00
NOW 09.00.00
: CURRENT
UPDATED
01.01.00
NEXT TO
01.00.00
GRAPHIC
01.00.00
NOW 01.01.00
: CURRENT
ARE
YOU
SURE?
UPDATED
01.01.00
NEXT TO
09.00.00
NO
YES
EXECUTE
1
0
Current version number and the version number to be updated
will be shown for each firmware respectively.
Following key-codes will be changed;
NOW → CURRENT
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.49-01
FIRMWARE
1/1
1/5
Press [EXECUTE] button. “ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO]”
becomes clear. If no button is selected, [EXECUTE] button is
gray out and cannot be pressed. Press [YES] to start the
update.
TEST
3)
UPDATE
ICU(MAIN)
ALL
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.49-01
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.49-01
TEST
S∗∗∗∗∗∗∗
UPDATE
E
ICU(MAIN)
NOW
01.00.00
NEXT
01.01.00
ICU(BOOT)
NOW
01.00.00
NEXT
01.01.00
LANGUAGE
NOW
09.00.00
NEXT
01.00.00
GRAPHIC
NOW
01.01.00
NEXT
09.00.00
ARE
ALL
YOU SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/5
NEXT → UPDATED TO
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMLATION NO. 49-01
1 6)
At the completion of the upgrade, the display will change to:
"COMPLETE: PLEASE TOUCH [OK] TO FINISH" Press OK.
The Imager will reboot at this time.
FIRMWARE UPDATE
:
CURRENT 01.00.00
UPDATED TO 01.01.00
ICU(BOOT)
:
CURRENT 01.00.00
UPDATED TO 01.01.00
:
CURRENT
01.00.00
E
UPDATED TO 01.01.00
LANGUAGE
CURRENT 01.00.00
0
UPDATED TO 01.01.00
ICU(MAIN)
GRAPHIC
ALL
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.49-01
FIRMWARE
UPDATE
COMPLETE : PLEASE
POWER
OFF/ON
PLEASE TURN
MAIN
POWER OFF THEN ON
:
ARE YOU SURE?
EXECUTE
1/1
MX-2300/2700 N/G ROM VERSION-UP 10 – 2
CLOSE
1 : Dec. 15 2005
1
7)
Go to Simulation 22-05 and confirm the firmware has
upgraded successfully.
Note: If the Imager locks up or loses power during the
upgrade, it could corrupt the firmware, preventing the
imager from booting up normally. If this occurs, you can
"rescue" the firmware using the following procedure:
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.49-01
FIRMWARE
UPDATE
ERROR : PLEASE
OFF/ON
PLEASE POWER
TURN MAIN
POWER OFF THEN ON
ICUM,PCU,SCU
• Rename the firmware file on the USB device to emupdate.sfu
• Power off the imager (both switches) and insert the USB
device (Jumpdrive) into the USB port of the imager.
• Power on the imager
• The Imager will boot up into emergency update mode.
When finished, the display will read "update completed"
• Power off the imager, and remove the USB device
• Reboot the imager, and go simulation 22-05 to confirm
firmware has upgraded successfully.
C. Firmware download using FTP
Machine 3
Machine 1
10.36.112.83
10.36.112.84
Firmware.sfu
Machine 2
Machine 4
FTP/HTTP
Server
10.36.101.52
10.36.112.83
FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension “.sfu”) from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identifier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.
D. Firmware download using the Web page
A Web browser (service technician’s Web page) is used to update the firmware.
Update procedure
1
1)
Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A special firmware upgrade page appears.
2)
Click the “Update of Firmware” button in the Web page. Click the “Browse” button and select the firmware for the update.
MX-2700N
MX-2300/2700 N/G ROM VERSION-UP 10 – 3
3)
After selecting the file, click the “Submit” button to send the firmware to the Renaissance machine.
Update processing begins. While processing takes place, “Firmware Update, now processing...” appears.
4)
When the firmware update is finished, “Firmware Update completed. Please reboot the MFP.” appears. Pressing the [Reboot] key, the
machine will restart to complete the update. The browser will shift to the following screen.
5)
Update is completed with the above procedures.
“Close the browser and open again to display latest information.” will be displayed.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ROM VERSION-UP 10 – 4
POFM_R
OSM
FUM
TFD2
HPOS
POM
HL3_U
TH3_FU
TFD3
APPD2
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 1
MTOP2
TH/HUD_M
MPGS
MPFS
MTOP1
MPFD
PCSS
REGS_R
MPUC
MPLD1
RD I/F
PWB
PCS
REGS_F
MPED
MPWD
MANUAL PAPER FEED UNIT
DSW_ADU
POD3
APPD1
RRM
1TURC
DVCRUM_K
DRIVER MAIN
PWB
PFM
CPFC
CPUC1
CLUM1
CPFM
CPUC2
CLUM2
PAPER FEED DRIVE UNIT
DSW_R
DVTYP_K
TCS_K
DV_K UNIT
DL_K
DHPD_K
DM_K
TNM_K
MC
PNC
TONER_K UNIT
1TNFD
PROCESS DRIVE UNIT
1TUD_CL
REGIST SENSOR UNIT
ADUM_L
2TC
1TUD_K
WTNM
1TC
DSW_C
CSPD1
CPED1
CLUD1
CPFD1
PAPER FEED 1
UNIT
CSS1
DVTYP_C
TCS_C
DV_C UNIT
DL_C
DVM_K
TNM_C
DVCRUM_C
TONER_C UNIT
CSPD2
CPED2
CLUD2
CPFD2
PAPER FEED 2
UNIT
CSS2
OZFM
DVTYP_M
TCS_M
DV_M UNIT
DL_M
DHPD_CL
DM_CL
TNM_M
DVCRUM_M
TONER_M UNIT
AC IN
HL
PWB
DVTYP_Y
TCS_Y
DV_Y UNIT
DL_Y
DVM_CL
TNM_Y
DVCRUM_Y
MSW
PSFM
TONER_Y UNIT
AC
PWB
DCPS
PCU
PWB
DRIVER SUB
PWB
DHSW
OPTION
WH
PWB
MFPC
PWB
HDD
DH1
HDDFM
LCC
DH_LCC
FAX 2
OPTION
MHPS
CCD
PWB
CL INVERTER
PWB
CL
CARD
READER
OPTION
SCANNER UNIT
COINVENDER
DH_DESK
Standards : Only Japan
DESK
OPTION
MOTHER
PWB
SCN IN
PWB
DOCC
PWB
OPTION
If DOCC PWB is
used,replace it with
SCN IN PWB.
FAX 1
OPTION
There is a standards
setting model
Only Japan
SPRM
SPFM
SGS
LSUSS
CPUFM
FIN INNER
SCNC
PWB
RSPF
PWB
SPPD5
SPPD4
STMPS
OPTION
FIN 1K
OCSW
MIM
ORS_LED
PNC
SRRC
SPED
SCOV
SOCD
LSU CNT
PWB
LSU UNIT
DHS1
LVDS
PWB
OPE
PWB
PGM
LD_Y
PWB
LD_M
PWB
LD_C
PWB
LD_K
PWB
POWER SW
PWB
INVERTER
PWB
OPERATION UNIT
SPFC
SPPD3
SPPD2
SPPD1
OPTION
AUDITOR
OPTION
SPWS
SPLS2
SPLS1
BD_K
PWB
TH1_LSU
ORS_PD
LCD
TOUCH
PANEL
[11] ELECTRICAL SECTION
RIGHT DOOR UNIT
PPD2
PPD1
HL2_L
TH2_FU
PS UNIT
HL1_U
TH1_FU
FUSER UNIT
POFM_F
POD2
POD1
DELIVERY UNIT
DSW_F
OPTION
RSPF UNIT
MX2700N
Service Manual
1. Block diagram
A. System block diagram
B. MFP controller PWB
I2C(Ch.0)
ATA
connector
IDE bus
IDE
ASIC
DDR bus 2
SYSAD bus
32bits width
DDR bus 1
64bits width
SYSTEM
ASIC
VIDEOIF
SCAN OUT IF
LSU IF
ICU
ASIC
SCAN IN IF
Patch
I2C(Ch.0)
USB
DEV
USB
HOST
LOCAL bus
(LSI bus)
I2C
PCU
SCN
FAX 1st
UART
FLASH
IF
ASIC
USB-H
IMG-A Bus
(Auto Color)
FLASH IF
IO
EXPAND
USB-D
EEPROM
2Kbits
Control
signals
OPE IF
FAX
2nd
UART
SDR
SDR
SDRAM
SRAM
Ether
MAC
MicroWire
LOCAL bus
(ROM bus)
RTC
72pinDIMM Socket
EEPROM
2Kbits
RIC
(RS232C)
IMG
ASIC
244/
245
Expansion
PCI connector
LAN
ICU-IMG IF
I2C (Ch.1)
VBUS
SW
LAN
JACK
EFI connector
PCI bus 1
Piano
SW
IMG-B Bus
(Image process)
IMG-C Bus
(Image process)
574
X5
EEPROM
256Kbits
LVDS
PCI bus 2
LVDSIC
385/386/047/048
SO-DIMM
DIMM2
SO-DIMM
DIMM1
DDR bus 3
64bits width
ENGINE IF
connector
UART
for Debug
SO-DIMM
DIMM3
SO-DIMM
DIMM4
DDR
SDRAMx2
CPU
RM7065C
RM7965
72pinDIMM Socket
FLASH
Mem.x2
RS232C
Transceiver
UART
72pinDIMM Socket
100pinDIMM Socket
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 2
Battery
X1
Xtal
19.6608MHz
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 3
UART
UART
To
MFPC
Via
Mother
To
LSU
Via
Mother
UART
UART
UART
LCC
FINISHER
DESK
Optional
FW
DC Power
Supply
IC2
Spread
Spectrum
IC4
RESETIC
IC1
CPU
H8S/2373
Load Control Output
Coin vendor
(Optional)
IC7
DFF
LCX574
IC73
Analog
MUX
RD I/F PWB
Analog Input
HL control
HL_UM/LM/US
Fuser Thermistor (TH_UM/LM/US)
Toner Detector (TCS_K/C/M/Y)
Process Cont. sensor (PCS_K/CL)
Resist sensor (REGS_F/R)
AnalogInput
DSW_ADU/ TFD3 /
MPLD/ MTOP1/MTOP2/ MPED
Sensor Input
THOPEN_UM/LM/US
Fuser Thermistor open detect
FAN_LD1-2 / DVMC_LD / DVMB_LD /
PFM_LD / FUM_LD
Motor Lock Detect
CSS1 / CPED2 / CSS2 / CPED1
MPFD /MPED /CPWD11-12
TFD2/ 1TNFD / WENDD / WINID
Sensor Input
CRUM
CRUM_K/C/M/Y
HV
MC / TC un
Fuser unit
Temp/Hum sensor (TH_M/HUD_M)
LSU Thermistor (TH1_LSU)
DV detector (DVTYP_C/M/Y/K)
Multi-bypass tray width sensor (MPWD)
Sensor Input
PPD2
MUX
HC151
I2C Bus
IC9
PMC ASIC
IC71
D/A Conv
(TCS/REGS cont)
IC8
I/O ASIC
IC5
SRAM
(1Mbit)
FLASH ROM
(16Mbit)
Flash Write Protect
IC27/IC30/IC31/IC37
MUX
HC151x5
CLOCK
DATABus[15:0]
AddressBus[20:0]
I2C Bus
IC6
EEPROM
(64kbit)
3-wired serial
PWM
Stepping Motor Control
MUX
HC151
Lift Up Motor
(CLUM1/CLUM2)
DC Motor
Toner Motor
(TNM_K/C/M/Y)
Waste Toner Motor(WTNM)
Syncronous Motor
DVSET (K/C/M/Y)
DRDET (K/C/M/Y)
Sensor Input
CPFD1 / CPFD2/ HPOS / PPD1 /
DHPD_CL/DHPD_K /
POD3 / POD2
DSW_F /DSW_R /DSW_C/
CLUD1 /CLUD2 /
CSPD1 / CSPD2/
1TUD_K /1TUD_CL
Sensor Input
MPGS /CPUC1 / CPUC2 /
PCSS / CPFC / LSUSS1
/LSUSS2 (Optional) /
MPUC / MPFS / 1TURC
PNC_K /
PNC_CL
Load output
Mechanical
Counter
(Optional)
Sensor Input
COIN VENDOR
(Optional)
CV_CLCOPY /
CV_COPY
Drum Lamp
(DL_K/C/M/Y)
PS FAN (PSFM) /
Ozone FAN (OZFM) /
Pout FAN
(POFM_F/POFM_R)
FAN Motor Control
Load control Output
CSS11-14 / CSS21-24
POD1
APPD1 / APPD2
Sensor Input
Pout Motor (POM) / ADU Motor (ADML) /
Shifter Motor (OSM)/
Resist Motor (RRM) / PSF Motor (PFM)
Drum Motor BK(DM_K)/
Drum Motor CL(DM_CL)
Fuser Motor(FUM)
DC Motor Control
DV Motor BK (DVM_K)/
DV Motor CL (DVM_CL)
Paper Feed Motor (CPFM)
C. PCU PWB
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 4
RSPF Unit
RSPF FEED
MOTOR
MHPS
LAMP UN
SCANNER
MOTOR
PANEL PCB
INVERTER PCB
LCD
LVDS
PHOTO
SENSOR
LVDS Receiver
30bit
LVDS Driver
4bit *2
SCNcntPWB
LVDS
RSPF RVS
MOTOR
LVDS Receiver
4bit *2
LVDS Driver
30bit
With AFE&LVDS
CCD PCB
RGB10bit*3
CPU
H8S/2373
ADDRESS/DATA BUS
CLUTCH
STMP UN
XTAL
19.6608MHz
SRAM
1Mbit
/CS2
SCAN ASIC
/CS3
SDRAM BUS
SDRAM
128Mbit
EEPROM
32Kbit
I2C
FlashROM
8Mbit
/CS0
(/CS0 RESERVE)
RGB8bit*3
XTAL
28.795MHz
or 22.7425MHz
IO ASIC
/CS5
LVDS
RGB8bit*3
CPT ASIC
/CS4
LVDS Driver
28bit
LVDS
Original detection
(Light emitting)
Original detection
(Light receiving)
OCSW
AUDITOR
CARD READER
(MFP PCB)
Mother PCB
(DOCC PCB)
(Option)
SCN IN PCB
D. Scanner control PWB
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 5
A[4:0]
I/O ASIC
µPD65892GC103
DSR_LCC
DTR_LCC
RxD_LCC
TxD_LCC
DSR_DSK
DTR_DSK
RxD_DSK
TxD_DSK
DSR_FIN
DTR_FIN
RxD_FIN
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
PCU
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
P.D. Schmit Inv.
Schmit Inv.
P.D. Schmit Inv.
P.D.
Schmit Inv.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
Schmit Inv.
Schmit Inv.
Schmit Inv.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.D.
LSU ASIC
PIC
CPU
H8/3687
CPU
H8/3684
FAX
(Option)
I/O
I/O
TxD
RxD
I/O
I/O
TxD
RxD
I/O
CPU
I/O M30843FWGP
TxD
RxD
SCK
TxD
RxD
RxD
TxD
CPU
SH7706
LCC
(Optional)
DESK
(Optional)
FINISHER
(Optional)
LSU
O.C
SCN Cnt
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
CPU
H8S/2373
Schmit Inv. O.C.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
New
ASIC
P.D.
P.D.
O.C
Schmit Inv.
O.C
Schmit Inv.
RxD_FAX(CS)+
RxD_FAX(CS)-
TxD_FAX(CS)+
TxD_FAX(CS)-
RxD_FAX(D)+
RxD_FAX(D)-
TxD_FAX(D)+
TxD_FAX(D)-
P.U.
P.U.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
DSR_SCAN
D[15:8]
O.C
Schmit Inv.
P.U.
Mother
PIC
I/O ASIC
µPD65892GC
P.D.
CPU
H8S/2320
A[4:0]
DTR_SCAN
TxD
RxD
TxD
RxD
DSPF Cnt (for C-Jupiter)
CPU
H8S/2373
Schmit Inv.
TxD
RxD4
TxD4
RxD3
TxD3
RxD2
TxD_FIN
SCK_LSU
RSV_DAT
TRANS_DAT
PCU_DTR
PCU_DSR
nPCU_TxD
O.C.
I/O
D[15:8]
CPU
H8S/2373
TxD2
SCK1
RxD1
TxD1
I/O port
I/O port
RxD0
O.C.
TxD_SCAN
P.D.
RxD_SCAN
nPCU_RxD
P.D.
Schmit Inv.
P.D.
TxD0
TxD
P.U
RxD
P.D.
TxD
P.U.
RxD
P.U.
I/O
P.U
RxD
P.D.
DOCC
(Optional)
O.C
O.C
O.C
P.U.
LVDS
P.U.
P.U.
O.C
Schmit Inv.
P.D.
Schmit Inv.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
DSR_FAX(CS)
P.D.
DTR_FAX(CS)
DSR_FAX(D)
P.D.
DTR_FAX(D)
RxD_FAX(CS)
REQ_PIC
CLR_PIC
nRxD_PIC
nTxD_PIC
CTS_SCN
RTS_SCN
nRxD_SCN
nTxD_SCN
TxD_FAX(CS)
RxD_FAX(D)
TxD_FAX(D)
MFPC
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
P.D.
P.D.
P.D.
P.D.
P.D.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
CTS[4]
RTS[4]
CTS[3]
RTS[3]
RxD[4]
TxD[4]
RxD[3]
TxD[3]
MFPC
I/F ASIC
REQ[PIC]
CLR[PIC]
RxD[PIC]
TxD[PIC]
CTS[2]
RTS[2]
RxD[2]
TxD[2]
RTS[1]
CTS[1]
TxD[1]
RxD[1]
E. Serial communication
WH-SW
AC IN
24V2
GND
WH-L
WH-N
N
L
15A 250V
F1
VR1
A1
no-mounting
RY1
NO
NC
WH PWB
WARM HEATER SET
A1
no-mounting
VR3
OPTION
A2
5W
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 6
LCC
10W
DESK
10W
MAIN
UNIT
10W
SCN
LCC
OPTION
DESK
OPTION
MAIN UNIT
VR2
nomounting
SCN unit
OPTION
WH-L
T2.0AH/250V
F3
WH-N
MAIN POWER SW
HL PWB
FUSING UNIT
L2
L1
G
TD1
HL MAIN
T2
T1
option
6
4
SSR1
2 GND
1
HLOUT_UM
12A/125V
F101
TD2
G
HL LOW
T2
T1
N/F
~
6
4
2 GND
1
FW
Generating
Circuit
drawer
SSR2
/HL_PR
INT24V1
Z101
F102
T1AH/250V
D101
~
AC PWB
+
-
DC POWER SUPPLY
F301
HLOUT_LM
G
SSR3
2 GND
1
HLOUT_US
RY1
150°C AC120V-15A/AC240V-10A
150°C AC120V-15A/AC240V-10A
THERMOSTAT
150°C AC120V-15A/AC240V-10A
THERMOSTAT
THERMOSTAT
6
4
Voltage
Generation
+24V1
+24V2
+24V3
+24V4
+24V5
+12V
+5Vn
+3.3V
Voltage
Generation
+ 5Vo
+ 5VL
TD3
HL SUB
T2
T1
T8AH/250V
F103
T5AH/250V
F. AC power line diagram (100V series)
WH-SW
AC IN
24V2
GND
WH-L
WH-N
N
L
T10AH/250V
F2
T10AH/250V
F1
VR1
A1
RY1
NO
NC
WH PWB
WARM HEATER SET
A1
no-mounting
VR3
OPTION
A2
5W
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 7
LCC
10W
DESK
10W
MAIN
UNIT
10W
SCN
F4
LCC
OPTION
DESK
OPTION
MAIN UNIT
VR2
WH-N
T2.0AH/250V
nomounting
SCN unit
OPTION
WH-L
F3
T2.0AH/250V
MAIN POWER SW
HL PWB
FUSING UNIT
L2
L1
G
TD1
HL MAIN
T2
T1
6
4
SSR1
2 GND
1
HLOUT_UM
T6.3AH/250V
F101
G
TD2
HL LOW
T2
T1
N/F
~
6
4
2 GND
1
FW
Generating
Circuit
drawer
SSR2
/HL_PR
INT24V1
Z101
F102
T1AH/250V
D101
~
no-mounting
+
-
AC PWB
DC POWER SUPPLY
HLOUT_LM
G
TD3
HL SUB
T2
T1
T5AH/250V
F103
SSR3
2 GND
1
HLOUT_US
RY1
150°C AC120V-15A/AC240V-10A
150°C AC120V-15A.AC240V-10A
THERMOSTAT
150°C AC120V-15A/AC240V-10A
THERMOSTAT
THERMOSTAT
6
4
Voltage
Generation
+24V1
+24V2
+24V3
+24V4
+24V5
+12V
+5Vn
+3.3V
F301
Voltage
Generation
T3.15AH/250V + 5Vo
+ 5VL
G. AC power line diagram (200V series)
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 8
FUSE
FUSE
PSU
FUSE
F204
FUSE
F205
FUSE
F202
F203
F201
24V4
P-GND
5VN
D-GND
24V5
P-GND
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
5VL
5VL
5VO
D-GND
12V
24V3
P-GND
24V2
24V3
P-GND
P-GND
FW
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
D-GND
12V
24V1
D-GND
D-GND
MFPC PWB
12V
5VL
5VO
3.3V
D-GND
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
5VL
5VL
5VO
D-GND
12V
24V3
P-GND
5V_LD
24V2
P-GND
INT24V1
/INT_CNT
INT24V2
24V2
24V2
INT24V2
/INT_CNT
INT24V1
P-GND
D-GND
5V_LD
24V3
P-GND
P-GND
FW
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
D-GND
12V
24V1
5VN
MOTHER PWB
FET
12V
5VN
D-GND
D-GND
24V4
P-GND
5VN
D-GND
D-GND
LCC
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
LD_C
LD_Y
option
24V4
P-GND
5VN
D-GND
D-GND
DESK
D-GND
INT24V1
SCAN IN PWB or
DOCUMENT CONTROL PWB
LD_M
INT24V1
FUM
P-GND
INT24V2
P-GND
INT24V2
RD I/F PWB
LSUSS_C
option
LSUSS_B
1stTC PWB
DVM_BK
5VN
5VNPD
D-GND
PSM
DM_CL
ADULM
2ndTC PWB
D-GND
PFM
POM
5VO
PM
LD_BK
MC PWB
DVM_CL
PSFM
INT24V1
P-GND
INT24V2
DRIVER MAIN PWB
DRIVER SUB PWB
DM_BK
5VO
FINISHER
24V3
P-GND
D-GND
5V_LD
P-GND
INT24V2
5VNPD
P-GND
5VN
INT24V1
INT24V2
P-GND
VN
P-GND
INT24V1
24V3
P-GND
12V
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
LSU
PWB
TEL
LIU
PWB
5
INT24V1
24V3
P-GND
12V
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
24V3
P-GND
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
D-GND
12V
3.3V
5VS
5V
D-GND
A-GND
5V_LD
24V5
P-GND
5VN
D-GND
FAX
MAIN
PWB
FDSW
RDSW
OSM
INT24V2
24V3
P-GND
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
D-GND
HDD
12V
P-GND
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
INT24V1
P-GND
INT24V2
D-GND
5V_LD
AC PWB
PCU PWB
24V1
24V2
5VNPD
5VN
INT24V1
P-GND
SCAN CNT
PWB
INT24V1
5VN
5VO
3.3V
D-GND
5V
D-GND
24V_EXT
P-GND
5V_EXT
AVCC
5VPD
D-GND
24V1
24V
P-GND
A12V
A5V
A3.3V
D-GND
KEY OP
PWB
ORS PD
PWB
option
CARD READER
ORS LED
PWB
CL
INVERTOR
PWB
CCD PWB
5VN
D-GND
N_HL(SUB)
N_HL(LOW)
N_HL(MAIN)
HL PWB
HL_PR
L
24V_EXT
P-GND
3.3V_EXT
D-GND
24V_EXT
P-GND
5V_EXT
AVCC
5VPD
D-GND
CL
LVDS
PWB
HL(MAIN)
option
RSPF UN
24V
P-GND
3.3V
D-GND
HL(LOW)
INVERTOR
PWB
LCD PWB
HL(SUB)
H. DC power line diagram
1
WH-L
WH-N
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 9
1
3
2
4
1
5
B4P(5-3)-VH
CN4
WH-N(DESK2)
WH-L(DESK2)
WH-N(LCC)
WH-L(LCC)
CN3
WH-N(DESK1)
1
WH-L(DESK1)
3
B2P3-VH
B2P3VH-BL
CN2
WH-N(SCAN)
WH-L(SCAN)
WH PWB
B2P3-VH-R
CN1
1
3
CN5
D-GND
1
24V2
3
B03B-PH-K-R
PS-187
1
L_WH
)
B03P-VL
CN1
1
3
PS-187
L_WH
(AC-WH harness
HL PWB
L_HL
N_HL
(AC-HL harness)
(AC CORD)
To P15
2
1
2
1
2
1
JPN:STANDARD
EX100V:OPTION
EX120V:OPTION
EX200V:OPTION
WH
WH-N(SCAN)
WH-L(SCAN)
2
1
WH-N(SCAN)
WH-L(SCAN)
WH-N(SCAN)
WH-L(SCAN)
SCANNER UNIT
(AC-WH harness
2
1
2
1
)
CN10(B4P-PH-K-S)
24V2
1
D-GND
4
CN4(B3P4-VH-R)
L_DC
1
N_DC
4
CN5(B03P-VL-E)
1
L_HL
3
N_HL
CN2(B03P-VL-K)
MSW-Lout
1
NC
2
MSW-Nout
3
CN3(B03P-VL-R)
MSW-Lin
3
NC
2
MSW-Nin
1
AC PWB
CN6(B2P3-VH-R)
1
N_WH
3
L_WH
CN1(B03P-VL)
1
L_IN
2
NC
3
N_IN
1
MSW-Nin
JPN:OPTION
EX100V:OPTION
EX120V:OPTION
EX200V:OPTION
WH
JPN:OPTION
EX100V:OPTION
EX120V:OPTION
EX200V:OPTION
WH
(AC-DC harness)
1
1
MSW-Nout
MSW-Lin
1
(MSW harness)
MSW-Lout
MSW
CN1(B2P3-VH-B)
3
L_DC
1
N_DC
CN2(B5P-VH-B)
5VL
4
5VL
5
5VO
3
D-GND
1
D-GND
2
CN7(B8P-VH-B)
FW
1
P-GND
4
P-GND
3
P-GND
2
P-GND
5
P-GND
7
P-GND
8
P-GND
6
CN8(B7P-VH-B)
24V1
2
24V2
3
24V1
1
24V3
4
24V4
6
24V3
5
24V5
7
PSU FAN
PSU
CN5(B04P-VH-B)
12V
2
12V
1
CN4(B6P-VH-B)
D-GND
5
5VN
1
5VN
2
5VN
4
5VN
3
D-GND
6
CN3(B03P-VH-B)
3.3V
1
3.3V
2
D-GND
3
CN6(B03B-PASK-1)
DCCNT1
1
DCCNT2
3
TO INSERTOR (P16)
TO LCC(P15)
To P2
TO INSERTOR (P16)
TO LCC (P15)
TO LCC (P15)
TO LCC (P15)
TO INSERTOR (P16)
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
1
3
PSFM_V
2
2
PSCF_LD
3
1
P-GND
(DC main harness)
(DC main harness)
(DC main harness)
(Paper feed main harness)
To P2
NAME
5VL
5VO
5VN
24V1
24V2
24V3
24V4
24V5
MFP
FAX
OTHER
ENGINE
ENGINE
ENGINE
LCC,DESK
FINISHER
CN26
PSFM_V
28
PSCF_LD
30
P-GND
26
B32B-PHDSS-B
3.3V
5VNPD
D-GND
D-GND
5VN
12V
FW
P-GND
P-GND
24V1
24V2
24V3
PCU PWB
B12B-XL
CN3
11
10
8
6
9
7
12
4
2
1
3
5
MOTHER PWB
CN19(B10P-VH)
6
3.3V
2
D-GND
1
D-GND
7
5VN
8
12V
10
P-GND
9
24V3
3
5VL
4
5VL
5
5VO
CN20(B4P-PH-K-S)
3
n DCCNT1
4
n DCCNT2
2. Actual wiring chart
A. Power supply section (P1)
1
2
1
2
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 10
FRONT
PNC(BLACK)
24V3
/PNC
3
SL2PIN
WTNM_1
WTNM_2
CN8
24V2
B7P-VH-B
P
1
2
PSU
OPTION
1
2
(Waste toner motor)
TNM
1TNFD
D-GND
(Waste toner full detection)
1TNFD
DSW-F
DSW_R(24V)
DSW_F(24V)
DSW-R
24V1
DSW_R(24V)
CN1
1
2
R
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
(HL I/F harness PA)
(PRINTER MODEL ONLY)
/LED3
/LED2
/LED1
KEY6
KEY5
KEY4
KEY3
KEY2
KEY1
OP_SET
D-GND
5VN
5VN
LCDD7
LCDD6
LCDD5
LCDD4
LCDD3
LCDD2
LCDD1
LCDD0
LCD_E
/OP_RW
LCD_CS
PRINTER OP PWB
AC PWB
1
2
7
8
5
6
R
3
4
P
1
2
24V2
24V2
INT24V2
P-GND
INT24V1in
/INT_CNT
B7P-VH-B
CN8
NC(24V3)
NC(/PNC_C)
24V3
/PNC
WTNM_1
WTNM_2
SM18PIN
1TNFD
D-GND
EL2P
DSW_R(24V)
DSW_F(24V)
(Upper main harness PA)
(PRT OP FFC)
6
7
1
2
3
5
1
2
7
8
5
6
P
3
4
R
1
2
(DC main harness)
(Upper main harness PA)
WTNM_1
WTNM_2
1TNFD
D-GND
24V2
CN2
5
INT24V2
6
P-GND
INT24V1in
4
7
/INT_CNT
B7P-VH-B
B12B-XL
CN3
3
CN13
31
NC(24V3)
32
NC(/PNC_C)
B32B-PHDSS-B
16
24V3
/PNC
15
B30B-PHDSS-B
17
18
CN9
1
2
DSW_R(24V)
3
DSW_F(24V)
4
B7P-VH-B
CN4
1
24V1
2
DSW_R(24V)
/LED3
24
/LED2
23
/LED1
22
KEY6
21
20
KEY5
19
KEY4
KEY3
18
17
KEY2
16
KEY1
15
OP_SET
14
D-GND
13
5VN
12
5VN
11
LCDD7
10
LCDD6
9
LCDD5
8
LCDD4
7
LCDD3
6
LCDD2
5
LCDD1
4
LCDD0
3
LCD_E
2
/OP_RW
1
LCD_CS
T24FAZ-SMT
CN8
PCU PWB
B. Front section (P2)
RTH(LOW)
RTH(SUB)
RTH(MAIN)
HL LOW
HL SUB
HL MAIN
THERMOSTAT
2
1
4
3
2
3
1
(Harness between TS-HL LOW)
PHNR-2-H +
BU02P-TR-P-H
TH_LM_IN
D-GND
TH_US_IN
D-GND
PHNR-4-H +
BU04P-TR-P-H
PHNR-3-H +
BU03P-TR-P-H
TH_UMCS_IN
TH_UM_IN
D-GND
THERMOSTAT
(Harness between TS-HL SUB)
THERMOSTAT
(Harness between TS-HL MAIN)
1
2
1
2
2
1
3
(Fusing harness)
(Fusing harness)
(Fusing harness)
(Fusing harness)
(Fusing harness)
5
6
9
1
2
3
4
6
3
5
2
4
1
TH_LM_IN
D-GND
Drawer RWZ
TH_UMCS_IN
TH_UM_IN
D-GND
TH_US_IN
D-GND
L-HL(COM)
N-HL(LOW)
L-HL(COM)
N-HL(SUB)
L-HL(COM)
N-HL(MAIN)
5
4
1
9
8
7
6
6
3
5
2
4
1
(HL I/F harness)
(HL I/F harness)
4
3
2
1
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 11
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
TH_US_IN
TH_LM_IN
D-GND
TH_UMCS_IN
13
14
15
16
DF11-4DP-SP1(PASTEL)
SM18PIN
TH_UM_IN
R
12
CN4
INT24V1
D-GND
HLOUT_LM
HLOUT_US
HLOUT_UM
/HL_PR
B6P-PH-K-S
16
26
D-GND
B30B-PHDSS-B
TH_LM_IN
CN9
25
TH_UM_IN
30 TH_UMCS_IN
27
TH_US_IN
29
6
5
3
4
2
1
15
(Upper main harness)
HL PWB
14
13
P
12
CN3
1
L-HL(COM)
N-HL(SUB)
3
N-HL(LOW)
2
B03P-VL-R
CN2
1
N-HL(MAIN)
2
L-HL(COM)
3
L-HL(COM)
B03P-VL-K
PCU PWB
CN34
/HL_PR
5
7
HLOUT_UM
9
HLOUT_US
11
HLOUT_LM
D-GND
3
INT24V1
1
B40B-PADSS-B
(Upper main harness)
C. Fusing unit section (P3)
BS-M
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 12
1TC-CMY
1TC-K
MC-Y
MC-Y
1TUD_CL
D-GND
5VLED
1
2
3
(Transfer separation sensor CL)
1TUD_CL
(Primary transfer harness PA)
(MC harness)
1st TC PWB
MC PWB
2nd TC
PWB
CN1
1
2
4
3
5
6
CN1
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN2
3
7
6
5
4
2
1
CN1
7
6
4
3
2
1
5
B7P-PH-K-S
INT24V2
P-GND
1TC_YMC
1TC_K
MC_YMC
HV_REM
1TC_CL
B7P-PH-K-S
1TC_CL
HV_REM
MC_YMC
1TC_K
1TC_YMC
P-GND
INT24V2
B6P-PH-K-S
INT24V2
P-GND
/HV_DATA#
/HV_CLK#
/HV_LD1#
HV_REM#
B6P-PH-K-S
INT24V2
P-GND
/TC_CLK#
/TC_DATA#
/TC_LD#
/HV_REM#
(Transfer belt separation harness)
1TC-CMY
1TC-K
MC-CMY
BS-Y
(SPRING)
GB-M
(SPRING)
(SPRING)
BS-Y
(MC interface harness)
BS-M
(SPRING)
BS-C
GB-Y
BS-C
GB-M
(SPRING)
GB-C
(SPRING)
BS-K
GB-C
(SPRING)
BS-K
GB-Y
(MC interface harness)
GB-K
(SPRING)
MC-K
CLR
2-TC
(Transfer belt separation harness)
GB-K
(MC-BK harness)
MC-M
MC-M
1
2
3
(Secondary transfer separation harness)
MC-C
MC-K
2-TC
1TUD_K
D-GND
5VLED
(Transfer separation sensor BK)
1TUD_K
2
3
1
2
3
1
INT24V2
1TUD_CL
2
1
D-GND
3
5VLED
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
(Upper main harness PA)
(High voltage interface harness)
AC PWB
CN34
2
4
6
8
10
12
(Upper main harness PA)
CN9
11
1TUD_CL
13
GND
9
5VLED
B30B-PHDSS-B
B32B-PHDSS-B
CN26
20
P-GND
21 /HV_DATA#
22
/HV_CLK#
23
/HV_LD1#
24
HV_REM#
B40B-PADSS-B
INT24V2
P-GND
/TC_CLK#
/TC_DATA#
/TC_LD#
/HV_REM#
CN9
12
1TUD_K
14
D-GND
10
5VLED
B30B-PHDSS-B
(Upper main harness PA)
B3P-PH-K-S
CN9
1
(Paper feed main harness)
1TUD_K
2
D-GND
1
3
5VLED
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
PCU PWB
D. High voltage section (P4)
D-GND
DHPD_CL
5VLED
(Phase detection CL)
DHPD_CL
1
2
3
TNM_K
TNM_M
D-GND
DHPD_K
5VLED
1
2
3
DVM_CL (DV motor CL)
1
INT24V2
2
P-GND
/DVM_CL_CK
4
/DVM_CL_D
5
DVM_CL_LD
6
5V
7
B7P-PH-K-S
(Toner motor MAGENTA)
SM2P
TNM_K_1
TNM_K_2
SM2P
TNM_C_1
TNM_C_2
SM2P
TNM_M_1
TNM_M_2
SM2P
TNM_Y_1
TNM_Y_2
(Transfer separation clutch)
1TURC
R
1
2
R
1
2
R
1
2
R
1
2
(Process drive harness PA)
(Toner motor BK)
(Phase detection BK)
DHPD_K
(Toner motor YELLOW)
TNM_Y
(Toner motor CYAN)
TNM_C
DVM_K (DV motor BK)
INT24V2
1
P-GND
2
4
/DVM_K_CK
5
/DVM_K_D
6
DVM_K_LD
7
5V
B7P-PH-K-S
P
1
2
P
1
2
P
1
2
P
1
2
PHNR-02-H + BU02P-TR-P-H
1
24V3
2
1
2
/1TURC
9
10
CRM_M_DT#
CRM_M_CK#
PCU PWB
CRM_Y_DT#
6
CRM_Y_CK#
8
B10B-PHDSS-B
2
4
1
3
5
7
CRM_C_DT#
CRM_C_CK#
CN5
5V_CRUM
CRM_K_DT#
CRM_K_CK#
D-GND
9
10
P
7
8
5
6
CRM_Y_DT#
CRM_Y_CK#
SM10P
CRM_M_DT#
CRM_M_CK#
CRM_C_DT#
CRM_C_CK#
(Upper main harness PA)
1
5V_CRUM
2
CRM_K_DT#
3
CRM_K_CK#
4
D-GND
9
10
R
7
8
5
6
1
2
3
4
(CRUM harness)
6
2
1
3
4
5
5V-CRU
5V-CRU
5V-CRU
5V-CRU
5V-CRU
5V-CRU
DF11-6DP-SP1
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
DF11-6DP-SP1
6
2
1
3
4
5
1
4
3
2
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 13
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
DF11-4DP-SP1
DHPD_CL
5VLED
D-GND
31
29
23
B32B-PHDSS-B
24V3
/1TURC
DHPD_K
5VLED
INT24V2
P-GND
/DVM_CL_CK
/DVM_CL_D
DVM_CL_LD
5
3
9
11
1
16
14
32
30
TNM_K_1
TNM_K_2
TNM_C_1
TNM_C_2
TNM_M_1
TNM_M_2
TNM_Y_1
TNM_Y_2
15
17
19
21
22
24
18
20
CN12
6
INT24V2
4
P-GND
10
/DVM_K_CK
12
/DVM_K_D
2
DVM_K_LD
CRUM(YELLOW)
2
5V_CRUM
4
CRM_Y_DT#
CRM_Y_CK#
3
1
D-GND
CRUM(MAGENTA)
2
5V_CRUM
4
CRM_M_DT#
3
CRM_M_CK#
1
D-GND
CRUM(CYAN)
2
5V_CRUM
4
CRM_C_DT#
3
CRM_C_CK#
1
D-GND
CRUM(BLACK)
2
5V_CRUM
4
CRM_K_DT#
3
CRM_K_CK#
1
D-GND
E. Main drive unit section 1/2 (P5)
DMCL
DMCLB//
INT24V1
DMCLB/
DMCLA/
INT24V1
DMCLA//
(Drum motor CL)
1
2
3
4
5
6
(Drum motor BK)
DMBK
R
6
5
4
3
2
1
SM6
INT24V1
INT24V1
DMBKB//
DMBKB/
DMBKA/
DMBKA//
P
6
5
4
3
2
1
(PS motor)
PSM
INT24V1
PSMA/
PSMB/
PSMA//
PSMB//
INT24V1
B6P-PH-K-R
1
2
3
4
5
6
(Paper feed main harness)
(Process drive harness PA)
DMCLB//
INT24V1
DMCLB/
DMCLA/
INT24V1
DMCLA//
B12B-PH-K-S
INT24V1
INT24V1
DMBKB//
DMBKB/
DMBKA/
DMBKA//
CN5
5
INT24V1
1
PSMA/
4
PSMB/
2
PSMA//
3
PSMB//
6
INT24V1
B12B-PH-K-S
3
6
4
1
5
2
CN1
12
11
9
10
7
8
DRIVER MAIN PWB
DRIVER
SUB PWB
F. Main drive unit section 2/2 (P6)
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 14
(BIAS harness B)
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 15
DV INITIAL PWB (YELLOW)
D-GND
4
DVTYP_Y
3
DVSET_Y
2
5VN
1
S4P-PH-K-S
(BIAS harness B)
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
C
BS-Y
(BIAS harness A)
TCS_Y (Toner concentration sensor YELLOW) (DV harness)
24V3
2
TCS_Y
3
D-GND
4
TSG_Y
1
YELLOW
(BIAS harness B)
DL_BK#
1
3
DL_C#
53254-0310
10
DL_C#
1
24V3
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
D-GND
DVTYP_M
DVSET_M
5VN
QR/P8-8P
(SPRING)
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
P
To P4
DL_M#
3
53254-0310
8
7
5
6
4
3
2
1
10
24V3
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
D-GND
DVTYP_M
DVSET_M
5VN
DL_M#
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
10
1
(SPRING)
24V3
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
D-GND
DVTYP_Y
DVSET_Y
5VN
QR/P8-8P
To P4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
P
8
7
5
6
4
3
2
1
24V3
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
D-GND
DVTYP_Y
DVSET_Y
5VN
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
10
DL_Y (Discharge lamp YELLOW) (DV interface harness) PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
1
9
D-GND
2
D-GND
1
DL_Y#
3
10
DL_Y#
53254-0310
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
C
BS-M
(BIAS harness A)
TCS_M (Toner concentration sensor MAGENTA) (DV harness)
24V3
2
TCS_M
3
D-GND
4
TSG_M
1
DV INITIAL PWB (MAGENTA)
D-GND
4
DVTYP_M
3
DVSET_M
2
5VN
1
S4P-PH-K-S
10
3
24V3
24V3
5
8
5
4
TCS_C
6
6
7
TCS_C
D-GND
6
7
D-GND
7
5
8
TSG_C
8
6
5
TSG_C
1
D-GND
1
4
D-GND
7
2
DVTYP_C
8
DVTYP_C
2
3
2
3
DVSET_C
DVSET_C
9
3
4
5VN
4
10
1
5VN
C
QR/P8-8P
P
(SPRING)
To P4
BS-C
(BIAS harness A)
DL_M (Discharge lamp MAGENTA) (DV interface harness) PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
D-GND
9
D-GND
2
1
TCS_C (Toner concentration sensor CYAN) (DV harness)
2
24V3
TCS_C
3
D-GND
4
TSG_C
1
(BIAS harness B)
DL_BK#
3
53254-0310
8
24V3
3
5
5
24V3
6
4
7
TCS_K
6
TCS_K
6
D-GND
D-GND
5
7
7
6
8
8
5
TSG_BK
TSG_BK
1
D-GND
1
7
D-GND
4
2
2
DVTYP_K
3
DVTYP_K
8
3
3
2
DVSET_K
9
DVSET_K
5VN
4
4
5VN
10
1
C
QR/P8-8P
P
BS-K
(SPRING)
To P4
(BIAS harness A)
DL_C(Discharge lamp CYAN) (DV interface harness) PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
1
D-GND
2
D-GND
9
TCS_K (Toner concentration sensor BK) (DV harness)
24V3
2
TCS_K
3
D-GND
4
TSG_BK
1
MAGENTA
DV INITIAL PWB (CYAN)
D-GND
4
DVTYP_C
3
DVSET_C
2
5VN
1
S4P-PH-K-S
CYAN
DV INITIAL PWB (BLACK)
D-GND
4
DVTYP_K
3
DVSET_K
2
5VN
1
S4P-PH-K-S
DV un
BLACK
DL_BK (Discharge lamp BK) (DV interface harness) PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
9
2
D-GND
1
D-GND
(DL/DV main harness)
(DL/DV main harness)
(DL/DV main harness)
(DL/DV main harness)
24V2
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
D-GND
DVTYP_Y
DVSET_Y
5VN
D-GND
DL_Y#
24V3
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
D-GND
DVTYP_M
DVSET_M
5VN
DL_M#
D-GND
24V3
TCS_C
D-GND
TSG_C
D-GND
DVTYP_C
DVSET_C
5VN
DL_C#
D-GND
24V3
TCS_K
D-GND
TSG_BK
D-GND
DVTYP_K
DVSET_K
5VN
DL_BK#
D-GND
B40B-PADSS-B
26
28
32
30
34
36
38
40
24
22
6
8
12
10
14
16
18
20
2
4
25
27
31
29
33
35
37
39
21
23
5
7
11
9
13
15
17
19
1
3
CN15
PCU PWB
G. DL & DV section (P7)
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 16
POLYGON MOTOR
/BREAK
1
POLYCLK
2
/LOCK
3
/START
4
5
P-GND
24V1
6
LD PWB(MAGENTA)
10
D-GND
9
INT5V
8
/SH_M
7
/ENB_M
6
DT_M5
DT_M+
4
D-GND
3
Vref_M
LDCHK_M
2
n LDERR_M
1
LD PWB(BLACK)
10
D-GND
9
INT5V
8
/SH_K
7
/ENB_K
6
DT_K5
DT_K+
4
D-GND
3
Vref_K
2
SK_K
1
n LDERR_K
BD PWB
5VN
1
D-GND
2
n BD
3
D-GND
4
B4P-PH-K-R
(Polygon motor harness)
(LSU-LD harness)
(LSU-LD harness)
3
4
LD PWB(YELLOW)
D-GND
10
INT5V
9
/SH_Y
8
/ENB_Y
7
DT_Y6
DT_Y+
5
D-GND
4
Vref_Y
3
LDCHK_Y
2
n LDERR_Y
1
LD PWB(CYAN)
D-GND
10
INT5V
9
/SH_C
8
/ENB_C
7
DT_C6
DT_C+
5
D-GND
4
Vref_C
3
LDCHK_C
2
n LDERR_C
1
LSU TH1
LSUTH1
D-GND
(LSU-BD harness)
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_Y
/ENB_Y
DT_YDT_Y+
D-GND
Vref_Y
LDCHK_Y
n LDERR_Y
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_M
/ENB_M
DT_MDT_M+
D-GND
Vref_M
LDCHK_M
n LDERR_M
CN4
B6P-PH-K-S
6
/BREAK
5
POLYCLK
3
/LOCK
4
/START
2
P-GND
1
24V1
27
25
29
31
30
28
26
32
34
33
15
13
17
19
18
16
14
20
22
21
CN1
B34B-PHDSS-B
3
D-GND
1
INT5V
/SH_C
5
/ENB_C
7
DT_C6
DT_C+
4
2
D-GND
8
Vref_C
10
LDCHK_C
n LDERR_C
9
CN2
B12B-PHDSS-B
D-GND
3
INT5V
1
/SH_K
5
/ENB_K
7
DT_K6
DT_K+
4
D-GND
2
Vref_K
8
SK_K
10
n LDERR_K
9
11
LSUTH2
12
D-GND
CN11 B7P-PH-K-S
4
5VN
3
D-GND
2
n BD
1
D-GND
6
LSUTH1
D-GND
5
LSU
PWB
CN8
1
2
3
4
5
6
(LSU shutter solenoid CL)
LSUSS_C
1
3
P
OPTION
CN7
1
2
3
4
5
n TRANS_DATA
6
D-GND
7
LSUASIC_RST
n RSV_DAT
8
n TRANS_RST
9
JOBEND_INT
10
LSUTH1
11
LSUTH2
12
13
VSYNC_K_N
14
VSYNC_K_P
15
VSYNC_C_P
16
VSYNC_C_N
VSYNC_M_N
17
VSYNC_M_P
18
19
VSYNC_Y_P
20
VSYNC_Y_N
S20B-PHDSS-B
CN9
CH0_N
1
CH0_P
2
D-GND
3
D-GND
4
CH1_N
5
CH1_P
6
CH2_N
7
8
CH2_P
D-GND
9
D-GND
10
CLCLK_N
11
CLCLK_P
12
13
CH3_N
14
CH3_P
15
D-GND
16
D-GND
HSYNC_LSU_N 17
HSYNC_LSU_P 18
19
D-GND
20
D-GND
ECLK_LSU_P 21
ECLK_LSU_N 22
S22B-PHDSS-B
INT5V
D-GND
D-GND
n SCK_LSU
D-GND
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
24V1
P-GND
S6B-XA
1
2
P
INT24V1
/LSUSS_B
SM2P
(DC main harness)
1
2
P
1
2
R
(Harness between MOTHER-LSU)
(Harness between MOTHER-LSU)
INT24V1
INT24V1
1
1
/LSUSS_C
/LSUSS_C
3
2
SM3P
R
R
SM2P
(LSU shutter solenoid BK)
LSUSS_B
(Harness between MOTHER-LSU)
(Harness between MOTHER-LSU)
(Harness between MOTHER-LSU)
n TRANS_DATA
INT5V
D-GND
D-GND
n SCK_LSU
D-GND
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
24V1
P-GND
B6B-XA
CN10
1
INT24V1
4
/LSUSS_B
B5P-PH-K-S
CN21
26
INT24V1
24
/LSUSS_C
B26B-PHDSS-B
D-GND
LSUASIC_RST
n RSV_DAT
n TRANS_RST
JOBEND_INT
LSUTH1
LSUTH2
VSYNC_K_N
VSYNC_K_P
VSYNC_C_P
VSYNC_C_N
VSYNC_M_N
VSYNC_M_P
VSYNC_Y_P
VSYNC_Y_N
B20B-PHDSS-B
CN14
1
CH0_N
CH0_P
2
3
D-GND
4
D-GND
5
CH1_N
6
CH1_P
7
CH2_N
8
CH2_P
9
D-GND
10
D-GND
11
CLCLK_N
12
CLCLK_P
13
CH3_N
14
CH3_P
D-GND
15
D-GND
16
17 HSYNC_LSU_N
18 HSYNC_LSU_P
19
D-GND
20
D-GND
21 ECLK_LSU_P
22 ECLK_LSU_N
B22B-PHDSS-B
CN13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
CN21
1
2
3
4
5
6
PCU PWB
MOTHER PWB
H. LSU section (P8)
CS2
PAPER
FEED
UN
CS1
PAPER
FEED
UN
1
2
3
1
2
3
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 17
1
2
3
D-GND
CPED2
5VNPD
detection)
1
2
3
CPED2 (CS2 paper empty
D-GND
CPFD2
5VN
detection)
CPFD2 (CS2 paper entry
1
CSS1
D-GND
2
S4P-PH-K-S
installation detection)
CSS1 (CS1 cassette
D-GND
CPED1
5VNPD
detection)
CPED1 (CS1 paper empty
D-GND
CPFD1
5VN
detection)
CPFD1(CS1 paper entry
CLUD2 (CS2 lift-up detection)
D-GND
1
CLUD2
2
3
5VNPD
CSS2 (CS2 cassette installation detection)
1
CSS2
D-GND
2
S4P-PH-K-S
(Paper feed unit harness cs2)
DSW_C (Right lower door open/close detection)
D-GND
1
DSW_C
2
5VN
3
CLUD1 (CS1 lift-up detection)
D-GND
1
CLUD1
2
5VNPD
3
(Paper feed unit harness cs1)
6
5
4
12
11
10
9
8
7
3
2
1
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
11
12
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
2
3
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
D-GND
CSPD2
5VNPD
1
2
3
quantity detection)
CSPD2 (CS2 paper remaining
PHNR-9-H 㧗
BU09P-TR-P-H
D-GND
CPFD2
5VN
D-GND
CLUD2
5VNPD
D-GND
CPED2
5VNPD
D-GND
CSPD1
5VNPD
quantity detection)
CSPD1(CS1 paper remaining
PHNR-12-H 㧗
BU12P-TR-P-H
D-GND
CPFD1
5VN
D-GND
CLUD1
5VNPD
D-GND
CPED1
5VNPD
D-GND
DSW_C
5VN
(Cassette SW harness PA)
(Cassette SW harness PA)
DF1B-24p
CPFD1
CLUD1
CPED1
DSW_C
CSPD1
CPWD11
CPWD12
CSS1
CSS2
CSS11
CSS12
CSS13
CSS14
CSS21
CSS22
CSS23
CSS24
CPFD2
CLUD2
CPED2
CSPD2
CPWD21
CPWD22
S
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
16
17
19
21
23
18
20
22
24
2
4
6
10
12
14
(Cassette SW harness PA)
P
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
16
17
19
21
23
18
20
22
24
2
4
6
10
12
14
CN4
3
D-GND
20
5VN
1
D-GND
5VNPD
18
2
D-GND
19
5VNPD
4
D-GND
21
5VN
9
D-GND
26
5VNPD
D-GND
10
11
D-GND
27
5VNPD
28
5VNPD
29
5VNPD
30
5VNPD
12
D-GND
13
D-GND
14
D-GND
15
D-GND
16
D-GND
17
D-GND
7
D-GND
24
5VN
5
D-GND
22
5VNPD
6
D-GND
23
5VNPD
8
D-GND
25
5VNPD
B30B-PHDSS-B
CN6
1
CPFD1
3
CLUD1
5
CPED1
7
DSW_C
9
CSPD1
21
CPWD11
23
CPWD12
11
CSS1
10
CSS2
13
CSS11
15
CSS12
17
CSS13
19
CSS14
12
CSS21
14
CSS22
16
CSS23
18
CSS24
2
CPFD2
4
CLUD2
6
CPED2
8
CSPD2
22
CPWD21
24
CPWD22
B24B-PHDSS-B
DRIVER
MAIN PWB
(Paper feed main harness)
PCU
PWB
I. Paper feed unit section (P9)
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 18
PSFM
PSFMA//
INT24V1
PSFMB//
PSFMA/
INT24V1
PSFMB/
(PS front motor)
1
2
3
4
5
6
CLUM2 (CS2 lift-up motor)
P-GND
1
/CLUM2
2
B2P-PH-K-S
CLUM1 (CS1 lift-up motor)
P-GND
1
/CLUM1
2
B2P-PH-K-S
(CS2 paper feed clutch)
CPFC2
(CS1 paper feed clutch)
CPFC1
(Vertical transport clutch)
CPFC
CPFM (Paper feed motor)
INT24V2
1
P-GND
2
/CPFM_CK
4
/CPFM_D
5
CPFM_LD
6
5V
7
FG-OUT
3
B7P-PH-K-S
PHNR-2-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
2
/CPFC
1
24V3
PHNR-2-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
2
/CPUC1
1
24V3
PHNR-2-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
/CPUC2
2
24V3
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
(Paper feed drive harness)
/CPFC
24V3
/CPUC1
24V3
/CPUC2
24V3
P-GND
/CLUM1
P-GND
/CLUM2
SM18P
INT24V2
P-GND
/CPFM_CK
/CPFM_D
CPFM_LD
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
P
1
2
3
4
5
(Paper feed main harness)
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
R
1
2
3
4
5
(Paper feed main harness)
CN1
PSFMA//
2
5
INT24V1
3
PSFMB//
1
PSFMA/
6
INT24V1
4
PSFMB/
B6B-PH-K-S
CN9
3
INT24V2
B3P-PH-K-S
11
/CPFC
10
24V3
13
/CPUC1
12
24V3
/CPUC2
15
24V3
14
7
P-GND
6
/CLUM1
P-GND
9
8
/CLUM2
B32B-PHDSS-B
CN17
5
P-GND
4
/CPFM_CK
/CPFM_D
1
2
CPFM_LD
DRIVER
MAIN PWB
AC PWB
PCU PWB
J. Paper feed drive unit section (P10)
PROCON SENSOR UN
PS UN
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 19
2
1
R
ADMLA//
INT24V1
ADMLB//
ADMLA/
INT24V1
ADMLB/
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
1
P
14
15
R
14
15
P
10
11
12
13
(Paper feed main harness)
/PCSS
24V3
SM18P
5VNPD
D-GND
REGS_R
REGS_R_LED#
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
4
5
6
(Paper feed main harness)
DF11-6DP-SP1
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
(ADU lower motor)
PROCON SENSOR UN
/PCSS
24V3
SM2P
10
11
12
13
5VNPD
D-GND
PCS_K
PCS_CL
PCS_LED#
5VNPD
D-GND
REGS_F
REGS_F_LED#
5VNPD
PPD2
D-GND
1
2
3
1
5
6
2
3
4
ADULM
(Process control
shutter solenoid)
PCSS
RESI SENSOR R
5VNPD
4
D-GND
3
REGS_R
2
REGS_R_LED#
1
5
6
7
8
9
PROCON SENSOR
5VNPD
5
D-GND
4
PCS_K
3
PCS_CL
2
1
PCS_LED#
3
2
1
PHNR-6-H
BU06P-TR-P-H
6
D-GND
5
PPD1
5VNPD
4
1
2
3
4
(Process control unit harness)
PS UN
PROCON SENSOR UN
(PS unit harness)
RESI SENSOR F
5VNPD
4
D-GND
3
2
REGS_F
1
REGS_F_LED#
PPD2 (PS sensor)
5VNPD
1
PPD2
2
D-GND
3
PPD1 (PS front sensor)
D-GND
1
PPD1
2
5VNPD
3
D-GND
REGS_F
REGS_F_LED#
D-GND
PCS_K
PCS_CL
PCS_LED#
5VNPD
D-GND
REGS_R
REGS_R_LED#
25
20
22
28
21
19
18
23
27
26
24
ADMLA//
INT24V1
ADMLB//
ADMLA/
INT24V1
ADMLB/
B12B-PH-K-S
CN5
8
11
9
7
12
10
PCU
PWB
DRIVER
MAIN
PWB
PPD2
D-GND
32
30
17
/PCSS
16
24V3
B32B-PHDSS-B
D-GND
PPD1
CN17
29
31
K. PS unit & process control unit section (P11)
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
(ADU transport 1 interface harness)
APPD2 (ADU transport detection 2)
APPD2
1
2
D-GND
5VLED10
3
(ADU open/close detection interface harness)
MPWD
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 20
3
2
1
MTOP1
D-GND
5VLED9
1
2
3
(Manual feed tray reduction detection)
MTOP1
5VN
MPWD
D-GND
5VN
MPWD
D-GND
3
2
1
TH&HUD (Temperature/humidity sensor)
1
5VN
2
HUD_M
3
D-GND
TH_M
4
MTOP2 (Manual feed tray extension detection)
MTOP2
1
D-GND
2
5VLED13
3
7
8
9
5VN
HUD_M
D-GND
TH_M
11
12
13
14
5VLED9
27
28
5VN
29
HUD_M
14
D-GND
31
TH_M
S32B-PHDSS-B
MTOP1
25
MPFD
D-GND
5VLED7
HPDET
(Right door harness) FG
10
8
9
CN3(2/2) (Right door harness)
7
RIGHT DOOR
I/F PWB
CN1
5VN
1
D-GND
2
SIN3
3
SELIN1
4
SELIN2
5
SELIN3
6
APPD1
7
APPD2
8
APPD3
9
POD3
10
MPFD
11
16
5VNPD
MPWD
13
14
TH_M
HUD_M
15
S16B-PHDSS-B
1
2
1
2
3
5
4
8
7
6
4
5
DF11-6DP-SP2
5VLED7
5VLED7
5VLED7
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
8
6
7
2
4
5
3
1
(Manual feed gate solenoid)
MPGS
MPFD
/MPGS
24V3
D-GND
5VLED7
PHNR-8-H + BU08P-TR-P-H(Multi upper unit harness)
24V3
1
8
7
/MPFS
2
6
HPDET
3
(Manual paper feed clutch)
MPUC
P
1
2
P
1
2
24V3
2
/MPUC
1
PHNR-2-H + BU02P-TR-P-H
15
24V3
/MPGS
31
30
/MPFS
24V3
14
/MPUC
28
24V3
13
QR/P4 32PINS
15
31
30
14
28
13
P
21
6
10
7
23
8
32
1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
POD3
MPFD
5VNPD
MPWD
TH_M
HUD_M
F-GND
5VN
D-GND
SIN3
SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
APPD1
APPD2
21
6
10
7
23
8
32
1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
6
4
2
5
3
1
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
DF11-8DP-SP1
5
5VLED9
10
4
3
2
1
6
MTOP1
9
MTOP2
5VLED13
22
24
8
7
MTOP2
5VLED13
5VN
MPWD
19
20
10
9
8
MPLD
MPLD2
5VLED12
16
13
18
7
5VN
MPWD
5
6
DSW_ADU
D-GND
5VLED2
TFD3
D-GND
5VLED1
POD3
D-GND
5VLED4
APPD1
D-GND
5VLED5
S16B-PHDSS-B
CN3(1/2)
4
APPD2
5
D-GND
6
5VLED10
10
11
12
7
8
9
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
FG
R
1
2
POD3
MPFD
5VNPD
MPWD
TH_M
HUD_M
P-GND
/MPGS
/MPFS
/MPUC
14
11
32
16
17
19
18
5
4
6
(Manual paper take-up clutch)
MPFS
PCU PWB
24V3
3
B32B-PHDSS-B
5VN
D-GND
SIN3
SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
APPD1
APPD2
9
8
10
13
12
15
1
2
CN26
7
/ADUGS
SM2P
24V3
/MPGS
R
1
2
(Multi lower unit harness)
MPFD (Manual feed paper entry detection)
MPFD
1
D-GND
2
5VLED7
3
PHNR-5-H + BU05P-TR-P-H
4
/MPGS
2
5
1
24V3
1
5VLED7
5
2
D-GND
4
3
MPFD
3
HPDET (Manual feed paper empty detection)
1
HPDET
2
D-GND
5VLED7
3
SM2P
24V3
/MPFS
DF11-6DP-SP1
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
(Manual feed paper width detection)
(Right door harness)
(Right paper exit/reverse
PG interface harness)
(Right paper exit/reverse
PG interface harness)
PHNR-14-H + BU14P-TR-P-H(Right door harness)
3
MPLD
12
1
MPLD2
14
4
5VLED12
11
3
APPD1
1
2
2
D-GND
1
5VLED5
3
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
3
DSW_ADU
2
3
D-GND
2
4
1
5VLED2
PHNR-4-H + BU04P-TR-P-H
(Right paper exit unit harness)
TFD3
1
6
D-GND
2
5
5VLED1
3
4
4
3
POD3
2
D-GND
5
1
5VLED4
6
PHNR-6-H + BU06P-TR-P-H
1
2
4
3
5
6
(Manual feed tray harness (2))
MPLD
PHNR-9-H + BU09P-TR-P-H (Manual feed tray harness (1))
(Manual feed paper length detection 1)
MPLD
6
MPLD
1
4
D-GND
5
D-GND
2
5
4
5VLED12
5VLED12
3
6
APPD1
D-GND
5VLED5
(ADU transport detection 1)
APPD1
DSW_ADU
D-GND
5VLED2
(ADU open/close detection)
DSW_ADU
POD3
D-GND
5VLED4
(Right paper exit detection)
POD3
TFD3 (Right full detection)
1
TFD3
D-GND
2
3
5VLED1
(Paper feed main harness)
L. Right door unit section (P12)
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
FG
SM6P
24V2
/OSM_XB
/OSM_XA
/OSM_B
/OSM_A
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 21
FG
DF11-6DP-SP1
6
5
4
3
2
1
DF11-6DP-SP1
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
POMA//
INT24V1
POMB//
POMA/
INT24V1
POMB/
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
DF11-8DP-SP2
3
2
1
4
DF11-4DP-SP1
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
POM (Paper exit motor)
5VNPD
POD1
D-GND
POD1 (Fusing after detection)
1
2
3
(SHIFTER MOTOR)
OSM
R
5
1
2
3
4
(Paper exit unit harness PA)
6
5
4
3
2
1
FUMB//
FUMA//
INT24V1
INT24V1
FUMB/
FUMA/
1
2
3
5VNPD
POD2
D-GND
POD2 (Paper exit detection)
5
7
3
1
6
8
2
4
FUM (Fusing motor)
5VNPD
HPOS
D-GND
HPOS (SHIFTER HP)
5VNPD
TFD2
D-GND
TFD2 (Paper exit full detection)
POFM 2
POFM 1
PHNR-4-H,BU04P-TR-P-H
1
POFM_V
4
2
/POFM_CNT
3
3
P-GND
2
4
POFM_LD1
1
PHNR-4-H,BU04P-TR-P-H
4
1
POFM_V
3
2
/POFM_CNT
2
P-GND
3
1
4
POFM_LD2
P
5
1
2
3
4
POD2
HPOS
POD1
D-GND
5VNPD
14
15
16
17
12
SM-12p
FUMB//
FUMA//
INT24V1
INT24V1
FUMB/
FUMA/
POMA//
INT24V1
POMB//
POMA/
INT24V1
POMB/
TFD2
13
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
24V2
/OSM_XB
/OSM_XA
/OSM_B
/OSM_A
DF1B-26p
POFM_V
/POFM_CNT
P-GND
POFM_LD1
POFM_LD2
1
2
3
4
5
P
6
7
11
8
9
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
(Paper feed main harness)
CN6
9
FUMB//
8
FUMA//
INT24V1
11
12
INT24V1
10
FUMB/
7
FUMA/
2
POMA//
5
INT24V1
3
POMB//
1
POMA/
6
INT24V1
4
POMB/
B12B-PH-K-S
POD1
14
D-GND
2
18
5VNPD
B32B-PHDSS-B
16
17
12
HPOS
POD2
TFD2
24V2
/OSM_XB
/OSM_XA
/OSM_B
/OSM_A
POFM_V
/POFM_CNT
P-GND
POFM_LD1
POFM_LD2
16
12
10
24
7
9
11
13
(Upper main harness PA) CN13
15
17
19
21
22
15
14
13
1
2
3
4
5
S
6
7
11
8
9
DRIVER
MAIN
PWB
PCU
PWB
M. Paper out unit section (P13)
CN18
1 SCANDATA02 SCANDATA0+
3
D-GND
4 SCANDATA15 SCANDATA1+
6
D-GND
7 SCANDATA28 SCANDATA2+
9
D-GND
10 OUT_SCANCLKOUT11 OUT_SCANCLKOUT+
12
D-GND
13 SCANDATA314 SCANDATA3+
15
D-GND
16
D-GND
17 FLVPP_MFP
18
3.3V
19
RES_SCN
20
3.3V
21
D-GND
22
3.3V
D-GND
23
24
3.3V
25
D-GND
26
3.3V
27
5VN
28
D-GND
29
D-GND
30
D-GND
TX25-30P-12ST-H1E
CN14
1
12V
2 PWM_CPUFAN
3
D-GND
4 LOCK_CPUFAN
B4P-PH-K-S
CPU FAN
(Board to Board)
CN5
SCANDATA01
SCANDATA0+ 2
D-GND
3
SCANDATA14
SCANDATA1+ 5
D-GND
6
SCANDATA27
SCANDATA2+ 8
D-GND
9
OUT_SCANCLKOUT- 10
OUT_SCANCLKOUT+ 11
D-GND
12
SCANDATA3- 13
SCANDATA3+ 14
D-GND
15
SCAN IN
D-GND
16
PWB
FLVPP_MFP 17
3.3V
18
or
RES_SCN
19
3.3V
20
DOCC
D-GND
21
PWB
3.3V
22
D-GND
23
3.3V
24
D-GND
25
3.3V
26
5VN
27
D-GND
28
D-GND
29
D-GND
30
TX24-30R-12ST-H1
DRIVER MAIN
PWB
MOTHER
PWB
CN26
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
CN2
POMA
1
POMB
2
/POMA
3
/POMB
4
/POMCNT
5
/FUM_CNT
6
FUMA
7
FUMB
8
/FUMA
9
/FUMB
10
RRM_A
11
RRM_B
12
/RRM_A
13
/RRM_B
14
/RRM_CNT
15
/PFM_CNT
16
PFM_A
17
PFM_B
18
/PFM_A
19
/PFM_B
20
ADUM_L_A
21
ADUM_L_B
22
ADUM_L_XA
23
ADUM_L_XB
24
/ADUM_L_C
25
D-GND
26
5VN
27
D-GND
28
B28B-PHDSS-B
CN3
INT24V1
1
2
P-GND
3
5VNPD
B3P-VH
D-GND
FWP_PCU
PCU_RES
/MPFC_RES
/Reserve_out3
PCU_TXD
PCU_DTR
D-GND
PCU_RXD
PCU_DSR
/FAX_LED
/POF
D-GND
LSU_RST
TRANS_RST
D-GND
SCK
TRANS_DAT
D-GND
RSV_DAT
JOBEND_INT
TH1_LSU
TH2_LSU
D-GND
D-GND
INT5V
INT5V
D-GND
28FMZ-BT
(DC main harness)
(DC main harness)
(FFC between PCU-MOTHER)
CN23
POMA
1
POMB
2
/POMA
3
/POMB
4
/POMCNT
5
/FUM_CNT
6
FUMA
7
FUMB
8
/FUMA
9
/FUMB
10
RRM_A
17
RRM_B
18
/RRM_A
19
/RRM_B
20
/RRM_CNT
15
/PFM_CNT
16
PFM_A
11
PFM_B
12
/PFM_A
13
/PFM_B
14
ADUM_L_A
21
ADUM_L_B
22
23 ADUM_L_XA
24 ADUM_L_XB
25 /ADUM_L_C
D-GND
26
5VN
27
D-GND
28
B28B-PHDSS-B
CN2
3
INT24V1
2
P-GND
1
5VNPD
B7P-VH
CN7
D-GND
28
FWP_PCU
27
PCU_RES
26
25 /MPFC_RES
24 /Reserve_out3
PCU_TXD
23
PCU_DTR
22
D-GND
21
20
PCU_RXD
PCU_DSR
19
/FAX_LED
18
/POF
17
D-GND
16
LSU_RST
15
14 TRANS_RST
D-GND
13
SCK
12
11 TRANS_DAT
D-GND
10
RSV_DAT
9
8 JOBEND_INT
7
TH1_LSU
6
TH2_LSU
5
D-GND
4
D-GND
3
INT5V
2
INT5V
1
D-GND
28FMZ-BT
PCU PWB
CN26
25
P-GND
0ZFM_V
27
/0ZFM_CNT
29
OZFM_LD
31
B32B-PHDSS-B
CN34
DRMCL_A
17
DRMCL_B
18
/DRMCL_A
19
/DRMCL_B
20
/DRMCL_CNT 21
/DRMBK_CNT 22
DRMBK_A
23
DRMBK_B
24
/DRMBK_A
25
/DRMBK_B
26
B40B-PADSS-B
CN4
5
INT24V1
6
P-GND
7
5VN
B7P-VH
(Paper feed main harness)
(Upper main harnessPA)
(Upper main harnessPA)
3
1
2
4
P
P-GND
0ZFM_V
/0ZFM_CNT
OZFM_LD
SM4P
CN3
1
DRMCL_A
2
DRMCL_B
3
/DRMCL_A
4
/DRMCL_B
5
/DRMCL_CNT
6 /DRMBK_CNT
7
DRMBK_A
8
DRMBK_B
9
/DRMBK_A
10
/DRMBK_B
B12B-PHDSS-B
CN2
1
INT24V1
2
P-GND
3
5VN
B3P-VH
3
1
2
4
R
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 22
(Ozone FAN)
OZFM
DRIVER SUB
PWB
N. PCU PWB-other PWB (P14)
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 23
(LCC OPTION)
WH
(DESK OPTION)
WH
F.G.
LCC CONTROL PWB
F.G.
1
2
1
2
DESK CONTROL PWB
1
2
WH_L(LCC)
WH_N(LCC)
1
2
CN-A
NC
4
TXD_LCC
7
RXD_LCC
8
/DTR_LCC
9
/DSR_LCC
10
RES_LCC
11
NC
3
5VN
5
D-GND
6
24V4
1
P-GND
2
/TRC_LCC
12
B12B-PHDSS-B
WH_L(DESK)
WH_N(DESK)
CN-F
24V4
1
P-GND
2
5VN
3
D-GND
4
D-GND
5
TXD_DSK
6
RXD_DSK
7
/DTR_DSK
8
DSR_DSK
9
RES_DSK
10
/TRC_DSK
11
NC
12
B12B-PHDSS-B
F.G.
4
12
5
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
P
1
3
2
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
R
WH_L(LCC)
WH_N(LCC)
F-GND
EL 12PIN
NC
NC
TXD_LCC
RXD_LCC
/DTR_LCC
/DSR_LCC
RES_LCC
F-GND
5VN
D-GND
24V4
P-GND
/TRC_LCC
EL 15PIN
WH_L(DESK)
WH_N(DESK)
F-GND
EL 3PIN
24V4
P-GND
5VN
D-GND
D-GND
TXD_DSK
RXD_DSK
/DTR_DSK
DSR_DSK
RES_DSK
/TRC_DSK
SM 11PIN
4
12
5
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
R
1
3
2
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
P
F.G.
F.G.
F.G.
(WH-DESK_LCC harness)
TXD_LCC
RXD_LCC
/DTR_LCC
/DSR_LCC
RES_LCC
2
D-GND
8
/TRC_LCC
B26B-PHDSS-B
10
4
12
6
14
CN21
D-GND
1
TXD_DSK
9
RXD_DSK
3
/DTR_DSK
11
5
DSR_DSK
13
RES_DSK
7
/TRC_DSK
5
1
WH_L(LCC)
WH_N(LCC)
CN4(B4P(5-3)-VH)
4
WH_L(DESK)
2
WH_N(DESK)
(DC main harness)
(DC main harness)
PSU
5VN
D-GND
B6P-VH
P-GND
B8P-VH
24V4
B7P-VH
WH PWB
CN4
3
6
CN7
7
CN8
6
PCU PWB
O. DESK & LCC (P15)
FINISHER
FINISHER & INSERTOR (OPTION)
CN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
INSERTOR
TXD_FIN
RXD_FIN
/DTR_FIN
/DSR_FIN
RES_FIN
24V3
5VN
D-GND
P-GND
F-GND
24V5
P-GND
CN
TXD_FIN
RXD_FIN
/DTR_FIN
/DSR_FIN
RES_FIN
24V3
5VN
D-GND
P-GND
F-GND
24V5
P-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
P
TXD_INS
RXD_INS
/DTR_INS
/DSR_INS
RES_INS
NC
5VN
D-GND
NC
F-GND
24V5
P-GND
EL 12PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
R
F.G.
(DC main harness)
TO COIN VENDOR
(OPTION)
TXD_INS
RXD_INS
/DTR_INS
/DSR_INS
RES_INS
15
D-GND
B20B-PHDSS-B
CN21
16
17
18
19
20
CN29
1
24V3
2
P-GND
3
/CV_COPY
4
/CV_COUNT
5
/CV_START
6
/CV_CA
7
/CV_CLCOPY
8
/CV_COLOR1
9
/CV_STAPLE
10
/CV_COLOR0
/CV_DUPLEX
11
12
5VN
13
/CV_SIZE0
14
/CV_SIZE1
15
/CV_SIZE2
16
/CV_SIZE3
B16B-PNDZS
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 24
CN4
4
CN7
6
CN8
7
5VN
B6P-VH-B
P-GND
B8P-VH-B
24V5
B7P-VH-B
PCU PWB
PSU
P. Finisher & coin vendor (P16)
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 25
CN25
CN18
B6P-VH
CN144
FG
P-GND
24V3
12V
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
3
1
2
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
P-GND
24V3
12V
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
24VEXT
/SIZE_LED1
/SIZE_LED2
F-GND
ORS LED PWB
n INFO_LED
5VO
CN_CHK_IN
WU_LED
D-GND
POW_LED
LCD_CLK+
n WU_KEY
LCD_CLKn PWRSW
D-GND
NC
LCD_DAT2+
n POF_SCN
LCD_DAT2n RES_MPFC_SCN
D-GND
RES_SCN
LCD_DAT1+
n RTS_SCN
LCD_DAT1TXD_SCN
D-GND
n CTS_SCN
LCD_DAT0+
RXD_SCN
LCD_DAT0n FWP_SCN
CN_CHK_OUT
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
n INFO_LED
5VO
CN_CHK_IN
WU_LED
D-GND
POW_LED
LCD_CLK+
n WU_KEY
LCD_CLKn PWRSW
D-GND
NC
LCD_DAT2+
n POF_SCN
LCD_DAT2n RES_MPFC_SCN
D-GND
RES_SCN
LCD_DAT1+
n RTS_SCN
LCD_DAT1TXD_SCN
D-GND
n CTS_SCN
LCD_DAT0+
RXD_SCN
LCD_DAT0n FWP_SCN
CN_CHK_OUT
D-GND
1
2
3
1 /DETECT
2
D-GND
3 /DET_ANC
4
NC
5 TXD_ANC
6
NC
7 RXD_ANC
8
NC
9
D-GND
10
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/DETECT
D-GND
/DET_ANC
NC
TXD_ANC
NC
RXD_ANC
NC
D-GND
D-GND
(CCD-F harness 1)
MOTHER PWB
B30B-PHDSS-B
B30B-PHDSS-B
CN146
CN19
B10B-PHDSS-BCN143
501190-4017
B12B-PHDSS-BCN5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
AGND
AGND
AGND
A12V
CCD_CPAGND
CCD_CP+
A5V
AGND
AGND
CCD_RS+
A3.3V
CCD_RS/LVDS_STBY
AGND
/RES_CCDAD
CCD_CLK2AD_SCLK
CCD_CLK2+
AD_WRSO
AGND
AD_SEN
CCD_CLK1+
AD_RDSI
CCD_CLK1AGND
AGND
AD_CLPIN
AD_MCLKAD_BLKCLP
AD_MCLK+
CCD_SH
AGND
AGND
CLKP1_OUT+
SH_OUT+
CLKP1_OUTSH_OUTAGND
AGND
(CCD-F harness 1)
B15P-PH-K-S
CN147
B15P-PH-K-S
CN146 B10B-PHDSS-B CN143
AGND
AGND
TC+
TE+
TCTEAGND
AGND
TB+
TD+
TBTDAGND
AGND
TA+
TCLK+
TATCLKAGND
AGND
(SCN-LAMP
FFC)
B15P-PH-K-S
P-GND
P-GND
CL
24VPD
24VPD
1
2
B15P-PH-K-S
CN130
1
2
3
4
5
CL INVERTOR
PWB
SCAN IN PWB
501190-2017
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
501190-2017
CN4 B12B-PHDSS-BCN3
CL
CN3
MIRROR
MOTOR
CN4 B12B-PHDSS-B
3
2
1
MHPS
DOCC PWB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
AGND
AGND
AGND
A12V
CCD_CPAGND
CCD_CP+
A5V
AGND
AGND
CCD_RS+
A3.3V
CCD_RS/LVDS_STBY
AGND
/RES_CCDAD
CCD_CLK2AD_SCLK
CCD_CLK2+
AD_WRSO
AGND
AD_SEN
CCD_CLK1+
AD_RDSI
CCD_CLK1AGND
AGND
AD_CLPIN
AD_MCLKAD_BLKCLP
AD_MCLK+
CCD_SH
AGND
AGND
CLKP1_OUT+
SH_OUT+
CLKP1_OUTSH_OUTAGND
AGND
SCN-CNT PWB
CN134
CN137
CN148
CN136
5VEXT
1
2
D-GND
3
OCSW
24VEXT
4
5
/SIZE_LED1
6
/SIZE_LED2
B6P-PH-K-S
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
AGND
AGND
TC+
TE+
TCTEAGND
AGND
TB+
TD+
TBTDAGND
AGND
TA+
TCLK+
TATCLKAGND
AGND
CN1
SCANDATA0SCANDATA0+
D-GND
SCANDATA1SCANDATA1+
D-GND
SCANDATA2SCANDATA2+
D-GND
SCANCLKOUTSCANCLKOUT+
D-GND
SCANDATA3SCANDATA3+
D-GND
5VEXT
D-GND
OCSW
OCSW
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
SCANDATA0SCANDATA0+
D-GND
SCANDATA1SCANDATA1+
D-GND
SCANDATA2SCANDATA2+
D-GND
SCANCLKOUTSCANCLKOUT+
D-GND
SCANDATA3SCANDATA3+
D-GND
5
4
3
2
1
P-GND
P-GND
CL
24VPD
24VPD
501190-4017
1
/DETECT
2
D-GND
3 /DET_ANC
5 TXD_ANC
7 RXD_ANC
9
D-GND
10
D-GND
1
2
3
5
7
9
10
/DETECT
D-GND
/DET_ANC
TXD_ANC
RXD_ANC
D-GND
D-GND
SCANDATA0SCANDATA0+
D-GND
SCANDATA1SCANDATA1+
D-GND
SCANDATA2SCANDATA2+
D-GND
SCANCLKOUTSCANCLKOUT+
D-GND
SCANDATA3SCANDATA3+
D-GND
1
2
3
4
MiM_A
MiM_B
MiM_/A
MiM_/B
CCD PWB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
SCANDATA0SCANDATA0+
D-GND
SCANDATA1SCANDATA1+
D-GND
SCANDATA2SCANDATA2+
D-GND
SCANCLKOUTSCANCLKOUT+
D-GND
SCANDATA3SCANDATA3+
D-GND
1
2
3
MHPS
D-GND
5V
CN3
1
2
3
5
7
9
10
11
12
/DETECT
D-GND
/DET_ANC
TXD_SCN
RXD_SNC
D-GND
D-GND
NC
NC
CN138 B6P-VH-R
(SCN-Mother DATA harness)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
SCANDATA0SCANDATA0+
D-GND
SCANDATA1SCANDATA1+
D-GND
SCANDATA2SCANDATA2+
D-GND
SCANCLKINSCANCLKIN+
D-GND
SCANDATA3SCANDATA3+
D-GND
MHPS
D-GND
5V
(MHPS harness)
OPTION
B15P-PH-K-S
Q. Scanner section 1/2 (P17)
CARD
READER
(OPTION)
TO R-SPF
P-GND
P-GND
SPPD1
SPPD2
24VPD
24VPD
5V_EXT
AVCC
SPFMCK
SPFMM1
SPFMM2
SPFMO1
SPFMO2
SPRMA
SPRMA/
SPRMB
SPRMB/
SPRMO1
SGS
STMPS
SRRC
SPFC
SPWS
SELA_
SELB_
SELC_
SSELO
SPPD4
SPFFAN
SPPD3
SPPD5
5VPD
D-GND
D-GND
SM6P
/C_CARD
/C_SEL
/C_CLOCK
/C_DATA
5V
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
(HL interface harness PA)
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 26
TO AUDITER
(SCN-MOTHER DATA harness)
PHNR-6-H + BU06P-TR-P-H
1
6
/C_CARD
2
5
/C_SEL
3
/C_CLOCK
4
4
/C_DATA
3
5
5V
2
D-GND
1
6
CN131
n A_PNC
1
n A_COPY
2
n A_CA
3
4
n A_READY
5
n A_AUD
6
5V
7
D-GND
8
24V
9
NC
10
n A_TC
11
24V
12
PNC-a
13
D-GND
B13P-PH-K-S
CN145
1
/C_CARD
2
/C_SEL
3
/C_CLOCK
4
/C_DATA
5
5V
6
D-GND
B6P-PH-K-R
CN135
D-GND
26
3.3V
25
5VN
24
D-GND
23
PD
22
PDSEL0
21
PDSEL1
20
PDSEL2
19
/KEYIN
18
SEG0
17
SEG1
16
SEG2
15
/F0
14
/F1
13
/F2
12
/F3
11
/BZR
10
D-GND
9
n PWRSW
8
n WU_KEY
7
n INFO_LED
6
POW_LED
5
WU_LED
4
D-GND
3
5VO
2
D-GND
1
52030-2629
(MFP OP
I/F FFC)
CN125
D-GND
30
CN_CHK_OUT
29
LCD_CLK+
28
LCD_CLK27
D-GND
26
LCD_DAT2+
25
LCD_DAT224
D-GND
23
LCD_DAT1+
22
LCD_DAT121
D-GND
20
LCD_DAT0+
19
LCD_DAT018
D-GND
17
DISP
16
3.3V_EXT
15
VEEON
14
VCONT
13
AVCC
12
SC_TEMP
11
P-GND
10
24V_EXT
9
NC
8
/CCFT1
7
6
CN_CHK_IN(LCD)
X2CN
5
Y2CN
4
X1CN
3
Y1CN
2
D-GND
1
52030-3029
(LVDS I/F
FFC)
SCN-CNT PWB
CN142
1
P-GND
2
P-GND
3
SPPD1
4
SPPD2
5
24VPD
6
24VPD
7
5V_EXT
AVCC
8
SPFMCK
9
SPFMM1
10
11
SPFMM2
12
SPFMO1
13
SPFMO2
14
SPRMA
15
SPRMA/
16
SPRMB
SPRMB/
17
18
SPRMO1
19
SGS
20
STMPS
21
SRRC
22
SPFC
23
SPWS
24
SELA_
25
SELB_
26
SELC_
27
SSELO
28
SPPD4
29
SPFFAN
30
SPPD3
31
SPPD5
32
5VPD
33
D-GND
34
D-GND
B34B-PHDSS-B
CN1
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D-GND
CN_CHK_OUT
LCD_CLK+
LCD_CLKD-GND
LCD_DAT2+
LCD_DAT2D-GND
LCD_DAT1+
LCD_DAT1D-GND
LCD_DAT0+
LCD_DAT0D-GND
DISP
3.3V_EXT
VEEON
VCONT
AVCC
SC_TEMP
P-GND
24V_EXT
NC
/CCFT1
CN_CHK_IN(LCD)
X2CN
Y2CN
X1CN
Y1CN
D-GND
52271-3090
CN1
1
D-GND
2
3.3V
3
5VN
D-GND
4
5
PD
6
PDSEL0
7
PDSEL1
8
PDSEL2
9
/KEYIN
10
SEG0
11
SEG1
12
SEG2
13
/F0
14
/F1
15
/F2
16
/F3
17
/BZR
18
D-GND
19
n PWRSW
20
n WU_KEY
21 n INFO_LED
22
POW_LED
23
WU_LED
24
D-GND
25
5VO
26
D-GND
52610-2671
VO
LP
D-GND
CP
D-GND
M
3.3V_EXT
D0
D1
D-GND
D2
D3
D-GND
DISP
VEE
LCD UN
CN1
3
2
1
TOUCH
PANEL
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
/CCFT
D-GND
24V_EXT
S3B-PH-K-S
(LCD
inverter LCD INVERTOR PWB
harness)
CN2
1
CCFT+
BACK
2
/CCFT
LIGHT
S02(8.0)B-BHS
CN2
/CCFT
1
D-GND
2
24V_EXT
3
S3B-PH-SM4-TB
04FM-1.0SP-1.9-GW-TF
CN3
VO
1
LP
2
D-GND
3
CP
4
D-GND
5
M
6
3.3V_EXT
7
D0
8
D1
9
10
D-GND
D2
11
D3
12
D-GND
13
DISP
14
VEE
15
52746-1570 (LCD
FFC)
LVDS-P PWB
CN4
/YL(Y1)
1
XH(X1)
2
3
YH(Y2)
/XL(X2)
4
MFP OPE-P
PWB
(PSW
harness)
CN1
3
n PWRSW
2
D-GND
1
D-GND
POWER SW PWB
CN3
n PWRSW
1
D-GND
2
D-GND
3
S3B-PH-K-S
PDSEL0
PDSEL1
PDSEL2
5VN
PD
D-GND
ORS PD PWB
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN2
PDSEL0
1
PDSEL1
2
PDSEL2
3
5VN
4
PD
5
D-GND
6
B6B-PH-SM3-TB
R. Scanner section 2/2 (P18)
TO EX TEL
TO LINE
MJ2
1
2
3
4
5
6
MJ1
1
2
3
4
5
6
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 27
TEL LIU PWB
MJ-66J-RD315
NC
NC
TEL1
TEL2
NC
NC
MJ-64J-RD315
NC
TEL1
L1
L2
TEL2
NC
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
TX24-40R-10ST-H1
12V
AG
12V
AG
150VON
CION
48VON
HS1HS2CIEXHSSON1
SON2
ECON
MRON
TELID
NC
NC
NC
NC
DG
3.3V
DG
5VS
DG
SI3_RESSPK
MDM_ATXD
MDM_ARXD
MDM_ABITCLK
MDM_ASPCLK
RGDTMDM_CLK
AFERESBBITCLK
BSPCLK
BRXD
BTXD
HDMUTERHS-
SPEAKER
(BOARD TO
BOARD)
B3P-PH-K-S
SPSP+
NC
TX25-40P-8ST-H1
CN7
1
12V
2
P-GND
3
12V
4
P-GND
5
150VON
6
CION
7
48VON
8
HS19
HS210
CI11
EXHS12
SON1
13
SON2
14
ECON
15
MRON
16
TELID
17
NC
18
NC
19
NC
20
NC
21
GND
22
3.3V
23
GND
24
5VS
25
GND
26
SI3_RES27
SPK
28
ATXD
29
ARXD
30
ABITCLK
31
ASPCLK
32
RGDT33
MDM_CLK
34
AFE_RES35
BBITCLK
36
BSPCLK
37
BTXD
38
BRXD
39
HDMUTE40
RHS-
CN2
1
2
3
FAX MAIN PWB
CN3
1
D-GND
2
D-GND
3
3.3V
4
3.3V
5
FAX_RXD(D)6
CNCT_FAX7
FAX_RXD(D)+
8
MSW_MONFAX_RXD(CS)+
9
RES_FAX10
FAX_RXD(CS)11
D-GND
12
FAX_TXD(D)13
RES_MPF14
FAX_TXD(D)+
15
FAX_WUP16
FAX_TXD(CS)+ 17
PLED18
FAX_TXD(CS)19
D-GND
20
FAX_CTS(D)21
D-GND
22
FAX_RTS(D)23
FLVPP
24
FAX_CTS(CS)25
26
5VO
FAX_RTS(CS)27
28
12V
3.3V
29
3.3V
30
D-GND
31
P-GND
32
S32B-PHDSS-B
CN8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
MOTHER
PWB
D-GND
D-GND
3.3V
3.3V
FAX_TXD(D)_N
n CNCT_FAX
FAX_TXD(D)_P
n MSW_MON
FAX_TXD(CS)_P
n RES_FAX
FAX_TXD(CS)_N
D-GND
FAX_RXD(D)_N
n RES_MPFC_FAX
FAX_RXD(D)_P
n WU_FAX
FAX_RXD(CS)_P
n PLED
FAX_RXD(CS)_N
D-GND
n FAX_RTS(D)
D-GND
n FAX_CTS(D)
FLVPP
n FAX_RTS(CS)
5VO
n FAX_CTS(CS)
12V
3.3V
3.3V
D-GND
P-GND
B32B-PHDSS-B
S. FAX section (P19)
BOARD TO BOARD
CN4
CN21
SCANDATA3+
SCANDATA3SCANCLKOUT+
SCANCLKOUT-
CN5
MOTHER PWB
MFPC PWB
IDE_RST_N
D-GND
IED_DD7
IED_DD8
IED_DD6
IED_DD9
IED_DD5
IED_DD10
IED_DD4
IED_DD11
IED_DD3
IED_DD12
IED_DD2
IED_DD13
IED_DD1
IED_DD14
IED_DD0
IED_DD15
D-GND
KEY
IDE_DMARQ
D-GND
IDE_DIOW_N
D-GND
IDE_DIOR_N
D-GND
IDE_IORDY_N
D-GND
IDE_DMACK_N
D-GND
IDE_INTRQ
ICCS10
IDE_DA1
HU5-400PNA-S53T-FA
IDE_CBLID_N
IDE_DA0
IDE_DA2
IDE_CS0
IDE_CS1
IDE_DASP_N
D-GND
CN8 USB-B
(HOST)
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
USB2.0
5V
DD+
GND
CN26
CN9 USB-A
USB1.1
(DEVICE)
1
2
3
4
5V
DD+
GND
12V
D-GND
D-GND
5VN
IDE_DA0
IDE_DA2
IDE_CS0
IDE_CS1
IDE_DASP_N
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
P
4
8
5
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TX+
TXCT
NC
NC
CT
RX+
RX-
IDE_RST_N
D-GND
IED_DD7
IED_DD8
IED_DD6
IED_DD9
IED_DD5
IED_DD10
IED_DD4
IED_DD11
IED_DD3
IED_DD12
IED_DD2
IED_DD13
IED_DD1
IED_DD14
IED_DD0
IED_DD15
D-GND
KEY
IDE_DMARQ
D-GND
IDE_DIOW_N
D-GND
IDE_DIOR_N
D-GND
IDE_IORDY_N
D-GND
IDE_DMACK_N
D-GND
IDE_INTRQ
ICCS10
IDE_DA1
IDE_CBLID_N
HDD
FAN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CD
RXD
TXD
DTR
GND
DSR
RTS
CTS
RI
1
2
3
4
(HDD POWER harness)
SCANDATA2+
SCANDATA2SCANDATA1+
SCANDATA1SCANDATA0+
SCANDATA0LCD_DATA0LCD_DATA0+
LCD_DATA1LCD_DATA1+
LCD_DATA2LCD_DATA2+
LCD_CLKLCD_CLK+
CH0_N
CH0_P
CH1_N
CH1_P
CH2_N
CH2_P
CLK_N
CLK_P
CH3_N
CH3_P
ECLK_LSU_N
ECLK_LSU_P
HSYNC_LSU_P
HSYNC_LSU_N
VSYNC_K_N
VSYNC_K_P
VSYNC_C_P
VSYNC_C_N
VSYNC_M_N
VSYNC_M_P
VSYNC_Y_P
VSYNC_Y_N
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
RXD_SCN
n CTS_SCN
TXD_SCN
n RTS_SCN
n RES_SCN
n RES_PCU
RXD_PCU
n CTS_PCU
TXD_PCU
n RTS_PCU
TXD_FAX(D)
TXD_FAX(CS)
RXD_FAX(D)
RXD_FAX(CS)
LAN
S
4
8
5
1
LAN
QR/P4 8P
5VN
D-GND
D-GND
12V
CN18
RS232C
RS232C
CN15
B4P-VH
(HDD POWER interface harness)
TX25-100P-LT-H1E
n RTS_FAX(D)
n CTS_FAX(D)
n RTS_FAX(CS)
n CTS_FAX(CS)
n RES_FAX
n CNCT_FAX
n WU_FAX2
n MSW_MON2
n POF_MFPC
n REQ_PIC
n CLR_PIC
TXD_PIC
RXD_PIC
PWM
n CNCT_FAN
n RES_PIC
RES_MFP
PWM2
FLVPP
n REQ_PIC_INT
n WU_FAX1
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
5VO
12V
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
(HDD POWER interface harness)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
PHNR-4-H + BU04P-TR-P-H
4
HDDFM_LD
1
3
D-GND
2
2
HDDFM_PWM
3
1
12V
4
CN17
B10B-PHDSS-B
1
3
4
2
12V
D-GND
D-GND
5VN
HDD
SCANDATA3+ 1
SCANDATA3- 2
SCANCLKOUT+ 3
SCANCLKOUT- 4
SCANDATA2+ 5
SCANDATA2- 6
SCANDATA1+ 7
SCANDATA1- 8
SCANDATA0+ 9
SCANDATA0- 10
LCD_DATA0- 11
LCD_DATA0+ 12
LCD_DATA1- 13
LCD_DATA1+ 14
LCD_DATA2- 15
LCD_DATA2+ 16
LCD_CLK- 17
LCD_CLK+ 18
19
CH0_N
20
CH0_P
21
CH1_N
22
CH1_P
23
CH2_N
24
CH2_P
25
CLK_N
26
CLK_P
27
CH3_N
28
CH3_P
ECLK_LSU_N 29
ECLK_LSU_P 30
HSYNC_LSU_P 31
HSYNC_LSU_N 32
VSYNC_K_N 33
VSYNC_K_P 34
VSYNC_C_P 35
VSYNC_C_N 36
VSYNC_M_N 37
VSYNC_M_P 38
VSYNC_Y_P 39
VSYNC_Y_N 40
41
5VL
42
5VL
43
5VL
44
5VL
45
5VL
46
5VL
47
5VL
48
5VL
49
5VL
50
5VL
RXD_SCN 51
n CTS_SCN 52
53
TXD_SCN
n RTS_SCN 54
n RES_SCN 55
n RES_PCU 56
57
RXD_PCU
n CTS_PCU 58
TXD_PCU 59
n RTS_PCU 60
TXD_FAX(D) 61
TXD_FAX(CS) 62
RXD_FAX(D) 63
RXD_FAX(CS) 64
n RTS_FAX(D) 65
n CTS_FAX(D) 66
n RTS_FAX(CS) 67
n CTS_FAX(CS) 68
n RES_FAX 69
n CNCT_FAX 70
n WU_FAX2 71
n MSW_MON2 72
n POF_MFPC 73
n REQ_PIC 74
n CLR_PIC 75
76
TXD_PIC
RXD_PIC 77
78
PWM
n CNCT_FAN 79
n RES_PIC 80
RES_MFP 81
82
PWM2
83
FLVPP
n REQ_PIC_INT 84
n WU_FAX1 85
86
3.3V
87
3.3V
88
3.3V
89
5VO
90
12V
91
D-GND
92
D-GND
93
D-GND
94
D-GND
95
D-GND
96
D-GND
97
D-GND
98
D-GND
99
D-GND
100
D-GND
2
4
6
8
12V
HDDFM_PWM
D-GND
HDDFM_LD
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 28
T. MFP board section 1/2 (P20)
CN22
5V_IN
5V_IN
5V_IN
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
PCI1_EXT
n PCI1_RST
PCI1_INTA_PU
EXT_REQ
EXT_GNT
EXTEND PCI
MFPC PWB
PCI1MAC_AD30
PCI1MAC_AD31
PCI1MAC_AD28
PCI1MAC_AD29
PCI1MAC_AD26
PCI1MAC_AD27
PCI1MAC_AD24
PCI1MAC_AD25
PCI1MAC_AD23
PCI1MAC_CBE3
PCI1MAC_AD21
PCI1MAC_AD22
PCI1MAC_AD19
PCI1MAC_AD20
PCI1MAC_AD17
PCI1MAC_AD18
PCI1MAC_CBE2
PCI1MAC_AD16
PCI1MAC_AD14
PCI1MAC_AD15
PCI1MAC_AD12
PCI1MAC_AD13
PCI1MAC_AD10
PCI1MAC_AD11
PCI1MAC_AD8
PCI1MAC_AD9
PCI1MAC_AD7
PCI1MAC_CBE1
PCI1MAC_AD5
PCI1MAC_AD6
PCI1MAC_AD3
PCI1MAC_AD4
PCI1MAC_AD1
PCI1MAC_AD2
PCI1MAC_CBE0
PCI1MAC_AD0
D-GND
PCI1MAC_IDSEL
PCI1MAC_PAR
PCI1MAC_FRAME
PCI1MAC_DVSEL
FX8C-60S-SV5
PCI1MAC_IRDY
PCI1MAC_TRDY
CN19
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
B32B-PHDSS-B
PCI_STOP
PCI1_SERR
PCI1_PERR
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
3.3V
3.3V
FAXD_TXD_N
n CNCT_FAX
FAXD_TXD_P
n MSW_MON
FAXCS_TXD_P
n RES_FAX
FAXCS_TXD_N
D-GND
FAXD_RXD_N
n RES_MFP
FAXD_RXD_P
n FAX_WUP
FAXCS_RXD_P
n PLED
FAXCS_RXD_N
D-GND
n FAXD_RTS
D-GND
n FAXD_CTS
FLVPP
n FAXCS_RTS
5VO
n FAXCS_CTS
12V
3.3V
3.3V
D-GND
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 29
2nd FAX UN
(OPTION)
U. MFP board section 2/2 (P21)
3. Signal list
Signal
name
1TNFD
1TUD_CL
1TUD_K
1TURC
ADUM_L
APPD1
APPD2
CCFT
CLI
CLUD1
CLUD2
CLUM1
CLUM2
CPED1
CPED2
CPFC
CPFD1
CPFD2
CPFM
CPUC1
CPUC2
CPUFM
CSPD1
CSPD2
CSS1
CSS2
DHPD_CL
DHPD_K
DHSW
(Japan
only)
Name
Waste toner full detection switch
[Mechanical switch]
Transfer belt separation CL
detection
Transfer belt separation BK
detection
Primary transfer separation clutch
[Electromagnetic clutch]
ADU motor lower [Stepping motor]
ADU transport path detection 1
[Transmission type]
ADU transport path detection 2
[Transmission type]
LCD backlight
[CCFT cool cathode ray tube]
Scanner lamp [Xenon lamp]
Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift
HP detection) [Transmission type]
Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift
HP detection) [Transmission type]
Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper
feed tray 1) [DC brush-less motor]
Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper
feed tray 2) [DC brush-less motor]
Tray 1 paper empty detection
[Transmission type]
Tray 2 paper empty detection
[Transmission type]
Tray vertical transport clutch
[Electromagnetic clutch]
Tray 1 transport detection (Paper
entry detection)
[Transmission type]
Tray 2 transport detection (Paper
entry detection)
[Transmission type]
Paper feed motor [Brush-less
motor]
Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray
1) [Electromagnetic clutch]
Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray
2) [Electromagnetic clutch]
Controller cooling fan motor
Tray 1 paper remaining quantity
detection
Tray 2 paper remaining quantity
detection
Tray 1 installation detection
Tray 2 installation detection
CL phase detection
BK phase detection
Dehumidifier heater switch
[Seesaw switch]
DL_C
Discharge lamp C [LED]
DL_K
Discharge lamp K [LED]
DL_M
Discharge lamp M [LED]
DL_Y
Discharge lamp Y [LED]
DL_K
Discharge lamp K [LED]
DM_CL
DM_K
DSW_ADU
Drum motor (CL) [Stepping motor]
Drum motor (K) [Stepping motor]
ADU transport open/close
detection [Transmission type]
Function/Operation
Connector level
“L”
“H”
Detects the waste toner full.
Detects the transfer belt separation
CL.
Detects the transfer belt separation
BK.
Controls the primary transfer
separation mode.
Drives the right door section.
Detects the duplex (ADU) upstream
paper pass.
Detects the duplex (ADU) midstream
paper pass.
Backlight for the CCD
Radiates lights onto a document for
the CCD to scan document images.
Detects tray 1 upper limit .
Detects tray 2 upper limit.
Drives the lift plate of the paper feed
tray.
Drives the lift plate of the paper feed
tray.
Detects tray 1 paper empty.
Detects tray 2 paper empty.
Controls ON/OFF of the paper
transport roller in the paper feed tray
section.
Detects tray 1 paper pass.
Detects tray 2 paper pass.
Drives the paper feed section.
Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the
paper feed tray 1 section.
Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the
paper feed tray 2 section.
Cools the controller PWB.
Detects tray 1 paper remaining
quantity.
Detects tray 2 paper remaining
quantity.
Detects the tray 1.
Detects the tray 2.
Detects the CL phase.
Detects the BK phase.
Turns ON/OFF the power lone of the
dehumidifier heaters provided in the
scanner (reading) section and the
paper feed section.
Discharges electric charges on the
OPC drum.
Discharges electric charges on the
OPC drum.
Discharges electric charges on the
OPC drum.
Discharges electric charges on the
OPC drum.
Discharges electric charges on the
OPC drum.
Drives the color OPC drum unit.
Drives the black OPC drum unit.
Detects the duplex (ADU) cover open/
close.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 30
Connector
No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
Note
Signal
name
DSW_C
DSW-F
Name
Tray 1 and 2 transport cover
open/close detection
Front door open/close switch
[Micro switch]
DSW-R
Right door open/close switch
[Micro switch]
DVM_CL
F1
Developing drive motor (CL)
[Brush-less motor]
Developing drive motor (K)
[Brush-less motor]
Fuse (20A 125V)
F1
Fuse (200mA 250V)
F1
Fuse (1.25A250V)
F2
Fuse (20A 125V)
F3
Fuse (T2AH250V)
F4
Fuse (T2AH250V)
F101
Fuse (125V 12A)
F102
Fuse (T1AH250V)
F103
Fuse (T8AH250V)
F201
Fuse (T6.3AH250V)
F202
Fuse (T6.3AH250V)
F203
Fuse (T6.3AH250V)
F204
Fuse (T6.3AH250V)
F205
Fuse (T6.3AH250V)
F301
Fuse (T5AH250V)
FUM
HDDFM
HL_LM
HL_UM
HL_US
HLTS1
Fusing drive motor
[Stepping motor]
HDD cooling fan motor
Heater lamp lower main
Heater lamp upper main
Heater lamp upper sub
Thermostat (Fusing unit)
HLTS2
Thermostat (Fusing unit)
HLTS3
Thermostat (Fusing unit)
HOPS
LSUSS1
Shifter home position detection
LSU shutter solenoid
[Electromagnetic solenoid]
Scanner home position sensor
[Transmission type]
Scanner motor [Stepping motor]
Manual feed paper empty
detection [Transmission type]
Manual feed paper entry detection
[Transmission type]
Paper pickup solenoid (Manual
paper feed) [Electromagnetic
solenoid]
Manual paper feed gate solenoid
[Electromagnetic solenoid]
Manual feed paper length detector
DVM_K
MHPS
MIM
MPED
MPFD
MPFS
MPGS
MPLD
Function/Operation
Connector level
“L”
“H”
Connector
No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
Note
Detects the tray 1 and 2 transport
cover open/close.
Detects open/close of the front door,
and turns ON/OFF the power line of
the fusing motor and the LSU laser.
Detects open/close of the right door,
and turns ON/OFF the power line of
the fusing motor and the LSU laser.
Drives the developing section (CL).
Drives the developing section/transfer
section (K).
AC power
PWB
LCD INV
PWB
CL invertor
PWB
AC power
PWB
AC power
PWB
AC power
PWB
DC power
PWB
DC power
PWB
DC power
PWB
DC power
PWB
DC power
PWB
DC power
PWB
DC power
PWB
DC power
PWB
DC power
PWB
Drives the fusing unit.
Cools the HDD.
Heats the lower heat roller. (Main)
Heats the upper heat roller. (Main)
Heats the upper heat roller. (Sub)
Prevents against overheating of the
fusing roller.
Prevents against overheating of the
fusing roller.
Prevents against overheating of the
fusing roller.
Detects the shifter home position.
Opens/closes the LSU shutter.
Detects the scanner home position.
Home
position
Drives the scanner (reading) section.
Detects the manual feed paper empty.
Detects the manual feed paper entry.
Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper
feed)
Controls open/close of the manual
paper feed gate solenoid.
Detects the manual paper feed tray
paper length.
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 31
Manual
paper
feed unit
Signal
name
Name
MPUC
Manual paper feed clutch
[Electromagnetic clutch]
MPWD
Manual paper feed tray paper
width detector [Volume resistor]
Main SW [Seesaw switch]
MSW
MTOP1
MTOP2
OCSW
OSM
OZFM
PCS_CL/K
PCSS
Manual paper feed tray pull-out
position detector 1
[Transmission type]
Manual paper feed tray pull-out
position detector 1
[Transmission type]
Original cover SW [Transmission
type]
Shifter motor [Stepping motor]
Ozone fan motor
Process control sensor
[Reflection type]
Process control shutter solenoid
[Electromagnetic solenoid]
PFM
PS front motor [Stepping motor]
PGM
Polygon motor
[DC brushless motor]
Fusing after-detection
[Transmission type]
Paper exit detection
[Transmission type]
Right tray paper exit detection
Paper exit cooling fan motor
(F side)
Paper exit cooling fan motor
(R side)
Paper exit drive motor
[Stepping motor]
Registration pre-detection
[Transmission type]
Registration detection
POD1
POD2
POD3
POFM_F
POFM_R
POM
PPD1
PPD2
PSFM
PWRSW
REGS_F/R
RRM
TCS_C
TCS_K
TCS_M
TCS_Y
TFD2
TFD3
TH_M/
HUD_M
TNM_C
Power cooling fan motor
Operation panel power switch
[Push switch]
Resist sensor [Reflection type]
Registration motor
[Stepping motor]
Toner density sensor
[Magnetic sensor]
Toner density sensor
[Magnetic sensor]
Toner density sensor
[Magnetic sensor]
Toner density sensor
[Magnetic sensor]
Paper exit full detection
[Transmission type]
Right tray paper exit full detection
Temperature/humidity detection
Function/Operation
Controls ON/OFF of the manual paper
feed roller in the manual paper feed
section.
Detects the manual paper feed tray
paper width.
Turns ON/OFF the main DC power
source.
Detects the manual paper feed tray
paper pull-out position (storing
position).
Detects the manual paper feed tray
paper pull-out position (pull-out
position).
Document size detection trigger.
PWB
name
Close
Open
Detects the paper from paper exit.
Detects the paper exit to right tray.
Cools the fusing unit.
Cools the fusing unit.
Drives the paper exit roller.
Detects the paper in front of resist
roller.
Detects the paper in rear of resist
roller.
Cools the power unit.
Outputs the ON/OF control signal of
the DC power source.
Detects the resist shift.
Drives the resist roller and controls
ON/OFF.
Detects the toner density (C).
Detects the toner density (K).
Detects the toner density (M).
Detects the toner density (Y).
Detects the face down paper exit tray
full
Detects the right tray paper exit full.
Detects the temperature/humidity.
VR203
Volume
+24V output adjustment
Note
Manual
paper
feed unit
Manual
paper
feed unit
Detects the paper exit from fusing.
VR201
TNM_Y
Pin
No.
Opens/closes the shutter of the
process control and the registration
sensor.
Drives transport between the resist
roller and the paper feed section,
transport between the resist roller and
the right door section.
Scans the laser beam.
Transports toner from the toner
cartridge to the developing unit.
Transports toner from the toner
cartridge to the developing unit.
Transports toner from the toner
cartridge to the developing unit.
Transports toner from the toner
cartridge to the developing unit.
+12V output adjustment
TNM_M
Connector
No.
Performs offset of paper.
Exhausts ozone.
Detects the toner patch density.
Toner motor C
[Synchronous motor]
Toner motor K
[Synchronous motor]
Toner motor M
[Synchronous motor]
Toner motor Y
[Synchronous motor]
Volume
TNM_K
Connector level
“L”
“H”
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 32
DC power
PWB
DC power
PWB
Signal
name
Name
Function/Operation
VR204
Volume
+5VN output adjustment
VR205
Volume
+3.3V output adjustment
VR402
Volume
+5VO, +5VL output adjustment
WTNM
Waste toner drive motor
[Synchronous motor]
Stirs waste toner.
Connector level
“L”
“H”
MX-2300/2700 N/G ELECTRICAL SECTION 11 – 33
Connector
No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
DC power
PWB
DC power
PWB
DC power
PWB
Note
[12] OTHERS
MX2700N
Service Manual
Item
1. System settings
A. System settings (General)
(1)
When User Authentication is not Enabled
1)
Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
2)
Configure the desired system settings.
• User authentication is initially disabled (factory default setting).
(2)
When User Authentication is Enabled
a. Login by login name and password
1)
Touch the [Login Name] key.
2)
Select the user.
3)
Enter a password.
(1) Touch the [Password] key.
(2) Enter a password on the text entry screen that will appear.
4)
Touch the [OK] key.
b. Login by user number
1)
Enter your user number with the numeric keys.
2)
Touch the [OK] key.
(3)
System Settings (General) List
Factory default setting
Page
Item
■ Total Count
● Job Count
● Device Count
■ Default Settings
● Display Contrast
● Clock
X Date Format
X Daylight Saving Time Setting
● Keyboard Select
■ List Print (User)
● All Custom Setting List
● Printer Test Page
X PCL Symbol Set List*1
X PCL Internal Font List*1
X PCL Extended Font List*1
X PS Font List*2
X PS Extended Font List*2
X NIC Page
● Sending Address List*3
X Individual List
X Group List
X Program List
X Memory Box List
X All Sending Address List
● Document Filing Folder List
■ Paper Tray Settings
● Tray Settings
X Tray 1
X Tray 2
X Tray 3
X Tray 4
X Tray 5
X Bypass Tray
● Paper Type Registration
X User Type 1
X User Type 2
X User Type 3
X User Type 4
X User Type 5
(Set to the centre value)
Varies depending on
country and region
Varies depending on
country and region
-
Plain, A4 (8-1/2" x 11")
Plain, A3 (11" x 17")
Varies depending on the
machine configuration
Plain, Auto-AB (Auto-Inch)
-
X User Type 6
X User Type 7
● Auto Tray Switching
■ Address Control
● Direct Address / Program
X Individual
◆ E-mail*4
• Search Number
• Name
• Initial
• Index
• Address
• Key Name
• File Format
◆ Internet Fax*5
• Search Number
• Name
• Initial
• Index
• Address
• Key Name
• Compression
• Internet Fax Report
X Group
◆ Search Number
◆ Group Name
◆ Initial
◆ Index
◆ Address
◆ Key Name
X Program
◆ Program Name
◆ Settings
• Address
• Resolution
• Exposure
• Special Modes
X Amend/Delete
● Custom Index
X User 1
X User 2
X User 3
X User 4
X User 5
X User 6
■ Fax Data Receive/Forward
● Internet Fax Manual Reception*5
X Reception Start
X Manual Reception Key in Initial
Screen
● Internet Fax Data Forward*5
■ Printer Condition Settings*1
● Printer Default Settings
X Copies
X Orientation
X Default Paper Size
X Default Output Tray*6
X Default Paper Type
X Line Thickness
X 2-Sided Print
X Colour Mode
X N-Up Print
● PCL Settings*1
X PCL Symbol Set Setting
X PCL Font Setting
X PCL Line Feed Code
X Wide A4
● Postscript Settings*2
X Print PS Errors
MX-2300/2700 N/G OTHERS 12 – 1
Factory default setting
Page
Enable
Enable
-
1
Portrait
A4 (8-1/2" x 11")
Varies depending on the
machine configuration
Plain Paper
5
1-Sided
B/W
1-Up
3. PC-8
Internal Font, 0. Courier
0. CR=CR:LF=LF:FF=FF
Disable
Disable
Factory default setting
Page
Item
■ Document Filing Control
● Custom Folder Registration
X Folder Name
X Initial
X Password
X User Name
● Amend/Delete Custom Folder
■ USB-Device Check
■ User Control*7
● Amend User Information
-
*2: When the PS3 expansion kit is installed.
*3: In some countries and regions, the facsimile expansion kit or
the Internet fax expansion kit or the network scanner expansion kit
must be installed.
*4: In some countries and regions, the network scanner expansion
kit must be installed.
*5: When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
*6: When a right tray is installed.
*7: When user authentication is enabled and a user without the
authority to configure the system settings (administrator) has
logged in. (Excluding factory stored users.)
*8: When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.
*9: When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed.
B. System settings (Administrator)
When User Authentication is not Enabled
1)
Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
2)
Touch the [Admin Password] key.
3)
Log in.
(1) Touch the [Password] key and enter the administrator password.
(2) Touch the[OK] key.
4)
(2)
1)
Configure the desired system settings.
Login by login name and password (and e-mail
address*)
Touch the [Login Name] key.
* If login name / password / e-mail address is selected for the
login method, [E-mail Address] will appear under the [Login
Name] key.
2)
Touch the [Admin Login] key.
3)
Touch the [Password] key and enter the administrator password.
4)
Touch the [OK] key.
5)
Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
* This step is not necessary if you are logging in after you
pressed the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
6)
Configure the desired system settings.
(3)
Login by user number
1)
Touch the [Admin Login] key.
2)
Touch the [Password] key and enter the administrator password.
3)
Touch the [OK] key.
4)
Press the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
* This step is not necessary if you are logging in after you
pressed the [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
5)
System Settings (Administrator) List
Item
■ User Control
● User Authentication Setting
X User Authentication
X Authentication Method Setting
*1: In some countries and regions, the printer expansion kit must be
installed.
(1)
(4)
Configure the desired system settings.
Touch the items that you wish to configure and select the
desired settings.
X Device Account Mode Setting
◆ Device Account Mode
◆ User Selection
● User Registration
X Store
X Amend/Delete
X Delete All Users
● Pages Limit Group Registration
● Actions when the Limit of Pages for
Output Jobs
● Authority Group Registration
● Favourite Operation Group
Registration
● User Count Display
● User Count Reset
● User Information Print
X All User Information Print
X User List
X List of Number of Pages Used
X Page Limit Group List
X Authority Group List
X Favourite Operation Group List
● The Number of User Name Displayed
Setting
● A Warning when Login Fails
● Disable Printing by Invalid User
● Default Network Authentication Server
Setting
■ Energy Save
● Toner Save in Printer Mode*1
● Toner Save in Copy Mode*2
● Auto Power Shut-Off
● Auto Power Shut-Off
● Preheat Mode Setting
■ Operation Settings
● Keys Touch Sound
X Keys Touch Sound
X Keys Touch Sound at Initial Point
● Auto Clear Setting
X Cancel Timer
● Message Time Setting
● Display Language Setting
● Disabling of Job Priority Operation
● Disabling of Bypass Printing
● Key Operation Setting
X Disable Auto Key Repeat
● Disabling of Clock Adjustment
● Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode*3
Customize Key Setting
X Copy
◆ Customize 1
◆ Customize 2
◆ Customize 3
X Scanner*4
◆ Customize 1
◆ Customize 2
◆ Customize 3
X Internet Fax*5
◆ Customize 1
◆ Customize 2
◆ Customize 3
X Fax*6
◆ Customize 1
◆ Customize 2
MX-2300/2700 N/G OTHERS 12 – 2
Factory default setting
Disable
Authenticate a User by
Login Name and
Password
Disable
Job is Stopped when the
Limit of Pages is Reached
8
Disable
Disable
-
Disable
Disable
Enable
Timer 60 min.
15 min.
Middle
Disable
60 sec.
Disable
6 sec.
English
Disable
Disable
0.0 sec.
Disable
Disable
Disable
Special Modes
File
Quick File
Special Modes
File
Quick File
Special Modes
File
Quick File
Special Modes
File
Item
◆ Customize 3
X USB Memory Scan
◆ Customize 1
◆ Customize 2
◆ Customize 3
X Data Entry
◆ Customize 1
◆ Customize 2
◆ Customize 3
■ Device Control
● Original Size Detector Setting
X Original Detection Size
Combination
X Cancel Detection at Document
Glass
● Disabling of Document Feeder*3
● Original Feeding Mode*3
● Disabling of Duplex
● Disabling of Large Capacity Cassette*7
● Disabling of Optional Paper Drawer*8
● Disabling of Tray Setting
● Disabling of Finisher*9
● Disabling of Offset
● Disabling of Stapler*9
● Saddle Stitch Position Adjust*10
● Disabling of Punch*11
● Disabling of Colour Mode*12
● Auto Paper Selection Setting
● Registration Adjustment
X Auto Adjustment
● Optimization of the Hard Disk
● Tandem Connection Setting
X IP Address of Slave Machine
X Port Number
X Disabling of Master Machine Mode
X Disabling of Slave Machine Mode
● Clear All Job Log Data
● Detect Standard in Auto Colour Mode
■ Copy Settings
● Initial Status Settings
X Colour Mode
X Paper Tray
X Exposure Type
X Copy Ratio
X 2-Sided Copy
X Output
● Exposure Adjustment
X Colour
◆ Document Glass
◆ Document Feeder
X B/W
◆ Document Glass
◆ Document Feeder
● Rotation Copy Setting
● Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios
X Reduction
X Enlargement
● Setting a Maximum Number of Copies
● Initial Margin Shift Setting
X Side-1
X Side-2
● Erase Width Adjustment
X Edge
X Centre
● Card Shot Settings
X Original Size
X Fit to Page
● Automatic Saddle Stitch*10
● Initial Tab Copy Setting
Factory default setting
Quick File
Special Modes
Erase
Suppress BG
Special Modes
File
Quick File
Varies depending on
country and region
Disable
Disable
All Disabled
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
0.0 mm
Disable
Disable
Plain Paper
0.0.0.0
50001
Disable
Disable
3
Full Colour
Varies depending on the
machine configuration
Auto
1
1-Side to 1-Side
-
5
5
5
5
Enable
999
10 mm (1/2")
10 mm (1/2")
X: 86 mm (3-3/8") Y: 54
mm (2-1/8")
Disable
Enable
10 mm (1/2")
Item
● Disabling Deletion of Job Programs
● Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex
Copy
● Disabling of Auto Paper Selection
● Auto Selection Setting of Tray that is
Supplied the Paper
● Initial Colour Balance Setting
● Auto Colour Calibration
● B/W 600dpi x 600dpi Scanning Mode
for Document Feeder*3
● B/W Quick Scan from Document Glass
■ Network Settings
● IP Address Setting
● Enable TCP/IP
● Enable NetWare
● Enable EtherTalk
● Enable NetBEUI
● Reset the NIC
● Ping Command
■ Printer Settings
● Default Settings
X Prohibit Notice Page Printing
X Prohibit Test Page Printing
X A4/Letter Size Auto Change
X Print Density Level
◆ Colour
◆ B/W
X Bypass Tray Settings
◆ Enable Detected Paper Size in
Bypass Tray
◆ Enable Selected Paper Type in
Bypass Tray
◆ Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto
Paper Select
X Job Spool Queuing
● Interface Settings
X Hexadecimal Dump Mode*1
X I/O Timeout
X Enable USB Port
X USB Port Emulation Switching*1
X Enable Network Port
X Network Port Emulation
Switching*1
X Port Switching Method
● Colour Adjustments
X Auto Colour Calibration
■ Image Send Settings*14
● Operation Settings
X Default Display Setting
◆ Mode
◆ Hold settings for a while after
scanning has been completed
◆ Switch Automatically to Copy
Mode Screen
X Initial Resolution Setting
◆ Apply the Resolution Set when
Stored
◆ Scanner*4
◆ Internet Fax*5
◆ Fax*6
X Default Exposure
◆ Exposure
◆ Original Image Type
◆ Moiré Reduction
X Must Input Next Address Key at
Broadcast Setting
X Scan Complete Sound Setting
X The Number of File Name/Subject/
Body Keys Displayed Setting
X The Number of Direct Address
Keys Displayed Setting
MX-2300/2700 N/G OTHERS 12 – 3
Factory default setting
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Factory Default State
Disable
Enable
DHCP
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
-
Enable
Disable
Varies depending on
country and region.
3
3
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
20 sec.
Enable
PCL (Auto*13)
Enable
PCL (Auto*13)
Switch at End of Job
-
Scanner*4 (Fax*6)
Disable
Disable
Disable
200x200dpi
200x100dpi
Standard
Settings
Auto
Text
Disable
Disable
Middle
6
6
Item
Factory default setting
X Disable Switching of Display Order Disable
X Hold Setting for Received Data Print
◆ Received Data Hold
Disable
◆ Password Setting
X Settings to Disable the Registration of Destination
◆ Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel
• Group
Disable
• E-mail
Disable
• Internet Fax
Disable
• Fax
Disable
◆ Disable Registering Destination on Web Page*15
• Group
Disable
• E-mail
Disable
• FTP
Disable
• Desktop
Disable
• Network Folder
Disable
• Internet Fax
Disable
• Fax
Disable
◆ Disable Registration Using
Disable
Network Scan Tools*15
X Settings to Disable Transmission
◆ Disable [Resend] on Fax/Image Disable
Send Mode
◆ Disable Selection from the Address Book
• E-mail
Disable
• FTP
Disable
• Desktop
Disable
• Network Folder
Disable
• Internet Fax
Disable
• Fax
Disable
◆ Disable Direct Entry
• E-mail
Disable
• Internet Fax
Disable
• Fax
Disable
◆ Disable PC-Internet Fax
Disable
Transmission*5
◆ Disable PC-Fax Transmission*6 Disable
● Scan Settings*4
X Default Sender Set
X Default Colour Mode Settings
◆ Colour Mode
Auto, Greyscale
◆ B/W Mode
Mono 2
◆ Disable Change of B/W Setting
Disable
in Auto Mode
X Initial File Format Setting
◆ B/W
• File Type
PDF
• Compression Mode
MMR (G4)
• Specified Pages per File
Disable
◆ Colour/Grey
• File Type
PDF
• Compression Ratio
Medium
• Specified Pages per File
Disable
X Compression Mode at Broadcasting
◆ Black & White
MMR (G4)
◆ Colour/Greyscale
Medium
X Maximum Size of E-mail
Unlimited
Attachments
X Maximum Size of E-mail
Disable
Attachments (FTP/Desktop/Network
Folder)
X Default Address Setting
Disable
X Bcc Setting
◆ Enable Bcc
Disable
◆ Display Bcc Address on the Job Disable
Status Screen
X Disable Scan Function
PC Scan
Disable
USB Memory Scan
Disable
X Pre-Setting Mail Signature
Disable
● Internet Fax Settings*5
X Internet Fax Default Settings
Item
Factory default setting
◆ Internet Fax Own Name and
Address Set
◆ Auto Wake Up Print
Enable
◆ Internet Fax Speaker Volume
Settings
• Receive Signal
Middle
• Communication Error Signal
Middle
◆ Original Print on Transaction
Print Out Error Report
Report
Only
◆ Transaction Report Print Select Setting
• Single Sending
Print Out Error Report
Only
• Broadcasting
Print Out All Report
• Receiving
No Printed Report
◆ Pre-Setting Mail Signature
Disable
X Internet Fax Send Settings
◆ Internet Fax Reception Report
Disable
On/Off Setting
◆ Internet Fax Reception Report
1 Hour
Request Timeout Setting
◆ Number of Resend Times at
2
Reception Error
◆ Maximum Size of E-mail
Unlimited
Attachments
◆ Rotation Sending Setting
All Enable
◆ Printing Page Number at
Enable
Receiver
X Internet Fax Receive Settings
◆ Auto Receive Reduce Setting
Enable
◆ Duplex Reception Setting
Disable
◆ Set Address for Data
Forwarding
◆ Letter Size RX Reduce Print
Disable
◆ POP3 Communication Timeout
60 sec.
Setting
◆ Reception Check Interval
5 min.
Setting
◆ Anti Junk Mail/Domain Name
All Invalid
Setting
◆ Internet Fax Output Setting*16
Varies depending on the
machine configuration
■ Document Filing Settings
● Default Mode Settings
Sharing Mode
● Sort Method Setting
Date
● Document Output Options
X Print
◆ Copy
Enable
◆ Printer
Enable
◆ Scan Send
Disable
◆ Internet Fax Send (Incl. PCDisable
Internet Fax)
◆ Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)
Disable
◆ Scan to HDD
Enable
X Scan Send*4
◆ Copy
Disable
◆ Scan Send
Enable
◆ Internet Fax Send (Incl. PCDisable
Internet Fax)
◆ Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)
Disable
◆ Scan to HDD
Enable
X Internet Fax Send*5
◆ Copy
Disable
◆ Scan Send
Disable
◆ Internet Fax Send (Incl. PCEnable
Internet Fax)
◆ Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)
Disable
◆ Scan to HDD
Disable
X Fax Send*6
◆ Copy
Disable
◆ Scan Send
Disable
◆ Internet Fax Send (Incl. PCDisable
Internet Fax)
◆ Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)
Enable
MX-2300/2700 N/G OTHERS 12 – 4
Item
◆ Scan to HDD
● Administrator Authority Setting
X Delete File
X Delete Folder
● Default Colour Mode Settings
X Colour
X B/W
● Default Exposure Settings
X Exposure
X Original Image Type
X Moiré Reduction
● Initial Resolution Setting
● Colour Data Compression Ratio
Setting
● Default Output Tray*16
● Scan Complete Sound Setting
● Delete All Quick Files
X Delete
X Delete quick files at power up.
(Protected file excluded)
● Disable Stamp for Reprinting
● Batch Print Settings
X Selection of [All Users] is not
allowed.
X Selection of [User Unknown] is not
allowed.
■ List Print (Administrator)
● Administrator Settings List
X Copy
X Print
X Image Send*14
X Document Filing
X Security
X Common
X All Administrator Settings List
● Image Sending Activity Report*14
X Image Sending Activity Report
(Scanner)
X Image Sending Activity Report
(Internet Fax)
X Image Sending Activity Report
(Fax)
● Anti Junk Fax Number List*6
● Anti Junk Mail/Domain Name List*5
● Inbound Routing List*14
● Document Admin List*14
● Web Setting List*15
● Metadata Set List*17
■ Security Settings
● SSL Settings
X HTTPS
X IPP-SSL
■ Enable/Disable Settings
● User Control
X Disabling of Printing by Invalid User
● Operation Settings
X Cancel Auto Clear Timer
X Disabling of Job Priority Operation
X Disabling of Bypass Printing
X Disable Auto Key Repeat
X Disabling of Clock Adjustment
X Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode
● Device Control
X Disabling of Document Feeder*3
X Disabling of Duplex
X Disabling of Large Capacity
Cassette*7
X Disabling of Optional Paper
Drawer*8
X Disabling of Tray Setting
X Disabling of Finisher*9
Factory default setting
Disable
Disable
Disable
Auto
Mono 2
Auto
Text
Disable
600x600dpi
Medium
Varies depending on the
machine configuration
Middle
Enable
Disable
Enable
Enable
-
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Item
Factory default setting
X Disabling of Offset
Disable
X Disabling of Stapler*9
Disable
X Disabling of Punch*11
Disable
X Disabling of Colour Mode*12
Disable
X Disabling of Master Machine Mode Disable
X Disabling of Slave Machine Mode
Disable
● Copy Settings
X Disable Copy in Different Size/
Disable
Direction
X Disabling Deletion of Job Programs Disable
X Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Disable
Copy
X Disabling of Auto Paper Selection
Disable
● Printer settings
X Prohibit Notice Page Printing
Enable
X Prohibit Test Page Printing
Disable
X Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto
Disable
Paper Select
● Image Send Settings
X Disable Switching of Display Order Disable
X Disable Scan Function
◆ PC Scan
Disable
◆ USB Memory Scan
Disable
X Settings to Disable the Registration of Destination
◆ Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel
• Group
Disable
• E-mail
Disable
• Internet Fax
Disable
• Fax
Disable
◆ Disable Registering Destination on Web Page*15
• Group
Disable
• E-mail
Disable
• FTP
Disable
• Desktop
Disable
• Network Folder
Disable
• Internet Fax
Disable
• Fax
Disable
◆ Disable Registration Using
Disable
Network Scan Tools*15
X Settings to Disable Transmission
◆ Disable [Resend] on Fax/Image Disable
Send Mode
◆ Disable selection from the
Address Book
• E-mail
Disable
• FTP
Disable
• Desktop
Disable
• Network Folder
Disable
• Internet Fax
Disable
• Fax
Disable
◆ Disable Direct Entry
• E-mail
Disable
• Internet Fax
Disable
• Fax
Disable
◆ Disable PC-Internet Fax
Disable
Transmission*5
◆ Disable PC-Fax Transmission*6 Disable
● Document Filing Settings
X Disable Stamp for Reprinting
Disable
X Batch Print Settings
◆ Selection of [All Users] is not
Enable
allowed.
◆ Selection of [User Unknown] is
Enable
not allowed.
■ Change Administrator Password
See "TO THE
ADMINISTRATOR OF
THE MACHINE" in the
Safety Guide.
■ Product Key*18
● Network Scanner Expansion Kit
● Printer Expansion Kit
● PS3 Expansion Kit
-
MX-2300/2700 N/G OTHERS 12 – 5
Item
● Internet Fax Expansion Kit
● E-mail Alert and Status
● Application Integration Module
● Serial Number
■ Storing/calling of System Settings
● Restore Factory Defaults
● Store Current Configuration
● Restore Configuration
Factory default setting
-
*1: In some countries and regions, the printer expansion kit must be
installed.
*2: This function is not available in some countries and regions.
*3: When an automatic document feeder is installed.
*4: In some countries and regions, the network scanner expansion
kit must be installed.
*5: When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
*6: When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.
*7: When a large capacity tray is installed.
*8: When a paper drawer is installed.
*9: When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed.
*10: When a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
*11: When a punch module is installed.
*12: When a colour-related problem has occurred.
*13: When the PS3 expansion kit is installed.
*14: In some countries and regions, the facsimile expansion kit or
the Internet fax expansion kit or the network scanner expansion kit
must be installed.
*15: When network connection is enabled.
*16: When a right tray is installed.
*17: When the application integration module is installed.
*18: Depending on the peripheral devices installed, it may not be
possible to use some settings.
2. Paper JAM code
A. JAM cause code list
(1)
PCU JAM cause
Code
NO_JAM_CAUSE
NO_MATCH
STOP_JAM
TRAY1
CPFD1_S1
CPFD1_N2
CPFD1_N3
CPFD1_N4
CPFD1_S2
CPFD1_S3
CPFD1_S4
TRAY2
CPFD2_N3
CPFD2_N4
CPFD2_S2
CPFD2_S3
CPFD2_S4
PPD1_N1
PPD1_N2
PPD1_N3
PPD1_N4
PPD1_NM
PPD1_NL
PPD1_NA
PPD1_S1
PPD1_S2
Code content
No JAM. Also used for JAM canceling.
Parameter no matching
Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)
Cassette 1 paper feed JAM (CPFD1 not-reached
JAM)
CPFD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
Cassette 2 paper feed JAM (CPFD2 not-reached
JAM)
CPFD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
CPFD2 Not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
CPFD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
CPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
CPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Manual feed tray feed
paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
Code
PPD1_S3
PPD1_S4
PPD1_SM
PPD1_SL
PPD1_SA
PPD2_N1
PPD2_N2
PPD2_N3
PPD2_N4
PPD2_NM
PPD2_NL
PPD2_NA
PPD2_S1
PPD2_S2
PPD2_S3
PPD2_S4
PPD2_SM
PPD2_SL
PPD2_SA
PPD2_PRI
POD1_N
POD1_S
POD2_N
POD2_S
POD3_N
POD3_S
APPD1_N
APPD1_S
APPD2_N
APPD2_S
TRAY3
DPFD1_N4
DPFD1_S3
DPFD1_S4
TRAY4
DPFD2_S4
MFT
MPFD_S
LCC
LPFD_SL
SIZE_ILG
MTR_ILG
FJPID_N
FJPID_S
FJPOD_N
FJPOD_S
FED_N
FED_S
FFPD_N
FFPD_S
FEXIT_S
FSTPL
FPNCH
FDOP
FIN_TIME
MX-2300/2700 N/G OTHERS 12 – 6
Code content
PPD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (Manual 2 feed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (Manual feed tray feed
paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD2 JAM (Image preparation wait timeout)
POD1 not-reached JAM
POD1 remaining JAM
POD2 not-reached JAM
POD2 remaining JAM
POD3 not-reached JAM
POD3 remaining JAM
APPD1 not-reached JAM
APPD1 remaining JAM
APPD2 not-reached JAM
APPD2 remaining JAM
Cassette 3 (Desk 1) paper feed JAM
DPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
Cassette 4 (Desk 2) paper feed JAM
DPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (MPFD notreached)
MPFD remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
Side LCC paper feed JAM (LPFD1 not-reached)
LPFD remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
Size illegal JAM
Motor driver trouble JAM
Interface transport inlet port sensor not-reached JAM
Interface transport inlet port sensor remaining JAM
Interface transport outlet sensor not-reached JAM
Interface transport outlet sensor remaining JAM
Finisher inlet port sensor not-reached JAM
Finisher inlet port sensor remaining JAM
Finisher saddle not-reached JAM
Finisher saddle remaining JAM
Finisher bundle exit remaining JAM
Staple JAM
Punch JAM
Finisher door open
Finisher paper clearance abnormality JAM
(2)
SCU JAM cause
Code
NO_JAM_CAUSE
NO_MATCH
STOP_JAM
SPPD1_N
SPPD1_S
SPPD2_N
SPPD2_S
SPPD3_N
SPPD3_S
SPPD4_N
SPPD4_S
SPPD5_N
SPPD5_S
SPOD_N
SPOD_S
SPRDMD_S
SPSD_SCN
SPPD2_NR
SPPD2_SR
ICU_REQ
Code content
No JAM. Also used for JAM canceling.
Parameter no matching
Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)
SPPD1 not-reached JAM
SPPD1 remaining JAM
SPPD2 not-reached JAM
SPPD2 remaining JAM
SPPD3 not-reached JAM
SPPD3 remaining JAM
SPPD4 not-reached JAM
SPPD4 remaining JAM
SPPD5 not-reached JAM
SPPD5 remaining JAM
SPOD not-reached JAM
SPOD remaining JAM
SPRDMD remaining JAM
Exposure start notification wait timeout
SPPD2 reverse not-reached JAM
SPPD2 reverse remaining JAM
ICU factor stop JAM
MX-2300/2700 N/G OTHERS 12 – 7
[A] EXTERNAL OUTFIT
(1)
Front cabinet
Service
Manual
MX2700N
1) Remove the front cabinet band and the front cabinet hinge, and
remove the front cabinet.
1. Disassembly and assembly
A. Cabinet
(5)
(17)
(11)
(9)
(12)
(1)
(13)
(18)
(10)
(2) Rear cabinet
(8)
(7)
(2)
(16)
(15)
1) Remove the screws, and remove the rear cabinet.
(6)
(14)
(4)
2
1
(3)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
Parts
Front cabinet
Rear cabinet
Left cabinet rear lower
Left cabinet
Upper cabinet right
Upper cabinet left.
Upper cabinet rear cover
Upper cabinet rear
Front cabinet upper
Right cabinet front
Right connection cabinet
Right cabinet rear cover
Right cabinet rear
Paper exit cover
Paper exit tray cabinet
Left cabinet rear
Operation panel base plate
Frame cover
(3) Left cabinet rear lower
(4) Left cabinet
1) Remove the paper feed tray 1 and 2.
2
1
MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL OUTFIT A – 1
2) Remove the desk connection cover (A). Remove the screws,
then remove the left cabinet rear lower (B) and the left cabinet
(C).
(8) Upper cabinet rear
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screws, and remove the
grounding wire. Remove the screws, and remove the upper
cabinet rear.
C
B
2
4
A
3
1
(5) Upper cabinet right
(9) Front cabinet upper
(6) Upper cabinet left.
1) Remove the SPF glass (A). Remove the glass holder (B) and
the table glass (C).
2
1
3
C
1) Open the front cabinet. Remove the screws, and remove the
front cabinet upper.
B
A
2) Remove the screws, and remove the upper cabinet right (A)
and the upper cabinet left (B).
B
A
(10) Right cabinet front
(11) Right connection cabinet
(12) Right cabinet rear cover
(13) Right cabinet rear
1) Remove the front cabinet upper. (Refer to Front Cabinet
Upper.)
2) Open the right door and the right cabinet lower.
(7) Upper cabinet rear cover
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover lid (A). Remove the
screws, and remove the upper cabinet rear cover (B).
A
1
1
2
2
B
MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL OUTFIT A – 2
3
3) Remove the screws, and remove the right cabinet front (A).
Remove the screws, and remove the right connection cabinet
(B). Remove the ozone filter cover (C). Remove the screws,
and remove the right cabinet rear cover (D). Remove the desk
connection cover (E). Remove the screws, and remove the
right cabinet rear (F).
B
1
6
(17) Operation panel base plate
1) Remove the front cabinet upper. (Refer to Front Cabinet
Upper.)
2) Remove the screws, and remove the operation panel base
plate.
2
D
4
A
3
C
F
E
5
(18) Frame cover
1) Remove the waste toner box, and open the drum positioning
unit. (Refer to Process Drum Unit in Image Process Section.)
(14) Paper exit cover
(15) Paper exit tray cabinet
2) Remove the front cabinet. (Refer to Front Cabinet)
(16) Left cabinet rear
1) Remove the paper exit cover (A). Open the front cabinet and
remove the screws.
3) Remove the front cabinet upper. (Refer to Front Cabinet
Upper.)
4) Remove the screws, and remove the frame cover.
Remove the screws, and remove the paper exit tray cabinet
(B).
Remove the screws, and remove the left cabinet rear (C).
1
A
C
4
2
2
3
B
MX-2300/2700 N/G EXTERNAL OUTFIT A – 3
CN4
1
2
3
4
LVDS-P PWB
FG
CN3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
CN2
1
2
3
S3B-PH-SM4-TB
/CCFT
D-GND
24V_EXT
52746-1570
VO
LP
D-GND
CP
D-GND
M
3.3V_EXT
D0
D1
D-GND
D2
D3
D-GND
DISP
VEE
04FM-1.0SP-1.9-GW-TF
/YL(Y1)
XH(X1)
YH(Y2)
/XL(X2)
MFP OPE-P
PWB
SCN-CNT PWB
MX-2300/2700 N/G OPERATION PANEL B – 1
1
2
3
24VEXT
/SIZE_LED1
/SIZE_LED2
F-GND
5VEXT
D-GND
OCSW
CN3
n PWRSW
1
D-GND
2
D-GND
3
S3B-PH-K-S
PDSEL0
PDSEL1
PDSEL2
5VN
PD
D-GND
CN1
3
n PWRSW
2
D-GND
1
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
CN2
S02(8.0)B-BHS
CCFT+
/CCFT
/CCFT
D-GND
24V_EXT
S3B-PH-K-S
VO
LP
D-GND
CP
D-GND
M
3.3V_EXT
D0
D1
D-GND
D2
D3
D-GND
DISP
VEE
BACK LIGHT
CN2
1
PDSEL0
PDSEL1
2
PDSEL2
3
5VN
4
PD
5
D-GND
6
B6B-PH-SM3-TB
CN1
3
2
1
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
TOUCH PANEL
CN136
1
5VEXT
2
D-GND
3
OCSW
4
24VEXT
5
/SIZE_LED1
6
/SIZE_LED2
B6P-PH-K-S
CN1
1
D-GND
2
3.3V
3
5VN
D-GND
4
5
PD
6
PDSEL0
7
PDSEL1
8
PDSEL2
9
/KEYIN
10
SEG0
11
SEG1
12
SEG2
13
/F0
14
/F1
15
/F2
16
/F3
17
/BZR
18
D-GND
19
n PWRSW
20
n WU_KEY
21 n INFO_LED
22
POW_LED
23
WU_LED
24
D-GND
25
5VO
26
D-GND
52610-2671
CN135
D-GND
26
3.3V
25
5VN
24
D-GND
23
PD
22
PDSEL0
21
PDSEL1
20
PDSEL2
19
/KEYIN
18
SEG0
17
SEG1
16
SEG2
15
/F0
14
/F1
13
/F2
12
/F3
11
/BZR
10
D-GND
9
n PWRSW
8
n WU_KEY
7
n INFO_LED
6
POW_LED
5
WU_LED
4
D-GND
3
5VO
2
D-GND
1
52030-2629
D-GND
CN_CHK_OUT
LCD_CLK+
LCD_CLKD-GND
LCD_DAT2+
LCD_DAT2D-GND
LCD_DAT1+
LCD_DAT1D-GND
LCD_DAT0+
LCD_DAT0D-GND
DISP
3.3V_EXT
VEEON
VCONT
AVCC
SC_TEMP
P-GND
24V_EXT
NC
/CCFT1
CN_CHK_IN(LCD)
X2CN
Y2CN
X1CN
Y1CN
D-GND
52271-3090
CN1
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN125
D-GND
30
CN_CHK_OUT 29
LCD_CLK+
28
LCD_CLK27
D-GND
26
LCD_DAT2+ 25
LCD_DAT224
D-GND
23
LCD_DAT1+ 22
LCD_DAT121
D-GND
20
LCD_DAT0+ 19
LCD_DAT018
D-GND
17
DISP
16
3.3V_EXT
15
VEEON
14
VCONT
13
AVCC
12
SC_TEMP
11
P-GND
10
24V_EXT
9
NC
8
/CCFT1
7
CN_CHK_IN(LCD)
6
X2CN
5
Y2CN
4
X1CN
3
Y1CN
2
D-GND
1
52030-3029
MX2700N
[B]
OPERATION PANEL
Service Manual
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
4
OCSW
3
LCD
1
PWRSW
2
LCD INVERTOR
PWB
Signal
OCSW
PWRSW
Name
Original cover SW
Operaton panel power supply switch
No.
1
2
3
Name
MFP OPE-P PWB
LCD INV PWB/LVDS PWB
Document detection light receiving PWB
4
Document detection light emitting PWB
Function/Operation
Timing switch for document size detection
Outputs the DC power supply ON/OFF control signal.
Function/Operation
Detects the key pressed on the operation panel.
Drives LCD and the backlight, and controls the touch-panel.
Receives the light from the document detection light emitting PWB, and detects the
document size.
Emits light for document size detection.
2. Operational descriptions
(1) Operation panel unit
1) Remove the paper exit cover and the upper cabinet left.
A. Outline
The operation panel unit is composed of the MFP OPE-P PWB, the
LCD INV PWB/LVDS PWB, the LCD unit, and the operation keys,
and is used to operate the machine and to set and display the
machine status.
2) Remove the front cabinet upper and the operation panel base
plate.
3) Remove each cables and the grounding sheet.
The MFP OPE-P PWB is connected to the document detection light
receiving PWB for detecting the document size. It receives light
from the document detection light emitting PWB attached to the
rear frame, detecting the document size.
The power switch of the operation panel supplies the ON/OFF control signal of the DC power source.
3. Disassembly and assembly
A. Operation panel section
(1)
Unit
Operation panel unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
Parts
LCD INV PWB
LVDS PWB
LCD module
Touch panel
POWER SW PWB
MFP OPE-P PWB
4) Remove the operation panel unit.
(1)
(1)-b
(1)-d
(1)-a
(1)-c
(1)-f
(1)-e
a. LCD INV PWB
b. LVDS PWB
1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the LCD INV PWB (A). Remove the LVDS PWB (B).
A
MX-2300/2700 N/G OPERATION PANEL B – 2
B
c. LCD module
3) Remove the touch panel.
1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the LCD holder.
e. POWER SW PWB
1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the POWER SW PWB.
3) Remove the LCD module.
f. MFP OPE-P PWB
1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the POWER SW PWB.
d. Touch panel
1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the LCD unit. Remove the flat cable.
3) Remove the grounding sheet, and remove the MFP OPE-P
PWB.
MX-2300/2700 N/G OPERATION PANEL B – 3
MX2700N
[C]
SCANNER SECTION
Service Manual
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
MHPS
5
4
6
9
3
7
CLI
MIM
3
2
8
1
501190-4017
CN1
501190-2017
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
3
4
AGND
AGND
AGND
A12V
CCD_CPAGND
CCD_CP+
A5V
AGND
AGND
CCD_RS+
A3.3V
CCD_RS/LVDS_STBY
AGND
/RES_CCDAD
CCD_CLK2AD_SCLK
CCD_CLK2+
AD_WRSO
AGND
AD_SEN
CCD_CLK1+
AD_RDSI
CCD_CLK1AGND
AGND
AD_CLPIN
AD_MCLKAD_BLKCLP
AD_MCLK+
CCD_SH
AGND
AGND
CLKP1_OUT+
SH_OUT+
CLKP1_OUTSH_OUTAGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
TC+
TE+
TCTEAGND
AGND
TB+
TD+
TBTDAGND
AGND
TA+
TCLK+
TATCLKAGND
AGND
MiM_A
MiM_B
MiM_/A
MiM_/B
CN134
CN130
CN148
CN147
CN137
1
2
3
4
5
5
4
3
2
1
P-GND
P-GND
CL
24VPD
24VPD
AGND
AGND
TC+
TE+
TCTEAGND
AGND
TB+
TD+
TBTDAGND
AGND
TA+
TCLK+
TATCLKAGND
AGND
CCD PWB
AGND
AGND
AGND
A12V
CCD_CPAGND
CCD_CP+
A5V
AGND
AGND
CCD_RS+
A3.3V
CCD_RS/LVDS_STBY
AGND
/RES_CCDAD
CCD_CLK2AD_SCLK
CCD_CLK2+
AD_WRSO
AGND
AD_SEN
CCD_CLK1+
AD_RDSI
CCD_CLK1AGND
AGND
AD_CLPIN
AD_MCLKAD_BLKCLP
AD_MCLK+
CCD_SH
AGND
AGND
CLKP1_OUT+
SH_OUT+
CLKP1_OUTSH_OUTAGND
AGND
1
2
CN3
1
2
3
P-GND
P-GND
CL
24VPD
24VPD
CL
INVERTOR
PWB
MHPS
D-GND
5V
3
2
1
MHPS
D-GND
5V
2
Signal
CLI
MHPS
MIM
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Name
Scanner lamp
Scanner home position sensor
Scanner motor
Name
Pulley belt
Pulley
Scanner drive wire
Reflector
No. 2 mirror
No. 3 mirror
Lens
CCD PWB
Idle gear
SCN-CNT PWB
501190-4017
501190-2017
Function/Operation
Illuminates the document. (Xenon lamp)
Detects the home position of the copy lamp unit.
Drives the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.
Function/Operation
Transmits the scanner motor power to the pulley.
Drives the scanner drive wire.
Transmits the scanner motor power to the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.
Condenses the copy lamp light.
Inducts the document image into the No.3 mirror.
Inducts the document image into the lens.
Reduces the document image (light), and project it on CCD.
Reads the document image (optical signal) and converts it into the electric signal.
Transmits the scanner motor power to the belt.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SCANNER SECTION C – 1
2. Operational descriptions
A. Outline
This section functions and operates as follows:
1)
The copy lamp radiates light onto the document, and the
reflected light is scanned by the three line (RGB) CCD element
and then converted into image signals (analog).
2)
The image signals (analog) are converted into 10bit digital signals by the A/D converter.
3)
The image signals (digital) are sent to the image process section (scanner control PWB).
R
B
G
B. Detail description
(1)
R
Optical section drive
The optical section drive power is transmitted from the scanner
motor (MIM) through the belt, the drive pulley, and the wire to drive
the copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are attached by the
drive wires.
G
B
(Image data per 1 line)
The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled by the drive signal sent from
the scanner control PWB.
(2)
Scanner lamp drive
R
The scanner lamp (CLI) is driven by the scanner lamp drive voltage
generated in the CL inverter PWB according to the control signal
sent from the scanner control PWB.
(3)
Image scan/color separation
G
Red component of
image data
(4)
Green component of
image data
B
Blue component of
image data
Image signal A/D conversion
Light is radiated to a document by the scanner lamp, and the
brightness of the reflected light is received by the three line (RGB)
CCD element and converted into (analog) image signals.
1)
Each image signal (analog) of RGB is converted into 10bit digital signal by the A/D converter.
Each color component of RGB is separately extracted from the
document image by the three lines (RGB) of the CCD elements.
2)
Each 10bit digital image signal of RGB is sent to the image
process section.
The red CCD extracts the red components from the document
image, the green CCD the green components, and the blue CCD
the blue components. This operation is called Color Separation.
Each color pixel has 10bit information (256 gradations).
CCD PWB
The CCD element, appeared as one unit, but has three separate
rows of CCD elements drive each for (RGB).
Scanning of a document in the main scanning direction is performed by the CCD elements. Scanning of a document in the sub
scanning direction is performed by shifting the scanner unit position
with the scanner motor.
3
CCD
Document images are optically reduced by the lens and projected
to the CCD elements.
Scanning resolution is 600 dpi.
R
IC
R ADC
G
IC
G ADC
B
IC
B ADC
Transfer IC
R
(5)
G
R
G
B
B
Zooming operation
Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing
the scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
Zooming in the main scanning direction is not performed optically
but by the image process technology (software).
MX-2300/2700 N/G SCANNER SECTION C – 2
3. Disassembly and assembly
(1)
A. Optical system
(1)-o
Scanner unit
1)
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet
rear.
2)
Remove the table glass and the SPF glass.
3)
Remove the upper cabinet right and the upper cabinet left.
4)
Disconnect the connector and remove the snap band.
5)
Remove the screws, and remove the scanner unit.
(1)-n
(1)-b
(1)-o
(1)-m
(1)
(1)-a
(1)-k
(1)-f
(1)-e
(1)-h (1)-l
(1)-p
(1)-j
(1)-q
(1)-g
(1)-f
(1)-p
(1)-c
(1)-i
(1)
Unit
Scanner unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
(1)-d
Parts
Table glass
SPF glass
Lens
CCD
Reflector
Mirrors
Lamp
CL inverter PWB
CCD unit
Scanner motor
Scanner home position
sensor
Original cover SW
Document detection light
receiving PWB
Document detection light
emitting PWB
Rails
Drive wire
Drive belt
Maintenance
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
a. Table glass
✩
✕
✕
b. SPF glass
1)
Remove the SPF glass (A). Remove the glass holder (B) and
the table glass (C).
2
1
A
MX-2300/2700 N/G SCANNER SECTION C – 3
C
3
B
4)
c. Lens
d. CCD
1)
Remove the glass holder and the table glass.
2)
Remove the dark box cover (A) and the lens cover (B).
Shift the lamp unit to the right end. Loosen the screws and
remove the wire.
2
3
A
2
1
B
5)
3)
While rotating the lamp unit, lift the lamp unit. Remove the harness holder and the flat cable. Remove the lamp unit.
Clean the lens (A) and CCD (B).
3
A
2
1
B
e. Reflector
6)
Clean the mirrors.
f. Mirrors
1)
Remove the glass holder and the table glass.
2)
Shift the lamp unit and the mirror unit.
3)
Clean the reflector and No. 2 and 3 mirrors.
g. Lamp
h. CL inverter PWB
1)
Remove the table glass and the SPF glass.
2)
Remove the lamp unit.
3)
Disconnect the connector and remove the lamp.
2
1
MX-2300/2700 N/G SCANNER SECTION C – 4
4)
Remove the CL inverter PWB.
k. Scanner home position sensor
1)
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet
rear.
2)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the scanner home position sensor.
1
2
i. CCD unit
1)
Remove the dark box. Disconnect the connector and remove
the CCD unit.
l. Original cover SW
1)
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet
rear.
2)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the document cover
SW.
j. Scanner motor
1)
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet
rear.
2)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the scanner motor.
m. Document detection light receiving PWB
1)
Remove the operation panel base plate.
2)
Disconnect the connector and remove the document detection
light receiving PWB.
2
1
MX-2300/2700 N/G SCANNER SECTION C – 5
1 : Dec. 15 2005
n. Document detection light emitting PWB
p. Drive wire
1)
Remove the upper cabinet rear.
2)
Remove the screws, and remove the light emitting unit.
q. Drive belt
1 * Install the drive wire in the sequence shown in the figure below.
Wind the drive wire 10 turns around the winding pulley.
The 9th turn must be fixed with a screw.
7
4
6
2
5
1
3
7
3)
Remove the document detection light emitting PWB
4
10 9 8 1
6
5
1 8 9 10
2
1
3
When moving the copy lamp unit manually for cleaning or adjusting
the scanner section and the mirror section, be sure to turn OFF the
main power source (the power switch inside the front cover) and
confirm that the power LED on the operation panel is OFF.
If the copy lamp unit is manually moved with the main power ON, the
trouble code "F6-30" may occur.
If the trouble code "F6-30" is not canceled by turning OFF/ON the
main power, refer to the Service Manual (FAX self diagnostics and
the trouble codes).
o. Rails
MX-2300/2700 N/G SCANNER SECTION C – 6
4. Maintenance
A. Optical Section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
Parts name
1
Mirror/lens/
reflector/CCD
Table glass/SPF
glass
Scanner lamp
Rails
Drive belt/drive
wire
2
3
4
5
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
Mechanism parts
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
{
✩
✕
4
2
4
4
2
1
1
4
5
3
5
1
MX-2300/2700 N/G SCANNER SECTION C – 7
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
Specified position
MX2700N
[D]
MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION
Service Manual
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
CN1
2
PSFMA//
INT24V1
5
PSFMB//
3
PSFMA/
1
INT24V1
6
PSFMB/
4
B6B-PH-K-S
DRIVER
MAIN PWB
AC PWB
24V3
/MPGS
/MPFS
24V3
/MPUC
24V3
QR/P4 32PIN
CN26
15
31
30
14
28
13
S
5
4
/MPGS
/MPFS
6
/MPUC
3
24V3
1
2
4
3
5
6
B32B-PHDSS-B
8
9
6
7
14
15
12
13
10
11
P
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
SM18P
/CLUM2
P-GND
/CLUM1
P-GND
24V3
/CPUC2
24V3
/CPUC1
24V3
/CPFC
R
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
CPFM_LD
2
/CPFM_D
1
/CPFM_CK
4
P-GND
5
B32B-PHDSS-B
5
4
3
2
1
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_D
/CPFM_CK
P-GND
INT24V2
5
4
3
2
1
8
9
10
5
4
D-GND
5VLED7
4
5
2
3
/MPGS
24V3
7
6
1
MPFD
8
FG-OUT
5V
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_D
/CPFM_CK
P-GND
INT24V2
B7P-PH-K-S
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
D-GND
5VLED7
MPFD
PHNR-8-H + BU08P-TR-P-Ha
24V3
1
8
7
/MPFS
2
6
HPDET
3
CN3(2/2)
7
3
7
6
5
4
2
1
PHNR-2-H + BU02P-TR-P-H
DF11-6DP-SP1
HPDET
PSFMA//
INT24V1
PSFMB//
PSFMA/
INT24V1
PSFMB/
3
CN17
/CLUM2
P-GND
/CLUM1
P-GND
24V3
/CPUC2
24V3
/CPUC1
24V3
/CPFC
PCU PWB
15
31
30
14
28
13
P
CN9
INT24V2
B3P-PH-K-S
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
1
2
24V3
/MPUC
2
1
P
1
2
SM2P
24V3
/MPFS
R
1
2
PFM
HPDET
D-GND
5VLED7
PHNR-5-H + BU05P-TR-P-H
4
5
1
2
3
/MPGS
24V3
5VLED7
D-GND
MPFD
2
1
5
4
3
R
1
2
MPUC
1
2
3
SM2P
24V3
/MPGS
6
4
2
5
3
1
P
1
2
MPFD
D-GND
5VLED7
5VLED7
5VLED7
5VLED7
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
DF11-6DP-SP2
4
1
5
RIGHT
DOOR I/F
PWB
MPGS
CN3(1/2)
MPLD
MPLD2
5VLED12
5VN
MPWD
16
13
18
19
20
PHNR-14-H + BU14P-TR-P-H
12
MPLD
3
14
MPLD2
1
11
5VLED12
4
10
9
5VN
MPWD
MTOP2
22
8
MTOP2
7
24
7
5VLED13
8
3
TH_D/HUD_M
2
MPWD
PHNR-9-H + BU09P-TR-P-H
5
6
5VLED13
MPFS
MPFD
MPED
CPFM
6
5
4
MPLD
D-GND
5VLED12
4
5
6
1
2
3
MPLD
D-GND
5VLED12
3
2
1
5VN
MPWD
D-GND
7
8
9
3
2
1
D-GND
5VN
MPWD
1
2
3
MTOP2
D-GND
5VLED13
MTOP1
25
6
MTOP1
9
5VLED9
27
5
5VLED9
10
1
2
3
MTOP1
D-GND
5VLED9
5VN
28
HUD_M
29
D-GND
14
TH_M
31
S32B-PHDSS-B
4
3
2
1
5VN
HUD_M
D-GND
TH_M
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5VN
HUD_M
D-GND
TH_M
1
3
5
4
2
7
6
8
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
DF11-8DP-SP1
MX-2300/2700 N/G MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION D – 1
MTOP1
MTOP2
MPLD
Signal name
CPFM
MPED
MPFD
MPDS
MPGS
MPLD
MPUC
MPWD
MTOP1
MTOP2
PFM
Name
Paper feed motor
Manual feed paper empty detection
Manual feed paper entry detection
Paper pickup solenoid
Manual paper feed gate solenoid
Manual feed paper length detector
Manual paper feed clutch
Manual paper feed tray paper width detector
Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 1
Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 2
Transport motor
TH_M/HUD_M
Temperature/humidity detection
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Name
Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray)
Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray)
Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray)
Torque limiter
Transport roller 12 (Drive)
Function/Operation
Paper feed section drive
Manual paper feed tray paper empty detection
Manual paper feed tray paper empty detection
Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
Controls the manual paper feed gate solenoid Open/Close.
Manual paper feed tray paper length detection
Controls the manual paper feed section paper feed roller ON/OFF.
Manual paper feed tray paper width detection
Manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position detection (storage position)
Manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position detection (pulling-out position)
Transport drive between the resist roller and the paper feed section. Transport drive
between the resist roller and the right door section.
Detects temperature/humidity.
Function/Operation
Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation roller to
prevent double feed.
Transports paper transported from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8.
Transports paper fed from the manual feed tray to the transport roller 8.
2. Operational descriptions
3. Disassembly and assembly
The paper pickup roller moves up and down to press paper and
separates the top paper, which is fed to the paper feed roller.
A. Manual paper feed section
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the paper transport section,
and the separation roller prevents double feed.. ON/OFF control of
the pickup roller and the paper feed roller is made by the manual
paper feed clutch. Paper is transported to the resist roller by the
manual paper transport roller.
(2)
(2)-i
(2)-e
(2)-b
(2)-g
(2)-a
(2)-h
(2)-c
(2)-f
(2)-d
(1)-a
(1)-b
(1)-d
(1)-c
(1)-e
(1)
(1)
Unit
Manual
paper feed
tray unit
a
b
c
d
e
(2)
Manual
paper feed
unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
Parts
Temperature/humidity sensors
Manual paper feed tray pull-out
position detector 1
Manual paper feed tray pull-out
position detector 2
Manual paper feed tray paper
width detector
Manual feed paper length
detector
Paper pickup roller
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
Manual paper feed gate
solenoid
Transport roller 12 (Drive)
Manual feed paper entry
detection
Torque limiter
Manual feed paper empty
detection
Paper pickup solenoid
MX-2300/2700 N/G MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION D – 2
Maintenance
✕{
✕{
✕{
✕
(1)
1)
Manual paper feed tray unit
5)
Open the right door unit.
Remove the MF tray installing shaft, and remove the manual
paper feed tray unit.
2
1
2)
Remove the screws, and remove the connector cover.
Remove the screws, then remove the ADU inner cover.
a. Temperature/humidity sensors
b. Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 1
c. Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 2
d. Manual paper feed tray paper width detector
3)
Remove the ADU cabinet F and the ADU cabinet R.
1)
Remove the manual paper feed tray unit.
2)
Remove the MF tray upper inside cover.
3)
Disengage the pawl. Lift the MF tray upper and the MF tray 2,
and disconnect the connector.
1
2
3
4)
4)
Remove the MF harness cover and disconnect the connector.
1
Temperature/humidity sensor (A), manual paper feed tray pullout position detector 1 (B), manual paper feed tray pull-out
position detector 2 (C)
A
B
C
2
MX-2300/2700 N/G MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION D – 3
5)
Manual paper feed tray paper width detector
a. Paper pickup roller
b. Paper feed roller
1)
Remove the MF pickup cover.
2)
Remove the paper pickup roller (A) and the paper feed roller
(B).
e. Manual feed paper length detector
1)
Remove the manual paper feed tray unit.
2)
Remove the MF tray 2.
3)
Remove the MF tray 2 lower.
B
A
4)
Manual feed paper length detector
c. Separation roller
1)
(2)
1)
Manual paper feed unit
Remove the MF pickup cover.
2)
Remove the paper pickup roller and the paper feed roller.
3)
Open the MF lower maintenance cover, remove the separation
roller.
2
Open the right door unit.
2)
Remove the manual paper feed tray unit.
3)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the manual paper feed
unit.
1
MX-2300/2700 N/G MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION D – 4
d. Manual paper feed gate solenoid
f. Manual feed paper entry detection
1)
Remove the manual paper feed unit.
1)
2)
Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
2)
Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
3)
Remove the transport roller 12 (Drive).
4)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the MF front plate.
Remove the transport roller 7 (Idle) unit.
Remove the manual paper feed unit.
2
3)
Disconnect the connector, and disengage the pawl. Remove
the manual paper feed gate solenoid.
1
5)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the sensor mounting
plate.
e. Transport roller 12 (Drive)
1)
Remove the manual paper feed unit.
2)
Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
3)
Remove the parts, and remove the transport roller 12 (Drive).
g. Torque limiter
1)
1
2
Remove the manual paper feed unit.
2)
Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
3)
Remove the transport roller 12 (Drive).
4)
Remove the parts, and remove the MF drive plate.
2
1
1
MX-2300/2700 N/G MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION D – 5
5)
Remove the E-ring. Remove the shaft and remove the torque
limiter.
1
3
2
i. Paper pickup solenoid
1)
Remove the manual paper feed unit.
2)
Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
3)
Remove the transport roller 12 (Drive).
4)
Remove the MF drive plate.
5)
Remove the MF front plate.
6)
Remove the MF upper base paper guide unit.
7)
Remove the MF upper guide supporting plate.
h. Manual feed paper empty detection
1)
Remove the manual paper feed unit.
2)
Remove the MF pickup cover and the MFADU paper guide.
2
2
1
1
3)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the sensor mounting
plate.
8)
Remove the paper pickup solenoid.
MX-2300/2700 N/G MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION D – 6
4. Maintenance
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
Parts name
1
2
3
4
5
Pickup roller
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
Torque limiter
Transport rollers
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical
parts
Mechanism
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
{
✕
{
5
4
2
1
3
MX-2300/2700 N/G MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION D – 7
Remark: Refer to the
Parts Guide. Block/
Item No. (Only the
replacement parts are
described.)
(P/G No.: [16]-33)
(P/G No.: [16]-29)
(P/G No.: [15]-37)
P
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
16
17
19
21
23
18
20
22
24
2
4
6
10
12
14
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
PHNR-9-H+
BU09P-TR-P-H
D-GND
CPFD2
5VN
D-GND
CLUD2
5VNPD
D-GND
CPED2
5VNPD
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
PHNR-12-H+
BU12P-TR-P-H
D-GND
6
5
CPFD1
4
5VN
12
D-GND
CLUD1
11
5VNPD
10
9
D-GND
8
CPED1
7
5VNPD
D-GND
3
DSW_R
2
5VN
1
PHNR-2-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
5
4
3
2
1
CPED2
6
1
3
10
9
5
7
8
3
7
6
5
4
2
1
B7P-PH-K-S
4
CPFD1
11
PCU
DRIVER MAIN PWB
MX-2300/2700 N/G TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION E – 1
CPFM CPUC1
CPUC2
DSW_R
D-GND
CSPD2
5VNPD
2
24V3
/CPFC
D-GND
CPED2
5VNPD
CLUD1
CPED1
24V3
/CPUC1
1
2
3
1
2
/CLUM1
P-GND
B2P-PH-K-S
1
2
3
1
2
24V3
/CPUC2
D-GND
CLUD2
5VNPD
CSS1
D-GND
1
2
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_D
/CPFM_CK
P-GND
INT24V2
1
2
1
2
3
D-GND
CSPD1
5VNPD
1
2
3
5
4
3
2
1
R
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
/CLUM2
P-GND
B2P-PH-K-S
2
1
D-GND
CPFD2
5VN
D-GND
DSW_R
5VN
CPFM_LD
2
/CPFM_D
1
/CPFM_CK
4
P-GND
5
B32B-PHDSS-B
SM18P
/CLUM2
P-GND
/CLUM1
P-GND
24V3
/CPUC2
24V3
/CPUC1
24V3
/CPFC
CSS2
D-GND
D-GND
CPED1
5VNPD
1
2
3
8
9
6
7
14
15
12
13
10
11
P
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
2
1
S4P-PH-K-S
D-GND
CLUD1
5VNPD
1
2
3
1
2
3
S4P-PH-K-S
D-GND
CPFD1
5VN
1
2
3
CN17
/CLUM2
P-GND
/CLUM1
P-GND
24V3
/CPUC2
24V3
/CPUC1
24V3
/CPFC
3
1
2
3
1
2
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
11
12
PCU PWB
CN9
INT24V2
B3P-PH-K-S
B30B-PHDSS-B
DF1B-24p
CPFD1
CLUD1
CPED1
DSW_R
CSPD1
CPWD11
CPWD12
CSS1
CSS2
CSS11
CSS12
CSS13
CSS14
CSS21
CSS22
CSS23
CSS24
CPFD2
CLUD2
CPED2
CSPD2
CPWD21
CPWD22
AC PWB
7
24
5
22
6
23
8
25
3
20
1
18
2
19
4
21
9
26
10
11
S
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
16
17
19
21
23
18
20
22
24
2
4
6
10
12
14
[E] TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION
D-GND
5VN
D-GND
5VNPD
D-GND
5VNPD
D-GND
5VNPD
CN4
D-GND
5VN
D-GND
5VNPD
D-GND
5VNPD
D-GND
5VN
D-GND
5VNPD
D-GND
D-GND
CN6
CPFD1
1
CLUD1
3
CPED1
5
DSW_R
7
CSPD1
9
CPWD11
21
CPWD12
23
CSS1
11
CSS2
10
CSS11
13
CSS12
15
CSS13
17
CSS14
19
CSS21
12
CSS22
14
CSS23
16
CSS24
18
CPFD2
2
CLUD2
4
CPED2
6
CSPD2
8
CPWD21
22
CPWD22
24
B24B-PHDSS-B
MX2700N
Service Manual
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
PHNR-2-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
2
1
PHNR-2-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
2
1
2
1
FG-OUT
5V
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_D
/CPFM_CK
P-GND
INT24V2
CLUM1
CLUM2
CPFC
CSS1
CSPD1
11
CLUD2
CPFD2
CSS2
CSPD2
Signal name
CLUD1
CLUD2
CLUM1
CLUM2
CPED 1
CPED 2
CPFC
CPFD1
CPFD2
CPFM
CPUC1
CPUC2
CSPD1
CSPD2
CSS1
CSS2
DSW_C
Name
Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection)
Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection)
Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 1)
Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 2)
Tray 1 paper empty detection
Tray 2 paper empty detection
Tray vertical transport clutch
Tray 1 transport detection (Paper entry detection)
Tray 2 transport detection (Paper entry detection)
Paper feed motor
Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2)
Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection
Tray 1 presence detection
Tray 2 presence detection
Tray 1, 2 transfer cover open/close detection
No.
1
2
3
4
Name
Paper feed roller (No.1 paper feed tray)
Paper pickup roller (No. 1 paper feed tray)
Separation roller (No. 1 paper feed tray)
Torque limiter
5
6
7
8
Paper feed roller (No. 1 paper feed tray)
Paper pickup roller (No. 2 paper feed tray)
Separation roller (No. 2 paper feed tray)
Transport roller 4 (Drive)
9
10
Transport roller 5 (Drive)
Transport roller 7 (Drive)
11
Rotation plate
Function/Operation
Tray 1 upper limit detection
Tray 2 upper limit detection
Drives the paper tray lift plate.
Drives the paper tray lift plate.
Tray 1 paper empty detection
Tray 2 paper empty detection
Tray 1 paper pass detection
Tray2 paper pass detection
Paper feed section drive
Controls the paper feed tray section roller ON/OFF.
Controls the paper feed tray section roller ON/OFF.
Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection
Detects the presence of the tray 1
Detects the presence of the tray 2
Detects opening of the tray 1, 2 transport cover.
Function/Operation
Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation
roller to prevent double feed.
Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 1 and paper feed roller
(No. 2 paper feed tray) to the transport roller 7.
Transports the paper fed from the paper tray 1 to the transport roller 7.
Transports the paper fed from the paper feed tray 1, 2 or 3, 4 to the transport
roller 8.
Lifts up the paper to keep the paper feed position.
MX-2300/2700 N/G TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION E – 2
2. Operational descriptions
A. Preliminary operation before paper feed
• When the paper is set and the paper feed tray is inserted, the
pickup roller moves down and the paper feed tray sensor turns
ON.
• The lift-up motor operates to lift the rotating plate.
• The paper upper limit sensor turns on to stop the rotating plate at
the specified position.
B. Paper feed operation
• When copy/print operation is started, the motor and the clutch
are turned ON and the pickup roller is rotated in the paper pickup
timing to feed paper.
• At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to feed paper to
the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates to
prevent against double feed of paper.
C. Remaining paper detection
• Remaining paper detection is performed according to four
stages, i.e. three stages with paper and one stage with no paper,
and the result is displayed.
D. Remaining paper detection method
• The number of remaining sheets is determined according to the
number of times the remaining paper sensor changes from the
time the paper feed tray starts lifting up to the time when the
upper detection sensor comes ON.
(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and
changes in status according to the number of remaining sheets)
The no-paper detection sensor detects
the state of no remaining paper.
CPED
(paper sensor)
Turn plate
Remaining Paper
Detection Actuator
During no-paper detection
1/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low
CSPD
(remaining paper detection)
Remaining paper 1/3 position
2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi
Remaining paper 2/3 position
3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low
Remaining paper 1/3 position
MX-2300/2700 N/G TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION E – 3
3. Disassembly and assembly
(1)
A. Tray paper feed section
1)
Remove the right cabinet front.
2)
Remove the tray 1 and 2.
(1)-e
Remove the tray paper feed unit 1 and 2.
(1)-k
2
(1)-i
(1)-h
(1)-a
(1)
(1)-b
(1)-g
(1)-d
(1)-j
(1)-c
1
(1)-f
3)
Remove the right lower door unit.
4)
Remove the paper feed movable PG lower.
5)
Remove the paper feed unit 1, 2.
(1)-i
(1)-h
(1)-a
(1)-b
(1)-g
(1)-j
(1)-c
(1)
(2)-b
(2)-a
(1)
Unit
Tray paper
feed unit 1, 2
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
(2)
Others
i
j
k
a
b
Parts
Paper pickup roller
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
Tray 1 transport cover
detection
Transport roller 7 (Drive)
Transport roller 4 (Drive)
Torque limiter
Tray 1, 2 paper presence
detection
Tray 1, 2 upper limit detection
Tray 1, 2 transport detection
Transport roller 5 (Drive)
Tray 1, 2 paper remaining
quantity detection
Tray 1, 2 presence detection
Maintenance
✕{
✕{
✕{
✕{
✕{
✕
✕{
MX-2300/2700 N/G TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION E – 4
a. Paper pickup roller
d. Tray 1 transport cover opening detection
1)
b. Paper feed roller
1)
Remove the tray 1 and 2.
2)
Remove the paper guide.
Remove the tray paper feed unit 1.
e. Transport roller 7 (Drive)
3)
Remove the paper pickup roller (a) and the paper feed roller
(b).
1)
Remove the tray paper feed unit 1.
2)
Remove the screws.
3)
Remove the paper feed reverse PG unit, and remove the belt.
b
a
1
c. Separation roller
1)
Remove the tray 1 and 2.
2)
Remove the paper guide.
3)
Remove the separation roller.
2
4)
Remove the grounding plate. Remove the parts. Remove the
transport roller 7 (drive).
1
2
3
2
MX-2300/2700 N/G TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION E – 5
4)
f. Transport roller 4 (Drive)
1)
Remove the tray paper feed unit 2.
2)
Remove the grounding plate. Remove the parts. Remove the
transport roller 4 (drive).
Remove the separation roller. Remove the E-ring and the separation shift. Remove the torque limiter.
3
2
2
1
1
3
2
4
h. Tray 1, 2 paper presence detection
i. Tray 1, 2 upper limit detection sensor
g. Torque limiter
1)
Remove the paper feed unit 1, 2.
1)
Remove the paper feed unit 1, 2.
2)
2)
Remove the E-ring and the bearing, and remove the paper
feed lower PG unit.
Remove the paper feed reverse PG unit. (Tray paper feed unit
1 only)
3)
Remove the paper feed vertical transport PG unit, then remove
the belt. (Tray paper feed unit 2 only)
2
2
1
1
3
1
3)
4)
Remove the paper feed upper PG supporting plate.
5)
Remove the tray 1, 2 paper presence detector (a) and the tray
1, 2 upper limit detector (b).
Remove the pressure release spring, and remove the paper
feed lower PG supporting plate. Remove the separation pressure spring, and the separation pressure release plate.
1
2
3
b
a
MX-2300/2700 N/G TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION E – 6
j. Tray 1, 2 transport detection
2)
1)
Remove the paper feed unit 1, 2.
2)
Remove the paper feed reverse PG unit. (Tray paper feed unit
1 only)
3)
Remove the paper feed vertical transport PG unit. (Tray paper
feed unit 2 only)
4)
Remove the paper feed upper PG supporting plate.
5)
Remove the tray 1, 2 transport detector.
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the tray
1, 2 paper remaining quantity detector.
b. Tray 1, 2 presence detection
1)
Remove the tray 1 and 2.
2)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the tray
1, 2 presence detector.
3)
Release the pawl, and remove the tray 1, 2 detection unit.
k. Transport roller 5 (Drive)
1)
Remove the tray paper feed unit 1.
2)
Remove the paper feed reverse PG unit.
3)
Remove the paper feed upper PG supporting plate.
4)
Remove the parts, and remove the transport roller 5 (Drive).
Remove the E-ring and the bearing holder from the transport
roller 5 (Drive).
4
3
1
2
(2)
Remove the spring from the tray 1, 2 presence detector.
Others
a. Tray 1, 2 paper remaining quantity detection
1)
Remove the tray 1 and 2.
2
1
MX-2300/2700 N/G TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION E – 7
4. Maintenance
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
Parts name
1
2
3
4
5
Pickup roller
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
Torque limiter
Transport rollers
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical
parts
Mechanism
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
{
✕
{
{
{
{
✕
{
5
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
MX-2300/2700 N/G TRAY PAPER FEED SECTION E – 8
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No. (Only
the replacement parts
are described.)
(P/G No.: [11]-40)
(P/G No.: [11]-41)
(P/G No.: [10]-4)
[F] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION
MX2700N
Service Manual
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
RRM
PSFMA//
INT24V1
PSFMB//
PSFMA/
INT24V1
PSFMB/
PFM
1
2
CN1
2
PSFMA//
5
INT24V1
3
PSFMB//
1
PSFMA/
6
INT24V1
4
PSFMB/
B6B-PH-K-S
1
2
3
4
5
6
DRIVER
MAIN PWB
PPD2
3
PPD1
D-GND
PPD1
5VNPD
1
2
3
5VNPD
PPD2
D-GND
1
2
3
PHNR-6-H
BU06P-TR-P-H
D-GND
6
PPD1
5
5VNPD
4
3
2
1
5VNPD
PPD2
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN17
29
31
D-GND
PPD1
1
5
6
2
3
4
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
32
PPD2
30
D-GND
23
5VNPD
27
D-GND
26
REGS_R
24 REGS_R_LED#
17
/PCSS
16
24V3
B32B-PHDSS-B
PCU
PWB
DF11-6DP-SP1
Signal name
PFM
PPD1
PPD2
RRM
Name
Transport motor
Resist front detection
Resist detection
Resist motor
No.
1
Name
Resist roller (Drive)
2
3
Resist roller (Idle)
Transport roller 8 (Drive)
Function/Operation
Transport drive between the resist roller and the paper feed section. Transport drive between the resist
roller and the right door section.
Detects paper before the resist roller.
Detects paper after the resist roller.
Controls the drive and ON/OFF of the resist roller.
Function/Operation
Transport paper to the transfer section./ Controls the transport timing of paper and adjusts relationship
between images and paper.
Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to supply transport power of the transport roller to paper.
Transport the paper to the resist roller.
MX-2300/2700 N/G PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION F – 1
2. Operational descriptions
7)
A. Paper transport section
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the resist
roller unit.
Paper is fed from each paper feed section and transported to the
resist roller by the transport rollers. ON/OFF control of each transport roller is made by the paper transport clutch. The resist roller
controls the relative positions of transported paper and the transfer
image. The resist roller is driven by the transport motor. The relative positions of paper and the transfer image are determined by
the ON timing of the transport motor.
3. Disassembly and assembly
A. Paper transport section
(1)-e (1)-c
(1)
a. Resist front detection
(1)-d
1)
Remove the resist roller unit.
2)
Remove the sensor holder.
(1)-b
(1)-a
(1)
(1)
Unit
Resist roller
unit
a
b
c
d
e
Parts
Resist front detection
Transport roller 8 (Drive)
Resist roller (Drive)
Resist detection
Resist roller (Idle)
Maintenance
✕{
✕{
b. Transport roller 8 (Drive)
1)
Remove the resist roller unit.
2)
Remove the grounding plate. Remove the parts, and remove
the transport roller 8 (Drive).
✕{
Resist roller unit
1)
Remove the developing unit (K).
2)
Remove the drum unit (K).
3)
Remove the primary transfer unit.
4)
Remove the tray paper feed unit 1.
5)
Remove the rear cabinet.
6)
Remove the ADU connection drive.
2
1
3
3
4
MX-2300/2700 N/G PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION F – 2
c. Resist roller (Drive)
e. Resist roller (Idle)
1)
Remove the resist roller unit.
1)
Remove the resist roller unit.
2)
Remove the spring and the E-ring. Remove the JAM release
handle.
2)
Remove the PS stay.
3)
Clean the resist roller (idle).
3)
Remove the parts. Slide the resist roller (Drive) to the front
side. Remove the parallel pin, the PS gear, and the E-ring from
the resist roller (Drive).
1
3
2
5
2
4
d. Resist detection
1)
Remove the resist roller unit.
2)
Remove the PS stay, then remove the resist detector.
1
2
MX-2300/2700 N/G PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION F – 3
4. Maintenance
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
Parts name
1
2
PS follower roller
Transport rollers
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical
parts
Mechanism parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
✕
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
1
2
MX-2300/2700 N/G PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION F – 4
Remark: Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
[G] DUPLEX SECTION
MX2700N
Service Manual
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
TFD3
D-GND
5VLED1
POD3
D-GND
5VLED4
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
TFD3
D-GND
5VLED1
POD3
D-GND
5VLED4
6
5
4
3
2
1
PHNR-6-H + BU06P-TR-P-H
1
2
3
TFD3
D-GND
5VLED1
1
2
3
POD3
D-GND
5VLED4
3
POD3
TFD3
RIGHT
DOOR I/F
PWB
DSW_ADU
D-GND
5VLED2
7
8
9
APPD1
10
D-GND
11
5VLED5
12
S16B-PHDSS-B
CN3(1/2)
APPD2
4
D-GND
5
5VLED10
6
S32B-PHDSS-B
3
DSW_ADU
2
D-GND
3
2
4
5VLED2
1
PHNR-4-H + BU04P-TR-P-H
1
2
3
DSW_ADU
D-GND
5VLED2
1
APPD1
3
2
D-GND
2
3
5VLED5
1
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
1
2
3
APPD1
D-GND
5VLED5
1
2
3
APPD2
D-GND
5VLED10
ADUM_L
DSW_ADU
APPD1
1
2
APPD2
DRIVER
MAIN PWB
Signal name
ADUM_L
APPD1
APPD2
DSW_ADU
POD3
TFD3
No.
1
2
3
Name
ADU motor lower
ADU transport path detection 1
ADU transport path detection 2
ADU transport open/close detection
Right tray paper exit detection
Detects the right tray paper exit full.
Name
Transport roller 10 (Drive)
Transport roller 11 (Drive)
Paper exit roller 2 (Drive)
CN5
ADMLA//
8
INT24V1
11
ADMLB//
9
ADMLA/
7
INT24V1
12
ADMLB/
10
B12B-PH-K-S
1
2
3
4
5
6
ADMLA//
INT24V1
ADMLB//
ADMLA/
INT24V1
ADMLB/
Function/Operation
Drives the right door section.
Detects paper pass in the upstream of the duplex (ADU).
Detects paper pass in the midstream of the duplex (ADU).
Duplex (ADU) cover open/close detection
Detects the paper exit into the right tray.
Detects the right tray paper exit full.
Function/Operation
Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 13 to the transport roller 11.
Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 12.
Used to discharge paper.
MX-2300/2700 N/G DUPLEX SECTION G – 1
2. Operational descriptions
(1)
1)
A. Duplex section
Right door unit
Open the right door unit.
• Paper is transported from the fusing section and sent to the
transport roller 13 driven by the paper exit drive motor and to the
paper exit roller 1.
At that time, paper passes under the ADU reverse gate guide.
• After the specified time from detection of paper lead edge by
POD1, the paper exit drive motor is rotated forward, and after the
specified time, it is rotated reversely.
2
1
• At that time, paper passes the right side of the ADU gate guide
by its own weight.
• The transport rollers 10 and 11 are driven by the ADU motor
lower, and paper is transported to the duplex paper feed position.
• Paper is stopped at the duplex paper feed position, and transported to the inside of the machine again.
2)
Remove the right door unit.
3. Disassembly and assembly
A. Duplex section
(1)-e
(1)-d
(1)-c
(1)-h
(1)-f
(1)-j
(1)-g
(1)-a
(1)-k
(2)-a
(1)-i
(1)-b
(1)
(1)-l
a. RD I/F PWB
1)
Open the right door unit.
2)
Remove the connector cover, and remove the ADU inner
cover.
3)
Remove the connector, and remove the RD I/F PWB.
(1)-m
(1)
Unit
Right door
unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
(2)
Others
i
j
k
l
m
a
Parts
RD I/F PWB
Manual paper feed clutch
Discharge brush
Detects the right tray paper exit
full.
Right tray paper exit detection
ADU reverse gate
ADU gate lower
ADU transport open/close
detection
ADU transport path detection 1
Paper exit roller 2 (Drive)
Transport roller 10 (Drive)
Transport roller 11 (Drive)
ADU transport path detection 2
ADU motor lower
Maintenance
✕
✕{
✕{
✕{
MX-2300/2700 N/G DUPLEX SECTION G – 2
b. Manual paper feed clutch
1)
Open the right door unit.
2)
Remove the connector cover ADU inner cover.
3)
Remove the MF drive connection plate. Disconnect the connector, then remove the manual paper feed clutch unit.
4)
4)
Remove the right paper exit PG upper.
5)
Check the discharge brush.
6)
Remove each sensor mounting plate. Right tray paper exit full
detection (A), right tray paper exit detection (B)
Remove the manual paper feed clutch.
A
B
c. Discharge brush
d. Detects the right tray paper exit full.
e. Right tray paper exit detection
1)
Open the right door unit.
2)
Remove the connector cover.
f. ADU reverse gate
1)
Open the right door unit.
2)
Remove the parts and remove the ADU reverse gate.
3
2
3)
Remove the right paper exit upper cabinet unit, and disconnect
the connector.
MX-2300/2700 N/G DUPLEX SECTION G – 3
1
6)
g. ADU gate lower
1)
Open the right door unit.
2)
Remove the parts, and remove the ADU gate lower.
Remove the ADU transport path detector 1.
2
1
3
j. Paper exit roller 2 (Drive)
h. ADU transport open/close detection
1)
Open the right door unit.
2)
Remove the connector cover ADU inner cover.
3)
Remove the ADU cabinet F and the ADU cabinet R.
i. ADU transport path detection 1
1)
Open the right door unit.
2)
Remove the ADU inner cover.
3)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the reverse PG unit.
4)
Remove the ADU transport open/close detector.
4)
Remove the reverse PG unit.
5)
Remove each parts, then remove the transport roller 2 (drive).
2
1
5)
Remove the ADU stay upper unit.
MX-2300/2700 N/G DUPLEX SECTION G – 4
3)
k. Transport roller 10 (Drive)
Remove the ADU trasnsport path detector 2.
l. Transport roller 11 (Drive)
1)
Open the right door unit.
2)
Remove the connector cover ADU inner cover.
3)
Remove the ADU cabinet F and the ADU cabinet R.
4)
Remove the reverse PG unit.
5)
Remove the upper transport fulcrum holder, and remove the
ADU open/close door.
6)
Remove each parts, and remove the trasnport roller 10 (drive)
(A) and the trasnport roller 11 (drive) (B).
1
A
2
1
B
m. ADU transport path detection 2
1)
Open the right door unit.
2)
Remove the right door transport PG, the follower pressure
plate, and the ADU waste toner cover.
MX-2300/2700 N/G DUPLEX SECTION G – 5
4. Maintenance
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
Parts name
1
2
3
Transport rollers
Discharge brush
Gears
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical
parts
Mechanism parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
2
1
2
MX-2300/2700 N/G DUPLEX SECTION G – 6
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
When checking,
apply to the
necessary positions.
(Specified positions)
Service Manual
MX2700N
[H] LSU SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
10
10
10
1
2
P
1
2
R
PCU PWB
1
1
2
3
4
CN11
4
3
2
1
6
5
B7P-PH-K-S
5VN
D-GND
n BD
D-GND
LSUTH1
D-GND
CN8
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN21
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
D-GND
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
24V1
P-GND
S6B-XA
CN7
INT5V
1
D-GND
2
D-GND
3
n SCK_LSU
4
5
n TRANS_DATA
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
CN14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
D-GND
LSUASIC_RST
n RSV_DAT
n TRANS_RST
JOBEND_INT
LSUTH1
LSUTH2
VSYNC_K_N
VSYNC_K_P
VSYNC_C_P
VSYNC_C_N
VSYNC_M_N
VSYNC_M_P
VSYNC_Y_P
VSYNC_Y_N
S20B-PHDSS-B
CN9
CH0_N
1
2
CH0_P
3
D-GND
4
D-GND
CH1_N
5
CH1_P
6
CH2_N
7
CH2_P
8
9
D-GND
D-GND
10
CLCLK_N
11
12
CLCLK_P
CH3_N
13
CH3_P
14
15
D-GND
D-GND
16
HSYNC_LSU_N 17
HSYNC_LSU_P 18
D-GND
19
D-GND
20
ECLK_LSU_P
21
ECLK_LSU_N
22
S22B-PHDSS-B
D-GND
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
24V1
P-GND
B6B-XA
INT5V
D-GND
D-GND
n SCK_LSU
n TRANS_DATA
B20B-PHDSS-B
D-GND
LSUASIC_RST
n RSV_DAT
n TRANS_RST
JOBEND_INT
LSUTH1
LSUTH2
VSYNC_K_N
VSYNC_K_P
VSYNC_C_P
VSYNC_C_N
VSYNC_M_N
VSYNC_M_P
VSYNC_Y_P
VSYNC_Y_N
CH0_N
CH0_P
D-GND
D-GND
CH1_N
CH1_P
CH2_N
CH2_P
D-GND
D-GND
CLCLK_N
CLCLK_P
CH3_N
CH3_P
D-GND
D-GND
HSYNC_LSU_N
HSYNC_LSU_P
D-GND
D-GND
ECLK_LSU_P
ECLK_LSU_N
B22B-PHDSS-B
MX-2300/2700 N/G LSU SECTION H – 1
B4P-PH-K-R
3
4
B6P-PH-K-S
/BREAK
POLYCLK
/LOCK
/START
P-GND
24V1
MOTHER PWB
5VN
D-GND
n BD
D-GND
LSUTH1
D-GND
B34B-PHDSS-B
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_Y
/ENB_Y
DT_YDT_Y+
D-GND
Vref_Y
LDCHK_Y
n LDERR_Y
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_C
/ENB_C
DT_CDT_C+
D-GND
Vref_C
LDCHK_C
n LDERR_C
CN1
27
25
29
31
30
28
26
32
34
33
CN4
6
5
3
4
2
1
CN2 B12B-PHDSS-B
3
D-GND
1
INT5V
5
/SH_K
/ENB_K
7
6
DT_KDT_K+
4
2
D-GND
8
Vref_K
SK_K
10
9
n LDERR_K
11
LSUTH2
12
D-GND
3
1
5
7
6
4
2
8
10
9
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_Y
/ENB_Y
DT_YDT_Y+
D-GND
Vref_Y
LDCHK_Y
n LDERR_Y
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_M
/ENB_M
DT_MDT_M+
D-GND
Vref_M
LDCHK_M
n LDERR_M
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_C
/ENB_C
DT_CDT_C+
D-GND
Vref_C
LDCHK_C
n LDERR_C
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
15
13
17
19
18
16
14
20
22
21
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_K
/ENB_K
DT_KDT_K+
D-GND
Vref_K
SK_K
n LDERR_K
1
2
3
4
5
6
D-GND
10
INT5V
9
/SH_M
8
/ENB_M
7
DT_M6
DT_M+
5
D-GND
4
Vref_M
3
LDCHK_M
2
n LDERR_M 1
/BREAK
POLYCLK
/LOCK
/START
P-GND
24V1
LSU PWB
6 7
4
2
3
8
12
9
14
11 9
13
PGM
5
CN10
1
24V3
4
/LSUSS_B
B5P-PH-K-S
9
SM2P
LSUSS
24V3
/LSUSS_B
10
Signal name
PGM
Name
Polygon motor
Function/Operation
Laser beam is reflected at the constant speed rotation.
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Name
LD PWB (K)
LD PWB (C)
LD PWB (M)
LD PWB (Y)
Cylindrical lens
fθ lens 1
fθ lens 2
Reflection mirror
Cylindrical lens
OPC drum
Convergence lens for BD
BD PWB
LSU CNT PWB
Function/Operation
Controls laser beam flashing and the output value.
14
LSU therminstor
Converges laser beams and focus.
Laser beams are refracted so that the laser scan speed on the OPC drum is even in both ends and at the center.
Secures the path for laser beams.
Converges laser beams, and focus on the OPC drum.
Forms electrostatic latent images according to laser beams.
Converges laser beams to the BD PWB.
Detects the timing for starting laser scanning.
Laser beams are controlled and the polygon motor control signal is generated according to the PCU PWB control
signal and image data.
Measures the temperature in LSU.
2. Operational descriptions
(Scan system)
A. LSU section
(1)
Outline
Image data sent from the image process circuit through the mother
are converted into laser beams to be radiated onto the OPC drum
surface. The LSU unit is composed of the primary system including
optical elements such as lasers and the polygon mirror and the mirror which assures the optical path and the scan system which
includes the optical elements including the polygon mirror and the
mirror which assures the optical path.
(2)
Composition
(Primary system)
(On the polygon mirror)
Model
MX-2700N/G
(3)
Number of
mirror
surfaces
7 surfaces
Rotating
speed
Bearing
25106rpm
OIL
Remark
Outline of LSU specifications
Effective scan width:
Resolution:
Beam diameter:
Laser power:
LD wavelength:
MX-2300/2700 N/G LSU SECTION H – 2
307mm
600dpi
Main scan = 50 to 65µm, Sub scan = 60 to 75µm
Max. 0.65mW
770 to 795nm
3. Disassembly and assembly
4)
A. LSU section
Remove the LSU slant adjustment plate screw (A), and loosen
the screw (B).
Remove the LSU shaft fixing plate. Remove the screws.
(2)-a
(1)
(1)-b
(1)-a
B
A
(2)-b
5)
Shift the front side of the LSU shaft from (A) to (B), and remove
the LSU shaft.
2
(1)
Unit
LSU
(2)
Others
(1)
1)
2)
a
b
a
b
Parts
Dust-proof glass
Polygon motor
LSU shutter solenoid
Cleaning base
Maintenance
{
{▲
LSU
A
3
Remove the left cabinet rear lower and the left cabinet. (Refer
to Left Cabinet Rear Lower and Left Cabinet in External Outfit
Section.)
1
Remove the waste toner box.
6)
B
Disconnect the connector, and remove the LSU.
1
2
3)
Remove the LSU left plate PA.
a. Dust-proof glass
1
2
1)
Remove the waste toner box.
2)
Remove the LSU cleaning stick from the front cover.
1
2
MX-2300/2700 N/G LSU SECTION H – 3
3)
Insert the LSU cleaning rod and slide it back and forth a few
times to clean the dust-proof glass.
4)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the polygon motor.
* When installing, do not touch the moving section of the polygon mirror and the mirror surface.
b. Polygon motor
(2)
1)
Remove the LSU.
2)
Remove the screws, and remove the LSU CNT PWB cover R.
Others
a. LSU shutter solenoid 1
1)
Remove the LSU.
2)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the LSU
shutter solenoid unit.
* When installing, the shutter U-groove is engaged with the
shutter lever arm shaft section (A).
A
3)
Remove the screws, then lift up the LSU CNT PWB cover F
(A).
Remove the screws, and lift up the polygon motor unit (B).
A
1
3)
Remove the screws, and remove the LSU shutter solenoid 1.
* When installing, engage the solenoid pin with the shutter
lever arm.
B
2
MX-2300/2700 N/G LSU SECTION H – 4
b. Cleaning base
1)
Remove the waste toner box.
2)
Remove the LSU cleaning stick from the front cover.
3)
Remove the cleaning base from the LSU cleaning rod.
4. Maintenance
A. LSU section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
Parts name
1
2
Dust-proof glass
Cleaning base
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical
parts
Mechanism
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
{
✕
{
▲
{
▲
{
▲
{
▲
{
▲
{
▲
{
▲
{
▲
{
▲
{
▲
{
▲
{
▲
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide. Block/
Item No. (Only the
replacement parts are
described.)
(P/G No.: [2]-35)
1
2
MX-2300/2700 N/G LSU SECTION H – 5
MC
GB-Y
MC
1
1
CN9
2
P
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN15
DL_Y
DL_M
DL_C
DL_BK
1
GB
1
GB
1
GB
GB
2
MC
MC
MX-2300/2700 N/G PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION i – 1
8
DMBKA//
DMBKA/
7
DMBKB/
10
9
DMBKB//
11
INT24V1
12
INT24V1
B12B-PH-K-S
DMCLB//
INT24V1
DMCLB/
DMCLA/
INT24V1
DMCLA//
3
1
1
3
CN1
3
6
4
1
5
2
23
21
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
9
D-GND
2
10
DL_BK#
1
1
3
D-GND
DL_BK#
D-GND
DL_C#
D-GND
DL_M#
D-GND
DL_Y#
B40B-PADSS-B
4
2
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
D-GND
2
9
10
DL_C#
1
24
22
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
9
D-GND
2
10
DL_Y#
1
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
9
D-GND
2
DL_M#
10
1
1
3
P-GND
/HV_DATA#
/HV_CLK#
/HV_LD1#
HV_REM#
B32B-PHDSS-B
CN26
20
21
22
23
24
PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION
DMCLB//
1
INT24V1
2
DMCLB/
3
DMCLA/
4
INT24V1
5
DMCLA//
6
R
SM6
6
INT24V1
INT24V1
5
DMBKB//
4
DMBKB/
3
2
DMBKA/
DMBKA//
1
D-GND
DL_M#
53254-0310
DL_C
D-GND
DL_C#
53254-0310
DL_BK
D-GND
DL_BK#
53254-0310
CN1
6
5
4
3
2
1
B6P-PH-K-S
INT24V2
B3P-PH-K-S
MC PWB
AC
PWB
DL_Y
D-GND
1
DL_Y#
3
53254-0310
DL_M
MC-K
GB-K
INT24V2
P-GND
/HV_DATA#
/HV_CLK#
/HV_LD1#
HV_REM#
PCU PWB
GB-C
1st TC PWB
GB-M
CN2
1TC_CL
3
HV_REM
7
MC_YMC
6
1TC_K
5
1TC_YMC
4
P-GND
2
INT24V2
1
B7P-PH-K-S
[i]
Ą
MC-CMY
CN1
INT24V2
7
P-GND
6
1TC_YMC
4
1TC_K
3
MC_YMC
2
HV_REM
1
1TC_CL
5
B7P-PH-K-S
MX2700N
Service Manual
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
DRIVER
SUB PWB
DMCL
DMBK
Signal name
DMCL
DMBK
DL
MC
GB
Name
Drum motor (Color)
Drum motor (Black)
Discharge lamp (Y, M, C, BK)
Main charge (Y, M, C, K)
Grid (Y, M, C, K)
Function/Operation
Color photoconductor drive
Black photoconductor drive
Light is passed to the discharge lens to drive the OPC drum surface.
The OPC drum surface is charged negatively.
The OPC drum surface potential is controlled.
No.
1
2
Name
OPC drum (Y, M, C, K)
Cleaning blade
Function/Operation
Latent electrostatic images are formed.
Residual toner is cleaned and removed from the OPC drum surface.
2. Operational descriptions
A. OPC drum section
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger.
The laser beam images are radiated to the OPC drum surface by
the laser (writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
1)
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main
charger.
As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on the OPC
drum surface.
3)
After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the
cleaning blade.
Toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to
the waste toner section by the waste toner transport screw.
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
OPC drum
High voltage unit
Screen grid
Main corona unit
The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The
OPC drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the voltage applied to the screen grid.
2)
LED lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser
(writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
OPC drum
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
OPC drum
LED lights
When LED lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative
and positive charges are generated.
Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand,
negative charges are attracted to positive charges in the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are balanced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reducing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum
surface voltage.
Electric charges remain at a position where LED lights are not
radiated.
MX-2300/2700 N/G PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION i – 2
4)
The whole surface of the OPC drum is discharged.
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
3. Disassembly and assembly
A. Process drum unit
(1)-c
(1)-d
(1)-e
(1)-a
Lens
(1)
(1)-c
By radiating the discharge lamp light to the discharge lens,
light is radiated through the lens to the OPC drum surface.
(1)-b
When the discharge lamp light is radiated to the OPC drum
CGL, positive and negative charges are generated.
Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand,
negative charges are attracted to positive charges in the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive and negative charges are balanced out on
the OPC drum surface and in the aluminum layer, reducing
positive and negative charged to decrease the surface voltage
of the OPC drum.
(2)-b
(2)-a
(1)
Unit
Drum unit
(2)
Others
(1)
1)
a
b
c
d
e
a
b
Parts
Drum
Charging unit
Side seal F, R
Toner reception seal
Cleaner blade
Waste toner drive motor
Waste toner full detection switch
Each color drum unit
Open the front cover.
MX-2300/2700 N/G PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION i – 3
Maintenance
▲
▲
✕
✕
▲
2)
Remove the waste toner bottle unit.
6)
Hold the lock lever, and pull out each color drum unit slowly,
and support the lower section of the unit with both hands to
remove.
1
2
3)
Loosen the blue screw. Check to confirm that lock is released,
and open the drum positioning unit.
a. OPC drum
1)
Remove each drum unit from the machine.
2)
Remove the screws and remove the DR fixing shaft AS.
2
1
NOTE: When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer
unit is released manually, turn on the power again after completion of the work. (Power OFF-ON) This procedure initializes
the transfer roller to return it to the home position.
4)
3)
Loosen the fixing screw of the developing unit on the left side
of each color drum unit.
Slide the OPC drum to the front side, and lift the drum rear
side, and remove the OPC drum from the hole in the front section.
1
2
b. MC charger unit
1)
5)
Remove the developing unit with both hands.
Remove each drum unit from the machine.
2)
Remove the OPC drum.
3)
Remove the screws, and remove the MC cover.
1
2
MX-2300/2700 N/G PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION i – 4
4)
Disengage the lock pawl with a screwdriver, and remove the
MC cleaner shaft.
3
5)
2
1
e. Cleaner blade
1)
Remove each drum unit from the machine.
2)
Remove the OPC drum.
3)
Remove the MC charger unit.
4)
Remove the side seal F/R and the toner reception seal.
5)
Remove the screws, and remove the cleaner blade.
6)
Remove the toner mixing sheet from the cleaner blade.
Release the pawl, and remove the process cover. Remove the
MC charger unit.
* Tighten the screws according to the marks 1, 2, and 3.
2
3
c. Side seal F, R
1
d. Toner reception seal
1)
Remove each drum unit from the machine.
2)
Remove the OPC drum.
3)
Remove the MC charger unit.
4)
Remove the side seal F/R and the toner reception seal.
* When attaching the side seal F/R and the toner reception
seal, arrange so that they are in the ranges specified in the
figure below.
Reference line
0 - 0.5mm
Reference
line
Reference line
0 - 0.5mm
0 - 0.5mm
(2)
Others
a. Waste toner drive motor
0 - 0.3mm
1)
Remove the frame cover. (Refer to Frame Cover in External
Outfit Section.)
2)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the waste
toner drive unit.
Remove the screw, and remove the waste toner drive motor
from the waste toner drive unit.
0 - 0.3mm
Reference line
0 - 0.3mm
Reference line
MX-2300/2700 N/G PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION i – 5
b. Waste toner full detection switch
3)
1)
Remove the frame cover. (Refer to Frame Cover in External
Outfit Section.)
2)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the waste
toner drive unit.
Remove the screw and the spring, and remove the waste toner
box empty lever.
Disengage the connector and the pawl, and remove the waste
toner full detection switch.
4. Maintenance
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
Parts name
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
▲
▲
60
K
▲
▲
Color supply
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Drum (BK)
Cleaner blade
(BK)
Charging unit (BK)
Drum (C)
Cleaner, blade (C)
Charging unit (C)
Side seal F/R (BK)
Toner reception
seal (BK)
Side seal F/R (C)
Toner reception
seal (C)
Waste toner box
Monochrome
supply
▲
Color supply
Mechanism
parts
✕
✕
✕
400
K
▲
▲
120
K
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
300
K
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
500
K
600
K
▲
▲
180
K
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
700
K
800
K
▲
▲
240
K
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
900
K
1000
K
▲
▲
300
K
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
1100
K
1200
K
▲
▲
360
K
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
MX-2300/2700 N/G PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION i – 6
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
Remark: Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
(P/G No.: [24]-14)
(P/G No.: [24]-2)
(P/G No.: [24]-14)
(P/G No.: [24]-2)
7,9
8,10
1,4
2,5
7,9
3,6
11
MX-2300/2700 N/G PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION i – 7
[J] TONER SUPPLY SECTION
MX2700N
Service Manual
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
A. Toner supply section
TNM_Y
CRUM(Y)
TNM_M
TNM_C
CRUM(M)
CRUM(C)
CRUM(K)
1
TNM_K
1
1
1
R
1
2
R
1
2
R
1
2
R
1
2
SM2P
TNM_K_1
TNM_K_2
SM2P
TNM_C_1
TNM_C_2
SM2P
TNM_M_1
TNM_M_2
SM2P
TNM_Y_1
TNM_Y_2
P
1
2
P
1
2
P
1
2
P
1
2
CN12
6
4
10
12
2
CN5
5V_CRUM
CRM_K_DT#
CRM_K_CK#
D-GND
1
3
5
7
1
2
3
4
5V_CRUM
CRM_K_DT#
CRM_K_CK#
D-GND
1
2
3
4
CRM_C_DT#
CRM_C_CK#
2
4
5
6
CRM_C_DT#
CRM_C_CK#
5
6
CRM_M_DT#
CRM_M_CK#
9
10
7
8
CRM_M_DT#
CRM_M_CK#
7
8
6
CRM_Y_DT#
8
CRM_Y_CK#
B10B-PHDSS-B
9
10
P
CRM_Y_DT#
CRM_Y_CK#
SM10P
9
10
R
CRUM(CYAN)
2
5V_CRUM
4
CRM_C_DT#
CRM_C_CK#
3
1
D-GND
CRUM(MAGENTA)
2
5V_CRUM
4
CRM_M_DT#
3
CRM_M_CK#
1
D-GND
CRUM(YELLOW)
2
5V_CRUM
4
CRM_Y_DT#
3
CRM_Y_CK#
1
D-GND
6
2
1
3
4
5
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
PCU PWB
CRUM(BLACK)
2
5V_CRUM
4
CRM_K_DT#
3
CRM_K_CK#
1
D-GND
6
2
1
3
4
5
INT24V2
P-GND
/DVM_K_CK
/DVM_K_D
DVM_K_LD
TNM_K_1
15
TNM_K_2
17
TNM_C_1
19
TNM_C_2
21
TNM_M_1
22
TNM_M_2
24
TNM_Y_1
18
TNM_Y_2
20
INT24V2
5
P-GND
3
/DVM_CL_CK
9
11 /DVM_CL_D
DVM_CL_LD
1
24V3
16
/1TURC
14
DHPD_K
32
5VLED
30
DHPD_CL
31
5VLED
29
D-GND
23
B32B-PHDSS-B
DF11-6DP-SP1
DF11-6DP-SP1
MX-2300/2700 N/G TONER SUPPLY SECTION J – 1
Signal name
TNM
CRUM
No.
1
Name
Toner motor (Y, M, C, K)
CRUM (Y,M,C,K)
Function/Operation
Toner supply motor to the develping unit
Data memory for the toner cartridge
Name
Function/Operation
Toner supply pipe from the toner cartridge to the developing unit
Toner transport pipe
2. Operational descriptions
When the toner cartridge is inserted to the machine, the lock pawl
is disengaged and the supply shutter is opened.
The transport pipe shutter is opened and closed by the shaft which
is linked with the developing lever.
The toner supply section of the developing unit is opened and
closed when the open/close lever on the unit hits the block on the
machine.
MX-2300/2700 N/G TONER SUPPLY SECTION J – 2
3. Maintenance
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
Parts name
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical
parts
Color supply
1
Toner cartridge
(BK/C/M/Y)
Monochrome,
color supply
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
60
120
180
240
300
K
K
K
K
K
User replacement for every toner empty (or the specified traveling distance).
1
MX-2300/2700 N/G TONER SUPPLY SECTION J – 3
1200
K
360
K
Remark: Refer to the
Parts Guide. Block/
Item No. (Only the
replacement parts are
described.)
Replace after 2 years
of use.
TCS_Y
DVTYP_C
BS_M
DVTYP_Y
TCS_C
2
1
TCS_K
2
1
DVTYP_K
BS_K
TCS_M
2
1
BS_C
DVTYP_M
2
1
Service Manual
MX2700N
[K]
DEVELOPING SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
DVM_CL
DVM_K
BS_Y
(SPRING)
BS-M
BS-C
BS-K
1
2
4
5
6
7
(SPRING)
BS-Y
INT24V2
P-GND
/DVM_K_CK
/DVM_K_D
DVM_K_LD
5V
B7P-PH-K-S
BS-K
(SPRING)
1
2
4
5
6
7
BS-C
(SPRING)
CN1
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
44
C
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
C
24V3
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
D-GND
DVTYP_M
DVSET_M
5VN
QR/P8-8P
24V3
TCS_C
D-GND
TSG_C
D-GND
DVTYP_C
DVSET_C
5VN
QR/P8-8P
24V3
TCS_K
D-GND
TSG_BK
D-GND
DVTYP_K
DVSET_K
5VN
QR/P8-8P
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
P
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
P
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
P
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
P
B6P-PH-K-S
INT24V2
P-GND
/HV_DATA#
/HV_CLK#
/HV_LD1#
HV_REM#
2
3
4
1
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
C
24V3
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
D-GND
DVTYP_Y
DVSET_Y
5VN
QR/P8-8P
MC PWB
2
3
4
1
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
C
CN9
1
INT24V2
B3P-PH-K-S
24V3
TCS_K
D-GND
TSG_BK
D-GND
DVTYP_K
DVSET_K
5VN
AC PWB
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
10
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
8
7
5
6
4
3
2
1
24V3
TCS_C
D-GND
TSG_C
D-GND
DVTYP_C
DVSET_C
5VN
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
10
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
8
7
5
6
4
3
2
1
24V3
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
D-GND
DVTYP_M
DVSET_M
5VN
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
10
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
8
7
5
6
4
3
2
1
24V3
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
D-GND
DVTYP_Y
DVSET_Y
5VN
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
10
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
8
7
5
6
4
3
2
1
5
3
9
11
1
P-GND
/HV_DATA#
/HV_CLK#
/HV_LD1#
HV_REM#
INT24V2
P-GND
/DVM_CL_CK
/DVM_CL_D
DVM_CL_LD
CN12
INT24V2
6
P-GND
4
10 /DVM_K_CK
/DVM_K_D
12
DVM_K_LD
2
CN26
20
21
22
23
24
6
8
12
10
14
16
18
20
25
27
31
29
33
35
37
39
CN15
5
7
11
9
13
15
17
19
24V2
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
D-GND
DVTYP_Y
DVSET_Y
5VN
24V3
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
D-GND
DVTYP_M
DVSET_M
5VN
24V3
TCS_C
D-GND
TSG_C
D-GND
DVTYP_C
DVSET_C
5VN
24V3
TCS_K
D-GND
TSG_BK
D-GND
DVTYP_K
DVSET_K
5VN
B32B-PHDSS-B
26
28
32
30
34
36
38
40
B40B-PADSS-B
MX-2300/2700 N/G DEVELOPING SECTION K – 1
INT24V2
P-GND
/DVM_CL_CK
/DVM_CL_D
DVM_CL_LD
5V
B7P-PH-K-S
BS-Y
24V3
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
24V3
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
24V3
TCS_C
D-GND
TSG_C
24V3
TCS_K
D-GND
TSG_BK
BS-M
4
3
2
1
BLACK
D-GND
DVTYP_K
DVSET_K
5VN
S4P-PH-K-S
4
3
2
1
CYAN
D-GND
DVTYP_C
DVSET_C
5VN
S4P-PH-K-S
4
3
2
1
MAGENTA
D-GND
DVTYP_M
DVSET_M
5VN
S4P-PH-K-S
4
3
2
1
YELLOW
D-GND
DVTYP_Y
DVSET_Y
5VN
S4P-PH-K-S
PCU PWB
Signal name
DVM_CL
DVM_K
BS
TCS
DVTYP
No.
1
2
3
Name
Developer motor (color)
Developer motor (black)
Developer bias (Y, M, C, K)
Toner density sensor (Y, M, C, K)
DV initial detection PWB (Y, M, C, K)
Name
Function/Operation
Color developing unit drive
Black developing unit drive
Developer bias
Controls the toner density in the developing unit.
Detection of a new developing unit (machine exclusive for CRU)
Function/Operation
Latent electrostatic images on the OPC drum are changed to visible images.
Stirring developer
Prevents dispersing of toner.
Developer roller
Stirring roller
Toner filter
2. Operational descriptions
3. Disassembly and assembly
Electrostatic latent images generated on the OPC drum by the
laser (writing) units (laser image ray) are converted into visible
images by toner.
A. Developing section
(1)-d
(1)
(1)-b
(1)-e
(1)-f
(1)-g
(1)-c
(1)-a
(1)
Toner and carrier in the developing unit are agitated and transported by the mixing roller.
Unit
Developing
unit
By mixing and transporting, toner and carrier are negatively
charged due to mechanical friction.
The developing bias voltage (AC component and negative DC
component) is applied to the developing roller.
Negatively charged toner is attracted to the exposed section on the
OPC drum where the negative potential falls due to the developing
bias.
(1)
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Parts
Developer
DV seal
DV side seal F
DV side seal R
DV initial PWB
Density sensor
Toner filter
Maintenance
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
Developing unit
1)
Open the front cabinet.
2)
Remove the waste toner bottle unit.
If the OPC drum is not exposed, the negative potential is higher
than the developing bias voltage, and toner is not attracted.
1
2
MX-2300/2700 N/G DEVELOPING SECTION K – 2
3)
Check that the lock is released as shown in (A).
a. Developer
Loosen the blue screw, and open the drum positioning unit.
1)
Remove the developing unit.
* When the lock is not released, use a screwdriver to turn the
screw (B) counterclockwise so that it is fit as (A).
2)
Remove two fixing screws of the DV cover.
3)
Hold the sections A, and remove the DV cover in the arrow
direction (B).
A
B
4)
Open the DV lock lever, and release the fixing screw. (1 position for each color)
1
A
2
B
5)
Pinch the knob and remove the development unit.
A
B
MX-2300/2700 N/G DEVELOPING SECTION K – 3
A
1 : Dec. 15 2005
4)
Take out the old developer, and insert the new developer.
* When supplying developer, do not tilt the developing unit.
1
b. DV seal
c. DV side seal F
d. DV side seal R
1)
Remove the old DV seal (A), DV side seal F (B), R (C).
B
A
C
1 2)
Attach the new DV seal (A), DV side seal F (B), DV side seal R
(C) to the reference position.
* When replacing developer, use an extreme care not to drop
developer on the drive section (marked with {).
0 㨪 0.3mm
(Note for cleaning the developing unit)
If the developing unit is cleaned with a cleaner or an air blower
with much developer in the developing unit, static electricity
may be accumulated in the unit. In order to prevent against
this, note the following items.
* If metal part is brought into contact with the magnet roller surface
when transporting developer or removing foreign material from
the magnet roller, developer may adhere to the magnet roller surface. Be careful to avoid this when handling the magnet roller.
* Remove developer in the developer unit as well as developer
attached to the magnet roller as far as possible.
0 㨪 0.3mm
A
0 㨪 0.3mm
B
0 㨪 0.5mm
C
0 㨪 0.3mm
0 㨪 0.3mm
(When cleaning the developing unit with an air blower [duct])
* Before cleaning with an air duct, remove developer from the unit
as far as possible, and ground the magnet roller rear side cored
bar as shown in the figure below and clean the unit with an air
blower. (Do not pinch the grounding wire with a crocodile clip
connector in order to prevent against damage on the cored bar.)
* When attaching, arrange so that the DV side seal F (C) and the
DV side seal R (D) are placed between the DV cover R (A) and
the DV blade (B).
D
B
Magnet roller
rear side cored bar
C
A
MX-2300/2700 N/G DEVELOPING SECTION K – 4
e. DV initial PWB
g. Toner filter
f. Density sensor
1)
Remove the developing unit.
2)
Remove the screw, and remove the DV guide. Disconnect the
connector, and remove the DV initial PWB (A).
1)
Remove the developing unit.
2)
Remove the toner filter cover and the toner filter.
Remove the screw, and diisconnect the connector, and
remove the density sensor (B).
B
A
4. Maintenance
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
Parts name
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
▲
▲
▲
60
K
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
Color supply
1
2
3
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
▲
▲
▲
120
K
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
180
K
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
240
K
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
1200
K
▲
▲
▲
300
K
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
360
K
▲
▲
▲
(P/G No.: [23]-42)
(P/G No.: [23]-26)
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
(P/G No.: [23]-15)
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
(P/G No.: [22]-37)
5
6
7
8
Developer (Y)
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
9
10
DV seal (C)
DV side sheal F,
R (C)
Toner filter
Bias pin/
Connector
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
11
12
Color supply
Mechanism
parts
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
4,10
1,6,7,8
2,9
5,11
3,10
Remark: Refer to the
Parts Guide. Block/
Item No. (Only the
replacement parts are
described.)
1100
K
Developer (BK)
DV seal (BK)
DV side seal F
(BK)
DV side seal R
(BK)
Toner filter
Developer (C)
Developer (M)
4
Monochrome
supply
500
K
12
MX-2300/2700 N/G DEVELOPING SECTION K – 5
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
(P/G No.: [23]-42)
(P/G No.: [23]-26,
[23]-15)
(P/G No.: [22]-37)
12
12
[L] TRANSFER SECTION
MX2700N
Service Manual
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
1st TC PWB
1TC-CMY
1TC-K
CN1
INT24V2
7
P-GND
6
1TC_YMC
4
1TC_K
3
MC_YMC
2
HV_REM
1
1TC_CL
5
B7P-PH-K-S
CN2
1TC_CL
3
HV_REM
7
MC_YMC
6
1TC_K
5
1TC_YMC
4
P-GND
2
INT24V2
1
B7P-PH-K-S
CN1
6
INT24V2
5
P-GND
/HV_DATA#
4
/HV_CLK#
3
/HV_LD1#
2
HV_REM#
1
MC PWB
B6P-PH-K-S
5 6
14
1TUD_CL
D-GND
5VLED
1
2
3
1TUD_K
D-GND
5VLED
1
2
3
2
1TUD_K
2
3
D-GND
1
1
5VLED
3
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
1
2
1TURC
8
2
1TUD_CL
2
3
D-GND
1
1
5VLED
3
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
24V3
/1TURC
2
1
PHNR-02-H + BU02P-TR-P-H
CN26
P-GND
20
/HV_DATA#
21
/HV_CLK#
22
/HV_LD1#
23
HV_REM#
24
B32B-PHDSS-B
CN9
11
1TUD_CL
13
GND
9
5VLED
B30B-PHDSS-B
CN9
1TUD_K
12
D-GND
14
10
5VLED
B30B-PHDSS-B
CN12
24V3
16
/1TURC
14
B32B-PHDSS-B
DVMK
1TUD_CL
1TC_CMY
1TC_K
1TUD_K
3
2
7
9
1
PCU PWB
3
10
2TC
4
12
2-TC
1TNFD
11
13
WTNM
Signal name
1TC_CMY
1TC_K
1TNFD
1TUD_CL
1TUD_K
1TURC
2TC
DVMK
WTNM
Name
Waste toner full detection switch
Transfer belt separation CL detection
Transfer belt separation BK detection
Primary transfer separation clutch
Developer drive motor (K)
Waste toner drive motor
CLR
2nd TC PWB
1TNFD
D-GND
P
1
2
1
2
SL2PIN
WTNM_1
WTNM_2
R
1
2
R
3
4
5
6
CN1
INT24V2
1
P-GND
2
/TC_CLK#
4
/TC_DATA#
3
/TC_LD#
5
/HV_REM#
6
B6P-PH-K-S
SM18PIN
1TNFD
D-GND
WTNM_1
WTNM_2
Functions and operations
Color trasnfer high voltage signal
B/W transfer high voltage signal
Waste toner full detection
Color transfer roller position detection signal
B/W transfer roller position detection signal
Transfer roller separation control clutch
Secondary transfer high voltage signal
Transfer unit drive motor (Used together with the B/W developing drive roller)
Stirs waste toner.
MX-2300/2700 N/G TRANSFER SECTION L – 1
P
3
4
5
6
CN34
2
4
6
8
10
12
INT24V2
P-GND
/TC_CLK#
/TC_DATA#
/TC_LD#
/HV_REM#
B40B-PADSS-B
CN9
1TNFD
1
2
D-GND
17
WTNM_1
18
WTNM_2
B30B-PHDSS-B
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Name
Intermediate transfer blade
Intermediate transfer belt
Primary transfer roller
Transfer drive roller
Transfer follower roller
Tension roller
Roller cleaning brush
Y auxiliary roller
Registration backup roller
Secondary transfer belt
Secondary transfer roller
Secondary belt transfer roller
Secondary belt tension roller
Primary transfer CL roller
Functions and operations
Cleans residual toner on the intermediate transfer belt.
Transfers toner on the OPC drum to form toner images on the belt.
Transfers toner images on the OPC drum to the intermediate transfer belt.
Drives the transfer belt.
Transfer belt follower drive
Applies a tension to the transfer belt.
Cleans the back surface of the transfer belt.
Retaining the belt position by separation of the Y transfer roller
Retaining the belt position in the process control and the registration section.
Transfers toner images on the intermediate transfer belt to paper.
Transfers toner images on the intermediate transfer belt to paper.
Drives the transfer belt.
Applies a proper tension to the transfer belt.
Cleans the primary transfer belt.
B. Primary (intermediate) transfer roller
separation mechanism and content
2. Operational descriptions
A. Outline
In this section, a high voltage is applied to transfer images to the
intermediate transfer belt and toner images on the intermediate
transfer belt are transferred to paper by the secondary transfer belt.
The primary transfer roller performs all pressure contact, all separation, and only black contact depending on the operation mode.
When the roller separation clutch (1TURC) is turned ON, the transfer cam rotates and the primary transfer link and the primary transfer arm which is linked with the cam are shifted in the arrow
direction, performing separation of the roller.
All pressure contact
All separation
Only black pressure contact
The arm performs all pressure contact, all separation, and only
black contact.
All pressure contact
All separation
Only black contact
1TUD_CL
ON
OFF
OFF
1TUD_K
OFF
ON
OFF
The primary transfer and the secondary transfer are driven together
with the black developing motor.
MX-2300/2700 N/G TRANSFER SECTION L – 2
3. Disassembly and assembly
2)
Open the right door unit.
3)
Loosen the blue screw.
4)
Turn the blue screw (A) counterclockwise. Making sure that
the lock is released (B), open and then pull out the drum positioning unit.
A. Primary transfer
(2)-a
(1)-a
(2)-b
(1)-n
(1)-b
(1)-g
(1)-c
(1)
(1)-o
(1)-m
(1)-j
(1)-i
(1)-k
(1)-e
(1)-l
(1)-f
(1)-d
(1)-h
(1)
(2)
Unit
Primary
transfer unit
Others
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
a
b
(1)
1)
Parts
Intermediate transfer belt
Primary transfer CL roller
Intermediate transfer blade
Primary transfer roller
Primary transfer conduction
collar
Y auxiliary roller
Belt drive gear
Transfer drive roller
Transfer follower roller
Tension roller
Roller cleaning brush
Registration backup roller
Cleaner seal
Cleaner seal R
Transfer toner reception seal
Transfer belt separation CL
detection
Transfer belt separation BK
detection
Primary transfer unit
Maintenance
✕▲
▲
✕▲
✕▲
✕▲
* Failure to complete this step may damage the intermediate
transfer belt.
B
{
✕▲
{
{
{
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
5)
A
Hold the specified position, and remove the primary transfer
unit.
Open the front cover.
(NOTE)
When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer unit is
released manually, turn on the power again after completion of
the work. (Power OFF-ON) This procedure initializes the transfer roller to return it to the home position.
MX-2300/2700 N/G TRANSFER SECTION L – 3
5)
a. Intermediate transfer belt
* Do not replace the belt, blade, and primary transfer CL roller separately. When any of the three parts needs to be replaced,
replace the other two parts as well.
* When replacing the belt, be sure to apply stearic acid (UKOG0312FCZZ) and strontium titanate according to the instructions.
1)
Remove the primary trasnfer unit.
2)
Remove the cleaner unit.
3)
Remove the transfer guide plate left unit.
4)
Remove the parts.
Turn the belt twice (in the direction described in step 3).
* There may be some traces of strontium titanate left on the
surface of the belt.
6)
Turn the primary transfer unit over.
* Turn the unit over by lifting the cleaner unit side.
* Keep the primary transfer unit in a horizontal position (not to
lower the cleaner unit side) until it is installed on the
machine.
* Be sure not to allow strontium titanate to spread inside the
cleaner unit.
[Bottom surface]
Cleaner unit
side
CL roller side
[Figure 1]
5)
Fold the CL section of the transfer frame and remove the intermediate transfer belt.
[Figure 3]
1
Apply strontium titanate all the way
beyond the boss.
[Figure 2]
2
12
34
5A
B
-67
[Number of times of application]
Apply uniformly.
* When installing, set the lot number inside the belt to the front
side.
[Precautions for installation]
Turn the unit over by lifting the
cleaner unit side.
When replacing the belt, make sure not to scratch or fold it.
Do not touch the surface of the belt with bare hands.
(Applying the start powder)
1)
Install the primary transfer unit, laying it on the top surface.
* Make sure that the pressure on the CL roller has been
released.
2)
Apply the side seal powder (stearic acid) uniformly on the surface of the belt (Figure 1).
* Apply the side seal powder uniformly on half of the surfaces
on both sides of the belt.
Cleaner
unit side
CL roller side
[Never lower the cleaner unit side.]
* Rub the belt with a cloth bag containing the side seal powder
so that the powder will be applied onto the belt.
3)
Turn the belt a 1/4 turn. (For the direction of the turn, see Figure 3.)
4)
Apply strontium titanate uniformly on the surface of the belt.
* Apply strontium titanate evenly on the surface of the belt.
* Apply 20 times (5 times transversally x 4 times longitudinally,
see Figure 2).
MX-2300/2700 N/G TRANSFER SECTION L – 4
b. Primary transfer CL roller
1)
Remove the primary transfer unit.
2)
Remove the transfer guide plate left unit.
3)
Remove the transfer guide plate, and remove the intermediate
transfer blade.
* When installing, apply stearic acid onto the intermediate
transfer blade (A).
* Check the cleaner seal (B) and cleaner seal R (C). If any of
them is laid on the blade, replace it. (See step m for the
cleaner seal and step n for the cleaner seal R respectively.)
B
A
3)
C
Remove the screw, and remove the primary transfer CL roller
installation plate unit.
Remove the waste toner drive motor from the waste toner
drive unit.
d. Primary transfer roller
e. Primary transfer conduction collar
f. Y auxiliary roller
1)
Remove the primary trasnfer unit.
2)
Remove the cleaner unit.
3)
Remove the intermediate transfer belt.
4)
Disengage the engagement on the front side, and remove the
primary transfer roller (A) and the primary transfer conduction
collar (B). Remove the Y auxiliary roller (C).
* After assembling, check to confirm that it is not set at the
pressure release position.
A
1
A
A
A
3
C
2
B
B
B
B
g. Belt drive gear
c. Intermediate transfer blade
1)
Remove the primary transfer unit, and put it upside down.
2)
Remove the cleaner unit.
1)
Remove the primary trasnfer unit.
2)
Remove the cleaner unit.
3)
Remove the screws, and remove the belt drive gear.
MX-2300/2700 N/G TRANSFER SECTION L – 5
h. Transfer drive roller
l. Registration backup roller
1)
Remove the primary trasnfer unit.
1)
2)
Remove the cleaner unit.
2)
Remove the cleaner unit.
3)
Remove the intermediate transfer belt.
3)
Remove the intermediate transfer belt.
4)
Clean the transfer drive roller.
4)
Check the registration backup roller.
i. Transfer follower roller
Remove the primary trasnfer unit.
m. Cleaner seal
j. Tension roller
n. Cleaner seal R
1)
Remove the primary trasnfer unit.
2)
Remove the cleaner unit.
3)
Remove the intermediate transfer belt.
4)
Clean the trasnfer follower roller (A) and the tension roller (B).
1)
Remove the primary trasnfer unit.
2)
Remove the cleaner unit.
3)
Remove the cleaner seal (A) and the cleaner seal R (B).
B
A
B
* When attaching the seals, position the seals within the specified ranges, referring to the reference lines as indicated
below.
A
0 - 0.3mm
k. Roller cleaning brush
1)
Remove the primary trasnfer unit.
2)
Remove the cleaner unit.
3)
Remove the intermediate transfer belt.
4)
Check the roller CL brush.
Reference line
0 - 0.3mm
0 - 0.3mm
Reference line
Reference line
o. Transfer toner reception seal
1)
Remove the primary trasnfer unit.
2)
Remove the cleaner unit.
3)
Remove the transfer toner reception seal.
MX-2300/2700 N/G TRANSFER SECTION L – 6
* When attaching the transfer toner reception seal, position
the seal within the specified ranges, referring to the reference lines as indicated below.
(1)
1)
Secondary transfer unit
Open the right door unit.
Reference line
0 - 0.3mm
Reference line
2
0 - 0.3mm
1
(2)
Others
2)
a. Transfer belt separation CL detection
Release the pawl, and remove the secondary transfer unit.
b. Transfer belt separation BK detection
1)
3
Remove the primary trasnfer unit.
2)
Remove the developing unit.
3)
Remove the drum unit.
4)
Check the transfer belt separation CL detection (A) and the
transfer belt separation BK detection (B).
1
3
B
A
1
2
a. Secondary trasnfer idle gear
b. Secondary belt follower roller
c. Secondary transfer belt
B. Secondary transfer
(1)-f
1)
Remove the secondary trasnfer unit.
2)
Remove each parts, and remove the secondary drive plate.
Remove each parts, and remove the idle gear (A).
(1)-c
(1)-a
(1)-e
3
2
(1)-g
(1)
(1)-d
1
(1)-b
A
(1)
Unit
Secondary
transfer unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Parts
Secondary transfer idle gear
Secondary belt follower roller
Secondary transfer belt
Secondary transfer roller
Secondary trasnfer belt drive
roller
Roller cleaning brush
Secondary belt tension roller
Maintenance
✕▲
✕{
✕▲
✕▲
✕{
✕
✕{
MX-2300/2700 N/G TRANSFER SECTION L – 7
3)
4)
Remove the secondary belt transfer frame.
e. Secondary belt drive roller
1)
Remove the secondary trasnfer unit.
2)
Remove the secondary transfer belt.
3)
Remove each parts, then remove the secondary belt drive
roller.
Remove each parts, and remove the secondary follower roller.
1
f. Roller cleaning brush
2
5)
1)
Remove the secondary trasnfer unit.
2)
Remove the secondary transfer belt.
3)
Remove the secondary belt drive roller.
4)
Remove the roller CL brush.
Remove the secondary transfer belt.
g. Secondary belt tension roller
1)
Remove the secondary transfer belt.
2)
Release the pawl, and remove the secondary belt tension
roller.
1
d. Secondary transfer roller
1)
Remove the secondary trasnfer unit.
2)
Remove the secondary transfer belt.
3)
Remove the bearing on the front side, and remove the secondary transfer roller.
1
2
1
2
MX-2300/2700 N/G TRANSFER SECTION L – 8
4. Maintenance
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
Parts name
1
Intermediate
transfer belt
Primary transfer
roller
Intermediate
transfer blade
Belt drive gear
Primary transfer
conduction collar
Transfer drive roller
Transfer follower
roller
Tension roller
Belt CL brush
Y auxiliary roller
Registration
backup roller
Secondary transfer
belt
Secondary transfer
roller
Secondary belt
drive roller
Secondary belt
tension roller
Secondary belt
follower roller
Secondary transfer
idle gear
Primary CL roller
Cleaner seal
Cleaner seal R
Transfer toner
reception seal
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical
parts
Mechanism
parts
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No. (Only
the replacement parts
are described.)
(P/G No.: [26]-3)
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
(P/G No.: [30]-21)
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
(P/G No.: [30]-6)
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
{
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
▲
(P/G No.: [29]-6)
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
✕
✕
✕
(P/G No.: [26]-56)
✕
✕
✕
(P/G No.: [27]-9)
(P/G No.: [28]-27)
(P/G No.: [25]-19)
(P/G No.: [27]-13)
(P/G No.: [27]-8)
(P/G No.: [28]-25)
1
19
20
3
8
7
4
10
21
17
5
19
11
2
12
9
14
6
13
15
16
9 11
8
18
3
14
15
13,17
16
4,6
7
10
2,5
MX-2300/2700 N/G TRANSFER SECTION L – 9
Service ManualSENSOR SECTION
[M] PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR, REGISTRATION
MX2700N
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
1
5
6
2
3
4
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
DF11-6DP-SP1
CN17
24V3
/PCSS
16
17
15
14
24V3
/PCSS
15
14
2
1
PCU PWB
R
/PCSS
24V3
SM2P
REGS_R_LED#
REGS_R
D-GND
5VNPD
24
26
27
23
13
12
11
10
REGS_R_LED#
REGS_R
D-GND
5VNPD
13
12
11
10
5VNPD
D-GND
REGS_R
REGS_R_LED#
RESI SENSOR R
PCS_LED#
PCS_CL
PCS_K
D-GND
18
19
21
28
9
8
7
6
5
PCS_LED#
PCS_CL
PCS_K
D-GND
5VNPD
9
8
7
6
5
5
4
3
2
1
REGS_F_LED#
REGS_F
D-GND
22
20
25
4
3
2
1
REGS_F_LED#
REGS_F
D-GND
5VNPD
4
3
2
1
R
SM18P
P
B32B-PHDSS-B
Signal name
PCS_CL/K
PCSS
REGS_F/R
Name
Process control sensor
Process control shutter solenoid
Resist sensor
2
1
P
4
3
2
1
REGS_R
PCSS
5VNPD
D-GND
PCS_K
PCS_CL
PCS_LED#
PROCON SENSOR
4
3
2
1
5VNPD
D-GND
REGS_F
REGS_F_LED#
RESI SENSOR F
PCS_CL/K
REGS_F
Function/Operation
Detects the toner patch density.
Opens/closes the shutter of the process control and the registration sensor.
Detects the resist shift.
2. Operational descriptions
A. Process control sensor control
The shutter is provided on the monochrome (PCS_K) and color
(PCS_CL) process control sensor. When the shutter is opened (the
image density is corrected), the toner patch formed on the transfer
belt is scanned by the process control sensor and the information is
passed to the PCU.
When the shutter is closed, the gray resin section on the back of
the shutter is scanned to perform calibration of the sensor itself.
The shutter operation is controlled by the process control shutter
solenoid (PCSS).
B. Registration sensor control
The registration sensor is attached to the F side (REGS_F) and the
R side (REGS_R). When the shutter is opened, the registration
image formed on the transfer belt is scanned by the sensor and the
information is passed to the PCU.
MX-2300/2700 N/G PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR, REGISTRATION SENSOR SECTION M – 1
3. Disassembly and assembly
a. Resist sensor
A. Process control sensor, registration sensor
section
b. Process control sensor
1)
Remove the process control sensor unit.
2)
Push up the shutter operation plate, and clean the registration
sensor (A) and the process control sensor (B).
(1)-c
(1)-a
(1)-b
A
(1)
Unit
Process
control
sensor unit
A
(1)
(1)-a
(1)
B
a
b
c
Parts
Resist sensor
Process control sensor
Process control shutter
solenoid
Maintenance
✕{
✕{
c. Process control shutter solenoid
1)
Remove the process control sensor unit.
2)
Remove the screw, slide the sensor mounting stay, and
remove the sensor mounting stay.
3)
Remove the screws. Disconnect the connector, and remove
the process control shutter solenoid.
Process control sensor unit
1)
Remove the developing unit (K).
2)
Remove the drum unit (K).
3)
Remove the primary trasnfer unit.
4)
Remove the paper feed tray 1.
5)
Remove the rear cabinet.
6)
Remove the ADU connection drive.
7)
Remove the resist roller unit.
8)
Disconnect the connector. Remove the screws. Release the
pawl, then remove the process control sensor.
* When installing, engage the process control shutter solenoid
with the groove in the shutter mounting plate (A).
A
MX-2300/2700 N/G PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR, REGISTRATION SENSOR SECTION M – 2
4. Maintenance
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
18
Parts name
Sensors
(Process
control resist
sensors)
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical
parts
Mechanism
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
✕
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide. Block/
Item No. (Only the
replacement parts are
described.)
18
MX-2300/2700 N/G PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR, REGISTRATION SENSOR SECTION M – 3
MX2700N
[N]
FUSING SECTION
Service Manual
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
DF11-4DP-SP1(PASTEL)
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
4
3
2
1
R
SM18PIN
P
16
TH_UMCS_IN
16
15
D-GND
15
26
D-GND
TH_LM_IN
CN9
CN34
14
TH_LM_IN
14
29
13
TH_US_IN
13
12
TH_UM_IN
12
27
TH_US_IN
30 TH_UMCS_IN
25
TH_UM_IN
B30B-PHDSS-B
CN3
N-HL(LOW)
2
N-HL(SUB)
3
1
L-HL(COM)
B03P-VL-R
CN2
L-HL(COM)
3
L-HL(COM)
2
N-HL(MAIN)
1
B03P-VL-K
5
2
4
1
L-HL(COM)
N-HL(SUB)
L-HL(COM)
N-HL(MAIN)
6
3
5
2
4
1
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
L-HL(COM)
N-HL(LOW)
TH_UMCS_IN
TH_UM_IN
D-GND
TH_US_IN
D-GND
TH_LM_IN
D-GND
DRAWER RWZ
PCU PWB
HL PWB
CN4
/HLPR
HLOUT_UM
HLOUT_US
HLOUT_LM
D-GND
INT24V1
B6P-PH-K-S
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
FUM
2
1
3
1
2
TH_UMCS_IN
TH_UM_IN
D-GND
4
3
2
3
1
2
1
TH_US_IN
D-GND
TH_LM_IN
D-GND
PHNR-2-H +
BU02P-TR-P-H
PHNR-3-H +
BU03P-TR-P-H
6
3
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
PHNR-4-H +
BU04P-TR-P-H
1
INT24V1
D-GND
3
11
HLOUT_LM
HLOUT_US
9
HLOUT_UM
7
/HLPR
5
B40B-PADSS-B
1
RTH1
HLTS1
HLTS2
RTH2
2
HLTS3
HL_UM
HL_US
HL_LM
Signal name
RTH1
RTH2
HLTS1
HLTS2
HL_UM
Name
Fusing temperature sensor (1)
Fusing temperature sensor (2)
Thermostat (1)
Thermostat (2)
Heater lamp (1)
2
RTH3
3
Function/Operation
Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (heating). (Center section)
Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (heating). (Edge section)
Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally. [For the fusing roller (heating)]
Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally. [For the fusing roller (heating)]
Heats the fusing roller (heating).
MX-2300/2700 N/G FUSING SECTION N – 1
Signal name
HL_US
RTH3
HLTS3
HL_LM
FUM
No.
1
2
3
Name
Heater lamp (2)
Fusing temperature sensor (3)
Thermostat (3)
Heater lamp (3)
Fusing motor
Name
Fusing roller (Heating)
Pawl
Fusing roller (pressing)
Function/Operation
Heats the fusing roller (heating).
Detects the surface temperature of the fusing roller (heating).
Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally. [For the fusing roller (heating)]
Heats the fusing roller (heating).
Drives the fusing unit.
Function/Operation
Heat and presses toner on paper to fuse it on paper.
Paper which was not separated naturally from the fusing roller (heating) is mechanically separated.
Heat and presses toner on paper to fuse it on paper.
2. Operational descriptions
The upper and the lower heat rollers are provided to heat from
above and below.
A. Fusing unit drive
To drive the fusing unit, the drive power is transmitted from the
drive motor (FUM) through the connection gear to the upper heat
roller gear.
The drive motor (stepping motor) is driven according to the control
signal sent from the PCU.
PCU
FUM
This is because it is necessary to heat four layers of toner from
above and below and right and left to fuse it on paper.
The upper and lower heat rollers are of silicon rubber.
This is because of the following reasons:
1)
To provide a greater nip quantity and a higher heating capacity
for paper.
2)
The soft, flexible rollers press multi-layer toner without deformation to fuse on paper.
3)
An even pressure is applied to an uneven surface of multilayer toner.
D. Fusing temperature control
B. Heater lamp drive
The surface temperature of the heat roller detected by the thermistor is sent to the PCU. When the temperature is lower than the
specified level, the heater lamp lighting signal is sent from the PCU
to the heater lamp drive circuit in the sub power PWB.
The power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned on, and the
AC power is supplied to the heater lamp, lighting the lamp and
heating the heat roller.
To prepare for an abnormally high temperature of the heat roller,
the thermostat is provided for safety.
When the thermostat is opened, power supply (AC line) to the
heater lamp is cut off.
C. Fusing operation
Color toner of YMCK on paper is heated and pressed by the heat
rollers to be fused on paper.
At that time, color toner of YMCK is mixed to reproduce nearly
actual colors of document images.
The temperature sensors are provided at the center and the edges
of the upper heat roller, and at the center of the lower heat roller.
The heat roller temperature is detected by the temperature sensors
to control the heater lamp so that the temperature is maintained at
the specified level.
The fusing temperature is switched according to the machine condition and paper type selected.
Mode
Ready state
Print mode
Paper
B/W normal
paper
Color normal
paper
Heavy paper
OHP
Envelope
MX-2300/2700 N/G FUSING SECTION N – 2
Fusing
roller center
(heating)
main
170
Fusing
roller
(heating)
sub
180
170
180
130
170
170
180
175
170
180
140
145
145
Fusing
roller
(pressing)
130
3. Disassembly and assembly
2)
Release the lock lever, and remove the fusing unit.
A. Fusing section
(1)-j
(1)-k
1
(1)-m
(1)-i
(1)-n
(1)-l
1
(1)-k
(1)-m
(1)-c
(1)-a
2
(1)-a
a. Upper thermostat
(1)-b
(1)
1)
Remove the fusing unit.
2)
Remove the screws and the fusing upper cover.
3)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the upper thermostat.
(1)-d
(1)-g
(1)-f
(1)-e
(1)-h
(1)
(1)
1)
Unit
Fusing unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
Parts
Upper thermostat
Upper thermistor
Non-contact thermistor
Lower thermostat
Lower thermistor
Upper heater lamp main
Upper heater lamp sub
Lower heater lamp
Upper heat roller
Upper heat roller gear
Upper heat roller bearing
Lower heat roller gear
Lower heat roller bearing
Upper separation pawl
Maintenance
✕▲
✕
✕▲
✕▲
✕▲
✕▲
✕▲
✕▲
✕▲
Fusing unit
Open the right door unit.
2
1
b. Upper thermistor
1)
Remove the fusing unit.
2)
Remove the screws and the fusing upper cover.
MX-2300/2700 N/G FUSING SECTION N – 3
3)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the upper thermistor.
e. Lower thermistor
1)
Remove the fusing unit.
2)
Remove the fusing lower cover.
3)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the lower thermistor.
c. Non-contact thermistor
1)
Remove the fusing upper cover.
2)
Remove the screws, and remove the cover. Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the non-contact thermistor.
f. Upper heater lamp main
g. Upper heater lamp sub
1)
Remove the fusing unit.
2)
Release the pressure release lever, and remove the fusing
upper cover F.
1
d. Lower thermostat
1)
Remove the fusing unit.
2)
Remove the fusing lower cover.
2
3)
Tilt the lock lever, and remove the fusing upper cover R.
1
2
3)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the lower thermostat.
4)
Disconnect the connector.
MX-2300/2700 N/G FUSING SECTION N – 4
5)
Remove the lamp holder, and remove the lamp.
4)
Release the pressure.
* Since the connector shape on the front side differ from that
on the rear side, be careful when installing.
5)
Open the fusing unit.
6)
Remove the upper heat roller unit, and remove the parts.
Install so that the red harness is on the rear side.
h. Lower heater lamp
1)
Remove the fusing unit.
2)
Remove the fusing upper cover F.
3)
Remove the fusing upper cover R.
4)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the lamp holder.
5)
Remove the lower heater lamp.
* Since the connector shape on the front side differ from that
on the rear side, be careful when installing.
Install so that the red harness is on the rear side.
l. Lower heat roller gear
m. Lower heat roller bearing
1)
Remove the fusing unit.
2)
Remove the lower heater lamp.
3)
Release the pressure, and open the fusing unit.
4)
Remove the lower heat roller unit, and remove the parts
i. Upper heat roller
j. Upper heat roller gear
k. Upper heat roller bearing
1)
Remove the fusing unit.
2)
Remove the upper heater lamp.
3)
Remove the fusing rear upper PG.
MX-2300/2700 N/G FUSING SECTION N – 5
n. Upper separation pawl
1)
Remove the fusing unit.
2)
Remove the fusing rear upper PG.
3)
Remove the spring, and remove the upper separation pawl.
1
2
MX-2300/2700 N/G FUSING SECTION N – 6
4. Maintenance
A. Fusing section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
Parts name
1
2
3
Upper heat roller
Lower heat roller
Upper heat roller
gear
Upper roller bearing
Lower heat roller
bearing
Upper separation
pawl
Upper thermistor
Lower thermistor
Non-contact
thermistor
Gears
Paper guide
Fusing unit
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical
parts
Mechanism
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No. (Only
the replacement parts
are described.)
(P/G No.: [32]-32)
(P/G No.: [33]-15)
(P/G No.: [32]-30)
✕
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
✕
✕
▲
▲
✕
✕
▲
▲
✕
✕
▲
▲
✕
✕
▲
▲
✕
✕
▲
▲
(P/G No.: [32]-31)
(P/G No.: [33]-14)
✕
✕
▲
✕
▲
✕
▲
✕
▲
✕
▲
✕
▲
(P/G No.: [32]-11)
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
✕
✕
✕
✕
▲
▲
▲
(P/G No.: [32]-18)
(P/G No.: [33]-20)
✕
{
✕
✩
{
✕
✩
{
▲
✩
{
✕
✩
{
▲
✩
{
✕
✩
{
▲
✩
{
✕
✩
{
▲
✩
{
✕
✩
{
▲
✩
{
✕
✩
{
▲
Specified position
(P/G No.: [31]-901)
(P/G No.: [32]-901)
(P/G No.: [33]-901)
1
12
6
1
9
6
2
2
7
8
3
4
9
5
7
11
4
11
8
5
11
MX-2300/2700 N/G FUSING SECTION N – 7
MX2700N
[O]
PAPER EXIT SECTION
Service Manual
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram
DF11-4DP-SP1
3
2
1
4
5
7
3
1
6
8
2
4
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
PHNR-4-H,BU04P-TR-P-H
1
POFM_V
4
2
/POFM_CNT
3
3
P-GND
2
4
POFM_LD1
1
PHNR-4-H,BU04P-TR-P-H
1
POFM_V
4
2
/POFM_CNT
3
3
P-GND
2
4
POFM_LD2
1
R
5
1
2
3
4
TFD2
HOPS
SM6P
24V2
/OSM_XB
/OSM_XA
/OSM_B
/OSM_A
1
2
3
4
5
24
7
9
11
13
24V2
/OSM_XB
/OSM_XA
/OSM_B
/OSM_A
TFD2
5VNPD
POD2
D-GND
1
2
3
14
POD2
14
12
POD2
5VNPD
HOPS
D-GND
1
2
3
15
HOPS
15
16
HOPS
5VNPD
POD1
D-GND
1
2
3
16
17
12
POD1
D-GND
5VNPD
16
17
12
POMB/
INT24V1
POMA/
POMB//
INT24V1
POMA//
6
5
4
3
2
1
FUMA/
FUMB/
INT24V1
INT24V1
FUMA//
FUMB//
6
5
4
3
2
1
DF11-6DP-SP1
DF11-6DP-SP1
R
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SM-12p
POMB/
INT24V1
POMA/
POMB//
INT24V1
POMA//
FUMA/
FUMB/
INT24V1
INT24V1
FUMA//
FUMB//
P
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
Name
Fusing drive motor
Shifter home position detection
Shifter motor
Fusing after detection
Paper exit detection
Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side)
Paper exit cooling fan motor (R side)
Paper exit drive motor
Paper exit full detection
24V2
/OSM_XB
/OSM_XA
/OSM_B
/OSM_A
10
2
Signal name
FUM
HOPS
OSM
POD1
POD2
POFM_F
POFM_R
POM
TFD2
1
2
3
4
5
POFM_V
/POFM_CNT
P-GND
POFM_LD1
POFM_LD2
13
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
FUM
CN13
15
17
19
21
22
TFD2
6
5
4
3
2
1
POD1
POFM_F
S
6
7
11
8
9
13
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
POD2
DF1B-26p
POFM_V
/POFM_CNT
P-GND
POFM_LD1
POFM_LD2
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
1
POM
POFM_R
P
5
1
2
3
4
P
6
7
11
8
9
5VNPD
TFD2
D-GND
OSM
3
DF11-8DP-SP2
Function/Operation
Drives the fusing unit.
Detects the shifter home position.
Offsets the paper.
After fusing, paper exit from fusing section is detected.
Detects the exit paper.
Cools the fusing unit.
Cools the fusing unit.
Drives the paper exit roller.
Detects face-down paper exit tray full.
MX-2300/2700 N/G PAPER EXIT SECTION O – 1
POD1
14
2
D-GND
18
5VNPD
B32B-PHDSS-B
PCU PWB
CN6
4
POMB/
6
INT24V1
1
POMA/
3
POMB//
5
INT24V1
2
POMA//
7
FUMA/
FUMB/
10
12
INT24V1
INT24V1
11
8
FUMA//
9
FUMB//
B12B-PH-K-S
DRIVER
MAIN
PWB
1 : Dec. 15 2005
No.
1
2
Name
Transport roller 9 (Drive)
Transport roller 13 (Drive)
3
Paper exit roller 1 (Drive)
Function/Operation
Transports the paper from the fixing roller to the transport roller 13.
Paper transported from the transport roller 9 is transported to the paper exit roller 1. / Paper is
transported to the duplex (ADU) section.
Paper is discharged. / Paper is transported to the right paper exit tray. / Paper is transported to the
duplex (ADU) section.
2. Operational descriptions
a. Exit paper full detection sensor
A. Paper exit section
b. Shifter home position detection sensor
• Paper transported from the fusing section is passed to the transport roller 13 which is driven by the paper exit drive motor and to
the paper exit roller 1, then discharged to the inner tray.
1)
Remove the paper exit unit.
• When paper is discharged to the right tray, it is passed to the
paper exit roller 1 and the paper exit drive motor is reversely
rotated, and paper is passed over the ADU reverse gate and discharged to the right tray.
3. Disassembly and assembly
A. Paper exit section
(1)-a (1)-b
1
(1)-c
(1)-e
(1)
(1)-g
(1)-j
(1)-f
(1)-e
(1)-n
(1)-h
(1)-i
c. Paper exit detection sensor
d. After-fusing sensor
1)
Remove the paper exit unit.
2)
Paper exit sensor (A), after-fusing sensor (B)
(1)-d
(1)-k
(1)-n
(1)-l
(1)-m
(1)
A
Unit
Paper exit
unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
(1)
1)
Parts
Exit paper full detection sensor
Shifter home position detection
sensor
Paper exit detection sensor
After-fusing sensor
Paper exit cooling fan motor
Discharge brush
Shifter motor
Paper exit roller 1 (Drive)
Fusing drive motor
Paper exit drive motor
Transport roller 13 (Drive)
Transport roller 9 (Drive)
Discharge brush
Paper exit filter
Maintenance
B
✕
✕{
e. Paper exit cooling fan motor
1)
Remove the paper exit unit.
2)
Remove the exhaust fan duct.
✕{
✕{
✕
Paper exit unit
Remove the paper exit unit, and disconnect the connector.
2
1
MX-2300/2700 N/G PAPER EXIT SECTION O – 2
3)
Remove the paper exit cooling fan motor.
3)
Remove the shifter motor.
h. Paper exit roller 1 (Drive)
f. Discharge brush
1)
Remove the paper exit unit.
2)
Remove the exhaust fan duct.
3)
Remove the discharge grounding plate, and remove the discharge brush.
1)
Remove the paper exit unit.
2)
Remove the exhaust fan duct.
3)
Remove the slide motor unit.
4)
Remove the parts. Slide the bearing, and remove the shifter
unit.
4
3
1
1
2
2
5)
Remove the parts, and remove the paper exit roller 1 (drive).
* Discharge brush attachment reference
When attaching the discharge brush, attach it along the
shifter PG.
g. Shifter motor
i. Fusing drive motor
1)
Remove the paper exit unit.
2)
Disconnect the connector and the grounding terminal, and
remove the snap band. Remove the slide motor unit.
1)
Remove the paper exit unit.
2)
Remove the fusing drive motor.
1
2
MX-2300/2700 N/G PAPER EXIT SECTION O – 3
1 : Dec. 15 2005
j. Paper exit drive motor
1)
Remove the paper exit unit.
2)
Remove the paper exit drive motor.
1
m. Discharge brush
1)
Remove the paper exit unit.
2)
Remove the discharge brush.
0㨪0.5mm
k. Transport roller 13 (Drive)
1)
Remove the paper exit unit.
2)
Remove the slide motor unit.
3)
Remove the paper exit drive unit.
4)
Remove the E-ring, the reverse drive belt, and the pulley.
0㨪0.5mm
* When attaching the discharge brush, attach it to the attachment
reference.
n. Paper exit filter
1)
5)
Open the right door.
Remove the E-ring and the bearing, and remove the transport
roller 13 (Drive).
2
1
2)
Open the filter holding sheet, and remove the paper exit filter.
l. Transport roller 9 (Drive)
1)
Remove the paper exit unit.
2)
Remove the slide motor unit.
3)
Remove the paper exit drive unit.
4)
Remove the parts, and remove the transport roller 9 (Drive).
MX-2300/2700 N/G PAPER EXIT SECTION O – 4
1 : Dec. 15 2005
4. Maintenance
A. Paper exit section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
1
1
2
3
Parts name
Transport rollers
Discharge brush
Paper exit filter
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical
parts
Mechanism
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
✕
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
{
✕
3
1
1
2
MX-2300/2700 N/G PAPER EXIT SECTION O – 5
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
[P] DRIVE SECTION
MX2700N
3) Remove the
flywheel.
Service
Manual
* Installing sequence: (1) C → (2) KM → (3) KM (Each color is
marked.)
1. Disassembly and assembly
* After installation, check to confirm that it is not in contact
with the harness, etc.
A. Main drive section
(1)
(1)-a
(1)-a
(1)-a
(1)-h
(1)-a
(1)-c
(1)-b
(1)-e
C
(1)-g
(1)-d
(1)-f
KM
(1)-g
KM
(1)
(1)
Unit
Main drive unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
Parts
Toner motor
Developer drive motor (K)
Developing drive motor (CL)
Drum motor (K)
Drum motor (CL)
Resist motor
Phase detection PWB
Separation clutch
4)
Remove the connectors.
5)
Remove the screws, and remove the main drive unit.
Main drive unit
1)
Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
2)
Remove the screws, and open the control box.
* Hold section A and remove.
A
MX-2300/2700 N/G DRIVE SECTION P – 1
a. Toner motor
d. Drum motor (K)
1)
Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
2)
Open the control box.
1)
3)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the toner
motor.
Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
2)
Open the control box.
e. Drum motor (CL)
3)
Remove the flywheel.
4)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the drum
motor (K) and the drum motor (CL).
A
b. Developer drive motor (K)
1)
Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
2)
Open the control box.
3)
Remove the flywheel.
4)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the developer drive motor (K).
B
f. Resist motor
1)
Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
2)
Open the control box.
3)
Remove the flywheel.
4)
Remove the connctor and the screws, then remove the resist
motor.
c. Developing drive motor (CL)
1)
Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
2)
Open the control box.
3)
Remove the flywheel.
4)
Remove the connector and the screws, and remove the developer drive motor (CL).
g. Phase detection PWB
1)
Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
2)
Open the control box.
* When installing, tighten the screws in section (A).
3)
Remove the flywheel.
4)
Remove the screws, and remove the phase detection PWB.
Disconnect the connector.
A
A
A
MX-2300/2700 N/G DRIVE SECTION P – 2
h. Separation clutch
1)
Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
2)
Open the control box.
3)
Remove the flywheel.
4)
Remove the gear, and remove the separation clutch. Then disconnect the connector.
4)
Remove the connector and the screws. Release the pawl, then
remove the filter box unit.
5)
Remove the connector and remove the paper feed drive unit.
* When installing, check to insure that the clutch rotation-stop
projection is engaged with the sub frame projection.
B. Paper feed drive section
(1)
(1)-a
(1)-d
(1)-f
(1)-b
a. Transport motor
(1)-c
1)
(1)-e
(1)-c
(1)
(1)
Unit
Paper feed drive unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
2)
Open the control box.
3)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the transport motor.
Parts
Transport motor
Paper feed motor
Paper tray lift-up motor
Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2)
Tray vertical transport clutch
Paper feed drive unit
1)
Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
2)
Open the control box.
3)
Remove the connector, the screws and the grounding terminal,
then remove the driver main PWB unit.
MX-2300/2700 N/G DRIVE SECTION P – 3
b. Paper feed motor
d. Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
1)
Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
1)
Remove the paper tray lift-up motor unit.
2)
Remove the paper feed motor.
2)
Open the control box.
3)
Remove the paper feed drive unit.
3)
Remove the driver main PWB unit.
4)
4)
Remove the filter box unit.
Remove the connection gear 21T. Remove the screws to
detach the drive frame upper unit.
5)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the paper
feed motor.
5)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper feed clutch
unit.
6)
Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed clutch.
c. Paper tray lift-up motor
1)
Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
2)
Open the control box.
3)
Remove the driver main PWB unit.
4)
Remove the filter box unit.
5)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the paper
tray lift-up motor unit.
6)
Disengage the pawl, and remove the lift-up coupling.
MX-2300/2700 N/G DRIVE SECTION P – 4
e. Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2)
f. Tray vertical transport clutch
1)
Remove the paper tray lift-up motor unit.
1)
Remove the paper tray lift-up motor unit.
2)
Remove the paper feed motor.
2)
Remove the paper feed motor.
3)
Remove the paper feed drive unit.
3)
Remove the paper feed drive unit.
4)
Remove the connection gear 21T. Remove the screws to
detach the drive frame upper unit.
4)
Remove the connection gear 21T. Remove the screws to
detach the drive frame upper unit.
5)
Remove the belt.
6)
Remove the connector, then remove the tray vertical transfer
clutch unit.
7)
Remove the E-ring, then remove the tray vertical transfer
clutch.
5)
6)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper feed clutch
unit.
Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed clutch.
MX-2300/2700 N/G DRIVE SECTION P – 5
2. Maintenance
A. Drive Section
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
Parts name
1
Gears (Gease)
2
Shaft Grounding
Section
(Conduction
Grease)
Belts
3
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical
parts
Mechanism
parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
✕
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide. Block/
Item No. (Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
When checking
HANARL FL955R/
FLOIL G313S, apply
to the necessary
positions. (Specified
positions)
When checking, apply
to the necessary
positions. (Specified
positions)
1
(FLOIL G313S)
1
(HANARL FL955R)
2
3
MX-2300/2700 N/G DRIVE SECTION P – 6
[Q] PWB SECTION
MX2700N
(1)
ControlManual
Box
Service
a. BOOT ROM PWB
1. Disassembly and assembly
b. PROGRAM ROM PWB
A. PWB
1)
Remove the right rear cabinet.
2)
Remove the screws and pull out the MFP cnt PWB unit.
(3)-a
(3)-b
(3)-c
(3)-e
(3)-d
(3)-i
(3)-g
(3)-h
(2)-a
(2)-b
* When placing the unit with the HDD upside, remove the
DIMM memory or insert a spacer in order to protect the
DIMM memory from pressure.
(3)-f
(1)-g
(1)-e
* Insertion position and insertion procedure when removing
the DIMM memory.
(1)-f
(1)-d
(1)-h
DIMM3
(1)-c
(1)-a
(1)-b
DIMM2
DIMM4
DIMM1
(1)
Unit
Control Box
(2)
Power supply unit
(3)
Others
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
a
b
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
Parts
BOOT ROM PWB
PROGRAM ROM PWB
MFP cht PWB
HDD
PCU Flash ROM PWB
PCU PWB
SCAN IN PWB
Mother PWB
AC Power PWB
DC Power PWB
SCN Flash ROM PWB
Scanner Control PWB
HL PWB
Driver Sub PWB
Secondary transfer PWB
Driver Main PWB
Primary transfer PWB
High Voltage MC PWB
HVR PWB
DIMM1
DIMM2
DIMM3
DIMM4
MX-2300/2700 G
Option (256MB)
256MB
512MB
256MB
MX-2300/2700 N/G PWB SECTION Q – 1
MX-2300/2700 N
—
512MB
512MB
256MB
<1> Press the section (B) of the memory PWB with both
hands.
3)
Release the lock, and remove the BOOT ROM PWB (A) and
the PROGRAM ROM PWB (B).
* When handling the memory PWB, do not touch the
pins.
* Insert temporally and straightly until it is in contact with
the contact.
2
A
1
B
2
c. MFP cnt PWB
* When inserting, be careful not to insert the memory
PWB obliquely to the connector. Do not press the
memory PWB pins with one hand.
<2> Press the section (B) of the memory PWB with both
hands simultaneously until the right and the left buttons
are locked.
1)
Remove the right rear cabinet.
2)
Remove the BOOT ROM PWB and the PROGRAM ROM
PWB.
3)
Remove the screws and then remove the MFP cnt PWB.
d. HDD
1)
Remove the right rear cabinet.
2)
Remove the screws and pull out the MFP cnt PWB unit.
3)
Remove the connector and screws then remove the HDD unit.
MX-2300/2700 N/G PWB SECTION Q – 2
4)
Remove the screws, and remove the angle from HDD.
f. PCU PWB
* Since the HDD is weak in shock, avoid hitting the corner,
dropping, or other shocks.
1)
Remove the rear cabinet.
2)
Remove the PCU Flash ROM PWB.
3)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the PCU
PWB.
e. PCU Flash ROM PWB
1)
Remove the screws, and remove the rear cabinet cover.
g. SCAN IN PWB
1
1)
Remove the rear cabinet.
2)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the
SCAN IN PWB.
2
2)
Remove the PCU Flash ROM PWB.
h. Mother PWB
1
2
1)
Remove the rear cabinet.
2)
Remove the SCAN IN PWB.
3)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the
mother PWB.
1
2
MX-2300/2700 N/G PWB SECTION Q – 3
(2)
Power supply unit
4)
Remove the screws and the connector, then remove the AC
power PWB unit.
5)
Remove the screws and the connector, then remove the DC
power PWB.
a. AC Power PWB
1)
Remove the rear cabinet.
2)
Remove the screws and the connector, and remove the AC
power PWB.
b. DC Power PWB
1)
Remove the rear cabinet.
2)
Open the control box.
(3)
Others
a. SCN Flash ROM PWB
3)
1)
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
2)
Release the lock, and remove the SCN Flash ROM PWB.
Remove the screws and the connector, and remove the filter
box unit.
2
1
MX-2300/2700 N/G PWB SECTION Q – 4
b. Scanner Control PWB
d. Driver Sub PWB
1)
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
1)
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
2)
Remove the screws, and pull out the scanner control PWB
unit. Then remove the connector.
2)
Remove the screws, and remove the driver sub PWB.
3)
Remove the screws, and remove the scanner control PWB.
e. Secondary transfer PWB
1)
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
2)
Remove the screws and the connector, and remove the secondary transfer PWB.
c. HL PWB
1)
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
2)
Remove the screws and the connector, and remove the HL
PWB.
f. Driver Main PWB
1)
Remove the rear cabinet.
2)
Remove the screws and the connector, and remove the driver
main PWB.
MX-2300/2700 N/G PWB SECTION Q – 5
g. Primary transfer PWB
1)
4)
Remove the screws and the connector, then remove the primary transfer PWB unit.
5)
Remove the screws and the connector, then remove the MC
PWB.
Remove the rear cabinet.
2)
Open the control box.
3)
Remove the screws and the connector, and remove the primary transfer PWB.
h. MC PWB
1)
Remove the rear cabinet.
2)
Open the control box.
3)
Remove the screws, then remove the fly wheel.
* Installing sequence: (1) C → (2) KM → (3) KM (Each color is
marked.)
* After installation, check to confirm that it is not in contact
with the harness, etc.
i. HVR PWB
1)
Remove the rear cabinet.
2)
Open the control box.
3)
Remove the connector and the screws, and remove the HVR
PWB.
C
KM
KM
MX-2300/2700 N/G PWB SECTION Q – 6
MX2700N
[R]
FAN AND FILTER SECTION
Service Manual
1. Disassembly and assembly
B. Fans
A. Filters
(2)
(1)
(4)
(3)
(1)
Parts
(1)
(1)
1)
Ozone Filter
Maintenance
✕▲
Ozone Filter
Remove the ozone filter cover, then remove the ozone filter.
Parts
Controler cooling fan motor
HDD cooling fan motor
Ozone fan motor
Power supply cooling fan motor
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
Maintenance
CPU cooling fan motor
1)
Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
2)
Remove the connector. Remove the screws, and remove the
MFP PWB shield upper. Remove the screws, and remove the
CPU cooling fan motor.
* When installing, fit the arrow mark on the MFP PWB shield
and the arrow mark of the CPU cooling fan motor.
3
2
MX-2300/2700 N/G FAN AND FILTER SECTION R – 1
1
(2)
HDD cooling fan motor
4)
1)
Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
2)
Open the control box.
(4)
3)
(3)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the HDD
cooling fan motor.
Remove the connector and the screws, and remove the ozone
fan motor from the filter box unit.
Power supply cooling fan
1)
Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
2)
Open the control box.
3)
Remove the filter box unit.
4)
Remove the connector and the screws, and remove the power
supply cooling fan.
Ozone fan motor
1)
Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
2)
Open the control box.
3)
Remove the filter box unit.
MX-2300/2700 N/G FAN AND FILTER SECTION R – 2
2. Maintenance
A. Filters
✕: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean ▲: Replace U: Adjust ✩: Lubricate : Shif the position.
No.
Parts name
1
Ozone filter PA
Monochrome
supply,
mechanical parts
When
calling
100
K
200
K
300
K
400
K
500
K
600
K
700
K
800
K
900
K
1000
K
1100
K
1200
K
✕
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
▲
1
MX-2300/2700 N/G FAN AND FILTER SECTION R – 3
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No. (Only
the replacement parts
are described.)
(P/G No.: [47]-40)
MX2700N
[S]
SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION
3) Remove the
screws, then remove the main switch unit.
Service
Manual
1. Disassembly and assembly
A. Sensors, Switches
4)
(4)
Remove the connector and the pawl, then remove the main
switch.
* Take care of connecting the connectors when installing.
(2)
(1)
3
(3)
3
2
2
R
1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
Parts
Main Switch
Dehumidifier Heater Switch
Front Door Open/Close Switch
Right Door Open/Close Switch
F
Main Switch
1)
Remove the front cabinet. (Refer to Front Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
2)
Remove the screws, and remove the frame cover.
MX-2300/2700 N/G SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION S – 1
(2)
Dehumidifier Heater Switch
(4)
Right Door Open/Close Switch
1)
Remove the rear cabinet. (Refer to Rear Cabinet in External
Outfit Section.)
1)
Remove the rear cabinet.
2)
Open the control box.
2)
Disconnect the connector. Release the pawl, and remove the
dehumidifier heater switch.
3)
Open the right door unit.
4)
Remove the resist roller unit.
5)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the right
door open/close switch cover unit.
6)
Remove the right door open/close switch.
2
3
1
2
(3)
Front Door Open/Close Switch
1)
Remove the frame cover. (Refer to Frame Cover in External
Outfit Section.)
2)
Remove the screws and then remove the front door open/
close switch unit.
Remove the connector and the screws and then remove the
front door open/close switch.
1
2
3
MX-2300/2700 N/G SENSOR, SWITCH SECTION S – 2
Memo
Memo
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWB’s of this model employs lead-free solder. The “LF” marks indicated on the PWB’s and the Service Manual mean “Lead-Free” solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
Lead-Free
5mm
Solder composition
code (Refer to the
table at the right.)
a
Solder composition
Solder composition code
Sn-Ag-Cu
a
Sn-Ag-Bi
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
b
Sn-Zn-Bi
z
Sn-In-Ag-Bi
i
Sn-Cu-Ni
n
Sn-Ag-Sb
s
Bi-Sn-Ag-P
Bi-Sn-Ag
p
(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD
When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting point of lead-free solder thread is about 40°C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the
exclusive-use soldering iron is recommendable.
(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK
©
Since the melting point of lead-freeCOPYRIGHT
solder is about 220°C, which
is about
40°C higher
than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering
XXXX
BYSHARP
CORPORATION
capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land
separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature
components.
Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when
ALLofRIGHTS
RESERVED.
completion of soldering is confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron
tip after completion of soldering work. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
in a retrieval
orfile
transmitted
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black stored
during soldering
work,system,
clean and
the tip within
steel wool or a fine filer.
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of the publisher.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish)
ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri – Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English)
Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturer’s instructions.
(Finnish)
VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French)
ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’ il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish)
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German)
Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien dürfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL
(For USA, CANADA)
“BATTERY DISPOSAL”
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.
“TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGÉES”
CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MÉMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANÈSE)
QUI DOIT ÊTRE TRAITÉE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MÉTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
COPYRIGHT © 2006 BY SHARP CORPORATION
All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.
Trademark acknowledgements
• Microsoft® Windows® operating system is a trademark or copyright of Microsoft
Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
• Windows® 95, Windows® 98, Windows® Me, Windows NT® 4.0, Windows® 2000,
Windows® XP, Windows® 2000 Server, Windows® Server 2003 and
Internet Explorer® are trademarks or copyrights of Microsoft Corporation in the
U.S.A. and other countries.
• IBM and PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
• Acrobat® Reader Copyright® 1987- 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights
reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATION
Digital Document System Group
CS Promotion Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2006 January Printed in Japan
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF
File Type Extension : pdf
MIME Type : application/pdf
PDF Version : 1.4
Linearized : Yes
Modify Date : 2006:01:13 02:38:29+09:00
Create Date : 2006:01:13 01:47:07Z
Page Count : 428
Creation Date : 2006:01:13 01:47:07Z
Mod Date : 2006:01:13 02:38:29+09:00
Producer : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows)
Author : ryo
Metadata Date : 2006:01:13 02:38:29+09:00
Creator : ryo
Title : D0200008.book
Page Mode : UseOutlines
Has XFA : No
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools
.